1. The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters: --
| Form. | Equivalent. | Name. | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Α | α | a | ἄλφα | Alpha |
| Β | β | b | βῆτα | Beta |
| Γ | γ | g | γάμμα | Gamma |
| Δ | δ | d | δέλτα | Delta |
| Ε | ε | e (short) | εἶ, ἒ ψϊλόν | Epsllon |
| Ζ | ζ | z | ζῆτα | Zeta |
| Η | η | e (long) | ἦτα | Eta |
| Θ | θ | th | θῆτα | Theta |
| Ι | ι | i | ἰῶτα | Iota |
| Κ | κ | k or hard c | κάππα | Kappa |
| Λ | λ | 1 | λά(μ)βδα | Lambda |
| Μ | μ | m | μῦ | Mu |
| Ν | ν | n | νῦ | Nu |
| Ξ | ξ | x | ξεῖ, ξῖ | Xi |
| Ο | ο | o (short) | οὖ, ὂ μῑκρόν | Omlcron |
| Π | π | p | πεῖ, πῖ | Pi |
| Ρ | ρ | r | ῥῶ | Rho |
| Σ | σ ς | s | σίγμα | Sigma |
| Τ | τ | t | ταῦ | Tau |
| Υ | ψ | (u) y | ὖ, ὖ ψῑλόν | Upsllon |
| Φ | φ | ph | φεῖ, φῖ | Phi |
| Χ | χ | kh | χεῖ, χῖ | Chi |
| Ψ | ψ | ps | ψεῖ, ψῖ | Psi |
| Ω | ω | o (long) | ὦ, ὦ μέγα | Omĕga |
N. At tje end of a word the form ς is used, elsewhere the form σ; thus, σύστασις.
|
8 |
8 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [3
3. N. Three letters belonging to the primitive Greek alphabet, Vau or Digamma (F), equivalent to V or W, Koppa (9), equivalent to Q, and Sampi (75), a form of Sigma, are nut in the ordinary written alphabet. They were used as numerals (38-4), Vau here having the form C, which is used also as an abbreviation of trr. Vau had not entirely disappeared in pronunciation when the Homeric poems were composed, and the metre of many verses in these is explained only by admitting its presence. Many forms also which seem irregular are explained only on the supposition that f has been omitted (see 269).
4. N. The Athenians of the best period used the names (f for epsilon, ov for omicron, !/ for upsilon, and & for omega; the present names for these letters being late. Some Greek grammarians used i tj/Wiv (plain c) and u fliv (plain u) to distinguish c ami u from ai and oi, which in their time had similar sounds.
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS
5. The vowels are a, e, •»?, <, o, w, and v. Of these, e and o are always short; rj and co are always long; a, i, and ii are long in some syllables and short iu others, whence the}' are called doubtful vowels.
6. N. A, c, rj, o, and tu from their pronunciation are called open vowels (a being the most open); i and v are called close vowels.
7 The diphthongs (&i-
8. N. Besides the genuine fi (-(+ 0 and 01/ (= 0 4 v) there are the so-called spunoux diphthongs ec and on, which arise from contraction ((1 from «, and ou from to, oc, or 00) or from compensative lengthening (30); as in ^ro/fi (for tnotce), X/yeiv (for Xeyeen, &05, 4), xpwroCs (for Xp6tr«oO, 0(h (for 8ivrt, 79), toO and tdw (190). In the fourth century B.C. these came to be written like genuine ei and ov ; but in earlier times they were written E and 0, even in inscriptions which used II and (I for c and 0. (See 27.)
9. N. The mark of diaeresis (5m(peais, separation), a double dot, written over a vowel, shows that this does not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel ; as in npoUpai (irpo-i^eu), to go forward, 'ATpctSijs, son of Atreus (in Homer).
10. N. In f, ;;, ifi, the 1 is now ■written and printed below the first vowel, and is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line; as in THI KQMfilAIAI, rf; «u»hjj!(i, and in 'fiixtro, yx'ro. Thi was written as au ordinary letter as long as it was pronounced,
|
9 |
!7] BREATHINGS.—CONSONANTS. 9
that is, until the first century B.C., after which it was sometimes written (always in the line) and sometimes omitted. Our iota subscript is not older than the twelfth century A.D.
BREATHINGS.
11. Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of a word has either the rouyh breathing (') or the smooth breathing ('). The rough breathing shows that the vowel is aspirated, i.e. that it is preceded by the sound h; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not aspirated. Thus 6pu>v, seeing, is pronounced horon; but opwv, of mountains, is pronounced bron.
12. N. A diphthong takes the breathing, like the accent (109), upon its second vowel. But «, 17, and w (10) have botli breathing and accent on the first vowel, even when the. t is written in the line. Thus o'^trot, ii
13. N. The rough breathing was once denoted by II. When this was taken to denote e (which (nice was not distinguished from «), balf of it } was used fur the. rough breathing; and afterwards the other half I was use.ri for the smooth breathing. From these fragments came the later signs ' and '.
14. N. In Attic words, initial v is always aspirated.
15. At the beginning of a word p is written p; as in pfrwp (Latin rhetor'), orator. In the middle of a word pp is sometimes written pp; as apprjTo*;, unspeakable; Tlvppo<;, Pyrrhua (pp = rrli).
CONSONANTS.
16. The simple consonants are divided into
labials, 7T, ft,
17. Before k, y, ^, or £, gamma (y) had a nasal sound, like that of n in anger or mi, and was represented by n in Latin ; as oyytXoy, (Latin angdus), messenger; ayKvpa, (ancora), anchor;
|
10 |
10 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AMD ACCENTS. [18
18. The double consonants are £, j/, £. H is composed of k and
19. By another classification, the consonants are divided into semivowels and mutes.
20. The semivowels are A, p., v, p, and a, with nasal y (17).
Of these . , ,. .,
X, /x, v, and p are liquids;
p., v, and nasal y (17) are nasals;
f of the older alphabet (3) is also a spirant.
21. The mutes are of three orders: —
smooth mutes it k t middle mutes j3 y 8 rough mutes
22. These mutes again correspond in the following classes:— ^.^ )nutes ^.mutes) w p $
palatal mutes («-mutes) k y x lingual mutes (r-mutes) t 8 9
23. N. Mutes of the same order are called co-ordinate; those of the same clans are called cognate.
24. N. The smooth and rough mutes, with c, £, and i^, are called surd (hushed sounds); the other consonants and the vowels are called sonant (xoundiny).
25. The only consonants which can end a Greek word are v, p, and s. If others are left at the end in forming words, they are dropped.
26. N. The only exceptions are «k and ovk (or ovx), which have other forms, i£ and ov. Final $ and i// (k
27. The Greek alphabet above described is the Ionic, used by the Asiatic lonians from a very early period, but first introduced officially at Athens in 403 B.C. The Athenians had previously used an alphabet which had no separate sipis for i, o, ks, or px. In this K was used for « and c and also fnr the spurious a (8); O for 0 and o and for spurious ou(8); H was still an aspirate (A); X2 stood for S, and
|
11 |
283
PKONUNCIATION.
BEI for $, — IIEMIIEN for irtunuv, — XPT20S for xpwrous, — TOTTO for both toOto and tovtov, — TOE IIPTTANE2 for tous irpu-rdvcis,— APX02I for ipxoucri, — AE020N for fcowuv, — HOIlOS for Sirws,— JIOIEN for voulv,—TPE2 for Tput,— AI1O TO
Ancient Pronunciation.1
28. 1. (Vowels.) The lung vowels a, 17, 7, and w were pronounced at tlit best period much like a in father, c in /e), i in machine, and o in £om. Originally u (out u in prune), but before the fourth century B.C. it had come to that of French u or German ■«. The short vowels had the same sounds as the long vowels, but, shortened or less prolonged: this is hard to express in English, as our short a, e, i, and >>, in pan, pen, pit, and pot, have sounds of a different nature from those of d, e, I, and 0, given above. We have an approach to a, e, i, and 0 in the second a in grand-father, French e in rial, i in verity, and 0 in monastic, renovate.
2. {Diphthongs.) We may assume that the diphthongs originally bad the sounds of their two vowels, pronounced as one syllable. Our at iu aisle, cu m feud, oi in oil, ni in qnit, will give some idea of at, iu, 01, and ui; and, ou in house of ou. Likewise the genuine «i must have been pronounced originally as ( + 1, somewhat like c.i in rein (cf. Horn. 'Arpeii5i)f, Attic 'Arpel&Tjs); and oi> was a compound < id="iv.i.p48.1">f 0 and u. But in the majority of cases ei and ok are written tor simple sounds, represented by the Athenians of tin; best period by E and 0 (see H and 27). We. do not know how these sounds were related to ordinary e and 0 on one side and to a and ou on the. other; but after the beginning of the fourth century B.C. they appear to have agreed substantially with a and 01/, since El and OT are written for both alike. In a the sound of 1 appears to have prevailed more and more, so that by the first century B.C. it had the sound of i. On the other hand, ou became (and still remains) a simple sound, like mi in i/imtli.
The diphthongs j, 9, and v were, probably always pronounced with the chief force on the first vowel, so that the 1 gradually disappeared (see 10). The rare v and ui< probably had the sounds of 1? and o> with an additional sound of v.
3. (Consonants) l'robably /S, 4 k, , m, ", r, and p were sounded as I), d, k, I, m, n, p, and r in English. Ordinary 7 was always hard, like g in represents vo, although the older Athenians felt an aspirate in both, as they wrote X" for $ and (per for f. The rough consonants 6, x, and
1 For practical remarks on pronunciation, see the Preface.
|
12 |
12 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [29
CHANGES OF VOWELS.
29. (Lengthening.) Short vowels are often lengthened in the formation and the inflection of words. Here the following changes generally take place: —
a becomes rj (d after e, i, or p)
t " -q, X becomes I,
O " W, V " V.
Thus Tl/idu) (stem tI/mi-), fut. tI/xi^-o-o) ; id-u>, fut. ca-a
30. (Compensative Lengthening.) 1. When one or more consonants are dropped for euphony (especially before o-), a preceding short vowel is very often lengthened to make up for the omission. Here
a becomes a, i becomes t,
£ " £1, V " V.
o " ov,
Thus /«'Xa9 for /ncAovs (78), tcrrds for loTavr? (79), ^ti's for (79), Sous for Sorrs, Avovo-t for Xvovrcn, eKplva for ixpivoa, SftKcO? for SeiKiaji/rs (79). Here « and on are the spurious diphthongs («).
2. In the first aorist of liquid verbs (072), a is lengthened to -q (or a) when
.31. (Strong and Weak Forms.) In some formations and inflections there is an interchange in the root of a, ot, and i, — of £u, (sometimes on,) and -u, — and of ij, (rarely
Thus AeiVo), Ae-Aoijr-a, £-At7r-ov;
TijK-io, r(-TrjK-a, t^raK-rjv', fyqy-wpx, tp-pa>y-a, (p-pa.y-t)v eXcv-cro/xal
(74), c'A-7;Aou^-a, tfXvOov (see (p^OfMi); so o-rrtvS-ui, hasten, and
'ottouS-^, haste; dp^yu), help, and apwyos, helping. Compare English
smite, smote, smit (srnitten). (See 572.)
32. An interchange of the short vowels 5, e, and o takes place in certain forms; as in the tenses of Tpcn-w, TtVpo^-a, i-rp&ir-rjv, and in the noun TpoV-os, from stem rp«r-. (See 643, 645, and 831.)
|
13 |
88] EUPHONY OF VOWELS.— CONTRACTION. 13
33. (Exchange of Quantity.) An exchange of quantity sometimes takes place between a long vowel and a succeeding short one; as in epic vrio's, temple, and Attic vtuii ; epic fla
EUPHONY OF VOWELS.
Collision of Vowels. — Hiatus.
34. A succession of two vowel sounds, not forming a diphthong, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In the middle of a word this could be avoided by contraction (35-41). Between two words, where it is called hiatus, it could be avoided by crasis (42-46), by elision (48-54) or aphaeresis (55), or by adding a movable consonant (5G-C3) to the former word.
Contraction op Vowels.
35. Two successive vowels, or a vowel and a diphthong, may be united by contraction in a single long vowel or a diphthong;
36. The regular use of contraction is one of the characteristics of the Attic dialect. It follows these general principles: —
37. I. Two vowels which can form a diphthong (7) simply unite in one syllable; as rtCxi-'i, rtiyti; yipa-'i, yipai.;
38. II. When the two vowels cannot form a diphthong, —
1. Two like vowels (i.e. two a-sounds, two e-sounds, or two o-sounds, without regard to quantity) unite to form the common long (a, rj, or a>). But « gives a (8), and oo gives ov (8). E.g.
Mvaa, fiva (184);
|
14 |
14 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [39
2. When an o-sound precedes or follows an a- or an e-sound, the two become
j Tlfxuifuv; — but voc, you; •ytVtos,
3. When an a-sound precedes or follows an e-sound, the first (in order) prevails, and we have a or 77. E.g.
'E-ri'/xae, «t£/xu; tIimlt]tc, tI/xStc ; Tti'^ea, TiixV > 'E/)/xf'ds, Ep/ajt.
4. A vowel disappears by absorption before a diphthong beginning with the same vowel, and c is always absorbed before ot. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diphthong is contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong; and a following i remains as iota subscript, but a following v disappears. E.g.
Mratti, /ivcu; fivaa, fi.va
39. Exceptions. 1. In contracts of the first and second declensions, every short vowel before a, or before a long vowel or a diphthong, is absorbed. But in the singular of the first declension ea is contracted regularly to rj (after a vowel or fi, to a). (See 181.)
2. In the third declension ea becomes a after t, and u or 77 after ioru. (See 22y, 267, and 315.)
3. In the second person singular of the passive and middle, cat (for to-cu) gives the common Attic form in « as well as the regular contract form in 17; as itai, Xiy or Avi«. (See 5C5, 0.)
4. In verbs in oco, o« gives ot, as StjAocis, S77A01S; 01 is found also in the subjunctive for otj, as St/Ao^, S77A01.
5. The spurious diphthong cake. Thus infinitives in auv and oav lose 1 in the contracted forms; as rifuxciv, Ti/xav; SijAdtiv, 877A01V. (See 701.)
40. J. The close vowel 1 is contracted with a following t in the Ionic dative singular of nouns in is (see 255) ; and v is contracted with 1 or { in a few forms of nouns in u? (see "257 and 258).
2. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the tliird declension, contraction is confined to certain cases; see 220-203. For exceptions in the contraction of verbs, see 406 and 497. See dialectic forms of verbs in aw, eu>, and oa, in 784-780.
|
15 |
42] CONTRACTION.—CRASIS.
41. Table of Contractions.
15
a 4- a = u y£Paa» 7(Pa
a 4- ai =r at p.vajxi, /xpai
a 4- a = ',i /^au, P-1"*
a 4" C — a tTifMlC, €7*1/1(1
a + " — rifii'm, Ti/a<«; t
or a Ti/xaf (30, 5)
a + 7/ == u Tip-drjTt, TtfiaTe
a 4" 77 = 'I TLfXatJ, TLp.il
a 4" ' = ut ytput, ycpat
a 4" t == (,* ypa-iOiov, yptloiov
a 4" o = « Tip.dop.ci', Tip.Cip.(i'
a 4-oi = u)
a 4" ou = u)
a 4" w == w Tl/Xtta>, TipxiJ
e 4- a = 77 y^Vcu, y
or il "~_ ] (30,1)
e 4- ai = j; Avcui, AuT);
or ai ^pwra? (30, 1 and 3)
£ 4* * — €t f*
£ 4- £t -■= a
|
£ |
—f- 0) ^^ |
0) |
00"T£<0, 0OT0 id="iv.i.p125.1"> |
|
|
4-«» = |
?/ |
Xirjai, Xvrj |
|
|
4-c = |
|
Tip.TijtVTL, Tip.fjVTl |
|
|
4-« = |
|
rlpijeis, rifif/i; (30, 5} |
|
|
4- <« = |
V |
/l(fJ.V7]Ot'flT])', /J.f/XllU>- |
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
|
i |
Xi'ios, Xc«s |
|
0 |
4-a = |
aj |
aiooa, utouj J u7rAoa, |
|
|
or |
a |
aVAa (30, 1) |
|
0 |
+ (U = |
at |
oirAdai, (IttAoT |
|
0 |
+ t = |
ov |
vo'c, >/ou |
|
o |
l_ ___ |
01 |
StiAoci, StiAoi (30, 4); |
|
|
or |
01) |
SriAo'eii', 87/A0D1/ (30, |
|
|
|
|
5) |
|
0 |
4-t; = |
|
OtJA.OTJT(, O77a0JT£ |
|
o |
+»= |
Ul |
oO' ^t" '' oioor)9, Olou?; aTrAoy, |
|
|
or |
7} |
aTrXfj (30, 1) |
|
0 |
4-1 = |
01 |
7T£l0dl, TK.I&OL |
|
0 |
4-0 = |
ou |
VOOSf VOVS |
|
0 |
4-oi = |
01 |
877A001, oriAot |
|
0 |
4- ou = |
ou |
8t)A»ov, 877A0D |
|
0 |
4-ai = |
|
871A0W, 8t?Au) |
|
0 |
|
U) |
QirAo'a), aTrAw |
|
|
Rarely |
|
following: — |
|
<1) |
4-a = |
|
|
|
w |
+ « = |
w |
r}p |
|
|
4-t — i ^ — |
w |
|
|
ID 4" O = |
w |
(TWOS. O"U)S |
|
£ +27 = 27
(+1 = tl Tty(ti, Tti^tt
£ 4" o = ou ytVeos, ytVou?
e 4- 01 = 01 i^iAc'cu, <^ id="iv.i.p237.1">iAoi
£ 4- ou = ou
Chasis.
42. A vowel or diphthong at the end of a word may be contracted with one at the beginning of thp. following word. This occurs especially in poetry, and is nailed crasis (k/dSo-i;, mixture). The coronis (') is placed over the contracted syllable. The first of the two words is generally an article, a. relative (o or a), Km', Tj-po, or
|
16 |
16 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [43
43. Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction, with these modifications: —
1. A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last vowel before crasis takes place.
2. The article loses its final vowel or diphthong in crasis before a; the particle toC drops oi before a; and W drops at before all vowels and diphthongs except t and «. But we have k(1 and kcJs for ko.1 « and k
44. The following are examples of crasis: —
To ovofM, TovvOfjxi; ra ayaOd, rayadd; to ivavriov, roivavriov; 6 (x, owe; 6 iiri, ovvl; to ifMTiov, ^oyiaTiov (lM) ; a av, av; «at av, k&v; Kiu. lira, kutu; — 6 avrjp, Svi?p; oi aS(X
45. N. If the first, word is an article or relative witli the rough breathing, this bre.itlii ig- is retained on the contracted syllable, taking the place of lli« coronis; as in S.v, avrjp-
46. Nr. In crasis, tripos, other, takes tin; form arcpo?,— whence oVrepos (for 6 tTtpos), 6a.Ttpov (for row hepov), 6s.Ti.pto,etc. (43,2; 93).
Synizksir.
47. 1. In poetry, two successive vowels, not. forming a diplithong, are sonietimps united in pronunciation for the sake of the metre, although no contraction appears in writing. This is called synizexis (u-vv%t)
2. Synizesis may also take the place of crasis (42), when the first word cuds in a Ions vowi-1 nr a
Elision.
48. A short final vowel may be dropped when the next word begins with a vowel. This is called elision. An apostrophe (') marks the omission. E.g.
|
17 |
ELISION AND APHAERESIS. 17
At' f'/W" for &a t/iou; avr (kcivt)'; for an-l txaVjjs ; At'-yoi/i* av for Xiyoifii av; aAX* ei#Js for aXXa ti#u's ; or' avdpunrta for €7ri av9pu>n
4:9. Elision is especially frequent in ordinary prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs; but it may also be used with short vowels at the end of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs.
60. Klision never occurs in
(a) the prepositions ntpt and irpo, except irtpiwi Aeolic (rarely before i in Attic),
(b) the conjunction on,
(c) monosyllables, except those ending in «,
(d) the dative singular in i of the third declension and the dative plural in
(«) words ending in v.
51. N. The epie and comic poets sometimes elide cu in the verbal endings fun, out, t
52. N. Klision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers (as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use.
53. (Apocope.) The poets sometimes cut off a short vowel before a consonant. Thus in Homer we find fiv, k&t, and wip, for avd, koto, and irapri. Both in composition and alone, tar assimilates its t to a following consonant and drops it before two consonants, and v in dc is subject to the changes of 78; as «(i(3/3aXc and Ka.Kra.ve, for xar^aXt and KcnVKTafc, —but KaT$avuv for KaraSafuu ((18, 1), /tax Kopv(f>-f)v, Karf ydvUi Kair ntdlov; dM-^ttXXw, dX-X^^at, d/x rrfdiov, dfi
54. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it comes before a vowel in fov:nhi£ a compound word. Here no apostrophe is used. E.g.
'An-aiT(h) (euro and atWw). Si-t'/iaAov (Sid and ifjaXov). So a
Al'IfAKIlKSIS.
55. In poetry, a short vowel at the beginning of a word is sometimes dropped after a long vowel or a diphthong, especially after py, not, and rj. or. This is called aphneresix (ajtaiptcris, inking off). Thus, fir) 'yw for ^ iya>; irov'aTiv for ttov to;
Movaiji.k Consonants.
56. Most, words ending in -
|
18 |
18 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [57
when the next word begins with a vowel. This is called v movable. E.g.
Ha
57. N. 'Ectti takes v movable, like third persons in
58. N. The third person singular of the pluperfect active in -« has v movable; as rjSti(v), he hiew. But. contracted imperfects in -« (for -«), as i
59. N". The epic kc (for dv) is generally kw liefore a vowel, and the poc;tic vvv (enclitic) has an epic form vv. Many adverbs in -Ocv (as Trp6cr6tv) have poetic forms in -&(..
60. N. N movable may be added at the end of a sentence or of a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in poetry, to make position (99).
61. N. Words which may have? movable are not elided in prose, except «
62. Ov, not, becomes ovk before a smooth vowel, and oi^ before a rough vowel; as ov 6iw, ov< cu'to'?, oi>x ovtos. My inserts k in /mtjk-c'ti, no longer, by the analogy of owc-m.
63. Outo)?, thus, l£ (cks), from, and some other words may drop s beiore a consonant; as outws c^ti, ovto> Soku, e^dortws, Ik woXtu)?.
METATHESIS AND SYNCOPE.
64. 1. Metathesis is the transposition of a short vowel and a liquid in a word; as in Kparos and xapTos, strength; Odpvos and Opdvos, courage.
2. The vowel is often lengthened; as in /H-fik-q-Ka (from stem /3aA-), Te-T/xrj-Ka (from sleni rtfx-). 6pu>-
• 65. Syncope is the dropping of a short vowel between two consonants; as in 7raTfpo?, 7rarpo? (274); irTricrojxai for TTCTrjcro/xai (050).
66. N. (a) When p. is brought before p or X by syncope or metathesis, it is strengthened by inserting (i ; as p.€frrjp.j3pLd, midday, for fu
|
19 |
72j CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 19
as in /3/jotos, mortal, from stem flop-, p,po- (cf. Lat. morior, die), uRp(yrK, flporos (but the fj. appears in composition, as in 5.-p.jip
67. N. So 8 is inserted after v in the oblique cases of
man (277), when the v is brought by syucope before p; as dvipo's (av-pcxi), ivSpdi-
CHAN&ES OP CONSONANTS.
Doubling of Consonants.
68. 1. A rough mute (21) is never doubled; but ir<£, k, and t0 are always written for
BctKYOS, KaTPavfii/, llOt 24U.(j>
Latin, Sappho, Bacchus.
2. A middle mute is never doubled in Attic Greek. In yy the first y is always nasal (17).
3. The later Attic has rr for the earlier va in certain
forms; as Trpirroi for Trpaa-aw, eXirrav for ia
for tfaAcura-a. Also rr (not for era-) and even tO occur in'a few other words; as 'Attikos, 'Arfe, *4Wi'c. See also 72.
69. Initial p is doubled when a vowel precedes it in forming a compound word; as in avappiirru) (avd and pnrrw). So after the syllabic augment; as in cppZu-rov(imperfect of pur-no). But after a diphthong it remains single; as in ivpoo':, ivpovs.
Euphonic Chakcls op Consonants.
70. The following rules (71-95)apply chiefly to changes made in the h'nal consonant of astern in adding the endings, especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of verbs and cases of nouns, and to those made in forming compounds: —
71. (Mutes before other Mutes.) Before a r-inute (22), a w-inut.e. or a x-niute is made coordinate (23), and another T-mute becomes a. E.g.
TfTplirrai (for TtrpZ/2-Tcu), St'Stxrai (for SeSex-rai), •n-Af^^Jvai (for TrX(K.-di)vai.), i(L
(lO-Tc), XOP'tCTtpO? (X1p'""-T«po?).
72. N. "Ek, /mm, iii composition retains k unchanged; as in it), tV-Spo/xi;,
|
20 |
20 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [73
73. N. No combinations of different mutes, except those included in 63 and in 71 (those in which the second is t, 8, or 0), are allowed in Greek. When any such arise, the first mute is dropped; as in ircVctica (for ir«m0-Ku). When y stands before k, y, or %, as in
74. (Mutes before 2.) No mute can stand before
Tpiipta (for Tplfi-crw), ypdiput (for ypa
75. (Mutes before M.) Before ^, a ir-mute becomes /*, and a K-mute becomes y. £.51.
AiXufifuxi (for Ae«7r-/iai), TiTplfifixii (for rcrplfi-fuii), yiypafxfmi (for ycypa
76. N. But «k can stand when they come together by metathesis (64) ; as in ni-Km-ica. (KdM-*u>). Both < and x m"-i' stand before n in the formation of nouns ; as in d*/i>J, edge, dx/iup, anvil, aix^, spear-point, Spaxnv, drachma.
'Ex here also remains unchanged, as in iK-iMvSdvu (cf. 72).
77. N. When 77M or mmm would thus arise, they are shortened to
as lh/xu, i^yi^ey-^ai (for iXyXfyx-fJ-aih AijXe77-Ma')> fa^irTw, (for x«a/x7r-^ai, KtKann-)i.at) ; W/«rw, ir^ireMM*' (f°r Jrejr«/ijr-/ioi, (See 480, 3.)
78. (N be/ore oMer Consonants.) 1. Before a 7r-mute v becomes /x; before a K-mute it becomes nasal y (17); before a T-mute it is unchanged. E.g.
'EfiniTTTui (for eV-irnrTu)),
2. Before another liquid 1/ is changed to that liquid. E.g.
EAAetVw ( for ci'-ActTroj), ffifjLfvbi (fo/- fv-fievw'),
3. N before
M«'Xds (for /ieXav-s), tl? (for tvs). k'nven (for Xuo-vo-i): see 210,2; 550, 5. So Xuoucra (for XuocT-ia, XOov-ca), XD^tiCTa (for kvOivr-ia, Xu^£i/-cra), 7ra(Ta (for iravT-ia, 7rdv-aa) : see 84, 2.
79. The combinations it, vS, v#, when they occur before
|
21 |
84] EUPHONIC CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 21
a in inflections, are always dropped, and the preceding vowel is lengthened, as above (78, 3). E.g.
Ua
For nominatives in aw (fur ovt-), see 20!), 3 (cf. 212, 1).
80. N. N standing alone before
81. N. The preposition tv is not changed before p or u; as
p
becomes otjct- before a and a vowel, but vv- before a and a consonant or before £; as awr-aiTOs, cru-aT7;/ia,
82. N. llav and iraXiv may retain v in composition before
83. Most verbs in yu> have
84. (Changes before i.) The following changes occur when i (representing an original j) follows the final consonant of a stem.
1. Palatals («, y, x) a"d sometimes t and 9 with such an i become
Thus is formed the feminine in tacra. of adjectives in en, from a stem in it-, ct-ici becoming ccrcra (3:51, 2).
2. Nt with this i becomes vtr in the feminine of participles and adjectives (li'il, 2; 337, 1), in which v is regularly dropped with lengthening of the preceding vowel (7H, !J); as iravr; -navr-un, vdi/aa (Thessalian and Cretan), 7rurra; vovt-, Xvovt-ui, Xuov-aa, Xiovcra.
3. A (sometimes y or yy) with t forms £; as
4. A with t forms AA.; as crt'AA-w (<7-r«A-), for o-reA-i-w; oAAo'/mc (dA-), leap, for aA-i-o/uu (cf. Lat. salio); dAAos, oiAct-, for dA-i-o? (cf. Lat. a/ius). (See 593.)
5. After av or ap the t is transposed, and is then contracted with a to at; as
); [LtKuiva (fitav-), fern, of fAt'Acis (826), for i*xavi-a.
|
22 |
22 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [85
0. After tv, ep, iv, ip, vv, or vp, the t disappears, and the preceding £, t, or vi is lengthened (t to a); as niv-ui (nv-), for rcv-i-to; Xiipw (stem xe/>-), 'fwse, for ^-n*; Kup-m (xcp), for xep-i-w; Kplvut (xpcv-), for Kpcy-t-aj; oiKT'ipio (otKTtp-), for oiKTip-t-u); a/xiv(u (d/iui/-), for d/xui'-t-w;
85. (Omission of 2 ami /".) Many forms are explained by the. omission of an original spirant (,v or f), which is seen sometimes in earlier forms in Greek and sometimes in kindred languages.
86. (2.) At the beginning of a word, an original s sometimes appears as the rough breathing. E.g.
"lo-nj/xi, place, for oujT-qixi, Lat. sixtu; rjfutrw;, half, cf. Lat. sevii-; t£o/wu, sit (from root 18- ciB-), Lat. sed-eo; iwrd, seven, Lat. seplem.
87. N. In some, words both
88. In some inflections, a is dropped between two vowels.
1. Thus, in stems of nouns,
2. The middle endings om and cro ofte.n droj) a (5<)5, 0); as Xvc-crai, 6c-ai, irj or At5«t (.')!;, 3 ); e-v(-ao. eveo, iiov; but o- is retained in such fju- forms as Tcrm-crm and "crra-cro. (See also 004.)
89. In the first aorist active and middle of liquid verbs, a is generally dropped before a or ap-qv; as
90. (/■.) Some of the cases in which the omission of vau (or digamma) appears in inflections are these: —
1. In the augment of certain verbs ; as 2 aor. tl&ov, saw, from root fi8- (Lat. vid-co), for l-pi&ov, i-iSov, elSov: see also the examples in 539.
2. In verbs in ew of the Second Glass (574), where, ev became cp and finally t; as pt'-cj, flow (stem ptv-, ptf-), fut. pev-cro-/Mii. See also 601.
3. In certain nouns of the third declension, where final v of the stem becomes f, which is dropped; as vaCs (vav-), gen. vdos for vdv-os, va/r-os (260) ; see /JuoaAtus (205). See also 256.
81. The Aeolic and Doric retained p long after it disappeared in Ionic and Attic. The following are a few of the many words in which its former presence is known : —
|
23 |
95] KUPH0N1C CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 23
flovs, ox (Lat. bov-is), tap, spring (Lat. ver), o?os, divine (divus), Ipyov, work (Germ, tverk),
92. (Changes in Aspirates.) When a smooth mute (ir, k, t) is brought before a rough vowel (either by elision or in forming a compound), it is itself made rough. E.g.
'h
93. X. So in crasis (see examples in 44). Here the rough breat.hiiig may affect even a consonant not immediately preceding it; as in
94. N. The Ionic generally does not observe this principle in ■writing, but lias (for example) inr' oJ, amrj/u (from ajro and ir)fu).
95. The Greeks generally avoided two rough consonants in successive syllables. Thus
1. In reduplications (521) an initial rough mute is always made smooth. E.g.
ll(
2. The ending 8i of the first aorist imperative passive becomes n after Or)- of the tense stem (757,1). E.g.
A!6r)Ti (for An&T-ft),
3. In the aorist passive iriOrjV from ti$7)/u (9e- and in irvOrjv from 0vw ($v-) $e and 6v becouift ti and ru before drjv.
4. A similar change occurs in d/iir-t'xu) (for d^^-fX01) an(l «/A"'-«rx
•r>. Tliere is a transfer of the aspirate in a few verbs which are supposed to have had originally two rough consonants in the stem; as Tp€
|
24 |
24 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [96
the first aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost by any euphonic change.
In some forms of these verbs both rough consonants appear; as (-Op(
SYLLABLES.
96. A Greek word has as many syllables as it has separate vowels or diphthongs. The syllable next to the last is called the penult (paen-ultima, almost last); the one before the penult is called the antepenult.
97. The following rules, based on ancient tradition, are now generally observed in dividing syllables at the end of a line: —
1. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin a word (which may be seen from the Lexicon), and mutes followed by p. or i/, are placed at the beginning of a syllable. Other combinations of consonants are divided. Thus, e-X"*' <-y«i id="iv.i.p379.1">, 1-criri-pa, vt'-KTap, a-K/xrj, ot-crp.6<;, /u-iepov, Trpu-y/ttj-TOS, irpaa-aui, i.-irk, tv-Sor, up/«L-Ta.
2. Compound words are divided into their original parts; but when the final vowel of a preposition has been elided in composition, the compound is sometimes divided like a simple word: thus irpocr-a-yw (from irpos and ayu>); but ira-pa-yu or wa.p-a.yui (from irapo. and ayia).
Qi:antitv or Svr.i.Aiir.ES.
98. A syllable is long by nature (<£iW<) when it has a l«ng vowel or a diphthong; as in tZ/xt;, kt€lpu>.
99. 1. A syllable is long by position (0e'
2. The length of the vowel itself is not affected by position. Thus a was sounded as long in irpacro-u), 7rpay/xa, and 7rpa£n, but as short in racrcra), rdy/jM, and Ta$is.
!i. One or both of the consonants which malic position may Vie in the next word; thus the second syllable in oJ-rck
100. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a mute and a liquid, the syllable is common (i.e. it may be either long or short) ; as in reicvov, vttvos, v/3pi<;. But in Attic poetry such a syllable is generally short; in other poetry it is generally long.
|
25 |
106] QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. —ACCENT. 25
101. N. A middle mute (ft, y, S) before p or v, and generally before A, lengthens a preceding vowel; as in dyi/ws, fti.fiX.iov, Sdy/Aa.
102. N. To allow a preceding vowel to be short, the mute and tbe liquid must be in the same word, or in the same part of a compound. Thus t in e« is long when a liquid follows, either in composition or in the next word; as ixXiyw, eV vctov (both__w__).
103. The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once. Thus r) and co and all diphthongs are long by nafcuro ; t and o are short by nature. (See 5.)
104. When a, t, and v are not long by position, their quantity must generally be learned by observing the usage of poets or from the Lexicon. But it is to be remembered that
1. Every vowel arising from contraction or eras is is long; as a ill yt'pa (for ycfjaa), ukuiv (for dt'xw), and xdi' (for Kal di').
2. The endings a? and us are long when v or vr has been dropped before o- (79).
3. The accent often shows the quantity of its own vowel, or of vowels in following syllables.
Thus the circumflex on Kvlcra, savor, shows that i is long and a is short; the acute on x^P"' ''""A shows that a is long; on tiWs; who? that i is short; the acute on ftacnXui, khu/dmn, shows that the final a is long, on ftuviXaa, qucun, that h'nal a is short. (See 10(5, 3; 111; 112.)
105. The quantity of the terminations of nouns and verbs will be stated below in the proper places.
ACCENT.
GeNKHAI. PlilNCJI'LEo
106. 1. There are three accents,
the acute ('), as 709, auTtk,
the grave ('), as avrhs e
the circumflex (" or ~), as toOto, rl^wv.
2. The acute can stand only on one of the last three syllables of a word, the circumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only on the last.
3. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by nature.
|
26 |
26 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [107
107. 1. The Greek accent was not simply a stress accent (like ours), but it raised the musical pitch or tone (to^oj) of the syllable on which it fell. This appears in the terms t^oi and irpooydla, which designated the accent, and also inci^t, sharp, and jSaptn, grave, flat, which described it. (See 111), 1 and 3.) As the language declined, the musical accent gradually changed to a stress accent, which is now its only represen ■ tative in Greek as in other languages.
2. The marks of accent wen: invented by Aristophanes of JSyzau-tiuin, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B.C., in order to teach foreigners the correct accent in pruuuuiicing Greek. By the ancient theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was said to have the grave; accent; and the circumflex, originally formed thus " ^, was said to result from the union of an acute and a following grave.
108. N. The grave accent is written only in place of tin; acute in the case mentioned in 115, 1, and occasionally on the indefinite pronoun rh, rl (418).
109. N. The accent (like the breathing) stands on the second vowel of a diphthong (12); as in alpui, /xovaa, tovs airrow- But in the improper diphthongs (a, y, w) it stands on the first vowel even when the t is written in the line; as in Ti/xrJ, ci7rXu), riii (uj),'$}i£u
110. 1. A word is called oxytone (o£u'-roi>o?, sharp-toned) when it has the acute on the last syllable, as paroxytone, when it has the acute on the penult, as propar oxytone, when it lias the acute on the antepenult, as /3aai.X.tvovTO<:.
2. A word is called perispomenon {-Kipia^w^tvov) when it has the circumflex on the last syllable, as ikSitv; properix-pomenon, when it has the circumflex on the penult, as /xowa.
3. A word is called barytone (ftapv-Tovo<;, grave or flat-toned) when its last syllable has no accent (107, 2). Of course, all paroxytoues, proparoxytones, and properispo-mena are at the same time barytones.
4. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible (111), it is said to have recessive accent. This is especially ttie case with verbs (J30). (Sec; 122.).
111. The antepenult, if accented, takes the acute. Hut it can have no accent if the hist syllable is long by nature or ends in f or -^; a.s Tree/cu
112. An accented penult is circuinfiexed when it is long by nature while the last syllable is short by nature;
|
27 |
117J PRINCIPLES OF ACCENT. 27
as fifjov, vrjaos, r)i%. Otherwise it takes the acute; as Xuyo<;, tovtcov.
113. N. Final at and oi are counted as short in determining the accent; as avdpunroi, vffcroL'. except in the optative, and in o'koi, at Aowie; as Ti/iijtrut, iroirjaoi (not Tifurjcrai or ttoi'tjctoi) .
114. N. Genitives in «ws and ewe from nouns in it and us of the third declension ("251), all cases of nouns and adjectives in us and w» of the. Attic second declension (108), and the Ionic genitive in em of the first (188,3), allow the acute on the antepenult; as evyeus, iri us, Tii/iew (1'ots). So some compound adjectives in ws; as tyt-ncpus, hii/h-horned. For the acute of uairep, oi'Se, etc., sec 146.
115. 1. An oxytonc changes its acute to the grave before other words in the same sentence; as tov<; irovq-poi"; avdprnnovs; (for tov<; irovrjpovs av&pcoTrovt;).
2. Tliis change is not made before enclitics (143) nor before an elided syllable (IS), nor in the interrogative rk, ri (418). It is not made before a colon: before a comma modern usage differs, and the tradition is uncertain.
116. {Anastrojrfie.) Dissyllabic prepositions (regularly oxytono.) throw the accent back ou the penult in two cases. Tins is called anustrophe (aVaorpo^jj, turning back). It occurs
1. When such a preposition follows its case; as in Toxnwnipi (for Trcpl tovtwv), about these.
This occurs in prose only with 7re.pi, but in the poets with all the dissyllabic prepositions except ava, 8td, d/x<£t', and avri In Homer it occurs also when a preposition follows a verb from which it is separated by tnwsis; as oAfVa9 ano, having destroyed.
2. When a preposition stands for itself compounded with early; as Trapa for trapcoTiv, ivi for ivcoriv {ivC being poetic for
Accent or Contracted Syllables and Elided Wokds.
117. A contracted syllable is accented if either of the original syllables had an accent. A contracted penult or antepenult is accented regularly (111; 112). A contracted final syllable is circumflexed; but if the original word was oxytone, the acute is retained. E.g.
Tifxutfxevo^ from t^uclo/acvos, <£i«u"£ from <^ id="iv.i.p428.1">iAc£t£,
|
28 |
28 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [118
This proceeds from the ancient principle that the circumflex comes from ' + ' (107, 2), never from * + '; so that ti/wioj gives ti/wo, but $e/3aws gives ficjiux;.
118. N. If neither of the original syllables had an accent, the contracted form is accented without regard to the contraction; as Ttjtta for rifi/xt, ivvoi for ivvool.
Some exceptions to the rule of 117 will be noticed under the declensions. (See 203; 311.)
119. In crasis, the accent of the first word is lost and that of the second remains; as rayaOd for to ayaOd, i-yuSa for iyu> olSa, Kara for teal cha; -rdAAa for to. aAAa; rapa for toi apa.
120. In elision, oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent with the elided vowel; other oxytones throw th« accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to the grave (115, 1). E.g.
'Ett' airu) for r]fu iyo), KOK twrj for Ka«a iw7].
ACCENT OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.
121. 1. The place of the accent in the nominative singular of a noun (and the nominative singular masculine of au adjective) must generally be learned by observation. The other forms accent the same syllable, as this nominative, if the last syllable permits (111); otherwise the following syllable. E.g.
aXdcKrm, 6daa
K0paK(<;, KopaKuiv', irpayna, irpay/iaTOi, vpay/xajiav; ooovs,
68oCcrii/. So ^aputs, ^apuao-a, xapUv, gen. apUvroi, etc.; a£ios, Aftd, a^iov, a^ioi, d£iai, a£ux.
2. The kind of accent is determined as usual (111; 112); as v^cro?, vyaov, vrjerov, t^crot, vqcoK. (See also 123; 124.)
122. N. The following nouns and adjectives have recessive accent
(110,4): —
(o) Contracted compound adjectives in oot (203, 2): (*) Tbe neuter singular and vocative singular of adjectives in uv, ov (except those in
(c) Many barytone compounds in ys in all forms; as airipKift, aurapMS, gen. pi. auripKuv; 0iXaXij07)s, ^iXdXijSts (but i ]6-fis, dXjjWj); this includes vocatives like Zciicparts, AijM<5
|
29 |
!31] ACCENT OK NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, AKD VERBS. 29
(d) The vocative of^ syncopated nouns in rip (273), of compound proper names in w, as ' Aya/icum?, hirbiu&ov (except AaKtSaltutv), and of 'AiriXXwv, lloauSCbv (Horn. Moaa.id.uiv), ou-r-fip, saviour, and (Horn.)
, brother-in-law,—voc. 'AiroXXoi', Wbatibov (How. Uoacl&aov),
p, iaep (see 221, 2).
123. The last syllable of the genitive and dative of oxy-toues of the first and second declensions is circumflexed. E.g.
TifH-iji, rlflrj, Tl/Miy, TlfAfJJV, TlfUUi ', 6lOV, 8e, OtSlV, dtOlS-
124. In the first declension, wof the genitive plural (for iuiv) is circumflexed (170). But the feminine of adjectives and participles in 05 is spelt and accented like the masculine and neuter. E.g.
Aikwv, $o£C>v (from Slktj, Sofa), ttoXItuiv (from TroXtrrjs); but aiiu>v, yop.lvu>v (fern. gen. j.ilur. of aitot, Ktyofitvos, 302). For the genilive plural of other adjectives and participles, see 318.
125. N. The genitive and dative of the Attic second declension (198) are exceptions; as yews, gen. vcu>, dat. v«£.
126. N. Three nouns of the first declension are paroxytone in the genitive plural: acj>vr), anchovy, a
127. Most monosyllables of the third declension accent the last syllable in the genitive and dative of all numbers: here oiv and ow are circumflexed. E.g.
©1J9, servant, OqTOs, 6t)t{, OrjTolv, 6tjt£>v, OrjaC.
128. N. Aa's, torch, 8/iok, slave, ous, ear, irais, child, Tpuis, Tmjan, <^ios, light, and a few others, violate the last rule in the genitive dual and plural; so iras, all, in both genitive and dative plural: as irais, TraiSos, 7rai8t, Trawl, but iraiSuiv; ?ras, Travros, iravrl, iravriav, Tract.
129. N. The interrogative ti's, tiVos, tIvl, etc., always accents the first syllable. So do all monosyllabic participles; as Zv, ekros, ovtl, ovtwv, oroi; /?cU, 3
ACCENT OF VERBS.
130. Verbs generally have recessive accent (110, 4);
as ftovktvu), /JovA.cv'o/xci', ftovkevovcnv; tra.pi)(tii, Trapeze; iiroSorc; ftovXtvovrai, ftovXcuaai (aor. opt. act.), but
(aor. imper. mid.). See 113.
131. The chief exceptions to this principle are these : —
|
30 |
30 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [132
1. The second aorist active infinitive in uv ami the second aorist middle imperative in ov are perispomena: as Aa/Jtiv, (X6dv, Xxwiiv, XiTToC, Aa/Jov. For compounds like ko.to.-0ov, see 133, 3.
2. These second aorist imperatives active are oxytone: tlirt, iX.de, tvp(, XafJt. So ISc in the sense behold! But their compounds are regular; as air-a-rc.
3. Many contracted optatives ot the /ii-inflection regularly circumflex the penult; as uttcuto, 8t8oi
4. The following forms accent the penult: Uw first aorist active infinitive, the second aorist middle infinitive (except Trpiacrdai and ovacrOun, 798), the perfect middle and passive infinitive anil participle, and all infinitives in vfitv (except those in /urai). Thus, fiovXivaai, ycviaOcu, XtXvaOai, AeAv/ieVos, toravat, otoovai, fvKivai, So/xev and Bofitvat (both epic for Sovvai).
5. The following participles are oxytone: the second aorist active; and all of the third declension in -9, except the first aorist active. Thus, lwu>v, Aura's, SiSou's, bciKvis, X(.vku>'s, icttus (pres.); but Xuo-ds and
So w, present participle of cl/jx, go.
132. Compound verbs have recessive accent like simple verbs; as CTwei/^i (from
133. But there are these exceptions to 132: —
1. The accent cannot go further back than the augment or reduplication ; as Trap-iix°v O10' Tap«xoi'), / provided, irap-rjv (not irdprjv), he was present, a
So -vhen the augment falls on a long vowel or a diphthong which is not changed by it; as vir-tiKt (imperfect), he was yielding; but vir-tixc (imperative), yield !
2. Compounds of So?, ??, 8U, and o-^'j arc paroxytone; as d7ro8o9, iropdo^cs (not aTroSos, etc.).
3. Monosyllabic second aorist middle imperatives in -ov have recessive accent when compounded with a dissyllabic preposition; as ko.to.-6ov, put down, diro-Sov, sell: otlierwi.se they circumflex the ov (131, 1) ; as ty-Oov, p'ti in.
134. N. Participles in their inflection are accented as adjectives (121), not as verbs. Thus, flovXtvwv has in the neuter fiovXtvov (not fiovXivov)
135. For the accent of optatives in at and ot, see 113. Some other exceptions to 130 occur, especially in poetic forms.
|
31 |
ki] PROCLITICS AND ENCLITICS. 31
PROCLITICS.
136. Some monosyllables have no accent and are closely attached to the following word. These are called proclitics (from TTpoKkUoi, I'Uii forward).
137. The proclitics are the articles 6,17,01, at; the prepositions as («s), i£ («*), iv; the conjunctions ei and w? (so uSs used as a preposition); and the negative oi (oIk, olx).
138. Exceptions. 1. 06 takes the acute at the end of a sentence; as 7ruis yap ov; fur why not? So when it stands alone as Oi', No.
2. 'Qs and sometimes i£ and
3. 'ft; is accented also when it means thus; as w? ilwtv, tkus he spoke. Thi.s use of
For a proclitic before an enclitic, see 143, 4.
139. N. When 6 is used for the relative os, it is accented (as in OH. 2, '202); and many editors accent all articles when they are demonstrative, as 11. 1, !>, 5 yap fiaaiXrjt. okiod(.k, and write o ftiv ... o 8«, and cfi /jiv ... oi 8«, even in Attic Greek.
ENCLITICS.
140. An enclitic (eyh-Xtyoj, lean upon) is a word which loses its own accent, and is pronounced as if it were part of the preceding word; as avdpumoCri (like himinisque in Latin).
141. The enclitics are: —
1. The personal pronouns /xov, /aoi, /xe'; aov,
To these are added the dialectic and poetic fa1 'ns, ft.iv, ato,
2. The indefinite pronoun tis, ti, in all its forms (except otto.) ; also the indefinite adverbs nov, ,to6{, irrj, -noC, iro6iv, ttotI, jTu, mus- These must be distinguished from the interrogate ves Ttf, TTOV, v66l, nfj, Troi, TroBeV, 7TVTC, 7r5>, 7TU)S.
3. The present indicative of ei/u, be, and of
|
32 |
32 LETTERS, SYLLABLES, AND ACCENTS. [142
4. The particles ye, ri, roi, vip: the inseparable -St in o8t, Tou'crSt, etc. (not he, but); and -6c and -^t in cldi and (146). So also the poetic vw (not vw), and the epic (kcV), ftfi', and pa.
142. The enclitic always loses its accent, except a dissyllabic enclitic after a paroxytone (143, 2). See examples in 143.
143. The word before the enclitic alwaj'S retains its own accent, and it never changes a final acute to the grave (115,2).
1. If this word is proparoxytone or properispomenon, it receives from the enclitic an acute on the last syllable as a
Second accent. Thus av8pu>TT0<; ns, avdpunroi Tivis, &ii$6v f).oi, iraiSt's rives, outos io~Tiv.
2. If it is paroxytone, it receives no additional accent (to avoid two acutes on successive syllables). Here a dissyllabic enclitic keeps its accent (to avoid three successive unaccented syllables). Thus, Ao'yos tis (not Ao'yos tn), Aoyot
k (not Aoyoi Tivts), Aoycov rivu>v, ovtw
y)
3. If its last syllable is accented, it remains unchanged; as Tt/wi t« (115, 2), tIjjmv yc, cto^os ns,
4. A proclitic before an enclitic receives an acute; as tl
T19, t'
144. Enclitics retain their accent whenever special emphasis falls upon them: this occurs
1. When they begin a sentence or clause; or when pronouns express antith esis, as ov rapa tpoialv dAAa
Jighl then not wui Trojans but with you, S. Ph. 1253.
2. When tht preceding syllable is elided; as iu 7ro'XA.' ccrnV (120) for 5roXa t -tlv.
3. The personal pronouns generally retain their accent after an accented preposition: here i/xov, i/ijoi, aud e/xi are used (except in irpos fie).
4. The personal pronouns of the third person are not enclitic when they are direct reflexives (988) ; o
5. 'Eoti at the beginning of a sentence, and when it signifies existence or possibility, becomes tori; so after ovk, firj, ti, the adverb
|
33 |
16OJ DIALECTIC CHANCES. —PUNCTUATION. 33
145. When several enclitics occur in succession, each takes an acute from the following, the last remaining without accent; as a tis Tt not
146. When an enclitic forms the last part of a compound word, the compound is accented as if the enclitic were a separate word. Thus, ovnvos,
DIALECTIC CHANGES.
147. The Ionic dialect is marked by the use of 17 where the Attic has a; and the Doric and Aeolic by the use of a where the Attic has 77.
Thus, Ionic yivir/ for yivtd, lyaofiai for laaofua (from Idofixu, 635); Doric Ti/iacrui for ri/nyo-a) (from ti/jAui) ; Aeolic and Doric Xd&d for XrjBi). But an Attic a caused by contraction (as in ripa from TifMt), or an Attic rj lengthened from t (as in <^L
jau id="iv.i.p522.1"> from
148. The Ionic often has a, ov, for Attic t, o; and i/i for Attic a in nouns and adjectives in «os, aov; as £ilvos for £tvo<:, fiovvo1: for fiovos; /Jao-iXjyios for fiao-CXcios.
149. The Ionic does not avoid successive vowels to the same extent as the Attic; and it therefore very often omits contraction (36). It contracts to and tov into cv (especially in Herodotus); as vouv/xtv, iroitijm (from -nouofitv, iroitovcri), for Attic Troiovfi€v, TTOiovai. Herodotus does not use v movable (56). See also 94 and 785, 1.
PUNCTUATION MARKS.
150. 1. The Greek uses the comma (,) and the period (.) like the English. Tt has also a colon, a point above the line (•), which is equivalent to the English colon and semicolon; as oi»c laO' 0 y' ilirov " ov yap
2. The mark of interrogation (,-) is the same as the English semicolon; as ttotc rjXOcv; when did he comet
|
34 |
PART II.
INFLECTION.
151. Inflection is a change in the form of a word, made to express its relation to other words. It includes the declension of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, and the conjugation of verbs.
152. Eveiy inflected word has a fundamental part, which is called the stem. To this are appended various letters or syllables, to form cases, tenses, persons, numbers, etc.
153. Most words contain a stil! more primitive element than the stem, which is called the root. Thus, the stem of the verb ripdv), honor, is rijua-, and that of the noun Tl/xrj, is rlfnd-, that of ricris, payment, is run.-, that of rtfuot, held in It/mor, is Tt/ito-, that of TifiLrj/jua (Tl^ij/xaTot), valuation, is ti/xtj/jut-; but all these sterns are developed from one root, ti-, which is seen pure in the verb ti-u), honor. In tmd, therefore, the verb stem and the root are the same.
154. The stem itself may be modified and assume various forms in different parts of a noun or verb. Thus the same verb stem may in different tense stems appear as Aitt-, Atur-, and Aonr-(see 459). So the same noun stem may appear as rlfxa.-, rlfxa-, and rlfir}- (108).
155. There are three numbers; the singular, the dual,-and the plural. The singular denotes one object, the plural more than one. The dual is sometimes used to denote two objects, but even here the plural is more common.
34
|
35 |
j02] GENDERS, NUMBERS, AND CASES. 35
156. There are three genders; the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter.
157. N. The grammatical gender in Greek is very often different from tlie natural gender. Especially many names of things are masculine or feminine. A Greek noun is called masculine, feminine, or neuter, when it requires an adjective or article to take the form adapted to either of these genders, and the adjective or article is then said to have the gender of the corresponding noun; thus o «i/ji)S 7roTu/ios, the broad river (masc), rj Ka ) oIkCu, the beautiful house (fein.), tovto to irpayfta, this thing (neut.).
The gender of a noun is often indicated by prefixing the article (380); as (6) avqp, man; ()J) ywr'j, woman; (to) vpayfia, thing.
158. Nouns which may be either masculine or femiuine are said to lie of the cummon gender: as (6, 17) 8t6<:, God or Goddess. Names of animals winch include both sexes, but have only one grammatic.il gender, are called epicene (ivUoivos); as 6 acros, the eagle; r) iu>nr}£, the fox; both including males and females.
159. The gender must often be learned by observation. But
(1) Names of males are generally masculine, and names of females feminine.
(2) Most names of rivers, winds, and months are masculine; and most names of countries, towns, trees, and islands are feminine.
(3) Most nouns denoting qualities or conditions are feminine; as upiTri, virtue, ims, hope.
(4) Diminutive nouns are neuter; as iratSiW, child; -ywatov, old woman (literally, little woman).
Other rules are given under the declensions (see 1G8; 189; 281-284).
160. There are five cases; the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative.
161. 1. The nominative and vocative plural are always alike.
2. In neuters, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are alike in all numbers; in the plural these end in a.
3. The nominative, accusative, and vocative dual are always alike; and the genitive and dative dual are always alike.
162. The eases of nouns have in general the same meaning as 'he corresponding cases in Latin; as Norn, a man (as subject),
|
36 |
36
INFLECTION.
[163
Gen. of a man, Dat. to or for a man, Accus. a man (as object), Voc. 0 man. The chief functions of the Latin ablative are divided between the Greek genitive and dative. (See 1042.)
163. All the cases except the nominative5 and vocative are called oblique cases.
NOUNS.
164. There are three declensions of nouns, in which also all adjectives and participles are included.
165. These correspond in general to the first three declensions in Latin. The first is sometimes called the A declension (with stems in d), and the second the 0 declension (with steins in o). These two together are sometimes called the. Vowel declension, as opposed to the third or Consonant declension (206).
The principles which are common to adjectives, participles, and substantives are given under the three declensions of nouns.
166. N. The name noun (6vona), according to ancient usage, includes both substantives and adjectives. Dut by modern custom noun is generally used in grammatical language as synonymous with substantive, and it is so used in the present v/oxk.
167.
CASE-ENDINGS OF NOUNS.
|
|
Vowki. Declension. |
|
|
6ING. |
Masc. and Fein. |
Neuter. |
|
Norn. |
s or none |
V |
|
Gen.' |
s or io |
|
|
Dat. |
i |
|
|
Ace. |
V |
|
|
Voc. |
none |
V |
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
N.A.V. |
none |
|
|
G.D. |
IV |
|
|
PLUB. |
|
|
|
N.V. |
I |
a |
|
Gen. |
uv |
|
|
Dat. |
uri(is) |
|
|
Ace. |
vs (ds) |
& |
Consonant Declension.
Masc. and Fern. Neuter.
s or none none
os
i
v or d none
none or like Nom. none
The relations of some of these endings to the terminations actually in use will be explained under the different declensions. The agreement of the two classes in many points is striking.
|
37 |
171]
FIRST DECLENSION.
37
FIRST DECLENSION.
168. Stems of the first declension end originally in a. This is often modified into r in the singular, and it becomes a in the plural. The nominative singular of feminities ends in a ov r); that of masculines ends in a? or. t;?. There are no neuters.
169. The following table shows how the final a or ij of the stem unites with the case endings (107), when any are added, to form the actual terminations: —
|
|
|
SINGULAR |
|
|
PLUUAL. |
||
|
|
Feminine |
|
|
|
Masculine- |
Masc. and Fern |
|
|
Nom. |
dor a |
1 |
|
OS |
t)S |
a-i |
|
|
Gen. |
d-s or r)-s |
H-s |
|
|
o-io(Hom.d-o) |
«v (for {-uv~) |
|
|
Dat. |
a-1 or t|-i |
|
|
d-i |
T)-l |
a-uri or a-is |
|
|
Ace. |
d-v or a-v |
T)-V |
|
d-v |
I"" |
as (for o-vs) |
|
|
Voc. |
a or a |
1 |
|
d |
£ or r |
a-i |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dual. |
i |
||
|
|
|
|
|
Masc. and Fe |
|||
|
|
|
N. |
A.V. |
|
d |
||
|
|
|
G. |
D. |
|
oiv |
|
|
170. N. In the genitive singular of masculines Homeric ao comes from a-io (1(19); but Attic ov probably follows the analogy of ov for oo in the second declension (101). Circumtlexed w in the genitive, plural is contracted from Ionic iuv (188, 5). J'he stem in d (or ») may thus be seen in all cases of >Mi and x
FEMININES.
171. The nouns (q) x
Stem. (xa>pd-) (rljia-)
SINGl'LAn. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace.
Voc.
a land of a land to a land a land 0 land
|
olxCd |
Movcra |
|
olxtds |
Movcrr)s |
|
olicldv |
Moixrav |
|
oUCd |
Movcra |
|
38 |
|
38 |
INFLECTION. |
|
[IT. |
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
N. A.V. |
X«pa two lands |
Ti(id |
olicCd |
Movcrd |
|
G. D. |
X"ipaiv of or to two |
lands rl(iaiv |
|
Movcraiv |
|
|
|
1'LIi'ItAI.. |
|
|
|
Nodj. |
X«pai lands |
TLfiai |
otKCai |
Mouo-ai |
|
Gen. |
Xupwv of lands |
Tip.WV |
|
Mova'ui' |
|
Dat. |
Xupais to lands |
Ti|j.ats |
otKiai; |
Movaais |
|
A ck. |
u5pds lands |
Ti(ids |
oUias |
Moio-ds |
|
Voc. |
yupai 0 lands |
Tiiiai |
oIkLoli |
Moutrai |
172. The following show varieties of quantity and accent: — OdXavaa, Kea, daXaao-qs, dado-(Trj, OdAaao-av; PI. BaXauuai.,
OaXturcrijiv, ^aAaatrais, OaXdaads.
y(
173. The stem generally retains d through the singular after «, i, or p, but changes a to ij after other letters. See
174. But nouns having
Thus a/jui^a, wngon; Sii/fd, thirst; pt£a, riot; a/uWa., contest; 6dh.ao-
175. The following have a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative, and a in the genitive and dative, singular (after e, i, or p) : —
(a) Most ending in pa preceded by a diphthong or by 0; as /xotpu, yiefrvpa.
(l>) Most abstract nouns formed from adjectives in ijsoroos; as dXr/Otux, truth (dXrjOij';, true), evvoui, kindness (ewoos, kind). (But the Attic poets sometimes have a j9cid, tvvoid, etc.)
(c) Nouns in eta and rpia designating females; as jiaaikua, queen, ifidkTpia, female harper (but y3ucriAad, kingdom). So jxvux, jly, gen. /Was-
For feminine adjectives in a, see 318.
|
39 |
181] FIRST bKCLENSION. 39
176. (Exceptions.) At'pi;, neck, and Ko'pr;, girl (originally pfj KOpfij), have tj after p ()7;-S). °Ep
177. N. It will be. Keen that a of the nominative singular is always short when the genitive lias 77s, and generally long' when the genitive has ds.
178. N. Kv of the accusative singular and a of the vocative singular agree in <[U;intity with a of the noininaiive. The quantity of all other :iwu!s of the terminations may he seen from the table in Ui'.i.
Most nouns in 0 have recessive accent (110, 4).
MASOl/UXKS.
179. The nouns (6) Ta/xid^, steward, (0) 7roXir»7?, citizen, and (6) tcpi-n^, jud
(jroXira-)
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
Norn. |
rafiids |
1TO(T!)S |
|
Gen. |
Ta(l(0U |
itoXitou |
|
Dat. |
to|ucj |
iroXtTj) |
|
Ace. |
Ta)j.idv |
TT0XiTT]V |
|
Voc. |
Ta|x£d |
iroXiTa |
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
N.A.V. |
Tafud |
iroXiTa |
|
G.D. |
ra(iiaiv |
TroXtratv |
|
|
|
1'IXHAI.. |
|
Ncnn. |
Ta(i£at |
TroXlTCll |
|
Gen. |
Tajiiujv |
TroXiTUV |
|
Dat. |
|
iroXtTais |
|
ACC. |
rapvids |
ttoXitols |
|
Voc. |
Tajifai |
iroXirat |
KplT<)S
Kpirov
KptTI) KplTtlV
Kpird
KplT&
KpiTttC KplTWV
Kpirai;
KpiTiS
KpiTat
180. Thus may be declined ycu!'/Js, youth, urpaTioiT7;s. soldier, iroiyfrrj<;, poet.
181. The. o of the stem is- here retained in the singular after c, i, orp; otherwise it is changed to ^: see the paradigms. For irregular ov in the genitive singular, see 170.
|
40 |
40 INFLECTION. [182
182. The following nouns in ijs have a in the vocative singular (like iroAtTjjs): those in ttjs; national names, like flfptrj;?, Persian, voc. Tlipva ; and compounds in 77?, like yc
CONTRACTS OF THE FIIiST DECLENSION.
183. Most nouns in oa, 16., and «d? are contracted (35) in all their cases.
184. Mvdu, fiua, mina,
Slem. (turn- lor ^.yad-) (
SINUULAlt.
|
Nom. |
(ftvda) |
(ifd |
( |
( Epfitds) |
Epfiijs |
|
Gen. |
(M" |
|*vds |
(»Wii) |
(Epptou) |
'Eppiov |
|
Bat. |
(f |
|
((X)KtQ.) tTVKXl |
('Ep/i^p) |
'Ep(i.^ |
|
Ace. |
(urddv) |
|xvdv |
|
('Ep/A^a*') |
'Epjiiiv |
|
Voc. |
(lima) |
(ivd |
( |
('E/Wd) |
'Ep^ |
|
|
|
|
DIAL. |
|
|
|
N. A.V. |
(^dd) |
(lvd |
((TUK^d) O~VKd |
('EpM«) |
'Epp.d |
|
G. D. |
|
p.vaiy |
(ffu/c^oic) orvKaiv |
|
'Ep|iaiv |
|
|
|
|
PLURAL. |
|
|
|
N.V. , |
(ixvdat') |
|ivai |
(ffiK^ai) (rvKat |
('Ep^oi) |
'Epp.ai |
|
Gen. |
(nvaZv) |
|
|
|
'Epfiiiv |
|
Dat. |
(livdais) |
(ivais |
(ffux/ais) cruKais |
('EpM^ois) |
'Ep|iais |
|
Ace. |
(M"do5) |
(ivds |
((rmiai) |
|
'Epuds |
185. So -y^, earth (from an uncontracted form yc-d or ya-d), in the singular: yfj, y^s, yij, y^i/, yfj (Doric ya, ya?, etc.).
186. N. Bopt'd?, North wind, which appears uticontracted in Attic, has also a contracted form Boppas (with irregular pp), gen. Boppi (of Doric form), dat. Boppa, ace. Boppaf, voc. Boppa.
187. N. For ta contracted to d in the dual and the accusative plural, see 39, 1. For contract adjectives (feminities) of this ela9s, see 310.
DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
188. 1. The Ionic has 77 for d throughout the singular, even after e, 1, or p; as y(vtrj, uiprj, Ta/ii'jjs. But Homer has Out, God-
|
41 |
191] SECOND DECLENSION. 41
Jess. The Doric and Aeolic have a unchanged in the singular. The Ionic generally uses uncontracted forms of contract nouns and adjectives.
2. Norn. Sing. Horn, sometimes a for 575; as iimara. for i-mrarr-qs, horseman, sometimes with recessive accent, as fujrura, counsellor. (Compare Latin poeta = Troiirnjs.)
3. Gen. Sing. For ov Homer has the original form do, as 'Arptffido; sometimes o> (for to) after vowels, as Bopou (from Bopw). Horn, and licit, have Ionic i(always one syllable in Horn.), as'ATptiSeo) (114), Ti)p(a> (gen. of Tt^s); ami iw occurs in proper names in older Attic. The Doric lias d lor do, as 'ATpti'Sd.
4. Ace. Sh/ff. Hdt. sometimes forms an ace. in to. (for rjv) from nouns in -17s, as in the third declension, as Scavorea (for B
from 8ta7roTi;s, master (179) : so Esp^s, ace. Etp£ca or s,(p$r]v.
5. Gen. PL Horn, duty, the original form, as xAtcndow. 0/ sometimes toy (170). Horn, and IliU. have Ionic iaiv (one :
in Horn.), as irvkluv, of gates. Doric av for
0. Dat. PI. Poetic aicri (also Aeolic and old Attic form) ; Ionic rja-t (Horn., Hdt., even oldest Attic), Horn, also rjs (rarely cus).
7. Ace. PI. Lesbian Aeolic cus for aj.
SECOND DECLENSION.
189. Stems of the second declension end in o, which is sometimes modified to «. The nominative singular regularly ends in 09 or ov (gen. ov}. Nouns in 09 are masculine, rarely feminine ; those in ov are neuter.
190. The following table shows how the terminations of nouns in os and ov are formed by the final o of the stem (with its modifications) and the case-endings : —
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
DUAL. |
|
PI.LTiAL. |
|
|
Masc.& Fcm. Neuter. |
Masc, |
Fern., & Neuter. |
Masc. |
& Fern. Ne |
ut |
|
|
N. |
OS O-V |
|
|
N. o-v |
|
a |
|
G. |
ov (for 0-0) |
N. A. |
V. a (for 0) |
G. |
ore |
|
|
D. |
if (for o-i) |
G.I). |
o-iv |
D. |
o-io-i or o-is |
|
|
A. |
o-v |
|
|
A. ov; |
(for o-vs) |
& |
|
V. |
€ O-V |
|
|
V. o-i |
|
a |
191. N. In the genitive singular the Homeric 0-10 becomes 0-0 and then ov. In the dative singular and the nominative etc. dual, 0 becomes u. E takes the place of 0 in the vocative singular of nouns in os, and * takes the place of 0 in the nominative etc. of neuters. There being
|
42 |
42 INFLECTION. [192
no genitive plural in ouv, u» is not accented as a contracted syllable (^Xiyuv, not oyCi").
192. The nouns (6) 6yos, word, (rf) vfjo-os, island, (o, r{) avdpwTTos, man or human being, (?)) 6869, road, (to) Scopov, gift, are thus declined: —
|
Stem. |
(X070-) |
|
(»)j |
(dWJpwTO-) |
(660-) |
(Jupo-) |
|
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
|
|
Nom. |
6yoi |
a word |
vij |
avOpuiros |
6865 |
8upov |
|
Gen. |
Xo^yov |
of a word |
v^erou |
dvSpwiTOv |
68ov |
8oipou |
|
Dat. |
6yia |
to a word |
VT)O"W |
dvBpwirw |
6810 |
8wpu |
|
Ace. |
6yov |
a word |
vT)trov |
avBpwirov |
686v |
8upov |
|
Voc. |
6yt |
0 word |
vt) |
avSpwirc |
6U |
8u>pov |
K.A.V Xd'yu) two words vtJ
G.D. X6"yoLv of or to two words vr
I'l.KKAL.
Koiti. X6*yoi words vtjo-ol avOpwiroi 68ol 8wpa
Gen. 6yuv of words vr ru>v dv8pw7ruv 68wv 8upuv
Dat. Xo-yois to words vt|
Ace. X6*yovs words vticovs dvflpwirovs 68ovs 8wpa
Voc. 6yo. 0 words vfjcroi avSpwiroi 66oi 8upa
193. Thus may be declined i/o'/xos, law, kivSvvos, danger, ttotu-fxos, river, /Si'os, life, Odvaros, death, radpos, bull,
194. The chief feminine nouns of the second declension are the following: —
1. j3d
2. Names of countries, fawns, trees, and isla/uls, which are regularly femi:/ine (159, '2): so rj-n-apos, mainland, and j/ijaos, island.
195. The nominative in 05 is sometimes used for the vocative in t; as w qbiXos. ©to'?, God, has always #
ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION.
196. A few masculine and feminine nouns of this declension have stems in u>, which appears in all the cases. This
|
43 |
201]
SECOND DECLENSION.
43
is called the ^«ic declension, though it is not confined to Attic Greek. The noun (6) kw, temple, is thus declined: —
|
|
UUAL. |
PI. |
VUAL. |
|
|
|
Nom. |
ViU |
|
N. |
A.V. V€(i |
Gen. |
vtwv |
|
G. |
D. vfu)'f |
Dai.. |
vtu's |
|
|
|
Ace. |
v«»s |
|
|
|
Voc. |
|
SlKCUI.AIt.
Nom. vtiis
Gen. v«il
Oat. v«w
Ace. v*«v
Voc. v««s
197. N. There are mo neuter nouns of the Attic declension in good use. But the corresponding adjectives, as fAtuK, propitious, tiytaK,Jtriile, have neuters in w, as Xkiusv, tvyiwv. (See 3U5.J
198. N. Tlie accent of these nouns is irregular, and that of the genitive and dative is doubtful. (See 114; 125.)
199. N. Some nouns of this class may have « in the accusative singular; as Aayw?, accus. aytliv or Aayw. .So"A#o>9, Toi'*A0u>i' or "A8u> Kws, rijv Kill/ or Kai; and Kc'ws, T<«;5, Micws. Ews, dawn, has regularly rrjv °Eo>.
200. N. JVIost nouns of the Attic declension have older forms in aos or tjo?, from which they are probably derived by exchange of quantity (3;i); as Horn. A.ao'5, people, Att. Atok; Dor. t/uds, Ion. vtjo?, Att. i/cws; H0111. Mtw'Xaos, Att. M«v«A«u)5. But some come by contraction ; as Aa-yoil?, hare, from Aaywos. In words like MtveXcw;, the original accent, is retained (114).
CONTRACT NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
201. 1. Kroiu stems in 00- and co- are formed contract nouns in 005 and.tov.
For contract adjectives in £05, ea, tov, and oos, oa, oov, see 310. 2. Ndos, vovs, mind, and wriov, octtow, bone, are thus declined : —
|
SINGCt.A |
u. |
|
DUAL. |
PI.L'RAL. |
|
|
Nom. (»6os) |
voiis |
|
|
Nom. (v6ol) |
VOl |
|
Geu. (^6ov) |
vov |
N |
A.V. (p6w) vw |
(Jen. (i/6ui/) |
vuv |
|
Dat. (p<5y) |
vw |
G |
D. (mSou*) voiv |
Dat. (t-ioir) |
vois |
|
Ace (p6oi-) |
voiv |
|
|
Ace. (i-ioi/j) |
vovs |
|
Voc. (i>6f) |
vov |
|
|
Voc. (»6oi) |
VOl |
|
N-A.V.^aT/oi- |
1 OO"ToCv |
K. |
A .V'. (dtrT/oi*) ba-ru |
N.A.V.(i.rr/o) |
O(TT< |
|
Gen. (6ot(ov |
OO-TOS |
G. |
D. (liffT/oiv) OO-TOIV |
Gen. (AffT^oiv'j |
OO-T< |
|
Dat. (4ffT/v) |
O(TTU |
|
|
Dat. (<5 |
6(TT< |
|
44 |
44 INFLECTION. [202
202. So may be declined (ttXoos) irXovs, voyage, (poo?) poZ%, stream, (xdviov) xavow, basket (accented like adjectives in to?, 311).
203. The accent of some of these forms is irregular: —
1. The dual contracts iu> and ow into u> (not
2. Compounds in oo<; accent all forms like the contracted nominative singular; as 7r£p<.VAoos, irtpciroK, saitiny round, gen. jrcpi-irAoov, 7rcpt7rXou, etc.
3. For ta contracted to a in the plural, see 39, 1.
DIALECTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION.
204. l. Get). Sing. Horn, oio and ov, Aeolic and Doric
2. Gen. and Dal. Dual. Horn, ow for ow, as iWouv.
3. Dal. Plur. Ionic and poetic oicri; as frm-ouri; also Aeolic and old Attic, found occasionally even in prose.
4. Ace. I'lur. Doric w? or os for ovs; as 1/dp.ws, to>? Aijkos; Lesbian Aeolic ois.
5. The Ionic generally omits contraction.
THIRD DECLENSION.
205. This declension includes all nouns not belonging to either the first or the second. Its genitive singular ends in o? (sometimes o>?).
206. N. This is often called the Consonant Declension (165), because, the stem here generally ends in a consonant. Some stems, however, end in a close vowtl (< or u), some in a diphthong, and a few in o or u>.
207. The stem of a noun of the third declension cannot always be determined by the nominative singular; but it is generally found by dropping os of the genitive. The cases are formed by adding the case-endings (167) to the stem.
208. 1. For final ws in the genitive singular of nouns in «, vs, i>, evs, and of vaOs, ship, see 240; 265; 269.
2. For 5 and os in the accusative singular and plural of nouns in eut, see 205.
3. The contracted accusative plural generally has «s for fd"t Irregularly, to conform to the contracted nominative in m for «s. (See 313.) So ov! in the accusative plural of comparatives in ~tuv (358).
4. The original « of the accusative plural is seen in ixKt (for ixOv-vs) from ixBtn (259), and the Ionic iroXJt (for iroXi-n) from ir6it (266).
|
45 |
210] THIRD DECLENSION. 45
FORMATION OF CASES. Nominative Singular.
209. The numerous forms of the nominative singular of this declension must be learned partly by practice. The following are the general principles on which the nominative is formed from the stem.
1. Masculine and feminine stems, except those in v, p, cr, and ovt (2 and 3), add s, and make the needful euphonic changes. E.g.
4>vAa£, guard, <£i!AaK-os; yiip, vulture, yuir-os;
2. Masculine and feminine steins in v, p, and a- merely lengthen the last vowel, if it is short. Ey.
Alu>v, ai/e, aiciv-os; &xifi
3. Masculine stems in ovt drop t, and lengthen o to u>. E.g. Aitnv, lion, AcovT-os; Atyw, speaking, Xiyovr-Oi; cue, being,
oir-os.
4. In neuters, the nominative singular is generally the same as the stom. Final t of the stem is dropped (25). E.g.
2<2i^c«, body, awjjuiT-O':; fxcXav (neuter of /ic'Ads), black', ^i.
210. (Exceptions to 209, 1-3.) 1. In -now, foot, iroS-oi, o8s becomes ous. Aa/xop, wife, Sa/MxpT-oi;, does not add ?. Change in quantity occurs in aumi)£, fox, dAoo7r«K-o?, Krjpvi, herald, KTjpuK-os, and
2. Stems in iv- add s and have 1i (78, 3) in the nominative; as pfs, nose, pic-di. These also add s: ktji'?, comi, ktcv-os (78, 3) ; els, one, lv-6t; and the adjectives /Ae'Ads, 6/aci, /it'Aac-os, and A wretched, rdkavoi.
|
46 |
46 INFLECTION. [211
3. 'OSous (Ionic oSiiv), tooth, gen. 68wt-os, forms its nominative like participles in ous: for these see 212, 1.
211. {Exceptions to 209, 4.) Some neuter steins in ar- have ap in the nominative; as rjvap, liver, gen. ^var-os (225), as if from a stein in apr-. For nouns in a? with double stems in ar- (or ar-) ami acr-, as xptai, wipa<; (225), and Tipa
212. (Participles.) 1. Masculine participles from verbs in io/u add s to ovt- and have nominatives in ous (79); as 8i8ous, giving, SiSotr-os. Neuters in ovt- are regular (209, 4).
Other participles from stems in ovt- have nominatives in wv, like nouns (209, 3).
2. The perfect active participle, with stem in or-, forms its nominative in <«s (niasc.) and o? (neut.); as XeXuxuis, having loosed, neut. cvk6s, gen. XoVukot-o?. (See 335.)
213. X. For nominatives in t?s and os, gen. coy, from stems in «t-, see 227. For peculiar formations from stems in o (r.om.
Accusative Singular.
214. 1. Most masculines and feminines with consonant stems add a to the stem in the accusative singular; as (f>v.a£ (<^ id="iv.i.p1189.1">uXaK-),
2. Those with vowel stems add v; as tt6i<;, state, 7ro'Xiv; 'X^"9> A^1! 'LX^^V i vavi, ship, vavv; /3ous, ox, ftovv.
3. Barytones in 15 and us with lingual (t, 8, 6) stems generally drop the lingual and add v; as tpt? (c'pi8-), strife, *Plv X°-Pl<: (xuP'T")> {/race, ^dpiv, op>/Is (dpvW-), bird, opvlv; evcX-ms ((iiXtnS-), hopeful, cvcXttiv (but the oxytoue f'X7r(5,
hope, has iXv{Su.).
215. N. xXtt's ((cX«8), ie;/, has kXclv (rarely xXeiSa).
216. N. Homer, Herodotus, and the Attic poets make accusatives in o of the nouns of 214, 3; as
217. N. 'AnoWuiv and Tloo-ab'wy (YloaaSduiv) have accusatives 'AiroXXu) and Ilocr£i8uj, besides the forms in wva.
For in the accusative of comparatives in lu>v, see 359.
218. N. For accusatives iu those in evs, and in a (for ui or 00) from those in us or u, see '228 ; 265; 243.
|
47 |
226] NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS. 47
Vocative Singular.
219. The vocative singular of masculines and feminiues is sometimes the same as the nominative, and sometimes the same as the stem.
220. It is the same as the nominative
1. In nouns with mute stems; as nom. and voc.
2. In oxytones with liquid stems; as nom. and voc. woipyv (iroi/xcv-), shepherd, A.i/xtJj' (Xi/itv-), harbor.
Hut barytones have the vocative like the stem; as Saiftuv (haifj.ov-), voc. Saifnov- (See the paradigms in 225.)
221. (Exception;:.) 1. Those with stems in 18-, and barytones with stems in vr- (except, participles), have the vocative like the stem; as eAiris (c'A.7ri8 ), hope, vo':. tVrt (r:f.2.r>): see kiuiv and yi'yds, declined in 225. So Aids (Aiacr-), Ajax, voc. Alav (Horn.), but Aids in Attic.
2. 2
222. All others have the vocative the same as the stem. See the paradigms.
223. There are a few vocatives in 01 from nouns in
For the vocative of syncopated nouns, sec 273.
Dative Plural.
224. The dative plural is formed by adding
) £ pjp jp, prjropcn; iXnis {(XttiS-),
(74) ; wovs (tto8), iroai; Xiu>v (Xf-ovr-), Xeovcri (79); 8ai'/xu)v S (80); ti&c& (nOan--), tiOcivl; ^api'ti; (^apitvr-),
)fapt€crt (74); tard? (tcrrai/r-), a~Ta
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
225, The following are examples of the most common forms of nouns of the third declension with mute or liquid stems.
|
48 |
48
INFLECTION.
[225
For the formation of the cases, see 209-224. For euphonic changes in nearly all, see 74 and 79. For special changes in 6pfa see 95, 5.
Mute Stems.
I. Masculines and Feminines. (ij)
(o) watchman
(o) lion
Stem. (0uXax-)
Nom. 4>vXa£
Gen. 4>vXaKos
Dat. <| id="iv.i.p1229.1">v'XaKi
Ace. 4>v'Xaxa
Voc. AvXof
N.A.V. G. D.
N. V. 4>uXaK«s
Gen. 4)uXaKuv
Dat. <}><'^oll
Ace. 4>vXaKas
SINGULAR.
o-oXiriyya
DUAL.
oroXiriyy*
PLUHAI..
caXirLYYwv
Xt'ovTos
Xi'ovti
Xf'ovTa
Xi'ovti Xco'vtoiv
X
X«OVTOS
(d) •yt-yds (d) 8ijs
giant hired man Stem. '(7'7a"T-) (Ct,7-)
Nom. ■Y^ds
Gen.
Dat. Y'*YaVTt
Ace.
Voc.
8i)To's
8r)T( 8t)'s
N. A.V. ylyavri 8i]T«
G. D. y<.ywT0iv BtitoIv
N. V. ylyavrn Btjtcs
Gen. yiydvrav 8i]Tiiv
Dat. yLywtri 8110-C
Ace. Y'YaVTa* 8i]Tas
(ij) XajiiTas (d tJ) opvis (ij) iXirls
torch bird hope
(aniraS-) (6pvl$-) ((XiriS-) SINGULAR.
Xo(iiros opvis «'Xir(s
Xa)iira8o$ opviflos IXirlSos
Xa^LirokSi opvk8i iXtrCSi
Xa)iiraSa opviv
Xa)iTras opvis t'Xir£
DUAL.
Xa|i.-rraSc ^pvi8i cXirC8c
Xa|jiiraSoiv dpvt8oiv iXiriSoiv
TLL'RAL.
Xa|j.iraS(s opviSts (XirtSts
Xa(iTra8uv dpviSuv
XajiTrairi opvuri «Xir£(ri opvi8as ■
|
49 |
225J
NOUNS WITH MUTE OR LIQUID STEMS.
49
|
|
II. |
Neuters. |
|
|
|
(to) o-tijia |
(to) iripas ( |
[to) »iTrop |
|
|
body |
|
liver |
|
Stem. |
|
(irtpar-) |
OttT.) |
|
|
SINGVLAR. |
|
|
|
N. A.V. |
o'wjia |
iT^pas (237) |
i^trap |
|
Gen. |
o-ufiaTos |
w^paTos |
fi'iraTOS |
|
Dat. |
|
w |
VJwaTi |
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
N. A. V. |
|
ir^paTi |
rfirttTt |
|
G. D. |
|
ir«pciTOiv |
ijiraTOiv |
|
|
] |
PLURAL. |
|
|
N. A.V. |
o-ujiaTa |
m'para |
VfiraTtt |
|
Gen. |
O-UlfiOTUV |
iripaTuv |
«iiroT«v |
|
Uat. |
|
" |
fjirewri |
|
|
Liquid Stems. |
|
|
|
(d)?roi}tt|v |
(d) tttuiv |
(d) TjYc^uf (d) Sa((i»v |
(d) O-UTTJp |
|
shepherd |
|
leader divinity |
preserver |
|
Stein, (iroijifi'-) |
(afwf-) |
(fiy(/M>y) (5ai/«».-) |
(ffWTtp-) |
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
|
Nom. iroi)iT)V |
ataiv |
tj^ |
0*6>TT]p |
|
Gen. ?roi)i{vos |
aCu>vos |
T)Y |
O-WTTJpOS |
|
Dat. tt |
atuvi |
ij^tpidvi Sa(|novi |
a-wnipi |
|
Ace. iroipiva |
atciva |
TJYtfio'va 8a(p.ova |
|
|
Voc. Troijirjv |
alwv |
^Y«H«v 8ol^ov |
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
N.A.V.iroi(i |
atuv< |
ijYitidv< SaC^ovi |
cwrrfpf |
|
G. D. iroi|i |
alwvoiv |
WKo'voiv Soi^dvoiv |
O-UTT)p0lV |
|
|
i |
'LURAL. |
|
|
N. V. iroi|i{v |
atwvis |
Wlidvis 6a(,j.ov.? |
o-<»nipre |
|
Gen. iroip^vMv |
atwvwv |
iy |
cruTnpuv |
|
Dat. iroijjiio-i |
aluci |
<q*y<^oVi 8a£fioo*i |
o-uTtipa-i |
|
Ace. iroi(^vas |
alwvas |
iJYi)i.o'va$ Saijtovas |
a-urnpat |
|
50 |
50
INFLECTION.
1220
Sum.
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Aec.
Voc.
(d) pTJTUp
orator
piJTWp
piJTOpi
prJTopa
pTJTOp
N.A.V. piJTopt
G. D. pTJTOpOlV
pl|TOp«S
N. V.
Gen.
Dat. piiVopai
Ace. pivropas
(d)aX.s salt (dx-)
aXs
dXo's
aXi
aXa
oiXs
aoiv
adXas
(d)
SING U LA K. Brfp
expo's
9<1P' Oijpa Blip
DUAL.
I'LL HAL.
8fp«s 6r)puiv 8t]po-i flrjpas
W) P's
nose
pivos piv( ptva pis
piv< pivoiv
pivts
piVLOV
pi
((ppcv)
4>p
4>ptvi
(j>p
<) id="iv.i.p1461.1">p^V« 4>p(VOlV
4>p«vuiv
4>p
4>pc'vas
STEMS ENDING IN 2.
226. The final
227. The proper substantive stems in ta- are chiefly neuters, which change to-- to o? in the nominative singular. Some masculine proper names change «r- regularly to rjs (209, 2). Stems in tt
228. So)*rpaT^? (icovpa.Tea-'), Socrates, (to) yevos (yepea), race, and (to) yepa<; (yepacr-), prize, are thus declined: —
SINfil.I.AH.
Nom. SuKpa.TT]s IN. A.V. -y^vos
Gen. (Xaiupdreos) XuKpdTovsj Gen. (7^(01) -yfvous Dat. (ZuikpdTfi) SwicpdTd Dat. (7^«0 7<«t Aec. (2u/ dual.
Voc. SwKpaTts N.A.V. (yivet) ilvu.
G. D. (7ec^oi>') ^evotv
PLUItAL.
yp (7i?paos)-yepus
(ytpac) ylpa.
N. A.V. Gen. -Dat.
a) -y/vr]
) -yjptiv yipain
|
51 |
2S7J
STEMS ENDING IN 2.
51
229. In the genitive plural twv is sometimes uncontracted, even in prose; as r
230. Proper names in ijs, gen. to?, besides the accusative in ■>], have a form in rjv of the first declension; as SwKpanje, hrnxoadivrjv, UoXwiixrjv.
For the recessive accent in the vocative of these nouns, see 122.
231. Proper names in xXirji, compounds of xAe'os, glory, are doubly contracted in the dative, sometimes in the accusative. rhpi*A«r;s, IIcpiK/Vijs, Pericles, is thus declined: —
Nom. Gen. Hat. Ace.
II«piK»js
(1I
(poet.
232. N. In proper names in k(t}s, Homer has ijos, i)i, ^a, Herodotus c'o? (for "09), i'i, ia. In adjectives in {77? Homer sometimes contracts « to «: as, eixXt'^, ace. plur. tiKXclou; for eixAt'eos.
233. Adjective stems in «r- change ttr- to tjs in the masculine and feminine of the nominative singular, but leave
234. The adjective rpt^pij?, i-Wpiy _/?M«/, is used as a feminine noun, (ij) rp^jp^? (so. raus), trireme, and is thus declined: —
SINGULAR.
Nom. Gen. Dat. (rpiT), Ace. (rpiij, Voc. rpit)
235. N
plural: for For the
236. N other cases So /Spiral, poetry.
237. 1. with gen.
Tplijpt)
N.A.V. ( G. D. (
Tpir|pei
N.V. (1 Gon. (Tptijp/ujv) Dat. rpiT|p«ri i Ace. rpi^jpcis
Tpi^ptlS
_,."„-.,. has recessive accent in the genitive dual and this in other adjectives in 77s, see 122. accusative plural in «?, see 208, 3.
. Sume poetic nominatives in as have t for a in the ; as o58as, ground, gen. ovScos, dat. ouScV, ovStt (Homer). , image, gen. j3p(reos, plur. ySpt'rij, ppercwv, in Attic
Some nouns in as have two stems, — one in or- or &t-aroi (like irtpa?, 225), and another in oxr- with gen.
|
52 |
52
INFLECTION.
[238
a(o-)os, aos, contracted ws (like ytpas, 228). Thus K€pas a-), horn, is doubly declined.
SINGULAR.
N.A.V. K
Gen. K
DUAL.
N. A.V. K^pdrt, («p«) ** G. D. Kcparoiv, ((ctpaoiy)
PLURAL.
N.A.V. tc/pdTd, («paa) Gen. K
2. So rtpas, prodigy, Ttpar-os, which has also Homeric forms from the stem in an-, as T(paa, Tipdmv, ripdicrci.. Iltpas, cnrf (225), has only irfpar-o^, etc.
238. Tliere is one Attic noun stem in oa-, al8o
SINGULAR.
Nom. alSus
Gen. (o^Soot) alSous
Dat. (o(«oi) at8oi
Ace. (atdoa) atSw Voc.
DUAL AND PLURAL
wanting.
239. AiSws has the declension of nouns in accusative in C> has the regular accent. (See also 359.)
240. The Ionic (^) ^uls, dawn, has stem rjcxr-, and is declined like aiSuis : —gen. ijoDt, dat. -701, ace. iju. The Attic ?a>s is declined like veuk (196) : but see 199.
STEMS IN 0 OH O.
241. A few stems in m- form masculine nouns in cos, g«n. cu-o?, which are often contracted in the dative and accusative singular and in the nominative and accusative plural.
242. A few in o- form feminines in u>, gen. ous (for o-o?), which are always contracted in the genitive, dative, and accusative singular. The original form of the stems of these nouns is uncertain. (See 239.)
243. The nouns (6) i?/>a>s, hero, and (7) irciO, persuasion, are thus declined: —
|
53 |
260] STEMS IN ft OK 0; I AND T. 53
|
6INGDLAR. |
Norn. |
ljpd>S |
|
ttuQu |
|
|
Gen. |
TJpUOS |
|
(rfiSoot) vniovt |
|
|
Dat. |
ijp«l |
or ijp |
(irtitfoi) irdSai |
|
|
Ace. |
-tjpua |
or iipw |
|
|
|
Voc. |
ijpws |
|
iTa6ot |
|
DUAL. |
N. A.V. |
iipui |
|
|
|
|
G. D. |
|
v |
|
|
1-LDRAL. |
N. V. |
ripoxs |
or tjpws |
|
|
|
Geu. |
fipwwv |
|
|
|
|
Dat. |
|
|
|
|
|
Ace. |
lip was |
or iiows |
|
244. These nouns in
245. N. The feminines in w ai-e chiefly proper names. Like vtiOut may be declined 2a7r<£io (Aeolic ^dv(f>o>), Sappho, gen. 2
246. K. The vocative in ol seems to belong to a form of the stem in ot-; and there was a nominative form in w, as Aijtw, 2ax<^a).
247. N. Herodotus lias an accusative singular in ovv; as 'lovv (for JIui) from "Iw, Io, gen. ^oC?.
248. A few feminines in wv (with regular stems in ov-) have occasional forms like those, of nouns in u>; as arfiiav, nightingale, gen. dijSovis, voc. aijSoi; eixwi/, image, gen. cikoCs, ace. «ikw; ^tl8uv, swallow, voc. ^tAlSoi.
STEMS IN I AND Y.
249. Most stems in i (with nominatives in (?) and a few in v (with nominatives in -us and v) have « in place of their final i or v in all cases except the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, and have w? for o? in the genitive singular. The dative singular and the nonjinative plural are contracted.
250. The nouns (/;) ttoX/? (ttoXl-'), state, (d) irrjxv^ (tttj^u-), cubit, and (to) aorv (jxcttv-}, city, are thus declined: —
|
54 |
|
54 |
|
INFLECTION. |
|
|
|
|
SINGULAR |
|
|
Nom. |
TTOXU |
in)Xvt |
oo-n» |
|
Gen. |
iro'Xiuj |
1TT)XfUf |
atrrios |
|
Dat. |
(jro'X(i) |
iro'Xtt (*">};(«) inix |
(4(TT«0 |
|
Ace. |
iro'Xiv |
irrjxw |
ourru |
|
Voc. |
iro'Xi |
irnYv |
OCTTD |
[261
N. A. V.
rro'Xti
iroX«'oiv
N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.
(Tro'Xffj) iroX«is iro'X« wv iro'Xtcri iro'Xtis
ourrt]
(4(TT«o)
251. For tlie accent of genitives in tws and twv, see 114. For accusatives like ira'Atty and 7n?x"Si see 208, 3.
252. N. The dual in a is rarely left uncontracted.
253. N. "Acrrv is the principal noun in v, gen. itoi. Its genitive, plural is found only in tlie poetic form itrriiav-, but analogy leads t.o Attic dcrrctov.
254. Xo nouns in i, gen. can, were in common Attic use. See Kofj.fu and irtTripi in the Lexicon.
255. N. The original i of the stem of nouns in is (Attic gen.
The Ionic has a genitive in
256. N. Stems in v with gen. ecus have alRO forms in tv, in which ev becomes ef, and drops/:, leaving e: thus
257. Most nouns in w retain v; as (6) t^ fish, which is thus declined: —
|
|
6INGULAR. |
|
DUAL. |
PLURAL. |
|
Nom. |
|
|
|
Nom. tx^"«s |
|
Gen. |
1y0uos |
N. |
A.V. tx8v< |
Gen. Ix8ii |
|
Dat. |
txfl^'i (Horn. 'xflu') |
G. |
D. lx6>Joiv |
J)at. tx8w |
|
Ace. |
(x9 |
|
|
Ace. 'x"5* |
|
Voc. |
|
|
|
|
|
55 |
268J STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG. 55.
258. N. The nominative plural and dual rarely have v<: and u; as i^ut (like accus.) and l^Ov (for ixOvc) in comedy.
259. N. Homer and Herodotus have both i^uus and i'x#>Js in the accusative plural. 'I^tfus here is for l^Ov-vs (2u8, 4).
260. Oxytones and monosyllables have v in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular: see i;f$us. Monosyllables are circumflexed in these cases; as fivs (/xv-), mouse, /xvo's, fivi, jjlvv, fiv; plur. fiva, fxvwv, fivcri, fivas-
261. N. "Ey^tXvt, eel, is declined like i^Js in the singular, and like w^xvj i'1 *ne pl'n'al, with gen. sing. €yx«'Av-os and nom. plur. iyxtKifi.
262. N. For adjectives in us, iia, v, see 319.
STEMS ENDING IN A DIPHTHONG.
263. 1. Ill nouns in «vs, ev of the stem is retained in the nominative and vocative singular and dative plural, but loses u before a vowel; as (6) /3ao-iAev'5 (ftamXiv-), king, which is thus declined: —
|
|
SINVULAIt. |
|
|
DUAL. |
|
l'LIIHAL |
|
Nom. |
Pao-iXtis |
|
|
|
N. V. |
(j3o |
|
Gen. |
pacriXt'ws |
N. |
A.V |
. ^a |
Gen. |
BociX^uv |
|
Dat. |
(fJauiX^i) (3a |
G. |
D. |
BcuriXloiv |
Dat. |
Bao-tXtvo- |
|
Ace. |
PacriXf'd |
|
|
|
Ace. |
pacriXtds |
|
Voc. |
BairiXcv |
|
|
|
|
|
2. So yowus (yoi'tu), parent, uptv'; (Uptv-), priest, ' A^tAAtu-), Achilles, 'OSvaa-tvi ('OSuo-crtu-), Ulysses.
264. Homer has eu in three cases, /JucriAcu?, /3a(ri(v, and /3ucri-but in the other cases ftacnXrjos, ^acriAiji, /3o<7iA^a, (3a
/JoeriA^a?, also dat. plur. dpurT^-fUo-i (from dpio-Ttv?); in pi-opcr names he has cos, e'i, etc., as IIijAe'os, n^Aci' (rarely contracted, as 'Ax'AAd). Herodotus has gen. to«.
265. Nouns in evs originally had stems in rjv, before vowels rjp-From forms in 77/ros, -qpi., T}fc, etc., came the Homeric ijo?, rji, rjix, etc. The Attic ttos, cd, tas came, by exchange of quantity (33), from 7^>s, rja, t}5.$.
266. The older Attic writers (as Thucydides) with Plato have rjt (contracted from jjes) in the nominative plural; as i7r7ri;s, ftaviXT)?, for later t7r7rcis, y3ao-iA
|
56 |
56
INFLECTION.
[267
267. When a vowel precedes, e'
/3ou« (/?ov), oz or cow, (17)
-), ii/iip, and oh (oi-), sheep,
268. The nouns (6, 17
(ypau-), old woman, (17) vavt (vav-
are thus declined: —
SINGULAR
Nom. Pois •ypavs
Gen. Poo's Ypao's
Dat. Pot -ypdt
Ace. pouv ypaiv
Voc. poC -ypau
DUAL.
N. A. V. po'« 7p«
G. D. Pooik YPio'v
PLURAL.
N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.
Povo-C
•ypats •ypaiiv YpawrC
vavs vi us
vatSv vav
v
Viuiw
vavort
vavs
ots
olo's
oU
otv
ot
otf olotv
ot«s
otuv oto-i ots
269. N. The stems of /9oCs, >paOs, and caDs became /3o/r-, ypa-f-, and ca/r- before a vowel of the ending (compare Latin bov-is and nav-is). The stem of oh, the only stein in oi-, was <5fi- (compare Latin ovis). Afterwards f was dropped (90, ti), leaving po-, ypd-, rd-, and 0/-. Attic ««s is for vTjo's (33).
270. In Doric and Ionic raus is much more regular than in Attic:—
Herod.
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
PLURAL. |
|
|
|
Doric. |
Homer. |
Herod. |
Doric. |
Homer. |
|
Nom. |
VCLVS |
vt)C« |
VT|05 |
vafs |
Vtj |
|
Gen. |
vdos |
vtjos, vtds |
v«6s |
vdwv |
V1]WV, V(UV |
|
Dat. |
vdt |
vi) C |
vi] C |
vavo-£, |
VT)UO-C, |
|
|
|
|
|
vaco~o~i |
v^)co~a*b, v&o*a |
|
Ace. |
vavv |
v |
via |
vdas |
vrjas, vc'as |
271. Homer has 7p>;Cs (ypyju-) and 7/)i;ts (7P'ji'-) for ypavs. He has jSo'as and /SoOs in the accusative plural of /Sous.
272, XoCs, three-quart measure, is declined like jSous, except iu the accusatives x0'" and x°'as- (See X05' m 291.)
|
57 |
277]
SYNCOPATED NOUNS.
57
SYNCOPATED NOUNS.
273. Four nouns in -qp (with stems in «p-) are syncopated (65) in the genitive and dative singular by dropping t. The syncopated genitive and dative are oxytone; and the vocative singular has recessive accent (122), and ends in ip-is changed to pa-.
274. These are (o) varr/p (irartp-), father, (tj)
mother, (t;) Ovy&Trjp (dvyarcp-), daughter, aud yaartp-) belly. 1. The first three are thus declined: —
Nom. iranjp
Gen. (iraWpo?) iraTpo's
Dat. (rraW/ji) trarpt
Ace. Voc.
naripa.
8INGULAn.
|x<)rpo's
(j.T)Tt'pa
(duyartpot) Ovyarpo's (Ovyintpi) dv^arpi
flvyoTt'po
Ov'yoTfp
N. A. V. G. D.
irarc'fxuv
N. V. Gen. Dat. Ace.
PLURAL. Lr ipts
(XTjWpUV
Ovyartfts
fiuyoiTpouri OvyaWpas
iraWpuv irarpcuri iraWpas
2. Fao-T^p is declined and accented like
275. 'kdTTjp (6), star, has dcrrpao-t, like a syncopated noun, in the dative plural, but is otherwise regular (without syncope).
276. N. The unsyncopated forms of all these nouns are often used by the poets, who also syncopate other eases of Dvydri^p ■ as Ovyarp*, Bvyarpcs, dvyaTptbe. Homer has dat. plur. ffvya.T^p«rai, and varpi> for irartpujv.
277. 1. 'Atnjp (6), man, drops e whenever a vowel follows ip, and inserts 8 in its place (67). It has av&pow and av&pu>v. In other respects it follows the declension of 7raTij'p.
2. krjixyjT-qp, Devieter (Ceres), syncopates all the oblique cases, and then accents them on the first syllable.
|
58 |
58
INFLECTION.
[278
are thus declined: —
(dv^pos) dvSp6s
(avtpi) dvSp(
(iWpa) avSpa
avep
(ivlpt)
av8p« dvSpoiv
avSpis
dvSpdcri avSpas
278. "A^pand
singular. Norn. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc.
DUAL. N. A.V.
G. D.
PLUKAL. N. V.
Gen. Uat. Ace.
279. The poets often use the unsyncopated forms. Homer has avSpiacn as well as deSpacrt in the dative plural.
Gender op the Third De£len6jon.
280. The gender in this declension must often be learned by observation. But some general rules may be given.
281. ]. Mascui.ink are stems in (v-; as /3auiX«J? (/SacriXfu-), king.
p- (except those in ap-); as Kparrfp (Kparrjp-), mixing-bowl, pdp (tpdp-), starling.
v- (except those in lv-, yov-, oW-); as Kavuiv (icavov-), rule.
vr-; as oSov's (oSon"-), tooth.
■nr- (except those in ttjt-) ; as Xf'/J^s (e(ir]T-), kettle.
(or-; as epws (ipwr-), lote.
2. Exceptions. Feminine are yacrrrjo, belly, K-qp,fate, up, hand, tppyv, mind, clXkvuiv, halcyon, cikujv, image, rjiuiv, shore, usv, earth, itjiv, snow, /j.r'jKwv, poppy, ia8tj<; (iaOrjT-), dress.
Keuter are irvp,fire, (pun ((pur-), light.
282. 1. Ff.mwine are stems in
i- and u-, with noinin. in is and us; as 7roXis (71-0X1-), city, ttr^ui (lo-^i)-), strength.
an-; as vaCs (vav-).
B-, 0-, TrjT-; as «'pis (strife, TaxvT^i (raxvrrp--), speed.
lv-, yov, &ov-; as olktii (olktIv-), ray, oTayuv (o-rayov-), drop, X«XZ8W (^cXc'Sov-), swallow.
2. Excejitions. Masculine are »x'"?' v'Per< ofas, serpent, /JoTpv-s, cluster of grapes, dprjvv-<:, footstool, ixOi-s, fish, ftv-s, mouse,
|
59 |
J86] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 59
p ard.yys, ear of grain, irfAticvs, axe, ir^xu**> cuhit, irovs (iroS-),/oo/, ht
283. Neuter are steins in
t and v with nomii). in i and i>; as rriirtpt, pepper, aarv, city.
as-; as yipas, prize (see 227).
cs-, with noiuin. in o?; as -ytVos (yevtcr-), race (see 227).
a/j-; as y(KTap, nectar.
ar- as
284. Labial and palatal stems are always either masculine or feminine. (See 225.)
285. Variations in gender sometimes occur in poetry: see, for example, aWrjp, sky, and d'ts, heap, in the Lexicon. See also 288.
DlALKUTS.
286. 1. Gen. ami Dat. Dual. Momeric ouv for oiv.
2. Dat. Plur. Homeric ccrai, rarely tat, and tun (alter vowels) ; also at.
3. Most of tlie uncontracted forms enclosed in ( ) in the paia-digms, which Hie not used in Attic prose, are found in Homer or Herodotus; and some of them occur in the Attic poets.
4. For special dialectic forms of some nouns of the third declension, see 232, 2;30, 237, 240, 247, 250, 259, 204, 270, 271, '278,279.
IRREGULAR NOUNS.
287. 1. Some nouns belong to more than one declension. Tims aiforoi, darkness, is usually declined like Aoyo? (192), but sometimes like -ycVo? (228). So Ot'SiVou?, Oedipus, has genitive OiSiVoSot or OJSiti-ov, dative Oi'StVoSt, accusative Oi&'-
ttoSu Or OlSiirovv.
See also ■yc'Aws, ?p«?, l&pw<;, and others, in 291.
2. For the double accusatives in 77 and rjv of 2u)«puT)j?, A-q/xo-adivrfi, etc., see 230.
288. Nouns which are of different genders in different numbers are called heterogeneous ; as (0) o-itos, corn, plur. (toi) cr7ra, (6) iia/xos, chain, (ot) Sta/iot and (to.) Sterna.
289. Defective nouns have only certain cases; as ovap, dream, o^>«Aos, use (only nom. and accus.) ; (rrjv) vi<$ id="iv.i.p1900.1">a, snoiv (only accus.). Some, generally from their meaning, have only one number; as wiidu>, ^>ersuasion, tu 'OAi^tiiu, the Olympic games.
|
60 |
60 INFLECTION. [290
290. Indeclinable nouns have one form for all cases. These are chiefly foreign words, as 'ASap, 'la-paijK; and names of letters, "AX<£u, B^ra, etc.
291. The following are the most important irregular nouns:—
1. "AiSqs, Hades, gen. ov, etc., regular. Horn. 'AiSrp, gen. ao or «i>, dat. 7], aec. rjv; also"Ai'8o9, vAtSt (from stem 'Ai'S-).
2. dra£ (6), Icing, avaKTOt, etc., voc. ava£ (poet, ava, in addressing Gods).
3. "Aprji, Ares, "Aptoos (poet. "Apeos), ("Apti) "Apti, ("Apea) "Apij or'Ap^y, "Apes (Horn. also'Apcs). Hoin. also *Ap7jo«, "Aprji, "Aprja.
4. Stem (dpv-), gen. (rov or rijs) apvus, lamb, apvi, apva.; pi. apvts, dpi/wv, dpi/acrt, dpvas. In the noni. sing, d/^vo's (2d decl.) is used.
5. yaXa. (to), milk, ydAaKTOs, yaAa/crt, etc.
C. ytAwj (o), laughter, -yt'AujTo?, etc., regular: in Attic poets ace. ye'A.a)Tu or yt'Awv. In Hoin. generally of second declension, dat. yiXw, ace. ytAu. yikwv (yikov'i). (See 287, 1.) ♦
7. yon; (to), tuee, yoyaroi, yovari, etc. (from stem yofaT-); Ion. and poet. yovVuros, yovvwn, etc.; Honi. also gen. yowos, dat. youi-i', pi. yovva, yojvu>v, yovvtacn.
8. yvvrj (rj) wife, ywaixos, yuraiKt', yvvaiKa, yuVat; dual yvvaiKf., yvvaiKoiv; pi. yui/aixts, yui/aiKwi/, yvvai^i, yvva?Kas.
9. StvSpov (to), (rec, StVSpov, regular (Ion. StVSptov); dat. sing. 8«V8p«; dat. pi. StV8pc
10. St'os (To'),/eQ)-, Se'ous, S«t, etc. Horn. gen. Scibus.
11. Sopw (rd), spear (cf. ■yeivw); (from stem SopaT-) hoparo1;, Sopan;' pi. SdpaTa, etc. Ion. ami poet. Sovparos, etc.; Epic also gen. Soupds, dat. Soupi; dual SoOpt; pi. SoJpu, Sou'ptov, Sovpcacn. Poetic gen. Sopo?, dat. Sopt and Sdpet.
12. tpw? (5), /ooe, tpaiTOs, etc. In poetry also epos, epw, tpov.
13. Zeu; (Aeol. Atu's), ^tus, Aw, Au', At'a, Zcv. Ion. and poet. Zijvo's, Zrjvt, Zrjva- Pindar lias At for Ait.
14. @tfu<; {rj), justice (also as proper name, Tliemis), gen. ®([u8o<;, etc., vcg. like |p«. Horn. ^e'/xto-Tos, etc. l'ind. Oc/xiros, etc. Hdt. gen. Otfxioi;. In Attic prose, indeclinable in &'/xts «m", /as erf; as O
15. JSpojs (6), sweat, JSpuJTos, etc. Horn, lias dat. 2Sp
16. Kapd (to), head, poetic; in Attic only nom., accus., and voc. sing., with dat. jedpa (tragic). Horn. Kapt], gen. ndpr/ros, Kap-qaTos, Kpaaros, k/jutos ; dat. Ktiprp'i, Kapyun, Kpaan, Kparl; ace. (tov)
a, (to) xdpij or Kap p.lur. nom. Kapd, Kaprjara, Kpdara; gen.
|
61 |
291J IRREGULAR NOUNS. 01
Kpanov; dat. Kpacri; ace. «apa witli (tous) Kparaf, nom. and aec. pi. also Kaprjva, gen. Kapjjr&w. Sop)], (to) xpaTa.
17. xpivov (to), /i7_i/, Kpivov, etc. In plural also xpivea (Hdt.) and KptVwi (poetic). (See 287, ].)
18. kuw (6, ij), kvov. the vest from .stem /cuy-, /two's.
KVV(, (CUWlJ pi. KVVK, KVVWV, KV(Tt, KVVClS.
19. Aus (6), *(onc, Horn. Aaus, poetic; gen. Aao? (or Auou), dal. Xai.', ace. Attui/, £.v; dual AS<; plur. Aair, Auco-cn, or Ao«(ti.
20. AtVa (Horn. AiV, generally with cAuiu, oil), fat, oil: probably AjVa is neut. accus., a;id Xlv is dat. fo)' Ajttj'. See Lexicon.
21. fiujiTw; (6, 17), witness, gen. fiapTvpos, etc., dat. pi. jxipTvat. Horn. nom. /xaprupos (2d decl.).
22. /ido-Tt| (^), w/iip, gen. fMcrlyot, etc., Horn. dat. fuxarl, ace.
2il. ots (ij), s/iee;j, for Attic declension see 2(58. Horn.
24. ovupos (6), oveipoi/ (to), dream, gen. ou; also ovap (to), gen. oifi'puTOt, dat. dftipaTt; plur. Sfupara, ovuparuiv, ovtipturi.
25. oo-at (tu), dual, ei/es, poetic; plur. gen. ocrcru)i', dat. oWot? or oo"0"oio"t.
2G. opvis (6, rj), bird, see 2-2u. Also poetic forms from stem opvt-, nom. and ace. sing, oputi, opviv; pi. opvws, opvtuiv, ace. opi/tis or opns. Hdt. ace. opvWa. Doric gen. opvi^o?, etc.
27. oil's (to), ear,
28. FIi/i;'^ (>}), P«?/x, Ilvx-co?, IIvkvi, lL/Ki/a (also Hi'i.-K-os, etc.). 20. Trpt'o-^u? (6), old man, elder (properly adj.), poetic, ace. vpi-
crfivv (as adj.), voc. nptcrjiv; pi. Trpe'cr/fos (Kp. irp«'o-/?ijts), chiefs, elders: the common word in this sense is npta^vT^, distinct i'rom ■7rp(.
30. rrvp (to), fire (stem irvp-'), irupds, 7rupi'; pi. (to.) irvpa, watch-fires, dat. rrupoi?.
31. o-we'os or o-7relos (to), cau«, Epic; ottei'ous,
32. Tacij or Taws, Attic Taw? (6), peacock, like vfak (19") • also dat. Tttuivt, Tauio-i, chiefly poetic.
33. tu<£o id="iv.i.p1941.1">s (6), whirlwind; declined like veik (196). Also proper name Tv<^uj?, in poetry generally' Tv^ id="iv.i.p1941.2">iovos, Tu^>oin, Tu^uva. (See 287, 1.)
84. vSuip (to), water, vSaros, vSan, etc.; dat. plur. vSao-i.
|
62 |
62 INFLECTION. [292
35. vlo<; (6), son, vloxi, etc., reg.; also (from stein viv-) ule'os, (v'ui) v'ui, {vita), v'ui, v'uoiv; (m«s) v'uls, vli
30. x£''p (^), /iam/, xapek, x^P't etc. i but X'P0'" (Poet- X"P0 and )((.pal (poet, xtiptocri or xcipcut): poet, also p'>s, x£Pl'i etc.
37. (x^os) xoC; (6), mound, ^oos, x°'> x()2" (like y3ou?, 2US).
38. ^oi"t (6), three-quart measure: seu 272. Ionic and late noin. xoo'Si w't''1 8eu- XO£U)S> X°"?l etlC'' reiju]arly like Ilapauvs and Awpieu's ('207).
30. XP">? (")> ■s^'ln> XP"7""15' XPWT'' XP"Ta dat. ^p
I/Ocai, Kndikos.
292. The endings -61 and -Btv may be added to the stem of a noun or pronoun to denote place : —
1. -61, denoting where; as dAAo-#i, elsewhere; ovpavo-di, in
2. -6tv denoting whence; as o'no-Otv, from home; avr6-6tv, from the very spot.
293. The enclitic -St (141, 4) added to the accusative denotes whilhcr; as Me'yapdSe, to Mequra, 'EAcvaTi'aSe, to Eleuais. After cr, -St becoiui's £e (see IS; 28, 3); as "Afliji/iife (for 'Affyvas-So, (0 Athens, ®ijPa^( (for ®iy/id?-8t), /o Thabcs, Ovpi^t, out of doors.
294. The ending -
295. N. In Homer, the forms in -Ol ami -0ti' may be governed by a preposition as genitives; as 'IA10& vpo, before Ilium: c'£ u60tv, from the. sea.
296. X. Sometimes a relic of an original locative case is found with the ending t in the singular and
297. NT. The Kpio ending
|
63 |
301] ADJECTIVES-FIKST AND-SECOND DECLENSIONS. 63
ADJECTIVES.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS (Vowel Di:clknsio.n).
298. 1. Most adjectives in 09 have three endings, 0?, 77, ov. The masculine and neuter arc of the second declension, and the feminine is of the first; as
2. If a vowel or p precedes o?, the feminine ends in d; as aftov, d^ld, aijiov, worthy. Hut adjectives in oos have 07? in the feminine, except those in poos; as dirXoos, cnrXorj, dirkoov, nwijjle; ndpoos, dOpod, dOpoov, crowded.
299. lofyus, wise, and a£io<;, worthy, are thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Nom. cro
i-'ttL. O'OC&U) 0*0(1)11 O"O(pbJ CtC^^ (XtLCL CLCL^
Acc.
JS. A. V . O*0a)U> CT'OroCl (TOmU CLrlW CLclOL fttLW
Li. L), O"O(I>0LV ^OQ>0>IV 0"0a>0lV ClClOLV OlclCllV ttc^O^V
Pl.UKAL,
• • ^T O ^p 0 C ^^ O ^p QL L ^^ O ^p GL CL C *■ 01 CL11CL t d 11» d
VjC-11. O^OQ^lO V CTOCpCQV ^0(DWV ClcLCUV (Xc tW V CLcVCJ V
Dit A" A" A" 'fcf ' C ' f
*»CC* ^TQwOVS ^O0LS CT*O(pCC CLcLOVS C^C^CL? CtC**CL
300. So pxKpo?, /xaKptl, fxaKpov, long; »p.n. fiaxpov, fjuixpa1;,
fJMKpOV't dat. UUXKpiO, fXQKpiLi /X
etc., like a£ios (except in accent).
301. This is by far the largest class of adjective's. All participles in os and all superlatives (•J.'JO) ai-n declined like o-o<£ds, and all comparatives in rcpos (300) are declined like /xaxpos (except in accent).
|
64 |
64 INFLECTION. [302
302. The nominative and genitive plural of adjectives in os accent the feminine like the masculine: thus
For leminines in a of the third and first declensions combined, see 318.
303. The masculine dual forms in w and oiv in all adjectives and participles may bo used for the feminine forms in d and aw.
304. Some adjectives in os, chiefly compounds, have only two endings, os and ov, the feminine being the same as the masculine. They are declined like crowds, omitting the feminine.
305. There are a few adjectives of the Attic second declension ending in us and
306. "AXoyos, irrational (304), and iXeco?, gracious (305), are thus declined: —
si.voulah.
(Xcus tXiwv
|
Nom. |
aXo*yos dXo'yov |
|
(icn. |
dXo'yoxj |
|
Dat. |
aXdyu) |
|
Ace. |
aXoyow |
|
Voc. |
aXo^yt aXo'yov |
|
|
DUAL. |
|
N. A.V. |
dX |
|
G.I). |
dXo'yoiv |
|
|
PLURAL. |
|
N. V. |
0X0701 aXo-ya |
|
Gen. |
dXdYo>f |
|
Dat. |
dXo'yois |
|
Ace. |
dXovous aXovci |
tXcu
IXta iXcwv
IXtws HXca
307. Some adjectives in os may be declined with either two or three endings, especially in poetry.
308. Adjectives in ws, oil/, commonly nave a in the neuter plural. But c«7rX
309. flW, full, hits a feminine in a: irXt'cos. TrXt'o, iriu>v. The defective crux; (from
|
65 |
310] ADJECTIVES-FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 65
310. Many adjectives in tos and oos are contracted. Xp6-atos, golden, apyvpcoi, of silver, and u7rAdos, simple, are thus declined: —
SINGULAR.
j^om. (xP fff00 XP^**"®^ Cxp^^) XPU^"^
Gpii ( y pvcT^ov") xpv^ov (xP^^^^O XP^^"^5 (xpvGtov)
Dat. (xP^^v)
N.A. G. D.
I'LUHAL.
Noin. (xP^ffot) XP^cr0^ (.Xpvvca-') pwra (xPvfft:a) XP^0"0-
Geu (yputT^wj'1) Ypij^uv fypvct^t*)!'') vpvffwv (xP^^'^k"') XP^^****v
Dat. (xp1"^^'?) XPV^"®^5 (xP^ff^atO Xpu^"^s Ace.
SINGULAR.
Nora. (dp7i!pfos) dp'yupoCs (apyvpia) dp-yvpa (a.pyvpeov') dp'yupovv
Gen. (apyvptou^ dpyupov (dpyupfas) dpyvpds (apyvptov') dpyvpoO
Dat. rdp7up^u;) &pvupu> (txpyvp^Q) ^PY^PQ" (flp7*'P'|fl) ttpvupto
Ace. (dp7upeoe) dp'yupouv (dp7up^av) dp*yupdv (apyvptov) dpyupovv
DUAL.
JST. A. (dp7i>/>^w) dpyupu (dp7^p^a) dpyvpd (dp7up^a;) dp*yvpto G. D. (ipyvptotv) dp'yupoiv (apyvplaiv~) dp-yvpatv (dp7u/)^oi>') dpyvpoiv
PLURAL.
Noui. (dp7i!pto() dp-yupOk (dp7i5ptoi) dp-yvpat (dp7upta) dp-yupd G611- (dp7up^aji') dpvupuv (&pyvpto)v' dpvvp&v (Sipyiipfujv') dpvvpuv Djit. (ap7^p^ot^) ttpyvpois (dp7up/a(?) dpvup
siWiiiun.
isoni- (an-Xoos) airXovs (a7roTj) dirX^ (dirXooy) dirXoxiv
Gen. (aTrXo'ou) dirXoC (airXo'iO dirXiis (airXo'on) dirXou
Dat. (aTrXoy) a-irXw (airXo'i]) cittX^ (aTrXdw) dirXw
Ace. (airXoov) dtrXovv (aVXo^v) dirXi^v (a7rXooi') dirXouv
DUAL.
A. A. (airXo'jj) aTrXw (dirKoa) dirXd (aVXo'w) dirXw
(j. D. (clttXo'oiv) dirXotv (dirXoaiy) dirXaty (dirXdoiv) dirXaiv
|
66 |
66 INFLECTION. [311
ii.riiiAL.
Nom. (aVXo'oi) airXoi (dirXdat) dirXai (a;rXo'a) dirXa
Gen. (airXowv) dirXuv (airXo'ui') dirXwv (airXowy) dirXwv
Dat. (arrXo'ois) dirXois (aVXo'ais) dirXais (aTrXooi?) dirXois
ACC. (airXoous) d-irXoiis (aTrXo'as) d-rrXas (drrXoa) dirXd
311. All contract forms of these adjectives are perispomena; except <1 id="iv.i.p2054.1"> for «'«) and 6u> in tliu dual (sw 1*0=5- 1). See also 203, 2 and 30, 1. Compounds in 005 leave oa in the neuter plural uncon-tracted. No distinct vocative forms occur.
THIRD (on Consonant) DECLENSION.
312. Adjectives belonging only to the third declension have two endings, the feminine being the same as the masculine. Most of these end in 779 and es~ (stems in to--), or in
|
313. 'AXi |
rjdijs, true, |
and €v&aifj.(i>v, |
happy, are thus |
|
declined: — |
|
|
|
|
M. F. |
|
X. |
|
|
|
|
sim.;i: i.Ait. |
|
|
Nom. aXijQ^s |
|
dx^e*? |
(v8aCp.uv €v8ai|iow |
|
Gen. (d |
Xt/^/os) dXt]0ois |
|
«v8cU(iOvos |
|
])at. (d |
Xrjflft) dXr)8(i |
|
|
|
ACC. {^Q,AY)dtCij |
dx^efj |
|
cv8aCp.ova (OSaifiov |
|
Voc." |
aXijOts |
|
liiSainov |
|
|
|
DDAI.. |
|
|
N.-A.V. (d |
.17Wf) dXT)6«i |
|
«08aC}i.ovc |
|
G. D. (dXTjWon/) dXijfloi |
v |
fvSai)i6voiv |
|
|
|
|
I'l.KUAI.. |
|
|
N.V. (&VB{«1 |
1 dXi]8«is (dXi |
)(9/a) dXi]8fj |
cii8aC|iov |
|
Gen. (d; |
|
|
tiSaiiiovui- |
|
Dat,. |
dXT)6«Vi |
|
cvSaifioo-i |
|
Ace. aXriO«is |
f dXi |
7 |
€u8ai^xovas |
314. For the recessive, accent of neuters like cu(Satyu>i/ and of many barytone compounds in 77s (as airdfiKr)';, aurupxc;), see 122. "AA^Oc?, indeed .' is proparoxytone.
315. In adjectives in 77s, ca is contracted to u after e, and to a or rj after 1 or v; as ivkXctjs, //lorivvs, acc. («vK
|
67 |
320] ADJECTIVES-FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 67
healthy, (iyua) vytu and vyirj; ci
For £iy in the accusative plural, .see L'OS, 3.
316. N. Adjectives compounded of nouns and a prefix are generally declined like those nouns; as iviX.iris, ivikiri, hopeful,
ful, gen. tv^dpLTO^, ace. ti^apiv, iv^api. Hut, compounds of iruTryp and )J.rjTTip end in wp (gen. opo?), and those of 7rdAi<; in iv (gen. iSos); as awdrwp, onrarop, gen. uTruTopos, fatherless; airoAi?, diroAi, without a country, ge-ii. uttoAc^os.
317. J''or tlifc peculiar declension of comparatives in uv (stem in o>-), sec 358.
FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS COMBINED.
318. Adjectives of this class have the masculine and neuter of the third declension and the feminine of the first. The feminine always has a in the nominative and accusative singular (175) ; in the genitive and dative singular it has a after a vowel or diphthong,
otherwise ■>].
Qv of the feminine genitive plural is circiiinflexed regularly (12-1). Compare 302.
For Jeniiiiine dual forms, see ^(Jo.
319. (Sterna in v.) Stems in v form adjectives in f?, eia, v. The masculine and neuter are declined like tttjxvs and aa-rv (2oO), except that the genitive singular ends in ov (not
320. r //L-y'9, sweet, is thus declined: —
S1NGUI.AH. NODI. "yXvKVS "yXuKda ^XvKV
Gen. -yX.vK«os -yui«tas yXvxios
Dat. (yXuKtt} y\)Kil yvKti
ACC. ■y^l)Kvv -yXuicuav "yXvKxi
N.A.V. G.I).
|
68 |
68
INFLECTION.
[321
PLCRAI..
N. V. (yiiKfrs) -yXvicas -yXuMiai
Gen. yXvtciav yXvKHwv
Dat. fvKlcri. ^Xuwtcus
Ace. -yXui«is -yXvKtids
-yXvKt'a
321. The feminine stem in (ta-comes from the stem in
322. N. The Ionic feminine of adjectives in us has ta. Homer has ciipia (for tvpvv) as accusative of (vpvi, wide.
323. N. Adjectives in us are oxytone, except Br/Xv;, female, fresh, and ij/xio-us, half. ®^Xvs sometimes has only two terminations in poetry.
324. 1. (Stems in av and cv.) Two adjectives have Stems in av, /x«'A.as (fxeXav-), fxtXawa, fxtXav, black, aud TaAus (TaAai/-), TaAaifa, rdXav, wretched.
2. One has a stem in < id="iv.i.p2157.1">/, Wp^i/ (Ttpti/-), rlpiwa, ripiv, tender (Latin tener).
325. Me'Xas and T«'pi;i' are thus declined: —
Nom. |x
Gen. ^icXavos
Dat. |WXavi
Ace. (it'Xava
Voc. u.«Xay
N.A.V. G. D.
SINGULAR.
ll^XcilVClV llcXdV
p.lXaiva p.(Xav
DL'AI..
|j.cXa(vd fit'Xavt ficXatvaiv puXdvoiv
T«'ptiva riptv
T«'p«vos T«p«ivi]S T«'pivos
Tt'pevi Ttptivfl rtpivi
T^pCLvav T^ptv
T«'p«iva T
Ttptva
T^ptV
T«'p«v« TCp
TiplVOlV
T«ptVOlV
T
TCpCVUV T
N.V. p.^Xavcs (jn'Xaivai jilXava
(icn. ^.cXdvwv picXaivcov piiXdvwy
Dat. n
Aee. (it'Xavas (j.(Xa(vds |«'Xaya T^ptvas Tcpc(yd9 Ttp«va
326. 'J'he feminine stems p.(.Xat.va- and rtpuva- come from p.cXavia- and repivux- (S4, 5).
327. hike the masculine and neuter of rtprjv is declined apprjv, appiv (older apcrr/v, apaiv), male.
|
69 |
333] ADJECTIVES-FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. fi9
328. (Stems in vr.) Adjectives from stems in evr end in et
329. ^apt'etf, graceful, and 7ra? are thus declined: —
SINGULAR.
|
Nom. x^"15 |
XapUcrora |
XaP"v |
iras |
irao-a |
Tav |
|
Gen. xapkVTOs |
Xapu'o-o-rjs |
V CipCcVTOS |
iravTds |
■irdo-Tis |
•iravTos |
|
Dat. xaP(fvTl |
Xopit' |
V oipCfVTV |
iravTC |
irdo-fl |
■travr( |
|
Ace. xaP^ |
XapUtra-av |
Y Op{(V |
iravTa |
•n-do-av |
irdv |
|
Voc. xap^*v |
X^pUa'o'a |
XapUf |
|
|
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
|
N. A.V. xop£«vT« |
XapuVo-d |
Xapi |
|
|
|
|
G. D. xaPl«'VTOtv |
Xap^Vo-acK |
apUVTOLV |
|
|
|
|
|
|
PI.UKAL. |
|
|
|
|
N. V. apUvr |
Xapl«ro-ai |
Xap(«vra |
wavTfs |
irdo-ai |
irdvTtt |
|
Gen. xapL |
apu |
XaptcVruv |
irdfTuv |
irourti/v |
iron-ui |
|
Dat. xttP;<0"1 |
Xapi«cr |
XapCto-i |
ird |
ird |
ird |
|
Ace. xaP^(VTa5 |
XapwWds |
X«.pitvTa |
irovTas |
ird |
irdvra |
330. Most adjective stems in evr, all in avr except -rravr- (rra^j, and iill in ovt except ikovt- and S.kovt- (ikwv and axwy, 333), belong to participles. (See 334.)
331. 1. The nominatives xapUi? and xaP'lv are ^or XaP't>/r"9 and xapuvT; and?ras and jrac for Trarr-s and irair- (7!'). Tlic a in tup is irregular; but Homer li;us avav and npo-rrav. For tlie accent of irilvTwv and iracn, see li?S. Ilucrdv is regular (31S).
2. For the feminine xapLnava (for x"P"i"-ui from a stem in ct-), see 84, 1; and for dai. plur. ^o/x'tcri, (for xaPltT-<n)i see 74. Ilacra is for 7ravr-ta (84, 2).
332. Homer occasionally contracts adjectives in ^as, as rifxrjs (for Ti/iTjcis), Ti/j^vra (for n/xr/tKru), valuable. The Attic pouts -Sometiiues t:ontiact tliosc in ous • as 7raKov<;t 7rAaKoCi/TO? (for ttAxi-ko(cs, TrXaKOtvTOs), flat (cake), vrcpowra (for vTipoivra), winged, aWaXowrcra (for tu6adc(Tcro), flaming, irripovaaa (for TTtpo'tauu), /a«iToCrTa (for /xtAn-o«ro-a, OS, 3), honied (ctd~c). So names of places (properly adjectives) ; as 'EAaioCt, 'EAcuowtos, FAacus, EAaioCcrcra (an island), from forms in -oas. -oecrcra. So 'Pu/iyoCs,
'Vafivovvro<;, Rhamnux (from -dfty). (See 'M, 5.)
333. One adjective in uv,
|
70 |
70
INFLECTION.
[334
PARTICIPLES IN uiv, on?, a?, et?, £
334. All participles, except those in o
335. Aiwv (Xvovt-), looming, StoWs (SiSorr-), giving, nOiU (tiBlvt-), placing, himvix; (StiKvvvr-), showing, laras (io-toit-), erecting, Z>v {6vt-), being, (present active participles of Avu>,
Ol'SbJ/Xl, TiOljfJil, SlLKVVfll, i(TTTJfJLl, illld tlfJLl), Ai(TUS (AvCTaiT-), /Wl'-
ivg loosed, and AtAnK-iu? (AcXukot-), having loosed (first aorist and perfect participles of Aim), ai'e thus declined: —
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
SINGULAR.
iav Xvoucra XSov Si8ov$
Xwvtos Xiiovio-rjs X^ovtos SiSovtos
Xvovti XvoiKrt] Xiiovn SiSovtl
XvowTa Xvuv
Xiiovtrav Xvov Xiovcra Xvov
|
SiSoicra |
8i8ov |
|
8i8ov |
8i86vtos |
|
Sl8oV(TT) |
SlSovti |
|
8i8oi) |
SiSov |
|
8i8ov |
8i86v |
DUAL.
N. A.V. Xvovt< Xvoitrd i>ovrt 8i56vt€ 8i6ova"d 8i8ovt€
O. I). Xuovroii' Xvovcaiv Xvovtoiv 8iSovtoiv 8i6ovo"aiv 8u86vtoiv
PH'UAI-.
N. V. Xuovxts Xuou
Cleii. Xvovtwv Xxjovctwv Xijovtwv 8180vtwv 8i8ov(T«v 8i86vt«v
Dat. Xiiouci Xuovcrais Xuov
Acc. XvovTas Xvovo"ds XtiovTa 8186vTas 8i8ova"ds 8180vra
Nom. ti0(Cs Ti0«io-a tl6cv 8clkvvs 8ciKvvcra 8cikv0v
(Jen. tiGc'vtos TiOtior^s ti8«vtos Scikvvvtos BciKv^o-iqs Sukvvpvtos
Dat. Tt8«VTl Tt8(LO"TJ TtBcVTl 8€lKVVVTl SctKV^O"^ &UKVVVTI
Acc. TiS^'vTa Tt8«i(rav ti8^v 8«iKvijvTa S«iKvii(rav Sukvvv
Voc. TtBtis Ti8u
UUAL.
N. A.V. Tt8^VT€ Tl6(C(rd TlStVTC 8tlKVlJVT« 8ciKV
G. D. Tl8tVTOlV TtStlCratV Tl8c'vTOlV 8€lKVVVTOlV S«lKVV
I'LUIUI..
N.V. ti8«'vtcs Tiflturai tiHvtol 8
Gen. Tl8
8tiKvvvTtt
8CLKVVVTWV
Ace. Ti8«'vTas
|
71 |
337]
PARTICIPLES.
71
ic"Tcls t
Gen. iiTTavTos to"Tfl.o"i)s La-TavTOs XiicravTOS Xvcrouri^s Xvcavros
Dat. io-toLvtl l(TT(i
Acc. icTTavra icrTacrav Ictciv Xo
Voc. Io-t^s icTTtt
N. A.V. t(rrdvT« icrTdtrd
v
G. D. icrravTOLv itTTdo-aiv icrravTOiv XucrdvTOiv Xi
tiTTavTwv to"TCurwv
N. V.
Gen.
])at. to-Tdtri to-Tda-ais l
A CO. t
Xia-avra X«
XvcdvTwv Xjcrdo"tiv Xvo-dvTwv
X«crdo-i Xv(ra
Xvcracrds Xvo*avTa
|
|
|
|
SING I1 LA 11. |
|
|
|
Nom. |
div |
oJcra |
5v |
XivKUS |
X.«XvK»;a X |
|
Gen. |
OVTOS |
otia-tis |
6'vtos |
X |
XcXvKvias X«Xukotos |
|
Dat. |
OVTl |
ovo-i) |
SvTl |
X«XVKOTI |
X(K»Kuia XtX)KOTl |
|
Acc. |
6'vTa |
ovtrav |
6V |
XcXvKora |
X |
|
Voc. |
uv |
ova-a |
|
XcXllKWS |
XcXvKvta X |
N.A.V.
ouo-d.
|
G. D. |
OVTOlf |
outrai |
|
N. V. |
OVTIS |
|
|
Gen. |
fivTWV |
OV(TUy |
fivTOiv
XtXuKOTOlV XiXvKUiaiV XtXvKOTOlV
I'LUIIAL.
ivTa XtXuK6T€s XtXvKuiai XcXuKora
i'vTwv XiXvKorotv X
Acc. SvTas oStrds 6'vTa
XtXuicdTas X«X«K«ids
336. All participles in
337. ]. For feminines in onaa, ucra, v
2. Perfects in tus (with stems in ot-) have an irregular femi-niue in via.
|
72 |
72 INFLECTION. [338
338. The full accent of polysyllabic barytone participles ap. pears in fiovkivtav, fiovXtvovcru., fiovkiiov, and ftovkivcras, (lovkiv-ouoa, fiovktvaav. (See 1;M.)
339. For the accent of the genitive and dative of monosyllabic participles, see l'J!) and the inflection of uv above. Thus $ck has gen. &Vtos, Ocvruiv, etc.
340. Participles in dwv,
SINGULAR.
ii, [TifXCLiJVJ TIULWV (T(ixdoU(TCl) Ttllul^Cl (Ttildof) TllLtdV
G. f Tl/xttOfTOs) TILLWVTOS (TlilttOlJ(T77S) TIIAWCT1S (TlltdoPTO?^ TIULUVTOS
D. (Tj/ido^r^) tIjxwvti (Tr/taoi/fTT?) Tijxaxrfl (r^dovrt) tC^liuvti
DUAL.
G. (Ti/ia6fT0i^) TLfj.wvTOtv (rt^aoiJaaiv) Tip-uia-aiv (TifxaovTou>) Tifi.wvrotv
PLUHAL.
N. (rt/idovrfs) tijiwvt
G. (Ttjza6fTU)v) tijjlwvtwv (rt^uioycrwv) Tijj.&)(rwv (rt/iaoi'Twi') Tijiwi^ruv
1). (Tt^doiytri) Tifiuxri (TtnaoiJa'ats) Ti^iwtrais (Tt^dofffi) ti^iwcti
A. (Ti^cdoiraj) Ti^uivTas (Tj/iaoucai) Ti^iuKrds (Ti^doyTa) TijitSvTa
(tXiXOLOVCTOLi') TVLlW^Ctt rTtildoCTCl) TtllWVTCl
SINGULAR.
N, (<£ id="iv.i.p2424.1">i((wi') <| id="iv.i.p2424.2">iXajv (0iX^ou(ra)
1). (0tX^OKTl) <| id="iv.i.p2426.1">lX0VVTl (0iXfOU£T^) AlXoVCTTl (0t^Ol'T() (ttXoOvTL
A. f 0icOl'TCt J anXoVVTOL ((plK^OV J'Cic) (DtXoVff'ClV (
V, f 0iXcuf) a>iXu>v f d>i4ov(Tcl ) olXov^ol (d>iX^oi'') cptXovv
.N. (0(Xtoct^j (biXouvtc (0tXfovffo.)
|
73 |
340]
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
73
341. Present participles of verbs in 6m (contracted u>) are declined like
342. A few second perfect participles in aws of the /u- form have oxm in the feminine, and retain io in the oblique cases. They are contracted in Attic; as Horn, tfrraws, torawcru, earaos, Attic ccrroki eo-rSou, toro's or €
s, etc.; pi. toraiTis, ctrTuxrai, €aTa)Ta, gen. torulraii', ta i/, etc. (See 508.)
ADJECTIVES WITH ONE ENDING.
343. Some adjectives of the third declension have only one ending, which is both masculine and feminine; as <£vyas, <£uyd8o9, fugitive; anrns, airouSos, childless; ayi/cis, dyewros, unhwum; oi/oAki?, di'aAKiSos, weak. The oblique cases occasionally occur as neutei'.
344. The poetic TSpis, knowing, has ace. T8pcv, voc. iSpi, Horn, pi. TSpits.
345. A very few adjectives of one termination are of the first declension, ending in as or r)<:; as ycwdSa<;, noble, gen. yewddov.
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 346. The irregular adjectives, /xe'yas (n«ya-, /xcyaAo-), great,
7roAv5 (iroAu-, ttoAAo-), much, and jrpao^ (npao-, 7rpaii-), OY
aos, mild, are thus declined: —
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
|
|
Norn. )i£yci$ |
(W-yaXi! |j. |
iroXvs |
ttoXXt] |
•iroXv |
|
Gen. ficyaXou |
LL€VOlXt)9 LLtVOkXoVI |
iroXXov |
ttoXXtjs |
iroXXov |
|
Dat. (icydXiu |
LLCVO^T) LKVtxXw |
iroXXw |
■jtoXXt] |
iroXXw |
|
Acc. jii'yav |
filyoXrjV (itya |
iroXtlv |
TToXXiJV |
iroXv |
|
Voc. ji<-yaX< |
|
|
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
|
N. A. V. ficyaXu |
IM-yaXa (icyaXu |
|
|
|
|
G. D. pi'ydA.oiv |
lACyaXaiv ^icyaXoiv |
|
|
|
|
|
l'l.llKAL. |
|
|
|
|
N. V. [KyaXoi |
ficyaXau ^icyaXa |
iroXXot |
•n-oXXaC |
iroXXd |
|
'■en. iLivtxXwv |
(M-yaXuv ^KyaXuv |
iroXXwv |
iroXXuiv |
troXXwv |
|
Dat. ^icyoXois |
|j.(yaXais p. |
■iroXXots |
iroXXats |
iroXXois |
|
Acc. luvaXovc |
iMvaXds utvaXa |
iroXXov's |
iroXXos |
iroUa |
|
74 |
|
74 |
|
INFLECTION. |
|
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
Nom. |
irpios |
irpacia |
wpdov |
|
(Jen. |
irpaou |
irpd<(a$ |
irp^iov |
|
Dat. |
irpa'u |
•n-pdii(j |
irpa> |
|
Ace. |
irpijov |
irpdeCav |
irpaov |
|
|
|
DI.'AI.. |
|
|
N. V. |
irp<^u id="iv.i.p2546.1"> |
arpdcCd |
irp<2LW |
|
G. I). |
irpaoiv |
irpdciaiv |
n-p(jioiv |
|
N. A. |
irpaoi or irpads |
l'Ll'UA I.. Trpdtiai |
•n-paa or wpcU'a |
|
Gen. |
irpdiuv |
"TTpCKllOV |
irpdi'uv |
|
Dat. |
irpoiois or irpd«' |
irpcutais |
irpijiois or irpaji |
|
A CO. |
irpqlous |
irpdtids |
irpf a or irpdia |
[347
347. N. IloXXo's, r), oV, is found in llomur ami Herodotus, declined regularly tbrougliout. Homer lias forms jtoX^os,toX^j,iroX/uv,iroX^o-i,etc., not. to be eonfounded with epic forms of iro'Xiv ('^55): al.so wovis, irovXu.
348. N. npfo? has two stems, one irppo-, from wliicli the masculine and neuter are generally formed; and one wpaii-, from which the feminine and some other forms come. There is an epic form irp»;ts (lyric ir/adus) comini; from the latter stem. The forms belonging to the two stems differ in accent.
349. N. Some, compounds of nois (iro5-), .wot, have ovy in the nominative neuter and the accusative masculine; as rplirovs, Tplirow, three-footed.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
' I. COMl'ARISOX DV -TfpOS, -TOT0S.
350. Most adjectives add repo? (stem rfpo-) to the stem to form the comparative, and raTo? (stem tuto-) to form the superlative. Stems in o with a short penult lengthen o to w hel'ore Tfpo? and raroi;. For the declension, see, 301. E.g.
KoC<£os (Kov
5o<^)os (tro< id="iv.i.p2578.1"/>o-), wise, cro^wTtpos, wiser, cro
Sf/il/OJ ((T(fiVO-), ailf/Wit, (Tt/XWiTfpOS,
HiKpos [wixpo-), bitter, TTiKportpoi,
'O^u's (o£u-), sharp, o^irrtpos, o^vra
Mt'X
'^ {&
j6i
|
75 |
gjg] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 75
351. Stems in o do not lengthen o to
352. McVos, middle, and a few others, drop o of the stem and add airepot and cututos; as p.«ros (fieiro-), ftccatVepoy,
353. Adjectives in oo? drop final o of the stem and add
354. Adjectives in ujv add «rr«pos and io-Taros to the stem; as
355. Adjectives in «y add repos and raros to the. stfiin in it-(331, 2); as apUn, graceful, (em. ^apucraa (^apur-), xapuoripos, XupuWuros for )(apUT-Ttpo<;, ^apiCT-TuTos (71).
356. Adjectives may be compared by prefixing /xaAAov, sum, and fuSJ^Lcrra, most; as /xaAAoi' crowds,?«orc !«?.
II. Comparison by •iu>', -icttos.
357. 1. Some adjectives, chiefly in k? and po
'HSut, sweet, r/Siuiv, ySiaros.
, swift, raytuiv (rare), commonly 0acrcru>v (95, 5),
p ^
xos, hostile, (6iuiv, I^ K«8pos (poet.), glorious:, kvUwv '2. The terminations cow and i
358. Comparatives in la>v, neuter lov, are thus declined: —
6IN0n.AH. PLUHAI..
Nom. ?}6iuv Tj'Stov N. V. iJStovcs rjSicms ijSiova rfitu
Gen. i)8(ovo5 Gen.
Dat. iiS
Ace. T]6tova TJStw ti'8iov Aeo. TJSfovos iiB
DUAL.
K. A. V.
G. 1). ij&tovoiv
359. N. (a) The shortened forms come from a stem in
(&) Homer sometimes has comparatives iu IW.
|
76 |
76 INFLECTION. [360
(o) The vocative singular of these comparatives seems not to our. (
360. The irregular comparatives in u>v (o(51) are declined like
occur.
III. iRitiiouLAit Comparison.
361. The following are the most important cases of irregular comparison: —
1.
(apetuv), apiorot,
(pos), (/SAtotos),
Kp(£
{f(os), («dpT!
Xuuv (uluv, Xw/Tfpoj), Xworos.
2. KdKOS, bad, KCLKiuV (KaKUTepOs), KaKMTTO?,
Vja-o-cov (for r)K-i-oiu, 84,1) or (tJkhttos, rare); t|'tto)v (ioawp), adv. fJKio-Ta,
least.
3. koXo'si leuuliful, KaXX(uv, koXXiotos-
4. (if'yos, great, (ie(£wv(M<ffwforjM'7-i-a)>',84,3), ^■yurros.
5. (iiKpo's, small, (UpepoVtpos, (iiKpoTOTOS, (Mom. "iXaxna.
fem. of iXaxu's),
jkiCuv (neiaTos, rare).
0. oXlyos, little, (vir-olfai>, rather less), oXC^io-tos-
7. ir^vi]s (jrfvijT-),poor, ir«W
8. iroXiJsi 'Kt/cft, irX«iuv or irX^uv (neut. some- irXcto-ros-
times Treiv),
9. p
^ICTTOS).
10. <{ id="iv.i.p2635.1">'Xo$, rfeor, 4>(Xr
<|)iXo(T«pos (rare),
(rare). ((j>ilwv, twice in Horn.)
Ionic or poetic forms are in ( ).
|
77 |
367] ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON. 77
362. Irregularities in the comparison of the following words will be found in the Lexicon: —
tticr^pds, dAytivds, apwu£, a^Oovoi, d^ap'S. ftaOik, /3Ad£, /JpaSvs, os, yAvicus, im jo~fj.uiv, «7ri^api5, ^ctu^os, iStos, ictos, AaAos, os, vios, 7raAaids, 7ra^w, irt'irwi', ttiwv, irkrjcrios, irpf'cr/3us, vpovpyov, 7rpuiios, (TwouSaros, a^oA.aios, i/kuStjs, uVu's.
363. Some comparatives and superlatives have do positive, but their stem generally appears in an adverb or preposition. E.g.
Aviinpoi, up]>er, dviiraros, uppermost, from ava), up; irporcpos, former, 7rpuiTO5 or TrpcoTioTos, Jirst, from irpo, before; Karwrtpos, lower, KaraJraTos, lowest, from Kara), downward.
See in the Lexicon dy^oTtpo?, d<£dpr«pos, xtpSiwy, oirXortpos, irpoauiTtpos, piyiov (neuter), vrrif>Ttpo%, vcrnpos, itpiuiv, <^advT£pos, with their regular superlatives; also to^ai-os, vin-aro?, and KijStaros.
364. Comparatives and superlatives may be formed from nouns, and even from pronouns. E.g.
BaffiAtw, king, /jacnXivrcpos, a greater king, fiacnXcvraTos, the greatest king; kAott^?, thief, kXivttempos, KAtwrt'crTUTOs ; kvuiv, dog, f, more impudent, KvvraTOs, most impudent. So avrds, self, s, his very self, ipsissimus.
ADVERBS AND THEIR COMPARISON.
365. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives. Their form (including the accent) may be found by changing v of the genitive plural masculine to ?. E.g.
Oi'Acos, dearly, from <£i'Ao?; Sikcu'ws, justly (Sikcliot) ; cto^xS?, wisely (
366. Adverbs are occasionally formed in the same way from participles; as Sia^cpoVroDs, differently, from 8ia
367. The neuter accusative of an adjective (either singular or plural) may be used as an adverb. U.g.
IIoAv and iroAAd, much (ttoAus) ; ft-tya or fuyaXa, greatly (i also myaXd)<; (365), /idiw, only (/aovos, alone).
|
78 |
78
INFLECTION.
[388
368. Other forms of adverbs occur with various terminations; as fiaXa, very, toluol, quickly, dvco, above, iyyvs, near.
369. The neuter accusative singular of the comparative of an adjective forms the comparative of the corresponding adveib, and the neuter accusative plural of the superlative forms the superlative of the adverb. E.g.
2o<£ws (crowds), wisely;
370. 1. Adverbs in o generally form a comparative in rtpui, and a superlative in rara; as avw, above, avaripta, avuiTarui.
2. A few comparatives derived from adjectives end in ri'>ux;; as ^3f/3atoT£pu)9, more firmly, for Peficuortpov, from f3c(3a[u>s.
371. N. MdXa, much, very, has comparative fioXXov (for ^iaA.-i-oi', 84, 4), more, rattier; superlative fjAXuTTa, most, especially.
NUMERALS.
372. The cardinal and ordinal numeral adjectives, and the numeral adverbs which occur, are as follows: —
Sign.
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
a' ■ «ts, (ita, c'v, one
8'
V
Tp«ts, Tpia T«V
(T«TTOp«S, T^
tiTTa
OKTW
t'vvt'a StKa i'vScKa SuStKa
Tp
Ordinal. irpwTos, Jlrst 8«vTiposi second
Tpt-ros TtVapTOS
c"vaTos
Stxa-ros
«v8«KaTos
rpiros Kal Sckutos
Sis, twice Tpis
T
tiTTOKlS OKTOKIS
CvScKCLKlS SuStKOKlS
|
79 |
374]
NL'MEUALS.
79
|
Sign. |
Cardinal. |
Ordinal. Adverb. |
|
|
14 |
iS' |
«'o- |
Tc'rapTOs Kai StKaTOS |
|
|
|
(or TicrcraptcrKaC&tKa) |
|
|
15 |
u' |
ir(VT(KaiScK(x |
ire'nirTos Kai StKaros |
|
10 |
|
€KKaCScKa |
CKTOJ Kai 8 |
|
17 |
if |
tiTTaKat8 |
c'P8op.os Kai St'xaros |
|
18 |
17)' |
OKTa>Kat8(Ka |
6*y8oos xal 8(KaTOs |
|
19 |
tfl' |
«VViaKat8«Ka |
i'vaTos Kai Sfxaros |
|
20 |
k' |
€tKO(Tl(v) |
|
|
21 |
kh' |
«ts Kai «l'Kotri(v) o)- |
irpuiTOs Kai tUoaro's |
|
|
|
(Ikoo-i (Kai; tls |
|
|
30 |
X' |
TpidlKOVTa |
TpidKO |
|
40 |
n' |
Tto-o-apaKOVTa |
T«r |
|
50 |
v' |
irtVTrfKOfTa |
1T(VTT|KO(rTOS irtVTIJKOVTaKlS |
|
00 |
r |
|
tJrjKOO-TOS t^KOVTOKlS |
|
70 |
o' |
t'P8oji.r;KOVTa |
t'P8o|J.TlKO |
|
80 |
it' |
(fySoTj'KOVTa |
d"y8oT]KO(rTos o"y8oT]KOVTdxts |
|
90 |
9' |
t VtVT^KOVTa |
tv.vriKoo-To's ivevi)KOVTaKis |
|
100 |
p' |
|
(KaTOCTTOS «KaTOVTaKlS |
|
200 |
a-' |
8tdKo'a"tot, at, a |
6taKOo"too"To's 8tdKOa"taKis |
|
300 |
t' |
TptdKoVtoi, at, a |
TptdKOO"tOO"TOS |
|
400 |
u' |
T€TpaKocrtot, at, a |
TtTpaKocrioaTo's |
|
500 |
|
TrevTaKocrtoi, at, a |
irtvTaKoo-iocrTo's |
|
600 700 |
x' |
.•^KoVtot, at, a |
.^KOO-tOO-TOS |
|
800 |
|
oKTaKo'crtoi, at, a |
OKTOKOCrtOCTTOS |
|
000 ' |
7D' |
tvaxoVtoi, ai, a |
tvaKOa-toaxo's |
|
1000 |
a |
Xt ov, at, a |
XtXlOC-TOS X^1<»K1S |
|
2000 |
!p |
Sur^tXtot, at, a |
Sto-xiXiotrrds |
|
3000 |
|
Tp«r^iXtot, at, a |
TptO"X tXtOCTOS |
|
10000 |
,i |
fivptot, at, a |
U.vptOO"TO$ ^UptaKLS |
|
20000 |
K |
SicrfJaptoi |
|
|
100000 |
o |
SiKatcttruijatOL |
|
373. Above 10,000, 8u'o ^CptaSt?, 20,000, rpew /xuptaSe?, 30,000, etc., may be used.
374. Tlic dialects have the following peculiar forms: — 1—4. See 377.
5. Anolic rrijXTri for itcVtc. 9. Herod, ttvaro? for cvarot; also nWut, etc. 12. Doric and Ionic Sua'j8(k'a; Poetic 8i'OKuc'8tKa. 20. Epic iiiKOcn ; Doric ciVcm.
|
80 |
80 INFLECTION. [376
30,80,90,200,300. Ionic TpnjKovra, oyhuiKovra, iwrjKOVTa (Horn.),
tot, TpiyjKOtnoi. 40. Herod. T{
Homer has TpiVaTOS, Tarparos, £/3So'/iaros, dySoaros, flVaTos, Svot-Socaros, (ukocttos, and also the Attic form of each.
375. The cardinal numbers eh, one, 8uo, two, rp«?, three, and rea-crapes (or rerrape^, four, are thus declined: —
Noin. its u.(a iv
|
Gen. |
c'vo's |
fllCt' |
s |
«'vo's |
N. |
A. 8v'o |
|
Dat. |
ivl |
(11CJ |
|
ivl |
G. |
D. 8«otv |
|
Ace. |
iva. |
|
i> |
i'v |
|
|
|
Nom. |
TJKts |
|
rpia |
|
T< |
capis Wo-crapa |
|
Gen. |
|
Tplail/ |
|
|
|
Tfcro-apuv |
|
Dat. |
|
Tp«r( |
|
|
|
T«'(rtrap |
|
Ace. |
TpllS |
|
TpCa |
|
T((T(rapas Wacrapa |
|
376. N. Aw, (wo, with a plural noun, is sometimes indeclinable.
377. N. Homer has fern. io, irjs, cij, lav, for /ua; and i<5 for «Vi'. Homer has Suo and 8u«), both indeclinable; and 8oiw and Soioi, declined regularly. Herodotus has Suwv, Suoicri, and otlier foi-ras: see the Lexicon. Homer sometimes has irtcrupes for rtWapes. Herodotus has rtWtpcs, and the poets have rirpaxn.
378. The compounds oiSa's and /AijStts, »o one., none, are declined like (Is. Thus, ov8el<;, ovSt/iia, ovhiv; gen. oiSenis, oiSc/xtas; dat. ouScVi", oiSe/Ata ; ace. oiStW, oiSt/xt'av, oiSiv, etc. Plural forms sometimes occur; as ouSe'vc?, ovScvcoc, oiStVi, oiSfVa?, /mijStVt?, etc. When o£Sf or ftT/St' is written separately or is separated from
379. Tioth is expressed by ati-
380. The cardinal numbers from 5 to 100 are indeclinable. The higher numbers in tot and all the ordinals are declined regularly, like other adjectives in o?.
381. In rpei? (Tpta) «ai Sc'xa and TtVrrupts (ricrcrapa) Kal Scica for 13 and 14, the first part is declined. In ordinals (13th to Iflth) the forms Tpao-KaiScKaro'; etc. are Ionic, and are rarely found in the best Attic.
|
81 |
388] NLMKHALS.-THii ARTICLE. 81
882. 1. In compound expressions like 21, 22, etc., 31, 32, etc., the numbers can be connected by Win either order; but if kcu is omitted, the larger precedes. Tims, tis kcu u'kocti, one and twenty, or iiK
2. In ordinals we have vpuiros xal ciVocrro9, twenty-Jirsl, and also tixooros koI irpuiTos, etc.; and for 21 *[? xai eixooro's.
3. The numbers 18 and 19, 28 and 29, 38 and 39, etc., are often expressed by tvos (or Suou/) oVovres exKOCn (rpiaKOVTa, T£o~o~apaKOVTa, etc.); as trrj Ivos ScWra rpidxovTa, 29 years.
383. 1. With collective nouns in the singular, especially rj *ir7ro?, cavalry, the numerals in tot sometimes appear in the singular ; as ttjv Stdico
2. Mvpioi means ten thousand; pvpioi, innumerable. Muptoj sometimes has the latter sense; as fnipioi xpovos, countless time; jxvpia trivia, incalculable poverty.
384. N. The Greeks often expressed numbers by letters; the two obsolete letters Vau (in the form <) and Koppa, and the character San, denoting (i, 90, and 900. (See 3.) The last letter in a numerical expression has an accent above. Thousands begin anew with a, witli a stroke below. Thus, oufr,', 1808; /Sx«', 2025; SkS, 4025 ; ^',2003; 540; pi', 104. (See 372.)
385. N. The letters of the ordinary Greek alphabet are often used to number the books of the Iliad and Odyssey, each poem having twenty-four books. A, B, r, etc. are generally used for the Iliad, aud o, p, 7, etc. for the Odyssey.
THE ARTICLE.
386. The definite article o (stem to-), the, is thus declined: —
SINGULAR.
Nom.
6
h
Gen. toO t^s tov Dat. tw
TIU
N. A. Tot T« T« G. D. TOIV TOIV TOIV
rt-UKAL.
Nom. ot at rd Gen. t«v
Dat. Tots Tals toCs Ace. to«s t
Acc. tov ttjv ri
387. N. The Greek has no indefinite article; but often the indefinite tU (415, 2) may be translated by a or an; as dv#pwro$ T«, a certain man, often simply a man.
388. N. The regular feminine dual forms ra and to.1v (espe-
|
82 |
INFLECTION.
[389
cially ra) ave very rave, and tuj and --olv are generally used for all genders (303). The regular plural nominatives tol and trolo, roiiv, raw, toicti, rrjai, Trjs. Homer has rarely Toicr&acri or TOiaSeai in the dative plural.
PRONOUNS. PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
389. The personal pronouns are eyd, /, en', thou, and ov (genitive), of him, of her, of it. Autov, himself, is used as a personal pronoun for Am, her, it, etc. in the oblique eases, but, never in the nominative.
They are thus declined: —
SISOUL/U1.
Nom. <*yw, I o"v, Viou — aijTo's aOnj auTo
Gen. ^ov, pov crov ov auTOv ailrris aijTOu
l)at. iioi, jioC &o( oi avrw a^Tll a»jTu>
Acc.
N. A. V(O a*4>uj ' aijTw auTtt avTw
G. D. vwv (r4>wv avToiv avTaiv avroiv
I'LVHAL.
Nom. r'fiets, we i^as, ?/ou
Gen. ^wv v)j.u>v o*4>u>v auTuii' aurutv avrwv
Dat. ij)uv vjiiv q-<) id="iv.i.p2929.1">Ccrt avrois oiJTats aurots
Acc. li^as vfios cr4>ds ovtovs avrds aira.
390. N. The stems of the personal pronouns in the first person are Itie- (cf. Latin me), xw- (of. nus), and ij^f-, (yw hcina, of distinct formation ; in the second person, at- (cf. tc).
391. Aiitos in all cases may be an intensive adjective pronoun, like ipse, self (989, 1).
392. For the uses of ov. ol, etc., see 9ST; OSS. In Attic prose, ol,
393. 1. The following is the Homeric declension of cyio,
|
83 |
|
PRONOUNS. |
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
|
(TV (rbvi)) |
|
|
|
(crew, atOev) |
do |
(fflev) |
|
ool, toI (jf'iv) |
ol (. |
iol) |
|
a( |
(0 |
lit) M |
400] PRONOUNS. 83
Dat. ^pw/, fto/
Ace. ^j"^, /i^
Nr. A. (cw(, ra>)
G. ]>. (vC>lv)
NoiU. yueis (&fXfj*s) v/aus (t»/jtju,es) o"0
Ace i?m^'
2. Herodotus has also
394. The tragedians use cr
395. 1. The tragedians use the Doric accusative viv as a personal pronoun in all gendevs, and in both singular and plural.
2. The Ionic /xiV is used in all genders, but only in the singular.
396. N. The ppnuH. of i)fui>v, rjfxii', Tinas, v/j.uiv, ijjlv, and ijj.u'i is .soniKt.imes accented in poetry, when tlif-y are not emphatic, and lv and as are shortened. Thus i/ialdv, ty/J-ti', >y/xa
397. X. Herodotus has aircuv in the feminine for avruiv (188, ■r)). The Ionic contracts 6 ai'rds into wurds or wurds, and to airo into tuji'ito (7).
398. N. The Doric has iy&v; infos, lixow, (him (for i/Mv") ; Iplv for ^mo(; iinA, i^/w, i«(i', <£mi? (lor id="iv.i.p2968.1">)m<
399. Ai)tov preceded by the article means (he same (idem); as 6 ai^To? dv/jp, the same man. (See 989, 2.)
400. Avrds is often united by crasis (44) with the article; as TavTof* for tov avrov; ravrw fov to) cvtio ; ravrn for T77 0.1/rrf (not to be confounded with ravn; from ovro<:). Ill the contracted form the neuter singular has Taurd or ravrov.
|
84 |
84
INFLECTION.
[401
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
401. The reflexive pronouns are (fiavrov, efj.avrfj<;, of myself; aeavrov, o-mvrrjs, of thyself; and eavrov, eavrf/s, of himself, herself, itself. They are thus declined: —
|
|
Masc. |
Fern. |
6INGULAK Masc. |
u Fcm. |
Masc. |
Fern. |
|
Gen. Dat. Ace. |
hi |
|
o-tavTov |
|
travTOv crain-w |
O-OVTJ) |
|
Gen. Dat. |
Masc. i'l ij|uv avr |
PLOKAL. Fern. ]iuv avr<3v 01$ t^|jllv avVais |
Masc. Fern. vfiiav avTwy v|*iv ovtois vpitv avTais |
|||
|
Ace. |
Tp.as ovtovs i)|i |
S avrds |
VUlCU &l |
itovs vjias avras |
||
|
|
Masc. |
Fern. |
SINGULAR Ncut. |
Masc. |
Fein. |
Neut. |
|
Gen. |
tavTOv |
«avri)s |
(avrov |
avTov |
avrijs |
avTov |
|
Dat. Ace. |
«'avTo'v |
Iavr5v |
|
or avTu avro'v |
av-rj'y |
avTo' |
|
|
|
|
PLURAL. |
|
|
|
|
Gen. Dat, Ace. |
('avrov's |
cavTavs f'avTas |
i'avrwv cavrots (avTa |
avTuv or avTots avrov's |
avTats avTas |
avr«3v avTols avToi |
also
Gen. cr
Dat.
Ace.
402. Tlie reflexives are compounded of the stems of the personal pronouns (390) and aurds. But in the plural the two pronouns are declined separately in the first and second persons, and often in the third.
403. N. In Homer the two pronouns are always separated in all persons and numbers; as aoi avrio, o! aurw, e avrrjv. Herodotus has i/xtwvTov, crcu>vrov, eowrov.
RECIPROCAL PRONOUN.
404. The l'eciprocal pronoun is d\i]a>v, of one another, used only in the oblique cases of the dual and plural. It is thus declined: —
|
85 |
409]
PRONOUNS.
85
Gen. oXXt(Xoiv Pat. dXXijXoiv Ace. dXXijXw
DUAL.
oXX-tjXcuv aXXijXoiv
aXX-qXatv dXXrjXoiv
dXXijXd aXXrjXw
PLURAL.
aXXtjXuv dXXrjXwv aXXijXuv
aXXijXois dXXrjXais aXXtfXois
dXXijXovs dXXijXds aXX>]Xa
405. The stem is dAAjjA.o- (for dAA-aAAo-).
3'OSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
406. The possessive pronouns tfj.6?, my, cros, thy, rjfj,i-repo?, our, u/ierepo?, your, <7(£e'Tepo< id="iv.i.p3061.1">, their, and the poetic o?, his, are declined like adjectives in o? (298).
407. Homer has dual possessives vaHTcpos, of us two,
408. "Os not being used in Attic prose, his is there expressed by the genitive of auro's, as 6 7rarrjp avrov, his father.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
409. The demonstrative pronouns are ovro<; and 6'oe, this, and e/eeivoi, that. They are thus declined: —
|
|
|
SINGULAR |
|
|
n.UHAL. |
|
|
Norn. |
OvTOS |
ai'Tr) |
TOVTO |
OVTOl |
aCTai |
TavTa |
|
Gen. |
TOVTOV |
TavT7|S |
TOVTOV |
TOVTWV |
TOVTUV |
TOVT01V |
|
Pat. |
TOUTlj) |
Tav'rj |
TOVTy |
TOVTOIS |
TavTOlS |
TOIJTOtS |
|
Ace. |
TOVTOV |
TOtJTT|V |
TOVTO |
TOuTOUS |
TOVTOS |
TOVTa |
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
N. A. |
TOVTti) TOVTW TOVTtt |
|
||
|
|
|
G. D. |
T0VT01V TOVTOIV TOVTOWV |
|
||
|
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
|
|
Nom. |
o'6< |
TJS» |
TO'8« |
Jnivos |
ImLvi] |
Ikiivo |
|
Gen. |
TOi8« |
Ti^trSt |
TOv8» |
|
|
|
|
Pat. |
T<{ id="iv.i.p3141.1">6« |
T^t |
TU>8< |
CK |
|
^KCCVW |
|
Ace. |
To'vSt |
Tljv8» |
TO'8< |
fKftVOV |
|
|
|
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
|
|
N. A. |
Toi6< |
TwSf |
Tw8c |
iicflva |
CKCIVW |
{k<(vu |
|
G. D. |
TOtvS* |
ToivS< |
T0iv8« |
(KtlvOlV |
JKlCvOlV |
IkcCvoiv |
|
|
|
|
rLIIRAL. |
|
|
|
|
Nom. |
ot'Sc |
at'S< |
to8< |
(K |
€K(lvaL |
€Kitva |
|
Gen. |
TU>vS( |
ToivSi |
TwvSt |
ixtlvwv |
|
{xclvwv |
|
Cat. |
towtSi |
Taicr8« |
TOtor8< |
(KC^VOCS |
|
|
|
Ace. |
TOvV8< |
rdo-Sc |
Ta8t |
JKC(VOVS |
fcilvd; |
|
|
86 |
86 INFLECTION. [410
410. Feminine dual forms in a and atv are very rare (303).
411. 'EmTi/os is regular except in the neuter ixeivo- Ktii/os is Ionic and poetic. "O8e is formed of the article 6 and -St (141, 4). For its accent, see 14U.
412. N. The demonstratives, including some adverbs (436), may be emphasized by adding i, before which a short vowel is dropped. Thus ovtouI, avrrji, rovrt; 68;', iy§i, rohi; tovtovI, ravri, TOVTu>vi. So Touovrocrt (429), oj8i, ovtu&L In comedy ye (rarely St) may precede this t, making yi or Si; as rov-royi, toutoSc.
413. N. Herodotus has rovriwv in the feminine for tovtwv (cf. 397). Homer has T
414. N. Other demonstratives will be found among the pronominal adjectives (420).
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
415. 1. The interrogative pronoun rl<;, ti', who? which? what? always takes the acute on the first syllable.
2. The indefinite pronoun tit, ti, any one, some one, is enclitic, and its proper accent belongs on the last syllable.
416. 1. These pronouns are thus declined: —
Indefinite.
ts tI
tivos, tou
TlVt, TU>
Ttvd t
TlVt TtVOlV
tiv«s Tiva
TtVWV
Tt
2. For the indefinite plural two. there is a form drra (Ionic
|
|
Interrogative. |
|
|
|
|
SISGUI.AH. |
|
Norn. |
Tts |
t£ |
|
Gen. |
tCvos, toi |
) |
|
Dat. |
tCvi, tu |
|
|
Ace. |
Ttva |
TI |
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
N. A. |
t£v€ |
|
|
G. D. |
TVVOtV |
|
|
|
|
PLUHAL. |
|
Nom. |
rives |
Ttva |
|
Gen. |
TIVWV |
|
|
Dat. |
Tt(Tt |
|
|
Ace. |
rtvas |
Ttva |
|
87 |
424] PRONOUNS. 87
417. Ouns and /xiy-ris, poetic for oiSSa's and /x^Sti',, no one, are declined like tU.
418. ]. The acute accent of ny is never changed to the grave (110, 2). The forms n? and rl of the indefinite pronoun very rarely occur with the grave accent, as they are enclitic (141, 2).
2. The Ionic has reo and rev for toC, t/w for tu>, riiav for ti'wdv, and rioiori. for run; also these same forms as enclitics, for tov, t, etc.
419. *AXAo?: or./i<*r, is declined like auro's (389), having dAXo iu the neuter singular.
420. 1. The indefinite Sciva, such a one, is sometimes indeclinable, and is sometimes declined as follows: —
|
|
SINGULAR. |
PI.UUAL. |
|
|
(All Genders). |
(Masculine) |
|
Num. |
Sl'lVO. |
8 |
|
Gun. |
Stivos |
8 |
|
Dat. |
Scivi |
------ |
|
Ace. |
Sttva |
Savas |
2. A«tm iu all its forms always has the article.
UKLATIVE PRONOUNS.
421. The relative pronoun 6?,?;, 6, who, is thus declined :—
SINGl.LAIt.
Nom. 8s ii 6
Gon. otj r)% oii ■ N. A. «J
Dat.
ACC. OK 7)>- O
PLUJ1AJ-.
wv wv uv
Noui. oi' ai.' &
Gen.
Uat. ots ais
Ace. oils &s
422. Feminine dual forms a and all' ace very rare and doubtful (303).
423. N. For os used as a demonstrative, especially in Homer, see 1(123. For the article (r- forms)
424. N. Homer lias oou (oo) and cr;? for oS and rji.
|
88 |
|
88 |
INFLECTION. |
[425 |
|
|
425. The |
indefinite |
relative 6cm?, rtr |
t?, o Ti, whoever, |
|
whatever, is |
thus declined: — |
|
|
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
Norn. |
6'o-tis |
1)TIS |
6'ti |
|
Geu. |
OUTIVOS, OTOU |
iJo-TlVOf |
OVTIVOS, OTOU |
|
Pat. |
(Jtivi, 6'tcu |
|
(JtIVI, OTU) |
|
Ace. |
6'vTiva |
T|VTiva |
Sri |
|
|
|
DUAL. |
|
|
N. A. |
UTLVt |
wrive |
urrivf |
|
G. D. |
otvnvoiv |
olvnvoiv |
otvnvoiv |
|
|
|
PLURAL. |
|
|
Nom. |
O*TIV«S |
|
oTiva, arra |
|
Gen. |
|
lOVTIVWV |
|
|
Dat. |
oto~TlO"l, OTOIS |
ato-Tio-i. |
oWtuti, o'tois |
|
Ace. |
OVO-TIVO.S |
&TTIVOS |
OTiva, cirra |
426. N. "O(tti9 is compounded of the relative os and the indefinite ti5, each part being declined separately. For the accent, see 140. The plural arm (Ionic aacra) for urtva must not be confounded with otto. (410, 2). °O Tt is thus written (sometimes o, ti) to distinguish it from ort, that.
427. N. The shorter forms orov, or
428. • 1. The following are the peculiar Homeric forms of oaris: —
&o-o-o
|
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
TLURAL. |
|
Nom. |
OTIS |
|
O |
TTl |
|
|
Gen. |
|
OT«V, OTTtO, OTT«U |
|
|
OT«UV |
|
Dat. |
|
6t |
|
|
oWoto-i |
|
Ace. |
OTiva |
|
0 |
TTl |
oVivas |
2. Herodotus has otcv, otiw, 6t«jiv, oreoim, and atrcra (426).
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
429. There ave many pronominal adjectives which correspond to each other in form and meaning. The following are the most important: —
|
89 |
436]
PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
89
INTEBROOATIVE.
INDEFINITE.
Demonstrative.
s; how much? irotro's, of some (toVos),'
how many? quantus?
rotos; of what kind? qualis?
irTjXfKos; how old? how large?
quantity. rocrodrot, so
much, tantus, so many.
iroi6$, of some (rotot), toioVoV, kind. Toiovros, such,
talis.
K6a5ty TtjXtKOV-
rot, so old or so large.
rSrcpot; which of TroVcpos (or Trort- Irepot, the one or the two? p6s), one of two the other (of
(rare). two).
Relative.
cfffot, &ir6
orot, oiro'ios, of which kind, (such) as, qualis.
of which age or size, (as old) as, (as large) as.
irSnpos, whichever of the txeo.
430. The pronouns rk, rU, etc. form a corresponding series:—
rh; who? t!s, any one. SSe, olrot, this, St, 6Vtu, who,
this one. which.
431. Tts may be added to oTos, ocros, onoaos, cWoios, and bw6ri.po<;, to make them more indefinite; as ottoio's Tts, of what kind soever.
432. 1. Otv added to indefinite relatives gives them a purely indefinite force; as ocrncrow, bnovv, any one, anything, soever, with no relative character. So sometimes Si?; as otov Si;.
2. N. Rarely on-oTcpoy (without ovv) has the same meaning, either of the two.
433. N. Homer doubles ir in many of these relative words; as oViro'-rtpos, oiriroios. So in oVirws, oiriroVt, etc. (430). Plerodotus has OKOrcpos, okoVos, Hkou, OKodev, OA'o're. e.C, for ojroVcpos, etc.
434. N. ToVoi and rotos seldom o :cur in Attic prose, rtjXf/co! never. To
435. There are also negative pronominal adjectives; as ovrts, /*ijti5 (poetic for oiSti's, jiujSets), ov8«Vepos, /Ai?8€T£pos, neither of two. (For adverbs, see 440.)
436. Certain pronominal adverbs correspond to each other, like the adjectives given above. Such are the following. —.
|
90 |
90
INFLECTION.
[437
Intkrrooative. Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative.
irou; where? irov, somewhere.. (fW?a), ty66.be, ov, oirov, where.
xj; which way?
huw? not; whither?
vo6(y; whence?
VUi; howl rroTt; when? vrjylKa; at what
Try, some way,
someliow. iroi, to some
place, irodiy, from
some place.
nibs,in some way,
somehow. jro7V, at some
lime.
fyrauda, ittu,
there. (Trj),TTJ5c,TavT7}, t], birr], which way,
this way, thus. as. tKcioi, thither. 61, owoi, whither.
(jivdiv*), tvdivb<,
thence. rajy), (u>0, a)of, o'vtws, thtts.
Tore, then-
whence.
w's, 6Vw5, in which
way, as. 6tc, oroVf, when.
lime ?
(jr)vlKa), rijyiKd- Tjvlica, inrivlna, at be, TrjviKavTa, which time, at that time. when-
437. The indefinite adverbs are all enclitic (141, 2).
438. Forms which seldom or never occur in Attic prose are in ( ). "Ey#u and ivdiv are relatives in prose, where, whence; as demonstratives they appear chiefly in a few expressions like ti<(?u K
439. 1. The "poets have kiWi, kciOzv, Ktiat fov tVu, iniiOiv, aud tVticrc, Hlje kuvos for cxtii/os (411).
2. Herodotus has ii/davra, ivOtvrcv for ivravOa, iurevOcv.
3. There are various poetic adverbs; as ttoOi, tto6[, o&i (for ttov, ttov, ov), toOi, there, ToOtv, thence.
440. There are negative <"rtv< rV. of place, manner, etc.; as olha/xov, /xinSafiOv, nowhere, oiSau,}. arjha/j.TJ, in no way, oiSu/tws, ltyoa.fj.ias, in no manner. (See 135.)
VERBS.
441. The Greek verb has three voices, the active, middle, and passive.
442, 1. The middle voice generally signifies that the subject performs an action upon himself or fir his own benefit (1242), but sometimes it is not distinguished from the active voice in meaning.
|
91 |
450] VERBS. 91
2. The passive differs- from Die middle in form in only two tenses, the luture and the aorist.
443. Deponent verbs are those wliicli have no active voice, but are used in the middle (or the middle and passive) forms with an active sense.
444. N. Deponents generally have the aorist and future of the middle form. A few, wliicli have an aorist (sometimes a future) of the passive form, are called passive deponents; while the others are called middle deponents.
445. There are four moods (properly so called), the indicative, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. To these are added, in the conjugation of the verb, the infinitive, and participles of the chief tenses. The verbal adjectives i^to? and Teo? have many points of likeness to participles (see 776).
446. The four proper moods, as opposed to the infinitive, are called Jinite moods. The subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, as opposed to the indicative, are called dependent moods.
447. There are seven tenses, the present, imperfect, future, aorist, perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect. The imperfect and pluperfect are found only in the indicative. The future and future perfect are wanting in the subjunctive and imperative. The future perfect belongs regularly to the passive voice, but sometimes has the meaning of the active or middle.
448. The present, perfect, future, and future perfect indicative are called primary (or principal) tenses; the imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist indicative are called secondary (or historical) tenses.
449. Many verbs have tenses known as the second aorist (in all voices), the second perfect and pluperfect (active), and the second future (passive). These tenses are generally of more simple formation than the first (or ordinary) aorist, perfect, etc. Few verbs have both forms in any tense; when this occurs, the two forms generally differ in meaning (for example, by the first being transitive, the second intransitive), but not always.
450. The aorist corresponds generally to the indefinite or his-
|
92 |
92 INFLECTION. [461
torical perfect in Latin, and the perfect to the English perfect or the definite perfect in Latin.
451. N. No Greek verb is in use in all these tenses, and the full paradigm of the regular verb must iuclude parts of three different verbs. See 470.
452. There are three numbers, as in nouns, the singular, dual, and plural.
453. In each tense of the indicative, subjunctive, and optative, there are three persons in each number, the first, second, and third; in each tense of the imperative there are two, the second and third.
454. N. The first person dual is the same as the first person plural, except in a very few poetic forms (666, 2). This person is therefore omitted in the paradigms.
TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS.
455. The tenses are divided into nine classes or tense systems, each with its own tense stem.
456. The tense systems are the following: —
SYSTEMS. TEN8ES.
i. Present, including present and imperfect. ii. Future, « future active and middle.
in. First-aorist, " first aorist active and middle.
iv. Second-aorist, " second aorist active and middle. v. First-perfect, " first perfect and pluperfect active. vi. 'Second-perfect, " second perfect and pluperfect active. vii. Perfect-middle, " perfect and pluperfect middle and
future perfect.
vin. First-passive, " first aorist and future passive. ix. Second-passive, " second aorist and future passive.
457. 1. The last five tense stems are further modified to form 'peoial stems for the two pluperfects, the future perfect, and the two passive futures.
2. As few verbs have both the first and the second forms of any tense (449), most verbs have only six tense stems, and many have even less.
458. The various tense stems are almost always formed from one fundamental stem, called the verb stem. These formations will be explained in 568-622.
|
93 |
463] TENSE SYSTEMS AND TENSE STEMS. 93
459. Before learning the paradigms, it is important to distinguish between verbs in which the verb stem appears without change in all the tense systems, and those in which it is modified more or less in different systems (154).
Thus in Ac'yo), speak, the verb stem Xiy- is found in Xi£
460. Verb stems are cwled vowel stems or consonant stems, and the latter are called mute steins (including labial, palatal, and lingual steins) or liquid stems, according to their final letter. Thus we may name the stems of <£tA<'
, XeiVo) (Xun-, A«r-), rptfta (rpt/?-), ypa
((^ai/-), ortAAco
461. A verb which has a vowel verb stem is called a pure verb; and one which has a mute stem or a liquid stem is called a mute or a liquid verb.
462. 1. The principal parts of a Greek verb are the first person singular of the present, future, first aorist, and (first or second) perfect, indicative active; the perfect middle, and the (first or second) aorist passive; with the second aorist (active or middle) when it occurs. These generally represent all the tense systems which the verb uses. E.g.
Avu), Xicro), (Xv
YIpa
rpciypuii, iirpa)(8y)V.
2r(AAo) (o-tcA-), send, cttcXCi, (O-reiXa, toraXKa, iaraXftai, ia-raXrjv. 2. If a verb has no future active, the future middle may be given among the principal parts; as o-kujitto), jeer, cKa)pofua, iKwja
463. In deponent verbs the principal parts are the present, future, perfect, and aorist (or aorists) indicative. E.g.
|
94 |
94 INFLECTION. [404
led'!, ijyijcro/Aai, fjyrjadfii^v, i)'yjj/xat, y]yyjOijv
y/)
(in compos.).
BouAo/iat, wish, /SouAiJtro/ual, /3e/3ou'A7?/.iui, IYy'/o/i<" (y'"-)) become, y(in'j(TO/jja, ytyivy/uu, y (Al&w/xat) ol&ovfjuii, respect, aiSwro/iai, ij&carfuu, rj Epyd£o/uu, work, ipydxrofUii, upya.
CONJUGATION.
464. To conjugate a verb is to give all its voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons in their proper order.
465. These parts of the verb are formed as follows: —
1. By modifying the verb stem itself to form the difi'or-ent tense stems. (Sec 5flS-G22; GGO-717.)
2. By affixing certain syllables called endings to the tense stein; as in Xtyo-fxcv, ktyt-rt, Kiyc-rai, iy6-/Atda, X«yo-vto.1, Xf^e-rai, k(£e-cr6(.. (See 551-554.)
3. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, by also pinfixing e to the tense stem (if this begins with a consonant), or lengthening its initial vowel (if it begins with a short vowel); as in l-iyo-v, t-Ae£c, c-^i/ya-To; and in y/kovo-v and tJkovo-o., imperfect and aorist of olkovw, hear. This prefix or lengthening is confined to the indicative.
4. A prefix, seen in A*- of Ac'Auxa and At'Aet/n/iai, in we- of 7ri(j>a
466. These prefixes and lengthenings, called augment (:3) and reduplication (4), are explained in 510-550.
467. There are two principal forms of conjugation of Greek verbs, that of verbs in w and that of verbs in fu.
468. Verbs in /u form a small class, compared with those in o;, and are distinguished in their inflection almost exclusively in the present and secoud-aorist systems, generally agreeing with verbs in
CONJUGATION OP VERBS IN fl.
469. The following synopses (474-478) include —
I. All the tenses of ia (AC-), loose, representing tense systems I., II., 111., V., VIT., VIII.
|
95 |
473] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN $1. 95
II. All the tenses of kuirw (ern-, km-), leave; the second perfect and pluperfect active and the second aorist active and middle, representing tense systems IV. and VI., being in heavy-l'aced type.
III. All the tenses of
470. The full synopsis of kioi, witli the forms in heavier type in the. synopses of ktUw and
471. N. Avw in the present and imperfect generally has v in Attic poetry and vi in Homer; in other tenses, it has v in the future and aorist active and middle and the future perfect, elsewhere v.
472. The paradigms include the perfect imperative active, although it is hardly possible that this tense can actually have been formed in any of thi'Se verbs. As it occurs, however, in a few verbs (748), it is given here to complete the illustration of the forms. For the rare perfect subjunctive and optative active, see 720 and 731.
473. Each tense of kiw is translated in the synopsis of 474, except rare untranslatable forms like the future perfect infinitive and participle, and the tenses of the subjunctive and optative. The meaning of these last cannot be fully understood until the constructions are explained in the Syntax. But the following' examples will make them clearer than any possible translation of the forms, some of which {e.y. the future optative) cannot be used in independent sentences.
tixutjxtv (or kixTw/xiv) avToV, let us loose him; fx.rj Averts atrrov, do not loose liim. 'Eaf XOw (or kicrui') avrov, xaiprjuti, if I (shall) loose Mm, fie will rejoice. 'Ep^o/mi, Zvo. avrov Aia) (or kvaui), I am coming that 1 may loose him. Hide Xioi/n (or Xio-ai/xt) avrov, 0 that I may loose him. Ei Xuoi/xt (or kicraifu) ai-rov, atpoi av, if I should loose him, lie would rejoice. THX#ot' 11/a cu'toi' kini/xi. (or kvaai/jn), I came thai 1 might loose him. EIttoi' on avrbv kioifu, I said that I was loosing him; cIttov otl alrrov uo-aifu, I xaid that I had loosed him; tivov on avrbv Aucoi/u, / said that 1 would loose him. For the difference between the pvpvpnt and aorist in these moods, see 1272, 1; for the perfect, see J273.
|
96 |
96
INFLECTION.
474.
Synopsis o»
|
|
I. PRESENT SYSTEM. |
II. FUTURE SYSTEM. |
III. FIRST-AORIST SYSTEK |
|
Active |
Present & Imperfect |
Future |
1 Aorist |
|
Voice. |
Active. |
Active. |
Active. |
|
|
ia I loose or am loosing |
X«orw / shall loose |
|
|
Indie. |
iXvov I was loosing |
|
cXio-a / loosed |
|
Subj. |
XtS» |
|
i |
|
Opt. |
Xfoipi |
X |
Xtf |
|
Imper. |
Xw loose |
|
Xwov loose |
|
Infin. |
4tiv to loose |
Xi)(r«iv to be about to |
Xvo-ai to loose or to have |
|
|
|
loose |
loosed. |
|
Part. |
Xiuv loosing |
X&riov about to loose |
Xtio-ds having loosed |
|
Middle |
Present & Imperfect |
Future |
1 Aorist |
|
Voice. |
Middle. |
Middle. |
Middle. |
|
|
Xfo|xloose (for my- |
XtS |
|
|
|
self) |
(for myself) |
|
|
|
{XiipiTjv / was loos- |
|
iXva-A(»iiv / loosed (for |
|
|
ing (for myself) |
|
my? elf). |
|
Subj. |
|
|
Xv |
|
Opt. |
XvoCfiTjv |
Xv |
Xv |
|
Imper. |
Xiov loose (for thyself) |
|
Xvo-ai loose (for thyself) |
|
Infin. |
X4f |
X |
X&rao-Bai to loose or to |
|
|
one's self) |
loose (for oneys self) |
have loosed (for one's self) |
|
Part. |
Xv6|uvos loosing (for |
Xvo-4fuvos about to loose |
Xv |
|
|
one's self) |
(for one's self) |
(for one's self) |
|
Passive |
|
VIII. FIRST-PASSIVE SYSTEM. |
|
|
Voice. |
Pres. <£ Imperf. Passive. |
-----------------------------------—------^ 1 Future Passive. |
1 Aorist J'assive. |
|
Indie. |
X*o(ioi lam ( (being) |
v8rj |
|
|
|
IXv6(ir|v / was } loosed |
loosed |
fX«8i]v / was loosed |
|
Subj. |
|
|
Xv8 |
|
Opt. |
etc. |
v8t](TO(p1]V |
Xv8<(i]v |
|
Imper. |
witli sam6 |
|
X18t)ti be loosed |
|
Infin. |
|
Xx>8^o-«r8ai to be about |
XvBijvai to be loosed or |
|
|
forms as the |
to be loosed |
(o have been loosed |
|
Part. |
Middle |
Xv8ii |
XvBcts having been |
|
|
|
loosed |
loosed |
Vekdal Adjectives: { Xvr6t that may be looSed (X«Wo$ that must be loosed
|
97 |
01
SYNOPSIS OF Xfo.
|
~"~vTFIRST-PERFECT SYSTEM. |
VII. PERFECT-MIDDLE SYSTEM. |
|
|
Perfect & Pluperfect Active. XAvko 7 Aat)« loosed {XcXvKT| / had loosed XiXixa or XcXvkws w X XiXvkus having loosed |
|
|
|
|
Perfect & Pluperfect Middle. XlXvpcu / have loosed (for myself) iXeXv(ii)v I had loosed (for myself) XfXvplvos w XcXv|i X |
|
|
|
Perf. & Pluperf. Passive. XfXv|iai / have ( been etc. with same forms as the Middle |
Future Perfect Passive. X XfXvO'O(|M]V X |
475. The middle of Avto release for one'* self, or to release some one belonging to one's self, hence to ransom (a captive) or to deliver (one's friends from danger). See 1242,8.
|
98 |
98
INFLECTION.
[478
476. Synopsis of XetVco (enr-, 7r-), leave.
|
TENSE SYSTEM; I. |
IJ. |
IV. |
VI. |
|
|
Active |
Pres. & Impf. |
Future |
2 Aorist |
2 Perf. & Plup. |
|
Voice. |
Active. |
Active. |
Active. |
Active. |
|
Indie. |
dirw |
X(tyw |
|
X&oiira |
|
|
iXairov |
|
eXiirov |
^XtXoCir^ |
|
Subj. |
Xdiru |
|
Xiirw |
XcXoCtru or |
|
|
|
|
|
XcXoiirus u |
|
Opt. |
Xtliroipi |
Xetyoifu |
XCiroifii |
XeXoitroiut or |
|
|
|
|
|
X |
|
Imper |
Xeiire |
|
Xtirt |
[XAonri] |
|
Infin. |
XdiTZLV |
dpciv |
Xlirtiv |
XcXomtvat |
|
Part. |
Xdiruv |
Xdipuiv |
Xiirwv |
X |
|
Middle |
l^res & Imvf |
Future |
9 Anrist |
VII. |
|
Voice. |
■*> f Is 4 > * %S Alt VI 'I • Middle. |
Middle. |
Middle. |
Perf. & Plup. Mid. |
|
Indie. |
|
Xilfotxai. |
. |
Xa(XeX€l |
|
Subj. |
XelrrufLai |
|
|
XcXciwtvn'l |
|
Opt. |
enrolfj.r)v |
XenM/xTjy |
Xiiroi(it)v |
XeXetti/j^vo^ ctrjv |
|
Imper. |
Xdirov |
|
Xtirov |
AifXfii/'O |
|
Infin. |
XtlirajBai |
Xdpc |
XiW |
XcXclipBcu |
|
Part. |
Xuw6nevos |
XetfdfiO'OS |
Xiir6|xcvo$ |
XeXfiMM^"<" |
|
Passive |
Pres. & Impf. |
VIII. |
•£ £ Future |
|
|
Voice. |
Passive. |
1 Fut. Pass. |
1 Mr. Pass. |
8 § Perfect. |
|
Indie. |
|
Xu |
IXd |
a, jg XcXdf*o/jLiu |
|
Subj. |
same forms |
|
Xa<) id="iv.i.p3837.1">8u> (for |
nup i the |
|
Opt. |
as the |
Xc^Bwotur,? |
x^td"? |
*^. w |
|
Imper. |
' Middle |
|
|
V 3 |
|
Infin. |
|
Xct |
|
£> m XiXdfeffBai |
|
Part. |
|
X'"pBri |
|
XfX^o>m |
VeRIJAL ADJliCTlvuS: Xtiirro'j, XfijTTf'os
477. 1. The active of XtiVo) in the various tenses means J leave (or am leaving), I left (or was If.aniny), I shall Icav-, etc. The second perfect means / have left, or / have failed or uni wanting. The first aorist tAai/ia is not in good use.
2. The middle of XeiVw means properly to remain (leave one's self), i" which sense it differs little (or not at all) from the passive. But the second aorist t'Xtjro/i^i/ often means 1 left fur myxelf(e.<]. a memorial or monument): so the present and future middle in composition. 'EXi7ro/x^ in Homer sometimes means / van left behind or was inferior, like the passive.
?. The passive of Xtivm is used in all tenses, with the meanings I urn left, J was left, I have been left, I had hern left, I shall have been left, 1 was left, I shall be left. It also means I am inferior (left behind).
|
99 |
479]
SYNOPSIS OF
99
|
Voick. Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part. |
Passive |
Voice. Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part |
Middle |
Active Voice. Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part. |
si I H |
|
vt t: 2 p; 3 3>3 1 &? i~ id o -; re g S ' Js w ^. |
■«■■&■&« -6 -6- *tj 9 p p 9 p 9 -> |
■e--e ■«■ -e- «■ ■©■ «-j 9 9 9 9 R & ^ IS*' I f^?^s x ' 'E p s- fr I S> " '=§. |
|||
|
•9-9- -9- -9- P P P P i; q q q q c" O. J O O <^ |
IX. |
J 9 9 0 3.5. S 5. 1 3 |. « 5 ? I c. 5i!? p p P ? ? « ° t ° ?, I? « e |
P p •«. P P H Si- 1- ft B III o t' |
II. |
|
|
•9-e-9"9--e- s: <^ ? ? ?•? ?te ' 'Tl p ^ |
•e-«-*-9--9-4: p. pppgs ..*- se "'" IB |
< K < < ^ "5 81 S ? | £ 5 ^ - |
III. |
||
|
■e- -e- -e- -e -s. 2-* ^ R R ft. R a "©■ ^. ^ ^ ^ ^. p. ^_ I 1 1 Future Passive wanting j |
VIII. |
■6- ^-^ ■€■ ■& ^.« , 9 9--©-PPsipr* =1 x: P ^ q ^ q '£. §- 5 ¥ * •& t tl 5 i__i g c q o 5' E.i"? ^j |
VII. |
*t ^^^ 2^3 *» ^ •©■-§■>•©■ "1" 5 ■©• ■©■ K * I-? 5 |-||J I. £ l& S » ' ' o~! -3 |
|
|
3 3 V 3 3 3. ^ |
VI. |
||||
479. 1. The first perfect Tri
2. The passive of
|
100 |
100 480.
Indicative. c 1.
S.J2.
<■3.
INFLECTION. 1. Active Voice of Xiiu.
Present.
ifTOV
XiSirov
Sobjckctive.
• XOOIKTI
. Xim
■ Xvjjj
D 12. Xv>]tov
*■ 3. XiSqTov
2. Xiii)T«
3. X
Optative. /"I.
S-|2. Xidi l3. Xioi
J) / 2. XvOlTOV
13.
Xvoitc
XvOKV
Ikpbrative.
S./2. Xv« *■ 3. X«fT
13.
Xi5«tov
Inpinitivb. Participls.
Xvov
Utiv
, Xliouo-O, Wov (336)
Imperfect. fXiov iXvtt fXvc
cXvov
Future.
XjS(T€l
Xv
Xv(T«TOV
Xvo-o(nv
XiS(rou(n
Xv
XiS
Xia-oiftey
XvcroiTt
Xv
[480
Xi5
XtKrwv, Xvtrouiro Xvtov (336)
|
101 |
480]
ACTIVE VOICE OF
101
|
|
1 Aorist. |
1 Perfect. |
1 Pluperfect. |
|
Indicative. fl-S.]2. U. |
fXvo-o |
X&vxa |
|
|
fXvo-as |
XAvxas |
iXtKvKf |
|
|
fXvcr< |
XIXvk< |
AcXvku |
|
|
/2. |
iXva-aTov |
XiXtlxarov |
4XcXvk |
|
(.3. |
JXikrcmiv |
XiXvicarov |
IXfXvKiTnv |
XcXvKart
JXlXvKiTf
Sdbjdnctive.
X«XvVu (720)
XlXvKflJ
(See 683, 2)
j-) f 2. Xv
X
J. Xlkruo-i
X
Optative.
S- j 2. Xvcrais, Xticrnas XtXvKoit ^ 3. Xi'irai, Xticr
(733)
D.(2-I 3.
Xvc
X
X«XvKo(njy
X^9*aiTc XcXvKoirc
Xvtrauv, Xi5
|
Imperative. |
|
Xvcrov XvcraTW |
[XAvk. (472) XcXvk^tw |
|
|
|
X |
XiXv'k |
|
|
f2- P.J3. |
X(kraT« XviravTwv or Xvo'aTcixrav |
XcXvKCTt |
|
Ijh-initive. |
|
Xwrai |
X«Xvk |
|
Participle. |
|
XArw, X^rwra, Xvo-ov (335) |
XiXvxws, XtXvxvt XcXvkos (336) |
|
102 |
|
102 |
|
|
INFLECTION. |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
2. Middle |
Voice of X^oj. |
|
|
|
|
|
Present. |
Imperfect. |
Future. |
|
Indicative. |
r |
1. |
XvO|i(H |
|
X(j |
|
|
s. |
2. |
Xvti, Xvfl |
iiov |
Xijctt, Xuo^i |
|
|
I |
3. |
XutTttl |
cXvtTO |
X«cr€rai |
|
|
D.{ |
2. |
X4«r6ov |
«X«« |
Xvcr«r8ov |
|
|
3. |
Xv«r8ov |
4Xv&r8T]V |
Xv |
|
|
|
f |
1. |
Xvo'(i<9a |
iXvo>«9a |
X{i(rd(«ea |
|
|
|
2. |
X*(o-9( |
jXvc(r8( |
XiS(T€(r8f |
|
|
I |
3. |
Xvovrai |
IXlJOVTO |
Xv |
|
Subjunctive. |
f |
1. |
Xv(i)M^QLk |
|
|
|
|
S. |
2. |
|
|
|
|
|
I |
3. |
Xv^rai |
|
|
|
|
D. { f |
2. 3. 1. |
XVe8°oVv |
|
|
|
|
|
2. |
|
|
|
|
|
( |
3. |
XvaiVTai |
|
|
|
Optative. |
( |
1. |
Xioliirjv |
|
XOo-oChltiv |
|
|
s. |
2. |
Xioio |
|
Xva-oio |
|
|
1 |
3. |
X«OITO |
|
XicroLTO |
|
|
|
2. |
Xvoi(rdov |
|
Xv |
|
|
1). < |
3. |
Xvoto-8-riv |
|
Xii |
|
|
f |
1. |
XvoC(i(9a |
|
XC |
|
|
P. |
2. |
XvoicSc |
|
XiS |
|
|
I |
3. |
Xiioivro |
|
XtcrotvTO |
|
Imperative. |
s.j |
2. 3. |
|
|
|
|
|
D'{ |
2. 3. |
vto-6ov |
|
|
|
|
( |
2. |
Xe«o-8e |
|
|
|
|
p.j |
3. |
Xveo-Bwv or |
|
|
|
|
|
|
vi |
|
|
|
Infinitive. |
|
|
X«€ |
|
xwe« |
|
Participle. |
|
|
Xijojievos, X |
vouicvti, |
Xu |
|
|
|
|
Xio'juvov |
(301) |
■ov (301) |
[480
|
103 |
4«0]
Indicative, rl. s-j2.
*■ 3. iv(raro j) J 2. 4Xv
MIDDLE VOICE OV Xta. 1 Aorisl. Perfect.
3. iXivavro
Subjunctive. C1. Xiio-wjiai S.J2. X^
) / 2. jjcrt]cr8ov *■ 3. XijcrT)(r0ov
3. Xvo-uvTai
OlTATIVK.
S. 2.
^ 3. X
I2' IX '
IMI'ERATIVK.
f
o. AucraiVTO
g / 2. Xvo-ai
^ 3. Xia-atrOu
j) / 2. Xio-a
^ 3. Xxi(ra(r8«v
'• XitrturBi
<• XvccurSwv or
XtXvaai
Infinitive.
PARTIOlri.E.
X«'Xwcr8e
XeXv|ic'vos u
S jfs
s g
T]TOV
tlrov or d'i]Tov
3. X>J
or (£j]'tt)v 1. Xvtra£fK0a
or
or (Xi)Tt
X«Xv(t«'voi t
01" «t>]
(750) X«XuV8a> (749) X^'XucrBov XeXv'o"8«v X«'Xuo-8e
Xij
Xvcraficvos, -i), X(Xu|jl«'vos, -r), -ov (301) -ov (301)
103
Pluperfect.
IXt'XuvTo
|
104 |
104
INFLECTION.
3. Passive Voice op X4«. Future Perfect. 1 Aorist.
Indicative. (1. XiX&rojiai
S.J2. XiXilo-n, XiXioTj
^ 3. X
2. X
3. XfXtio-co-Bov
1 Future. Xv8t{
2. XcXvcria-Bc
Subjunctive. (1.
S. 2.
13.
3.
Optative.
(I.
S. 2.
13.
' 1. X
13. 2.
Y.i
3.
1. X(XvO*offAf0Ci
2.
3. X«X4
Imperative.
_ f2. S3.
3.
Participle.
X
4Xv'8t)
XvB^tov
XvdiJTf
XvSfCrjv
XvBrjo-oio Xv8ifcroiTO
XvBjitov or
Xi8<(t|tov
Xv8«Ctiiv or
XvSijo-oUrBrjv
Xv8
XvButc or X
XvBtttv or Xv8
Xt)8>]TOV
XvBiJtuv
' or Xu8rJTw
X«8tv (336)
Xv8r)
|
105 |
481J SECOND AORIST, PERFECT, ETC. OF iira.
105
481. Second Aorist (Active and Middle) and Second Perfect and Pluperfect of X«Cir».
|
|
|
|
2 Aorist |
2 Aorist |
2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfec |
|
|
|
|
Active. |
Middle. |
|
|
Indicative. |
|
(1. |
iXiirov |
tXiiroVtie |
X&oiira IXiXolin] |
|
|
S. |
2. |
{Xiir |
IXLttov |
X^Xoiiras {X |
|
|
|
1-3. |
«Xiirc |
ikiirfTO |
XiXoiirc {XtXoCirfi |
|
|
|
(2. |
{XCttctov |
ivmo'vov |
XcXohraTov iX |
|
|
|
|
{X<.ir |
tAnr€o*vtiv |
XcXoCiraTOv ^XcXoiircrr)V |
|
|
|
|
{Xhro(i«v |
&iiro'|ic6a |
XiXo(ira|Xcv 4XfXo(irf|uy |
|
|
P. |
2. |
iX£ir«T< |
iXhrco-Bi |
XtXotiraTC ^XiXoCircTf |
|
|
|
u. |
tXiirov |
Ikltrovro |
X |
|
Subjunctive |
|
f1- |
Xbru |
hr«!ioi |
X«Xo<™ (See 683, 2) |
|
|
's.- |
2- |
XCiqjs |
Xtirji |
X(Xoliq)S |
|
|
|
u. |
XCht] |
XCinjTai |
X«Xo(iqj |
|
|
D.< |
13. |
XtTTI]TOV |
XCirr] |
X«Xohn]TOv |
|
|
|
f1- |
XtZpv |
|
XiXolirwjuv |
|
|
P.- |
2. |
imTf |
X(irno-8« |
XiXoiin]Te |
|
|
|
13. |
XCiruo-i |
XlirwvTai |
X«Xoi'i7rwtri |
|
Optative. |
|
f1- |
XCiroifii |
Xiirofjujv |
XfXoi-iroifii |
|
|
S.< |
|
Xiirois |
XCiroio |
XiXotirois |
|
|
|
u.. |
Xiiroi |
XtiroiTO |
XtXoi-iroi |
|
|
D < |
f2. |
Xiitoitov |
X(iroi |
X«Xo(ii-oitov |
|
|
|
13. |
XlTTO(T1]V |
Xiirota-8r|V |
XfXoiiro^v |
|
|
|
1- |
XCiroifuv |
Xtiro(pi<8a |
XtXoiTroifjKv |
|
|
|
|
XtiroiTi |
XCttoictSc |
X |
|
|
|
is. |
Xtironv |
XtirotVTO |
XfXoCirotiV |
|
Imperative. |
H |
r2. |
XCirc |
Xiirov |
XtXoiir< |
|
|
13. |
Xiir |
XnrivQu |
X«Xoiir«T«» |
|
|
|
D 1 |
2. |
XCiTfTOV |
XbricrSov |
XiXotiriTOv |
|
|
|
13. |
XlTT^TUV |
Xiir^cr8uv |
XiXoitt/tuv |
|
|
|
'2. |
XiiTCT* |
X(irc |
XcXoCimt* |
|
|
P. |
3. |
XlTTOVTWV |
rla-iuv or |
XlXot^TUV |
|
|
|
|
Tiocrav |
|
|
|
Infinitive. |
|
|
Xiir |
Xiirco~8ai |
XtXom^vai |
|
Participle. |
|
|
Xiirwv, |
Xiiro'(«vos, |
XiXoittws, |
|
|
|
|
Xnrovo-O |
-1), -OV |
XcXoimila, |
|
|
|
|
Xiiro'v |
(301) |
XfXoiiro't |
|
|
|
|
(335) |
|
(335) |
|
106 |
IOC INFLECTION. [482
482. Future and First Aokist Active and Middle (Liquid Forms) and Second Aorist and Second Future Passive of 4>atvo>.
Future Active.1 Future Middle.1 1 Aorist Active. Indicative. f. 4>avu
j 2.
*■ 3.
t^avciTOv ^avcitf*dov ^T)vdTi]v
!1. 4>avo£)jL
2.
3. 4>avovcri 4)av0'l/Tai «()>»]vav
SURJUNCTIVE. ( 1. (|)T|V«
S. -j 2.
^ 3.
T) i 2- 4>T)VT1TOV
' I 3.
TOV
P.-J2. I 3.
Ottative. fl. 4>avoh)v or 4>avot|ii c(;
S. -j 2.
^3. 4>avoir] or 4>avoi
ry J 2. <} id="iv.i.p4568.1">avoiTov 4>avoi
I.'!. 4>avo(Tt)v <}i
* ( 1. <|)avoipL€v (f)
P. j 2. 4>avoiT( <} id="iv.i.p4571.1">
*■ 3. 4>avoi(V (|>avoivTO (|>TJvai
iMPERATnTL. g j 2. 4>7]VOV
"I 3.
<} id="iv.i.p4575.1">i]vdvTuv or ^>i]vaTwcrav
Infinitive. <{ id="iv.i.p4576.1">av
Participle. ^avuv, 4>avov
<) id="iv.i.p4578.1">avovv (340) -i],-ov(301) 4>tivav (335)
1 Tlie uncontracted futures,
|
107 |
482]
Indicative.
StBJtlNCTIVK.
S-ja-
3.
Optative.
P.
I1.
Impekative. c / 2. 4>tJvcu
L 3. cf>r|vacr8w
Infinitive. Participle.
FUTURES AND AORISTS OF
1 A or. Mid. 2 ^lor. Pass. 2 Fut. Pass.
j^ -j 2. Ifyrfvvi (4>ovt]S (j>avt|crii,
*• 3. iirva-ro
' 13. <
<) id="iv.i.p4599.1">ovi]
* H.
^ 3. <^i^vwvrai
3. 4)TJvaiTO 4>ayc£i]
2. ^i^vaifrBov
1.
or _ <))avijo*ourB<
3. 4><]vaivTo <| id="iv.i.p4607.2">aniiv or
4>civ
4>r{vao-8at i
4>i]Va}ityos, -i], 4>av
-ov (301) 4>av«ura, -ij, -ov (301)
|
108 |
108 INFLECTION. [483
483. The uncontracted forms of the future active and middle of t^cu'vu) (478) and of other liquid futures are not Attic, but are found in Homer and Herodotus. So with some of the uncontracted forms of the aoiist subjunctive passive in tu> (474).
484. The tenses of XttVos and
485. Some of the dissyllabic forms of Xio> do not show the accent so well as polysyllabic forms, e.g. these of xwXvw, hinder: —
Pres. Imper. Act. kwXvi, kcoAik'tid, ku>Xviti. Aor. Opt. Act. KuXvcrat/xL, KioXvcrtia's (or KwXvacw;), KuiXvcrcu (or ku>Xv
The three forms KinXiaai, KtiiXvcrai, kwACctcu (cf. Xvcrai, Xvaai, Xuaat) are distinguished only by accent. See 130; 113; 131, 4.
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE AND PASSIVE OF VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS.
486. 1. In the perfect and pluperfect middle, many euphonic changes (489) occur when a consonant of the tense-stem comes before p., t,
2. When the stem ends in a consonant, the third person plural of these tenses is formed by the perfect middle participle with iicri, are, and rjcrav, were (806).
487. 1. These tenses of rplfiw, rub, irXtKto, weave, im0w persuade, and orcAAu> (oraX-), send, are thus inflected: —
Perfect Indicative.
{1. T
2. T^Tpiij/oi nVirXi^ai irfirticrai JoraXorai
3. rfrpiirrai irfirXfKTai irlimorai {
p 12. T
' 13. rhplfyiov iriirXixiov ir
'1. T
2. T
^ 3. TiTpiji^voi ircirXcy^voi ir
•
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
Subj. T
|
109 |
487] VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS. 109
Perfect Imperative.
o J2. iVTptyo
I 3. TCTpt$6u jy j
«crToX
irtireto'Sw l
2. T^Tpi48ov ir^irX«Y8ov irfiru
I 3. TCTpt^tdwv or irtirXlxBuv or iriircCcr^uv or ivraXQwv or
icrrdXSucrav
Perfect Infinitive and Participle. Inf. T€Tpt<} id="iv.i.p4645.1">8ai ir€irX
Pluperfect Indicative.
(1.
5. j 2. Mrpv
^ 3. ^TtTpl'
iir^irXt^o
piirro lir
3.
Ivimurfa co-raX8<
•qo-av T|
2. The same teuses of (rtXtw) TtXu (stem rtXt-), finish,
net, are thus inflected: — Perfect Indicative.
700]
S- j 2. TtT^Xio-at [ir<
TJXXaKTOL
ir((fi(icr(i«fla
3. tctcXc(t^voi irc^curpVvoi
«Ur£ da-C
Perfect Subjunctive and Optative.
Sdbj. TiTtX«r(i
|
110 |
110 INFLECTION. [488
Perfect Imperative. nrlkura [ircc^avo-o]
< 3. T
. 3. T€T«X
I 3. t(t«X6t8iov or irc
Perfect Infinitive and Participle.
Inf. Part.
S. ■< 2.
tT{TtXt
I 6. «TI
,{i
I 3.
^(rav T|
488. N. 'J'he regular third person plural here (rtrpi/J-n-cu, iirnrXtK-vTO, etc., formed like Xikvvrai, iXiXv-vro) could not be pronounced. The periphrastic form is necessary also when
489. For the euphonic changes here, see 71-77 and 83.
1. Thus TtTpifi-fuu is for t£t/m/?-/«u (75); Tfrplij/ai for Terpt/?-
2. In TCTzXetr-fjuii,
|
111 |
491] VERBS WITH CONSONANT STEMS. HI
stitute for v of the stem (83), which v reappears before other letters (7U0). hi the following comparison the distinction is shown by the hyphens: —
TtT(X<-o*-|i.at Wircior-|iai
T«T«'X{-
rmXt-cr-Tai. triircur-rai irtcjxxvrai
TeWXe-
3. Under ijAAay-fUU, r/AAa£at is for rjWaycui, rjXXaK-rai for ijAAuy-rou, rjWaxOov for r]AAay-6ov (74; 71). Under (AyXfy-fua, yyfji (foi yx/x) drops one y (77); t'AiJAcy^cu and cAiJAe-yK-reu are for ikrjXtyx^ti1 and i )cyx-Tai (74; 71). See also 529.
490. 1. All perfect-middle stems ending in a labial inflect these tenses like rirpX/i-fiai; as Aerirc), Xiufx-fia.i ypd
'2. All ending in a palatal inflect these tenses like irtTrAey-^uu and r)Wa.y-ixai; as Trpucrtrw (irpdy), iriirpdy-fwi; rapdi/aw (rapa^-), confute, TCTapay-fuu; <^vXduaui (
3. All ending in a lingual mute inflect these tenses like 7rcim
4. Most ending in v (tliose. in av- and vv- of verbs in oxvui or vi/w) are inflected like -n-^aa-fmi (see 489, 2).
0. When final y of a sti-ni is (iropped (647), as in k'v
0. Those ending in A or p are inflected like icrTa-/juu; as dyyt'AAcu (dyycA-), announce, rjyyi-pM; aipco (dp-), raise, r/p-fjuu; iytifiu) (f'yep-), rouse, iyyyytp-fujx; trcipoi (7r«p-), pierce, iriTrap-pM (045).
491. For the full forms of these verbs, see the Catalogue. For ^xuW, see also 478.
|
112 |
112 INFLECTION. [492
CONTRACT VERBS.
492. Verbs in ao>, c
ACTIVE. Present Indicative.
n f 2. (Tijuderoi') tIii&tov (
3. {TlLitttTOV) TltlttTOV (^iXetfTOp) 0lX(lTOI' (8v €T0yj 8llX0VT0V
P* "S 2. (Tr/id€7"e) TlIJtdTC (0(X^€T<)
*• 3. (Tifiuiovfft) Ttjiwo"t (^»iX^ou(Ti)
Present Subjunctive.
S. i 2. (7"i,uiijs) Tlucts (0lX^>7s) <| id="iv.i.p4708.1">iXt]S (5*7X677?) 8t]Xois
o, (tiUATI) TILlOL
,, f 2. (Tl/«i7)T0>') TlJldTOV
I 3. (Tl/i
{1 (Ttixito/ici'') TtuiwuKV (iX^uit
2. (rt/idTjrf) TiuaTC (0iX^T7Tc) oiXi]r<
O. (TtLWKO^t) TlllW^t (0iXfW(Tl)
Present Optative (sec 737).
S. ■< 2. (rliidois) Tiuws (0(X^ot$) d>iXois (5ijXcfois)
2. (T-iMaOiTOJ") Tl(l»TOV (
ijv) 4>iXoCtt)V if^) 4>iXot|icv
j, (2. (TifidoiToy) Ti(i»'
?• -j 2. (Ti/MIOITC) Tt(i(j)T«
^ 3 rrliid ^ ~ *
p.
<) id="iv.i.p4725.1">iXot(v
or or or or
2. (r
1--1 f 2. (rZ/xao^TOt') [^TijtWTJTOV (0iX6ofT7TO^ f
P- -j 2. (ri/iaofijrt) Tt)i
^ 3.(rlfMotijaav') Tiji^cavJ (0(Xeo^i7(7'oi/)4>tXo£']ff*civJ
|
113 |
492]
CONTRACT VERBS. Present Imperative.
,, j 2. (ri/tof) rt(id
&' 1 O / - / -4
I 3. (n/jof t«) Tifidru
_ | 2. (Tl/idtTOl') TlJldTOV
I 3. {r'tnatrup') Tt(iaTWv
P.
|
2. ( |
Ti^der( |
) Ti(lttT€ |
|
3. ( |
TlliabtT |
WJ-) TlflWVTWV |
|
|
or |
or |
|
(t |
|
av) TifidTwcrov |
Present Infinitive.
rtfi&v
Tk^iUV
S. -^ 2. (M/iats) *-3. (
Present Participle (see 340). (^IX«5)
»■«:!
irifi-arov
'1.1
>) <4 id="iv.i.p4759.1">(Xouv
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. Present Indicative.
Ti|i»(iai
S. j 2. (xl/idei, Tl^Lidp) i
Df 2. (r(Lidecr#o»0 Tlu.do'Bov . <
•3. ( 1. i P. "j 2. (rZ/xdftrtfc) Tt|id
' 3. (rl^doirat) TijjiwvTat
(J>iX(iTai
4>iX«icrflov
4>'X«!
Present Subjunctive.
{1. (rZitdwuaO tiulw o ; . , . r.
■ 3. (ri/idijTai) Tt|j.d'
• •>. (Tl^idTJffPO*') TillUc8o
Tt|j.dTai
• 1 "• (Ti^idi)(r«) Ti)ia
113
or
StjXovtov
8i]X0VTUV
8i]Xo0t« 8t]Xovvtwv or
8t|XoC
JSijXovv {SijXovs
Ji)X6tj) 8t)XoC SijXovTai 8i^Xova-8oy Si)Xov
8-qXot I 8r)X»
8i)Xu
|
114 |
114
INFLECTION.
[493
1
{ 2. 3.
|
|
2. (Tlp&ourBc |
i Tl|i |
|
1 O / - / |
1 TIJIWVTO |
|
|
/ 2. (^Tifidov") |
|
|
|
rl|xd(r6w |
||
|
{ 3" /^^°* |
) Ti(id |
|
|
) Tindo"8u)v |
||
|
|
|
Tt(j.do-8t |
|
|
n / - Irrfl |
) Ti|idcr.8a)v |
|
|
or |
or |
Ti(».O(r8ai
IClfTo) {Ti(lOT0
I). I „ J . . , ...
^ 3. (irtfidoi'ro) ^Ti(i«
Present Optative.
{1. (rlna.oltJ.riv) 2. (t'i/moio) tijiwo 3. (ri/idoiTo) Ti|lu>TO
ry f 2. (rl/wioierflex') Ti^ip<7-6ov I 3. (ri^aofofl^y) Ti(ia id="iv.i.p4817.1">V8i]v
-qv)
<|»iXolvto
Present Imperative.
8r)Xoto-8c 8i]Xoivto
r(?uj) 8r)XovKr8in (5rjd«r8oi'') St]XoO
8r]Xovcr8«
Present Infinitive.
Present Participle. Imperfect.
St]Xov
iStjXov
4<( id="iv.i.p4828.1">iX«i
(tdr)dc
493. N. The uncontracteci forms of tlipse tensps are not Attic (but see 490, 1). Those of verbs in aw sometimes occur in Iloinor; thuse of verbs in tu are common in Homer and Herodotus; but. those of verbs in ou are never used. For dialectic forms of these verbs, see 784-786.
|
115 |
498] CONTRACT VEKBS. 115
494. Synopsis of rlfxdw,
Active.
|
Pies. |
TlfLU |
|
|
Impf. |
|
i^iXovv |
|
Kut. |
Ti(lT)CT(i» |
4>iXii |
|
Aor. |
|
<4 id="iv.i.p4846.1">iXt) |
|
Perf. |
T«T((itl(Ca |
1TC (pi ATI K A |
|
l'iup. |
|
c1TC |
|
|
|
MlDDI.K. |
|
Pres. |
|
^iXoinai |
|
Impf. |
|
|
|
Fut. |
|
|
|
Aor. |
{Ti|jir) |
ta>lT)O*Clli.Tl V |
|
Perf. |
T«Ti|it)HOl |
TTtipiATJlJlClL |
|
Plup. |
|
fcwj.iA.VJMV |
|
|
|
Passivk. |
|
Pres. and |
Imp.: same |
as Middle. |
|
Fut. |
|
4>iXi]et)a-O)iai |
|
Aor. |
|
<4hXt]9tiv |
|
Perf. and |
Plup.: same |
as Middle. |
|
Fut. Perf. |
TCTl)iVjcro|iai |
irc iXrj |
8(Si)XwKa T«0-i)paKa
495. 1. Dissyllabic verbs in eu> contract only t£ and ««. Tlius irXt'o), »-iiY, has pics. TrXt'u), irX«i9, irXti, irXeiToe, irXiofXtv, nXtlri, itXiovvi; iniperf. lv(.ov, t-irXtis, t7rXct, etc.; infin. irkdv; par tic. tt(.wv.
2. At'o), bind, is the only exception, and i.s contracted in most forms; as Sovai, &oi/fuu, SoCptiu, cSoui', partic. Suiv, SoDi/. Ac'uj, wan/, is contracted lilie n-XtV
496. JT. A few verbs in «o> havp 17 for d in the contracted forms; as Sii/rdu), Sii^/ui, thirst, Sitfnj^, Sti/'if, Suf^jn ; imperf. iSfywv, tSiijnjs, ihi
497. N. 'Ptyow, shiver, has infinitive piyui/ (with ptyoiii'), and optative plyipTfv. 'ISpdco, sweat, has I8puj
Aouoj, tiwA, sometimes drops v, and Xdu> is then inflected like OijXdw; as
498. N. Tba tliird person singular of the imperfect active does
|
116 |
116 INFLECTION. [499
not take v movable in the contracted form; thus i
499. For (a«tv) av and (detv) ovv in the infinitive, see 39, 5.
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
500. The peculiar inflection of verbs in /u affects only the present and second aorist systems, and in a few verbs the second perfect system. Most second aorists and perfects here included do not belong to presents in fa, but are irregular forms of verbs in w; as fiaivut), lyvuiv (yiyvuxrKio), iirraix-qv (Wto-/«u), and T(6va/xtv, TcSvairjv, TiOyavai. (second perfect of OvrjvKw). (See 798, 799, 804.)
501. Tenses thus inflected are called /it-forms. In other tenses verbs in /u are inflected like verbs in
502. There are two classes of verbs in /xi: —
(1) Those in 77/u (from stems in a or t) and
(2) Those in vvfii, which have the /it-form only in the present and imperfect; these add w (after a vowel vw) to the verb stem in these tenses, as 8etWiJ-/« (oW-), show, pui-vvv-ixi (po>-), strengthen. For poetic verbs in vrj/jn (with va added to the stem), see C09 and 707, 2.
503. For a full enumeration of the pi-forms, see 793-804.
504. Synopsis of lo-r-qfu, riOijpi, Si'Sw/u, and Stix^C/xt in the Present and Second Aorist Systems.
Active.
Indie. Subj. Opt. Imper. Infin. Part.
1
ta-nv
t(6ci nOlvai ti6<1$ SiSu Si8o(t|v SCSov SiSdvai 8iSov«
iSCSow
8
|
117 |
606] CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. 117
|
Indie. Subj. |
Opt. |
Imper. |
Infin. |
Part. |
|
!CTT)V OTTW |
OTToti]V |
|
|
eras |
|
!8|TOV 6 |
8f(ijv |
ih |
6 |
6<£s |
|
dual (500) |
|
|
|
|
|
{Sotov 8 |
8o{f]V |
Sit |
8ovyai |
8ovs |
|
dual (506) |
|
|
|
|
|
J8«v (505) 8v» |
|
8S8i |
SDi-ai |
Sit |
p. S
1
Passive akd Middle.
Tt8«(ro rCBtcrBai SlSojxai 8i8»fiai 8iSotfii)y SCSo
6t(fii)V 8ov 6(0-6 ai
6oO 86
505. As laryfu wants the second aorist middle, inpj bought (from a stem irpia- with no present), is added here and in the inflection. As SuKyv/u wants the second aorist (502, 2), iSvy, 1 entered (from Svw, formed as if from hv-fii), is added. No second aorist middle in vp.t)v occurs, except in scattered poetic forms (see A.UU), irviu),
506. Inflection1 of "o-tti/j-i, rlB-qfj-i., SiSaipi, and Scikvv/xi in the Present and Second Aorist Systems; with t8vy aad ftrpu^v (505). active
Present Indicative. ' 1. t
f] .. .. .
Sing, -j 2. V
^3. to-rno-l T(8n
Dual 1 *' ^TaT0V t(8itov 6£8otov ScCkvutov
to-TOTOv rtStTov 8CSotov 8iCkwtov
to-ra(icv t(8<|icv SCSo|uv Si(KW)uy
Plur. -J2. &rraT« t18it« 8C8ot« 8(Ckwti
^ 3. icrTwri TiB/din SiSowri SdKvvavi
I2' 13.
I 3.
|
118 |
118
INFLECTION.
[600
Imperfect.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Sing.
Dual
l'lur.
Sing.
Dual
J'lur.
Dual
Plur.
Sing.
Dual
I2 13
a-rrv Vo-rt)s X
V
Vcrracrav
"Tl*
iSCSov
iSCSoTOV
€Tl8«T«
tTC8«
Present Subjunctive. Ti6w - 8i8u>
ti8t^s 8i8a>s
8i8iirov 8l8un-ov
tiBtJtov
tl8t]T€ 8l8wrl
TlObMTl 8l8uKTl
Present Optative.
i
ICTWfJLfV
itTTTJTt
UTTWOH
l(TTai1)V
t
ilTTOLLII TiuClii OIOOL11
Tl8«ii)TOV 8l8oir|TOV
Tl8l«JTT]V
Tl6
Tb8c(^T( 8l8o(t]T(
Ti8ur|o-av 8i8oii)
Ciinimonly thus contracted: —
ICTTatTOV TlStlTOV 818OITOV
ioTatniv ti8«itiiv 8i8o(niv
lfrral]uv Ti8
Tl8«lT€ 8l8olTC
Tl8lwv 8180WV
Present Imperative.
t(8ci S(Sou
TlB^TO) 8180TU
t£8ctov 6i8otov
TiOtVuv 8i8ora>v
Xa~n
{ScCkvvtov
SUKVVO
8«IKVVT|TOV 8ciKVV1]TOV 8
8ciKVv'uiri
StlKVVOlfJ.1 SclKVVOlS
8cikvu'oi
8«KV«OITOV
Scikvvo(tt|V
SciKVVOlfliV 8uKVliOlT<
Scikvv'ouv
8«IKVVT«
8«(KV rov SfiKVtirwv
|
119 |
606]
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
119
Plur. -{ 3
8£8oT«
urravTuv or tiScvtwv or 8i8o'vtwv or Scikvvvtwv or
SiSoVaxrav Scucvvraxrav
Infinitive-
8180'vai SuxviSvai
Present Participle (335).
Tl8
Second Aorist Indicative (802).
Sing.
Dual
Plur. -I 2 (3
Sing.
Dual I
iVnjcrav «8to-av »8o(rav
Second Aorist Subjunctive.
Plur.
oriyrov
Siyrov 8tJtov
5 us Su
8wrov 8i*rov
8t0Tf
Swri
Sing.
Dual it
i
Plur.
Second Aorial Optative.
crTair]TOV
Soir ov 6oiiynv
6(lr
t 8«ti)
So(r)«-av
i'8vv
c'(rrT|5---------- ---------- cSvs
tern)----------- ---------- <8v
^(TT^TOV i'8lTOV «8OTOV i'SvTOV
f8v
Situ
8v«>|i(V
(See 744)
|
120 |
120
Dual
Plur.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
|
|
|
INFLECTION. |
|
|
|
|
|
Commonly thus contracted: — |
|
|
|
2. |
0TTOIT01 |
1 8«tTOV |
SoiTOV |
|
|
3. |
o-To(n)i |
t 8iCtijv |
8o£n)v |
|
|
1. |
(rrai|i |
8 |
Soijitv |
|
|
2. |
OTCUT* |
8ftr< |
8ot« |
|
|
3. |
orattv |
6 |
Souv |
|
|
|
|
Second Aorist Imperative. |
|
|
|
2. |
|
|
80s |
Sv9i |
|
3. |
OTTJTW |
6(to |
8o'tu |
SlJTU |
|
2. |
o-tiJtov |
tirov |
So'tov |
SwTOV |
|
3. |
o-njTwv |
6 |
8oV |
8(JT»V |
|
o |
(TTtJTI |
6(n |
8o't« |
8vTf |
|
3. |
aravrai |
v or 8/vtwv or |
So'vtuv or |
Sv'vtuv or |
|
|
o-TTJTW |
8oTU(rav |
8vTu(rav |
|
|
|
|
Second Aorist Infinitive. |
|
|
|
|
o-nivai |
8 |
SoCvai |
Svvai |
|
|
|
Second Aorist Participle (335). |
|
|
|
|
crrds |
6i(s |
Sou's |
hit |
[606
Sing, j 2. &
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. Present Indicative.
1. VorafKu Sing. I 2. So-Ta
13.
StSocrai
Dual /2- ^o"-80"
*. 3. Iotcut9ov
Plur. j 2. to-Tao-9c
*• 3. tcravTai
SCSoa-9ov S(6ocr9ov
Sing, -j 2. t
*■ 3. t
t(9«t9< 8(8oo-9<
Tt9«vrai SfSovrai
Imperfect.
irWtcra 4818o
DUal {3: Plur.
2. tcrrairSov
3. to~ravTO
(8i8o)i.c8a (SCSovto
8
8<(icvvrai
hi £kv«j-9»
(SflKVV)1.1)V
JS«lKvv
IS*Uwvto
|
121 |
606]
11. UrT<5|iai Sing. | 2. UtttJ
<■ 3. lo-TTJTai
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI. Present Subjunctive.
Tl8«(l TlBl]
121
Plur,
< 2 lo-rVjo-Bov Ti8ii
3. Urriiaeor "B^Boy
(1. t
:. 2. I
Is i
Sing. ■! 2. i
U. t
13. io-T(ivTai
TiBuvrav 8i8<5vrai
Present Optative.
8eiKVV«vroi
Sing. -12. Urroto **•«•
I 3. loTtttTO TlB^TO
,2 lo-Tato-Bov riOriaflov Dual
8«IKVVOIO 8l80iTO 6«KV>i0lT0
8t8ov
8i.8oC
Plur. -| 2. Icrrai
Sing. Dual
tiBcivto
Present Imperative. tCB^o 8CSo(to
StSotVTO 8CIKVVOIVTO
2. to-rao-flov
13. Icttoo-Bwv
I2' Plur. ^ 3.
8i8o
8t8o
8i8o'o-e«v
StLKVvVBlOV
i
tCBco-Bov
tt- ;VZ.UZZL
Present Infinitive
Present Participle (301).
8«lKV»VeV0S
Sing. ■{ 2. Dual
-v
|
122 |
|
122 |
|
|
INFLECTION. |
|
|
Plur. |
|
iirptatrBi |
|
i'8ocr8( |
|
|
tirptaVTo |
(SCVTO |
iSoVTO |
|
|
|
|
Second Aorist Middle |
Subjunctive. |
|
|
|
ii |
irpCwpai |
|
Sm|x |
|
Sing. |
irplr) |
•n" |
8iu |
|
|
|
irpit]Tai |
|
hiirai |
|
|
Dual |
p 13. |
irp(7)o-eov |
8Vj |
8u |
|
|
irpfn |
8tjo-8ov |
8wr8ov |
|
|
|
(1. |
irpiuKiiBoi |
|
8w)ic8a |
|
Plur. |
2- |
TrpCiicvt |
|
|
|
|
I 3. |
irpCtiiVTai |
8«VTai |
SwVTai |
|
|
|
|
! Aorist Middle Optative. |
|
|
|
P: I 3. |
n*piaCfx^v |
|
8oi)lT)V |
|
Sing. |
irpiaio |
8ao |
Soio |
|
|
|
-TrptaiTo |
8tlTO |
6o£to |
|
|
Dual |
(2. |
irpCaicrfiov |
8cur8ov |
Sourflov |
|
|
I 3. |
upitt( |
0<( |
8ola-8i]V |
|
|
|
irpia(|jL«8a |
8(C)JLc8cL |
8o(|j.c8a |
|
Plur. |
2. |
irp[aio-8( |
|
SourSc |
|
|
u. |
irptoivro |
Bcivto |
Soivro |
|
|
|
Second |
^4on'»t Middle |
Imperative |
|
Sing. |
(2. I 3. |
irpCu |
8ov 6eV8u |
Sov 8oV8« |
|
Dual |
f2. |
irpiao-Bov |
8(V8ov |
8oV8ov |
|
|
13. |
irpiaa'8wv< |
BcVSwv |
8oV6idv |
|
|
/■ 2. |
irpCao-fl. |
6 |
8o'cr8« |
|
riur. |
1 "" |
irpudo-Ouv or |
9 |
SocrSwv or |
|
|
|
trpiacrdwcrav |
9 |
SoVSucrav |
[500
Second Aorist Middle Infinitive. irpiacrdai 8
Second Aorist Middle Participle (301). irpia)j.«vos
|
123 |
609J
CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI.
123
507. wl
508. These tenses of iotij/u are thus inflected: —
|
f 1 |
|
Sf.conu Perfect. • |
|
|
|
|
|
«' |
t'trratiis |
«'(TTafli |
|
- |
|
|||
|
I 3. |
|
|
«' |
|
|
|
|
|||
|
f2. |
cVtotov |
( |
* |
«' |
|
|
|
|
or -qitov |
|
|
3. |
fCTttTOV |
iVttJtov |
JO-TttliiT^V |
t'crTOLTUV |
|
I |
|
|
or -atrtjv |
|
|
1. |
J" |
.Vr^iv |
to-Taii] («v |
|
|
|
|
|
or -aificv |
|
|
2. |
«crraT« |
« |
i(rralrTt |
iVTaT« |
|
|
|
|
or -aiT« |
|
|
3. |
torcuri |
cVtuxti |
.o-ratno-av |
«VTavTUV or |
|
|
|
|
or -ai |
co-TCXTwa-av |
|
Infinitive. |
t'a-Tcivai Participle. «(ttws |
(342) |
||
Sing.
Dual
I'lur.
Second Pi.cpehkect. Dual. fo-TOTov, {
For an enumeration of these forms, see 804.
509. Full Synopsis of the Indicative of r Bw/xi, and SumnifLi, in all the voices.
|
|
|
Active. |
|
|
Pres. |
to-TTlHl, |
t(8i)|u, |
SCS»,u, |
|
|
set |
|
give |
|
Irnperf. |
UcTTT)V |
|
{SiSouv |
|
Fut. |
|
|
Siio-u |
|
1 Aor. |
fo-r^tra, .<;«{ |
(0T1KOI |
tSuKa |
|
2Aor. |
JcTT1]», StOOfi |
{8«tov etc. |
iE8oTov etc. |
|
|
|
in dual and plur. |
in dual and plur. |
show
iSitga
|
124 |
124 INFLECTION. [610
1 Perf.
2 Perf. lora-rov etc.
in dual and plur., stand (508)
1 Plupf. ilO-TTJKl!
or ia-rrKt
2 Plupf. Jo-Tarov etc. .
indual and plur.,
stood (508)
Fut.Perf. icrrijju, shall stand (705)
Middle.
Pres. ((rrafiai, stand TCdtfiai SCSopai (simple 8«(Kw|iai
(trans.) only in pass.) (trans.)
Impf. to"Td(lT]V
1 Aor. 4(rTT)(rdni]v i6i}K
(trans.) Attic)
2 Aor.
Perf. li
Passive.
Present, Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect: as in Middle. Aor. 4o-Td9iiv M8r)v 48<8i]v
Fut. crTa6r|
Fut. Perf. i
shall stand late)
AUGMENT.
510. In the secondary tenses of the indicative, the verb receives an augment (i.e. increase) at the beginning, which marks these as past tenses.
511. Augment is of two kinds: —
1. Syllabic augment, which prefixes e to verbs beginning with a consonant; as Xvw, imperfect e-voi>; XetVo), second aorist e- rov.
2. Temporal augment, which lengthens the first syllable of verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong; as aya, lead, imperf. rjyov; ol/ciw, ol/ca>, dwell, aor. wicrjaa.
|
125 |
519] AUGMENT. 125
512. The augment is confined strictly to the indicative, never appearing in the other moods or the participle, even when any of these denote past time.
Impisrfect an'u Aohist Indicative.
513. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs beginning with a consonant have the syllabic augment
Auo), iiov, iXvcra, iXvo/JLrjv, iXvodix-nv, (XvdrjV, ypd<$ id="iv.i.p5537.1">i>, write, iypa< id="iv.i.p5537.2">ov, typaipa, iypd
514. In Homer any liquid (especially A.) may be doubled after the augment e; as IWoypv for IXa^ov, iix/xaOe for €)xaOe. So sometimes
515. The imperfect and aorist indicative of verbs beginning with a short vowel have the temporal augment, which lengthens the initial vowel; a and e becoming 77, and t, 0, v becoming i, co, v. E.g.
Ayco, lend, rjyov, ri6r)v; iavvu>, drive, rjXavvov; Ikcrtvui, implore, iKtVtuof, iKfTivcra; ovtiSi'^u), reproach, oivciSifov; i^pt'^a) insult, vjipi-
516. A long initial vowel is not changed, except that d generally becomes ij; as s.6iu>, struggle, yOXriva. But both a and 77 are found in di/aA.i'crK«) and dvdAo'oj, and di'oj (poetic), hear, has ffi'oc
517. BouXo/iai, wish, hvva/ixu, be able, and fttXAo), intend, often have ij for e in the augment, especially in later Attic; as (fiovX.6ix.Tjv or ri/3ovX6/M)v, c/3ovXy&r)v or 7]f$ovXrj8y)v', iBwdfir/v or ^Sura/i^v, iSvvr)0r]v or ■qSvvrjStjv', ificXXov or rj/xiXXov.
518. A diphthong takes the temporal augment on its first vowel, at or a becoming 77. E.g.
Atrcco, ask, -rJTrj
519. Ov is never augmented. Et and tv are often without augment, especially in later Attic; but mss. and editors differ in regard to many forms, as <"»caa-a or fJKaaa (from
|
126 |
126 INFLECTION. [620
REDUPLICATION.
520. The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect, in all the. moods and in the participle, have a reduplication, which is the mark of completed action.
PtlitTXT AND FlTI'HK I'r.HPECT.
521. Verbs beginning with a single consonant (except p) are. reduplicated in the perfect and future perfect by prefixing that consonant followed by e. E.g.
Aucu, ki-KvKa, koXv/iai, Xi-XvKivai, A«-Auk
For the pluperfect, see Ci"_'7.
522. N. (a) Five verbs have ei in the perfect instead of the reduplication: —
ayo.v
Au/x/jiiva) (Aa/i-), take, ei
j
Ae'-ya), collect, in composil-ion, -ti'Ao^a, -ei'Aey/wii witli -eeyfjuii-, SuxAe'yofiai, difcuss, lias Bi.-ec(.y/juxi;
/j.cipofuj.1 ()j.tp-), obtain part, ilfiaprai, it is fated ;
from stem (pt-) dpijKa, have said, (iprjfiai, fut. pf. tlprj(TOjuii. (see. uttov).
(l>) An ivregular reduplication appears in Homeric Sei'SoiKa and 8«i'8i«, from Sei'&o, ./itir, and &c'S«y/«xi (for 8c'8ty,uui), (/reel, from a stem 8ck- (see StiV^O/xt).
523. In Verbs beginning with too consonants (except a mute and a liquid), with a double consonant (f, £, ^), or with p, the reduplication is represented by a simple e, having the same form as the syllabic augment. £.(/■
2r«'AA
524. 1. Most verbs beginning with a muU' and a liquid have the full reduplication ; as ypa
(l V
$ yyp^
'2. But those beginning with yv, and occasionally a few in fl or yX, have c ; as yvwpL^w, recognize, pelf. fyrujpiKU; ycyvuxiKu) (yvo-), Ar^i6W, ty^ojKa. See /iAafrrai'a) and yA.vw.
525. N. Mifi.v;i
|
127 |
631] ATTIC REDUPLICATION". 127
526. Verbs beginning with a short vowel lengthen the vowel, and those beginning with a diphthong lengthen its iirst vowel, in sill forms of the perfect and future perfect, the reduplication thus having the form of the temporal augment. E.g.
*Ayw, lead, rju., -r/yfuu., ijy/icVo;; aKoXovOcw, follow, r)KoXov&r]Ka, rjKoXovOijKtvui', opOuw, erect, wpOwfiai', u[>l£w, bound, wpLKCi, tupMrpuii', ari/xo'u), dishonor, -rjrifxwKa, rjri/xw/xu.i., lul. jil. ^rl/^ajcro/xui. A'ipio), lake, rjprjKa, rjpijijuai, ypr'/vo/juu; eiica£<», liken, yuaafuxi.; tvpi
Long a may become 7? (see 01(j) ; as in avdXiOKw, pi. a.vr)
I'l.lU'ElU'KCT.
527. When the reduplicated perfect begins with a consonant, the pluperfect prefixes the syllabic augment e to the reduplication. In other cases the pluperfect keeps the reduplication of the perfect without change. E.g.
]
j tfiavw,
jyy /yy) /yy/u, rjyyiXf.ir)V, oXpiu>, rjpr)Ka, rjpyjKrj; tvpi-
528. N. From "o-TTj/ai (arm-), stt, we liave. botli ilar-qKr} (older form) and ((ttt^kyj (through perl', 'iarrjica) ; and from perf. Zoiko., resemble, iwKq.
ATTIC REDUPLICATION.
529. Some verbs beginning with a, e, or o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate the perfect and pluperfect by prefixing their first two letters, and lengthening the following vowel as in the temporal augment. This is called Attic reduplication. E.fi.
'Apoii), plouf/lt, o.p-rjpojxa.1', f/xtui, vomit, t[xrjp.tKu.', iXt.yoi, prove, iXy'jXtypxxi; (Xuvvu) (iXa-). thioc, (Xr/XaKa, IXr/Xapuii; Slkovw, hear, aKrJKou. For the pluperfect, see 5M.
530. N. The Attic reduplication (so called by the Greek grammarians) is not peculiarly Attic, and is found in Homer.
531. N. Other verbs which have the Attic reduplication are dya'poj, aXtijxii, dAc'ai, lyiipai, (pti'So), tpX"l>-O.L, iaQlut, oXXvp.i, op.vufU,
),
|
128 |
128 INFLECTION. [632
532. N. 'Eyt tpa> (iyip-), rouse, has 2 perf. lyp-yyopa (for ly^jyop-a, 643), but perf. mid. ly-yytpfw.1..
533. By strict Attic usage, the pluperfect takes a temporal augment in addition to the Attic reduplication. Thus, dxouw, hear, axrjKoa., plup. ijkijkoij; so a.Tr-o)A.u)X€t. (of a.ir-6Wv fu, dbr-oXcoXa), w/jLby/xoKU (of o/xvviii, 6n
But the mss. and the editions of Attic authors often omit the additional augment, as in iX-yXiyp-qv (487, 2).
Reduplicated Aorists.
534. N. The second aorist active and middle in all the moods and the participle sometimes has a reduplication in Homer; as ire
8
535. N. The second aorist of ayia, lead, has a kind of Attic reduplication (529), which adds the temporal augment in the indicative. Thus rjy-ay-ov (dy-ay-), subj. dyayco, opt. ayayoifii, inf. ayaytiv, part, ayaywv; mid. -^yayo/xrjv, ayayo/wi, etc., — all in Attic prose. See also the aorists tjvtyKa and tjvtyKov (from stem ivcK-, iv-tve*-, ivtyK-) of <^ id="iv.i.p5592.1">t'p
Reduplicated Presents.
536. A few verbs reduplicate the present by prefixing the initial consuuant with i; as yi-yvdcrKco (yvo-), know, Tt-8r)/u (6t), put, yi-yvofxai (for yi-ycwo/Mi), become.
For these see 651 and (552, with 794, 2.
E as Augment ok Reduplication before a Vowel.
537. 1. Some verbs beginning with a vowel take the syllabic augment, as if they began with a consonant. These verbs also have a simple t for the reduplication. When another i follows, « is contracted into «. E.g.
|
129 |
543] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 129
(
2. These verbs are, further, tXioaui, IXkw, i-ma, lpya£ofwn, epvu) or tpirufoj, (a-Tidu), Xtj/u («-), with the aoi'ists clhov and clov (alpiu>) ; the perfects eluiOa (with irregular u), Ionic lutda (r)6-), ai'J toixu (£«-, uk-), and plpf. ticTTj/K^ (for i-ecrr-) of "crnqfu. See also Ionic and poetic forms under dySdvw, o.tttui, etSoftat, eiXa), £1^01/, ilpui, (vw, (wvfu, i£id, and ?^o^uit.
538. N. 'Opaw, *•««, and av-oiyw, open, generally take the temporal augment after c; as tilipuiv-, iuip&Ka (or tdpdxa),
539. N. This form is explained on the supposition that these verbs originally began with the consonant f or it, which was afterwards dropped. Thus (Uof, saw, is for ^iSoe (cf. Latin vid-i); topya is for fe/ropya, from stern fcpy-, cf. Eng. wori (German IVert). So Ipwu, creep, is for u-epirw (cf. Latin serpo), with imperf. l-oepirov, i-ipvov, dpirov (see 80); and ?xui Aai'e, is for otxwi whence imp. t-acxov, l-(x°*-,
AUGMENT AND KKDDPLTCATION OF COMPOUND VEKBS.
540. In compound verbs (882, 1) the augment or reduplication follows the preposition. Prepositions (except •n-epi and 7rpo) here drop a final vowel before e. E.g.
Hpo
541. N. IIpo may be contracted with the augment; as irpov-Xcyov and 7rpou/3aivov, for trpoiXiyov and wpoefiuivov.
542. N. 'E»c in composition becomes i£ before e; and iv and
543. N. Some denominative verbs (8G1), derived from nouns or adjectives compounded with prepositions, are augmented or
|
130 |
130 INFLECTION. [M4
reduplicated after the preposition, like compound verbs; as vwo ■xtivw (from ij7ro7rTos), suspect, iirunrTiuov, as if the verb were from iiro and oTntvtn; airoXoyiofuii, defend one's self, aTr-cXoyr/uoLixr])/; see also
Such verbs are called indirect compounds (882, 2).
544. N. A few verbs take the augment before the preposition, and others have both augments; as xafo'£o/uu, sit, cjcadf^cro; ku0i£
awpi VvtlX"My< i7"(tTXc'A"?1' (or ^>'<TX°/U'?1')' a^>'-W- a^'1?" or V<t>irlv-See also afxuvv>ij.L, afx.
545. 1. Indirect compounds of 8i«r-, e'//, and occasionally those of cS, w1.;/.
AvaapccTTco), 6e displeased, hwqptcnovv; (.vipyiriu, do good, tvrjpytTovv or ivepyeVow.
2. In other cases, compounds of Sucr- have the augment or reduplication at the beginning, as BvcrTv^iu) (from Sixt-tu^t;?, unfortunate), i8v
546. Other indirect compounds are augmented or reduplicated at the beginning; as oikoSo/u'w, build (from oiko-Bofiot, liovse-biiilder), KoS6fi.ovv, wKoSo^o-a, ajKoSo/ujTai. See,
OMISSiON OF AUGMENT AND KKDUPLICATION.
547. Homer and the lyric poets often omit both the syllabic and the temporal augment; as o/xiXiov, ixov' Su>« (for u>jxiX.ovv, S
548. Herodotus often omits the temporal augment of the imperfect and aorist, and the syllabic augment of the pluperfect. He never adds the temporal augment to the Attic reduplication in the pluperfect (533). He always oinils the augment in the iterative forms in crxov and crxo/iijj/; as Xdptaxov, i(OK0v (778).
549. The Attic tragedians soinetimrs omit the augment in (lyric) choral passages, seldom in the dialogue.
|
131 |
663]
ENDINGS.
131
550. The i-eduplication is very rarely omitted. But Homer has 6^XaTa'i from 5/^o/iai, fur 5(5ixarat, receive, and a few other cases. Herodotus occasionally fails to lengthen the, initial vowel in the perfect; as in KarappuidrjKai (for Kar-rjpp-).
ENDINGS.
551. The verb is inflected by adding certain endings to the-different tense steins. Those which mark the persons in the finite moods are called personal endings. There, is one class of endings for the active voice, and another for the middle and passive; but the passive aorists have the active endings.
There is also one set of endings in each class for primary tenses, and one for secondary tenses.
552. The personal endings of the indicative, subjunctive, and optative, which are most distinctly preserved in verbs in /xi and other primitive forms, are as follows: —
MlDIU.K AKI> l'ASSIVK.
Sing. l. 2. 3.
Dual 2. 3.
Plur. 1. 2. 0.
Primary Tenses.
I"
(
TOf TOV
(UV ((MS) Tt
vo-i (vti), dcri
Tenses.
V 5
TOV T»}V
l(V (|MS)
T« V, O-O.V
Primary Tenses.
|i.CU
crai Tai
Secondary Tenses.
TO
crOov (flov) o"8t)v (8i)v)
553. The personal endings of the imperative are as fol lows: —
Middle and Passive. Sing. Dunl. Plur.
o-o o-6ov(9ov) o-6«(6«) o-Bav (8av)
|
|
|
Active. |
|
|
|
Sing. |
Dual. |
Plur. |
|
2. |
6i |
TOV |
T* |
|
3. |
TU |
TUV VTO»V |
or Two"av |
|
132 |
132 INFLECTION. [554
554. The endings of the infinitive are as follows: —
Active: «v (contracted with preceding c to «iv),
voi, sometimes «voi (probably for F«v
555. For the formation of the participles and the verbals in tos and tios, see 770-776.
Remarks on the Endings.
556. ]. Only verbs in p.i have the primary endings /u and
2. A first person dual in fjxdov is found three times in poetry: ■7rcpi&u)/xi0ov, subj. of TrepiSiSuifU, II. 23, 485; XcXuftfjxOov, from AetVaj, S. El. 950; op/Mu/xidov, from bpfiAo), S. Ph. 1079. Generally the first person plural is used also for the dual.
3. In Homer rov and a6ov are sometimes used for rrjv and adrjv in the third person dual of past tenses. This occurs rarely in the Attic poets, who sometimes have rrjv for tov in the secoud person. The latter is found occasionally even in prose.
4. In the first person plural /*« is Doric. The poets often have d for fi(6a (777, 1).
5. In the third person plural v
1 A comparison of the various forms of the present indicative of the primitive verb he (whose original stem is as-, in Greek and Latin en-), as it appears in Sanskrit, the older Greek, Latin, Old Slavic, and Lithuanian (the most primitive modern language, slill spoken on the Baltic), will illustrate the Greek verbal endings.
SINGULAll.
|
|
Sanskrit. |
Older Greek. |
Zo(!ll. |
Old Slavic. |
Lithuanian. |
|
1. |
as-mi |
ip-pi (for i |
i) [e]s-um |
yes-m' |
es-mi |
|
2. |
asi |
|
es |
yesi |
esi |
|
3. |
as-ti |
ia-M |
es-t |
yes-t' |
es-ti |
|
|
|
|
TLURAL. |
|
|
|
1. |
s-mas |
lv-i(v (Dor. d| |
Us) [c]s-u-mus |
yes-mi |
es-me |
|
2. |
s-tha |
|
es-tis |
yes-te |
es-te |
|
3. |
s-a-nti |
<-vt( (Doric) |
[e]s-u-nt |
s-u-t' |
es-ti |
|
133 |
659] TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OF INFLF.CT1ON. 133
6. ©t seldom appears in the imperative, except in the second aorist active of /it-forms (755), and in the aorist passive, which has the active forms (551).
In the third person plural of the imperative the endings vrmv and aOuiv (6v>v) are used in the older and better Attic.
7. The primitive middle forms 8ov, drjv, 8i, Oax, etc. appear in the perfect and pluperfect after consonants; as TtTpl
TENSE STEMS AND FORMS OP INFLECTION.
SIMPLE AND COMPLEX TENSE STEMS.
557. Tense stems are of two classes, simple and complex. A simple tense stem is the verb stem (often in a modified form), to which the endings are applied directly. A complex tense stem is composed of the verb stem (with its modifications) prolonged by a tense suffix (561,5), to which the endings are applied. iSee 4o8.
558. (Simple Tense Stems.) Simple tense stems are found
(a) in the present and imperfect, the second aorist active and middle, and the second perfect and pluperfect, of the conjugation in /u (500), except in the subjunctive;
(b) in the perfect and pluperfect middle of all verbs. E.g.
(a) From
(i) From At-Au- (reduplicated stem of ki-o>) with the middle endings (552) come kikv-nax, A«'Au-
559. (Complex Tense Stems.) Complex tense stems are found in all other forms of the verb. E.g.
Aucu (stem kv-), has (pies.) kvo-^ev, kve-re, kvo-/ii9a, kvt-cr6i, kvo-vrai, etc. ; (fut.) kvao-ixev, kvcrc-re, kvae-crOou, etc. ; (aor.) i-kv
|
134 |
134 INFLECTION. [560
560. This distinction will be seen by a comparison of the present indicative middle of riOrj/u (tl6i-) with that of <£iA
t(8s-(j.cu 4>iXe-o-fiai Ti8('-|i«8a
Ti8t-
TiG«-Tat 4>iX*'-«-Tai TtBe-vrat <^lXI-o-vtcu
561. (Tense Suffixes.) 1. In the present, imperfect, and second aorist active and middle of the conjugation in u>, in all futures, and in the future perfect, the tense stem ends in a variable vowel, called the thematic vowel, which is o before /* and v and in the optative, and is elsewhere «. This is written %-; as Xv°/(., present stem of Xi-w, Aur%-, second aorist stem of AuV-u). In the futures and the future perfect, the thematic vowel is preceded by a. To these prolonged tense steins the endings are added. E.g.
Avo-fxtv, Xvire, Xvovcrt for Xvo-vai (78, 3); c-Xuro-v, €-Anre-i;, t-Anro-yucy, t-Xcni-TC.; (-ltti-(j6(, I-Xltto-vto ; Xvao-fJ.cvy Xiat-rc, Xucro-vtcli. For the terminations w, a*;, ei in the singular, see (iji.'i.
2. The subjunctive has a long thematic vowel "'/,,-, which appears in both conjugations; as A«'ya>-/«v, Xiyrj-rc, Ae'-ywcri for Atyoj-vct (7S, 8) ; 6u>ij.lv for Oc-u>-)j.
H. The first aorist stem has a suffix o-a-, the first perfect «a-, and the 6econd perfect a-.
4. The first aorist passive has a suffix $c- (or 0jj-), and the second aorist passive e- (orif); as A«iV-od, iXil
The first and second passive futures have Or)
f>. 'riio thematic vowels, and o°A-, aa-, xa- (a-), ^£- (Or/-) or e- (7;-), Or)tT%- or rj(j°A-, (1-4), are called tense sujjixes.
562. (Optative Suffix.) The optative inserts a moosvffix 1- or it/- («-) between both the simple and the complex tense stem and the personal endings. (See 730.)
For the subjunctive, see 718; 561, 2.
TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION.
563. To the two classes of tense steins correspond generally two forms of inflection, — the simple form and the common form.
|
135 |
6(55] TWO FORMS OF INFLECTION. 135
I. Tub Sim I'm: Foiim of Inflection.
564. To this form (sometimes called the /m-ionu) belong all tenses which have simple tense stems (558) and also both passive aorists, — always excepting the subjunctives (501, 2.). It has these peculiarities of inflection: —
1. The first and third persons singular of the present indicative active have the endings fji and at (53-); as cprj-fxi,
j
2. The second aorist imperative active generally retains the ending @i (05:!); as ftrj-di, go. So rarely the present; as
3. The third person plural has the active endings den and crav (55'2).
4. The infinitive active has the ending vai or evcu (551); a.s H-O^vai^ U'i/ai (ij^/xt), l--vtu [a/xi)
5. Participles with stems in o-vt have nominatives in ous; as StSoiis, &So'-vtos (see 505, 5).
C. In all forms of this class except the "ccond aorist and the optative, the middle endings crai and cro regularly retain cr; as Tifc-crui, t-Ti8t-ao; Xf'Xv-om, t-Xt'Xv-tro. But 2 aorist Wov (for i0t-
7. The passive aorists, which belong here although they do not have simple stems (558), have the inflection of the second aorist active of the/ii-form; Xv
II. The Common Fokm or Inflkction.
565. To this form belong all parts of tho verb in w, except the perfect and pluperfect middle and the passive aorists, and also all subjunctives. It has the following peculiarities of inflection.
1. It has the thematic vowel and the other tense suffixes mentioned in 501, ]~i. For the inflection of the present and imperfect indicative, m'i: C2-3 and 024.
2. The imperfect and second aorist have the ending v in the third person plural; the pluperfect lias
3. The imperative active has no ending in the second person singular. For ov in the first aorist, sci- 7-17.
4. The infinitive active 1ms tiv (fur t-tv) in (lie present, future!, and second aorist ; t-vai in the perfect. ; and
5. Participles with stems in ovt have nominatives in uiv (564, 5).
|
136 |
136 INFLECTION. [666
6. The middle endings out and cro in the second persou singular drop cr and are contracted with the thematic vowel; as Avecrat, Xveai, Xvrj or Xiei; eXv«ro, cXvio, eXvov (88, 2). For Ionic uncon-tracted forms, see 777, 2; 785, 2.
FORMATION AND INFLECTION OP TENSE STSTEMS.
566. To understand the inflection of the verb, we must know the relation of each tense stem to the verb stem, and also certain internal modifications which the verb stem undergoes in some of the teuse systems.
FORMATION OF THE PRESENT STEM FROM THE VERB STEM. — EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS.
567. When the verb stem does not appear unchanged in the present stem, as it does in Xi-w and Xty-u (459), it generally appears in a strengthened form; as in k6ttt-u> (/con--), cut, fjuxvddv-a) (fiad-), learn, dpfo-«-
568. Verbs are divided into eight classes with reference to the relation of the present stem to the verb stem.
569. Fikst Class. (Verb Stem unchanged in Present.) Here the present stem is formed by adding the thematic vowel %- (o65, 1) to the verb stem. E.g.
Ae'yw (A«y-), say, present stein Aey%-, giving A
570. N. Some verbs of this class have the stem variable in quantity in different tenses; as Su
571. N. The pure verbs of the first class which irregularly retain a short vowel in certain tenses are given in 630; those which insert a in certain tenses, in 640. The verbs (of all classes) which add t to the stein in some or all tenses not of the present system (as /SouXo/wu) are given in 657 and 658. Reduplicated presents of all classes are given in 651 and 662. These and others which are peculiar in their inflection are found in the Catalogue of Verbs. For special peculiarities, see
|
137 |
578] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 137
572. Second Class. (Ste?ns with Strong Forms.) This class includes verbs with inute stems which have strong forms with a (oi), ev, or rj (31) in all tenses except in the second aorist and second passive systems, in which they have the weak forms in i, v, and a. The present stein adds %-to the strong form of the stem. E.g.
AtcW-a), leave, 2 aor. t-Xcirov, 2 perf. A<-Aowr-a;
573. To this class belong aei
For exceptions in a few of these verbs, see 642, 2. See Oil.
574. Six verbs in e<« with weak stems in v belong by formation to this class. These originally had the strong form in tv, which became if (90, 2) before a vowel, and finally dropped f, leaving e; as irki-u), sail (weak stem irAu-), strong stem 7rAtv-, wAt/:-, tti-, present stem ttA«%-.
These verbs are 8i-u> (weak stem 8v-), run, vt-u> (w-), swim, ttXi-ui (■jrkv-), sail, Trvi-u) (irw-), breathe, pi-u> (pv-), Jlow, yi-m (-^v), pour. The poetic crtmu (cru-), urge, lias this formation, with cv retained. (See 60].)
575. As verbs of the second class have the strong stem in almost all forms, this stem is here called the verb stem.
576. Thikd Class. (Verbs in -mui, or T Class.) Some labial (■*, ft, <£) verb stems add t%-, and thus form the present in 7rro id="iv.i.p5806.1">; as koVt-
577. N. Here the exact form of the verb stem oannnt be determined from the present. Thus, in the examples above given, the stem is to be found in the second aorists (kotttjv, tfiXdft-qv, and tppi
578. The verbs of this class are air-o) (a
(_Kpv($- Or KpV(f>-), KU7TT-U) (KV(f>-), pd.TTT- (fKKJr), p'nrT-ul (pi'fi'' (TKOLTTT-Ui (
|
138 |
]38 INFLECTION. [&79
o-kuJtttu) (o-Kooir-), TVTrTti) (tvtt-). with Homeric and poetic XTT-), iviirTia (enjr-), and
579. Fourth Class, (lota Class.) In this class the present stem is formed by adding i%- to the verb stem and making the euphonic changes which this occasions. (See 84.) There are four divisions.
580. I. ( Verbs in aau) or tto>.) Most presents in
(irpdy), do, present Stem npu.
fjLad
TupaUCTa) (rapa^-, seen ill Tftpa^);), confuse, fut. Tapd£w;
Krjpivo-w (KypvK-), proclaim, fut. K-qpiito. (See 84, 1.)
581. So also aleraa) (aix-), aXXdacro) (dAAay-), dpawaw (dpay-), fii'ioCTiD (/^»)X")> 8pd(T(Ta) (8pay-), fAc'(T(T(U (tXiK-), 6pu.
)
y) y j}, y) (y
(ray-),
582. Some presents in crau (ttqj) are formed from lingual steins, which have futures in aw or aorists in o-«; as (pitrtrut, row (from stem iptr-, seen in ip(Trj<;, rower), aor. ypcau. So
apflUTTW (fut. dp/XO(TU)), fiXlTTU) (p-(.lT-, GG),
), irXttffCTo), 7rTi(rcru), with d^ttacrw (Hdt.), and poetic l/xd
Many presents of tins kind are formed on the analogy of verbs with real lingual steins (see 087).
583. N. rU'crcra), rook, conies from an old stein ttck-; while the tense..* wiipui, iirtrpa, etc. belong to the stem irnt-, seen in later TTcirTut and Ionin TcvTopni of Class Til.
584. II. (Verbs in ^ia.) Presents in t,w may be formed in two ways: —
585. (1) From stems in 8, with futures in
i The lists of verbs of the fourth class are not complete, while those of the other classes which are given contain all the verbs in common use.
|
139 |
695] EIGHT CLASSES OF VEHBS. 139
586. So dpfio^a) (dpfioS-), u'p7rafa>, iiri^o> (iXiriS-), ipi^o) (tptS-), i i£a) (18-) witli?fo/«xi (IS-), KTt£u), vop.it,u>, o£w (oS-), wcX.d£a>,
^u) (cr^iS-), a-u^co.
587. N. Many verbs in £u>, especially most in a£
588. (2) From stems in y (or yy), with futures in £w; as a
589. So Kpa^oj (Kpay-), ctoAtti^oi) (craXTriyy-), ctti'^u) (any-); witli poetic dAaXd^w, jidt,u>, /?pt'£u), ypu^w, (AtAt'^oj, xpi'^ui, /ii!£a), grumble, errata).
590. X. Some verbs in £
591. K. Ni'^oj, Jcfi.sA, ful. viipw, forms its tenses from a stem vifi-. si'ou in Homeric vittto)uix and later vltttui.
592. 1IT. (Enlarged Liquid Stems in Pmsent.) Of these there are three divisions: —
593. (1) Presents in AAsend, for o-tcA-i-w ; dyyt'AAw, announce, for dyy(A-i-w; o-^xxAAw, trip vp, for a
See uWofjuu (d-), /3aAAa> (/iaA-), OdXXw (8aX-), oKtAAoo (okcA-), ttciAAu) (ir«A-), Tt'AAa) (t«A-), with poetic SaiSaAAu), taAAo), ctkiXXw, ti'AAoj.
594. (2) Presents in cumo and aipw are formed from verb stems in dv- and dp- with i%- added.
Here the t is transposed and then contracted with a to at; as
595. So ei
|
140 |
140 INFLECTION. [596
596. (3) Presents in uvw, apui, lvo>, lpu>, vvm, aud vpw come from stems in tv, ip, lv, Xp, vy, and vp, with i%- added.
Here the added i disappears and the preceding t, t, or v is lengthened to ci, I, or v; as tciVuj (rev-), stretch, for t«ci-
597, So yuvofiai (ytv-), KTtivui (ktiv-~), and poetic (6iv-); ioi (aytp-), Bupui (hip-), iycipui ((yep-), lfi.up
),
) pppp (fpp)
(6o
598. N. '0
599. N. Verbs of this division (III.) regularly have futures and aorists active and middle of the liquid form (663). For exceptions (in poetry), see 668.
600. N. Many verbs with liquid stems do not belong to this class; as St'/xo) and Sepu> in Class I. For jiatva etc. in Class V., see 610.
601. IV. (Stems in av.) Here belong W
Kkav- (seen in xava-u) aud Kkava-o/xai.) became xafi- and Kka/ri-,
whence k
602. N. The poets form some other presents in this way; as Salu (Saf-),burn, valu(mf-), swim. So, from stems in otr-, nalonai (nao-, iia
603. Fifth Class. (N Class.) (1) Some verb stems are strengthened in the present by adding v before the thematic vowel %-; as
604. So /?cuVa) (fta-, Pay, 610), ttivo) (m-, see also 621), tiVw (ti-), Svv (with 8vw), Horn, diva) (with Ovw), rush; for ikawu) (ia-), see 612.
|
141 |
C12] EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 141
605. (2) (a) Some consonant stems add av; ap-apTdv-o (a/mpT-), err (present Stem u/iapTuv%-); alaOdv-ofjuu (alcru-), perceive; fiaa-rdv-u (/3Auo-T-), sprout.
(b) Here, if the last vowel of the stem is short, another nasal (/x before a labial, v before a lingual, y before a palatal) is inserted after this vowel; as ka.v6d.vta (aO-, av6-), escape notice (av6av%-) ; Xaix(idv-w (Au/J-, Aa/x/3-), take; 6iy-ydvui (fty-, Oiyy-), touch.
606. So axi^dvu) Cwith av£-w), 8ap6dv-u> (8ap#-), u.ir-cx6dv o/ixii '^dv'w (wuli i£-w), olSdv-oi (oi8-), 6Xicrddvu> (oXiaO-), 6
fw (aX
607. (3) A few stems add vt: /3uvi-
(with iJx-di), CO5!i6, Kvvi-m («u-)) l>"isx' also d/x7r-wr^i'€-
u, and. v'7r-i(r^i'<:'-o/M.ai, promise, from i(T^-(u.
608. ('1) Some stems add w or (after a vowel) mi These form the second class (in vO/nt) of verbs in /xt, as huKvu-yu. (8hk-), show, Ktpdwv-fu («tpa-), mix, and are enmnerated in 797, 1. Some of these, have also presents in wu>. (See 502, 2.)
609. (5) A few poetic (chiefly epic) verbs add va to the stem, forming presents in v>?/ii(or deponents in vu/xtu): most of these liave presents in vaui; as Stifivrjfu (8a/x-ra-), also Su/xvaw, subdue. '1 hese form a third chiss of verbs in p.i, and are enumerated in 797, 2.
610. N. BujVo) (/?a-, fiav-), go, and 6a(f>paivo/xai (6c
611. N. Some stems of this class lengthen a short vowel (on the principle of Class 11.) in other teases than the present; as XajifBdixii (Aa/9-), fut. XijiJ/ofAai ( j/3-): so Sukvui, aydi'o>, av-Odvu), Tvy^duo). See also ipvyydvo), «p^oyxai, and iruvOdvo^ai'
J'hree verbs in vu/u C^C^ji Zivyw/ju., wijyvvpLi, pr/yvvfj.1, belong equally to Class II. and Class V.
612. N. 'EAuiViu (e'Aa-), drive, is irregular in the present stem (probably for ia-vv-u>). "OA-Av-tu (6X-), destroy, adds Av (by assimilation) instead of w to the stem 6A-.
|
142 |
142 INFLECTION. [613
613. Sixth Class. (Verbs in
deprive.
614. These verbs are, further, aX-iOKOjiai, afj.f3X-i(rKu>, a/nrXaK-i(TK(poetic), 6.v*X-l
jia-fTKd) (pO(it.), fil-fiptlj-crKli) (jipo-), aVClfil.'ll-IJKOp/XI. (fiiO-), fiXli-
615. N. Many presents of this classs are reduplicated (0:ifi); as yi-yvux?i«o (yvo-). See 052, 1. 'Ap-ap-to-KO) has a form of Attic reduplication (5:20).
616. N. Final o of the verb stem becomes w, and final a sometimes becomes iorii; as in yiymboKu (7«>-), StSpdoKw (Spo-); Sv-guKu (8a.v-, 6m-), Doric 6vf
617. N. Three verbs, dXi)-
618. N. These verbs, from their ending ctkw, are called inceptive, though few have any inceptive meaning.
619. SeVknth Class. (Presents in ^i wjiV/i simple stems.) Here the verb stem, sometimes reduplicated (()52), without the thematic vowel, appears as the present stem. E.g.
&rjfii (<£a-), say,
/
For the strong furm
620. All verbs in /m, except those in vipi under 608, and the epic forms in vqpx (or vu/j-ai) with i/a added to the stem (0'09), are of this class. They are enumerated in 794. (See 502, 1.)
621. Eighth Class. (Mixed Class.) This includes the few irregular verbs which have any of the tense stems so essentially different from others, or are otherwise so pecul-
|
143 |
624J PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143
iar in formation, that they cannot bo brought under any of the preceding classes. They are the following: —
utpew (alpe-, cA-), lake, fut. alpr'/
eTSoi/ (/ri8-, IB-), sine, vuli, 2 anri.it (no present act..); 2 pf. oISu, know (82U). Mid. ti'So/iut (poet.). EliW is used as 2 aor. of opa.w (see below).
tlirov (etV, ip-, /5c-), spoke, 2 aor. (no pics.); fut. (ipiui) ipd, pf. tl-pr/Ka. The .-:lcin ip- (/>£-) is foi' /rep- (/rp«-), seen in Lat. vtr-hwn (fill)). So U'-(ttoj.
tpofuxi (ip-> iXivd-, ivd-, * -), ijf>, fut. eXcu'ao/xat (poet.), 2 peri. ikrjXvdji, 2 aor. r/A&ov- 'J'lie Attic future is cf/xi, sA«//
£
updut (cipu-, OTT-, fio-), JC-t, lut. oipOfAai., [it. topuKU, 2 aor. t'Soi' (st-e above).
7racr^oi (wud-, tt(>'9-), tuffer, fut. irti
irti'(o (tti-, iro-), drink, ful. ttio/uil, ]>f. 7rcVu)Ka, 2 aor. l^-ioi'. (Seo 604.)
Tpi<^ (Tp<-X~, ^P"/"")) ''""> f"(- &pa.fj.ov/j.cu, pL BcBpdfirjKa (007), 2 aor. c&pafiov.
4>tpw («fj-, ot-, fV
For full forui.i of tlie.se verbs, see the. Catalogue. See also the irregular veil is in /.u (S()5-t>20).
622. M. Occasional Hoim-ric < id="iv.i.p5905.1">r poetic irregular forms appear even in sonu' verbs of tlie first scvi'ii classes. See d«a^/j"u>, dXf'fw, 7(7^0^01, and xavSovu in the Catalogue.
I.NTLECTIO.V OF THE PkE-SEKI1 ,1KI) ImJ'KIIIKCT INDICATIVE.
623. {Common Form.) The present indicative adds the primary endings (552) to the present tense stem in %-, except in the singular of the active, where it has the terminations u>, cis, ci, the origin of which is uncertain. The first person in /u, and both the forms in « and in p.i were probably inherited by the Greek from the parent language. For the third person in oven (for ovui), see 550, 5.
624. Of the two forms of the second person singular middle in 77 and a (500, (!), that in a is the true Attic form, which was
|
144 |
144 INFLECTION. [625
used in prose and in coined}'. But, the tragedians seein to have preferred the form in tj,1 which is the regular form in the other dialects, except Ionic, and in the later common dialect. This applies to the future middle and passive and to the future perfect, as well as to the present.
625. Bovko/uu., wish, and oio/juu, think, have only fiovka and o"«, with no forms in 77. So oipofiai, future of opoio), see, lias only 6pu.
626. The imperfect adds the secondary endings to the tense stem in %-. See the paradigm of kiw.
627. (Mi-/on>i.) Here the final vowel of the stem is long (with 77, w, v) in the singular of both present and imperfect indicative active, but short (with u or e, 0, v) in the dual and plural, and also in most other forms derived from the present, stem. This change from the strong stem in the indicative singular to the weak stein in other forms is one of the most important distinctions between the /it-form and that in w. The endings here include fu, ?,
628. The third person plural of the present active lias the ending aui (552), which is always contracted with a (but never with t, o, or v) of the stem; as luracn (for tora-aai), but nOe-aci, SiSd-utn, huKvi-aat.
629. The only verbs in fit with consonant stems are the irregular dfu («r-), be, and r'^uxc (ijcr-), sit. (See 80G and 814.)
630. Some verbs in 77/u and o>/u have forms which follow the inflection of verbs in ew and 00. Thus the imperfect forms m&ts and iriOti (as if from Ti6iu>), and ih&ovv, cSi&ovs, «8t8ov (a-s if from SiSniu), are much more common than the regular forms in 77?, 7; and toy, u)9, u>. So Ti#cis for ti^tj? in the present. (See also 741.)
631. Some verbs in vfxi have also presents in via; as htiKvvw for
632. Avvanai. can, and tVicrra/zcu. know, often have iSwu> (or 7jSwu>) and J]tt[(stu) for c'Swacro ami ^wlaraao in the imperfect, and occasionally 6wti and «r«jTu for 8vv
633. For the present (with the other tenses) in the dependent moods and the participle, see the account of these (718-775).
1 Kirclihofl and Wwklein in Aeschylus, and Bergli in Sophocles, give only the form in rj.
|
145 |
630] MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 145
MODIFICATION OF THE VK11IS STEM IN CERTAIN TENSE SYSTEMS.
634. Before discussing tlie other tense systems (II.—IX.), we
must mention some modifications which the verb stem regularly undergoes in certain forms. Mere irregularities, such as are found only in verbs of the eighth class (021), arc not noticed here.
635. (Lengthening of Voweh.) Most stems ending in a short vowel lengthen this vowel before the tense suffix (561, 5) in all tenses fornied from them, except, the present and imperfect. A and c become -n, and 0 becomes
(^/-vi-), honor, TipLTj-ww, €Tl/j.yj-crat TCTi/jLyj-Ka, TtTlfirj-fiai,
])SyjXvt) (w]Xo~), s)ioicy oijXuxto), cor/Aoxra, oeor/XtDKu, o, oaKpvaw. 13ut cauj, iafjui', tao^uu, idcofuxc', opddt, opclo"a>, a, SiSpaxa.
636. Tliis ajiplics also to stems which become vowel stems by metathesis (04f>); as fldWw (ftaA-, flu-), ilnxiu; pf. fiifiXri-Kix; Kcifivoi (Kafi-, Kfia-), iobur, kck/o^-ku; or by adding' e (G57); as fiov-ofw.i (fiovX.-, fiovXc-), wish, jiovXr}-(TOfj.'xi, jit^ovX-q-jxixi, tjiovXn'i-6-qv.
637. For the long stem vowel in the singular of the present and imperfect indicative of verbs in /a, see (127.
638. N. *AKpoaOfiM, hear, has aKpoacro/uxi etc.; )(pa.o), t/ive oracUs, lengthens it to r/; as -^prjuu) etc. Ho Tpij(no and (Tptjaa from stem rpd-; See Tf.Tpa.ivu), bore.
639. Some vowel stems retain the short vowel, contrary to the general rule (Oliii); as ytXaui, laugh, ycXauonai, iyt-
Xaua; apKf'o), suffice, dpKc'criii, rjpK(.(ru.; fxa^OfiM (/xa^t-), filjhty fux^icrofuit (Ion.), e/jM)(i
(a) This occurs in the following verbs: (pure verbs) dya/ucu, aiOtOfj/u, dxiofjiat, aAt'aj, tlvt'oij dfjxioj, apoto, o.pvu>, yeXtxo), cXkxho (see cAkoj), tfxai), fpdo), £(u), SXdu), kAcioj, break, £toi, nrvw,
(li) The final vowel of the sl-'Mii is variable in quantity in different lenses in the following verbs: (pure verbs) alviui, apiu>, Se'co,
|
146 |
14(5 INFLECTION. [040
bind, Svw (see Suyw), Ipvw (epic), Ouw, sacrifice, kuX(u), Xwo, /ivw, Oi ;—(other verbs) fjxlvw (fta-), (.vpcaKw («ip-> fipc-)>
TriVoj (iri-, TTO-), ^tfavu) (
640. (Insertion of cr.) Vowel stems which retain the short vowel (039) and some others add o- to the final vowel before all endings not beginning with a in the perfect and pluperfect middle. The same verbs have
TiX.to>,fmis/i, TiT((-a-fMi, trtTtXicrfxr^v, q
yikdo), lauyli, (yika-a-dijv, yiX/jxr&rjvai; xpdw, (jive oracles,
641. This occurs in all the verbs of C39 (a), except apow, so far as thfiy form these tenses; and in the following: Slkovm. Spatu, 6pav
642. (Strong Form of Stem in Second Class.) 1. Verbs of the second class have the strong form of the stem (572),
as Atur- 01' Xoltt- in Xtiiru), rrjK- ill TrjKi), vf.v- ill (vf^ru)) vow, ill illl
tenses except in the second aorist and seeond passive tense
Systems; as <^cuy,
2. Exceptions are the perfect and aorist. passive of tcv
643. (E changed to o in Second Perfect.) In the. second perfect system, t of the verb stem i.s changed to o. E.g.
5rc'py
K€KXo
So lytipu) (lyip-), iyprjyopa (532); kti[vu> (ktcv-), iktovii (in compos.); Atyco, culled, tlXo^a; irdrrxw (ira.6-, ttivO-), wiirovBa.; 7re'p8o/xa6, TroropSa; Tpiwu), TiTpo(f>a;
For XiiTT-tu, XoXonr-a, and irclfi-ui, Tti-TroiO-a., see 31; 612, 1.
|
147 |
649] MODIFICATION OF THE VERB STEM. 147
644. (A leiHjlhciied to -q or a in Second Perfect.) In some verbs aof tho.stein is lengthened to -q or a. in the second perfect.
Tliese are ayvufj.1 (dy-), cuyu (Ionic er/ya); SaXkoi (6a-), Tt'&jAu; xpd£w (xpuy-), xixpnyu; Xdaxw (Xax-), AeAuKa; /xaivofiuii (fjuiv-), p.tfLr)va; atxipia (crap-), crtcrrjpu.;
645. (E changed to a.) In monosyllabic liquid stems, t is generally changed to a iu the first perfect, perfect middle, and second passive tense systems. E.g.
5r«'AAw (wrtA-), send, irrraXxa, ((ttuX/uu, iariXrjv, aruXTJaofj/ii;
Kcipw {Kip-), shear, Koaip/xtu, ixdprjv (loii.); dirtlpw {cirtp-), sow,
Zairapjiai, LvnapTjv. So in Sepco, ktcivoj, iixipofuu., tiivw, tc'AAuj, and
646. N. The same change of e to a (after p) occurs in turn, tarpajXfxai, ioTpa. drju,
647. (N of stem, dropped.) Four verbs in vm drop v of the stem in the perfect and first passive systems, and thus have vowel stems in these forms : —
KpCvia (xpiv-), separate, KtKptKu, KiKpt/juui, (KpiOyjV, xXlvui (klv), incline, kckXikh, kckAijuxu, iie$t)v; nkvvta (rrXvv-), wa.
648. When final v of a stem is not thus dropped, it becomes nasal y b'-forc ko. (7t>, 1), and is generally replaced by
649. (Metatiiesi.i.) Tin; .stein sometimes suffers metathesis (04) :
(1) in the present, as Ovrjirxui (8jv, $va-), die, (010) ;
(2) in other tenses, as fidXXu) (fia-, ftka-), throw, fiefSXtjKa, lil[i )fjiai, eft i$7jv; and (poetic) Sc'pKO/wu (8tpK-), 5«f,2 aor. iSfMKW
(SfMK-, 040).
|
148 |
148 INFLECTION. [060
650. (Syncope.) Sometimes syncope (05):
(1) in the present, as yiyvopxj.i (ytv-), become, for yi-ycv-opai;
(2) in the second aorist, as itrTOji^v for t-iriT-oixr)v;
(3) in the perfect, as irtTa.vvvp.1. (Trtra-), expand, iriirrafiai for irt-vtra-p/ii. See
651. (Reduplication.) Sometimes reduplication, besides the regular reduplication of the perfect stem (520):
(1) in the present, as yi-yvuxrKw, know, yi-yvopai, Ti-Orj/ii.
(2) in the second aorist, as iru8u (inO-), persuade, -ni^nQov (epic); so dyw, rjyayov (Attic).
652. 1. The following are reduplicated in the present: —
(a) In Class I., yl-yvopjui (for yi-yev-ofwi.); iVr^cu (for ai-at^-o)) ; fjLifivu) (for ixi-ficvu)), poetic for jxivw, viima (for iri-TriT-iu) ; tiktoj (for tl-tck-w).
(I) In Class VI., (3i-j3pii>(rK(i> (fipo-), yc-yvuxTKw (yvo~), Si-SpaoKw (Spa-), fU-fi.vrj
(c) In Class VII., the verbs in px which are enumerated in 794, 2.
2. For reduplicated second aorists, see 534 and 535.
653. (E added lo Stem.) New stems are often formed by adding t to the verb stem.
654. (1) From this new stem in c sonic verbs form tho. present stem (by adding %-), sometimes also other tense stems. E.g.'
Aokc'-w (Sok-), seem, pres. stem (hoKf.%-, fut. So£w; ya/xi-w (yap.-), marry, fut. ya/ioi, pf. ycydp.y]Ka; (fiOcu) (wfl-), push, fut. tocrco (poet. O
655. These verbs are, further, ytyuvtw, yq6ii>, ktvttio), pjupTvpiw (also pjaprvpopxii), piirriia (also pinno),
)
Most verbs in c«i have their regular stems in «-, as ttouw (noit-), make, fut. notr/ao).
656. N. A few chiefly poetic verbs add a in the same way to the verb stem. See /3pvx
657. (2) Generally the new .stem in e does not appear iu
|
149 |
CC1] PRESENT SYSTEM. 149
the present. But in some verbs it forms special tenses; in others it forms all the tenses except the present, imperfect, second perfect, and the second aorists. E.g.
BouAopxu. (flovk-). wish, /3ouA)/(7o/icu (ftovko, 030); alaOdvoftai (alvO-), perceive, alcrB-qcropM (ala&t-), ijcQrjfuu; p.ivui (p-iv-), remain, fitfL(V7]Ka (/«i/t-) ; fiaxo/mi (mix.-), Jiyltt, flit, i
658. 1. The following havo the stein in t in all tenses except those mentioned (G57) : aiaOdvofun (alaO-), aX.i$ui, dkOo/Mi (Ion.), dfiaprdyu} (dfW.pT-), tlvSuvto (dS), dv-t)(6dvofwii (-e6■), uv£dvw (av£-), ax^ofua, (SXacrTamn (/iAaor-), fiovkopai, liunKui, Stuj, want, idiXtit and 6iui, Zpo/Mj.1 and ilpofuxi (Ion.), tppoi, «u'3w, ivpiOKw. iipui, kc'Ao/u/u (poet.), Kixdvai («'X')> AauKw (
/xal, flikXw, fJLtXw, fJ.v£h), OlOfJM, Ol^O/iai, oXtoOdl':-) (oA.tf& '-. llAAi./J(.
(j<^ id="iv.i.p5998.1">A«TKai'A-), TTtTojun, tjTGpvvfu.: sec yiofelic d/xrAaxtaKu) and o.Tra(j>i(TK
2. The following have the stem in c in special tenses formed from the verb stp.m or the weak stein (31): Su/j&xkoj (8a[>6-). /ucVw, k'^u, 6(T
/ yx x X X) yy
3. The following l'onn tei tain tenses from a slem inadu ly adding e to the present stem without the thematic vowel: SuSaoxw, kclOl^w, K7JOU), xAat'co, o^w, oc/>ttAoj, tiVtoj, xaLpW'
659. N. In op.vvfii, swear, the slem o/x- is enlarged to o/xo- in some tenses, as in uyxo-
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS AND INFLECTION OF TENSE SYSTEMS IN THE INDICATIVE.
I. PuiisENT System.
660. The formation of the present stem and the inflection of the present and imperfect indicative have bceu explained in 568-622 and 62.3-632.
661. The eight l-emaiiiing tense stems (II.-IX.) are formed from the verb stem. This is the simplest form of the stem in all classes of verbs except the Second, where it is the strom; form (575; 642).
For special modifications of certain tense stems, see 034-059.
|
150 |
150 INFLECTION. [602
For the inflection of the subjunctive, optative, and imperative in all tenses, see 7] 8-758; for the formation of the infinitive, see 759-769; and for that of the participles and verbals in -70s and -rios, see 770-776.
II. Futkue System.
662. (Future Active and Middle.) Vowel and mute stems (460) add
TI/*ao), honor, ti/iijctw (T~ip-r)
663. (Liquid Futures.) Liquid stems (460) add «%- to form the future stem, making forms in Iw and iop-ai, contracted to u> and ou/uu, and inflected like <^iAui and
4>cuVu) (
664. N. Here «%- is for an original «r%-, the a- being dropped between two vowels (88).
665. {Attic Future.) 1. The futures of naXiia, call, and rikita, finish, KaXifTio and Ttkiaa (039), drop
So oAAvjlu (oA-, oA<-), destroy, has future 6i
2. In like manner, futures in qo-io from verbs in awv/ii, some in vtio froin verbs in twvfxi, and some in a
|
151 |
6C9] FIRST A0H1ST SYSTEM. 151
(eXa-), drive (U12), future tXaaaj, (c'Xaw) «'Xu>. For future t'Xocu, fXouKn, etc. in Homer, see 784, 2 (c).
3. Futures in wa> and icofiai from verbs in i£a> of more than two syllables regularly drop a and insert t then Uw and u'ofuu are contracted to id and loC/wti; as ko/xi^w, carry, KOfiiaat, (ko/u«cu) ko/xiu), KOfiLO-OfMi, (KO/xit'o/iat) KOfuovficu, inflected like ^>iAu>, c^iXoO-/uu (492). See 780, 1 (end).
4. These fovms of future (665, 1-3) are called Auic, because the purer Attic seldom uses any others in these tenses; but they are found also in other dialects and even in Homer.
666. (Doric Future.) 1. These verbs form the stem of the future middle in vi%-, and contract o-co/mu to croC/iai: irkiut, sail, irAcuTofi/uu (574); irviui, breathe, ttvciktoC/xcu; vc'
'J'he Attic has these, witli the regular future? irXtwofwi, irvtv-(To/tai, KXtxvaofum,
2. These are called Doric futures, because the Doric forms futures in crt'ia,
667. N. A few irregular futures drop a of the stem, which thua-has the appearance of a present stem. Such are x«'w al)d iofuu., ful. of ci>, pour; tSo/iai, from iadiui (
668. N. A few poetic liquid stems add
III. Fikst Aorist System.
669. (First Aorist Active and Middle.) 1. Vowel and mute stems (460) add era to form the stem of the first aovist active and middle. The indicative active thus ends in era, which becomes at in the third person singular; and the middle ends in ua^-qv. E.g.
TifMw, eVi/i^cra, (ri/iijtra/iTji'(Ij.'j.")); 8pa«, tSputra; kottto), exoi/'a, tKOipdfXrjv; jiXaTTTta, ijiapa; ypd
For the inflection, see 480.
|
152 |
152 INFLECTION. [070
670. Three verbs in /xi, SiSco/u (8o-). give, bjpx (1-), send, and Ti'#>j/i.i (Ot-), put, liave «a for ua in the first aorist active, giving tSioxa, r/Ka, and Zdrjua. These forms are. seldom used except in the indicative, and are most common in the singular, where the second aorists are not in use. (See 802.) Even the middle forms rjKn.fj.7jv and l0rji<6.fxy]v occur, the latter not in Attic Greek (810).
671. N. Xt'iu, pour, has aorisls i^ta (Horn. «x'va) aut' *Xe°-Mv< corresponding- to the futures x
For Homeric aorists like ^rjo-tTo, J5v
672. (Liquid Aorists.) Liquid stems (460) drop o- in era, leaving a, and lengthen their last vowel, a to rj (after iorp to
QaLvw (
673. N. A few liquid stems lengthen ar to av irregularly; as KcpScuVu) (xepSav-), yain, cV/pSdva. A few lengthen pav to prjv; as TtTpati'OJ (reTpai/-), boi'C, tTtTprjva..
674. X. (u) Aipo) ((ip-), rai'.vg, lias ijpa, r)pd/jLr]v (augmented): lint a in other forms, as dpou, apoi', apas, upa)/^«i, u.po.ip.-qv, upd/xtvo?
(6) The poetic kcXAw, Kvpu), and opvup-i have aorists (.KcXaa, tKvpaa, and wptra. See the corresponding futures (068). But oKtWu> (in prose) has JWiAa (see 89).
IV. Skco.vw Aohist System.
675. (Second ^lons£ Active and Middle.) The stem of the second aovist active and middle of the common form (.W5) is t.ht; vevh st.pm (in the second class, tlie weak stem) with %- affixed. These tenses arc inflected in the indicative like the imperfect (see 62G). E.g.
ActVu) (57'2), iXurov, (Xi-ro/xrjv (2 aor. stem Xnr%-) ; Xap-fSdvo (Xa/?-). take, ta(iov, IXaliijx-qv (2 aor. stem Xafi%-). See 481.
676. X. A few second aorist stems change e to a; as tcjj-vu) (t(/j.-), cut, Ionic and poelic Ztcl/jlov, cto/io/it;^ See 640.
677. N. A few stems are syncopated (650); as TreTo/wu (irir-), fiy, 2 aor. m. tVTO/iijv for l-ni.T-op.rjv', eyti'pu (lyep-), rouse, r)ypofxr)v
|
153 |
683] FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 153
for rjycp-ofirjv; rj ov, wo.nl, from stein ev8-, for r/X.v6ov (How.); eiTOfuii (creir-), follow, icnroixrjv, for i<7<7r-o// id="iv.i.p6049.1"/>)v; lu> (
678. (Mi-/oi'H!.) The stem of the second aorist of the /xt-form is the simple verb stem with no suffix. The stem vowel is regularly lunjj (rj, w, or v) throuyhont the indicative active, and the third person has the ending ow. (Fur the long vowel in the imperative and infinitive, see 755; TOG, 2.) E.y.
For the great variety of forms in these sucoiid aorists, see 1 lie complete enumeration (7i)8; T.l'.l).
679. The second aorist miiidle of the /it-form regularly dr
680. Verbs in v/n form no Attic second aorists from the stem in v (707, 1).
681. For second aorisls middle in ij/ii/r, ifxrjv, and vjjltjv, and some from consonant stems, see SUO.
V. Fm?T 1'khfect Svstlm.
682. (First Perfect and Pluperfect Adioe.) The stern of the first perfect active, is funned by addimr «a- to the redu-plieaied verb stcjn. It lias ku, kos, kc in t!ie indicative; singular, and kuo-i (for xa-ven), rarely kucti in 'joet.ry, in the third person plural. For the inflection, see 4K(). E.g.
ADCO, (AfAuK-) At'AwKu; TTtldw, pei'SUd/lc, TtIttUKU. (ior TT(.-TTll.0-Ka) J
tfo/X(£o) (ko/xiS), carry, Ke.KOfx.iKa (lor kc-ko/xjS-ku, 7-i).
683. 1. The pluperfect changes final a- of the perfect stein to «-, to which are added aomtin terminations a, as-, c (069) in the singular, ea, «us, ie(v) being contracted to y, tjs, u(v) in Attic. The dual and plural add the regular secondary endings (552) to the stem in e-, with crav in the third person plural. E.g.
K€-T€, c€vKt-(T(LV '. CTt/AAoj, I'cTaAKa, €(TT(xkt], CCTTuA/O^, f CJTaAKft(l/),
v, icrraXKi-aav. Yov fi(r), Si-e OS.
|
154 |
154 INFLKCTION. [084
2. In the singular, Herodotus has the. original ea, tas, u, and Homer has ta, »?s, «-(v); later Attic writers, and sometimes the orators, have civ, eis, et. In the dual and plural ti for e is not classic.
684. The stem may be modified before k in both perfect and pluperfect, by lengthening its final vowel (035), by changing t to a in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping v in a few verbs (047), or by metathesis (04!)); as
685. N. Et of the stem becomes oi in (8a'8u)) Se'Sotxa (31).
686. N. The first perfect (or perfect in *a) belongs especially to vowel stems, and in Homer it is found only with these. It was afterwards formed fiom many liquid stems, and from some lingual stems, t, 8, or 6 being dropped before Ka.
VI. Skcond Piiiu'ECT System.
687. (Second Perfect Active.) The stem of the second perfect of the common form is the reduplicated verb stem
with a affixed; as ypa(j>-(j), write, yeypa
688. 1. For the change of e to o in the stem, see 643. For AcAohto. and ntvotOa, see 042, 1, and 31.
2. For the lengthening of a to 77 or a in some verbs, see 0-14.
3. For the lengthening' of the stem vowel in Xayxavw (Xa^-), Xafiftavui (Aa/3-)i XavOdvui (X.a.0), ruy^avco (tv-), and some other verbs, see 611.
689. N. 'Eppwya from priyvvjxi (p-qy-) and uwda (537, 2) from i8ui (■>/$-) change 77 of the stem to u (31).
680. N. Vowel stems do not form second perfects; axijuo-a, from dicov-w, hear (stem okov-, dxo/r-), is only an apparent exception.
691. N. Homer has many second perfects not found in Attic; as 7rpo-/?€/Sov)Aa from /?ou'Ao/*ai, wish; /a€/xr?Aa from fitXw, concern; ioXva from IX-rrio, hope; 8<8ov7ra from bovrriw (Sow-), resound.
692. (Aspirated Second Perfects.) Most stems ending in ■>r or /3 change these to <£, and most ending in k or y change these to x- in the second perfect, if a short vowel precedes. Those in
BXa-TTTw (/3Aa/3-), ft
But irAifo'o'oj.ireVAtj-ya; <)ic<;vw. 7r<'< id="iv.i.p6079.1"/>fvya; cnipyw, laropya; Xd/iiru), XiXa/ura. In ayui (ay-), r/xa> V 1S lengthened by reduplication.
|
155 |
690] PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM. 155
693. The following verbs form aspirated second perfects: dyu), aXXaacrw, avoiyw, /?Aa7TTa>, BitKVVfjx, Krjpvarau), kA«Vt
694. N. Tlie aspirated perfect is not found in Homer: only T(Tpo
695. Tlie inflection of the second perfect of the common form is the same as that of tlie first pRifect (see 682).
696. (Second Pluperfect Active.) The stem of the second pluperfect changes final a- of the second perfect stem to «-. It lias the same inflection as the first pluperfect (683). E.g.
j v, etc.
697. (Mi-/t>™.s) A few verbs have second perfects and pluperfects of the simple fu-iorm, \hich affix the endings directly to the verb stein. They are never found in the singular of the indicative. E.g.
©i/-/j(tku) (0ra-, 6av), die, 2 perf. ri6va-rov, Tc6ya-/x(v, TiOvam; 2 plpf. iridvaaav. (See 508.)
These fu-ionws are enumerated in 804.
VII. Pkhfect MinDLK System.
698. (Perfect and Pluperfect Middle.) The stem of the perfect and pluperfect middle is the reduplicated verb stem, to which the endings are directly affixed. E.g.
Avid, k(v-/xai, X(Xv-cai, AeAu-rcu, AtAv-<7#£, AeAv-vrcu; t'-AcAv-/j.-qv, i-Xckv-iieda., ('-Ae'Av-vro; Aenru)(Aei7r-), AfA«i/x-/nai (75), X( uf/aL,
A«A«l7r-T(H.
For the inflection, see 480.
699. The stem may be modified (in general as in the first perfect active), by lengthening its final vowel (635), by changing t to a in monosyllabic liquid stems (645), by dropping v in a few verbs (017), or by metathesis (040); as
|
156 |
150 INFLECTION. [TOO
700. When v is not dropped before /jxu (G-47), it is generally replaced by cr (S3), and it sometimes becomes /j. (78, 2); as
701. In the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect middle, consonant stems are compelled to use the perfect participle with aVand tja.iv (ISO, 2).
Here, however, the Ionic endings arai and aro for vrai and vro (777, 3) are occasionally used even in Attic prose; as Ttrdx-aTai and ircTo.aTo (Thueyd.) for rtrayixivoi tlci and rjaav.
702. 1. For perfects in ct/t/uu of orpc'^xD, Tptirw, rplcfrw, see G4C. 2. For tlie addition of cr to certain vowel stems before endings
not beginning with cr, as Ttre'Aecr/icu, see 040.
703. (Future Perfect.) The stem of the future perfect is formed by adding u%- to the stem of the perfect middle. It ends in ao/xai, and lias the inflection of the future middle (GG2). A short final vowel is always lengthened before
crofj.u.1. E.g.
Aim, Ac-A.ii-, AeAv-tro/xat; ypo.4>-w, ye-ypa
X.UTTU), XtXtLTT; AtAci'l/>O/AUt J 8lW, bind, SiSc/jLUL (GS'J), StSrj-UOHaL J
npHurru) (Trpuy-), Trcnpay-, TTCTrpd^o/iai.
704. The future perfect is generally passive in sense. But it has a middle meaning' in fttfivr'/cro/xai, shall remember, and ttiwixvijo-fnai, fhall have Cf-ascd; and it is active in kckt7]
705. N. Two verbs have a special form in Attic Greek for the future perfect active; Ovrjaxw, die, has TtOvrj^w, shall be dead, formed from the perfect, stem tc6vy)k-; and i'orrj/iu, set, has cctti^co, shall stand, from Iktttjk-, stem of perfect iarrjKa, stand. In Homer, we have also Ke-^apr/crw and Kcxapr/ao/xai, from ^a[puj (xaP~)> rejoice; and KCKm&y
706. N. In most verbs the future perfect active is expressed by the perfect participle and icro/xaL (future of d/xi, be) ; as cyi/cuxore? iao/xtOa, we shall have learnt. The future perfect passive may also be expressed in this way; as aTnjWayfitvoi i
ArIII. First Passive System.
707. (First Aorist Passive.) The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by adding 6t to the stem as it appears in
|
157 |
712] SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 157
the perfect middle (omitting the reduplication). In the indicative and infinitive, and in the imperative except before vt, 6e becomes 6rj. It has the secondary active endings (552), and is inflected (in general) like the second aorist active in rjv of the /u-form (078). E.g.
Aiox, X(Xv-fuu, iXv$rjv (Xv9rj-) ; XeiVw, XcXet/u/wu, iXii
708. N. TptVw has rirpafifjuu (G4C), but irpi
709. N. N is added iu Homer to some vowel stems before 9 of the aorist passive; as iSpiiw, «"tc(, i'Spu/m", lSpiv-0i]v, as if from a stem in mv (Attic ibpb6riv). So Horn. JKlvdT)v and 4-pIvSii» (847), from original stems in v.
For ^t^tji- from t(#i)m' (< id="iv.i.p6117.1">'■), and /ti!$i)I' from tfuu, sacrifice, see 96,3. For (6p((p0t)v from t/x^w, nourish, and other forms with interchangeable aspirates, see Du, 5.
710. (i^VsJ Future Passive.) The stem of the first future passive adds a°A- to the prolonged stem (in 6rj) of the first aorist passive. It ends in drjaoixai, and is inflected like the future middle (G62). E.g.
ACio), (XvOrjv, XvOrjao/jULi (stem Xv6r)
kXxvc
711. The first passive system rarely appears in verbs with monosyllabic liquid stems (645). But rct'cu (rev-), stretch (647), has It&0t)v and Tadijcro/jjii.
IX. Second Passive Svstkm.
712. (/Second ^iorisf Passive.) The stem of the second aorist passive is formed by adding i to the verb stem (in the second class, to the weak stem, 31). In the indicative, infinitive, and imperative, except before vr (707), t becomes ij. The only regular modification of the stem is the change of < to a (G45). For the inflection, see 482. E.g.
|
158 |
158
INFLECTION.
[713
BXairrm (/SXo/S-), hurt, (fiXdfi-nv; ypd
713. N. fWrjoavi QrrXrry-), strike, lias 2 aor. pass. (rrXyjyrjv, but in composition c$-nrXdyrjv and KaT-arXdynv (from stem irAay-).
714. N. Some verbs have both passive aorists; a-s /JAaTrro) (/?Aa/?-),hurt, cfid
715. (Second Future Passive.) The stem of the second future passive adds a%- to the prolonged stem (in -q) of the second aorist passive. It ends in ^o-o/wu and is inflected like the first future (710). E.g.
BAotttoj (fiXafi-), ijBXdfirjV, pXa/irj-croiMi; ypd
) idX
(TTaXyf-uo^uiL;
716. N. The weak stem of verbs of the second class, which seldom appears in other tenses than the second aorists (042), is seen especially in the second passive system; as crr/via (aair-), corrupt, i(rdTn]V, crcwnycro/iiai; rr/Ka) (rax-), melt, eraKrjv; pto} (pv-), flow, ippvqv, pv-fyrofuu; (punu> (ipur-), throw down, rjpinrjv (poetic), but 1 aor. tjpu(f>6riv ((pan-).
717. The following table shows the nine tense stems (so
far as they exist) of Xio>, XiUo), trpao-cro) (irpdy-), (f>a(yo)
(
(ITT%- 1Tpd0"0"%- 4)atv^*
X«u|<%- irpd{%- 4 id="iv.i.p6141.1">avi%-
|
Present. |
Xv%- |
|
Future. |
Xvtr%- |
|
1 Aorist. |
Xvco- |
|
2 Aorist. |
|
|
1 Perfect. |
XcXuKa- |
|
2 Perfect. |
|
|
Per/. (Pert. XtXu-Mid- (Fut.P.X«Xi |
|
|
lPaSS.(Aor-(Fut. |
|
|
2 Pass. Aor> Fut. |
|
XcXonra-
(irtirpd'yo-
iriirpdv-
Itrrak-
)- +av9c(ij)-
|
159 |
724] SUBJUNCTIVE. 159
FORMATION OP THE DEPENDENT MOODS AND THE PARTICIPLE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
718. The subjunctive hu.s the primary endings (552) in all its tenses. In all forms (oven in verbs in /u) it lias a long thematic vowel "/,- (501, 2).
719. {Common Form.) In the common form of inflection, the present and second aorist tense steins change 'Veto "/,-, and the first aorist tense stein changes final a to "7,-. All have w, jjs, 77 in the singular, and <»cu for covert (7S, 3) iu the third person plural, of the active. E.g.
AtiVo), pres. sulij. Xccwu), Xuttw/mxi, 2 aor. AiVcu, Xivto/uu; Ainu, 1 aor. Avctu), Aicru/Aui.
720. A perfect subjunctive; active is rarely formed, on the analogy of the present., by changing final a of the tense stem to "A;-; as Ac'Awa, A.
721. The perfect subjunctive middle is almost always expressed by the perfect middle participle and
722. A few verbs with vowel stems form a perfect subjunctive middle directly, by adding *"/,,- to the tense stem; as xra-o^uii, acquire, pf. K(KT,;fiui. posaets, sulij. k«ktii>/*ui (for m-KTyj-wfUu), k«ktij, k€ktt)t
723. (Mi-form.) In all ,ui-forms, including both passive aorists (oGi), the final vowel of the stem is contracted with the thematic, vowel (.0 or 77), so that the subjunctive ends m S> or Ci/Mi.
724. 1. Verbs in jj/xi (with stems in t- and a-) have w, 7)9, jj, Cifjuxi, rj, f/rai, etc., in the subjunctive, as if all had stems in t. Thus tcrrr/jUi (crra-) has Icttj^?, tarrj, lorijTai, ctttJ?, ctttJ, etc., as if the uncontracted form were Icttc-w, not tora-a>. These verbs have Ionic stems in e- (see 783, 1).
2. The inflection is that of the subjunctives cf>i.XCi aud
|
160 |
160 INFLECTION. [726
725. For the inflection of the aorist passive subjunctive, with i of the tense stem contracted with u> or 17, as v6£> (for vOc-
726. For a few subjunctives of the simple perfect of the /u-form, as torw (for eora-u), /Jt/Juicn (for /2
727. Verbs iu wfu (with stem in o) have by contraction u>,
728. Verbs in vv/u form the subjunctive (as the optative, 743) like verbs in to; as StiKyvfU, subj. &emvv-u>, SaKrv-oifuii.
729. N. Awa/ui, can, iirtara/Aai, understand, upcfiuifMi, hang, and the second aorist cTrpux/xrjv, bought, accent the subjunctive (as the optative, 742) as if there were no contraction; thus Swwfjuou, «rioTfuu, Kpi/xapxii, Trpiw/uxi (compare tiOw/uu).
OPTATIVE.
730. 1. The optative adds the secondary endings (552) to the tense stem, preceded by the mood suffix (5C2) 1 or «; (it); as XioiTi (for vo-i-tc), icrTixirjv (for laTa-irj-v), Aufouv (for X«6c-t£-v). For the ending fju, see 731.
2. The form 177 appears only before active endings. It is always used in the singular of /u-forms with these endings (including the aorist passive, 564, 7) and of contracted presents iu oirjv and utrjv of verbs in aw, ta>, and ow. After i-q the first person singular always has the ending v. See examples in 737 and 739.
3. Before the ending v of the third person plural u is always used; as Xvouv (for vo-it-v).
4. In the second person singular middle,
6); as tcrrato (for urra-£-<70, t
731. (Verb* in u>.) Verbs in o> have the ending /n (for v) in the first person singular in all tenses of the active voice. In the present, future, and second aorist systems, the thematic vowel (always o) is contracted with 1 to 01, giving 01/u, ««,
"ogy of the present. E.g.
|
161 |
757} OPTATIVE. 161
yf (for Xiyo-i-fu), At'yots (for Aeyo-is), Ac'yoi (for Xeyo-i), Xiyoirt (for Aeyo-i-Tt), Xiyoicv (for Atyo-K-v). AttV
732. The Attic generally uses the so-called Aeolic terminations tuis,
733. The perfect middle is almost always expressed by the perfect middle participle and lirfv; as AcAu/«Vos elijy (see 480, 2). The perfect active is more frequently expressed by the perfect active participle and ilrjv than by the form in oifu given in the paradigms; as XeXvuas el-qv- (See 720; 721.)
734. 1. A few verbs with vowel steins form a perfect optative middle (like the subjunctive, 722) directly, by adding i-finjv or 0-i-fj.yjv to the tense stem; as ktcio/kh, pf. KiKTrj-fiai., opt.
KIKTTJO, KtKTrJTO (for K£KT7^l-/i7Jl', KfKTT^lO, K(KTr)-L-To), etC.; KCKTW/1TIV, KtKTWO, KtKTWTO (for Ke.KTr)O-L-firjV, etc.) ; SO fj
lx.ijxvrjiux.1, opt. ficfivrjfxrjv or fitfj.vwiJ.rjv; koAc'co, k(kXt]ij/xi, opt. kckXtj-fxrjv, KtKXijo, KtKXrjfj.c6a. and y3aAA«), f3ijiXr}iJjax, opt. &UL-jicf3Xrj
2. The forms in wfirjv belong to the common form of inflection (with the thematic vowel); those in i)ixrfv, etc. and vro have the fu-iovm (740).
735. A few verbs have oujv (737) in the second perfect optative ; as €K7r€<£«vya, fKTr«j>tvyo!rjv.
The second aorist optative of fy, have, is trxoiijv, but the regular o^oi/it is used in composition.
736. A very few relics remain of an older active optative with v for mi in the first person singular; as rpi^oi-v for Tpi<) id="iv.i.p6201.1">oi-iu, dpAproi-v for a/idpTOi-/ii (from a/xapTdi^w).
737. {Contract Verbs.) In the present active of contract verbs, forms in irj-v, M7-5, irj, etc., contracted with the thematic vowel o to oirjv, oojs, on;, etc., are much more common in the singular than the regular forms in oi/xi, ots, 01, but they seldom occur in the dual and plural. Both the forms in oitjv and those in oi/ai. are again contracted with an a of the verb stern to wfv and <
|
162 |
162 INFLECTION. [738
p ff fjj]v,
It is only the second contraction which mates these contract forms.
738. For the optative plytLrjv, from plyow, shiver, see 497.
739. {M.L-form.) 1. The present and second aori.st active of the /u-fonn, and both aorists passive in all verbs, have the suffix it], and in the first person singular the ending v. Here a, e, or o of the stem is contracted with ltj to airj, nr),
Or 0117; as lara-irj-v, i(jrairjv; (jTO.-i.rj-fx.iv, (TTo.cqjxtv J Xv$c-trj-V) Xv8iir)v; So-c^-v, S007V.
2. In the dual and plural, forms with t for 117, and u-v for f7-
740. In the present and second aorist middle of verbs in 17/u and
'laTcufiyv (for la-Ta-1-fj.rjv), io-raZo, 'kttouto; Qf.ifx.-qv ($e-i-fx.T]v), 61I0 ($c-i-
741. N. The optatives Ti6oijx.rjv, tiOoIo, tiOoito, etc. (also accented riOoio, tlOolto, etc.) and (in composition) Ooifirjv, $010, Oolto, etc. (also accented
742. N. Awa/iot, liricrTafxax, Kpefiafmi, and the second aorists tTrpuifirjv (505) and wvrfix.-qv (from 6vivr}fx.i), accent the optative as if there were no contraction; Swaifi-qv, Svvcuo, Svvairo; &r«rTarro, iiri
743. Verbs in vviu form the optative (as the subjunctive, 728) like verbs in
|
163 |
762] IMPEKAT1VK. 163
744. N. Second aorists from stems in v of the /u-form (as tSvv) have no optative in Attic (see 500). But Homer has a few forms like Biirj, hZfiiv (for 811-177, Su-i'/ity), from i&vv.
745. A few second perfect optatives of the /u-fonn are made by adding- i-q-v to stems in a-; as Tidvat-qv (for Tttfva-iTj-v), iaraujv (508). See the enumeration of /u-l'orms, 804.
IMPERATIVE.
746. (Common Form.) The present and the second aorist active and middle of the common form have the thematic vowel c (o before ^tow), to which the imperative endings (55:3) are affixed. But the second person singular in the active has no ending; in the middle it drops a in ao and contracts c-o to on. E.g.
Aei7re, Xeive-rw, Xcltti-tov, Xu-rri-ruiv, Xe.lire.-Ti, X«i7ro-vr
747. Tlie first aorist active and middle are also irregular in the second person singular, where the active has a termination ov and the middle at for final a of the stein. In other persons they add the regular endings to the stem in ca- (or a-). E.g.
AScro)/, Xvoa-ru), Adou-toi-, Xvctvl-tidv, Xiaa.-T(, Xvcrd-vrwv; ACcrcu, Xv
748. The perfect active is very rare, except in a few cases of the /<(-fonii (503) with a present meaning. But Aristophanes has
d screech, from Kpa£
749. The third person singular of the perfect passive is the only form of perfect imperative in common use; for this see 1274.
750. N. The spcnnd person singular of the middle occasionally occurs as an emphatic form; as ttittoaicto-, stop.'
751. N. The perfect imperative in all voices can be expressed by the perfect participle and "aOt, iaroi, etc. (imperative of tifii, be); as (.'iprf/xtvov Ioto), for dprivduiy let it have been said (i.e. let what has been said stand), Tre.mi.up.tvoi. icmov, suppose them to have been persuaded.
752. (Ml-form.) The present imperative of the /u-form retains $1 in the second person singular active only in a few primitive
|
164 |
164 INFLECTION. [763
verbs; as in <£a-0t from
753. The present active commonly omits 6i in the second person, and lengthens the preceding vowel of the stem (a, c, o, or v) to rj, «, ou, or v; as ZvT-q, tlOcl, SlBov, and HtUvv. The other persons add the regular endings (553) to the short stem; as iord-r, lara-ri, urrirvrtov; ti61-tu> ; 8i8o-rt;
754. The present middle of verbs in 77/11 and o>px has the regular form in a-o, and also poetic forms in
755. 1. In the second aorist active the stem vowel is regularly long (rj, u>, v), except before vtwv (553), and di is retained in the second person singular. E.g.
2r^-ft (crra-), otj/-to>, o-n/-Tf, ora-Krwi'; /3^-ft (/?a-), fir^Td), ftrj-Tt, fia-VTuiv; yvH>-6i, yvu>-Tw, yvHi-rt, yvo-vraiv; &V-81, Su-ra), 80-tc, Sv-vtuiv. (See 678 and 706, 2.)
2. But we have s for 81 in 6U (from riSy/xi), S05 (from St'Soi/ii), « (from iyiixl), and o"xw)- These verbs have the short vowel in all persons; as &h, Oi-rui, 8e-rc, 8(-vtu>v ; 80s, 86-to), 8
3. 2rrj8i. and -/3^i have poetic forms ord and /3a, used only in composition ; as Kara-fid, come down, irapa-vTa., sland near.
756. 1. In the second aorist middle, a-o drops o- in the second person singular after a short vowel, and contracts that vowel with 0. E.g.
"E7rpia.iJ.rjv, wpiaao (poet.), TrpCw (for trpui-o), (8tp.rjv, 8ov (for Sc-o) , tSufxtjv, Sou (for Su-cjo, 8oo). But epic St'fo (8
2. The other persons have the regular endings (553); as Ad; dl-crdw, di-aduiv', ho-a8u>, 86-cr8e., Bo-crOwv.
757. 1. The first aorist passive adds the ordinary active endings (6l, ™, etc) directly to 6c- (8rj-) of the tense stem (707) after which 61 becomes n (95, 2); as Xv&i-n, Xv8rj-Tu>, etc.
2. The second aorist passive adds the same terminations
|
165 |
766] INFINITIVE. 165
to i- (17-) of the tense stem (712), 61 being retained; as <$ id="iv.i.p6243.1">avrf$i,
3. Both aorists have i-vtw in the third person plural; as
v6t-VT01V, jxive-VTblV,
758. N. A few second perfects of the /u-fonn have imperatives in Ol: see 6vrj
INFINITIVE.
759. (Common Form.) The present, second aorist, and future active add «/ to the tense stem, the thematic vowel (here always t-) being contracted with iv to uv; as Acyay
(for Ae-y-t-ev), iStiv (for iS-t-tv), e£av (for e£-t-cv).
760. N. The ending tv (without preceding e) appears in Doric; as yapv-tv in Pindar (Attic yrjpvav).
761. N. For contract presents in av (not pe) for aav, and ow for o'«^, see 39, 5.
762. N. The second aorist in tlv is probably contracted from i-tv, not from i-uv (759).
763. The first aorist active substitutes ai (of uncertain origin) for final a of the tense stem (669) ; as Xvaai,
764. The perfect active substitutes i-voi for final a of the
tense Stem; as XcXux-t'-i/ai, y«ypa<£-£-vai, Trtfy-qv-i-vai, e 1w-t-vai.
765. 1. The infinitive middle adds a&u to the tense stem in the present, future, and first and second aorists. E.g.
Atye-
2. Both passive futures likewise add crOat.. E.g.
v6ri
y. For the perfect middle and the passive aorists, see 760, ]; 708.
766. (Mi-forms.) 1. The present, second aorist, and second perfect active of the ^t-form, and both passive aorists, add vat to the tense stem in the infinitive. E.g.
'I(TTa-vai, Ti6e-vai, SiSo-rai, Sukvv-vm, o-nj-vai., yi/ai-kai, SO-vat, TiOvd-vat, Xv&ij-vat (707),
2. In the second aorist active the final vowel of the stem is regularly long (678; 755, 1); as 'a-rrj^i (a-ra-), crrrj-vai;
«'/V (/3a-),
|
166 |
106 INFLECTION. [767
767. Some /u-fonns have the more primitive ending tvai (for fivai) in the infinitive active. Such are Solrcu (from old So-f cwu, &o-ivm) ; Qtivai (for 6i-pivo.i) ; tlyat, 2 aor. of fyfU (for i-ptvai); '- perf. ScSkVui (for St-Sfi-ftvai).
768. Ju all the simple forms of the middle voice (the present and second aorist of the fn-form, and all perfects), vowel stems add a$ai directly to the tense stem. E.g.
''
Jyjfu) ; XtXv-aOai, Tttiprj-crBax, 8t8rjS.u>-(rdai, SeSu-adai, -irTa-cr&u (from
7TtTO-/iial, 7TTa-).
769. Consonant stews here (708) add the more primitive ending 0Eg.
'EoTd-6ai, ki t
So fj
PAKTIOII'I.KS AND VEKHALS IN TO9 AND T6OS.
770. All active tenses (except the perfect) and both aorists passive add vt to their tense stem to form the stein of the participle. Stems in ovt of the common form have nominatives in w; those of the jw-foi'in have nominatives iti ou<;. E.g.
Ae'yw. pres. Xiyo-yr-, nom. Xeyw, fut. Xc$ovt-, nom. Ae'£u»/; 1 aor. Xi£a-vr-, nom. Ac'£as. 4>uiVa>: aor.
771. For the inflection of these participles and the formation of the feminines, see 335-337.
772. The pevfect active participle changes final a of the tense stem to or in the stem of the participle. E.g.
AtXvxa-, XiXvxot; nom. AcAvkous ; ir(
For the inflection, and for the irregular feminine in ma, see 335; 337, 2.
773. N. Homer has many varieties of the second perfect participle of tUe. ju-form; in acis, gen. aCnos (sometimes ci6tos), fern, oula, as ycyaui, /9c/3auis; in ?;ui, gen. tjStoj or >)6tos, foui. jjuio, as TeSyytiii Tt-
|
167 |
?77] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VERBS IN ft. 1G7
BvrjuTOi or -orot, Ttfoijwo (804). Herodotus has eiis, e&tra, c6s, gen. euros, fuicnjs, as etrreiis, etc., some forms of which (e.g. ifffeCiTa, redveUri) occur in Homer. The Attic contracts aws, ouira, 06s, to us, waa, 6s (or us) (342), gen.
774. N. The stem of the feminine of the second perfect participle in Ilonier often has a short vowel whe-n the other genders have a long one ;
775. All tenses of the middle voice add ficuo to the tense stem to form the stem of the participle. E.g.
Auo/iefos (kvcy/xd'o-), Xvcro/Kvo'; (Xvcro-fievo-), kvad/xtvo'S (vora-/i£i>o), tora/upo? ('urra-fiivo), di^.tvo'; (6(.-fi(.vo-), irpia/xfros (irpia-
IXIVO-), Xi.TTOfX.lVO'i (Al7TO-/iCl/O ), XtXv/if'l'OS (X
For the inflection of participles in fiivo<;, .sec.:!()].
776. 1. The stem of the verbals in ros and tw is formed by adding to
Av-to-, Au-T«o-), aor. pass. ikvOrjv; Tpl-n-TO';, irtiCTTt'o? (st^lllS Tpi7r-TO-, tt£«t-t«o-), aor. paSS. (Tplcp6rj< id="iv.i.p6290.1">, cwuaOrjy; Taxriis, tok-t«os, from Taacra) (stein ray-), aor. pass. Irax-Orjv; 6ptirTO<;
from rpe'^oj (95, T>).
2. The verbal in tos is sometimes equivalent to a perfect passive participle, as k/jito's, derided, tciktos, ordered; but of tenor it expresses capability, as Autos, capable of being loosed, aKouords, audible ; irpaKTOs, that may be done.
3. The verbal in r«os is equivalent to a future passive participle (the Latin participle in dut); a.s Aure'os, that must be loosed, solven-dux; tI/djtc'os, to be honored, honorandus. (See 1501.)
For the impersonal use of the neuter in tcov in the sense of St? and the infinitive active, see 1597.
DIALECTIC ANJ) POF.T1C 1'OHMS OK VEMlS IN fi.
777. 1. The Doric has the personal endings ti for m, p.t<; for fJLtv, rav for ttjv,
2. When
|
168 |
168 Inflection.
fitfj.vrp.1 for /Af/Avjjom, Zcravo for £
3. The Ionic has arai and aro for vrcu and vro in the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect, and aro for vto in the optative. Before these endings it, ji, k, and y are aspirated (<£, %); as KpwrTd) (Kpv/3-), Ktxpv
Tiie forms arai and a-ro sometimes occur in Attic (701). Herodotus has them also in the present and imperfect of verbs in fj.i.
4. Herodotus has ta, tas, «(v) in the pluperfect active, as iTtOyTTta.; whence comes the older and better Attic 17, 17s, a(v). Homer has ta, 17s, ci(v), with tc in ijStt (821,2), and rarely ov, £9, £•
5. Homer and Herodotus generally have the uncontracted forms of the future (in ew and to/juu) of liquid stems; as /xtvcu, Attic /iti/o). When they art; contracted, they follow the analogy of verbs in fw.
0. The Doric has aim, crt'o/xui (contracted cri, o-ovpxu or acvfuii) for
7. In Homer a is sometimes doubled after a short vowel in the future and aorist; as rtXeui, tii
8. In Homer aorists with a- sometimes have the inflection of second aorists; as I^oy, T&5, from Ikv(o/ml, come; ijirjcrtTO (more common than ifS-quaro), from /3cuVo), #0. These are called mixed aorists.
9. In the poets r/orav of the aorist passive indicative often becomes ev; as
778. Homer and Herodotus have iterative forms in vkov and o-KOfarjv in the imperfect and second aorist active and middle. Homer has them also in the first aorist. These are added to the tense stem; as c^u>, impf. ixe-o-KOV, ipvai, 1 aor. cpwa-crK£;
|
169 |
781] DIALECTIC AND POETIC FORMS OF VEHBS IN fl. 169
These forms are inflected like imperfects, and are confined to the indicative, and denote repetition; as woiXco-kcto, he went (regularly). They generally (in Hdt. always) omit the augment.
For /u-fonns with these endings see 787, 5.
779. Some verbs have poetic stems, made by adding 0%- to the present or the second aorist tense stem, in which a or e (rarely u) takes the place of the thematic vowel; as a.fj.vvaO%-, hiu>K
See. in the Lexicon oXudduv, d/xvvudu>, 8iu>kcl#u>, tiKaduv, ipydOtiv, TjCfiiOofUXi., riyipiOofJuou, jXtrixKidOui, a^idio,
780. (Subjunctive.') 1. In Homer the subjunctive (especially in the first aoi act. and mid.) often has the short thematic vowels t and o (Attic rj and m), yet never in the singular of the active voice nor in the third person plural; as (pvacrofxtv, aXyrjo-tre., fivdi;-crofiai, cv£(ai, SijAijo-ctcu, Afi(i
2. In both aorist passive sulijiuictivrs Herodotus generally has the uncontracted forms in ew, eu>/j.(v, tuxrt, bnt contracts nj and tg to r] and y; as d<^aipt^«u) (Att. -$u>), cpavlwcn (Att. -coeri), but
3. In tile second aorist passive subjunctive of some verbs, Homer lias forms in tiw, 7717s, 1717, eto/xtv, rjen (780, 1), as thoy are commonly written; as Safxetw (from (Saw, '1 aor. pass, of 8a/xva'u. subdue), ho.fi.ryrfi, do.fj.ijr], dafj-ijtre; rponrciofxtv (from iTapinjVy of Tipnw, aittuse'). It is highly probable that 17 should be written for « in all persons. This is more fully developed in the second aorist active of the /u-form (see 788, 2).
4. In the subjunctive active Homer often has wfii, rjvda, 770-1; as I9iu)fjj., i&(yo~9o., I9(
f
781. (Optative.) 1. The so-called Aeolic forms of the first aorist optative active iu «a$, tu, tiav are the common forms in all dialects.
|
170 |
170 INFLECTION. [782
2. Homer sometimes has 0108a (056, 1) in the second person for ots; as KkaioiaOa. For aro (for vto) see 777, 3.
782. (Ivjinitive.) 1. Homer often has fxcvai and fj.iv for cv (759) in the infinitive active; as d/uW/xtnu, a/ivvt/xtv (Attic d/xu-vtiv) ; iXOe/xtvat., i6tfi(i> (i8uv) ; d£t'/xcrat, a^l^tv (a£tiv). For tlie perfect (only of the /xi-iorm), seeT'.ll: the ])e.rf. in
2. The Doric has tv (7(iU) and the Aeolic tjv for tiy in the infin.; thus dtiScv and ydpikv (Dor.) for afiBciv and yrjpvtw,
783. (JJurticijdc.) The Aeolio has oicra for ovtro, and ais, ataa for as, ucru, in the participle; as t^mcra, Opiipais, Opiipaicra.
Si'icciai. Dialectic Fohms or Conthact Verus.
784. (Verbs in ato.) 1. In Homer verbs in aw are often contracted as in Attic. Jn a few cases they remain uncontracted; sometimes without change, as vaurdovcri, vaurawv, from vuteraw, dwell; sometimes with a, as in Truvdai, hunger, Siipaui, thirst; sometimes with iov for aov in the inijierfect, as pivoivtov from [xcvoivaw, Inng for.
2. (a) The Mss. of Homer often give peculiar forms of verbs in a
|
«paas |
for opdus |
opow for |
opaw |
|
<6pda |
" opdci or opdt] |
opoucri " |
opdouo-i (i.e. opaovo-i) |
|
opdacrOe |
" 6pdco*6€ |
6p6b>o*a u |
opdoucra (i.e.6paovT-ia) |
|
opdacrdai |
" Opd |
Op6uMV " |
opdoiev |
|
(iviaufiai |
*( jivdccdai |
opowvTai " |
opdovTai |
|
opddv |
" opdav (Dor. opd(v) |
atnouo " |
atridoio |
(b) The lengthening of the former vowel occurs only when the word could not otherwise stand in the Homeric verse; as in
1 Although these forms are found in all editions of Homer, yet most Homeric scholars are agreed that they are not genuine, but are early substitutes for the regular forms in au et.e. which they represent. See Monro, Homeric Grammar (2 eil.), pp. 50-54.
|
171 |
785] SPECIAL FORMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 171
y/3ovTts for rjftdovrcs, yfiwoLpj. for r/Pdoifii, fivaavOax for fjLVuiovra for (i)nvdovTo. In this case the second vowel or diphthong is not lengthened. But it may be long in a final syllable, as in fuvoivaa (for -
(c) These forms extend also to the so-called Attic futures in a<7, duy, , 2); as £6w, cAoaxri, Kpf/*o'u), Sa/xua, Ba/xotixri, for iXdam (tAaw), etc.
;S. The Doric contracts ae and a?; to 77; as oprjre for 6pd(TC, bprj for bpdu and 6pu>/. A peculiar form (of contraction ?) occurs in the dual of a few imperfects in Homer, as irporravZrjTrjv (from Trpocmvhdu)),
4. Herodotus sometimes changes au, ao. and noi) to tw, eo, and (ov, esi)ecially in opdui, elpuirdui, and (ftoirdw, as 6p£ui, bpiovre;, bpiovai, elptliTCOv, e
In other cases Herodotus contracts verbs in aw regularly.
5. Homer sometimes forms the present infinitive active of verbs in au and cut in rj/xevai; as yor//x(pai (yodui), iruvrjjJ.<.vai {Truvadi), <^ id="iv.i.p6359.1">i
jp.iva.i (
785. (Verbs in £
2. Homer sometimes drops t in cm and
3. Homer sometimes has a form in £i
4. For Homeric infinitives in rj/xcvai, see 784, 5.
(bfjuxprito) and in-tiAr/Tr/i' (diraAoo). (See 784,3.)
|
172 |
172 INFLECTION. [780
786. (Verbs tn oa>.) 1. Verbs in oo> are always contracted in Herodotus, and his Mss. sometimes have cv (for ov) from oo or oov, especially in Stxaidu), think just.
2. They are always contracted in Homer, except in the few cases in which they have forms in oa> or ow resembling those of verbs in am (784, 2); as dpouxrt (from apow, plough) ; Srjiowtv and (impf.) SijioWro (from Srjiow).
DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI.
787. 1. Homer and Herodotus have many forms (some doubtful) in which verbs in rjp-i. (with stems in t) and
2. In the Aeolic dialect most verbs in aw, cai, and o
3. A few verbs in Hoin. and Hdt. drop
4. The Doric has ti, vtl for o-t, v
5. Herodotus sometimes has arai, aro for vrat, vto in the present and imperfect of verbs in fu, with preceding a changed to t; as TrpoTiOearai (for-evrai), e'SWaro (for-airo). For the iterative endings (tkov, uKoixtfv, see 778; these are added directly to the stem of verbs in pi, as urra-crKOv, 86-ctkov, £(awv-
0. For poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists in rjprjv, t/L::;v, vfirjv, and from consonant stems, see 800.
788. 1. Herodotus sometimes leaves to) uncontracted in the subjunctive of verbs in t?/xi; as 6iwp.iv (Att. 6u>p.cv), SiafoWrcu (-dwvrai), aTT-uWt (Att. a
|
173 |
793J DIALECTIC FORMS OF VERBS IN MI. I73
2. Generally, when the second aorist subjunctive active is uncontracted in Homer, the final vowel of the stem is lengthened, t (or a) to 17 or
(Stums in a.) ptU> (Attic p
(Steins in 0.)
(Stems in «.) 6
The. editions of Homer retain u of the Mss. before o and w; but probably 17 is the correct form in all persons (see 780, 3).
3. A few cases of the middle intteeted as in 2 occur in Homer; as fiXr/irai (fiuXXui), oA-trai (aAAox
789. For Homeric optatives of 8atvv/j.t, 8iu, Xvw, and
790. Homer sometimes retains 61 in the present imperative, as &'S
791. Homer has /xtvat or /xtv (the latter only after a short vowel) for vox in the infinitive. The final vowel of the stem is seldom long in the present; as Icrrd-nivat, u-/x(.vat, /jl(6U-[jiiv, opvu-iui/ui, opvv-ixzv, ti6i-/xcv, but Ttdrj-fjitvai.. In the second aorist active the vowel is regularly long (760,2), as orT^/iewM, yvat-iuvai; but rtdrifJit: 8t'8o)/ii, and uj/xt have Olfxtvai and df/xtv, 8o/iho/xiy, and (tfj.ev) /xfOi/xty. (See 802.) In the perfect of the /u-form we have tora-tctvai, €ora-/xcv, TtOvd-iuvai, T(.6vd.-fiiy.
792. Homer rarely has rnxevos for t/xtros in the participle, for 6econd-perfect participles in ws (aut, eaj?, 170)9), see 773.
ENUMERATION OF THE MI-FORMS.
The forms with this inflection are as follows : —
793. I. Presents in jxi. These belong to the Seventh and the Fifth Class of verbs (see 619 and 608).
|
174 |
174 INFLECTION. [704
794. Those of the Seventh Class are
1. Verbs in fu with the simple stem in the present. These are the irregular «7u, be, tl/u, go, <£7?/xt', say, fnxai, sit. and Kunai, lie, which are inflected in 80G-818; with rjjxi, say,
and the deponents ayafuu, hvvafuu, eTraxra/nui, ipa.fi.ai, Kp(fiafw.L.
See these lasl in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under arjfjn, Sajyicu, Si'c/xai (stem Bit-), Si'f^/xui, i8u>, lArjfii, Kt^ai'oj, ovofjuxi, f)vofxa.t and (piiOfxai, (Tivuu orci'/wii,
For SdfivrjfiLi. and other verbs in vrjfu, see 71)7, 2.
2. Verbs in /u with reduplicated present stems (G51). These are iittij/u, ri6rjp.u and SiSto/u, inflected in 506, trj/ju, inflected in 810, 8('S>;au (rai'e for Sew), bind, ki'xpwi- (xPa")»
lend, ovivrjfu (ova-), benefit., ?ri/j.Tr ifU (7rAa-), fill, Trl/jLirprj/u
(■n-pa-), burn. (For the hist five, see the Catalogue.)
See also ZirTafiai (late), and Horn. /3i/3
795. N. WlinrX-qixi and irip.irpy}ixi insert/i before tt; lint the /x generally disappears after p. (for v) in i/i-7r{vKTjfu and efi-iriirprjfxi.; but not after v itself, as in iv-nrifnr
796. N. 'Ov!vrjjit (of uncertain formation) is perhaps for 6v ovrj-fLi, by reduplication from stem ova-.
797. Those of the Fifth Class are
1. Verbs in vC^t, which add w (after a vowel, vw) to the verb stem in the present (G08). These are all inflected like 8uKvvfj.i (50G), and, except apiwviu., quench (803, 1), they have no "Attic /ui-forms except in the present and imperfect. The following belong to this class: —
(Stems in a), Kcpa-wufU, Kpiixd-vvvfii. Tcrd-vvv/xL, crKtBd-vvvp.i; — (stems in t for ea), '(-wvfu, xopc'-vi/C/u. ajii-vw/J-i; — (stems in w), ^oV wi/ii, pw-vvvjxi, (rrpu)-vv}ju. — (consonant steins), d-y-vu/u, dp-vn/joa^ iuK-vvp.1, ilpy-vvfU, fcivy-vv/u. oltto-ktu'-vv/ai (ktclvw), my-vvfu, oiy-VV/it (in compos.), ok-Xv/xt, o/x-vv/xi., OfJ-Opy-vvp-L, op-vvfii, Trrjy-vvfjn (Tray-), TrTa.p-Wfux.1, pijy-vvfju (p>;y-)> (TTOp-w/u, (ppay-vv/u. See these in the Catalogue, and also Ionic or poetic (chiefly Homeric) forms under alvvyuai, dwixia, yaVu^uu, SaiVv/ni, Kaivvfimu, Klpvfuxi, opiy-vvjxL^ raw/mi (see reiVai), tCvv/jju (see tiVoj).
2. Verbs in v-qfu (chiefly epic), which add y
|
175 |
800] KXUMKRATION OF THE MI-FORMS. 175
798. II. Second Aorists of the pn-Fonn. The only second aorists formed from verbs in p.i are those of lrjp.i (810), of
i, n%u, and 8i'8u/u (500), of afiivvviu (803, 1); with MfjL-qv (505); also tin1, irregular il>vqp.r}v (later wvdixrjv), of
ovivqp.1, and tirXjqp.ijv (poetic) of -jv!.p.wXr]p.L.
See also Homeric aorist middle forms of pxyvvp.i, opvvpn, and irriyvvfjj., in the Catalogue.
799. The second aorists of this form belonging to verbs in w are the following: —
AKi(TKO/iai (aA-), he taken: iawv or -qXusv, was taken, aXCi, aXoiyjy, uAujj'ai, uAois'- ('See bO-i, J.)
BtuVttj (/3u-), (yo: e/Siji', /Xi, /iui'r;i/. )3^i (also /3d in comp.), /Srjvai, /)as. Horn, fiarrfv for i/i^rrji'.
liwo) (ftio-), live: c/3lwv, /Sid, fliwrjv (irregular), jiiwvai, /3lovs. (Iloni. imper. /i«orci>.)
rr;ptt
Ftyi/cufrKfi) (yro-), know: tyvwu, yi'w, yi'Oirjy, yvwOi, yvuivaL, yvous.
&iSpu
Aijui (Su-), t-)i(c-)-: tSvv, entered (50G), S™, (for opt. see 744), Sv6t,
SOl'at, 8us.
Kt«iV(1) (KT€l'-, KTa-), /(7/.- act. (poetic) ZkTUV, «KTUS, €KTa, tKTU/KV
(•! pi. Zktuv, sulij. KT(u}fj.(y, inf. KTap.tvu.1, KTap-tv, Hum.), ictus. Mid. (Honi.) (Krafjujv, wus killed, ktu.c0m, KTa/xtrov.
IltTo/iai (7rra-, ttt(-), flu: act. (poetic) iirr-qv, (wrui, late), Trrairjv (tttyjOl, vrrjvai, lai-e), tttus. Mid. iirTilfirjv, TtTixrrOai, TTTap.ivo%.
[TAai.j] (tAu-), endwe: irX-qv, tAw, rXaiijv, tA^&, rXrjvai, tAus.
'l^aVw (
Q>vu> (u-), produce: t<$ id="iv.i.p6427.1">w, nuis produced, (nn. tfrvw,
Add to t.h«se the single forms, airo-uKXrjvai, of anoaniXXu), dry up, ^X'^' i"i]nira(. (A t^oj, hm-c, ttZOl, juijifrat.. of wlvm, drink, anil epic forms of £vp.fi
800. 1. Some poetic (chiefly Homeric) second aorists of the jut-form in rjfji-nv, ip.r/v, and vp.r/v are formed from stems in a, t, and v belonging to verbs in w. 7-.'.c/.
BaAAw (/3aA-, fSXa-), throw, '2 aor. act. (efjXrjv) ^vpL-fiX^Tijv (dual) ; mid. (i/3Xrjp.r]v) (fJXrjro; 4>Bivi) (
|
176 |
176 INFLECTION. [801
See these verbs in the Catalogue. For other Homeric aorists see w, a-no.vpa.ia, /3ifipJ>
2. Some are formed from consonant stems, with the simple ending firjv. E.g.
"AAAo/luu (
Besides these, see apapiaKw, yivro, grasped, waXXu, iripBw-
3. For the inflection, see 803, ii.
801. N. Second aovists in rjv or a/j.rjv from stems in a are inflected like ((ttyjv or i-TrpidfJLrjv; but i&pav substitutes a (alter p) lor r/, and (ktvlv is irregular.
802. 1. The second aorists active of TiOrjiu, fijjzt, and &'8
2. As these tenses have no forms for the indicative singtibr, this is supplied by the, irregular first aorists lOrjna, rjxa, and «S(o»ca (C70); so that the actual aorist indicative active is as follows: —
tOijxa, €#>;*as, l&rjKt, tderov, idlT-qv, tOt/xtv, idcri, iBicrav.
r)Ka, T^KUS, T)K(: flTOV, tlTtjV, llfltV, tin, <1(TU.V.
(SuiKa, eSwKas, t8u)«e, tSoTOf, iSorrjv, (So/jlcv, (Sore, tSocrav.
803. 1. The two other second aorists active from stems in ( are (
2. The. other second aorists, from stem in o, are inflected like lyvwv, as follows : —
Indie, tyvwv, tyvo)?, iyvai, tyvwrov, £yvu>Tt}v, iyvwfitv, lyviDTf, tyvwerav. Subj. yvu> (like 8ui). Opt. yvoitjv (like Soiree). Iinper.yvu>8i, yvojToj, yvwTOv, yv(joru)U, yvuiTf, yx/OKTO>i' (755). Injin. yvuyvaL. Partic. broils (like Sous).
3. The Second aorists lairqfLijV Hlld (TrXi)/J.rjy (708), and the pootic
aorists in 17/117?, i/ii}c> and virqv (800, 1) or in fiyv from consonant steins (800, 2), are inflected like the pluperfect middle (098).
804. III. Second Perfects and Pluperfects of the iu-Form. The following verbs have forms of this class in Attic Greek, most of them even in prose : —
'l(TTrjfju (ora-) ; see 508 (paradigm). For Ionic forms of the participle, see 773.
|
177 |
806] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 177
BcuVio (fta-), gn; poetic 2 pf. (3cftS.cn (Horn. (3tftda.cn), subj. ficftucn, inf. [iijidvai. (Horn, ftiftdfxcv), part, ftiftua (Horn, fitftaws, (i(ftavla); 2 phi]), (lloin. ft(fiacrav).
Tiyvofuii (ytv-, y<*-), become, 2 pi', ytyora, am; (Horn. 2 pf. ycydacn, 2 plup. dual ytydr-qv, inf. ytyd/xcv, part, ycyaoos, ytyavia), Att. ytyais, ytyiocm (poulic).
®yrjcrKU) (6uv-, Ova-), die; 2 pi. rtOvarov, TtOvcifitv, Tt6vacn, opt. TcOvu.it)V, iinper. riOvaOi, TcOvdra), inf. rcdvdvax (Horn. rtOydfitvai or rcdi'ofiev), part. rcOvcdi (773), Tt^ceoJcru (Horn. tiOvtju>s, with T(.6vr)viri%), 2 plup. iridvao-av.
A«i'8cu (8«-, 8i-), e])ic in pres.,/ear, Attic 2 pf. 8«'8ca, 8('8tas, St'Stt, plur. 8«8i/xti', SfSiTC, 8c8iacrt; 2 plup. tStSi'tiv, «8«8i(Tttv; subj. StSij, StStWt, opt. 8«8ifi'jj, iinper. 8t'8i&, inf. StSieVat, part. StStoiis. (Horn. 2 pf. 8ti'8ui, Sei'Sta?. Sa'8i£, pi. SubifjLti', iinper. 8tt'8ift, Sti'Sire, inf. 8cl8ljxcv, part. StiSiol?; plup. f8«t'8i/j.«v, <8«<.'Stcrai/, rarely Sci&e (777, 4).
[Eikco] (t(K-, iK-), 2 pf. eotKa, seem; also 2 pf. foiy/xey, tt^ocrt (for toLKu.cn), inf. cikcVoi, part, eixul? (Hoin. 2 pf. uktoi', 2 plup. Hktyjv), used with the regular forms of Ioiko., (wk-t; (see Catalogue).
OI8a (1&-), know; see 820 (paradigm).
See also poetic, chiefly Homeric, forms under the following verbs in the Catalogue: avuiyo), ftifiptI>o~Ka>, iytlpu), tp)(Ofiai, Kpd^ia, /xaiofxai, cLOu), mirru, [rXd],
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM.
805. The verbs dpi, be, t!/xt, go, f^/it, send,
sit, Ktl/juii, lie, and the second perfect oT8a, know, are thus inflected.
806. 1. elfii (stem to--, Latin es-se), be.
Present.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. ' Imperative.
|
Si"g- { 2. I 3. |
(((it it (ctt£ |
u) IIS fl |
|
JcTTU |
|
Dual {I |
|
^TOV |
«Itov or cti^Tov |
«(TTOV |
|
1 |
T|TOV |
«tTT]V Of tt^JTT^V |
? |
|
|
fL Plur. 1 2. |
i |
t * TITt |
«t(icv or i(i]|uv «!« or cVt^Ti |
« |
|
«br( |
ucri |
itcv or «li)trav |
2a*T0»V, €(TT0 fivTWV |
Infin. tlvai. Purtic.
|
178 |
178
INFLECTION.
[807
Imtehkkct.
Sing. 12. I 3.
rj or fv rjo-fta
Indicative. i'croficu to-ei, lio-n
Dual { 2-1.3.
FUTUKE.
Optative.
<
«ro«r6ov
Infinitive. i'crfo-Bai
tjo-tov or t|tov i'creo-flov «ro«r6ov Partic.
ijo-njv or rT\v «rco"8ov Icroi(r9t)v <
{1. ry.tv tcrofuBa ccro()j.<6a
2. ^tc or ^a-Tt to-tcr6f i
3. T|
2. Et/ii is for €
807. Dialkcts. 1. Present Indie. Aeolic tp.pi, the most primi-. tive form, nearest to ia--/u (800,2). Horn, tao-t and cl), dpiv (for €(rp(v), taui. lidt. us ami dp.lv. Doric )j/xi, icrcri, dpiv and (older r/piv), IvtI (for ao't).
2. Imperfect, lloni. ^a, ta, eov; ZycrOa, fyv,
4. .Su/y. Ionic
v; lyric 808.
1.
Indicative.
Sing. |
Dual
I2' 13.
Plur. |
(I|JLl
tto-l I'tov Vtov V)uv
VTt
3. Voo-i
8. Partic. Ionic and Doric iv. i. (stem /-, Latin i-re),
1jiu:sknt.
Subjimctinr.. Optative. Vw toi(ii or tot^v
I'l^TOV Vt)T(
Vuci
Imperative.
|
Vous |
I'Oi |
|
toi |
Vtio |
|
I'OLTOV |
Vtov |
|
toiTt)V |
I'twv |
|
Voiyuv |
|
|
toiT€ |
Vt« |
|
Voicv |
Iovtojv, Xt«jv, or ' |
Iifin. levai. J'artic. Iwv, loTxrn, li>v, gen. toi/ros, ioij
|
179 |
810] IRREGULAR VEIiBS OF THK MI-FOHM. 179
iMl'EUl'BCT.
Siwj. Dual. Plural.
1. tjo or fl'eiv
2. || cis or T)W8a fl-rov
3. fju or Tjtiv T1TT1V gaav or fl Imperfect forms rjaptv and rjiiTC are rare and doubted.
2. In compounds the participle luv keeps the accent of the simple fonn; as irapiuiv, napwvmi, wapioiTO?, impiowi. (Sou S00, 3.)
3. The present tl/u generally (always in Attic) lias a future sense, shall go, taking the place of a luture of tpxofjuii, whose future iXditro/jsu is rarely (or nev^r) used in Attic [nose.
809. Diai.kcts. 1. Present-Indie. Mom. tlcrda for tl. 2. Imperf. Hoin. ] )). yia, yiov, '*) p. yit, rye, It; dual ItijV, pi. 1 p. rjo/jiiv, !i )'• );io^, jfiuav (?;(TUi'), tauy. II(It. ^itu, »/i£, ijtauv.
0. Future, Horn, tluofjuii; /Ioto(, Hoin. tlcdfj-rjv or iti.
810. 1. t"?jyu.i (stem e), s«Jirf.
ACTIVE. 1jri:sent. Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative.. Imperative.
Sing, j 2. £i,s trjs tt^s fci /u.rtn.
tciTov or itir^TOv
3. Utov t^jTov t«iTT|v or ttiT|Tiiv Utwv Panic
1. t'€|«v t(i(«v Ut|j.«v or U(i)(iev _ tiis,
2. t'tTt tfjT« UiT< or t«liiT« t«r« tu
3. tacrk twtrt iciiv or tcit]
or Ui-uaav lMi*nnrKCT.
(-1. tv
Sing. < 2. t'«is •■ 3. fa
Dual ■( "' '
I 3. Uttv First A orist, r/xa, jjkos, rjxe, only
(" 1. H<(mv i" indie. (802).
Plnr. J. >m
' 3. tia-av etc., regular.
|
180 |
180
INFLECTION.
[810
Sing
Dual
Plur.
Second Aorist (generally in composition). Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative. ( 1. ------(802) w «^v
■h. — ^ 4v,)s is
2. cItov lyrov «Itov or iViitov frrov
3. IITTJV iJTOV €lTT)V Or tl1]T1]V i^TWV
1.
2. itrt i|t« ttTt or tVr]T« ?t«
3. <[crav *.*ti €t«v or eti^cav ?vtwv
or iirwo-av
Infin.
Partic.
cts, etcra,
Sing.
Dual {
Tlur.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Indicative. 1. tifiai 2. 3. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Uto.1
fco-Sov
(e
fcvTai
Imperfect.
1. 2. 3.
r-
13. 1. 2. 3.
tto-o
tiTO
f«or8ov
a-6rv
t(i(it9a
K)
iwvTai
MIDDLE. Pkrsknt. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
t'co-o WcrBw dfirBov i
((cr8< i^o-Bwv or Uo-Bwo-av
tcttrBov UC(t8t)v
t
UlVTO
Infin. t'«o-9ai
Partic.
tt'|iCVOS
(cvto
Future (in composition), fjao/juii, etc., regular. i^V.sf /lori's( (in composition), rjKafirfv (only in indie), 670. Perfect (in composition), «[/lu«. Imper. nadui. Infin. tl Partic-
|
181 |
812] IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE MI-FORM. 183
Seco.vd Aohist (generally in composition). Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative.
Sing- j 2.
* 3. tiro jjrai «Ito "itrbu i(a-8ai
Dual / ^' **(r^ov tj
*. 3. «£
(1. t'ijuta. w(«9a «i'(i<8a ifjicvos
t lur. ^ 2. tvcrOt lio'Bt tlcOc ittrOc
Wi «£vto <3vTai «£vto icrfluv or fcrflioo-av
Aori.it Passive (in composition), e'^v. .9u/^'. i6u>. Panic, cdiis. Future Passive (in composition), tdijcroiMt.. Verbal Adjectives (in composition), tVo's, ct<05.
2. The imperfect active of d
811. Dialects. 1. Horn. T^i (with initial I); imp. utv for i7;v; 1 aor. c^ra. for ^Ka; - .tor. 'iauv, (pyv, (vto, by omission of augment, for tjaav, Ujj.rjv, (ivto; inriu. H/xty ior iliui. hi ai'lrj/u, Horn. fut. ojrt&it), &Ov. aptcro..
2. Hdt. perf. mid. dv-twcrat foi' dv-iivrai, and peif. pass, partic. (x£-ju«Ti-/xeVos, for p.c6-(i.fi(vo<;, summoned.
812. 4>VrL'' (stem <£a-), say. Prus. Impf.uv.
Subj.
Infin.
<4 id="iv.i.p6638.1">ajj.
c
future, <^ id="iv.i.p6641.1">ijo-u>, ijcr£tv,
A perfect passive imperative (3 pws.) Ttt^aaBui occurs.
|
182 |
182 INFLECTION. [813
813. Dialects. I. Present. Ind. Doric
Imperfect. Horn.
2. Homer lias some middle forms of <^iu'; jw«. iwper. <£ao, (/lacr^u),
814. .f)fi.ai (stem?}
(Clncfly poetic in simple form : in Attic prose koB-^jmxi is generally used.)
Present. Indie. rjfMi, r/crai, ^crrui; rjaOov; y/J-tOa, rjaOe, -yv Imper. rjao. rjcrdu), nlc. lnjin. tjoOai. Partic. i^/xti'os.
Imperfect, rjfiijf, quo, rj(TTo; 7/aOov, -ijoOrjv; r'/fiiOa, fjcrOe, yjvto.
815. KdO-qixai is thus inflected : —
Prexent. Indie. k&6t)imi, xdOqcrai, K
Imperfect. iK(x6yj^r)v, iKa6rj
816. N The o- of the stem is dropped except before rat and to, and in ku^-tui and («)j
817. Dialects. Homer lias ci'arcu, rarely
818. Ketfxai (stem icei-, /ce-), he.
Present. Indie, xti/iai, kiItcli, Ktirai; KtiaBov KiificOa, Kiitrde, KUvrat. Subj. and Opt. These forms occur: kcijtui, huu.-K(r)u&(, kIoltq, ■Kpoa-K.ioLVTO. Imper. nclao, kutOw, etc. lnjin. Ktia&ai. Partic. k(l/j.cvo<;.
Imperfect. tKtiprjv, ikcmo, Ik((.to; UkuctOov, (K(ur6ffv't €K(ij/.c$a, (Ku
Future. Kti'rro/iui, regular.
|
183 |
821J IRRKGULAR VKKBS OF THE MI-FORM. 183
819. Uialkcts. Homer has KtaTai, Kciarat, and Ktovrai, for kuvtoj.; KicrKiTO (iterative) for Zkuto; xcaro and KiLcno for ckcii'to; subj. /c^tcu. H(it.. lias la'eTcu, KiicQw, KuaOixi, and tWcro, for kutui., etc.; and always Kturai and exeaTo for Kai/rIkuvto.
820. oZSa (stem ^
(O'8a is a second perfect of the stem J8-: see dSov in the Catalogue, and 804.)
Seconij Perfect.
Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. Imperative..
(1. oiSa tt6(i (I8ttr|v
Sing, -j 2. oto-Sa etS^s «t8«tt)s Vo-8i
Dual -f"' '•'°"rov ^tc. etc. to-Tov 13. £o-to
TOV
regular regular 1
{1. l'(T(i
3. Wcuri Wtwv or l'o"Two"av
Infin. «t8ivoi. Partic. etScis, itSvia, <(S6s, gen. tiSoTos, tiSm'as (335). Second Phipeukect.
1. -q'St) or f[8«iv Ti(rlJL'v
2. TT|8i)(r8a or fiStia-fla ^o-tov Tl""''*
3. ^S'lC^) li°"Tt)v ifcrav or i}'&tcrav Future, CLdo/xax etc., regular. Verbal Adjective, iot
821. Dialects. 1. The Ionic occasionally has the regular forms olSas, oiSa/uv, o'Sdai; and very often i'8/jtc for Icj^iv. Ionic fut. ilSi/cro) (rare and doubtful in Attic).
2. Ionic i;8«t, tjScc, rj&iare, Horn. TjeiSr/? and rJSi;?. ^i'87;, "cruv, in pluperfect. The Attic poets rarely have fj8(fx<.v and jJStTt (lik«
S)
y)
3. Horn. uSo/j.cv etc., for elSuifiev in subj.; iS/wat and (S infin.; t8vui for eJSuia in the participle.
4. Aeolic Boeotian "tt
|
184 |
PART III.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
822. (Simple and Comjiound Words.) A simple word is formed from a single stem; as A.o'yos (stem Aty-), speech, yp
FORMATION OP SIMPLE WORDS.
823. (Primitives and Denominatives.) (a) Nouns or adjectives formed dij'fctly h-om a root {153) or from a verb stem are called primitives; as ip^rj (stem apx*-), beginning, from
dpX'> Stem ot apx^j ypa
style (for writing), ypa/xprj (ypn/ipa- for ypa<£-/*a-), line (828),
ypa/x/xa (ypafC/xar-), Written document, ypa.
to write, all from ypa
824. Nouns, adjectives, and verbs formed from the stems of nouns or adjectives, are called denominatives; as /?am-Xcia, kingdom, from /3ao-iXt(n)- (263); dp^aios, ancient, from "PX"~ (stem of dpxv); SucauKrvyrj, justice, from Sikcuo-; Tl/xd-w, honor, from Ti/ia-, stem of the noun rTfuj.
825. N. (1) The name vcrba! is often applied to primitive words, because generally their root or stem actually occurs as a verb stem. This, however, (loss not show that the noun or adjective is derived from the verb, but merely that both have the same root or stem. Thus the root ypatf- contains only the general idea write, not as yet developed Into a noun, adjective, or verb, liy adding a it becomes ypatpa-,
184
|
185 |
831] FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS. 185
the stem of ypa
(•2) Even a noun or adjective derived from the stem of a denominative verb is called primitive; as aflXijri}!, flute-player, from aic, the stem of ai(u, play the flute; the latter, however, is formed from the stem of avU-i, flute (829).
826. (Suffixes.) Roots or steins are developed into new stems by the addition of syllables (not themselves steins) called suffixes. Thus, in the examples in 823, final a- in
ap)(a-, cv- ill ypacficv-, to- ill ypa
ypa/xfiar-, iko- in ypa
827. N. Harely a noun stem has no suffix, and is identical with the verb stem; as in
828. N. The final consonant of a stem is subject to the same euphonic changes before a suth'x as before an ending; as in ypan-na for ■yfu.(p-p.a, X^is for X<7-
829. N. A final vowel of the stem may be contracted with a vowel of the suffix ; as in apxa-'os, ancient, from ip%a- and m-s (8&U). But such a vowel is sometimes dropped; as in oupiv-ios, heavenly, from oipavo- and io-s, /3a
A final stem vowel is sometimes changed; especially from o to < in denominatives, as in o/W-w, dwell (oixo-s, iwiife), oikZ-ttjs, house-nervant, and oUtlo'i (cu'Kf-ios), domestic j— sometimes from a to u, as in arpanu>-Tijs, soldier (oTparta-), 2ik«Xiw-ti)s, Sicilian Creek (2i«Xia-); — sometimes from a to y, as in thy-as, icoody, from tSr) (tXo-).
830. N. (1) Many vowel stems (especially verb stems) lengthen their final vowel before a consonant of the suffix, as in verbs (03&); as Trotyj-fiat Trolrj-ats, Trotrj-riK^s, itoi^-tijs, from iroic-.
(2) Many add a before p. and r of a suffix, as in the perfect and aorist passive ((i40); as KcX(v-
(3) Otluu-s add ft, as
(4) Others dro]) a final consonant, as ooxppo-avvn, temperance, from
(TWippOf-.
831. N. In many nouns and adjectives, especially those in o? and ij, the. interior vowel of the stem is lengthened or otherwise modified, as in the second perfect. (043; 044). A change, of e to o (f< and ov) is.pspecially common (31). Thus Xi)«7), forgetfulness, from Xo(?-(cf. XAi;0a); 761-05, nffsprimj, from yiv- (cf. 7/70W1); Xonr65, remaining, from Xenr- (cf. XAo.ira) ; a-ropyv, affection, from ortpy- (cf. (oropya.); iro/iTi?, sending, from tt^m^- (cf- vtironQa.); rp6iro5, n
|
186 |
180 FORMATION OK WORDS. [832
I. FORMATION OF NOUNS.
PRIMITIVE NOUNS.
832. The simplest and most common suffixes in nouns are o-(nom. os or ov) and d- (nom. a or 77). Nouns thus formed have a great variety of meanings. The change of t to 0 (8iJl) is here regular. K.g.
Adyo-s (Aoy-o-), speech, from Aey-, stem of Ae'yu> (831); TpoVos, turn, from rpc-rr- (slum of rpl-noi, turn); ordAos, expedition, and arokr), equipment, from
833. (Agent.) 1. The following suffixes denote the agent: — tv- (110111. eik): ypa
parent, from yei/-.
Ti]p- (nom. T7;p): (juiTrjp, saviour, from cra>- (cruu),
Top- (nom. ruip) : pyjroip, orator, from pt- (tpt'w, fpu), ."i/i«// "ay).
Ta- (110111. ttjs) : 7ron/T^s, poef (inaker), from irotf- (?ro«'u>) ; opij-cr-TrJs, dancer, from op^t- (op^iofuu, dance.). (See 830, 1,1-.)
L'. To these correspond the following feminine forms: —
T«ipd- (110111. rtipa) : crwrupa, fcm. of fjunrjp.
Tpid- (nom. Tpi.il): Tron'jTpui, poetess; op^rjcrTpia, dancing-girl.
Tpi8- (nom. Tpi's) : op^tjaTpk, ilanciny-girl, gen. -t'Sos.
tiS- (noiii. T19) : ir[)O
3. Verbals in rr/p and Tpi? are oxytoue : those in T
834. (Action,) These suflixes denote action : —
ti- (num. T19, fcm.) : 7ri'cr-Tts, i«/'V_/i from tci6- (ttil&u), believe).
o-id- (nom. (ria, fern.) : Soki/x«-ti'u, testing (SoKi/xdfw, to().
(ao- (nom. /xd?, nia.se.) : d8up/*ds, wai/ina (oohp-o^uu. wad)', (nra
835. N. The suffix ^a- (nom /uj, fern.) lias the same force as simple o-(ij;5-2); as yvuixT), knowledge {you-); idny, odor (6fw,
836. jN From stems in eu (cf) of verbs in evu come nouns in da den'itiii!; aetkni; ax paaXda, kingly power, kingdom, lraiSela, education.
For feminine.s in eid oi nouns in ens, see 84 i.
837. (Result.) These sufiixes denote the result of an action : — liar- (nom. jxa, neut.) : xpay-/xa, thing, act, from irpay- (irpucrffo),
do); pfjixa, saying (thing said), from pi- (fut. ipH)', T^-/ia, section, gen. T/r»//Aaros, from Tp;e-, Tt/x- (rfpui, cu().
|
187 |
842] DENOMINATIVE NOUNS. 187
to-- (nom. 05, neut.): Xa^os (Au^tcr-), lot, from Aa^- y^ gain by lot); tOos (idea-), custom, from i8- (
Jji some primitives tliis Butfi.x
.838. (Means or Instrument.) This is denoted by Tpo- (uotn. rpov, Latin (cum): dpo-Tpov, plough, aratrum, from apo- (apou), plough) ; Xv^rpov, ransom, from Ad- (Avu>) ; AoO-Tpoi/, //uf/i, tioiii Aou- (Aou'bi, was/i).
839. NT. Tlie feminine in Tpa sometimes denotes an instrument, as xfopa, earthen pot, from x^- tx^i0
840. Some primitives are formed from stems in avo-, as
ov- or uv-, as uk-uiv, image, from eU- (coikh, resemble), nkvB-iav, wave, from kAvS- (kAu'^u), dash).
DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
841. (Person Concerned.) A person concerned with anything may be denoted by the following suffixes: —
tv-, inasc. (nom. eus), sometimes tid- (for tf-ia), fern. (nom. («I): i«p-£v?, priest, from it^id-?, sacred (y^'.l), fern, lip-eia, priestess; /SacrtA-tus, A:/»,r/ (derivation uncertain), few. /Jturtk-uti, queen; Tropdfx.-f.v'i, ferryman, from 7rop^/xd-s, jerry.
rd-, mase. (nom. tt;?), ti8-, fern. (nom. Tt?) : •jtoAi-tij;, citizen, from 7rdAi-5, cify, fern. 7roAr-TW, female citizen: oikc'-t»js, house-servant, from oTko-9, house, fern, oikc'-tis, housemuUl; ffrpaTtw-rTjs, soldier, from (TTparici, demy (82!)).
842. (Quality.) Nouns denoting quality are formed from adjective, steins by these suffixes: —
ti)t- (nom. T7)?, fern.) : vto-Tijs (vtorrjr-), ynuth, from w'o-y ymini/; iao-Tr/s (laoTrjT-), equality, from itro-?, equal (ef. Latin vcrifus, gen. viiri-tutis, and luc/fis, gen. i>ir-tulis).
o-uvd- (nom. crwtj, fern.) : Sikoio-o-wtj, justice, from Sikcuo-s, /«.?(;
id- (nom. id or tu, fern.):
|
188 |
188 FORMATION OF WORDS. [843
843. {Place.) This is-denoted by these suffixes: —
1. to- (nom. toy, neut.) with the termination Trjp-oov. StKaarqp-Loy, court-house, a.Kpo
eio- for c-io-: xovpilov, barber's shop, fvom Kouptv-s, barber; 'so Xoy-ilov (Aoyo-s), speaking-place, Movcr-dov (Movcra), /taunt of (he Muses.
2. wv- (nom. u>v, masc.): avSpuJv, wen's apartment, from dvr/p, gen. d^Sp-os, man; afMreXw, vineyard, from d,mr«Xo-s, vine.
844. (Diminutives.) These are formed from noun stems by the following suffixes : —
io- (nom. ioi/, neut.) : waiS-iov, little child, from jraiS- (ttcus, child); K-qir-iov, little garden (kj/ttos). Sometimes also 1610-, apio-, vSpio-, vXXto- (all with nom. in tov) ; oiVi'SiOf, little house (oiko?) ; TraiS-dpiov, liltlfi child ; fj.tX-vSpi.oi/. little tony (/xe'Aos) ; iv-vXXiov, little verse, versklr, Latin vcrsiculus (oros). Here final £
ictko- (nom. utko?, masc.) ami i
845. N. Diminutives sonietiines express endearment, and sometimes contempt; as irarpihiov, papa (jrar^p, father), 2a)KpaTt8toc, Eipi7ri'8ioi'.
846. (Patronymics.) These denote descent fvom a parent or ancestor (generally a father), and are formed from proper names by the suffixes 6d- (nom. Sijs, masc. parox.) and 8- (nom. s for 8s, fern, oxytone); after a consonant 180- and iS- (nom. 1817s and is).
1. Steins (in a-) of the first declension shorten a and add 8a-and 8-; as Boptd-S^s, son of Boreas, and Hopta-?, gen. Boped-8os, daughter of Boreas, from Bop«'as, Boreas.
2. Stems of the second declension drop the final o and add 18a-anri 1X-: as IlptaA-i'STjs, son of Priam, llpia/x-if, gen. npui/xt'Sos, daui//iler of Priam, from Tpia/j.o-i. Except those in to-, which change o to a, making nominatives in cd8>;s and ids (as in 1) ; a.s ©£
3. Stems of the third declension add i8d- and iS-, those in iv dropping -u before 1; as K«Kpo7r-i'8)js, son (or descendant) of Cecrops,
' gen. t'Sos, daughter of Cecrops, from K(Kpop, gen. 'Arp«i'8?7s (Iloni. 'ATpeiS^s), son of Alre.us, from gen. 'ATpt'-us; H-qXtS-ni (Horn. IltjXuSrji), son of Peleus,
|
189 |
851] ADJECTIVES. 189
from IlijXev-?, gen. IlijXt'-tos, Horn, also IIi;X7;ia8»;? (as it from a form II77X1710?).
847. N. Occasionally patronymics arc formed by the suffix tov-or U>v- (nom. Uav); as Kpovtoiv, gen. Kpovtuivos or Kpoviovos (to suit the metre), son of Cronos (KpoVo-s).
848. (G'enfiVes.) 1. These designate a person as belonging to some country or town, and are formed by the following suffixes: —
«v- (nom.
rd- (nom. ri/y, masc. parox.) : Ttyta-n;?, of 1'egea (Tcyf'a), 'HTrii.p("Hircipos), 2i«X«iS-T77s, Sicilian Greek (2t(c
2. Feminine stems in iS- (nom. /t, gen. /Jot) correspond to masculines in en-; as Mf7«p's, Megarian woman; and feminines in rtS- (nora. tis, gen. n5os), to masculines in t&-, as ZixeXiu-ns, Sicilian woman.
ADJECTIVES.
849. 1. The simplest suffixes by which primitive adjectives (like nouns) are formed from roots or stems are o- and d- (nom. masc. 05; fern, rj, a, or os; neut. ov) : o-o^>-ds,
2. Some have v- (nom. vs, fia, v), added only to roots: ijS-u's, sweet, from 17S- ()j'So/«ii, be pleased) ; /?up-vs, Af^yj1 (root /3ap-, cf. /iop-05, weighty ; ra^-us, su)i/J (root Ta^-, cf. ra^os, siot/iness).
3. Some have «r- (nom. »/?, «s): <^evSjj? (i/zcvSea-), /a/se ( id="iv.i.p6791.1">//tuS-Ofua, lie) ;
Most adjectives in 7/9 are compounds (881).
4. Some expressing incftnad'on or tendency have nov- (nom. /iuov, fiov): /J.yrj-/xu>v, mindful, from /xva- (/xi-fxvrj-fiui) ; tXjj/aojv, suffering, from rXa- (see rXau)) ; iirL- j(riJ.uiv, forgetful, from Xu^- (Xav^avaj).
850. Adjectives signifying belonging or related in any way (0 a person or thing are formed from noun stems by the suffix 10-(110m. 10s) : oipav-Loi, heavenly (ovpav6-<;), oiksioj, domestic (o*ko-s, see 829); SiKaios, just (Stxa-), 'AOyjvaios, Athenian ('Aftjvai, stem '0d
851. 1. Denominatives formed by iko- (nom. ikos) denote relation, like adjectives in 109 (800), sometimes fitness or ability. Stems in 1 drop 1 before t«o-. E.y.
'Apx-iKo's, fit for rule {o.p
), rule); 7roX
2. Similar adjectives are formed directly from verb stems by
|
190 |
190 FORMATION OF WORDS. [852
tiko- (nom. t(kos): vpdK-rii<6<;, fit for action, practical, from irpay-(irpuacrui); alcrOjj-TiKos, capable of feeling.
852. Adjectives denoting material are formed by
ivo- (nom. ivos, proparoxytone), as Kidivos, of stone (Xi'#os); €o- (nom. (o?, conti'. ovs), as ^pvaio^, piiaovi, golden (xpuffd;).
853. N. Adjectives in ivos (oxytone) denote time, as iap-ivfa, vernal (tap, spring)., yi'KTfp-ti/6s, by night (voi,, night, vvtcrtpo*;, by night).
854. Those denoting fulness (chiefly poetic) are formed by
855. Other adjectives with various meanings are formed by various suffixes besides the simple o-; as vo-, Xo-, po-, i|io-, (io-, or ci|io-, Ti)pi.o-, all with nom. in o?: S«i/c>? (Set-), terrible, hu-6%, timid,
856. N. Most adjectives in vos, Aos, and po? are oxytone.
857. All participles are primitive (verbal) adjectives: so the verbals in tos and Tto%.
858. Comparatives and superlatives in Tipos and raro<; arc denominatives; but those in Iwv and tcrro? are primitives, adding these terminations directly to the root (357, 2).
ADVERBS.
859. Most adverbs are formed from adjectives (see 3C5-367).
860. Adverbs may be formed also from the stems of nouns or verbs by the following suffixes: —
1. 86v (or 6d), i)8ov: ava-tpav-bbv, openly (ava-cpalvui,
2. Sr]v or
3. ti: 6vou.ao-Ti,hy name (dvo/iafa); (Wtjvur-Tl, in Greek (fXX^Wfw).
4. See also the local endings 6(v, i<, etc. (292-290).
DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
861. A verb whose stem is derived from the stem of a noun ov adjective is called a denominative (B'24). The following are the principal terminations of such verbs in the present indicative active: —
|
191 |
870] COMPOUND WORDS. 191
1. aw (stem in a-): Tindv>, honor, from noun tIju; (rlfia-), honor.
2. fu) (t-): api.OiJ.iii), count, from apidfi-O-s, number (H'2',1).
3. oa> (o-): /xiaOou), lei for hire, Ironi ^la^d-s, pay.
4. «uu) (
5. ajw (a8) : StKa^ui, judge, from Si'ki; (&k
7. aivw (ac-): aijfvu'yw, siynifi/, from cn}/iu (avjpjir), ,
8. iv<» (ui/-) : ijSini), sweeten, lrom 1781/-S, .«u'ft'/ (>S(i"j).
862. Verbs in afw, i^ui, atfoj, and vvm are of the fo'urlh class: for their foiiiiation, see o~'J-f>!)(i. boinc denominatives of this class end in AAtu, cupw, upto, ami vpw, as iyyiWio (uyytAo-?), announce, KtiBaifjo) (KaOapo-s), j/ur/fy, ifxiipio (ifXipo'i), limij Jor, IMipTvpoixuL (/Aaprij;, stum naprvp-), call to uilness.
863. Many verbs in ti>u> arc fnnnwl muMily by Mie analogy "f those (like paoiXti-u) wiih stems in tv. ilms /JouXfuu, z«/-e cuvhm-1, from /9oi/Xi); dXrpCfiJw, 6f truthful, from riX;;07)s.
864. Likewise many in iju and nmsl. in ofw merely follow tlie analogy of those like. (Xwi(u (
865. Tlie slonis in o>> and n< of verbs in ai»u and m cduh; from nominal su-ins witlmui. v. see tlie cxaniiiles above.
866. Some verbs in cu come from sujjc-t-tivi-s in ?;? by dropping ta-of llio stem; as tinvxtu, be fortunate, from (i/ri-x7?! (i^Ti.xe"-)-
867. N. Verbs formed from tlie same noun stein with different endings sometimes have different meanings; as iroXc/u/u and (pueticj iroXfM'f". wake war, tocij6u>, vuikr hostile, both from 7roX
868. (Desiileralirez.) 1. Verbs expressing a tlie ending' auu> (stem in act-), soiiietiines au or mo; (u- or ui-); as 8p«-
2. Some verbs in (ato denote a bodily condition; as &
COMPOUND WORDS.
869. In a compound word we have to consider (1) th« first part of the compound, (L;) U>e last, part, and (.'■>) the meaning of the whole.
870. N. Tlie modifications which are necessary when a compound consists of mon. than two parts will suggest themselves at once.
|
192 |
192 FORMATION OF WORDS. [871
I. FIRST PART OF A COMPOUND WORD.
871. 1. When the first part of a compound is a noun or adjective, only its stein appears in the compound.
2. Before a consonant, stems of the first declension generally change final d to o; those of the second declension retain o; and those of the third add o. Before a vowel, stems of the first and second declensions drop d or o. E.g.
®aacr(jo-Kpo.Twp (6a.ao-cra-), ruler of the sea, xopo-8i8aoxaAos (ofio-), chorus-teacher, TraiSo-Tpt'/iijs (ttcuS-), trainer of boys, K«f>a-aXyTjs (n(
872. N. There are many exceptions. Sometimes rj takes the place of o; as xoy'^bpo* (x<"i id="iv.i.p6845.1"> libation), bringer of libations, ta
873. Compounds of which the first part is the stem of a verb are chiefly poetic.
1. Mere the verbal stein sometimes appears without change before a vowel, and with t, i, or o added before a consonant. E.g.
V(.i6-apo<;, obedient to authority; /xti/-t-7rToAt/iOS, steadfast in battle; apX'l~T*KTUV> waster-builder; Xw-o-ya/ios, marriage-leavinrj (adulterous).
2. Sometimes cri (before a vowel c) is added to the verb stem. E.g.
Au-ov7roi>os, toil-relieving; oTpetp!-$i.KO<; (
874. 1. A preposition or an adverb may be the first part of a compound word; as in -rrpo-llaXXw, throw before (882, 1), aci-Xoyld, continual talking, tv-yev^s, well-lorn.
2. Here no change of form occurs, except when a final vowel is elided, or when irpo contracts o with a following « or o into ov, as in TTpovxw (vpd, €x<"), hold before; vpovpyov (irpo, Zpyov), forward, <$pov&o<; (irpo, 6SoC), gone (93).
3. Euphonic changes occur here as usual; as in
|
193 |
881] COMPOUND WORDS. 193
875. The following inseparable prefixes are never used alone •. —
1. av- (a- before a consonant), called alpha privative., with a negative force, like English tin-, Latin in-. It is prefixed to noun, adjective, and verb steins, to form adjectives; as ai/-«Aei>#epos, unfree, av-aiSiji, shameless, av-Ofioux, unlike, a-nan, childless, a-ypa
2. 6v
3. V7]- (Latin tie), a poetic negative prefix; as vij-n-oifOi, unavenged; irrj-fitprrj';, unerring (for i/jj-a^epTr;;).
4. ijjii- (Latin semi-), half; as r)p.i-8<.o
876. N. A few intensive prefixes are found in poetry, — dpi-, epi-, Su-, £a-, as api-yv
877. NT. The prefix a- is sometimes copulative (denoting union); as in a-Ao^o;, bedfellow (from
II. LAST PART OF A COMPOUND WORD.
878. At, the beginning of the last part of a compound noun or adjective, a, t, or o (unless it is long by position) is very often lengthened to -q or w. Eg.
2TpuT-Y)yos ((rrpuTO-s, ayoi), general; W-^koo? (i)7ro, aKOvw), obedient; KaT-yjpi
879. The last part of a compound noun or adjective is often changed in form before the suffix. This takes place especially in compound adjectives, and when an abstract noun forms the last part of a compound noun. E.g.
0tAo-Tt/xos (rc/x>/), honor-loving ; e<-
880. N. An abstract noun comjiounded with a preposition may retain its form, as irpo-ffov-/i, fornhfjuyht-
881. Compound adjectives in rp (849, 3) are especially frequent.
1. The last part may be a noun, generally a neuter in
|
194 |
194 FORMATION OF WORDS. f882
in to--); as tv-yti^s (ytVos), well born, Scxa-er^s (rros)i often years; tv-ru^s (rvxyj), fortunate.
2. The last part may be formed from a verb stem; as <5-<£av-»?s (4>ay), unseen, ^fn-Bavrjs {dav), half-dead.
882. 1. A compound verb can be formed directly only by prefixing a preposition to a verb; as Trpoa-ayw, bring to.
2. Indirect compounds (denominatives) are formed from compound nouns or adjectives. E.g.
Ai0o£JoAt'u), throw stones, tlenom. from A.i#o-/3o'Ao?, stone-thrower; vop.odiTito, make laws, from vo^o-^cVrjs, lav;-maker; avu6(ti>, disoliey, from uTm&js, disobedient; KUTrjyopcw, uccuse, from KuT-^yopos (878), accuser. See 543.
III. MEANING OF COMPOUNDS.
883. Compound nouns and adjectives are of three classes, distinguished by the relation of the parts of the compound to each other and to the whole.
884. (1) Objective compounds are those composed of a noun and a verb, adjective, or preposition, in which the noun (as first; or second part) stands to the other part in some relation (commonly that of object) which could be expressed by an oblique case of the noun. E.g.
Aoyo-ypd
885. M. Wlien tlnj last part of an objective compound is a transitive verbal in 05 formed by Die suffix 0 (83'2), it generally accents tlic penult if this is s/wrt, otherwise tlio last syllable. But if the last part is intransitive or passive (in sense), il>c accent is recessive. TI1U6 oyo-ypd
886. (2) Determinative compounds are nouns or adjectives in which the first part, generally as adjective or adverb, qualifies (or determines) the second part. E.g.
|
195 |
889] MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 195
Ak/)07toAis, citadel (axpa 7ro'A(s); /xicr-riiiflpia (p-tarj fjixtpa, 60), mid-tlay; i//£vSo-/xuim$, false prophet; o/id-8ouAos, fellow-slave (bfioii hovXtvtou) ; 8ucr-/iaSr}?, learning with difficulty; gjku-Wtj;?, swift-flying; T7po-(iov j, forethought; dftfa-Ocarpov, amphitheatre (theatre extending all round); a-ypa^ot, unwritten. Here belong adjectives like/xtAi-77877s (i)8w?), honey-sweet, 'Aprji-Ooo-;, swift as Arcs (Ares-swift).
887. N. Here belong a few compounds sometimes called copulative, made of two nouns or two adjectives, mid signifying:i combination of the two tilings or qualities. Strictly, the first part limits the last, like an adjective or adverb. Such are laTpb-ixa.in«, phiisiciuit-prupUet (a prophet who is also a physician); (ccpo-Maxa'pa, stvord-sabre; avipb-Trau, man-child; yv*v-TriKp
888. (3) Possessive or attributive compounds are adjectives in which the first part qualifies the second (as in determinatives), and the whole denotes a quality or attribute belonging to some person or thing. E.g.
*Apyupd-ro£o5, with silver-bow (apyvpovv to£.ov twv); KaKO-iai/xoiv, ill-fated (Kaicur Suijuovu t^wi/); TUKpo-yafios, wretchedly married (irixpov yd.iJ.ov toiv); o/xo-i/ofiof, hai'iny the same laws; exuToy-Kf'^uAos, hundred-headed; Stxa-CTTys, of ten years (duration); dyu^o-ciS^s, having the appearance (C1809) of good; tv-Oeos, inspired (having God within); (OKV-7TO1)?, swift-footed (ojxeis ttoSu? f^wi'), — but ttoS-uikjjs (wdSus
889. N. In compound verbs, the original verb remains the fundamental part, modified more or less in meaning by the preposition prefixed. Other compounds Mian those here mentioned present, no difficulties in respect to meaning.
|
196 |
PART IV.
SYNTAX.
DEFINITIONS.
890. (Subject and Predicate.') Every sentence must contain two parts, a subject and a. predicate. The subject is that of which something is stated. The predicate is that which is stated of the subject. Thus in the sentence Aapeio*; fiacriXevti rcav Hepcrcov, Darius is king of the Persians, Aapeto? is the subject and fiacriXevet twv TlepcrS)v is the predicate.
891. 1. When any part of elfj.!, he, connects the subject with a following noun or adjective, the verb is called the copula (i.e. means of coupling), and what follows is called the predicate; as Aapuoi tori jSacriXcvs, Darius is king, HoXuiv larl
2. Elfu, however, can form a complete predicate, as in dal Otot, Gods exist.
892. (Object.') That upon which the action of a verb is exerted is called the object. The object may be either direct or indirect: thus, in e'Sw/ce to. ■^ptj/j.ara toj avSpi, he gave the money to the man, ^prjfiara is the direct object and avhpi is the indirect (or remote) object.
893. Verbs which can have a direct object are called transitive; those which cannot are called intransitive.
196
|
197 |
898] SUBJECT. 197
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. SUBJECT.
894. The subject of a finite verb (446) is in the nominative; as 6 dufjp tfXOev, the man came.
895. 1. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative ; as
2. But the subject of the infinitive is generally omitted when it is the same as the subject or the object (direct or indirect) of the leading verb; as ftovXeTai d.Tredelv, he wishes to yo away; <$ id="iv.i.p6904.1">rj
3. So when it is the same wit,]) any important adjunct of the leading verb ; as Kanovpyov earl KpSivr airoOavut', it is like a malefactor to die by sentence of the law (928, 2), 1). 4,47.
896. The subject nominative of the first or second person is omitted, except when special emphasis is required.
897. The nominative of the third person is omitted : —
1. When it is expressed or implied in the context; as 6 Kvipos 7rpa(T
2. When it is a general word for persons; as Xtyovcri, they sat/, it is said;
3. When it. is indefinite; as in 6pl rjv, it was late; koQ>% «^
4. When the verb implies its own subject, as tcqpvacrci, the herald (Kqpi£) proclaims, icrdTny$(, the trumpeter sounded (he trumpet, KiuXvci, a hindrance occurs. In passive expressions like Trap«TKCv-o.ctto.1 /jLoi, preparation has been made by vie (/ am prepared), th< id="iv.i.p6911.1"> subject is really the idea of preparation etc. contained in the verb. See 1240.
5. With verbs like v(i,. it rains, ao-rpa-nrti, it lightens, aiia, there is an earthquake (it shales), where, however, some subject like Zews or $i6was originally supplied.
898. Many verbs in the third person singular have an infinitive or a sentence as their subject. These are called impersonal
|
198 |
19S SYNTAX. [899
verbs. Such are irpi-nu and irpoarfKU, it is proper, ivcan and l£i
The name impersonal is applied with greater propriety (though less frequently) to the verbs of 897, 3 and 4.
SUBJECT NOMINATIVE AND VEHB.
899. 1. A verb agrees with its subject nominative in number and person; as (tyw) Xeyw, 1 say, outo? eyei, this man says, oi avhpes Xeyouaiv, the men say.
2. But a nominative in the neuter plural regularly takes a singular verb; as tavra eytvero, these things happened, ra oiKtjfiaTa erreaev, the buildings fell. So ahvvard tan (pr dSvvarov ecrTt), it is impossible.
Exceptions sometimes occur, especially with nouns denoting persons. Several are found in Xenophon; as in yl.1,71'.
900. A singular collective noun denoting persons may take a plural verb; as to Tr?i9o<; iyjrrj
901. N. When several subjects are. connected by and, they generally have a plural verb. Hut the verb may agree with one of Hie subjects (generally the nearest), and be understood with the rest. The -latter generally happens when they are connected by or or nor. E.g.
l.o
902. N. If the subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the first person rather than thft second or third, and in the second rather than the third. (See examples under 901.)
903. N. A verb in the dual may follow two subjects in the singular, or even a plural subject denoting two persons or things. But even a subject in the dual may have a verb in the plural. (See II. 4, 453; 5, 10, 275; 10, 218.)
|
199 |
910] PREDICATE NOUN AND AD.IECTIVK. igg
904. N. Sometimes a verb agrees with the predicate nominative; as a! 8e ila
905. N. Rarely a singular verb lias a masculine or feminine subject in the plural; as «m 81 (ttto. otuSioi *'£ 'A/?v8ou cs t^v rxTrajrcW, a?J6? (Ais a distance of seven stades from Abydos to the opposite coast, Hd.7,34. In such cases the plural form often seems to have arisen from an afterthought, especially when the subject follows the verb.
See also the phrases ianv ot etc., 1029.
906. N. A preposition with a numeral ir.ay represent the subject of a verb; as airidavov avrwy vtpl TpiuKoaiovs, about three hundred of them perished, X.HA,C>n.
PREDICATE NOUN AND ADJECTIVE.
907. With verbs signifying to be, to become, to appear, to be named, chosen, made, thought, or regarded, and the like, a noun or adjective in the predicate is in the same case as the subject. U.g.
Ourds
908. The verbs which are here included with the copula il/il (8!)1, 1) are called copulative verbs. The predicate nominative with the passive verbs of this class represents the predicate accusative of the active construction (1077).
909. The predicate adjective, with these verbs agrees with the subject in gender and number, as well as in case. (See 019.)
910. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusative expressed (895, 1) is in the accusative; as j3ovcrai rbv vlhv tiwu cro
For such a predicate with the subject omitted, see 927 and 928.
|
200 |
200 SYNTAX, [Oil
APPOSITION.
911. A noun annexed to another noun to describe it, and denoting the same person or thing, agrees with it in case. This is called apposition, and the noun thus used is called an appositive. E.g.
Aapfio? 6 ftacnXtv*;, Darius the king. 'A6fjvai, fxtydX-q iroA.cs, A (hens, a great city. 'Y^ias tovs cro^om. you, the wise ones. 'WpZiv Tail/ ' hOrjvaiuiv, of us, the Athenians. ®Cfuo~TOK
js rjxw (so. (yu>) napa
912. N. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is generally plural (or dual); as virvos ■n6vo% re, xvpioi £ve/idr
913. N. An adjective may have a genitive in apposition with a genitive which it implies; as 'Affyvaios wv, TroXtuii r^s ixcyicrT-rj'i, being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city, l'.Ap.2'Ji.
For a genitive in apposition with the genitive implied in a possessive pronoun, see 10(11.
914. K. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive (10S8) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts, especially when the latter include the whole of the former; as oJki'cu. al /xlv 7roAAcu viVTuiKeaav, oAtyat Si irepifjaav, most of the houses had fallen, but a few remained (where we might have ru>v olxiCiv), T.I, 89. So ovtol aAAos dAAa Xcya, these men all say different things, X.A.2,115. This is called partitive apposition.
915. N. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence, being in the nominative when it is closely connected in thought with the subject of the sentence, elsewhere in the accusative; as kuvtolL 7rC(7ovTt9, irtoris oi
916. X. A noun may be in apposition with the subject or the object of a sentence, where we use as or a like word; as "ttvol ■tjyovro Ovfia. to 'HAc'w, horses were brought as an offering to the Sun (in active, Zttttovs ayav 6vfm, to bring horses as an offering), X. C.S, 312; l£t
; as teachers of what arc you come? P. Eu.287*. See 1080.
|
201 |
821J AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 201
917. N. Homer often adds an appositive denoting a part to a noun or pronoun denoting a person; as ArjwjriTijv ovtojtiv Zpov, he wounded I), in the shoulder, II. 11,420; 6M.' ouk 'ArpeiSr] 'Aya-fitfxvovL rjvSavt 6v/x(Z, but he was not pleasing to the heart of Agamemnon, son o/Atreus (lit. to A., his heart), II. 1,24.
For 6 St in Homer followed by a noun in apposition, see 937,1.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
918. Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender, number, and case. This applies also to the article and to adjective pronouns and participles. E.g.
'O
This includes predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case of which has already been considered (007); as al apwrai SoKoCcrat tlvai (^xxreis, the natures which seem to be best, X.M.i, I3.
919. The adjective may be either attributive or predicate. An attributive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without the intervention of any verbal form (like all the adjectives in 918, except apio-Tdi). The predicate adjective may bo connected with its noun by the copula (80)) or by a copulative verb (008); as 6 avrip aya@6s io~rii', the yuan is yood: kuXutcu dya#ds, he is called good. It may stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of tlfil; as TTTrjya'; &wk«c ras i tbx<;, you are pursuing hopes which are winged (i.e. hopes being winged), E. f2'ag. 273; aBavarov tyjv fjLyq/j.r]v KaraXuipovo-iv, immortal is the memory they will lcat>e behind them (i.e.
T7JV /iV7J/A7)l/ OVCTO.V 6.06.VQ.TOv), 1.9,3; TTOMX TOVS Mj^SoVJ &fr9tVtli,
he makes the Medes (to be) weak. Every adjective which is not attributive is classed as a predicate.
A predicate adjective is often known by its position with respect to the article; see 971, and the examples.
920. N. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons may take a plural participle; as Tpoc'av fXovrts 'Apytiuiv oroAo?, the Argives' army having taken Troy, A. Ag. 577.
921. N. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the grammatical gender of a. noun denoting a person; as <£iXe tIkvov, dear child! iZ.22,84.
|
202 |
202 SYNTAX. [922
922. N. Avo, two, is often used with a plural noun; as cvpoi Svo irkidpwv (1085, 5), of two plelhra in breadth, X. AA,2™.
923. N. An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns generally agrees with the nearest or the most prominent one, and is understood with the rest; as tov kuAov xa.ya.9ov avSpa kthe honorable man and woman, P. (7.470'; ttuvtI ko.1 Adyu> nal /xij^ovij1, by every word and device.
924. N. (a) A predicate, adjective (like a verb, 901) is regularly plural if it belongs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two. If the nouns are of different genders, tlie adjective is commonly masculine if one of the nouns denotes a male person, and commonly neuter if all denote things. Thus, eT8t ■naripa re Kut fxrjrepa /cut dSiX
(b) But it sometimes follows both the gender and number of the nearest or most prominent noun; as irp6ppL^o<; auros, r] yvvrj, tu TratSt'a, kiIkutt' avoolfJLr]v, may I perish most wretchedly root and branch, myself, mi/ wife, my children, Ar. W.")S7.
925. N. A masculine or feminine noun in the singular, denoting si class rather than an individual, may have a neuter predicate adjective, which is used as a noun; as xav 17 dA^&ia, a beautiful thing is truth, P. Ly. CiG'.l"; aOdvarov dpa rj i/'i'X1?' Js l?le sou^ Oten immortal (an immortal thing)? I'.Ph. 105°.
926. N. A predicate adjective is sometimes used where we should use an adverb or adverbial pi 1 rase; as (kovtc; yXOov, they came willingly; opxios St aoi Atyw, 1 say it to you on my oath, S. A n. •'i0-ri; TTfiuiTO<; S' i£(.piuvc Ntarcop, and first, Nestor inquired, Jl.]0,o4!i. There is often, however, a great distinction between the adjective and the adverb; as irpiros avroi": tISov, I was the first to SfiP thnn ; nptjjr ovs aiVov? flSov, they were the Jirzt whom I saw; irpwroy (adv.) avrovi iZSov, first (o( all that I die!) 1 saw them.
ADJECTIVES BELONGING TO THE OMITTED SUBJECT OF AN INFINITIVE.
927. When the subject of an infinitive is omitted because it is tlie same as the subject nominative of the leading verb (895, 2), adjective words and nouns which would agree
|
203 |
928] OMITTED SUBJECT OF AN INFINITIVE. 203
with the omitted subject are assimilated to the preceding nominative. E.g.
BouXerai <70
928. But when the subject of an infinitive is omitted because it is the same as the object or other adjunct (895, 3) of the leading verb, —
1. If this adjunct is a dative, adjective words and nouns may either be assimilated to the dative, or stand in the accusative in agreement with the omitted subject of the infinitive. E.g.
IlpfVti
2. If the adjunct is a genitive, predicate adjectives are generally assimilated to it; but other adjective words and all nouns stand in the. accusative. E.g.
Kupou tStoiro ws 7rpo6vp.OTa.T0v yivL
|
204 |
204 SYNTAX. [929
929. Words in the construction of 928 •which refer to a preceding accusative are of course in the accusative; as dAAovs 7ror«Ka arvfj.fjiaOrjTai'; fwi
930. N. The principles of 927 and 928 apply also to a predicate with <* id="iv.i.p6984.1">v or with the participle of a copulative verb; as rj&tvav ao
931. N. When an infinitive depends on a participle which supplies its omitted subject, predicate words take the case of the participle; as rjK&ov iwi Tiva ruiv BoKOVvrtav tlvai (ro
ADJECTIVE USED AS A NOUN.
932. 1. An adjective or participle, generally with the article, may bo used as a noun. E.g.
'O oYkcuos, the just man; 6 t'^pos, the enemy;
2. In some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; as rrj vo-rcpaia (sc. Tjfiipa.), on the next day; rj St^id (sc. X^P)' ^ie rl9^lt- hand; 17 tideia (sc. 680?), the straight road; o aKparos (sc. otyos), unmixed wine; rrjv id.vr£>v (sc. yijv), into their own land.
933. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is often used as an abstract noun; as to koXoV, beauty
(= KaAXos), to SiKaiov, justice (= Sikcuoo-wi;).
934. N. The pavticiple, which is a verbal adjective, is occasionally thus used for the infinitive, which is a verbal noun; as to SeSios,/e«r (=to Se8t«Vai), T.I,36; cV tcu fir; (jlcXctCivtl, in the want of practice (in the not practising) (= iv tu> firj (icktrav), T. 1,142. So in Latin, opus est maturato, there is need of haste.
THE ARTICLE.
HOMTSRIC USE OF THE ARTICLE.
935. In Homer the article appears generally as a demon-
|
205 |
939] HOMERIC USE OF TIIE ARTICLE. 205
strative or personal pronoun; sometimes (in the forms beginning with t) as a relative. E.g.
Tjji> 8' tyoi oi Aixro), but I will not free her, 11.1,29; tov Si kAix 4>oi/itos 'A-wokXiuv, and Phoebus Apollo heard him, II. 1,43; 6 yap r)6i 6oas (ttl vrja<; 'A^aiaii', for he came to the swift ships of the Achaeans, //. 1,12. As relative, irvpa. iroXXa to. kolUto, many fires which were burning, 11.10,12; Swpa ra oi £eiv(K Swift, gifts which a stranger gave him, Od. 21,13.
936. N. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as nouns (932, 1) have the article, as in Attic Greek; as ol yap apurroi iv vnvo-lv Ktarat, for the bravest sit by the ships, II. 11,658; oi dAAot, the others; to. t' torra ra r icrcro/jLtva, both things that are and things that are to be, II. 1,70.
937. 1. When the article is used with nouns in Homer, it is generally a pronoun (especially 6 St), with which the noun is in apposition; as 6 S' (/Spa^e ^oXkcoj 'Aprji, and he, brazen Ares, roared, 11.5,859 ; rj 8' atKovcr afia toicti yvvrj kuv, and she, the woman, went with them unwilling, 11.1,348.
2. Nearer the Attic use of the article, are examples like these: avrtxp 6 roicrt yipwv b&bv ^ye/xovf-vtv, but he, the old man, showed them the way, Od. 24,22o; tov 8" olov irurtp' ivpov, and they found him, the father, alone, ib. 220.
3. Hardly, if at all, to be distinguished from the Attic article is that found in examples like these : ore Srj ttjv vqcrov a&KOfxtO', when now we came to the island, Od. 9,543; to re cr&Vos 'ftpiWos, and the might of Orion, II. 18,480 ; al St -ywcuKe? tcrra/iitwat Oav/M^oy, and the women stood and wondered, II. 18,495.
4. It is, therefore, often difficult to decide the exact force of an article in early Greek. The above examples show a gradual transition, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true definite article.
938. N. The examples in 937, 3, are exceptional; and in such cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in Latin. Thus Scivt; St Kkayyt) yivtT apyvpioio ftidio, and terrible came the clang from the silver bow, II. 1,49, would in Attic Greek require r/ KAayyij and tov jiiov.
939. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article beginning with t in the place of the ordinary relative, — of which he uses only the forms os, 17, oi, and a", except after prepositions. Thus aAAos opvis Ipos, tw ovvofM <&olvi4, another sacred bird, whose name is Phoenix, 2, 73. In other respects, he uses the article as it is used in Attic prose.
|
206 |
206 SYNTAX, [940
940. N. The lyi-ic poets follow the Homeric usage with respect to the article more closely than Herodotus; and the tragic poets, especially in the lyric chorus, admit the Homeric use of the article as a relative or a personal pronoun.
ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE.
941. In Attic Greek the article generally corresponds to our article the; as 6 dv>'ip, the man-; tcov TroXecov, of the citiex; toi? "EWtjctiv, to the Greeks; to. 8e>ca er>?, the (well known) ten years (at Troy), T. 1,11.
942. The Greek may use the article in certain cases in which the English omits it. Such are the following (943-951): —
943. Proper names may take the article; as 6 luKpar-q': or 2u)Kpax)j9, Socrates.
944. Abstract nouns often take the. article; as rj iptrrj. virtue, ij 8ik
945. 1. Xoutis qualified by a demonstrative pronoun regularly take; the article; as outo? <-'• avr/p, this mun; iv raiirSi rats iroXtaiv, in these cities. (For the position, see 974.)
2. JSnt this article may be omitted with proper names, as ovtos Ntoji ToAe/iO?, this Neoptolemus, D. 18,114; also where the demonstrative is equivalent to here or there, us opw/xcv oAt-youi toi'tous avdphmovs, v-e see few men here, X. /1.4,75; so ovrocrl avtjp, this man here, and outo? avrip used contemptuously; see also vrj^ ixuvai iirarXtovm, ships are sailing up yonder, T. 1,51.
3. The tragedians often omit this article with demonstratives.
946. 1. Nouns with a possessive pronoun take the article when they refer to definite, individuals, but not otherwise; as o «>os irarrip, my father, 6
2. So also with nouns on which a possessive genitive of a personal, demonstrative, or reflexive pronoun depends; as 6 irar-qp p.ov, my father; o ifaavrov Trarrjp, my own father; 6 tovtwv Trarrjp, their father ; y tavroiv yrj, their own land. But 7r«?s eavrov, a child of his own.
947. Toiovtos, ToaoCros, roiocrSt, Toaocr&e. and ttjXikovtos may take the article; as tov toiovtov avtipa, such a man. It is always used with Suva, such a one (420).
|
207 |
954] ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 207
948. A numeral may have the article, (a) to distinguish a part of a number; (b) to express a round number, especially with a/x
949. The article is often used, where we use a possessive pronoun, to mark something as belonging to a person or thing mentioned in the sentence; as?px*Tal o-vn) T€ 17 Mav&dvn 7rpos tov irartpa xai toi' Kvpov ■ 6v viov t^oucra, Mandane comes to her father (lit. to the father) herself, and with her son Cyrus, X. C. 1,3'.
950. The article may have a generic force, marking' an object as the representative of a class; as 6 ui/tfpwros, man (in general); oi ylpovTi<;, the aged (as a class).
951. The article sometimes has a distributive force, where we. should use each or a; as v7no~)(y<.'lTai hwcrtiv rpla rjfjj.8apet.Ka. tov p.rjvo'; ™ crrpixTuoTrj, he promises to give three half-darics a mouth to each soldier, X.A.l,'6v.
952. 1. An adverb, a preposition with its case, or any similar expression, may be used with the article to qualify a noun, like an attributive adjective; as ol totc avOponroi, the men of that time; rox> irdkui KuS/iou, of ancient Cadmus, S. O.T. 1 ; 01 cV iJuto 'AOrjvaloi., the Athenians in the city.
2. Here a noun denoting men or things is often omiiU'd ; as 01 iv derm, those in the city ; tois totc, to those of that time; ol aft l Md-tcwu, those about Plato (generally Plain and his school, or simply Pluto).
953. The nouns yq, land, vpdy/xaTa, things or affairs, tuds, son, and .sometimes other nouns which are readily suggested by the context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjective or genitive is added ; as cl<; ryv iavTwy (so. yrjv), to their own land; £k t)/s TrtpioiKiSos, from the neighboring country; to. t^s no-Xtifi'i, the affairs of the stale ; ra tuJk woAe/iiW, what belongs to the enemy; ITtpiKA^ 6 SMShnrov (sc. vlik), Pericles, the son of Xan-thippus; t^i/ rn)(icrTr)v (sc. 68ov), the quickest way. Expressions like ra (or to) t^s Ti^s, Ta t^s opy^s, with no definite nouns understood, sometimes do not differ from Ti'x>?, Fortune, and vpyyj, wrath.
954. Instead of repeating a noun with new adjuncts in the same bentence, it may be sufficient to repeat i!s article; as 01 twc ttoitu>v 7rai8ts Kai ol twv dXAiov, the children of the citizens and those of the others.
|
208 |
208 SYNTAX. [865
955. 1. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (1010), may take? neuter article; as to ctScVai, the knowing;
2. In like manner, a neuter article may precede a whole clause considered as a noun; as to yvu)6i o-avrov iravra^ov 'an xprj
956. A predicate noun or adjective seldom has the article; as vvt; ij finiprj iyive.ro, the day became night, Hd. 1,103; koXiitcu. rj aKpoTToXis en vk 'KOr^vaiuiv 7ro'Ats, the citadel is still called " city " by the Athenians, T. 2, lo. So when it has a possessive pronoun; as oJtos ifjuis «Taipos i^v, he was my companion, V. Ap. 21*.
Hut when the predicate refers definitely to distinct persons or things, it may have the article; as dal b" ovtoi ol ciSoVts toXt;^; and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ? P. H. AI.284*.
957. N. Bao-tAtu? is generally used without the article to designate the king of Persia; as rourous airoirf/jLTrti. /3ao-iA.ft, he sends these to the King, T. 1,128. But the article is sometimes found: compare 1.4,166 and 179. So sometimes /xcyas /3ao-(.A.cik ; as f*
958. N. The article is often omitted in some familiar expressions of time and place, which are probably older than the Attic use of the article; as ajun ?< id="iv.i.p7036.1">), at daybreak; wkto's, by night; apo. rjpi, at the opening of spring; iv ayopa, in the market-place; ko.t' aypov, in the country; Kara yrjv, by land; Kara GaXao-trav, by sea ; ix Sepias- from the right; etc.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.
959. {Attributive Position.') 1. An attributive adjective which qualifies a noun with the article commonly stands between the article and the noun; as 6
2. The noun with the article may be followed by the adjective with the article repeated. The first article is sometimes omitted. In these cases the noun has greater emphasis than in the preceding form (1). U.g.
"O avrjp o crowds, sometimes iv)]p 6 O"O<£o's, the wise man (but not 6 ayqp co<^)ds, see 971); ai ttoAcis
|
209 |
900] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 209
960. This applies to possessive pronouns and all expressions ■which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are preceded by the article (052, 1), and to dependent genitives (except partitives and the genitive of the personal pronoun); as 6 t'/xos varrip, my father; r/ o-rj p-ii}Ti)p, thy mother; 6 ifMVTOv irarijp, my own father (but 6 iruTi^p fj.ov, my father, see 977); ot iv ao-ru av&piairoi or oi avSpuivoi ol tv turret, the men in the city; o£8fis tu>v totc 'EAAi?-viev, none of the Greeks of that time, to t<2 ovtl fii8o<;, the real falsehood;
961. N. Two or even three articles may thus stand together; as to. yap ttjs twv noXkw i/'uX'?5 Ofxp-ara, the eyes of the soul of the mullitwte, P. So. 254».
962. An adjective in either of these positions will) reference to the article (959) is said to be in the attributive position, as opposed to the predicate position (see 971).
963. N. Of the three attributive positions, the first (e.g. 6 aoc^os avffp) is the most common and the most simple and natural; the second (6 dvijp 6 aoc^d?) is the most formal; the third (avrjp 6
964. N. The article at the beginning of a clause may be separated from its noun by fi.iv, he, tc, ye, yap, &rj, ovv, and by tis in Herodotus.
965. The partitive genitive (1088) rarely stands in either of the attributive positions (9C2), but either precedes or follows the governing noun and its article; as ol Kaxol twv voXitHjv, or tow 7toXitu)v ol Kaxoi, the bad among the citizens (rarely oi T.dv voltH>v kukoi).
Even the other forms of the adnominal genitive occasionally have this position, as Srbv oXc&pov tS>v o~vcTpariuiToiv opy^d/xti/ot, angered by the death of their fellow soldiers, X.^4.1,220.
966. I. 'O aAAos in the singular generally means the rest, seldom the other; oi aXAoi means the others: as r/ aWrj irdAis, the rest of the stale (but dAAij ird/Us, another state); ol iXXoi 'EAA^ves, the other Greeks.
2. Both 6 aXAoy and aAXos (rarely tTtpos) may have the meaning of besides; as «£&u/ion£d/xtvos vvo tCiv ttoXituiv koi twv a.Wo)v £(V(ov, congratulated by the citizens and the foreigners besides, P.(7.473C; ov yap rjv xopTo<; ovhi a\o oi'Sev fitVSpoi', for there was no grass, neither any tree (lit. nor any other tree), X. AA.oK
|
210 |
210 SYNTAX. [9fl7
967. N. UoXik with the article generally (though not always) means the greater port, especially in ol -rroXXot, the multitude, the majority, and to ttoXv, the greater part. So ol ■n-Xcuwc;, the majority, to-nXtiov, the greater part,
968. N. When a noun lias two or more qualifying words, each of them may take an article and .stand in either attributive position (050), or all may stand between one article and its noun; a.s Kara rrjv Attiki/v rrjv miXaiav cfxDvrjv, according to the old Attic dialect, V.('rut.M8d; to. rci^r) Ta Zuvtwv to paxpi, their own long Kails, T. 1,108; TTifxTroi'Tfi tls Tas dAAns "ApKaSixas voXus, sending to the other A rcadian cities, X. H. 7, 43I!; rrjv vir 'Apcrijs 'HpaxXt'ous ttcu'Scv-(xlv, the instruction of Hercules hy Virtue, X.^I/.L'.)3*. Occasionally one stands between tlie article and (lie noun, wliilu anotlinr follows the noun without an article; as ol otto tHiv iv rtj *A
969. N. When an attributive participle (i)Hi) with dependent words qualifies a noun with tlie article, cither the participle or the dependent words may follow the noun; a.s rbv piovra Trorafiov &ia T)js irdAtois, the river which runs through the city, X.//. 5, 24; rov c<£eo"T7)KOTa KivSvvov rrj troXci, the danger impending over the city, ]).18,170; ij Iv tiZ 'irjOfj-m imfaovi). ytvofj.(vq, the delay winch occurred at the Isthmus, T.2, IS. liut Kuch expressions may also lake either of the attributive positions (1*50, 1 or 2).
970. N. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, tov Ei>-
971. (Predicate Position.') When an adjective either precedes the article, or follows the noun without Inking an article, it is always a predicate adjective (see 919). E.g.
'O avrjp (ro ti/^ci? KCKTij^cBa, we possess our fortunes fur a duy (sc. ovaa%), Gnom.
972. N. The predicate force of such adjectives must often be expressed by a periphrasis; as irnji'iii? SioWt? tois tXirtSas, the hopes you are pursuing are winged, lit. you are pursuing hopes (being) winged, E. frag.273; yyovfi-ivoi avrovofj-tav tQiv $v/xfjiax<^v, being leaders of allies who were independent, T. 1,07; ipiXgv f^uv Ttjv K«f>txXijv, having his head hare, X.yl. 1, 8". So ttooov aya to ut/dcu tcv/mi ; how great is the army he is bringing ?
|
211 |
079] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 211
973. The position of such an adjective (971) with reference to the article is called the predicate position.
974. A noun qualified by a demonstrative pronoun regularly takes the. article, and the pronoun stands in the predicate position (971). E.g.
0£>to5 o avTjp, this man, or 6 avqp ouros (never 6 oJtos avr/p). ilipl tovtuiv rw jrdA.etui', about these cities. (See 1)45, 1-3.)
975.. N. Hut if an adjoetive or other qualifying word is added, the demonstrative may stand between this and its noun; as r) arcvyj O.VT7] 0805, this narrow roail, X..4.4,26; t<3 afjuKOfxivio tovtw ftVw, to this stranger who has come, V.Pr.'6Ulb. (See 977, 2.)
976. N. "Endo-ros, €K
977. 1. A dependent genitive of the personal pronoun (whether partitive or not) has the predicate position (971), while (.hat of other pronouns (unless it is partitive) lias the first attributive position (i),')9, 1); as rj/xQiv i tcJAi? or ij toXis i/^oii/, < id="iv.i.p7065.1">w city (not 1) t]fj.uiv Tro'Atij); rj tovtiov ttoAi?, these men's city (not r] iroAi? tou'-tuiv); /j-iTfirt/jLipuTO 'A
2. Hut if a qualifying word is added, the persona) pronoun may stand between this and the noun; as rj SoKowa ij/xdy -xpoTtpov auxjipoavvr], what previously seemed to be our modesty, T. 1,32. (See 975.)
978. 1. The adjectives aKpos, /xtVos, and to^ai-os, when they are in the predicate position (971), mean the top (or extremity), the middle, the lust, of the thing which their nouns denote; as »; ayopa /i«'o-)j or /xivq y] ayopd, the middle of the market (while ij p-iot] ayopa. would mean the middle market) ; a«pa 1) xct'p> ''ie extremity of the hand.
2. When no article is used, as in the older poetry, the context inu.^t decide the meaning. Compare summits, medius, extrcmus, and ultimus in Latin.
979. Ua<; and uufxTras, all, and oAos, whole, generally have the predicate position; as tto.vt(.<; ot dv8pe<; or ol avSpcs irair<5, all the men; 0A.7) ij voXis or rj ttoXh; o j, all the city. Hut they can also be used like attributive adjectives, preceded by the article; as r irdcra Sc/ccAi'a, the whole of Sicily, to b'kov ylvos, the entire race.
|
212 |
212 SYNTAX. [980
The distinction here was probably no greater than that between all the city and the whole city in English. We find even 01 7ravT«s avOpunroi, all mankind, X. A. 5, C.
980. Avtos as an intensive pronoun, ipse (989, 1), has the predicate position; as euros o dvrjp, the man himself. But 6 avros avrjp, the same man (989, 2).
PRONOMINAL ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK.
981. In Attic prose the article retains its original demonstrative force chiefly in the expression o /xev . . . 6 Be, the one . . . the other.1 E.g.
Ol jxcv airruiv
982. N. The neuter to p.iv . . . to Be may be used adverbially, partly . . . partly. For tovto p.iv . . . tovto hi in this sense, see 1010.
983. N. (a) 'O St etc. sometimes mean and he, but he, etc., even when no 6 /xev precedes; as "Ivdpoi? 'AOyvaiow; enrjyaytTO' ol Si rj9ov, Inaros called in Athenians; and they cume, T. 1,10-1.
(b) With prepositions these expressions are generally inverted; as iroWa. piy . . . tv St tois, P. Eu. Wi*; Trapa piv toC $va, Trapa hi tov o-t&r}po$, X. Up. A. 2,11.
984. A few-other relics of the demonstrative meaning of the article are found in Attic, chiefly the following: —
Toy ko.1 tov, this man and that; to kcli to', this and that; to. ko.1 to., these and those; as thu yap to Kat to 7roi7Jo"cu, k
Tip< id="iv.i.p7081.1"> tov (or wpoTov), before this, formerly.
Kai tov or kui Tqv, before an infinitive; as kcu. tov KiXcvcrai hovvai (sc. X(ytTai), and (it is said) he commanded hiin to give it, X. C.1,39.
So occasionally ™, therefore, which is common in Homer.
1 In this use, and in other pronominal uses of the article (as in Homer), the forms 6, 19, oi, and ai were probably oxytone (6, ri, o'i, oi'). They are printed here without accents in conformity with the prevailing usage in school editions of Greek authors. See 130.
|
213 |
»89J PEKSONAL AND INTENSIVE PKONOUNS. 213
PRONOUNS. PEKSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS.
985. The nominatives of the personal pronouns are seldom used, except for emphasis. (See 8^)d.)
986. The forms cfiov, i/xol, and t/ii are more eui;:>hatie than the enclitics /xov, /jlol, /it. The latter seldom occur after prepositions, except in 7rpos fit.
987. Of the personal pronouns of the third person, ou, ol, etc. (389), only ol and the plural forms in a
"E(£av on Trifuf/cu ff^Ss 6 'ivSw /JaeriAci'?, they said that the king of the Indians had sent them, X. C.2,47. 'Eirptaflcvoi'TO fyKA.17-funa Troiovfitvoi, owo)? cr^tcriv on fuyiarr] 7rpo<£u(us e'lr] rov ttoi-fj.uv, they sent embassies, making charges, that they might have the strongest possible ground for war, T. 1,126. "EvravOa Xiyirai 'Atto'A-
For the restricted use of these pronouns in Attic Greek, see also 392.
988. In Homer and Herodotus, and when they occur in the Attic poets, all these pronouns are generally personal pronouns, though sometimes (direct or indirect) reflexives. Kg.
Ek yip o~
989. AirroV has three uses: —
1. In all its cases it may be an intensive adjective pronoun, himself, herself, itself, themselves (like ipse). E.g.
|
214 |
214 SYNTAX. [090
Avtoi 6 (TTpaTTjyos, the general himself; eir' avrols tois alyia-Aois, on the very coasts, T. 1,7; (7naTijfj.rj aiirij, knowledge itself.
2. Autos in all its cases, when preceded by the article, means the same (idcni). E.g.
'O airos a.vf)p, the same, man; rov alruv noXtjxov, the same war; Tavru., the same things (4-).
3. The oblique cases of avrus' fire the ordinary personal pronouns of the third person, him, her, it, them. E.g.
^TpaTijyov avrov aircSu^c, he designated him as general. See four other examples in X./l. 1,1,2&3.
It will be noticed that the nominative of avros is never a personal pronoun.
For (,
990. N. A pronoun with wliioli avrcx; intensive agrees is often omitted ; as tuvto. IttouItc avroC (sc. v/icr?), you did this yourselves; Tr v(TTiOv
991. N. Avrck with un ordinal numeral (-372) may designate a person as the chief of a given number; as ypeOi/ npccr/iivTrj's 8«/
992. N. The oblique cases of uvro? are often used where the indirect reflexives (M7) might stand, and sometimes even when: the direct reflexives (flii'i) would be allowed; as aVAdi? Wjr euurou yvwfJLrjv dirt
RKKLIlXIYE PRONOUNS.
993. The reflexive pronouns (401) refer to the subject of the clause in which they stand. Sometimes in a dependent clause they refer to the subject of the leading ■verb, — that is, they are indirect reflexives (987). E.g.
Tvoi&i (raiiriiv, know th'isilf; ivi
|
215 |
1001) POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 215
them, X. C. 3, !i<0. "Ettimtiv 'AOr/vaiov^ iavrbv Kardyuv, he persuaded the Athenians to restore him (from exile), T. 1, 111.
994. N. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word which is neither the leading nor a dependent subject; sis awb (javrov 'y at SiSa£a>, 1 mill teach you from your own case {from yourself), Ar. JV.38f>. In fact, these pronouns correspond almost exactly in their use to the English reflexives, myself, thyself, himself etc.
995. N. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for the first or second; as 8«i rjfjui^ ipeaOat (uutou's, we must ask ourselves, P. Pit. 78b.
996. N. The reflexive, is sometimes used for the reciprocal (40-1); rjiMtv avTol': SwAI^o'/xc&i, we will discourse with one another (i.e. among ourselves), D.4S, G.
997. N. A reflexive may be strengthened by a preceding oiVos; as oid? T£ avTos avru jio-q&iiv, able (himself) to help himself, P. 6'.48o''. To yiyvuhjkuv avrbv iavrov,for one (himself) to know himself, l'.ChAW:
For the personal pronouns ou, ol, etc. as direct and indirect reflexives, see 987 and 088.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
998. 1. The possessive jH-onouns (406) are generally equivalent to the possessive genitive (1085,1) of the personal pronouns. Thus o
For the article with possessives, see 0-10, 1.
2. For epos and crd? here the enclitic forms fiov (not c/xov) and aov may be used; rj/xuiv and v/xCiv for lj/acVfpos and vfifTipos are less frequent. These genitives have the predicate position as regards the article (9"j)-
999. The possessive is occasionally equivalent, to the ohferlive genitive of the personal pronoun ; as rj ifiyj cvvoia, which commonly means my good-will (towards others), rarely means yood-uiill (shown) to me; as tivola yap epu rrj ay, for 1 shall speak out of good-will to you, P. (?.48iia ' (See 1OS5,'.'3.) '
1000. N. 2their, and (poetic) os, his, her, its, are regularly (directly or indirectly) reflexive.
1001. N. An adjective or an appo.sit.ive in the genitive may refer to the genitive implied in a possessive; as tol/xo. o'vvttJvov
|
216 |
216 SYNTAX. [1002
the woes of me, unhappy one, S. 0. C. 344; ttjv vntrlpav rwf
1002. N. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive genitive, the words my father can be expressed in Greek in five forms: 6 ifWi iraT-rjp, 6 iraTrjp 6 f'/xos, iraTtjp 6 ip-6$, 6 narrjp /xou, and (after another word) fu>v o iraTi/p (as t
1003. N. (a) Our own, your own (plural), and their own are generally expressed by rifxiripoi, v/if're/jo?, and
(6) Expressions like tov ifiby avrov traripa for tov (fxavrov ■miTtpa, etc., with singular possessives, are poetic. In prose the genitive of the reflexive ((fxavrov, aeavTOv, or tavrov), in the attributive position (959), is the regular form; as ixtTtvifuparo t^» iavTOv OvyarifKL, he sent for his {own') daughter, X. C. 1,3'.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
1004. Outo? and 6'oV, this, generally refer to what is near in place, time, or thought; eKelvo<;, that, refers to what is more remote.
1005. N. ,The distinction between ovtos and oSe, both of which correspond to our this, muat be learned by practice. In the historians, owtos (with toioCtos, toctovtos, and ovto>s) frequently refers to a speech just made, while oSe (with ToiocrSt, roawSf, and
1006. N. Ouro? is sometimes exclamatory, as outos, rl Trotcis; You there ■' what are you doing f A. R. 198.
1007. X. The Greek has no word exactly corresponding to the unernphatic demonstrative which is often used in English as the antecedent of a relative, as 1 saw those who were present. Here a participle with the article i> generally used ; as tT8ov tous -rrapoiras;
|
217 |
101(5] INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 217
if a demonstrative is used (ctSov tovtovs ot vaprjcrav, I sate these men who were present), it has special emphasis (1030). A relative with omitted antecedent sometimes expresses the sense required; as eiSov ovs eafitv, I saw (those) whom he took (1020).
1008. N. The demonstratives, especially oSe, may call attention to the presence or approach of an object, in the sense of here or there; o8e -yap Sq jSuoiXcut x^pas, for ^ere now !S ^ie king of the land, S. An. 155; for vrje; CKcmu (T. 1,51) see 915, 2.
1009. N. Outos sometimes repeats a preceding description for emphasis in a single word; as 6 yap to o-rripfui 7rapacrx
1010. N. ToCto ixiv . . . tovto hi, first . . . secondly, partly . . . partly, is used nearly in the sense of to ixlv . ■ . to Si (082), especially by Herodotus.
For ovtokti, 68t, ixavoa-i, ovtumti, <* id="iv.i.p7141.1">8l, etc., see 412.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN.
1011. The interrogative ti'?; who? what? may be either substantive or adjective; as tiW? el&ov; ivhom did I see? or tiW? avSpat; elBov ; what men did I see?
1012. '17? may be used both in direct and in indirect questions; as r'i ftovXerai; what does he want? kp
1013. N. In indirect questions, however, the relative'Jans is more common ; as ipiara o n jiovkiadt (1000).
1014. N. The same principles apply to the pronominal adjectives irocros, 71-0109, etc. (420).
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
1015. 1. The indefinite ti (enclitic) generally means some, any, and may be either substantive- or adjective ; as toOto eyei ti?, some one says this; avQpwnos rt?, some man.
2. It is sometimes nearly equivalent to the English a or an ; as elhov dvOpco-rrov nva, I saw a certain man, or / saw a man.
1016. K. Tis sometimes implies that the word to which it is
|
218 |
218 SYNTAX. [1017
joined is not to be taken in its strict meaning; as avairifyavTai, he has been shown up as a sort of thief, 1'. /2/i. 334a; /it'yas Tts, rather large; TpuxxovTa. tikis d7r£KTtii/uv, they kilted some thirty, T. 8,73.
So with the adverbial ti(10C0); as (t^W n, very nearly, T. 3, Ii8.
1017. X. Occasionally ti« means everyone, like 7rds ns; as tv /ice us So'pu 6n£da6u>, let every one sharpen well his spear, //. 2,382.
1018. T. The neuter ti may me&n something important; as oloyrai ti ilvia, 6Vt£s oi8fi/6
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
1019. A relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and number; but its case depends on the construction of the clause in which it stands. E.g.
ElSoi' Tot's di'Spu? oi rjkOuv, 1 saw the men who came; ol avBp(< id="iv.i.p7158.1"> oil? cISes a-rrrjXOov, the men whom you saw went away.
1020. N. The relative follows the person of the antecedent; as v/j.el<; oi tovto Troiclre, you who do this; (yu id="iv.i.p7159.1"> us tovto (wo'irjaat I who did this.
1021. N. (a) A relative referring to several antecedents follows the rule given for predicate adjectives (924); as r-tpl 7roA«'/xou koI eifjrjvr)';, a /jLCy(<7Ti]i id="iv.i.p7160.1"> ia Swufiiv iv T(f fi>.<£ tlov av6i)i!)ir(ov, about war ami jifuce, whicli hare the greatest power in the life of men, 1.8,2; d7raKay,(VT€<: t miXt/jioip xal kwSpvwv km rapu^s, (Is yv vvv 7rpo? aAAi)Aous KiiOioTafxtv. freed from xcarx, dangers, and confusion, in which we are nine involved with one another, 1.8,20.
(b) '1 he relnliw mav lie plur.il if it, refers to .1 collective noun (9U0); as wArjOu oi7rep &ik
(c) On the other hand. <'irm<;, 4«w, mav have a plural antecedent; as TtaVTa ("> ti fjuvovT
1022. X. A neuter relative may refer to a masculine or feminine antecedent, denoting a tiling; as Sia rrjv Trkiovttiav, o Tracra ^)ucrts SiaJKtic Tri<^VKf.v, for f/ain, which every nature naturally follows, P. lip. 35
1023. 1. In Homer the forms of the relative are sometimes used as demonstrative pronouns, like the article (035) ; as o yap Sfu'rnTos r/k&ev, for he came second, Od. 1,280; o yap ytpas tori OavovTwv, for this is the right of the dead, 11.23,9.
|
219 |
1027] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 219
2. A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the Platonic 1) 8' os, said he (where rj is imperfect, of rjfii, say). So ko.1 os, and he, koX ol, and the!/, and (in Ildt.) os xal os, this man and that. (Compare tov kol tov, U84.) So also os /iiv . . . os hi, in the oblique cases, are occasionally used tor 6 fx«V . . . 6 8e; as wdXtts 'EWrjviBai, a s /xiv avaLpuiv, as as St toi>s
1024. N. (a) In the epic and lyric poets r< is often appended to relative words without affecting their meaning; as ovk di«s J t(
(i) But olos Te in Attic Greek means able, capable, like Swords, being originally elliptical for toioitos olos, such as, t< having no apparent force.
1025. (Preposition omitted.) When the relative and its antecedent would properly have the same preposition, it is usually expressed only with the antecedent; as d^o ttJs avrrji dyyoms fi
Omission ok the Antkckdknt.
1026. The antecedent of a relative may be omitted when it can easily be supplied from the context, especially if it is indefinite (1426). E.g.
*EAa/?tv a
1027. N. In such cases it is a mistake to say that, ravra, Ikuvol, etc., are understood; see 10-iO. The relative clause here really becomes a .substantive, and contains its antecedent within itself. Such a relative clause, as a substantive, may even have the article; as l^ovtra tyjv fTruivvtuav rr/v tov o Iotiv, having the name of the absolutely existent (of the "what is"), V. Ph.026; intivov opiytrai tov o Ivtiv laov, they aim at that absolute eqnality (at the "what is equal"), lii't/.7511; tu> oyxtKpw n-ipu, t1 *v uwiii, through the small part, which was shown lo be the ruling power within Mm (the "what ruled"), P. /tyi.442c. Here it must not be thought that, rov and Tw are antecedents, or pronouns at all.
|
220 |
220 SYNTAX. [1028
1028. N. Most relative adverbs regularly omit the antecedent; as rjXBtv ore toCto tTSev, he came when he saw this (for then, when).
1029. N. The following expressions belong here: — Iotiv o" (oV, o!s,.ous), some (905), more common than the regular ci
1030. N. When a clause containing a relative with omitted antecedent precedes the leading clause, the latter often contains a demonstrative referring back with emphasis to the omitted antecedent; as a ((iovktTo Tavra ikaftcv, what he wanted, that he took, entirely differen t from ravra a ifiovXtTo Ikafiiv, he took these (definite) things, which he wanted; a ttoiuv aior^pw, Tavra v6/xi£f /<«/S* Xiyuv tlvm kulXov, what it is base to do, this believe that it is not good even to say, 1.1,15 (here TuCra is not the antecedent of a, which is indefinite and is not expressed). See 1007.
Assimilation and Attraction.
1031. When a relative would naturally be in the accusative as the object of a verb, it is generally assimilated to the case of its antecedent if this is a genitive or dative. E.g.
'Ex tCiv w6X.eu>v wv ?x£'> from the cities which he holds (for as «Xe0 > T0's pya&HS ols *xofxtv, with the good things which we have (for a i^o/xcv). "A£tot t^? (kiv8tpia<; ^? KfKT-qvOe, worthy of the freedom which you have, X.^4.1,78; d tuI rjyiixovi. 7ri<7f
1032. N. When an antecedent is omitted which (if expressed) would have been a genitive or dative, the assimilation still takes place; and a preposition which would have belonged to the antecedent passes over to the relative; as iSykuxre tovto ols tjrparre, he showed this by what he did (like ckcivois a) ; ow ol? /xaAiora
gained at Leuctra (to?v cvrv^/jaciv a ivrvxyKtaav, see 1054), D.18,18.
|
221 |
1038] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 221
1033. N. A relative is seldom assimilated from any other construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions occur; a3 Trap' dv jior}Btl<; ovk awoXijipa dpiv, Vou W*U 9ei "° thanks from those whom (Trap' tKiivinv oh) you help, Aesch.2,117. Even the nominative may be assimilated; as fiXdirrco-Bai a
1034. N. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs; as SuKOfit^ovTO ivOvs o8tv vwt£c&cvTO iratSus koX ■ywaiKas, they immediately brought over their children and women from the places in which they had placed them for safety (where o8tv, from which, stands for iiceZOiv ol, from the places whither), T. 1,80.
1035. N. The antecedent occasionally is assimilated to the case of the relative, when this immediately follows; as IXiyov on ■navruiv iav 8/oiTut irt7rpayoT«5 dtv, they said that they had done all things which {vavra wv) they needed, X.H.I,4". Trjy ovaiav rjv KaTiXmt ov TrAtibfo? afi'a iarlv 19 TiTrdpuv ko.1 SeVa TaXdvrwv, the estate which he left is not worth viore than fourteen lalents, L. 19,47. Compare urban quam statuo vestra est, Verg. A en. 1,573. Sucli expressions involve an anacolulhon.
This inverted assimilation takes place in ovStis oo"rt? ov, everybody, in ■which ouSti's follows the case of the relative; as ou&e'vi otiii ovk a.TrOKpiv6fjL(vo<; (for oiSct's Io-tw oto>), replying to everybody, i Men. 70'.
1036. N. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions with o'o?; as xaptfo/icvoi/ o"a> croi avh'pi, pleasing a man like you (for roiovrw 0T05 cri'), X.^/.2,'J3; Trpbs avhpa.'; TofJ.r]poi$ oiovs Kal 'AOrjvaiov;, against bold men like the Athenians, T.7,21.
1037. The antecedent is often attracted into the relative clause, and agrees with the relative. E.g.
Mi; a
The subject of a verb is rarely thus attracted; as ot^fat
1038. N. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (1031); as ifiadetTTaToi tart
|
222 |
222 SYNTAX. [1039
ignorant of the Greeks whom I know (for Tuii> 'EiXk-qvuv ous oT8u), T. 6,40; i£ rji to Trpuirov t
Relative in Exclamations.
1039. O'o?, o(to!, and a* are used in exclamations; as oua irpdyfiara txtl!> h°w Mitch trouble you have! X.C.I,A*; <
Relative not nr.i'EATKi).
1040. A relative is seldom repeated in a new case in the same sentence, but a personal or demonstrative pronoun commonly takes its place. E.g.
'EkiIvoi toivvv, ot? ovk ix
1041. N. Sometimes, however, a new case of the relative is understood in the latter part of a sentence; as 'Aptuio? St, oV rjfx.(l<: riOtXofjxv /?ao"iXf'a Ka.6i.o-Ta.vui, ku.1 t'Saixa/u;' xai (dfiofj.t.v miTrd, and Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, and (to whom) we gave and (from whom) we received pledges, etc., X. A.3,2G.
THE CASES.
1042. The Greek is descended from a language which had eight cases, — an (Motive, a locative, and an instrumental, besides the five found in Greek. The functions of the ablative were absorbed chiefly by the genitive, partly by the dulive; those of the instrumental and locative chiefly by the dative.
NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE.
1043. The nominative is usod cliieily as the subject of a finite verb (894), or in the predicate after verbs signifying to be, etc. (907).
1044. The vocative, with or without w, is used in addressing a person or tiling; as « avbpes'AOvi'aiot, men of Athens! a/coveis, Alayun;; dost thou hear, Aesehines?
|
223 |
J051] ACCUSATIVE. 223
1045. N. The nominative is sometimes used in exclamations, and even in other expressions, where the voeative is more cpin-lnon; as to/xot. iyw SttAik, 0 wretched me! So t) IlpoKvrj tic/Saivi, Procnc, come out.' Ar. Av.ou°5.
ACCUSATIVE.
1046. The primary purpose of the accusative is to denote the nearer or direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or indirect object denoted by the dative (892). It thus bears the same relation to a verb which the objective genitive (10S5, 3) bears to a noun. The object denoted by the accusative may be the external object of the action of a transitive verb, or the internal (cognate) object which is often implied in the meaning of even an intransitive verb. But tile accusative has also assumed other functions, as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other single category.
ACCUSATIVE OK D1KKCT (EXTERNAL) OBJECT.
1047. The direct object of the action of a transitive verb is put in the accusative; as tovto o-wfet ^a?, this prcsenes us; Tavia TTOLuufj-tv, we do these thhiys.
1048. N. Many verbs which an; transitive in English, and govern the objective case, take either a genitive or a dative in Greek. (See 10U!); 1100 ;■ 118:3.)
1049. N. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransitive in English; a.s 6fj.ovjj.ai. tous &ov?, / will sweur by the Gotb, ttu.vt
1050. N. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally t;tke an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive (1142; 10S0, :',), a.-, cmaTi'/fj.uffi yj
COGNATE ACCUSATIVE (INTERNAL OBJECT).
1051. Any vim-1) whose meaning permits it may take an accusative of kindred signification. This accusative
|
224 |
224 SYNTAX. [1052
repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may follow inti'ansitive as well as transitive verbs. E.g.
IIcutos ^Sovas rjhca-Oai, to enjoy all pleasures, P. Phil. 63*. Evnjx^cai/ tovto to t vTv
]fia, they enjoyed this good fortune, X.A6,39. So ttujuv n-Tw/xara, to suffer (to fall) falls, A.Pr.919. Noow vocrclv or voaov aaOiviiv ov yoVoy Ka/xvuv, to suffer under a disease; dfuipTrjfjux dfi/ipT&vuv, to commit an error {to ain a sin); SovXtuiv BovXivuv, to be subject to slavery; ap
jv ap iv, to hold an office; iyuiva 6.y
1052. N. It will be seen that this construction is far more extensive in Greek than in English. It includes not only accusatives of kindred formation and meaning', as vUrjv viw, to gain a victory; but also those of merely kindred meaning, as iM-qv wkSv, to gain a battle. The accusative may also limit the meaning of the verb to one of many applications; as 'OAij/xttiu vikolv, to gain an Olympic victory, T. 1,12(5; icrriav yd/uous, to give a wedding feast, At. Av. 132; <^)}<^io"/ia vucrjT, he curries a decree (gains a victory with a decree), Aesch.3,68; fiorj&poiita. irt/A/irtiv, to celebrate the Baedromia by a procession, ]). 3,31. So also (in poetry) fickLvuv (or iXOtiv) iroSa, to step {the foot): see EMM 153.
. For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive verb, see 1240..
1053. The cognate accusative may follow adjectives or even nouns. E.g.
KaKOi TTosrav no.klav, bad with all badness, P. Rp. 400d; SoCAos Ta? /nfyioras SovWas, a slave to the direst slavery, i'i/j.579d.
1054. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate accusative, its uouu being implied in the verb. E.g.
MtyaXa afuxpTixvuv (sc. dixapTijfMTo.), to commit great faults; Tavra. XvTttiaOai ku.1 ravTa xaiptiv, to have the same griefs and the same joys, D. 18,202. So ri yp-r)aoxjxi tovtu>; (= tiVu ^peuxv Xprjaofiiu;), what use shall 1 make of this ? and ouSti/ xprjao/jxii tovtu, / shall make no use of this (1183). So ^pijut/ios ovScV, good for nothing (1053). See 1060.
1055. 1. Here belongs the accusative of effect, which
|
225 |
1050] ACCUSATIVE. 225
expresses a result beyond the action of the verb, which is effected by that action. E.g.
npeo-ftivciv Tt)v clp-jvnv, to negotiate a peace (as ambassadors, ■xpiaj$ti<;), 1). 10, 134; but irpecrficuav Trptaficiav, to go on an embassy. Compare the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a stick.
2. So after verbs of look-ing (in poetry); as'Apij ScSoptcevai, to look war (Ares) (see A.Se.5'3); rj fiovXrj i(iXcif/t vatrv, the Senate looked mustard, Ar.Eq.d'Sl.
1056. N. For verbs which take a cognate accusative and an ordinary object accusative at the same time, see 107G.
1057. N. Connected with the cognate accusative is that which follows verbs of motion to express the ground over which the motion passes; as oSoe livai (iX&ilv, iropukcdai, etc.), to go (over) a road; wXuv OaXao-crav, to sail the sea: Spot Karaftaivav, to descend a mountain; etc. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning.
ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION. — ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE.
1058. The accusative of specification may be joined with a verb", adjective, noun, or even a whole sentence, to denote a part, character, or quality to which the expression refers. E.g.
Tu<£Xo9 ra 5nfM.T' tl, you are blind in your eyes, S.O.T.371;
1059. N'. This is sometimes called the. accusative by synecdoche, or the limiting accusative. It most frequently denotes a part; but it may refer to any circumstance to which the meaning of the expression is restricted. This construction sometimes resembles that of 1239, with which it must not be confounded.
|
226 |
226 SYNTAX. fiOCfl
1060. An accusative in certain expressions ha*, the force of an adverb. E.g.
Toirrov rbv rpowov, in this way, thus; ttjv raylaTrjV (xc. o8w), in the quickest way; (tyjv) apxyv, at first (with negative, ho* at alt); rikas, finally; irpoiKa, as a gift, gratis; ^apiv,for the sake of, Si'icyjy, in the manner of; to npuiTOv or TrpuiTov, at first; to omtov, for the rest; iravra, in all things; raXXa, in other respects; ovf>iv, in nothing, not at all; tI; in what, why? ti, in any respect, at oil; ravra, in respect to this, therefore. So tovto /x«V . . . rovro 8e (1010).
1061. N. Several of these (1000) are to lie explained by 1058, as rdXAa, ri; why? ravra, tovto (with fxiv and hi), and sometimes ouStV and ri' Some are to be explained as cognate accusatives (see 1053 and 1054), and some are of doubtful origin.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT.
1062. The accusative may denote extent of time or space. E.g.
At avovhal iviavrbv iaovrai, the truce is to be for a year, T.4,118. Ejfuivtv Tifxipat; tt(vt(, he remained five days. 'Atti^ci 17 HAaTtua tu>v ®T)fiiov (TTaStous i/3b>fxr)KOVTa, Plalncn is seventy sUitles distant from Thchcs, T. 2,5. 'Airi^ovTa ^,vpu.KOvcriiiv ovrt vkovv ttoXvv ovrt o&ov, (Me^'ava) not a long stiil or land-journey distant from Syracuse, X. 0,49.
1063. N. This accusative with an ordinal number denotes hmn long since (including the date of the event); as f/?8o'/o;i' yficpav tj}? OvyaTpo1; avT(S titcXivtijkvms, when his daughter had died nix days before (i.e. this being the seventh day), Aesch.3,77.
1064. N. A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like Tptrov
TERMINAI, ACCUSATIVE (POF.TIC).
1065. In poetrj', the accusative without, a preposition may denote the place or object towards which motion is directed. E.g.
MvyvTrjpas a(f>LKi.To, she came, to the. suitors. ()d. ],;i;!2. *Avi[3r] fxiyav oipavbv OvXv/xnuv t«, she ascended to great heaven anil
|
227 |
107;;] accusative. 227
Olympus, II. 1,497. To koIXov "A pyos /Sas <£tya9 id="iv.i.p7251.1"> going as an exile to the hollow Argos, S. O.C'676.
In prose a preposition would be used here.
ACCUSATIVE IN OATHS WITH vi) AND fid.
1066. The accusative follows the adverbs of swearing vi) and /j.d, by.
1067. An oath introduced by vi) is affirmative; one introduced by fid (unless vat, yes, precedes) is negative; as vij tov Aiu, yen, by Zeus; /ib. t'ov Ai'a, no, by Zeus; but val, fia. Am, yes, by Zeus.
1068. N. Ma is sometimes omitted when a negative precedes; as ov, Tovh'OXvfMTOv, no, by this Olympus, S. An. 708.
TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VERB.
1069. Verbs signifying to ask, to demand, to teach, to remind, to clothe or unclothe, to conceal, to deprive, and to take away, may take two object accusatives. E.g.
Ov tout' (piorui at, 1 am not asking you this, Ar. AT. (541; ouSeVu rtj<; avvovaias ipyvpiov irpixTTti., you demand no fee for your teaching from any one, X. M. 1,0"; irodtv r/p^aTO at SiSdcrKtiv ti/v (XTparrryiav; with whut did he begin to teach you strategy? ibid.'A, I6; ttjv ^v/xpo.-^iW avufiifivijaKovTts tous 'A^ccuous, reminding the Athenians of the alliance, T. G, (i; tov fiiv iavrov (^itoh/u) (Ktlvov rjp.
1070. ,V. In jjoutry some other verbs have this construction ; tints xpoa vt^tTO ilp.t]v, he washed the dried spray from his skin, O(/.(),224; so Tip.wpua8at Tim alp.a, to punish one for blood (shed),
1071. N. Verbs of this class sometimes have other constructions. Fur verbs of depriving and taking awuy, see 1118. For the accusative and genitive with verbs of reminding, see 1106.
1072. N. The accusative of a thing with some of these verbs is really a cognate accusative (107(5).
|
228 |
228 SYNTAX. [1073
1073. Verbs signifying to do anything to or to say anything of & person or thing take two accusatives. E.g.
TavTL fit iroiovariv, they do these things to vie; ri /x tlpyaaw; what didst thou do to me ? Kaxa TroXXb. iopyiv Tpwas, he has done many evils to the Trojans, 11.16,424. 'Eikciv6i> ti koX tovs KopivOtovs TroAAa ti koI (caxa i yc, of him and the Corinthians he said much that was bad, lid. 8,61; ov
1074. These verbs often take tu or koAus, well, or kokois, ill, instead of the accusative of a thing; tovtow; eZ Trout, he does them good; v/xa? *a/«os ttoiu, he does you harm; k
For iv Trao-x'iv, tv dKoutiv, etc., as passives of these expressions, see 1241.
1075. N. TIpd(7(T, do, very seldom takes two accusatives in this construction, iroiea) being generally used. El irpaaau) and tfaxuis TTpaxjam are intransitive, meaning to be well off, to be badly off.
1076. A transitive verb may have a cognate accusative (1051) and an ordinary object accusative at the same time. E.g.
MtX^TOs fit (ypdiparo rrjv ypa
On this principle (1076) verbs of dividing may take two accusatives ; as to (TTpaTiv/io. «aT
1077. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to make, to think or regard, and the like, may take a predicate accusative besides the object accusative. E.g.
Ti Trjv iroAiv Trpocrcryopewi? ; what do you call the state? I't/v Touivrrfv Swa/j.iv a.vip(Cav tywyf. Kau>, such a puiner J call courage, P. lip. 430b. ~2,Tpa.TTjybv ai'rroi' aTr(8ci.£i, he appointed him general, X.>4.1,12; ivipylnqv tov 'Pl^lttttov fjyoiimo, they thought i'hilij> a benefactor, D. 18,4-3 ; tto.vtu>v SccnroTrjv iavrov Traroi-nKtv, he has made himself master of all, X. C. 1,318.
1078. This is the active construction corresponding to the passive with copulative verbs (90S), in which the object accusative
|
229 |
1084] GENITIVE. 229
becomes the subject nominative (1234) and the predicate accusative becomes a predicate nominative (907). Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; as tow
1079. N. With verbs of naming the infinitive ilvat may connect the two accusatives; as crcxfrioT-qv 6voful£ov(n Tor avSpa clyai, they name the man (to be) a sophist, V. Pr.All*.
1080. N. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusative in apposition with the object accusative; as ZXufJc tovto Sdpov, he took this as a gift; 77nrov<; aytw Ovpja. toj HAi'w, to brtnif horses as an offering to the Sun, X. C. S,:j12 (.see 010). Especially iin interrogative pronoun may be so used; as ti'i'os tovtov; opui; v>ho are these whom 1 see ? lit. / sec these, being whom ? (See 910 ; 972.)
1081. N. A predicate accusative may denote the effect of the action of the verb upon its direct object; as ircu&ucii' riva ao
1082. N. For one of two accusatives retained with the passive, see 1239.
For the accusative absolute, see 1509.
GENITIVE.
1083. As the chief use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of a verb, so the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun. When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it seems to depend on the nominal idea which belongs to the verb: thus €Tn6vfj.u) involves CTnOv/uav (as we can say (nidv/xu i-TnOvfiiav, 1051) ; and in (TnOvfiw tovtov, 1 have a desire for this, the nominal idea preponderates over the verbal. So (3a(nX.ivtt -n/s ^wpas (1109) involves the idea /3utriA.€«j? icrri t^s ^tipas, he is king of the country. The Greek is somewhat arbitrary in deciding when it will allow either idea to preponderate in the construction, and after some vm-hs it allows both the accusative and the genitive (1108). In the same general sense the genitive follows verbal adjectives. It has also uses which originally belonged to the ablative; for example, with verbs of separation and to express source. (See HM2.)
GENITIVE AFTER NOUNS (ATTRIBUTIVE GENITIVE).
1084. A noun in the genitive may limit tins meaning of another noun, to express various relations, most of
|
230 |
230 SYNTAX. [1085
which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in English.
1085. The genitive thus depending on a noun is called attributive (see 919). Its most important relations are the following: —
1. PossEssroN or other close relation: as jj rov jrarpos oiKt'u, the fathers house; -^/xun/ ■}/ varpti, our country; t6 rwv di'Spiuv yivo
2. The SuiwKcT of an action or feeling: ;is y to<" Si^iou
.'!. The Ohject of an action or feeling: as Stu to flawu.-vlov fxiiros, owing to the hatred of (i.e. fell, against) Pansanius, T. 1,90; 77yjos tcLs too ^as regunls Ids endurance of the winter, '.Sy.2-2()°-. Su ot $tu>v opKoi, the oaths (sworn) in the name of the Gods (as we say Owls upwai, 1049), X.A.-2,y. The Objective Genitive.
4. Matkkial or Contk.n't.s, including that of which anything consists: as fiowv dyt'A^, a herd of cattle; aAcro? rj/ Stv&fiuiv, a grove of cultivated trees, X. A. '>, :i'-;
uSutos, a spring of fresh water, X.-'l.O,]4; 8vo two quarts of meal. Genitive of Material.
5. MkasChe, of space, time, or value: as TpiSv rj/xcpuiv 68Js,
G. Cause or OkKiI.n : fj.(ydwv d8iK»//xaT«;c tipyr'i, anger at great offences; ypa
7. Tin! WuohK, after nouns denoting a part: as toAAoi Ton' prjTopwu, many of the orators; ivrjp tCiv (Xevdipuv, a man (i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive. (See also 1088.)
These .seven classus are not exhaustive; but they will give a gen-et'iil idea of these relations, many of which it is difficult to classify.
|
231 |
1001 j GKNITIVK. 231
1086. N. Examples like 7ro'A.ts "Apyovs, the city of Argon, Ar. Eq.H1 Ii, Tpoi'ijs iTTou6pov, the city of Troy, 6W. 1,-, in which the genitive is used instead oi apposition, are poetic.
1087. Two genitives denoting different relations inny depend on one noun; as i-rnrov Spd/xov 7//*€pu<;, within a day's run fur a horse, 1). 10,'J7;{; 8ia Trjv toC avtfxov airtooiv ch'ituji' t's to TrcXayos, by the wind's driving them (the tercets) yu( ii^o (Ac sea, T.7,-i-l.
1088. (Partitive Genitive.') The partitive genitive (1085, 7) ma)r follow all nouns, pronouns, adjectives (especial]}' superlatives), participles with the article, and adverbs, which denote a part. E.g.
Oi ayadin rii)V av9phnrMv, the good umony the men; o tJ/xktus toii dpidfioZ, the half of the number ; di'Spa oI8a tov Sjj/xov, / know a man of the people; rois dpavtrais rwv vavruty, to the upper benches vf the S(cilors, 'J'.^!,ol: ovStl*; rw?-' nai^wv-, iio one of the elnhlren', viivTuw t'ov firjTOfnov StwuTaTO*;, the most eloquent of till the orators, » /^ouXo'/x(vo9 k
1089. Tlie parlitive genii ivc lias (lie prftflicat.fi ]>osil ion as ri.n;wils (h(^ avt.iel''. (!'"I), while othe.r attrilmlive genitives (except personal pronouns, 077) liave the attribulive posilion (!lf)!i).
1090. N. An adjective or participle generally agrees in gender wilb a (iepejidc-iit. jiarlitivu gonitivo. JJut wmiftinifs, especially wlii.'ii it is singular, it, is neuter, a^iveing wit.li /xt'po?, part, umlor-st.ootl; as tu>v ttoXc/uow to ttoXv (for oi voXXnl), the greater part of the enemy.
1091. N. A partitive genitive sometimes depends on tU or fiiprti understood; as (cjxusav tVi/uyi'i'i'in a^>tov re 7iy>o; Ikuvov; kuI fxcivtov irpos iavTofc, they said that some of their own mm hud mixed with thcM, find sowe of thcni with their oim men (-rivd? being understood with (r
|
232 |
232 SYNTAX. [1002
1092. N. Similar to such phrases as ttov yijs; w tovto o.v etc., is the use of l)(a> and an adverb with tho. genitive; as ir
GENITIVE AFTEK VERBS. Prkdicath Genitive.
1093. As the attributive genitive (1084) stands in the relation of an attributive adjective to its leading substantive, so a genitive may stand in the relation of a predicate adjective (907) to a verb.
1094. Verbs signifying to be or to become and oilier copulative verbs may have a predicate ge?iitive expressing any of the relations of the attributive genitive (1085). E.g.
1. (Possessive.) 'O voyxos luriv ovtos Apatfoiros, this law is Draco's, D.23,51. Tliviuv
2. (SubjcQtir,e.) Oi/iui uuro (to prj/jLa) Tlepldi'&pov (Xvai, 1 think it (the saying) is Periander's, P. lip. o30a.
•3. (Objective.) Ou toiv xaKovpywv oTktos, aAAa tt)<; Siktjs, pity is not for evil doers, but for justice, K. frag. 272.
4. (Material.) 'Epujj/i Xl9uiv irnroirjfxlvov, a wall built of stones. T.4,.'J1. Ot BtixlXioi 7ravTouov XlOiov v7roKcivTa.i, the foundations are laid (ctnishtim/) of all kinds of sfnnes, T. 1,03.
"i. (Measure.) (Ta T([ ) CTaSieoi' T)V oktoo, the. walls were eight Stadf-S (in lentfth), T.-l.Gfi. ^TrciSui/ ctoji/ yj Tt9 TptcxKOyra, when one is thirty years old, V.Lr/.72l*.
0. (Origin.) Toioi'twv irrri irpoyoywi', from such ancestors are you sprung, X. A. 3, 2H.
7. (Partitive.) Toureui' yivov fxoi, becovie one of these for my sake, Av.Ar. 107. 'S.oXwv ru>y (rra cto<^kttcov iKXrjB-q, Solon was called one of the Seven Wise Men, 1.10,235.
1095. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint,
|
233 |
1099J GENITIVE. 233
to make, to think or regard, and the like, which generally take two accusatives (1077), may take a genitive in place of the predicate accusative. E.g.
Ttjv 'Ao-iue eavrCiv ttoiovvtm, they make Asia their own, X.Ag. 1,'A'A. 'E/iC $£9 tu>v iriwtiufj.iV(uv, put me down as (one) of those who are persuaded, V. Rp.i'Ji^. (Tovto) ri/s rjfXtTipa<; d/xcAtia? a.v ns BtCi] Sucata?, any one might justly regard this as belonging to our neglect, I). 1,10.
1096. These verbs (1005) in tlie passive are among the copula-tive verbs of 907, and they still retain the genitive. See the last example under 1094, 7.
GENITIVE EXI'HKSSINU A I'aRT.
1097. 1. Any verb may take a genitive if its action affects the object only in part. £.
Il€/X7m toiv AvSoov, he semis some of tin-: Li/dians (but -nitum Toils .vSov
2. This principle applies especially to verbs signifying to chare (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. E.g.
MtTti^ov Trjf AeiVs, they shared in the booty; so often utTinrotti-
1098. N. Many of these verbs also take an accusative, when they refer to the whole object. Thus tAu^£ tovtov means he obtained a share of this by lot, but tAa^f to^to, he obtained this by lot. MeT€^w and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like /t«pos, part; as tuJiz mvSvvon' irXdcrTov jj.(i>o% fXiOl^owrcv, they will hunt the greatest share uf the dangers, I.lj, 3 (where fjiepov; would mean that they have only a part of a share). This use of )xipo<; shows the nature of the genitive after these verbs.
In crvvrpifiiw rij"; Kt<£aA id="iv.i.p7329.1">j<;, to bruise his head, and Kareayii-at Trj% n«f>ayjs, to have his head broken, tlio genitive is probably partitive. See Ar. Ach. 1180, Pa.7; I.IS.M. These verbs take also the accusative.
Genitive with Vakioi'S Vejibs.
1099. The genitive follows verbs signifying to take
|
234 |
234 SYNTAX. [1100
hold of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, to mhs, to make trial of, to begin. E.g.
EAa/jtro Tiyi ^cipos uuroJ, he look his hand, X. //.-I, I3'; irvpbs tori Oiyovra fi.i] tu6us Kixuud.a, it in possilde to touch fire and not be burned tmmetliulciy, X. C. f>, 1l(i; ry/s £vvi
1100. N. Veilw of tal-iny hold may have an object aucusative, wii.h a genit.ivL' of the part tnlcen liolil uf; as IXafiov tt)s ^wi/'ijs tov
OpofTui/, //icy stuzed Oronfas lit/ his girdle, X. .d. 1,()10.
1101. 1. Tin- ]>oi:t.s extend the constniction of verbs of taking hold to those of jwliinn, drai/i/inQ, lead hi q, and the like ; as dAAoy fixv ^AaiVrjs (f)vu>v aAAoi/ 8c ^iraico?, pulling one by the cloak, (mother In/ the tunic, IL'2'2,4'.):',; jiovv ayirijv Ktp&mv, the Itcti led the heifer btj the horns,
2. So even in prose : ra vijttiu iruxhia Stouat tov ttooos (jirdpTw, ihey lie the infants by On: foul with a curd, I Id."), 16; p.r'jTrurt aytiv ttJ'J ljvi'a? ro lirirov, never to had the horse by the bridle, X. Eq. 13,!).
:!. ['ndci tins head is usually placed the poetic genitive with verbs of imjiloriny, denoting the part grasped by the suppliant; as i/ii XnxctcxtTo yuvvoiy, she implored me by (i.e. clasj'ing) my kne,;s, //.!),
1102. 'J'he genitive follows verbs signifying- io £as^e,
'E,Xtv6tpirj<; •ycucru/xti'oi, having tasted of freedom, Hd.G,5; uo-4>pixivop.ai, 1 smell onions, Ar./J. (554; wv^
|
235 |
1108] GKNITIVE.
fwt 8oku>, methinks 1 hear a voice, Ar. I3a. 01; alaOdveaOia, //} crdai, or tViAai'^ai/tcrtfai tovtui', to perceive, remember, or for yet these; o
1103. N. Verbs of hearint/, learning, etc. may take ;m accusative of (.lie i.liiujr lieard etc. ami a genitive of the. person heard from; as toi;to>i/ tchovtous a*coijo Xoyovi, I hear such sayiuqs from these vicn ; TrvdiaOai touto i'fj.uiv. to learn lliis from you. The genitive here belongs under lloO. A sentence may take the place of the accusative ; as tovtuw aixovc tI Xiyovmv, heat' from these what they say. See also diroSt'^o/^u, accept (a siatement) from, in the
. Lexicon.
1104. N. Verbs of nnderslandinii, as iiruTrafuu, liavR the accusative. 2un>;/u, (juoted above witli tlie genitive (1102), usually takes the accusative of a thing.
1105. The impersonals /xt'Att and fxcrafitXcL take the genitive of a thing with the dalive of a person (lHil); as /i(ci/xoi tovtov, I care for this; /ut«/«'Aci eroi tovtov, than re/ienlest of this. Ypo
1106. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a person and the genitive of a thing; as fx-j ^ ai'«/inyo'jjs kukuh', do not remind me of evils (i.e. cause vie to remember th
But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives (1009).
1107. N. *O£w, emit smell (smell of), has a genitive (perhaps by an ellipsis of 6afj.r/v, odor') ; as o£ou
1108. N. Many of the verbs of 1000 and 1102 may take also the accusative. See the Lexicon.
|
236 |
236 SYNTAX. [1100
1109. The genitive follows verbs signifying to rule, to lead, or to direct. E.g.
"Epojj twc 8twv /3a
1110. N. This construction is sometimes connected with that of 1120. But the genitive here depends on the idea of king or ruler implied in (lie verb, while there it depends on the idea of comparison (see 1083).
1111. K. For other cases after many of these verbs, see the Lexicon. For the dative in poetry after rjyionat and avao-am, see 110-1.
1112. Verbs signifying fulness and want take the genitive of material (1085, 4). E.g.
Xprj^aTwv (inopti, he had abundance of money, 1). 18,235; (recray/xtVos ttXovtov rrjv xf/vj^qv eao/iai, 1 shall have my soul loaded with wealth, X. S//.4, 04. Ovk av airopoi irapa8cty/j.aTu>i>, he would be at no loss for examples, 1>./J;).557d; oi8ei' 8f>?
1113. Verbs signifying to fill take the accusative of (lie tiling- filled and the genitive of material. E.g.
AuKpviov, ZirX-qcriv fjxt, he filled me with tears, E. Or. 308.
1114. N. Ato/xai, I want, besides the ordinary genitive (as tovtuiv iSiovro, they were in want of these), may take a cognate accusative of the tiling; as Scr/ao/Mii vp.iov fierpiav htrjaiv, I will make of you a moderate request, Aesch.3,01. (See 1070.)
1115. N. At? may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an accusative) of the person besides the, genitive; as Sti /xoi tovtov, I need this; (ivtov yap
1116. N. (a) Besides the common phrases ttoXAov Set, it is far from it, oXiyov Set, it wants little of it, we have in Demosthenes oiSe iroXXov Se? (like TravTos 8(1), it wants everything of it (lit. it does not even want much).
(b) By an ellipsis of Sttv (1-r>34), 6X(yo> and fuxpov come to mean almost; as oXtyov irayres, almost all, F.Rp.552A.
|
237 |
1120] GENITIVE. 237
Gekitivk ok Separation and Comparison.
1117. The genitive (as ablative) may denote that from which anything is separated or distinguished. On this principle the genitive follows verbs denoting to remove, to restrain, to release, to cease, to fail, to differ, to give up, and the like. E.g.
'H k^cto; ov woXxi Su'^a ttj<; rjirtipov, the island is not far distant from the main-land. 'Ettio-t^/xtj xu>PtC°f1^vV 8ikcuo
Transitive verbs of tliis class may take also an accusative.
1118. Verbs of depriving may take a genitive in place of the accusative of a thing, and those of taking away a genitive in place of the accusative of a person (1009; 1071); as ipl twv irarpwuJi/ airto-TtpriKe, he has deprived me of my paternal properly, D. 20, 3 ; t£>v dAA
1119. N. The poets use this genitive with verbs of motion; as roio Ka.r-q8o)j.(.v, we descended from Olympus, 11.'20,125;
llvfldiyos 6/3us, thou didst come from Pytho, S. O. TAb'l. Here a preposition would be used in prose.
1120. The genitive follows verbs signifying to surpass, to be inferior, and all others which imply comparison. E.g.
("Av9p(airoi) £vv<ttjv ap(.rr]V
|
238 |
238 SYNTAX.
aXXwv, in experience you far excel the others, X.H.7, 1 ■»; 0^gv ir
}6u ye ^/xwi/ ku^Oivrfi, when they were not at all iiij~t-.vinr ( (left behind In/) us in numbers, X.A.I,"31. So rrnv iyOpuv viko.o$ (or rjaaarrdai), to be overcome by one's enemies; but these tyc-, verb take also the genitive with into (1234). So t
Oknjtivb with Vejiks of Acctsinc i:rc.
1121. Verbs signifying to accuse, to prosecute, t0 convict, to acquit, and to condemn take a genitive d
the crime, with an accusative of the person. E.g. Alniofxac airbv tov (fxivov, I accuse hhn nf the murder : iy airov Trapavofnav, he indicted him for an illegal }>ro)>ositiiui : jit Sh)p(j>v, he prosecutes me for bribery (for gifts). KXc'iovu 8oipw tAfifTt? Kat Ko?ri}s, having convicted Cleon of brilim/ <,,,,] theft Ar. A'. 5U1. "E^>euy£ 7rpo8ocr/as, he was brought to trial for treachery but a.Tri o-(a-dai TrpoadoxCjv, expecting to be conmcittl nf fu[ge_ witness,
1122. 'O
1123. Ooi)i])ounds of Kara of tliis class, inchuling Kar yopui (882, 2), commonly fake a genitive of the jwsoh which depends on the Kara. They may take also an objeot accusative denoting the crime or punishment. E.g.
Oi'StU avro? avToS Kar-nyopijo-c wiinroTt, no man ever /,,'w.
1124. y. Verbs of condemning wliich ave compounds of kotcI may take three cases; as iroW&v oi itot
For a genitive (of value) denoting the penalty, see 1133.
|
239 |
11301 GENITIVE. 239
1125. NT. The verbs of 1121 often take, a cognate accusative (1051) on which the genitive depends; as ypa(f>rjv ypa
GENITIVE OF CAUSE AND SOURCE.
1126. The genitive often denotes a. cause, especiall)' with verbs expressing emotions, as admiration, wonder, affection, hatred, pity, ani/er, envy, or revenge. E.y.
(Toirrous) tt)s )Av toA/atjs ov #u.u/iu£w, Tr)S 8« d£ui>caias, I teonder not at llmir boldness, but at their Jolly, T. fi, o(J; uroAAuKts ff£ f.vSaifJ.ovt.O'a to?) Tpoirov, / often Counted you happy jor your character, 1'. C'V.4:>b; ^TjAiIi at tov vov, t>}s' &i SciAi'us urvyw, 1 envy you for your vund, but loathe you for your cowardice, S. lit. 10'27; firj /xoi
Most of these verbs may take also aa accusative or dative of the person.
1127. X. The genitive sometimes denotes a purpose or motive (where cVexa is generally expressed) ; as r^? rwi' 'EAAiji'tui' (cv6i-fjuK,for the. liberty of the Greeks, D. IS, 100 ; so '.I,~V>. (See 15-18.)
1128. N. Verbs- of dispuiinq take a causal genitive; as ov avTnroioup.c.dn t»/9 dp^i}?, we do not dispute with the King
about his dominion, X. /L2,:l-3; Ku/xoAtto? rj^fju-o-p-riri-jo-tv "Epe^^i t>j<; 7roAtcus, Eumolpus disputed with Erecldheus for the city (i.e. disputed its possession with him), 1.12,1!W.
1129. The genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, tu give the cause of the astonishment. E.g.
*O n
1130. 1. The genitive sometimes denotes the source. E.g.
louro (td^w
~. So with yiyvopai, in the sense (o 6e born; as Ao.pfiou kcu IldpixrariSo? •yi'yroiTat TraTSts Suo, ft/" Darius and Parysalis are born
|
240 |
240 SYNTAX. [1131
1131. In poetry, the genitive occasionally denotes the agent after a passive verb, or is used like the instrumental dative (1181). E.g.
"Eiv °Ai8u Si) xelaai,
These constructions would not be allowed in prose.
GENITIVE AFTEK COMPOUND VERBS.
1132. The genitive often depends on a preposition included in a compound verb. E.g.
YlpOKUrai t>?? %uipu<; rjfio id="iv.i.p7406.1">v opt) fLiydXa, high mountains lie in front of our land, X.M.'i, f)-5; mtpt
For the genitive alter verbs of accusing and condemning, compounds of Kara, see 112;5.
GENITIVE OF TRICE OR VALUE.
1133. The genitive may denote the price or value of a tiling. E.g.
Ttv'xe' an-ufitv, xpixrca ^aXxctcDc, tKaTOjifioC Ivvtaflolwv, he yace i/ohl onnur for bronze, armor worth a hundred oxen for that worth nine oxen, ll.(i,2'.lii. Ao'£a xpij/xaT iov ovk iivr)Tr/ (sc. eortV), glory is nut to In: bought with vumey, 1.2,32. Jloaov St8dcr/«t; vivrt fj.vu>i>. Fur what price does he teach f For ficc minuc. V. Ap. 2O' Ouk u.u u7r
In judicial language, n/xav tlv'l titos is said of the court's judgment in estimating the penalty, n/xacr^ai iW tii/o? of either party to the suit in proposing a penalty; as dAAa 8rj <£viyi?s Tifi.rj(ja>fxai; ictojs -yap av /xoi to»to» np.rjO'a.iTi, but now shall I propose exile as my punishment t — you (the court) might perhaps fix my penally at this, P.Ap.37?. So Ti/xaTttt 8' ow fioi 6 avi]p 6o.va.rov, so the man estimates my punishment at death (i.e. proposes death as my punish-
|
241 |
1138] GENITIVE. 241
ment), P. Ap.36b. So also 2<^ id="iv.i.p7413.1">o8ptW virr/yov Oavarov, they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (ef. 1124), X.H. 5,424.
1134. The tiling bought sometimes stands in the genitive, either by analogy to the genitive of price, or in a causal sense (1126); as tov 8u>S«kfiva% ITao-ia (sc. 6
1135. The genitive depending on a£ios, worth, worthy, and its compounds, or on a£i6u>, think worthy, is the genitive of price or value; as agio's can davdrov, lie in viorthy of death ; oh ©tpuoroKXe'a toiv fjLiyiaTwv &uipiu)v r]$iu>
a^o) take the genitive. (See 1140.)
GENITIVE OK TIME AND PLACE.
1136. The genitive may denote the time within which anything takes place. E.g.
ITot'ou ^povov hi koI ■nnrop&rjTu.i. ttoi<; ; well, how long since (within what time) was the city really taken? A.Ag.-7$. Tov iiriyt-yvopivov xei/xuivos, during the following winter, T.8,29. TuCtu ri;? ij/xt'pu? iyivcTO, this happened during the day, X.^4.7,4" (ryv y/Acpav would mean through the whole day, 10(52). Aca irC)y oi'x rjioven, they will not come within ten years, V. iiy. 042°. So Bpm^nrjv «Ad/i/3ui/« t^s 7//i
1137. A similar genitive of the place within which or at which is found in poetry. E.'j.
TH ovk "A py e o<; rjcv 'A xa' i« o v ; was he not in A chaean A rgos ? Od.3,251 ; Ofy vw ovk tan yDia; kilt' 'A^au'&t yalav, ovrt TivXov uprj1* ovt' "A p y i o5 oirrc M >; k-q vrjs, u woman whose like there is not in the Achaean land, nnt at sacred Pylos, nor at Argos, nor at Mycenae, Od.21,107. So in the Homeric irthloio Blciv, to run on the plain (i.e. within its limits), II.22,2'A, Xoveo-Oai Trorafxolo, to bathe in the river, II. 0,508, and similar expressions. So dpWTtpJ;s x«P0'Si on the left hand, even in Hdt. (5,77).
1138. N. A genitive denoting place occurs in Attic prose in a few such expressions as Uvai tov Trpoaui, to go forward, X. A. 1,3', and iirtTaxvvov rfj6<$oi" tow o~oalTiimv irpocrtoyTus, ttio.y hurried over the road those who euvie up more slowly, T. 4,47. These genitives are variously explained.
|
242 |
242 SYNTAX. [1139
GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
1139. The objective genitive follows many verbal adjectives.
1140. These adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning or derivation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g.
Mc'ro^os o-o^ias', partaking of i/:isdon>, P. Lg. USU'1; tcro/xotpoi tu>v ttclt pwwv, sharinisae.fi,'2.3. (101)7,2.) 10 tt i at y p. t)<; tVij/SoXoi, having attained knowledge, P./Ju.'JS!)1'; 6o.X6.crcry)'; ifurupoTa.TOi, most experienced in the sea {in navigation), T. 1,80. (Hl!)9.)
'Y7njKoo<; Till' yovc'ui', ohedierit (hearkening) to his parents, P./?;>. 1(!'3J; d^v^juou1 tw KiySvi'iuv, unmindful of the dangers, Ant.2a,7; ayeutTTOS kokwi'. ivilhuul a taste of evils, S. -4 Ji. 5S2; (.vLfj.f.Xr)'; ciya-&Q>v, Afn.ii)aho>Xol XPVP-nT<""i sparing oftnonei/, P. /Jyj. O481'. (1102.)
Tun/ ^ooi'wi' irucrdii/ eyKpartaraTO;, most perfect master (fall pleasures, X. M.],'2'ii; I'tais apyiKOs, fit tv command a ship, P. R/).'l$$i iavrov u>v aKpdnap, not bt-itK/ master of himself, ibid. f)79c. (1109.)
MctrTo? a k uj ^ ful/tfevdsj i 7ri(TT7] fJ-rjs Ktvos, void of knowledge, ]'. ftp. AW; XyOrji u>v ttX(ojs, bang full eif f'urgetfulncfs, iliid.; ttXciotoii> (vSiiirra.TO';, viosl wanting in most things, ilnd. 570c; ■!] if>vxr) •yij/^i'fj toC o~405ib; Kadapa vdvTuiv T
"E^o^os SfiAia?, ch'.irr/e'd/le icilh cowardice, L. 1-1,5; roiirwi' U1T105, responsible fir this, P. O.4J7". (1121.)
"A£ios 7roXcSi', K%
1141. Compounds of alpha pricatice (875, 1) .soiueUuiRs take a g-Riiilivu ot kindred nicaninp;, wliicli ilp|ieiul^ on the idea of separation implied in t.lifin ; as uir«i? apfjivwv 7?n.Z8u>i', injjo> TracTTjs, destitute of all honor, P. /,<•/.77-J1'; XPrtlx'^T"w aSuj/ioTnTot. 11ms/ free fmm taking bribes, T. 2, 05; anrrivc pov 7rdi'Twi' XfllIJ"'vu>v< frfK from the blasts of all storms, S.0. C.077, aip
1142. Some, of these adjectives (11.39) are kindred to verbs whii'h take the accusative. £/.{!■
<;. understanding the art, P. (7.41Sb (1104) ;
|
243 |
1147] GKNITIVK. 243
(TTiT-qScv/xa 7roAtws AvaTpamKoy, a practice subi
1143. The possessive genitive sometimes follows adjectives denoting possession. E.g.
01 Kivhwoi tZ>v itfitiTTyjKOTujv t'Sioi, the dangers belong to the commanders, D.2,28; itpos 6 ^uJpo? rrjs 'Apr€fj.iSo';, the place is sacred to Arlernis, X..4.D,il18; koii/oc 7ravTioi', common to all,
Fov the dative with such adjectives, see 117-1.
1144. 1. Sucli a genitive sometimes denotes mere connection; as uvyyivrfi aiirov, i relative of his, X. O.'l,l~; SniKparovs 6/xwi'u/iO?, a namesake of •'iterates, P- So. 2IS1".
The adjective is here reahy used as a substantive. Sucli adjectives naturally take the dative (H75).
2. Hero, prol'ubly l>elongs eVayrj? toC %AttoAX(oi'o?, accursed (c>?ic) af Apollo, Aesch.15,110; also cVaytc? Kui aAinypioi T^? ^eoC, accursed of the (Saddess, 1 1, ll'fi, and ck rwf o.XiT~qp[oJv tw riji vtov, Ar.]Ci/.-M~i: — ivj.yrje.i.c. bping really substantives.
1145. After some adjectives the genitive can be best, explained as dep.'-ndiui;" on ihe substantive implied in them; as t^s apX']? iirtvOvvas, responsible fir the ojfice, i.e. liable to c'dvvai for il, D. 18, ])7 (see 8;'8o)Ka yt tvOvva.^ ixtivuiv, in the same section); -rrupBlvoi yixfi-uiv il>j>alai, maidens ripe for marriage, i.e. haisinr/ reached lite ar/e (wpo.) fur Hiurriiiye, lid. I,19G (see es yd.fj.ov (Jipqv aTriKOfiCvyji', I Id. 0, 01) ; <} id="iv.i.p7445.1">6pov vnoreXu';, subject to the puymetU (tc'A.os) of tribute, ']'. l.ltJ.
1146. N". Soinfi adjectives of place, like cVui/rios, ojiposite, may take the genitive instead of the regular dative (] 174), but chiefly i" poetry ; :is tvavrloi (trrav 'AxiuSi', they stood opposite the Achaeans, It. 17',3M.
See also tou Hovtov eViKapaiat, 0/ an angle with the Ponlus, lid. 7,3(i.
GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS.
1147. The genitive follows adverbs derived from adjectives wliich take the genitive. £.(/.
O! c/j.Trc ijoms u.vtov (Xovrts, those who are acquainted with him, a.va.£iw<; t>;? 7ro'A«
|
244 |
244 SYNTAX. [1148
'AOrjvaiuiv o.TTa.vTwv 8ia<^ id="iv.i.p7452.1">cpoVr
1148. The genitive follows many adverbs of place. ■#.#.
Eiffio tov ipvjjuaro<;, within the fortress; t£tov Ta'xo>Js> outside of the wall; cut6s tHiv opoiv, without the boundaries; x
1149. N. Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly cvtos, within; Bixd, apart from; iyyvi, dyXl> 7re'Aas, and ttXijo-lov, near; voppw (-n-pouw), far from; ovicrOiv and KaT07riv, beiiind; and a few others of similar meaning. The genitive after most of them can be explained as a partitive genitive or as a genitive of separation; that after iv$v resembles that after verbs of aiming at (1009).
1150. N. A a Op a (Ionic XaBpy) and Kpii
1151. N.'Avei' and arcp, without, aXP' an<^ P*XPL' untih fvcKo. (ovviko), on account of, /jLtra^v, between, and irX-jy, except, take the genitive like prepositions. See T220.
GENITIVE ABSOLUTE.
1152. A noun and a participle not grammatically connected with the main construction of the sentence may stand by themselves in the genitive. This is called the genitive absolute. E.g.
TttCr iirpa.6ri Kdvwi/os UTparr]yovvTo<;, this was done when Cotton teas general, 1.9,56. OiBiv tSv Siovtuv koiovvtu>v vfxaov kcikcus t« Trpdy/j/iTa «Xa> nffi'irs are in a bad stale while you do nothing which you ouqht tn do, I).4,'2. ®cwv hihovrtav ovk av (K
See 1508 and 1303.
OENITIVE' WITH COMPAKATIVliS.
1153. Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree take the genitive (without >;, than). E.g.
|
245 |
1169] DATIVE. 245
KpuTTtw iarl tov'twv, he is better than these. Nt'ot? to o-tyav KpciTTOV «crrt tov XaXe'iv, for youth silence is better than prating, Wle\.Mon.3H7. (llovr/pia.) Oarrov 6o.vo.tov 6ex, wickedness runs faster than death, P. Ap.'id";
1154. N. All adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison may take a genitive: as irtpoi tovtwv, others than these; vartpoi Trjq fidxis* l0° lale for 0ater than) the battle; tyj vo-Tcpaia ttJs paXy*' on the day after the battle. So rpnrXa,
1155. K. The genitive is less common than rj when, if rj were used, it would be followed by any other case than the nominative or the accusative without a preposition. Thus for lito-n 8' rjp.1v paXXov iTipoiv, and we can (do this) better than others (T. 1,85), paXXov r) hepois would be more common.
1156. N. After vXiov (wXclv), more, or iXaao~ov (ficiov), /rj is occasionally omitted before a numeral without affecting the case; as irep.ip<» opvls fV uvt'ov, ttXiIv i£;o.ko(tiov<; tov api.Bp.6v, I will send birds against him, more than six hundred in number, Ar. Av. 1251.
DATIVE.
1157. The primary use of the dative case is to denote (hat to or for which anything is or is done: this includes the dative of the remote or indirect object, and the dative of advantai/e or disadvantage. It also denotes that by which or with which, and the time (sometimes the place) m which, anything takes place,-—i.e. it is not merely a dative, but also an instrumental and a locative case.. (See 1042.) The object of motion after to is not regularly expressed by the Greek dative, but by the accusative with a preposition. (See 1065.)
DATIVK EXPRESSING TO OR FOR.
DATIVt OF THE InIUHKCT Olt.IECT.
1158. The indirect object of the action of a transitive verb is put in the d.itive. This object is generally introduced in English by to. E.g.
Aioojyc p.io~6bv tw (rot oV/ta TaAavTa, he promises ten talents to you (or he promises you ten talents); fiorjOtuxv irepipopcv tocs auft/xax01^ Ke w^ send aid to our allies; IXtyov tw ftaaiXd to. ye.ytvrjp.iva., they told the king what had happened.
1159. Certain intransitive verbs take the dative, many
|
246 |
246 SYNTAX. [1100
of which in English may have a direct object without to. E.g.
Tots 8cols tvxofj.a.1, I pray (to) the Gods, D. 18,1; vctltcow t£ (ovti, advantageous to the one liaving it, 1 lip. ^9l)t:; iIkovct dray/a; TijSt, yielding to this necessity, A. Ag. 1071; rocs i/o/uois ntiOovnu, they are obedient to the laws (they obey the laws), X. M. 4,410; (iorjtidv &LKaioo-vvr], to assist justice, P. RpAil". Et tois tyKcoo-iv dpi-
1160. The verbs of this class which arc not translated with to in English are chiefly those signifying to benefit, serve, obey, defend, assist, ])leaae, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, or any of their opposites; also those expressing friendliness, hostility, blame, abuse, reproach, envy, amjer, threats.
1161. X. The impersonate Scl, nirtari, fxect, /itra/xc'Ati, and irpocrijua take the dative of a person with the genitive of a thing; as Sa iloi tovtov, I have, need of this; /xtrtoTt /xoi tovtov, 1 have a share in this; /xcXa /xoi tovtov, 1 am interested in this; irpo-ar'/Ku p.01. tovtov, 1 u?n concerned in this. (For the genitive, sec 1097,2 ; 1100; 1110.) "EttoTi, it is possible, takes the dative alone.
1162. N. Axpy take the accusative when an infinitive follows. For Su (in poetry) with the accusative and the genitive, sue 1115.
1163. X. Some verbs of this class (lltiO) may lake the accusative; as oiSfi? uvroiis e/k'/ujkto, no one blamed them, X. A.'_', U30. Others, who.sfi meaning; would place (liem here (as /ucrcm, hate), tiike only the accusative. AoiSoptw, revile, has the accusative, but
|
247 |
1167] DATIVE. 247
Xot8opf'o/K" (middle) has the dative. 'Ova&ifa, reproach, and «7rm-aw, censure, liave the accusative as well as the dative; we lmve also oviiBiltw (iinTLfiav) ti tlvi, to cast any reproach (or censure) on any one. Tifj-wpilv tivl means regularly to avenge some one (to take vengeance for him) ', TifiaiptiaOai (rarely nfiMpciv) rcua, to punish some one (to avenge oneself on him): see X. C. 4, (i8, TifimprjijiLv
1164. )■ Verbs of ruling (as av&crau)). which take the genitive in prose (1109), have the dative in poetry, especially in Homer; as vokkrjo-LV vrc oi.cn. km "Apyc'i ttixvtl avaucuv, to rule over many islands anil all Argos, II. 2, 108; hapov ovk ap£ti 6toi9, lie will not rule the Hods long, A.Pr. 040. KtAtmu. to command, which in Atlic Greek has only the accusative (generally with the infinitive), has the dative in Homer: see //'.2,50.
2. 'Hyiojxai., in the sense of guide or direct, takes the dative even in prose; as ovkcti y/J-'iv r/yyairai, he will no longer lie our guide, X./1.3,2i0.
Dative or Advantage or Disadvantaci:.
1165. The person or thing for whose advantage or disadvantage anything is or is done is put in the dative (dativus commodi et incommodf). This dative is generally introduced in English by for. E.g.
Fids avi]p avT'A Orjvaiois vop.ov<; Z6r]Kt, Solon made laws for the Athenians. Kuipot lrpoiltrrat rtj iroXci, lit. opportunities hare been sacrificed for the stale (for its disadvantage), D. 19,8. 'Hydro avrwv ?ktw Trarpt xai rrj /ir/Tpl fioyov ytyiinjadj.!.. dAAA kcu rrj Tranp&L, each of them believed that he was born not merely for his father and mother, but for his country also, D. 18,205.
1166. N. A peculiar use of this dative is found in statements ol time; as tuj yj&i) ?>uo yci'tcu c0$i'uto, two geticnilwns had already passed away for him (i.u. he had seen them pass away), 11.1,250. 'H/xc'pcu jjjiXiaTO. i](rav t>] M»tii)vi) iaXtoKvia ittTa,for Mitylene captured (i.e. since its capture) there had been about seven days, T. 3,29.
Hv rjfiipo. irifiitT-n iirutXiovoi. toi? 'A OrfvaLois, it was the fifth day for the Athenians sailing out (i.e. it was the fifth day since they began to sail out), X. tf.2,147.
1167. N. Here belong such Homeric expressions as roio-t S' (ivcVnj, and he rose up for them (i.e. to address them), J7.1,08; I p-vdusv ypXf-v, he began to tpeak before them (for them), Od.1,28.
|
248 |
248 SYNTAX. [1168
1168. N. In Homer, verbs signifying to toard off take an accusative of the thing and a dative of the person; as Aavaotot Xotyoy ajixivov, ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danai), 11.1,450. Here the accusative may be omitted, so that Aavaoicri afxwav means to defend the Danai. For other constructions of i/xwu), see the lexicon.
1169. N. Ac^o/nat, receive, takes a dative in Homer by a similar idiom; as Siijaro ot (rK/jirrpov, he took his sceptre from him (lit./or Aim), 11.2,180.
1170. X. Sometimes this dative has a force which seems to approach that of the possessive genitive; as yXuxraa Si ot Sc'Serat, and his tongue is lied (lit. for him), Theog.178; ot t7T7roi avrols oYoVirat, they have their horses tied (lit. the horses are tied for them), X.yl.-3,485. The dative here is the dativus incomviodi (1105).
1171. X. Here belongs the so-called ethical dative, in which the personal pronouns have the force of for my sake etc., and sometimes cannot easily be translated; as tL ctoi ixadrjaofiai; what am I to learn for you ? Ar. iV. Ill; toutu vdvv /xot Trpoa-ixirt rov vovv, to this, I beg you, give your close attention, D. 18,17S.
For a dative with the dalive of [iov6p.ivos etc., see 1584.
Dative of Rklation.
1172. 1. The dative may denote a person to whose case a statement is limited, —often belonging to the whole sentence rather than to any special word. E.g.
Avavra t<2
2. So in such expressions as these : iv S«£ia to-irXtovri, on the right as you sail in (with respect to one sailing in), T. 1,24; crvvt-Xovt(, or a)? (tv vc oi't l UTrc'it', concisely, or to speak concisely (lit. for one having made the matter concise). So ok i/xoi, in my opinion.
Dativk of Possession.
1173. The dative with et/u, yiyvu/xat., and similar verbs may denote the possessor. E.g.
Etfrii" e^ol
|
249 |
1175] DATIVE. 249
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.
1174. The dative follows many adjectives and adverbs and some verbal nouns of kindred meaning with the verbs of 1100 and 1160. E.g.
Aver ixtvrjs <$ id="iv.i.p7509.1">loi
( With Nouns.) Ta Trap' -ijixiZv Suipa tois &ots, the gifts (given) by us to llic Gods, WEuthyph. 15*. So with an objective genitive and ix dative; as iirl Ka~aSovui
DATIVE OF RESEMBLANCE AND UNION.
1175. The dative is used with all words implying likeness or vnlilcaness, agreement or disagreement, union or approach. This includes verbs, adjectives, adverbs, and nouns. E.g.
~2.Kial-i coiko«s, like shadows; to 6/xotow iavrbv aXo), to make himself like to another, V. lip. ;5fl3c; tuutoi? o^oioVaroi', most like these, P. G. G18b; w-nXiOfj-ivoi Tois airocs Kupcu oirXoii, armed with the same arms as Cyrus, X. C.7,12; 7? b/xolov oitos toutois y avopolov, being either like or unlike these, P. 7J//.74C; 6/Wioy Sixatov a8iK(i> jiXibptiv, that he will punish a just and an unjust man alike, V. lip. !i(i'lc; iVwxi aXijoi<; olvo/jloiuk, to move unlike one another, P. 77.150"1; rbv 6/xuivvij.ov ifiavra, my namesake. D. 3.'21. Outc ('ourois ovrt akkr/Xoi'; b/xoXoyovo'iv. they agree neither with themselves nor with one another, P. Phdr. 237°; d/4<£i
|
250 |
250 SYNTAX. [1176
to terms loiih them, T. 1.24; fiovkoficu ere avrw SiaXtycaOat., / want you to converse with him, V. Lys.'21 lc.
(With Nouns.) *AtO7to??) O/uoidr^s tqvtuiv ckcivols, the likeness of these to those is strange, V. Th. 15&c; l i koividvmv aAA?;Aois, they have something in common with each other, 1 So.'Jol*; TraoafioXa.*; t<3 T£t'x"> making attack'/ upon the wall, t7riSpo/i>;v tu! '' a" assault on ilte wall, ''.i,'2'A; Aio? jipovraai> tit Hpiv, ih rivalry with the thuitdertngs of Zeus, li. Oi/c. 32b ; eVc/rao'Tao'i? fiipow; tivos Tw 6Au) T^s ^vX^s, a rebellion of one part of lite soul uyainM the whole, 1 }l/j.4Ub.
1176. Tim ilativo thus depends on adverbs of place and time; as a'fjut tij Tjfitpa, at tlayhreak, X./1.2,!2; i/Scup o/^oi1 toj 7tt;A<«J ijIxnTwfxivov, letiHr staim-d tcith Llood together with the mud, T. 7,^1 ; to. tovtoi*; itye£rj<;, what comes next to this, 1 7V..301'; toioS' ('yyi'1;, near these, E. Her.ill (iyyvi generally lias the genitive, 1140).
1177. To this class belong /xd^ofiai., 7roA«/x«tu, and others signifying' to contend or quarrel with; us fj.a.ca8aL tck^
1178. N. After adjectives of likeness an abridged form of expression may be used; as ko/mu Xup;'r£O"cr 6/uot'U, 7«iir /i7.r (/Art/ /;/") //«; Graces, II. 17,51; ras i'cra? TrXrjyas ifiOL, the same number of blows with me, Ar. A'. 6;W.
• OATIVK AFTER COMPOUND VERBS.
1179. The dative follows many veilw compounded with ev,
pi and inro. -^-Tois o/jkois i/jifxn'ii o 2i}/ios, /Ac people alnde by lite oaths, X.//.
ss pniJure no KnowUdrje in //in soul. X. M.I, I20; ivixavro rw pXe'i, ilwy pressed lianl on Pericles, T.2, .")9; i^avriZ ovvijori oei/ «ViiTTa/^c'i'a), / '(.■«.< conscious to myself that I I new nal/nny (lil. tciV/i !Hi/.n"c//')i !'. /l;)."2id ; -i;8i7 77-otc ctoi tT;r) a>; did il er-rr nrc.ur to you? X. jV/.'l, :',3; -zpoaiP'iXXov rcj tclx^u/iuti, /Ar-v attacked the fortification, T.4,11 ; dS
|
251 |
1184] DATIVE. 251
1180. N. Tins dative sometimes depends strictly on the preposition, anil sometimes on the idea of the compound as a whole.
CAUSAL AND INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE.
1181. The dative is used to denote cause, manner, and means or instrument.. E.g.
Caiisk: No'(T(j) a.Tro6
1182. N. The dative of respect is a form of tlio dative of manner; as rots (ruifjLacTLv aovvarot.,. . . rcus pva2'i dutn/TOi, incfipuble
p
rrj Ta£ti, vporcpov rvj 8vi'df>.ci koI Kpurrov lanv, although it is later in order, it is prior and sujierinr in power, I).3, ~>. So 7ro'A«, ©oi/zaKOs oi'6/xari, a city, Thapsacus by name, X./1.1.-111.
This dative often is equivalent to the accusative of specification (105$). '
1183. Xpao/xai, to use (to serve one's self by), takes the dative of means; as ^jwi-rat apyvpiw, they use money. A neuter pronoun (e.g. ti, ti, 0 ti, or tovto) may ho. added as a cognate accusative (1051); as n xprjcrtrui wot uxtw ; what will he do with him? (lit. tchat use will In- make of lu'iuf), Ar. A i7i.M.">. No^u'^di lias sometimes the same ineaning and construction as ^pao/iai.
1184. Tlie (lative of manner is used with comparatives to denote the Jm/rce of difference. E.g.
TloAAw KfjuTTOv (ittiv, it is nuich better (belter by much) ; iav rrj K(.
|
252 |
252 SYNTAX. [1185
illustrious city, Hd.6,106. Tocroi/ru) ijStov £ui, / live so much the more happily, X.C'.8,340; Ttvrj 8' avdyK^i acrdcvtartpa jxaKpii, and art is weaker than necessity by far, A.Pr. 514.
1185. So sometimes with superlatives, and even with other expressions which imply comparison; as opOorara fMKpa, most correctly hy far, P.Lg.76Hc; a^cSoy 8(Ka treat npo rfjs tv 2aAa/itw about ten years before the sea-fight at Salamis, ibid. ti98u.
DATIVE OF AGENT.
1186. The dative sometimes denotes the agent with the perfect and pluperfect passive, rarely with other passive tenses. E.g.
'E$cra.
1187. Jf. Here there seems to be a reference to the agent's interest in the result of the completed action expressed by the perfect and pluperfect. With other tenses, the agent is regularly expressed by wo etc. and the genitive (1234) ; only rarely by the dative, except in poetry.
1188. With the verbal adjective in -rc'os, in its personal construction (1595), the agent is expressed by the dative; in its impersonal construction (1597), by the dative or the accusative.
DATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT.
1189. The dative is used to denote that by which any person or thing is accompanied. E.g.
"EX^oVrwi/ Tlcpcwv iraynrXridu crroXw, when the Persians came with an army in full force, X. A .3,2" ; i^eis kou ittois to?s Swurco-raTois «ut ui/8pao"i Tropcvuip.c6a, let us march both with the strnnye.st horses and with men, X. 6'. •r>)3as; ol AaxcSat/xwiot ™ re Kara yr/v crrparw TrpoaiPaWov T(Z TUXifpo-TL koX Tats vawiv, the Lacedaemonians attacked the wall both with their land army and with their ships, T.4,11.
1190. This dative is used chiefly in reference to military forces, and is originally connected with the dative of 7neans. The last example might be placed equally well under 1181.
|
253 |
1196] DATIVE. 253
1191. This dative sometimes takes the dative of ovtos for emphasis; as fxiav (vavv) outois avSpdaiv €lov, they took one (ship) men and all, T.2,90. Here no instrumental force is seen, and the dative may refer to any class of persons or tilings; as Xajuxi /3aAt S
DAT1VK OF TIME.
1192. The dative without a preposition often denotes time when. This is confined chiefly to nouns denoting day, night, month, or year, and to names of festivals. E.g.
Trj avrrj Tjyiipa a.Tri8u.v(.v, he died on the same day; ('Ep/xui) /xta vvkt! o'l trXtltrroi. wtpUKO-rrrjcrav, the most of the llermae were mutilated in one night, 'J'. 0,27; oi Hd/aoi liinroXiopKyfiricrav (varia jj.rjvi,the Samimts were taken by siege hi the ninth month, T. 1,117; S«
1193. N. Even the words mentioned, except names of festivals, generally take iv when no adjective word is joined with them. Tims iv vvkti, at night (rarely, in poetry, mikti), l>nt futl vvktl, in one night.
1194. N. A few expressions occur like vcrripw XP"vi?< '" afler time; ^u/xCivo^ wpa, in the winter season; vov/ujvm (new-moon day), on the first of the month; and others in poetry. ^
1195. N. With ol-her datives expressing time h is regularly used; as iv rw avrw xti/xoii/i, in the same winter, T.2,'M. lint it is occasionally omitted.
DATIV10 OF PLACE.
1196. In poetry, the dative without a preposition often denotes the place where. E.g.
'EXXdSt oiVc'a voxwv, inhabiting dwellings in Hellas, 11.16,505; alOepi miW, dwelling in heaven, J7.4,160; ovpevi, on the mountains, 11.13,390; roi; (Zp.oi.criv
|
254 |
254 SYNTAX.
1197. In prose, tlie dative of place is chiefly confined to the names of Attic denies; as 17 MapaOwtu jxd ], the battle at Afara-l/ion (Imt eV 'A$r/vai<;): see fxix toiis Mapu^ium TrpoKiv&vvtv-(ru^ra? TuJf Trpoydi/oji/ Kal toiis tv IlA.aTou'als Trapara^a/AcVous kui roil? iv SaAa/xin rau/uu^ycrui'Tus, no, by those of our ancestors who ftuml in the front of danger id blurmlum, and those who arrayed them-selrcs at Plataea, and those who fought the sea-Jtghl at Salamis, 1). 18,208.
Still some exceptions occur.
1198. X. Some adverbs of place are really local datives; as Tavrrj, TtjSt, hare; olkoi, at home'. So kvkXu), in a circle, all around. (Si-e'-l;Ui.)
PREPOSITIONS.
1199. The prepositions were- originally adverbs, and as such they appear in com position with verbs (see SSL!, 1). They are used also as independent words, to connect nouns with other parts of the sentence.
1200. Hecides the prepositions properly so called, there are certain adverbs used in the same way, which cannot be compounded with verbs. These are called improper prepositions. For these see 1220.
1201. 1. Four prepositions tal;e the genitive only: u.vti, ooto, i£ (
'2. Two take the dalii'e only: iv and
■. Two take the arcuadtii-c only: dvd and (is (ir ij, — with the improper preposition (.'«. I'>r dvi in poetry with the dative, See l'2ti:J.
4. Fovir take the genitive and accusative: 8ta, Kara, furd, and p For jutix with the dative in Homer, see 1'212, 2.
5. Six take the yertitivc, dative, and accusative: d/xejit'(rare with genitive), i-n-i, vnpd, irtpi, -n-p6%, and viro.
IJ.SI5S3 OF THE I'M KT'OSITIONS.1
1202. d)ic()L (L;it- amb-, coin]i:in"
1 Only a general statement of the various uses of the prepositions is given here. For the details the Lexicon must be consulted.
|
255 |
j20(i] USES OF THE PTCErOSITIONS. 255
2. with tin; ijativk (only put-tic and Ionic), about, concerning,
on account of: dn
3. wit.li 1 lie acci sativk, uliuitt, iieur, of place., time, number,
etc.: d/x' c£Aa, iy ^/
In uo.Mi". : uboat, on both aides.
1203. avd (of. adv. avu, abvee), oliejlially >ip (iiplm.sud to KaTa).
1. with tluj. dativk (only epic and l.vric), vj on: uvu oii-fi-mpy,
(,n a xlvj)', Jl.,ib.
2. with tluj accusative, n/i alnng; and of motion inje.r, through,
aiuong (('1. Kard): —
((() of I'I.av K : di-ci rbu Trinanbi>, iij) thti vicar, Hd.'J,00 ; dea (TTpaToe, tlifdvtjh lite. aVmij, //. I,1U; otVtiV dvd Td (Jfji), to dwell tin the tnjis nf the hilU, X. .1..'!, f,i
(b) of timk: dul to> iro'Xc/ioi', through tin- tear, lid.8, 12-!; dj'd XpOfOf, iu t'oul'xe of time, lld.^, '11.
(c) In i)i^'i i;im]Tii-: expressions: dvix iKarov, ]hj hujtdre.ds, X.A. &, 41J; di'd ird
' " ^' 111 COM]'. : V'ji, bt'cl, (lijiliii.
1204. AvtC, with c.KMiivi; only. iitUend of, fur: afrl tto(^ov elpri-
vtjv fXui^fWa, /)/ phit'e. nf vtiv let us eliittise pr-ace, T. 4,20; di'O' u'>', vhi'.ri'fvre, A. I'r I!l ; dvr dStX^oO, fur a brother's sakr, S.lCUyM. Original meaning, nver aiiuinut, against. In cuMi'.: (t(minst, in opjmsUion, in return, instead.
1205. diro (Lai. ab), wilh ntsinvi; on]y, frnni, off fruin, air ay
front ; originally (as oppused to in) denoting se]iarnt.ion or di.partnre. from sometliinu: —
(a) of l-i.ACK : ddXrn. he lenjicil frmii the rar (liorses), //. 10, T0;i; and OadaaT)s. at a dix[
(b) of ■! iMji: diro toiJtoi' toP ^/iu'i/oi', /ruiii J/n'.s <('?«'', X. /I. 7, 0".
(c) of cai-i: ov ojninv: ann toitoi' rod roX/iTlMaros lTTT]i'{6t], for thi* b"ld act he teas i>ruixe
In co.Mr.: fro'ni,
1206. Std, through (l.at. di-, dis-)-1. with the (.kmtivi: :
(a) "f i'I.aci:: 5id do-7u'oos iJX^f, rt itei(( through the shield, 7/.7.2&J.
|
256 |
256 SYNTAX. [1207
(()) of timk: Sib vvktos, through the night, X. .4.4,0s2.
(c) of intkkvals of time or place: £id iroXXoG xp°"ov< after a long lime, Ar. PI. 1045; Sid rphrjs v^p^, every other day, lld2:)
(d) of mcakk: tXiye Si through an interpreter, X.A.2,3".
(c) iu various phrases like Si oIktov (xe'"i to pity; 5id
2. with the accusative:
(a) of apkni;v, on account of, by kelp of, by reason of: 5i4 toOto, on this account; 6i 'A0^in)», by help of Athena, Od. 8,020 ; oil 5i' liU, not owing to me, )>. IB, 18. (I)) of j'i.ack or time, through, during (poetic) : did Sunara, throng/), the halls, /(. 1,000; 5ia pUKra, through the night, Od. l'J, 00. Iii cojii'.: through, also apart (Lai. di-, dis-).
1207. til or is, with accosativi; only, into, to, originally (as op-
posed to in) to with in (Lat. in witli the accusative): fi's always in Attic prose, except in Thueydid«s, who has h. Both (i5 and is are for
(a) of place: Siip-nrar T. G, 2; fit n^po-os i'lropde-ro, he. departed for 1'emia (the Persians), X.C.8, 5-'; t6 A lloXX^cj;^ rt^xos, the wall loicurds (looking to) l'allene, T.I, SO.
(b) «f timk: is ■/)£>, until dawn, 0
(c.) of NU.MHEit and .mkascki:: «h JiaKocrious, (amonntinj) to two liundnd; tit Suva^uv, u/> Jy one's power.
(d) Of I'UHI'OSIi Or ItliFKniCNCi; : TraiidJfii-
train for virtue, P. 6'.519°; eis irdvTa 7rpu>Tov thai, to be first for everything, 1'. Ch. l.W; xPV"'^0" f's TI. useful for anything. In com r.: i)i to, in, to.
1208.
with t-he ablmivc: («) of i'i.ack: tV ZirdpTTT, !« Sparta;—with words implying
a number of pvople, among : (y ywai$l SXai^o?, braoe among
women, V,. Or. "i>i; i?>- irSm, in Oic presence of all; if itna-
■winter; i> itotl TrevTrjuoyTa, within fifty years, T. 1, lib.
(c) of otlicr relations: roy Ofpi»;Va iv ipyy dx°", th?V K"1'''' angry with I', (held him in anger), T. 2, 21 ; iv tQ S(
|
257 |
!2iO] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 257
power of) God, not with me, P. 18,193; l» iroWy iwoplf fiaav, they ware in great perplexity, X.A.'i, I2. As iv (like «ii and it) comes from in (see eh), it originally allowed the accusative (like Latin in), and in Aeolic iv may be used like eh; as iv KaXXJcrrai', to Callistc, l'ind.Py.4,268. In co.Mr.: in, on, at.
1209. «£ or Ik, with gf.nitivf. only (Lat. ex, e), from, out of;
originally (as opposed to Aw6) from within (compare tit).
(a) of 1'i-ACE: itc Zj-dpTijs
(b) of timi-:: Ik Tra^aiordrov, from the most ancient titiie,'l 1,18.
(c) of origin1: 6vap in Aio's ianv, the dream comes from Zeus, 7M,G3. So also with passive verbs (instead of vno with gen.): in Qolpov SaMf'Si destroyed by Phoebus, &.rh.33b (the agent viewed as the source), seldom in Attic prose. (See 1205.)
(d) of grovku for a judgment: ijiovXeiovTO it: tCiv irapovrav, they took counsel with a view to (startiny from) the present state of thiw/s, T. 3, 29.
In comi'.: out, from, away, off.
1210.
1. with the genitive:
(a) of pi.aci: : (irl irvpyov eVrij, he stood on a tower, fl. l(i, 700; sometimes towards: irXewrai-T-fs Jnl Xd/xov, having sailed towards
(b) of time: (
(c) of relation or liKFF.RKVCF. to an object: rout iirl tSsv Trpayn&Tuv, those in charge of (public.) affairs, D 18,247; iiri Ai/3i)t7s ex€1" T* ""< id="iv.i.p7638.1">/■"<», to be named for Libya, 11(1.4,45 ; iirl Tim! fywi>, speaking with reference to some one, see 1'. (!h. 15&d; so iirl
2. with the dative:
(a) of n.ACE : tivt' ivl irupyu, they sat on a tower, 11.3,153; iro'Xis e'wl rrj ddXarrrj oiKoufj.e'vri, a city situated vpon (bi/) the sea, X.A.I, IK
(b) of time (of immediate .succession) : iirl rovron, thereupon, X.C.a,:,n.
(c) of cause, I'L'ui'OSE, conditions, etc.: eVl vaiSeuiru niya (ppovoOvret, proud iif their education, P- Pr. 342d ; iir i$a-yuyrj, fvr exportation, lid. 7, 150; ini ro7ade, on these, conditions, Ar. Av. 1C02 ; iiri tj; (ay ko.1 ifiolq., on fair and equal terms, T. 1, 27. So i v and lip' u tc (1400).
(d) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, in the power of; and in many other relations: see the Lexicon.
3. with the accusative:
(a) Of place: to, tip to, towards, ayainsl: dramas lirl rbv
|
258 |
258 SYNTAX. [1211
iWov, mounting Ids htir.tr, X A 1,8'; (irl de£ia, to the right, on the. riijlil hand, X./l.O,4l; ^iri fiaaiXta. Umi, to march against the. Ai'iiy, X.A I,;!'.
(d) d1' riMi. or si'AC-i-:, (!i#]iothi,a extension: (nl iha
(c) of ;iii < id="iv.i.p7650.1">1'.jkct ainii'il at: Kar^Xflcx- ^irl B-oujrijv, I r.ame down
liprr for a piiet, Ar. 7i'. HIS. In r«Mi".: 7ij)uw, ouer, «//(•)•, toward, I", far, at, against, besides.
1211. Kara (el. adverb kcLtw, bulmo), originally down (opposed to
dvd).
1. wil.li tin.1 orcxrnvj;:
(«) Uovcii from : aXXoVevoi Kara t^s Tr/rpai, leupinij down from
ihcVOfX:, X.AA,2>~. (6) doV)i itpnH : fxiipov Ko.-rb. TTjs Af^aX^? KaTaxJa.i>T€S, pourint/
]ierfunu:x i»l Ilia head, V. Up. D'.'ij11. (c) lienenlh: nara xOo"t>s Znprnf-i, he buried beneath the earth,
S.y!)L*J4 ; oi Kara xOovbs Oto'i, the iiods brloio, A. Pis. 08!). ((!) aijainsl: ywv KaO' tip-Civ, saying against me. (its), S. Ph. OO.
2. with the AOousATivi:,
among, into, ag'.tin-f; also according to, concerning, (a) of 1'i.ACK: iaTi fiovy, doi':n stream; Kara yijv kai Kara
HaXaTiai', b>i land and hy sea, X. A..i, 2lli; xard 2i«jn-i;>'
7ro'Xiy, opjHisitc the cit'i Siiiopc, lid I, 7(i. (t) of Timi-:: Kara, t'ov w6X(fwi; during (at the, time of) the.
war, lid. 7, 137.
(c) mvi nint:iivi:i,v : »ara TptU, bij threes, three by three ; KaO' rjntpav, day by day. daihj.
(d) wrordinrj to,concerning: Kara, roih voVovt, according to law, 1). H,'2; ti) kar in(, as reijanh myself, 11.18,1M7 ; si) kard TTdpTa, in all respieit. • ra Kara tto(imv, military matters.
Jn co.Mr.: down, against.
1212. (i
1. willj tin1 (.r.Nirivi;:
(a) V'ith. it) Cornjftnni leith : prr' £Xu>i- X/^o tralpujv, lie (Jul'')t tiuth tin. Test oft/iii cum]>aitions, Od. 10, J20 ; /xerd $ibvru)v, aiiiong the lioivg, S. /'A. I.'il2.
(i) !';/. union villi, with the coojieralion of: /icra MavTivJuiv *uwiro(m>i">, they f/nii/hl in alliance, with the Mantineans, T. ti, 10f>; oi'Sc ij.tr' ai'rou ijaav, these were on his side, T. 3, (it>; 'TirZ/i/ioXoy dtTOKrdi-uvai p.cra Xapphov, they put Jlyperbolus to death by the aid of Cli.armin.ns, T.8, 73.
2. with the HATIVH (|>oct.ic, cliiifly <'pic), nmovtj : ^tra. Si rpira-
roiiTa' hvaaatv, and he mas reigniiig in the, third acneration, JMJ52
|
259 |
12)4] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 259
3. witli the accusative:
(a) into (the midst of), after (in quest of), for (poetic):
fKTd arpaibv rjXacr' 'Axo.t£>i; he drove into the. army of the
Achaeaus, 11.5,581); rrXiuv p.(ra xcXkoV, sailing after (in
quest of) copper, Od. 1, 181. (I)) ijiruui'iilly after, next to: /urb. t6v jro'X<,Moi after the war;
/i^yiffTDs p.tTa "iffTpoi', the largest (river) next to the Jsler,
Hd. 4,53.
In cum i'.: tritli (of sharing), among, after (in quest of): it, also denotes change, as in p*.Tavo
1213. irapd (Hum. also irapo.1), by, near, alongside of (see 1221, 2).
1. with the cknitivi:, froin beside, front : napa kijwk diroiw77J-
etiv, to return from the. shi]>s, it. 2 1 U ; 7rap' riix&p dira7-
2. with the ha rivi-, with, beside, near: ua/ia. llpidpoto Qipyou',
at Priam's gates, II. 7, :>■)(!; napa
3. with the acc:i:s ivk, tn (a place) vein; tn; also by the side
of, beyond or beside, except, along with, because of.
(a) of I'Laci-: : rptyas 7rdp ttotq.^6i>, turning to the (bank of the) river, II. !21,(»00 ; iaidyrf; irapd 701)9 0(Xoi'S, going in to (visit) their friends, T.2,!il.
(b) of 'riMi;: Trapd navra tov piivov, throughout the whole lime, D. 18,10.
(0) of CAl^si:: 7rupd i'qv rjiuTtpav ificXtiav, on account of our
neglect, 1)4,11. (d) of coMi-Auison : 7rapd rdXXa (,'ya, coiiijHtred v'ilh (by the
side of) other aniaials, X. M. 1,4'*.
(c) with idea of bojond or beside, ami esrepl: ovu «Vti Ti-apd toSt1 dXXa, there, ore no others ln-fides these, Ar. N.U'.IH ; wapb. rbi' vi-^v, contrary to the law (properly beyond it).
In comi'. : beside, along by, hilhcrward, wrongly (beside the mark), over (:A in overstep).
1214. irept, around (on all sides), about (compare A(i<{ id="iv.i.p7696.1">i).
1. with the <;i;njtivk, about, concerning (I.at. de) : wepl Jrarpds
ifihOai, to inquire, about his father, O0,.'i,'l ; 5c5ii>; ncp! avToo, fearing cuneitrning him, P. l'r.o'H)*. Poetic (e.hielly epic) abore, surpa^suig : Kparcpos T(pi tt&vtwi', mighty above all, II. 21, ,")ljli.
2. with the i>ativi:, ahuiit, around, concerning, of pi.ack or
Cai'si: (chii:ily poetic) : ci"5i/ef irfpi QT7)$«;in x'T""'a, he put on his tunic, about his breast, /MO,"21 ; t56cuj(i' in pi Mtw-Xdy, he feared for Meuelavs, 11 10,240; SeleavTes vepi tJj X>!>p<)., through fear for our laud, T. 1,74.
3. with the aciuikativb (nearly the same, as a^it), about, near:
fffTd/ifvai Tffpi roixoi', tu stand around the wall, /MK, .".74 ; 7rtpi 'EXX^ffTrovror, about (ue.ar) the, Hellespont, D.H. 'A; sipl
|
260 |
2G0 SYNTAX. [1215
toutous Tow? xp'"01"! about these times, T.3,89; «» Trcpl toOto, being about (engaged in) this, T. 7,31. In COM)-.: around, about, exceedingly.
1215. irpo (Lat. pro), with the gknitm k only, before: (a) of i'lack: vpb BvpHf, before the dour, ft. El. 10!). (/;) of TiMii: 7rp6 Wri-cov, before sup]*ei X. C.5, Gi0.
(c) of wii'uxcK : fj.axc6ai Tpb Tralduf, to fight for their children, ]l. 8, ill ; 6uwiv&vi>titi.v irpb fiaaiXiw;, to VU1I risk ill behalf of the king, X.C.8,8*.
(
In COM1-.: before, in defence of, forward.
1216. irpos* (Horn, also irporl or vorl), at or by (in front of).
1. with the GKNM'ivji:
(a) in front of looking towards: hutch irpbs B^Vtjs, it lies over'against Thrace., D.iili, 182. In swearing: irpis OcCiv, before'(by) tin: Gods. Snmotimes 'pertaining to (as cliar-acU'.r) : ij aapra irpbs yvvaiKSs, surely it is very like a woman, A.Ay.b)2.
(b) from (on the part of) : -rip-iv vpbs Zij»6s ixovrti, having honor from Zeus, Od. 11,002. Sometimes wit-b passive verbs (like iiir6), especially Ionic: in.y.a.^cjBo.i. npbs lltiaKTTpdTou, to be dishonored by Pixistratus, lid. 1,(51 ; dSotoDn-ai vpbs ruv irtiktwp, they are held in contempt by slates; X.Oec.4,2.
2. with the dative:
(a) at: dvd jrpij Ha/SiAum V" « KCpos, when Cyrus was at Babylon, X.C.7,51.
(b) in addition to: rpbs toutois, ftesWcs this; *-pbi tois iIXXois, besides all the rest, T. 2,Cl.
3. with the acui;sativk :
(a) to: dpi airr) irpbi "Oup.vov, I am going myself to Olympus, II. 1,420.
(b) towards: irpbt BoppS.*, towards the North, T. (>, 2; (of persons) vpbs dXXiJXous •qjux'a*' <(xo>/> £'1!' ^'I1' lllC Kace iowaiv^.s o))ti (iuo(/icr, 1.7,51.
(t) wWi a wVir/i to, according to: npbs rl p.e tolGt' ipunqs, (to what end) for what do you ask me this? .N.'';1l; t/)Ai ttjv Tuxpovaai' dOyafuv, according to their power at the time, D.I 5,28.
In coMi*.: to, towards, against, besides.
1217. criv, older Attic £«iv (Lat. cum), with dativk only, with,
in company v.ilh, m l>]i aid of. Xvv is chiefly poetic j it sekliDii occurs in Attic prose except in Xenophon, /wrd with the genitive taking its place.
|
261 |
1219] USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 261
(a) in company with: ijv8c avv MtveXdif, he came wHh Mene.-laus, It.:i, 206.
(b) by aid of:
(c) in accordance with : trim 61k?, with justice, Pind. /'j/.O, 90.
(d) sometimes instrumental (like simple, dative) : ^7 a* irXou-tok ^KTriuu (Of alxny, thou didst gain great wealth by (with) thy spear, A.Pe. 755.
In cumi*. : with, together, altogether.
1218. virip (Horn, also ivrfp), over (Lat. super).
1. with the genitive :
(a) of n.ACK:
(I)) for, in behalf of (opposed to KaTd) : Ovdniva Inrep rij% t6X
(c) chiefly in the orators, concerning (like irtpi) : ttjp imep toD woXluov yptipiyjv fxol""a!i having such an opinion about the war, D. 2,1.
2. with the accusative, over, beyond, exceeding: v-ntp oblbv
ifirftriTo Sui^oto!, he stepped over the. threshuld of the house, Od.l, 135 ; Onclp iiXa., over the sea, Oil. •">, 7-'i; inrtp t4 fi( -ctov, beyond what in best, A..4y.o78; inrlp hvvaixtv, beyond its power, T.0,10. In cojir. : over, above, beyond, in defeno: of, for the sake of.
1219. viri (Horn, also mal), under (Lat. sub), by.
1. with the genitive:
(a) of i'lack : ra inrb 77)5, things under the earth, P. Ap. 18b. Sometimes from under (chiefly poetic): ous vvb x^0"^ yKi ipiuirSf, whom he sent to light from beneath the earth, lies. 7Vi.G09.
(b) to denote the agent with passive verbs: tk ^n^aro vrr& toO 5ijmok, if any one teas honored by the peojde, X. //.2,3l;i.
(c) of cause: (nri> Movs, through fear; v
2. with the dative (especially poetic) : tu» iw<5 vocal, beneath
their feet, ll.'i,784; tCiv Bavdpruiv inr' 'IXlip, of those who fill under (the. walls of) Ilium, ~E.HeC.TSi; inrb ifl a.«po-v6i, under the acropolis, Hd.C, 105; oi inrb ^afftXej fii^-es, tliose who are under the king, X. C.8,1°.
3. with the acousativi: :
(a) of i'lack, under, properly to (a place) under: iir6 avios ^Xaa-e jiijXa, he drives (drove) the sheep into (nnder) a cave,
|
262 |
202 SYNTAX. [1220
72.4,27!); ijxecO' vird Tpol-ov, you came to Troy (i.e. to besiege it), Oil. 4, 140; rdde iraura vird trcpas woiucrdai, to briinj all these under their sway., T. 4,00. (6) of timk, towards (entering into) : i/vb rmra, at nightfall (hat. sub noctem), 'J'. 1, lif>. Sometimes at the time of, during: vt6 rbv
In com-. : under (in place oi1 rank), underhand, slighll'i, gradually (like sub).
1220. (Improper Prepositions.) These are avev, drip, api, C-iXP1-' H(Tutv, tuna, trXrjv, and «j? (si'e 1200). All take the genitive except a!?, which takes the accusative. They »vc never used in composition.
1. okv, without, except, opart from: 4«u d/.oXouSou, witjumt an attendant, V.Sy.2la; drtv toC k-aXrji/ 56tav cve7kciv, apart from (be-sulns) briiii/iinj good reputation, 1). IB, 8(1.
2. o-rtp, trillion I-, apart from (poetic) : drep Zi?i'is, without (the help of) Zeus, 11. 15,!>1)2.
.". aypi, until, as far an: 8-yol rns rtXcuTfis, ?
4. |UxPl> "'I'l'i fs Tin' tis: M^X/" T^s 7r6Xews, as />»• as the, city, T.G, U(i.
0. (uto^v, between: fifra^i
(i. cctKa or i'vtKiv (Ionic fiV«a, fiVf*ef), on account of, for th(.m'lif-rally jitter its noun) : i#pioj ft'wico rfjo-Je, o)i
7. w )v, (Mci'j)t: wX-iJv y (nod *ai iroS, except myself and you, S.A7.00U.
8. us, (o, used with the accusative like, tis, but only with personal objects : afyUcro w's llcpSfcu-av Kai oKkiSin-tin, lie came to Ptr-diccas and into Chalcidice, T.4,7!).
1221. ]. In genera], the accusative is the case used with prepositions to denote that tominls which, over which, along which, or upon which motion takes plaoe; the. genitive, to denote (.bat from which anything' proceeds; the dative, to denote that in which anything takes place.
2. It will be noticed how the peculiar meaning of each case often modifies the expression by which we translate a given preposition : thus 7rapa means near, by the side of; and we have napa tod f3u(Ti((i}<;, from the neir/lihorhnod of the l-im/; wapa. tw /SuC'Af i, in the rieir/lhorhoodoflhe/.iw/- vapd rbv (3a
|
263 |
1220] USES OF THE MiKi'OSITIONS. 26.3
1222. 1. Tlie original adverbial use of the prepositions sometimes appears when tliey are used without a noun; this occurs especially in the older Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus ircpi, round about or exceedingly, in Homer; and npos Si or ko.1 irpos, and besides; (v 8e, ami among them; cirt hi, and upon this; fiira 8e, and next; in Herodotus.
12. The preposition of a compound verb may also stand separately, in which case its adverbial force plainly appears; as cVi Kvitfio.'i rjkOiv (Kvi
This is called tmesis, and is found chiefly in Homer and the early poets.
1223. A preposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to which it belongs; as vtojv airo, 7riuous f*/H, oAtcras airo (for d?roA.t-ous), CW. 0,5!$4. For the change of accent (anastrojihe), see 110, 1.
1224. N. A few prepositions are used adverbially, with a verb (generally tVn) understood ; as vdpa for vdpicrn, Ittl and jj.tTa (in Homer) for firmn and fiirivTi. So tn for JVtori, and poetic ora, up! for avdara (avacrTrjdi.). For the accent, see 110,2.
1225. 1. Sometimes cl<; with the accusative, and Ik or d^o with the lenitive, are used in expressions which themselves imply no motion, with reference to some motion implied or expressed in the context; as ui £wo8ot ts to icpov (yiyvovTO, the synuds were held in the temple (lit. into the temple, involving tin', idea, of going; into the temple to hold the synods), T. ],i)C; tois ik Ylvkov /4>8utji-(iot-KOTes), lite those captured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylo*, i.e. the captives from Pylvs, Ar.JV. 180; hiy)pT:aaro kol avra tu. airh tuiv oIklu>v ^liAa, even the very timlicrs in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been stolen, X./l. L',Ln0.
'2. So lv with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of mot.ion, referring to rest which follows the motion ; as lv tw Trora/uL trrtaov, the;/ full (into and remained) in the river, .AytnVaai ttItttc Ai
Tliese (1 and 'J) are instances of the so-called construclioprm ijnnnn.
1226. N. Adverbs of place an? sometimes interchanged in the same way (l'J"jr>); as 077-01 KaOio-Tafitv, where n>e arc slandiiuj, lit. whither having come ice are standhiq, S-.O.C'l'.i; tis ayroti Tof (KtZ&tv Troifj.ov Scvpo y£oi'T
So ivdiv xai iv6w, nn this side and on that, like tV Sefta? (a dextra), 0?) the rioht.
|
264 |
264 SYNTAX. [1227
1227. A preposition is often followed by its own case when it is part of a compound verb. E.g.
IIapSco/xa-tuiv, let some one come forth from the house, A. Ch. C03 ; £vviirpa.(T(rov avrio 'A/x<£iffo-ij9, Amphisscans assisted him, T. 3,101. For other examples of the genitive, see 1132; for those of the dative, see 1179.
ADVERBS.
1228. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. E.g.
Outuk tlniv, thus he spoke;
1229. N. For adjectives used as adverbs, see 92G. For adverbs preceded by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see 052. Kor adverbs with the genitive or dative, see 1088; 1092; 1148; 1174; 1175. l<"or adverbs used as prepositions, see 1220.
THE VERB.
VOICES.
ACTIVE.
1230. In the active voice the subject is represented as acting; as TpeVco tovs 6cf>daiJ.ovs, I turn my eyes; 6 irarrjp (juXel tov Tral&a, the father loves the child; 6 (tttto? Tpe^ei, the horse runs.
1231. Tim form of t.ho active voice includes most intransitive verbs; as Tpt^o>, run. On the other hand, the form of the middle or passive voice includes many deponent verbs winch are active and transitive in meaning; as /3ouAo/iui tovto, I want this. Some transitive verbs have certain intransitive tenses, which generally have the meaning of the middle voice, as to-TTyxa, / stand, tcrrqv, I stood, from iotij/u, place; others have a passive force, as avlcrrrj-
1232. The same verb may be both transitive and intransitive;
|
265 |
1239] THE VERB. —VOICES. 265
as iXavvui, drive (trans, oi' intrans.) or march; «x<», have, sometimes hold or slay (as e^t &J, stay notv, P.Pr. 349d); with adverbs, be, as tv «x£t! it i* well, bene se habet. So irpaTTu>, do, iv (or kukws) rrpaxTui, 1 am well (or badly) off, 1 do well (or badly). The intransitive use sometimes arose irom the omission of a familiar object; as tAaww (anroi' or ap/*a), (o drive, tcXivtolv (tov jiiov), to end (life) or to die. Compare the English verbs drive, turn, move, increase, etc.
PASSIVE.
1233. In the passive voice the subject is
as acted upon; as d 7rat? inrb tov iraTpbs (friXelrai., the child is loved by the father.
1234. The object of the active becomes the subject of the passive. The subject of the active, the personal agent, is generally expressed by vtto with the genitive in the passive construction.
1235. The dative here, as elsewhere, generally expresses the inanimate instrument; as PakkovTiu Aitfois, they are lilted by stones.
1236. Even a genitive or dative depending on a verb in the active voice can become the subject of (.he passive ; as Karu4>povurai vtt' i/xov, he is despised by me (active, kutu^/jorj avrov, 1102); •jruTTiviTdt vtto tuiv 6.p^ojnv
1237. N. Other prepositions than iwo with the genitive of the agent, though used in poetry, are not common in Attic prose: such are irapa., 7rpo'?,
1238. 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive may have the dative of the agent
2. The persona] verbal in -tc'os takes the dative (1596), the impersonal in -t«m> the dative or accusative, of the agent (1597).
1239. When the active is followed by two accusatives, or by an accusative of a thing and a dative of a person, the case denoting a person is generally made the subject of
|
266 |
26G SYNTAX. [1240
the passive, and the other (an accusative) remains unchanged. E.g.
Ovhiv uAAo StSuovcerai avOpunros, a man is taur/ht nothing else (in llic active, ov&v uAAo 8i8ciTKt>u
'l'lu'. first, two i'.xaii)]iles avc cases of tlic cognate accusative (H).jl; of the tiling retained wil.li the ]>assive, while tlie accusative or dative uf the person is made the subject.
1240. 1. A cognate accusative (1051) of the active form, or a neuter pronoun or adjnciive representing such an accusative, may become the subject of the passive. E.
O xiVSuyos KivSwevtTCu, the risk is run (nct.ive, rov klv^vvov Kivb*v-vcvu, he runs the risk) : see V.L/ieh. 187b. Et' oiSiv rj//.apTi]ruL /xoi, if no fault Ads been committed by me (active, oi'-Sec rjfidpTtjKa), And. 1,33.
2. The passive may also be used impersonally, the cognate subject being implied in the verb itself; as (VtiSiy ai'rols TrapccrKtv-utrTO, when preparation had been made, T. 1, 4U ; ojrt -qulliijTai. ovtc w^LoAoy^rui1 (s< €yuoi), vo sacriUqc has been d< id="iv.i.p7802.2">nc and no eonjession has been made (by me). And. 1,71.
:i. This occurs clik-Hy in mu-.1i neuter patlicipi;il exprossious as Tci uol ko.jj.oI jSc/iiw/ic'i'u. //c lives passed by i/ou and by me, D. IS, li')"); al toiv ttiiroXn(.vp.ivusv tuduvui,
1241. N. Some intransitive active forms are used as passives of other verbs. Thus tu irouiv, to Icue/it, tv TTacr^dv, to he benefited; (v iyeiv, to praise, (v aKovav Cpoel. kKwv), ta be praised; uipuv, to capture, aAoii'at, to be cnjitured; (X7rOKTCi'v«iv, to kill, awoOvrjoKtiv, to be killed; (KfjixXXav, to cast out, iKiri-nTtw, to be cast out; Suoxfiv, to prosecute, (ftcvyny, to be prosecuted (to be a defendant); duoAu'u), to acnuil, aTTorj>cvyui, to be acquitted.
|
267 |
1246] VOICES. 267
MIDDLE.
1242. In the middle voice the subject is represented as acting upon himself, or in seme manner which concerns himself.
1. As acting on himself. E.g.
YjTpajrovTO 7rpo9 XrjOTUav, they turned themselves to piracy, T. 1,.;. So iravofuu, cease (slap one's self), ■ntidtaOa.i, trust (persuade one's self), ffmivo/Mt, appear (show one's self). This most natural u.so of the middle is the least common.
2. As acting for himself or with reference to Jam-self. E.g.
'O Brjfj.01; TiBiTai i'0/ious, the people male laws for themselves, whereas tiOtjcti vo/iou? would properly be said of a lawgiver; ruvrav fjiTaTrf/nru/jja, 1 semi for him (to come to me); a.Tr(ir(fi.iriTo ai/roi!?, he dismissed them; TrpofJaWirai ryv acrviSa, he holds his shield to protect himself.
3. As acting on an object helongirig to himself. E.g.
*HA#£ Ai>y(ty«i'os 6vyaTf)a, he came to ransom his (own) daughter, 11. l,i:i.
1243. N. The last two uses may be united in one verb, as in the last example.
1244. N. Often the middle expresses no more than is implied in the active; Urns Tfjoiraiov i
1245. K. The middle sometimes has a causative meaning; as i&ihatafx-nv
This gives rise to some special uses of the middle; a« in &ivti'£ti>> luiil, 8uvii£ufJLai, borrow (cause somebody to lend to oue's self); /j.inOui, let, tuo-flovfjuu, hire (anise to be let to one's self) ; / let myself for pay is c/jmvtvv )xui6w. So ti'vo), pmj (I penally, rlvofuu, punish (vuile another pay a penalty).
1246. N. The middle of certain verbs is peculiar in its meaning. Thus, alpui, lake, alpov/MU, choose; a.Tro&io'uifU, i/ive bad:, diroStSo/uxt, sell; ttTTTft), fasten, airro/zai, Hint/ to (fasten myself to), ho t^uf"", hold to, both with genitive; ya/xui rwa, marry (said of a man),
|
268 |
268 SYNTAX. [1247
tivi, marry (said of a woman ); ypa.
1247. K. The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both active and middle; thus ypa
1248. N. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense; as d&Kw, / wi^ng, dSiKij
TENSES.
1249. The tenses may express two relations. They may designate the time of an action as present, past, ov future; and also its character as going on, as simply taking place, or us fnixlu'd. The latter relation appears in all the moods and in the infinitive and participle; the former appeal's always in the indicative, and to a certain extent (hereafter to be explained) in some of the dependent moods and in the participle.
I. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
1250. The tenses of the indicative express action as follows: —
1. Piiiisi'.NT, action going on in present time: ypd
2. Jmtjcufkct, action going on in past time: (ypa
3. Pkrfkct, action finished in present time: ylypa^a, 1 have written.
4. Pj,ui'eh]''kct, action finished in past time: iyiypd.
5. Aorist, action simply taking place in past time: typaipa, I wrote.
6. Futurk, future action (either in its progress or in its mere occurrence): ypiiipw, I shall vnite or / shall be writing.
7. Future Perfect, action to be finished in future time:
ai, it will have been written.
|
269 |
1267] TENSES.
125L This is shown in the following table: —
269
|
|
Present Time. |
Pant 'lime. |
Future Time. |
|
Action going 1 on / |
Phesknt |
Impehtect |
Futuke |
|
Action simply taking place / |
|
Aohist |
FUTUHE |
|
Action 1 finished ] |
Pekfect |
Plltlkikct |
Fl-t. Perfect |
For the present and the aorist expressing a general truth (gnomic), see 1292.
1252. In narration, the present is sometimes used vividly for the aorist. E.g.
KcAevci ir€^npai avopa.*;• ano <7 riXXoualv ovv, ko! ircpi avruivo ®tyu
This is called the Historic Present.
1253. 1. The present often expresses a customary or repeated action in present time 5 as ovtos fxiv v8u>p,
2. The imperfect likewise may express customary or repeated past action; as 2«»cpaT^s alcrrrep iyiyvoicrxev ovtu><; tcyc, as Socmtes thought, so he used to speak, X. M. 1,14.
1254. The present /i.«AAo), with the present or future (seldom the aorist) infinitive, forms a periphrastic future, which sometimes denotes intention or expectation; as fieWa tovto iroiiiv (or irovff-cruv), he is about to do this; cl /x«AX« 17 voXiTtia cra£i
1255. The present and especially the imperfect often express an attempted action ; as ireiOovcLv fyta?, they are trying to persuade you, Isae. 1,20; 'hXowqtrov iZiZov, he offered (tried to give) Ilalon-nesus, Aesch.3,83; d inpd&crtTO ovk lyivtTO, what was attempted did not happen, T. 0,74.
1256. The presents iJkd, I am come, and o"xo/xai, / am gone, have the force of perfects; the imperfects having the force of pluperfects.
1257. The present ilpu, 1 am going, with its compounds, has a future sense, and is used as a future of «p^o^uxi, eAtixro/um not being in good use in Attic prose. In Homer tlfu is also present in sense.
|
270 |
270 SYNTAX. [1258
1258. The present with wdXai or any other expression of past time has the force of a present and perfect combined; as 7raAai tovto Xtyw, I leave lout/ been telling this (which 1 now tell).
1259. 1. The aonVf takes its name (ddptcrro?, unlimited, unquali-Jied) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none of the limitations (o/;oi) as to completion, continuance, repetition, etc., which belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds to the ordinary preterite in English, whereas the Greek imperfect corresponds to the forms / was doing, etc. Thus, ewoUt. tovto is lie was doing this or he did this habitually; imrOL-qKi tovto is he has already done iJtis; lirtTroirjKCi tovio is he had already (at some past time) done this; hut (TToirjcrt tovto is simply lie did this, without qualification of any kind. The aorist is then.1 fore commonly used in rapid narration, the imperfect in detailed description. The aorist is more common in negative sentences.
2. As it is not always important to distinguish between the progress of an action and its mere occurrence, it is occasionally indifferent whether the imperfect or the aorist is used; compare HXtyov in T. 1,72 (end) with uttov, ikc£ai>, and ?Xt£e in 1,79. The two tenses show different views (both natural views) of the same act of speaking.
1260. The aorist of verbs which denote a slate or condition may express the entrance into thai, state or condition; as ttXoutoi, I am rich; (ttXovtovv, 1 vuis rich; itrXovrrjcra, J became rich. So ijiaai-Xcvae, lie became king; yjpit, he look office (also he held office).
1261. After eVu'and tVtiSr/, after thai, the aorist is generally to be translated by our pluperfect; as fVaSij carijXBov, after they had departed. Compare postrjuam venit.
1262. N. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with t)(w may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry; as 6uv/ia
1263. N. Some perfects have a present, meaning; a.s 6vrj
In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; as J/877, J knew.
|
271 |
1270J TENSES. 271
1264. N. The perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future; as tl /x£ cutr#r/<7(Tui, oAwAa, if he shall perceive me, I am ruined (perii), ft- /■'/(.70. So sometimes the present, as u7ro'AAi7*ui, 1 perish.' (for / shall perish'), L. lli, 1-1; and even the aoiist, as air
1265. N. The second person of the. future may express a ]ier-viission, or oven a command; as npiiid-i olov uv diXys, you may act as i/iiu please, S. 0. ('• i'00 ; ir
For the periphrastic future with jucXXui and the infinitive, see 1201.
1266. N. The future perfect is sometimes merely an emphatic future, di'iiotiny that a future act will be immediate or decisive; as tf>pa.£<, Kul 7rtTrfi
1267. 1. Tlie division of the tenses of the indicative into primary (or principal) and secondary (or lihloricul) is explained in 44X.
2. In dependent clauses, when the construction allows both .subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and optative, tlie subjunctive or indicative regularly follows primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses. E.
IIijarToviriv a Si' fiovXiovTai., they iln whatever they please; (JT/mrroc fj u vXocvt o, th<-y did wha/coer they pleased. A iyover tv on roCro jiovkavrai, they say that they wish for this; iXe^ay oti tuvto /SouAon'To, they said that they wished for this.
Thi'..se eoiisti uctions will be explained hereafter (1'1-il ; 14S7).
1268. N. Thi) gnomic aorist is a jiiiinary tei'se, as it lv.fers to present time (I"_'!r2); and the historic present is secondary, as it refers to past time (l'J.VJ).
1269. The only exception to tins principle (1207, 2) occurs in indirect discourse, where the form of the direct discourse can always he retained, even after secondary tenses. (See. 14S1, 2).
1270. 1. The. distinction of primary and secondary tenses extends to the dependent moods only where the tenses there keep the same disl inetion of lime which they have in the indicative, as iu the optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (1280).
|
272 |
272 SYNTAX. [1271
2. An optative of future time generally assimilates a dependent conditional relative clause or protasis to tlie optative when it might otherwise be in the subjunctive: thus we should generally have ■wparTOUv av a [3ovoivto, they xcould do whatever they miyht jileasv. See 14;i9. Such an optative seldom assimilates the subjunctive or indicative of a final or object clause (13G2) in prose; but oftener in poetry. It very rarely assimilates an indicative of indirect discourse, although it may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (1358).
II. TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS.
A. Not in Indirect Discourtsr..
1271. In the subjunctive and imperative, and also in the optative and infinitive when they are not in indirect discourse (1279), the tenses chiefly used are the present and aorist.
1272. 1. These tenses here differ only in this, that the present expresses an action in its duration, that is, as going on or repeated, while the aorist expresses simply its occurrence, the time of both being otherwise precisely the same. E.g.
'Eav iroiij tovto, if he shall be doing thin, or if he shall do this (habitually), iav voiyjar] tovto, (simply) if he shall do this; (.1 iroioiij toGto, if he. should be doing this, or if he should do this (habitually), d Troiqacie toCto, (simply) if he should do this; iroiti toSto, do this (habitually), -noi-qaov tovto, (simply) do this. Outid vtKr)(7aifit t e'yci Kal vo/xt£oi'/a??v o~o
2. This is a distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has (for example) only one form, si facial, corresponding to «! voioirj and ci TTOt.yicrci.lv.
1273. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions, represents an action as finished nt the time at which the present would represent it as going on. E.g.
Ae'oot/ca fir) Xrjdr)v TrtnoiriK-q, I fear lest it may prove to have caused forgetfulncss (/at) ttoitj' would mean lest it may cause), D. 19,3. MijStn fiarfliiv os av /j.rj 7rpoVepo5 ficfiovdrjKus vjjuv rf, to help no one who shall not previously have helped you (os av /«/ • • • J3ov6tJ would mean who shall not previously help you), U. 19,16. Oi/c av Sio
|
273 |
1270] TENSES. 273
tovto ■/tliv ovk ciOvs S«8
1274. N. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command that something shall be decisive and permanent; as ravra cipij
1275. N. The perfect infinitive sometimes expresses decision or permanence (like the imperative, 1274), and sometimes it is merely more emphatic than the present; as clirov ttjv Bvpav KixXtlvOat, they ordered the gate to be shut (and kept so), X. H. 5, 47. "HAuwev €7ri tous McVupos, war' ixuvovs iKTriirkrJx&ai Kal rp(ii.v em tu. oirXa, so that they were (once for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to aryns, X./4.1,5IS. The regular meaning of this tense, when it. is not in indirect discourse, is that given in 1273.
1276. The future infinitive is regularly used only to represent the future indicative in indirect discourse (1280).
1277. It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in place of the regular present or aorist, to make more emphatic a future idea which the infinitive receives from the context. E.g.
'EStrjOrjO-av tSiv Mcyapeuv vavat (T^ai ijvn-rrpoirip.ypf.lv, they asked the Mcgarians to escort them with ships, T. 1,27. Ovk airoKQ)-AvfTiiv SvvaTol ovtc;, not being able to prevent, T. 3,28. In all such cases the future is r.tiictly exceptional (see 1271).
1278. One regular exception to the principle just stated is found in the periphrastic future (1254).
B. In Indirect Discourse.
1279. The term indirect discourse includes all clauses depending on a verb of saying or thinking which contain the thoughts or words of any person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the general Structure of tlie sentence. It includes of course all indirect quotations and questions.
|
274 |
271 SYNTAX. t'280
1280. When the optative and infinitive stand in indirect discourse, eacli tense represents the corresponding tense of
■ the same verb in the direct discourse. E.g.
'EAe-yty on ypd
Ei7r(i/ on avhpu. dyoi of clp£u.i htoi, he said that he was bringing a mun whom it was necessary to confine (he said av&pt dyu> bv tlpiai O€i), X.7/.5,4P. 'VjKoyL^oi'TO uj9, €1 fxyj jUa^otvTO, diro
1281. N. These constructions ave explained in 1487, 1-194, and 1-11)7. Here they merely show the force of (he tenses in indirect, discourse. Compare especially the dilference between tf/qn-l ypd-
1282. N. The construction of 1280 is the strictly in-ojier use of the future infinitive (127(5; 1277).
1283. N. The future perfect infinitive is occasionally used here, to express future completion ; as vo/Ju'CCTi *" TTfSe rrj '//'f'p'.' ifii KaraKiKoij/tn-Oui, helieve that on that day I shall Imvt: l/cen already (i.e. shall he the same as) cut in jiicees, X./l. 1, O1C.
1284. N. The future perfect, participle very rarely neoiivs in n siinil.ir sense (see T.7.25).
1285. ]. The present infinitive may represent, the hnperf/rl as •well as the present indicative,; as riras ti'i^a? rmoXa/ifidvcr £^X€' a^at tov QiXnnrov ot' irnrcvhtv ; what proj/ers do you sup/iose J'luhp viadc when he was pnurhu) HlialimifT (i.e. rivas ijvp')(£to ;), D. 10,1-50. The perfect infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluperfect. In such cases the time, of the infinitive must always be shown 1)V the context (as above by ot' taniv^tv). Se.e 1289.
2. For the present optative representing the imperfect, see 1488.
|
275 |
128< id="iv.i.p7918.1">»] TENSES. 275
1286. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, swearing, and a few others, form an intermediate class between verbs which take tlie infinitive in indirect discourse and those wliich do not (see 1270); and though they regularly have the future infinitive (1280), the present and aorist are allowed. E.g.
"Hm£ot> l^a-XV' ioto dai, thei/ expected that there would be a bailie, T.4,71; but u ovTrort r/K-Triaiv vadclv, what he never expected ti> suffery K.//•/*'. 740. Xenophou has viri(i(.TO p.r^)(avrfv vapi$civ, C-(>,I21, and also i-iTta^tTO fiov(vM. 'O/xdcracTts TuuTai-; iniAivf'iv, having sworn to abide by tltcsc, X. II. 0,3-c; but dfioaai elvai /j.iv rrjv ap^ryi/ KOiinjv, Trdvra<; 8' ip-iv uttoSoCku txjv Xiopav, to swenr that the (/ooernment should be common, but that all shoulit glee up the land to you, I). 2-i, 170.
Jn Knglish »'<; can say J hope {e.cpncl or promise) to do this, like itoiiiv or Troirjaui; or 1 hope I shall do this, like 7roo;crttv.
1287. X. The future optative i.s never used except as the representative of the future indicative., either in indirect discourse (see 1280), or in the construction of 1372 (which is governed by the principles of indirect discourse). Even in these the future indicative is generally retained. See also 1503.
ID. TENSES OK THE 1'AUTICIPLE.
1288. The. twises of the participle generally express the same, time as those of the indicative; bar, they are present, past, or future relatively to the time of the verb with which they are connected. E.g.
A/iupTuvti toIto 7rotujy, he errs in doing tliis; yj/xd/)rai'C tovto ttouui/, he erred in doing this; d/MapTi/criTai tovto ttoioiv, he null err in doing this. (lien; ttoiwv is first present, then past, then future, absolutely; but always present to the verb of the sentence.) So iu indirect discourse: o'Sa tovtov ypa
TaCra (.lttovtcs, dirqkOov, having said this, they departed. 'Eirrj-vcaav rot's elpr)KOTa<;, they praised those who had (already) spoken. TovTo iroirjouiv tp^trui, lie is coming to do this; tovto 7roii](To)V r)6tv, he came to do this. "AirtXOe ravru Xajjuiv, lake this and be off (A.o/?ajk being past to ar-tXOc, but absolutely future).
1289. The present may here also represent the imperfect; as
|
276 |
276 SYNTAX. [1200
olSa kAkuvio (Tw
1290. N. The aorist participle in certain constructions (generally with a verb in the aorist) does not denote time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses time coincident with that of the verb. See examples in 1563, 8; 1085; 1585. See Greek Moods, §§ 144-150.
IV. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES.
1291. The present is the tense commonly used in Greek, as in English, to denote a general truth or an habitual action. E.g.
TiKTtt rot Kopo9 vfipiv, otov kuku> o/3os (ttijtui, satiety begets insolence, whenever ■prosperity follows the wicked, Theog. 153.
1292. In animated language the aorist is used in this sense. This is called the gnomic aorist, and is generally translated by the English present. E.g.
"Hv Ti? tovtuiv ri Tro.pafJu.ivr], £r)fjuav ovrols iireOicrav, i.e. they impose a penalty on all who transgress, X. C. 1,22. Mi" r)p-(pa tov /xiy Ka&ilcv vipoOev, rov 8' ijp* avui, one day (often) brings down one man from a height and raises another high, E. frag.424.
1293. N. Here one case in past time is vividly used to represent all possible cases. Examples containing such adverbs as iroAAams, often, tjSjj, already, ouiru, never yet, illustrate the construction; a.s a@vp.ovvn>; di/Spts oiirui Tpd-n-cuov iarrjaav, disheartened men never yet raised (i.e. never raise) a trophy, P. Crilias, 108c.
1294. N. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric similes; as ■Sjpnrt 8*
1295. The perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. E.g........
To Be fir] «/A7roSuiv dvui/Tayojvurro) cwota titi/ajjtiu, but those who are not before men's eyes are honored loith a good will which has no rivalry, T.2,45.
1296. The imperfect and aorist are sometimes used with the adverb dv to denote a customary action. E.g.
AiTjpwTwv bv avroi/j ti Xiyouv, I vscd to ask them (I ivould often ask them) what they said, P. Ap.22". IIoAAa»as tjicqvou.ij.iv av v/xos, we used often to hear you, Ar. Lys. 511.
|
277 |
1303] THE PARTICLE "AN. 277
1297. N. This iterative construction must be distinguished from that of the potential indicative with av (1335). It is equivalent to our phrase he would often do this for he used to do this.
1298. N. The Ionic has iterative forms iu -
THE PARTICLE 'AN.
1299. The adverb av (epic «e, Doric kol) has two distinct uses.
1. It may be joined to all the secondary tenses of the indicative (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the optative, infinitive, or participle, to denote that the action of the verb is dependent on some circumstances or condition, expressed or implied. Here it belongs strictly to the verb.
2. It is joined regularly to el, if, to all relative and teinporal words, and sometimes to the final particles &>6(f>pa, when these are followed by the subjunctive. Here, although as an adverb it qualifies the verb, it is always closely attached to the particle or relative, with which it often forms one word, as in idv,
1300. N. There is no English word which can translate av.
In its first use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb (/SoijAoito av, he would wish; eA.oifiijv av, 1 should choose). In its second use it generally has no force which can be made apparent in English.
1301. N. The following sections (1302-1309) enumerate the various uses of av: when these are explained more fully tjlsewlipvc, reference is made to the proper sections.
1302. The present and perfect indicative never take av.
1303. The future indicative sometimes takes av (or «') in the. early poets, especially Homer; very rarely in Attic Greek. E.g.
Kal kI n?
|
278 |
278 SYNTAX. [1304
//. 1,174. Th« future with aV seems to be an intermediate form between the simple future, will honor, ami the optative with av, would honor. One of the few examples in Attic prose is in
1304. 1. The past tenses of the indicative (generally the imperfect or aoiist) are used with &v in a potential sense (1335), or in the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition (1397). E.g.
Ovhiv av kixkov (TTOi-qcrav, they could (or would) have done no harm; rjXOiv av tl €K(cv(ra, he would have come if 1 had commanded him.
2. The imperfect and aoiist indicative with av may also have an iterative sense. (See 1296.)
1305. 1. In Attic Greek the subjunctive is used with av only in the dependent constructions mentioned in 1299, 2, where av is attached to the introductory particle or relative word.
See 1307; 1370; 1382; 1423, 2.
2. Iu epic poetry, where the independent subjunctive often has the sense of the future indicative (1355), it may take k« or av, like the future (130,'J). E.g.
Ei 8t ki jj.rj htlirjcnv, iydj 8c kiv uiiros tAw/uut, and if he does nol give her up, 1 will lake her myself, 11.1,324.
1306. The optative with av luus a potential sense (1327), and it often forms the apodosis of a condition expressed by the optative with el, denoting what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled (1408).
1307. N. The future optative is never used with av (1287).
1308. 1. The present and aorist (rarely the perfect) infinitive azid participle with av represent the indicative or optative with av; each tense being equivalent to the corresponding tense of one of these moods with
2. Thus the present infinitive or participle with av may represent either an imperfect, indicative or a present optative with up; the aorist, either an aorist indicative or an
|
279 |
Till-: I'AUTICLK "AN1. 279
aorist optative with dv; the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect, optative with dv. E.g.
(Prcs.) 4>r]Crlv avrovs (XtvOcpovs av (Ivai, il tovto (irpa$av, he says that they ivnulcl (tune) be free (rjaav av), if they had done this; th-nfflv avroiis iXcvOtpovs av ilvai, ei tovto irpd.£u.av, he says that they would (hereafter) be free (elev av), if they should do this. OlSa avTOiis Z(v$(pov<; av ovras, el tovto tirpa$av, I know that they would (now) be free (rjuav av), if they had done this; oioa (xvtoiis iXtvOipovs av (Was, «i rtana 7rpd$eiav. I know that they would (hereafter) be free (tav av), if they should do this. IToAA' av €X
(Aor.) $>a
(Perf.) Ei jirj to.?
'i'he font". must, dcoide in cirli oa^e wlict-hcr we have the eqttiviv-)ent of tliy indicative or of the optaUvn with av. Jn Mm exaniplfts given, 1 he form of thi>. protasis generally sot-tics the question.
1309. The infinitive with av is used chiefly in indirect discourse (1 !.')•!); hut tlie participle with av is more common in other const.riictioiis (sec examples above).
As the early poets who use the future indicative with dv (1303) seldom use this const motion, the future infinitive, and participle with <"v are very rare.
1310. When av is used witli the subjunctive (as in 1200, 2), it is generally separated from the introductory word only bj' monosyllabic particles like //«'?-, 8«, ri, yap, etc.
1311. AVlien ar is used with the indicative or optative, or in any other potential construction, it may cither he placed next to its verb, or be attached to some other emphatic word (as a nega-
|
280 |
280 SYNTAX. [1512
tive or interrogative, or an important adverb); as tolxktt' av rt 7roAu' 01 Totovroi iTipovs TructavTttlav, such men, if they should get others to follovi them, would very soon destroy a state, T.2.G3.
1312. In a long apodosis av may be used twice or even three times with the same verb. E.g.
Ovk av yyCurff avrbv kolv €Tri8pafJLtLV; do you not think that he would eoen have rushed thither 1 I).27,50. In T.2,41, av is used three times with irapixiaOai.
1313. "Av may be used elliptically with a verb understood. E.g.
01 oiKtrcu p€yKOv
1314. When an apodosis consists of several co-ordinate verbs, av generally stands only with the first. E.g.
OvStv av Sux
1315. "Av never begins a sentence or a clause.
1316. N. The adverb r&xa, quickly, soon, readily, is often prefixed to av, in which case rax* av is nearly equivalent to icrws, perhaps. The av here always belongs in its regular sense (1299,1) to the verb of the sentence; as Tax' av *^@ot-> perhaps he would come; t
THE MOODS.
1317. The indicative is used in simple, absolute assertions, and in questions which include or concern such assertions; as ypdepet,, he writes; eypa-^ev, he wrote; ypuyp-ei. he will write; yeypcupev, he has written; tL eypd-f-ere; what did you write ? eypaijre tovto ; did he write this?
1318. The indicative has a tense to express every variety of time which is recognized by the Greek verb, and thus it can state a supposition as well as make an assertion in the past, present, or future. It also expresses certain
|
281 |
1322J THE MOODS. 281
other relations which in other languages (as in Latin) are generally expressed by a different mood. The following examples will illustrate these uses: —
El tovto aXr/OU io-Tt, ^cupa), if this is true, I rejoice (1390); it lypaipiv, ^A.fJov av, if he had written, 1 should haoe come (1397); tl ypdvjti, yvilxrofiai, if he shall write (or if he writes), J shall know (1405). 'Emfj.tkeiTa.1 ott
1319. N. These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of including all the actual uses even of the indicative under any single fundamental idea.
1320. The various uses of the subjunctive are shown by the following examples: —
Iid/xiv, let us go (1344). Mi) Oav/JidanjTt, do not wonder (134C). Tt'turu); what shall J say f (135S). Ov fit) tovto yevrjraL, this (surely) will not happen (1300). Qi&i rSw/wu (Homeric), nor shall I see (1355).
"Epxtrai "va tovto iSrj, he is coming that he may see this (1365) ; (frofiuTtu firj tovto yivqrai, he fears text this may happen (1378). 'Eav ikOrj, touto ttoojitu), if he comes (or if he shall dime), I shall do this (140-i) ; idv ti? i6r), tovto 7roiui, if any one (ev.cr) camcs, 1 (always) do this (1-303,1). "Orav ikdr/, tovto thk^ctc/i, when lie comes (or when he shall come), I shall do this (1434); otuv n.% cXOrj, tovto ttolui, when any one comes, I (nhcays)
1321. N. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most primitive use, expresses simple futurity, like the future indicative; this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, "hwfMu, I shall see; eiVjjo-i rit, one will say. Then, in exhortations and prohibitions it is still future; as iio/itv, let us go; fj.rj 7ron}cr7?T£ tovto, do not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future purpose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional relative sentences it expresses a future supposition; except in general conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly present) in its time.
1322. The various uses of the optative are shown by the following examples: —
|
282 |
282 SYNTAX. t1323
Eutv^oi'i)^, may you he fortunate; /«? yivono, may it no( be done; tide /xi; dTroAoivTO, 0 that they may not perish (l;)07). *EA#oi av, he may go, or he wight yu (1327). ■
rRk6tv tW tovto i'801, he camt that he might nee (his (lliO.)); l^ofiuTO ft.rj tovto -yt'voiTO, he feared lent (/us should happen (13iS). V.HK801, toCt' av iroiijtraiju, 1/Ae should cume, I should do (/us (140S); ei Tts t^oc, toCt' ciruiuuv, >/ an// one (clx-i) cu7iie, / (alwayt:) did this {V-VJ-i, 2). "Ore
1323. N. The optative in many of its uses is a valuer and less distinct J'onn of expression tliu.ii the .subjunctive, indicative, or imperative, in constructions of the same t;eiiui"il character. This appears especially in its independent uses; as in the Homeric EA«vt)v tt-yoiTO, lie may take Helen away, 11.1,11) (s«<; yvvalim Ayttrdw, ll.'i,"iJ., referring to the same tiling, and xai vori tis inrr)
For a discussion of the whole relation of the optative to the subjunctive and the other moods, and of the. original meaning of the subjunctive and optative, see Moods and 'J'enses, pp. :S71~SS0.
1324. The imperative is used to express commands and prohibitions; as tovto volet., do this,' /*?
do not fly.
|
283 |
1327J ' THE MOODS. 283
1325. The infinitive, which is a verbal noun, and the participle and the verbal in -riot, which are verbal adjectives, are closely connected with the moods of the verb in many constructions.
1326. The following sections (1,327-1515) treat of all constructions which require any other form of the finite verb than the indicative in simple assertions and questions (1317). The infinitive and participle are included here so far as either of them is used in indirect discourse, in protasis ov apodosis, or after uicrrc (cus, i
I. Potential Optative and Indicative with av. II. Imperative and Subjunctive in commands, exhortations, and prohibitions. — Subjunctive and Indicative with firj or fj.1) ov in cautions Assertions.—"Ows and O7ru>s ji.i] with the independent Future Indicative.
III. Independent Homeric Subjunctive, like Future Indicative. — Interrogative Subjunctive.
IV. Ov ixtj with Subjunctive and Future Indicative.
V. Final and Object Clauses with Iva,
and /xi).
VI. Conditional Sentences.
VII. Relative and Temporal Sentences, including consecutive sentences with wutc etc. VIII. Indirect Discourse or 0ratio Obliqua. IX. Causal Sentences. X. Expressions of a Wish.
I. POTENTIAL OPTATIVE AND INDICATIVE WITH av.
POTENTIAL 01'TATIVK.
1327. The optative with av expresses a future action as dependent on circumstances or conditions. Thus tXOoi. av is he may go, he might {could or v;ould) go, or he would be likely to go, as opposed to an absolute statement like he will go. E.g.
"Etl yap kcv av£ain(v kcikov Jjfiap, for (perhaps) we may still escape the evil day, Oil. 10,200. TISv yap u.v iriidoio fiov, for you
|
284 |
284 SYNTAX. [1328
can learn anything you please from me, k.Pr. G17. TV tovo" av ciTTOis aWo; what else could you say of this man? S./ln.G4G. Oi« av ci
1328. The optative thus used is called potential, and corresponds generally to the English potential forms •with may, can, might, could, would, etc. It is equivalent to the Latin potential subjunctive, as dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc., you may say, believe, perceive, think, etc. The limiting condition is generally too indefinite to be distinctly present to the mind, and can be expressed only by words like perhaps, possibly, or probably, or by such vague forms as if he pleased, if he should try, if he could, if there should be an opportunity, etc. Sometimes a general condition, like tn any possible case, is felt to be implied, so that the optative with av hardly differs from an absolute future; as in ovk av ixtOcinyv tov Bpovov, 1 will not (would never) give up the throne, At. 7J. 830. See the. examples in 1330.
1329. The potential optative can express every degree of potentiality from the almost absolute future of the last example to the apodosis of a future condition expressed by the optative with « (1408), where the form of the condition is assimilated to that of the conclusion. The intermediate steps may be seen in the following examples: —
Ovk av 8iKcuu>9 cs xaicov Wcrot^i ti, / could not justly fall into any trouble, S. An. 240, where Succuco? points to the condition if jus-lice shoidd be done. Ovtc iffOiovai irXeiw f) hvvavrai
1330. N. The potential optative of the second person may express a mild command or exhortation; as ^wpols av t"<7
1331. N. The potential optative may express what may hereafter prove to be true or to have been true; as 17 i/xr] (o-o a.vkr}
|
285 |
1337] THE MOODS. 285
p.Sy.175'; irou Srjr av tltv ol £ivot; where may the strangers bef (i.e. where is it likely to prove that they are)f S. £7.1450; tlrjarnv 8* av ouTOt Kp^rts, and these would probably prove to be (or to have been) Cretans, lid.1,2; avrai & owe n.v iroAAai drjcrav, and these (the islands) would not prove to be many, T. 1,9.
1332. N. Occasionally av is omitted with the potential optative, chiefly in Homer; as ov ti xaKwripov dXXo iradot/u, I could suffer nothing else that is worse, It. 19,321.
1333. N. The Attic poets sometimes omit av after such indefinite expressions as Iutw oo-rs, Icttiv ottojs, cony ottoi, etc.; as iarr ovv ojr
1334. N. For the potential optative in Homer referrii>g to past time, see 1390.
POTENTIAL INDICATIVE.
1335. The past tenses of the indicative with di/ express a past action as dependent on past circumstances or conditions. Thus, while y6cv means lie went, rjxOcv av means he would have gone (under some past circumstances).
1336. This is called the potential indicative; and it probably arose as a past form of the potential optative, so that, while i$ot av meant originally he may go or he would be likely lo go, fjXfltv av meant he may have gone or he would have been likely to go. It is the equivalent of the Latin forms like diceres, you would have said, credcres, you would have believed, cerneres, putares, etc., which are past potential forms corresponding to dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc. (1328). Thus putet and putaret are equivalent to o'oito av, he would be likely to think, and Zito av, he would have been likely to think.
1337. The potential indicative sometimes expresses (in its original force) what, would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have happened (and perhaps did happen) with no reference to any definite condition. E.g.
'Ytto k(v Taa
|
286 |
286 SYNTAX. C13SS
1338. Generally, however, the potential indicative implies a reference to some circumstances different from the real ones, so that r/$cy av commonly means he would have gone (if something had not been as it was). The unreal past condition here may be as vague and indefinite as the future condition to which the potential optative refers (1328). E.g.
Oi> yap kiv Zvya.fi(a-9a (iinpf.) &vpdwv av
1339. When no definite condition is understood with the potential indicative, the imperfect with av is regularly past, as it always is in Homer (1308). See the examples in 1338.
The imperfect with av referring to present time, which is common in apodosis after Homer (1307), appears seldom in purely potential expression, chiefly in f/3ovap.r)v av, velleni, / shotdd wish, I should like (which can mean also 1 should have wished) ; as iPov6pLr]v av avrovs a j&r) Ac'-y«v, 1 should like it if they spoke the truth, L. 12,22.
1340. The potential indicative may express every degree of potentiality from that seen in 1337 to that of the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition actually expressed. (Compare the potential optative, 1329.) Here, after Homer, the imperfect with dv may express present time (see. 1397). The intermediate steps to the complete apodosis may be seen in the following examples: —
"Hyert rrjv tip'/"'/1' «/■""? ' oi yap yv o ti ov iiroieiTC, you still kept the peace; for (here was nothing tc/iic'/i you could have done (if you had not), D. 18, 43. HoXXoJ yap av to npyava rjv d£ta, for the tools would be vwrth much (if they had this power), V.Rp. 374d.
For the full conditional sentences, see 1397.
1341. N. For a peculiar potential expression formed "by imperfects denoting obligation etc., like tSu, PVv, etc., with the infinitive, see 1400.
|
287 |
l;t48] THE MOODS. 287
II. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EXHORTATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS.-SUBJUNCTIVE AND INDICATIVE WITH (it| OR pi] ov IN CAUTIOUS ASSERTIONS. -"Oirws AND oirws |mj WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE IN COMMANDS AND PROHIBITIONS.
1342. The imperative expresses a command, exhortation, or entreaty; as eye, speak thou; favye, begone.1 e t!T(0, let. him come; -^at-povrcov, let them rejoice.
1343. N. A combination of a command and a question is found in such phrases as olo~8' o Spaaov; dost thou know what to do? Ar. Av. 51, where the imperative is the verb of tlin relative clause. So oTcrOa vvv a fxoi ytviuOa ; do you know what must be done fur met K.I.T.12M.
1344. The first person of the subjunctive (generally ■plural) is used in exhortations. Its negative is fit]. E.g.
'lwfxtv, let us go; ISojfxey, let us see; fir) tovto noiwfXtv, lot us not do this. This supplies the want of a first person of the imperative.
1345. N. Roth subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by dye (dytr<),
1346. In prohibitions, in the second and third persons, the prestent imperative or the aorist subjunctive is used with fit] and its compounds. E.g.
Mr; ttoUi tovto, do not do this {hubi(uallij), or do not (simply) do not do this. Mi) Kaxa. tou; vo/xovs St-Kacrr/Tf jxr/ )3orj6-qcr-qrf. tuJ 7TE7rov#dn 8eii/d" /xr) ciop-k«it€, "do not judt/e according to the laws: do not help him who lias .suffered outrages; do not abide by your oaths," D. 21,211.
The two forms here differ merely as present and aorist (1272).
1347. N. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes occurs in prohibitions; the second person very rarely.
1348. in Homer the independent subjunctive with fiij (generally in the third person) may express fear or anxiety, with a desire to avert the. object of the fear. E.g.
Mr] 8r; vijas (X oxrt. mm; they not seize the ships (as I fear they may), 11. Hi, 128. M>7 ti ypX.fUTa.ixf.voi p((r] kolkov duis 'Ax<^1^»'> may he not (as I fear he may) in his wrath do any harm to the sons of the Achaeans, 77.2,195.
|
288 |
288 SYNTAX. [1349
1349. N. This usage occurs also in Euripides and Plato. See Moods and Tenses, §§ 201-204.
1350. Au independent subjunctive with ^17 may express a cautious assertion, or a suspicion that something may be true; and with^ oi a cautious negation, or a suspicion that something may not be true. This is a favorite usage with Plato. E.g.
Mr) aypoiKOTtpov rj to a j9e<; threiv, 1 suspect that the truth may be too rude a thing to tell, P. G. 402*. "AAAa /irj ov tovt' rj xuKcttov but I rather think that this may not be a difficult thing, P. Ap.'SO*.
1351. The indicative may be thus used (1350) with ft-rj or firj oi, referring to present or past time. E.g.
AAAa fir) tovto oi xoAais w/ioAoyi/(ra/itv, but perhaps we did not do well in assenting to this, P. Men. 89C. (Compare <£o/3oiyxui fit) iiraOtv, I fear that he suffered, 1380.)
1352. In Attic Greek on-us and oVws firj are used colloquially with the future indicative in eoniniands and prohibitions. E.g.
Nw ow O7r
1353. N. The construction of 1352 is often explained by an ellipsis of qK&rrtL or ctkottuti (see 1372).
1354. N. The subjunctive occasionally occurs here with ottous pi), but not with oVcos alone.
III. HOMERIC SUBJUNCTIVE LIKE FUTURE INDICATIVE. -INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
1355. In Homer, the subjunctive in independent sentences sometimes has the force of a future indicative. E.g.
Oi yap 7ro) toi'ous iSov dvtpa';, oiSc t8
1356. N. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take k* or
|
289 |
1361] THE MOODS. 289
1357. N. The question rl iraOui; what will become of me? or what harm will it do me? (literally, what shall 1 undergo ?) carries this use even into Attic Greek. E.g.
"O ju>t iy
1358. The first person of the subjunctive may be used in questions of appeal, where a person asks himself or another what he is to do. The negative is /iij. It is often introduced by fiovXei or fiovXeo-Qe (in poetry 0eX«
Ei7ru> TuCra; shall 1 say this? or ftovXci tiirw ravra; do you wish that I should say this? Hoi rpairuifiai; iroi TropcvOut; whither shall I turn? whither shall I go? E.Hec. 1099. IIoO 87 /Sou'Att Ka&^o'/xei'oi dvayyv; where now wilt thou that we sit down and read? l'.Phdr.228e.
1359. N. The third person is sometimes found in these questions, chiefly when tis lias the force of we; as Ti ris dvat. rovro
IV. Oi rf WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE.
1360. The subjunctive (generally the aorist) and sometimes the future indicative are used with the double negative ov pJ) in the sense of an emphatic future indicative with ov. E.g.
Ov fvq irl6i)Tai, he will not obey, S.Ph. 103. Ovrc yap yiyvcrai ovre yiyoviv, ovhi ovv firj yiv-qrai, for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, etc., P. Rp. 492C. Ov wot i£ i/xov yt /xi) ira.$rj% roSt, you never shall suffer this at my hands, S. El. 1029. Ov toi fjoqirart at . . . axovrd ti? d£f 1, no one shall ever take you against your will, etc., S. O. C.17G.
1361. Tn the dramatic poets, the second person singular of the future indicative (occasionally of the aorist subjuno-tivo) with ov fxrj may express a strong prohibition. E.g.
Ov fxrj KaTafirjati, don't come down (you shall not come down), Ar. V. 397. O& /xt; rdSc yrjpv
This construction is not interrogative.
|
290 |
290 SYNTAX. [1362
V. FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES AFTER Iva,
AND jWj.
1362. The final particles arc "va, a>v, o'ttcos, and (epic and lyric) 8
1. Vure final clauses, expressing a purpose or motive; as epxerat 'iva tovto i'Sij, he is coming that he may see this. Here all the final particles are used (see 1368).
2. Object clauses with oVco? after verbs signifying to strive for, to care for, to effect; as a/coirec ottw; tovto yevrjaeTai, see to it that this is done.
3. Clauses with /*?; after verbs of fear or caution; as
1363. The first two classes are to be specially distinguished. The object clauses in 2 are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand in apposition to an object ;iccusative like tovto; as
For the origin of the clauses in 3, and the development of final clauses, see Moods and Tenses, §§ 307-310.
1364. The negative in all these clauses is ^; except after fj.rj, lest, where oi is used.
I. VTJRK FINAL CLAUSES.
1365. Final clauses take the subjunctive after primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. E.g.
Aok«i /xoi KaxaKavcrui Tas ajxa$a<;, "va /xrj to £<-vyn tj/xCiv arpar Trjyrj, 7 think we should burn our viagnns, that our cattle may not he our commanders, X.A.t,'J27. Ei7ra) n &rjra kaAA", "v opyiar) irXiov; shall I speak still further, that you mm/ he the more ungryt S. 0. '1 • 364. IlapaKaXit? cciTpois. i*w»s fxrj arroOdvr), you call in physicians, that he may not die, X.A/.2,1UW. AvcrircXti t'acax iv tu> irapovri, M
|
291 |
1370] THE MOODS. 291
km rovrov voXijuov irpo
K.€$aA.7j Karavtwroftai, 6tf>pa TrtTToiOyi, I will nod my assent, that you may trust vie, Jl.l,b'2'2. "Ev&x Karlcr^ir', 6
1366. N. The future indicative is rarely found in final clauses afler O7ru>s, o
1367. N. The adverb av (k() is sometimes joined with o!s, , and 5(j>pa bei'ore Die subjunctive in final clauses; as tos av
iTttKouCToi', hear the other side, that you may learn, X.A.2,516. For this use, see Moods and Tenses, §§ 32ij-28. The final optative with av is probably always potential (1327).
1368. N. *Orf>pa is the most common final particle it) Homer, us in tragedy, and twx in comedy and prose. 15nt ottws exceeds?«i in Thucydides and Xenophon. 'J2j was never in good use in prose, except in Xenophon.
1369. As fiual clauses express the purpose or motive of some person, they admit the double construction of indirect discourse (1481,2; 1503). Hence, instead of the optative after past tenses, we can have the mood and tense which would be used when a person conceived the purpose; that is, we can say either i^XOiv Iva. i'Soi, he came that he might see (1365), or ^XOtv iVa Ihy, because the person himself would have said t/j^o/xm Zvu. IS<», I come that I may see. E.g.
'S.wtfiovXtvt tois aAAots €K7rev
1370. N. The subjunctive is even more common than the optative after past tenses in certain authors, as Thucydides and Herodotus; but much less bo in others, as Homer and Xeuophou.
|
292 |
292 SYNTAX. [1371
1871. The past tenses of the indicative are used in final clauses with JW, sometimes with ottws or
TV ytt* ov XajSiLy iVrftraj tvOvs, a!y (Sti£a fir/norc, k.t..; why did you not take me and kill me at once, that I might never have shown (as I have done), etc.? S. 0. 7'. 1391. $>tv,
II. OBJECT CLAUSES WITH O7T(U? AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING, ETC.
1372. Object clauses depending on verbs signifying to strive for, to care for, to effect, regularly take the future indicative with oVcd? or ottw? /xij after both primary and secondary tenses.
The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as the correlative of the future indicative, but commonly the indicative is retained on the principle of . 1369. E.g.
<&povTi£ oTr
For o7rus and O7r'
1373. The future indicative with owm sometimes follows verbs of exhorting, entreating, comttuindiny, and forbidding, which commonly take an infinitive of. the object; as SuiKtAevoifai ottu>i ri/xtop'yo-iTai iravTas rows toiovtov;, they exhort him to take vengeance on all such, F. lip. b4'Jc. (See 1377.)
1374. 1. Sometimes the present or aorist subjunctive and optative is used here, as in final clauses. E.g.
|
293 |
1379] THE MOODS. 293
'AAAov tov iiri/AtXyati y ojtios o ti ^3cAti(ttoi 7roXirai com; will you care for anything except that we may be the best possible citizens f P.
2. Xenophon allows us with the subjunctive or optative here.
1375. N. M77, lest, may be used for ottojs fj-rj with thesubjunctive.
1376. N. "Kv or m can be used here, as in final clauses (13C7), with 07tu>s or ok and the subjunctive.
1377. In Homer the construction of 1372 with O7rcos and the future is not found; but verbs signifying to j)lan, consider, and try take onus or iiy and the subjunctive or optative. E.g.
Q>pa£wfj.(8' O7TWS ox* aptora ytvrjTat, let us consider how the very best may be done, CW.13,3C5. QpdaixcTai us «e vtrjTai, he will plan for his return, Od. 1,205. BowAfuov ottws o^' opta"ra ytvoiTO, (^e^ deliberated that the vary best might be done, Od. 0,420. So rarely with i
III. CLAUSES WITH /iJj AFTKH VERBS OF FEARING, ETC.
1378. After verbs denoting fear, caution, or danger, fii], that or Zes£, takes the subjunctive after primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. The subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the mind. The negative form is /at) ov (1364). E.g.
$ofiovfMU [AT] tovto ycvijrai (vereor ne aceidat), I fear that this may happen; <$ id="iv.i.p8130.1">o(ioviw.i /xrj ov tovto ytvrjrai (vereor ut aceidat), 1 fear that this may not happen (1364). QpovTi£jj fj.oi o~iybv, I am anxious lent it may be best for me to be silent, X. M. 4,2s9. OvKtTi iirtTi9(vTo, ScSiorts p.rj olttotfir)6iirjo~av, they no longer made attacks, fearing left they should be cut off, X.yl.3,4a. 'E<( id="iv.i.p8130.3">o/3ovvto ixri ti irdOrj, they feared lest he should suffer anything (1309), X.Sy.'J,U.
1379. N. The future indicative is very rarely used after /xij in this construction. Hut O7rcos p.-q is sometimes used here, as in the object clauses of 1372, with both future indicative and subjunctive; as Sc'Soixa oiThK fir) avdyKr] ycvrjo-cTat, 1 fear that there may come a necessity, D. 9,7i>. 'Ottu><; py here is the equivalent of fuj, that or lest, in the ordinary construction.
|
294 |
294 SYNTAX. [1380
1380. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear which are present or past. Here ny takes the present aud past tenses of the indicative. E.g.
At'Soiica /xrj wXriywv Stei, I fear that you need blows, Ar. N.493. QofiovpiOa. fir] dfufeoTcpw ajM. tj fiapTr/Kaixev, we fear that we have missed both at once, T.3,03. AdSui fir] 8rj irdvra Sea vr/fxfprt'a clmv, I fear that all which the Goddess said was true, Od. 5,300. "Opa. p.r) 7rai£u>y IXiytv, beware lest he was speaking in jest, P. Th. 140b.
VI. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1381. Iii conditional sentences the clause containing the condition is called the protasis, and that containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The protasis is introduced by some form of el, if.
Af for ti is sometimes used in Homer.
1382. The adverb dv (epic ice or Kev) is regularly joined to el in the protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive; el with dv forming idv, uv, or rjv. (See 1299,2.) The simple el is used with the indicative and optative. The same adverb dv is used in the apodosis with the optative, and also with the past teases of the indicative when it is implied that the condition is not fulfilled.
1383. 1.. The negative adverb of the protasis is regularly firj, that of the apodosis is ov.
2. When ov stands in a protasis, it generally belongs to some particular word (as in ov noWoi, few, ov
1384. 1. The supposition contained in a protasis may be either particular or general. A particular supposition refers to a definite act or to several definite acts, supposed to occur at some definite time or times; as if he (noiv) has this, he will give it; if he had it, he gave it; if he had had the power, he would have helped me; if he shall receive it (or if he receives it), he will give it; if he should receive it, he would give it. A general supposition refers indefinitely to auy act or acts of a given class, which may be supposed to
|
295 |
1387] THE MOODS. 295
occur or to Lave occurred at any time; as if ever he receives anything, he (ahcays) gives it; if ever he received anything, he (always) gave it; if (on any occasion) he had had the power, he would (always) have helped me; if ever any one shall (or should) wish to go, he will (or would) always be permitted.
2. Although this distinction is seen in all classes of conditions (as the examples show), it is only in the present and past conditions which do not imply non-fulfilment, i.e. in those of class I. (below), that the distinction affects the construction. Here, however, we have two classes of conditions which contain only general suppositions.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1385. The classification of conditional sentences is based partly on the time to which the supposition refers, partly on what is implied with regard to the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction between particular and general suppositions explained in 1384.
1386. Conditional sentences have four classes, two (I. and II.) containing present and past suppositions, and two (III. and IV.) containing future suppositions. Class I. has two forms, one (a) with chiefly particular suppositions (present and past), the other (b) with only general suppositions (1. present, 2. past).
1387. We have thus the following forms: —
I. Present and past suppositions implying nothing as to fulfilment of condition:
< (jvotasis) cl with indicative; (apodosis) any (a) Chiefly i'onn of the verb. Ei irpdao-ti tovto, ko.w<; Particular- ) *X"> ?/^'e l's ^Ol'"0 *'"s>'"'l's we^- ^' «'rPa£<
toCto, KaXws tx"> i/"'"5 ^ ^•S & 's m'U- (^ee y 1390.) — In Latin : si hoc facit, bene est. f 1. (prot.) toy with subjunctive; (apod.) present indicative. 'EuV txoXd&Tai, if any one (ever) steals, he is (always) pun-
(b) General •. , n , . „ ,
2. (prot.) €i with optative; (apod.) imperfect
indicative. E" ns kMt-toi, (koXol^to, if any one o.vpj- .tfol.fi, he was (always) punished. I 'See 1393, 2.) —For the Latin, see 1388.
|
296 |
296 SYNTAX. [1388
II. Present and past suppositions implying that the condition is not fulfilled:
(protasis) d with past tense of indicative; (apodosis) past tense of indicative with av. Ei iirpa^t tovto, KaS><; av to-^tv, if Iw ha(l done this, it would have been well. Ei €Trpa
In Latin : si hoc faceret, bene essel (present) ; si hoc fecisset, bene fuisset (past).
III. Future suppositions in more vivid form:
(prot.)
In Latin : si hoc faciet (or fecerit), bene erit.
IV. Future suppositions in less vivid form :
(prot.) d with optative; (apod.) optative with av.
Et 7rpdcr
should do this, it would be well. (See 1408.) In Latin : si hoc facial, bene sit.
1388. N. The Latin commonly agrees with the English in not marking the distinction between the general and the particular present and past conditions by different forms, and uses the indicative in both alike. Occasionally even the Greek does the same (1390).
1389. N. In external form (idv with the subjunctive) the general present condition agrees with the more vivid future condition. But in sense there is a much closer connection between the general and the particular present condition, which in most languages (and sometimes even in Greek) coincide also in form (1388). On the other hand, idv with the subjunctive in a future condition agrees generally in sense with d and the future indicative (1405), and is never interchangeable with d and the present indicative.
I. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITION'S WITH NOTHING
IMPLIED, (a) Simi-le Si-'itositions, Chikvt.y Particular.
1390. When the protasis simply states a present or
|
297 |
1393] THE MOODS. 297
past particular supposition, implying nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with ei. Any form of the verb may stand in the apodosis. E.g.
Ei Tjcrv^tov $iA.Mnros (Lyti., ovkitl 8u Kiytiv, if Philip is keeping peace (with us), we need talk no longer, I). 8,5. Ei (yu> Qui&pov ay you), Kai ipavrov {^lAeA^cr/wii • dAAa yap oiStrepa (
1391. N. Even the future indicative can stand in a protasis of this class if it expresses merely a.present intention or necessity that something shall hereafter be done; as alpt nXr/xTpoy, tl /xaxd, raise your spur, if you are going to fight, Ar.Ao.75i). Here cl /«'AA«s fiaxiaOo-L would be the more common expression in prose. It is important to notice that a future of this kind could never be changed to the subjunctive, like the ordinary future in protasis (1405).
1392. N. For present or past conditions containing a potential indicative or optative (with 5.v), see 1421, 3.
(b) Present and Past Gkneual Sui'i-ositioks.
1393. In general suppositions, the apodosis expresses a customary or repeated action or a general truth in present or past time, and the protasis refers in a general way to any of a class of acts.
1. Present general suppositions have edv with the subjunctive in the protasis, and the present indicative (or some other present form denoting repetition) in the apodosis. E.g.
*Hv eyyvs (XOrj OavaTOS, oi8d? /SovAtrcU 6vt)
2. Past general suppositions have el with the optative in the protasis, and the imperfect indicative (or some other form denoting past repetition) in the apodosis. E.g.
|
298 |
298 SYNTAX. [1394
Ei Tiftts dopvfiovfityovs alaOoLTO, Karaa(itvvvvat. Trjv Tapa^qy (TTiiparo, if he saw any falling into disorder (or whenever he saw, etc.). he (always) tried to quiet Ike confusion, X. V. 5, 365. Ei tij avrelnoi, tvOvs riOvrjKii, if any one refused, he was immediately put to death, T. 8,6G. This construction occurs only once in Homer.
1394. N. The gnomic aorist, which is a primary tense (1208), can always be used here in the apodosis with a dependent subjunctive; as rjv tis Trapafialvn, fcrjfiiav uvrois (iredco-av, if any one transgresses, they (always) impose a penalty on him, X. C. 1,22.
1395. N. The indicative is occasionally used in the place of the subjunctive or optative in general suppositions; that is, these sentences may follow the construction of ordinary present and past suppositions (1390), as in Latin and English; as ti tis &vo rj ko! 7r(ov<: ti? rjixtpw: Aoyi'f erai, /xaraios Iutiv, if any one counts on two or even more days, he is a fuol, S. Tr. 9-J4.
1396. N. Here, as in future conditions (HOG), d (without av) is sometimes used with the subjunctive in poetry. ]n Homer this is the more frequent form in general conditions.
11. PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS WITH SUPPOSITION CONTRARY TO FACT.
1397. When the protasis states a present or past supposition, implying that the condition is not or wan not fulfilled, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis has the adverb' av.
The imperfect here refers to present time or to an act as going on or repeated in past time, the aorist to a simple occurrence in past time, and the (rare) pluperfect to an act completed in past or present time. E.g.
TavTa ovk av fSivavro ttouZv, tl /J.rj Sujllttj /xiTftia e'^puvro, they would not he able (as they are) to do this, if they did not lead an abstemious life, X. Cl,'210. TloXv av Oav/MicrTorcpov rjv, d ( t ifxCivro, it would be far more wonderful, if they were honored, P. lip. 4S91'. Ei rjaav av8pa ayaOol, oj? o~i> <^ id="iv.i.p8191.1">vjs, ovk av ttotc Tavra tTTa
|
299 |
1401] THK MOODS. 209
ixavuij av rj&r) (fi(/xaOr}Krj, if you had answered, 1 should already have learned enough (which now I have not done), P.Euthyph. 14°. Ei fir] vfius rj$e.rt, ivopivOfmOa av iirl tov ^SaatAta, if you had not come (Mir.), we should now be on our way (impf.) to the King, X. A.2, 1*.
1398. N. In Homer the imperfect in this class of sentences is always past (see II.7,273; 8,130); and the present optative is used where the Attic would have the imperfect referring to present time; as (I f/Ltv Tts tov ovupov aAAos Ivutttiv, i//tvi8os Ktv
1399. N. In Homer the optative with xe is occasionally past in apodosis; as kvv kiv Ivff dirdAotro Aii'eutf, cl fj.r] vnrjcrt 'Pi
Homer has also a past potential optative : see //. 5,85.
1400. 1. The imperfects eSti, xfVv or *XPVV> *£vv> ">K°S rjv, and others denoting oldiijalion, propriety, possibility, and the like, are often used with the infinitive, to form an apodosis implying the non-fulfilment of a condition. "Av is not used here, as these phrases simply express in other words what is usually expressed by the indicative with av.
Thus, eStt ctc toxitov
2. When the present infinitive is used, the construction refers to the present or to continued or repeated action in the past; when the aovist is used, it refers to the past. E.g.
TovcrSt /ir) £rjv tSti, these ought not to be living (as they are), S.Ph.418. M/i'Eiv yap l^r/v. for he might have stood his ground (but did not), 1). 3,17. ©uve iv at XPVV ^apos rixviav, you ought to have died before your children, K. And. 1208. El ifiovXtro Slkixuk ttyai, effjy avr<2 fnurOuxrai ;» oikov, he might have let the house, if he had wished to be just, I... 32,'.23.
1401. N. When the actual apodosis is in the verb of obligation,
|
300 |
300 SYNTAX. [1402
etc., fSu av can be used; as tl to. St'ojra outoi crvvcfiovXcvcray, ov&h av u/xas vvv thci fiov.tvt(r8cu, if these men had given you the advice you needed, there would now be no need of your deliberating, D. 4.1.
1402. 1. Other imperfects, especially ifiovXo/xvv, sometimes take the infinitive without av on the same principle with ?8as l[5ov6[j.r}v ovk ipi^iLv iv6d.Sc, I would I were not contending here (as 1 am), or / would not be contending here, Av.Jt. 800.
2. So ZcfatXov or ukjkXXov, ought, aorist and imperfect of 6
3. So ifj-tWov with the infinitive; as 4>Qlato()ai ifieWov, el /xrj Zaircs, I should^ have perished (was about to perish), ifthou hadst not spoken, OJ.13,383. So D.IS), 159.
III. FUTURE CONDITIONS, MOKE VIVID FORM. Subjunctive in Puotasis with Fi'Timu Apodosis.
1403. When a supposed future case is stated distinctly and vividly (as in English, if I shall go, or if 1 go), the protasis has the subjunctive with lav (epic et ice), and the apodosis has the future indicative or some other form of future time. E.g.
Ei ixlv kiv MiviXaov 'AAf'^ai'Spo? Karave4>vr], airrb'; lirtiff EA.eViji' «'^tVu) kuI KTrifMTa. TraVTu., if Alexander shall slay Menclaus, then let him have Helen and alt the goods himself, //.3,281. 'Aptis dyOiaTrJTai, Teifiaaofjada. )(upova0ai, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we shall try to overcome him, X.A.7,3n. 'Ear ovv ins vvv, wore tcrei oikol ; if therefore you go now, tvhen will you be at home f X. C. 5,3".
1404. N. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go both express the force of the Greek subjunctive and future indicative in protasis; but the ordinary modern English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly future.
1405. The future indicative with d is very often used for the subjunctive in future conditions, as a still more vivid form of expression, especially in appeals to the feelings, and in threats and warnings. E.g.
Et jxri KaOi^ti'; yXSicaav, tcrnn o"oi Ka«d, if you do not (shall not) restrain your tongue, you will have trouble, E. frag. 5. This common use of the future must not be confounded with that of 1391.
|
301 |
1413] THE MOODS. 301
1406. N. In Homer ci (without dv or /«') is sometimes used with the subjunctive in future conditions, apparently in the same sense as ct xc or t}v; as «! Si vij' lOikr) okcaai, but if he shall wish to destroy our ship, Od. 12,348. This is more common in general conditions in Homer (see 1396). The same use of el for idv is found occasionally even in Attic poetry.
1407. N. For the Homeric subjunctive with ki in the apodosis of a future condition, see 1305,1'.
IV. FUTURE CONDITIONS, LESS VIVID FORM. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis.
1408. When a supposed future case is stated in a less distinct and vivid form (as in English, if 1 should go), the protasis has the optative with el, and the apodosis has the optative with dv. E.g.
Eir)<; 4 id="iv.i.p8218.1">op7)Tos ovk av, £i 7rpa
1409. 'Die optative with ay in apodosis is the potential optative : see 1329.
1410. N. The future optative cannot be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse representing the future indicative after a past tense (see the second example under 1497,2).
1411. N. Et Kt is sometimes found with the optative in Homer, in place of the simple ti (140S); as d St «
1412. N. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of tbe indicative in unreal conditions, see 1308 and 1399.
PECULIAR FORMS OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Ellipsis and Substitution is Protasis or Apodosis.
1413. The protasis sometimes is not expressed in its regular form with el or (dv, but is contained in a participle, or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence. When a participle represents the protasis,
|
302 |
302 SYNTAX. [1414
its tense is always that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indicative, subjunctive, or optative,-— the present (as usual) including the imperfect. E.ij.
Ilais Siktjs overt)1; o Z«vs ovk anr6u> v; how is it l/tut Zeus has not been destroyed, if Justice exists? (d Siicr) tarty), kv.N.'MA. 2ii St kvu)v tiati ra^a, but you will soon know, if you listen (= tav kAi/ijs), Ar. A v. HJ90. 'A7roAo{i^uii p.rj tovto fiaOwv, I shall be ruined unless I learn this (iav pi) fxadw). Towvra rav ywcu£i avvvaiwv t)(oi%, such things would you have In endure if you should dwell among women (i.e. cl oruwtuoi?), A.Se. 195. 'liiriarrjaev av n? onowas, any one. would have disbelieved (such a thing) if he had heard it (i.e.
Ala yt vi/ius avTok viIXul &.y avo !) tTt, if it had depended on yourselves, you would long auo have been ruined, i). 18,49. Ovrui yap ovKtrt tov ol7tov 7rd
1414. 1. There is a (probably unconscious) suppression of the verb of the protasis in several phrasos introduced by ci /xt}, except. E.g.
Tt's toi dAAo? 6/xoios, el /at] IlaT/DOKAos; who else is like you, except Palroclus (i.e. unless it is P.)'/ 11.17,475. Et jir^ Sia tov irpimmv, €Ve7reo-«v av, had it not been for the Prytanis (except for the. /'.), he would have been thrown in (to (he Pit), P. G. 516'.
2. The. .protasis or the apodosis, or both, may be suppressed with the Homeric wi ei or
For the double ellipsis in wawcp av d, see 1313.
1415. N. In neither of the cases of 1414 is it probable that any definite verb was in the speaker's mind.
1416. N. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressfcd for rhetorical effect; as d n'tv Sticrovcri ytpas, if they shall give me a prize, — very well, II. 1,135 ; ct. 1,580.
1417. N. Ei hi fi-ij without a verb often has the meaning otherwise, even where the clause would not be negative if completed, or where the verb if supplied would be a subjunctive; as /u-i) iroiyar)'; ravra' d ti pr], ahiav «£
|
303 |
1421J THE MOODS. 303
1418. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its own tenses of the indicative or optative (1280; 1285). If the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av, this particle is used with the infinitive or participle. E.g.
'HyoC/iai, ei touto ttoluti, ttolvtu. KaXai? (^clv, I believe that, if you are doimj tins, all is well; yjyovjMi, (av tovto TTOtr/Tt, irdvTa koAw? iiciv, 1 believe that, if you (shall) do this, all will be well; o*8a fyia?i tav TavTa yivrjrai, cv 7rpa£o>Ta?, J l.'nuw that you will prosper if thin is (shall be) dune. For examples of the infinitive and participle with av, .see 1308.
1419. The apodosis may be expressed in an infinitive not in indirect discourse (1271), especially one depending on a verb of wishing, commanding, advising, <jtc, from which the infinitive receives a future meaning. E.g.
BoiSAtTui iX.Ot'iv lav tovto yfvrjTaL, he wishes to ijo if this (shall) be dune: k
1420. N. Sometimes the apodosis is merely implied in the context, and in such cases u or edv is often to bo translated supposing that, in case that, if perchance, or if haply. E.g.
'Akovouv ko.1 e/xov, (dv coi. Tavra Sokyj, hear me also, in case the same shnll please you (i.e. that then you may assent to ii), I'. Up. 358b. So 7rpos Tr]v TroXiv, (.1 iiti fSorjSoie v, t^wpavv, they marched towards the city, in case they (this citizens) should rush out (i.e. tu meet them if they should rush out), T. 6, 100. On this principle we rnusf. explain o" k(v ttuis /3ovA.ctcu, if haply he may wish (i.e. in hope that he may wish), II. 1,(>'(>; at k idtKyoOa, 0
Mixkd Constructions. — A/ in Apodosis.
1421. The protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to different forms.
1. Especially any tense of the indicative with el in the protasis may be followed by a potential optative with av in the apodosis. E.g.
Et KO.T oipavov eiA.ijAov#as, ovk a.v Qioioi jj.o.^oifj.t)v,if you
|
304 |
304 SYNTAX. [1422
have come down from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods, 11.6,128. Ei vvv yi Sv(TTVXOVfj.cv, ttux; to.vo.vt" av TrpaTTOvTts oj
2. Sometimes a subjunctive or a future indicative in the protasis has a potential optative in the apodosis. E.g.
*Hv f<£,'fs f-OL, k(£ai/j.' av, if you (will) permit me, I would fain speak, S. El.boi; oiSt yap a.v TroXXal ye
3. A potential optative (with av) may express a present condition, and a potential indicative (with av) may express a present or past condition ; as tlirip aA.Xu> tu> irei6oifx.r]v av, kcu uol iriiOofuu, if there is any man whom 1 would trust, 1 trust you, P. Pr. 329b, ei tovto iaxvpbv rjv av tovtw Tttc/iypiov, Ka/iol yivtorOu TCKfAijptov, if this would have been a strong proof for him, so let it be also a proof for me, D.49,58.
1422. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by 8«, dAAd, or avrdp, which cannot be translated in English. E.g.
Ei St kc fir) Bu>u>criv, lyd> St kiv airos ikuifiai., but if they do not give her up, then I will lake her myself 11.1,137.
El after Verbs of Wondkmho, ktc.
1423. Some verbs expressing wonder, delight, contentment, disappointment, indignation, etc. are followed by a protasis witli d where a causal sentence would often seem more natural. E.g.
®avfjui£u) 8' iyuiyt ti fxrj8cis Vfi-oiv jjliJt' ivdvp-UTaL firjr' opyl&Tai, and I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or angry (lit. if no one of you is, etc., 1 wonder), D. 4,43; ayavaKria il a vou> fir] oio? r ilfu cIttuv, I am indignant that (or if) I am not able to say what 1 mean, P.Lach. 194'. See also 1502, 2, for the principle of indirect discourse applied to these sentences.
1424. N. Such verbs are especially 9avnd£w, alax^vo/iai, aya-irda>, and ayavaKTiui. with S«vo» (cttiv. They sometimes take on, because, and a causal sentence (1505).
|
305 |
uiS] THE MOODS. 305
VII. RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
1425. 1 'ie principles of construction of relative clauses include all temporal clauses. Those introduced by !u>s, vplv, and other particles meaning until, have special peculiarities, and are therefore treated separately (1403-1474).
Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pronouns or adverbs.
1426. The antecedent of a relative is either definite or indefinite. It is definite when the relative refers to a definite person or thing, or to some definite time, place, or manner; it is indefinite when no such definite person, thing, time, place, or manner is referred to. Both definite and indefinite antecedents may be either expressed or understood. E.g.
(Definite.) TauTa a lyui opus, you see these things which I have; or a (w bpas. "Ore i/3ovX(TO yXBev, (once) when he xoished, he came.
(Indefinite.) IlavTa a av j3ojku>vTai ffowiv, they will have every, thing which they way want; or a av (iovXunTai Z£ovcnv, they will have whatever they may want. "Orav iXdy, tovto vpdiui, when he shall come (or when he comes), I will do lids. "On ftovXoiro, tovto lirpaco-tv, whenever he wished, he (always) did this. Os av clmii, voLuifxtv, as I shall direct, let us act. "A l%ti /?ovo/mii Xaftuv, 1 want to take whatever he has.
DEFINITE ANTECEDENT.
1427. A relative as such has no effect on the mood of the following verb. A relative with a definite antecedent therefore may take the indicative (with ov for its negative) or any other construction which could occur in an independent sentence. E.g.
Tts icjB' 6 u>pos Sijt' ev u> /3f Pyxaficv; what is the place to which we have come? S. 0. C. f>2. *Kus i
INDEFINITE ANTECEDENT. — CONDITIONAL RELATIVE.
1428. 1. A relative clause with an indefinite antecedent has a conditional force, and is called a conditional relative clause, s Its negative is always fir).
|
306 |
306 SYNTAX. [1429
2. Relative words, like «, if, take av before the subjunctive. (See 1299,2.) With on, ojt6t(,
'A with av may form av. hi Homer we generally find ore ki etc. (like a *t, 1403), or ore etc. alone (1437).
1429. Conditional relative sentences have.four classes, two (I. II.) containing present and past, and two (III. IV.) containing future conditions, which correspond to those of ordinary protasis (1386). Class I. has two forms, one («) with chiefly particular suppositions, the other (l>) wjth only general suppositions.
1430. I. (a) Present or past condition simply stated, with the indicative, — chiefly in particular suppositions (1390). E.g.
"O tl fSovXtraL Sucroi, / will give him whateiw he (now) wishes (like i" ti /iouAtTiu, Suktw, if he now wisltes anything, i will give it). *A /j.i) oi&i, ovBl oiofiu eiSeVat, what I do not know, 1 do not even think ] know (like it riva /xrj oiSu, if there are any thinr/s which I do not know), P. Ap. 21d; oi? fir) tvpajKov, Kivard
1431. (h) 1. Present general condition, depending on a present form denoting repetition, with subjunctive (1393.1)'.
2. Past general condition, depending on a past form denoting repetition, with optative (1893, 2). E.g.
"O Tt tiv (3ov jTai. 8'8uj/ii, / (altoay*) give him whatever he wants (like idv ti fSoi'XijTai, if he eoer wants anything); o Tt fjovXoiro (8i'8ow, 1 (nlwm/s) yace him whatever he loaiitetl (like tt tl (iovXoiTo)-2.VH/MXXUV toOtois idikovaw uirai/T«s, ovs oi' bpuxjL TrapiCTKixiadjXt-cou?, all wish to be allies of iliose whom they see prepared, D. J,G. 'HwV av olkoi yivuiVTai, Spwcrii' ovk avacr^Ta, when they get home, they do things unheandile, Av. Pa. 117-'l- Ous yufv T8ot fvTaKTa)? toVra<;, TiVts Tt tuv ijpujTa. kui «7ra ttv^oito iirrjvii, he (d(»"ii/s) asked tliose whom he saw (at any time) marching in good order, who they were; and when he learned, he praised them. X. C.5.'.lss. 'Ettu-Sv/ St avoL^Ocirj, tltrrjtifjLiv Trapa tov 'S.ioKparn, and (each morning) when the prison was opened, we went in to Socrates, V.Ph.W1.
|
307 |
1437] THE MOODS. 307
1432. N. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the subjunctive or optative here, as in other general suppositions (1395). This occurs especially with octtis, which itself expresses the same idea oi iixiefiiiitciioss which os with the subjunctive or optative usually expresses; as ooris /xr; tCiv apiaruiv avrcraL fiovktvfid-twv, kolkioto? eivui SokcI, whoever docs not cling to the best counsels seems to be most base, S..'in. 178. (Here 6s av fir] atmyrai. would be tho common expres-ion.)
1433. II. Present or past condition stated so as to imply that the condition is not or was not fulfilled (supposition contrary to fact), with the secondary tenses of indicative (1397). E.g.
"A /j.t) ifiovktro Sovvat, ovk av «So)k«i/, lie would no! have given what he had nut wished in yive (like il tivo. /xyj ifiovkiTO 8owcu, ovk av iSuikiv, if he had not wished to give certain things, he would not have given them). Ovk av (Tri^ei.poviJ.(v irpdrruv S. /x^ rjirim dfic6a, we should not (then) be undertaking to do (as toe notvare) things which we did not understand (like il riva. /xij rjTncrTa.ixf.$a, if there were any thini/s which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a supposition not realized), P. Ch. 171'. So ov yi}pa<; eTcrfiev, Od. ], 218.
This case, occurs much less frequently than the others.
1434. 111. Future condition in the more vivid form, with av and the subjunctive (1403). E.g.
"O ti av ftovkrjTai, 8
1435. N. The future indicative cannot be substituted for the subjunctive here, as it can in common protasis (1405).
1436. IV. Future condition in the lens vivid form, with the optative (1408). E.g.
"O n fiouk oi to, hoi-qv av, 1 should give Mm whatever he might wish (like tl ti fiovkoiro Botrjv av. if he should wish anything, I should give it). UuvCiv
1437. Conditional relative sentences have most of the peculiarities and irregularities of common protasis. Thus, the protasis
|
308 |
308 SYNTAX. [1438
and apodosis may have different forms (1421); the relative without av or k« is sometimes found in poetry with the subjunctive (like it for idv or tl kc, 1390; 1400), especially in general conditions in Homer; the relative (like «, 1411) in Iloiner may take ««' or av with the optative; the relative clause may depend on au infinitive, participle, or other construction (1418; 1410); and the conjunction 8e may connect the relative clause to the antecedent clause (1422).
1438. Homeric similes often have the subjunctive with ok ore (occasionally ok or av), sometimes with ok or
ASSIMILATION IX CONDITIONAL RELATIVE CLAUSES.
1439. When a conditional relative clause expressing either a future or a general supposition depends on a subjunctive or optative, it regularly takes the same mood by assimilation. E.g.
'Edv tlvis o'i av Svvojvrai tovto ttoiCxti, KaAuk t£ei, if any who maybe able shall do this, it will be well; 11 tiws ol Suva tiro tovto ttoioIcv, KttXuk av <^ot, if any who should be (or were) able should do this, it viould be well. Ei.'#c 7ravTt? 01 8vvaLvro touto 7roioi«v O that all who may be (or were) able would do this. (Here the optative ttoiouv [1507] makes 01 Swcuito preferable to 01 av &wutvrai, which would express the same idea.) 'E7rei8av wv av irplr)T
1440. Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence depends on a s-.condary tense of the indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes by .assimilation a similar form. E.g.
Et Tti/f? ol iovv avro tovto < 7r pa gav, KuAto? av tl^cv, if any who had been able had done this, it would have been well. EJ iv CKtiVjj tij (fnavrj tc Kal toj Tpomo t yov »V ol? « t c 6pd/x jxtjv, if 1 were speak' ing to you in the dialect and in the manner in which I had been
|
309 |
1447] THE MOODS. 309
brought up (all introduced by tl £irvyxavw w, if I happened to be a foreigner), P.Ap. 17d. So in Latin: Si .solos eos diccrcs miseros quibus nioriendum esset, neminem tu quidem eorum qni viverent exciperes.
1441. N. All clauses which come under this principle of assimilation belong (as conditional forms) equally under 1434, 1436, 1431, or 1433. This principle often decides which form shall be used in future conditions (1270, 2).
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING PURPOSE.
1442. The relative with the future indicative may express a purpose. E.g.
Tlp«j(itiavTr(fjLiriivtjtis raxrr' iptt «wapiiTTai tois Trpa.yjxaaiv, to send an embassy to say this, and to be present at the transactions, P. 1,2. Ou yap
The antecedent here may be definite or indefinite; but the negative particle is always pi), as in final clauses (1301).
1443. N". Homer generally has the subjunctive (with xe joined to the relative) in this construction after primary tenses, and the optative (without ki) after secondary tenses. The optative is sometimes found even in Attic prose. The earlier Greek here agrees with the Latin.
1444. N. In this construction the future indicative is very rarely changed to the future optative after past tenses.
RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING RESULT.
1445. The relative with any tense of the indicative, or with a potential optative, may express a result. The negative is ou. E.g.
Tt's outou puiVfTcu ooris oi (3ov(.Tai trot
1446. N. This is equivalent to the use of ware with the finite moods (1450; 1454). It occurs chiefly after negative leading clauses or jntcrrogatives implying a negative.
1447. The relative with a future (sometimes a present)
|
310 |
310 SYNTAX. [1448
indicative may express a result which is aimed at. The negative here is fx-r). E.g.
Et'^cro fj.7jOifj.Lav ol crvvTv^iyjv ytvtvOai. ry fj.lv 7ruvail KQ.Tao'Tal. ipao-dai rr/v Qhpuimjv, he prayed thai no such chance wight befall him as to prer-cnt him from subjugating Europe (= toirre /xiv vavcrcu), lid. 7,54. BouAi^cif toiovtov fj.vrjfj.ilov Kxrahiwuv u fjyj r»}? avBpunrlvrjq <£vcrcw? icrriv, when he wished to lear-e such a manorial as might be beyond human nature ( = ware fj.i] ctrai), 1.4,89.
1448. N. Tliis construction (1447) is generally equivalent to that of wore with the infinitive (1450).
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES WITH THK INFINITIVE AND THE FINITE MOODS.
1449. "iltiTe (sometimes <« id="iv.i.p8318.1">so as' *° thaU is used with the infinitive and with the indicative to express a result.
1450. With the infinitive (the negative being ixi)), the result is stated as one which the action of the leading verb tends to produce; with the indicative (the negative being oi), as one which that action actually does produce. E.g.
n
1451. T. These two constructions are essentially distinct in their nature, even when it is indifferent to the general sense which is used in a (jivon case; as in oijtois iarl 8tivos <7T< 81x771' /xij 8i8ovtti, Ac> is so skilful «■> not in be. punished, and ovt? ion 8cii'6s
The use of fxy with the infinitive and of oi witli the indicative shows that the distinction was really felt. When the infinitive with were has oi, it generally represents, in indirect discourse, an indicative with ov of the direct form (see Moods and Tenses, §§ 504-598).
1452. The infinitive wi:h o"
|
311 |
5460] THE MOODS. 311
final clause: see a>or« hU-qv /xr/ hihovai (= iVu /xij SiSwcu), quoted in 1450. It may a'so be equivalent to an object clause, with cnnus (1372); as in fxrj^avai (.iprj(JOjx.tv, war' (? to wav at twi'8 djruAAafai ■novwv, we "'ill Jind devices to wholly free you from these troubles ( = o7rws at a.Tr(xX6iojMtv), A.Eu.&l.
1453. The infinitive after wo-tc sometimes expresses a condition, like that after «'<£' w or «'<£'
jfi, !( 4ci)i(/ in their power lo rule the rest of the. Greeks, on condition that they should themselves obey the Kinij, I). U, II.
1454. As u>
1455. N. "Us rt (never wo'T^) in Homer has the infinitive only twice; elsewhere it means simply as, like wavtp.
1456. 'fi? is sometimes used like wort with the infinitive and the finite moods, but chiefly in Aeschylus, Sophocles, Herodotus, and Xe.nophon.
1457. N. Verbs, adjectives, and nouns wliich commonly take the simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with oxrre or oj? ; as [prj
1458. K. In the same way (1457) ware, or wi with the infinitive may follow the comparative with i? (1531); as IX.6.tt
1459. N. 'OcrTt or ws is occasionally followed by a paniuijjlo; as ojcttc (TKtp(x(j6ai ocov, .so M
1460. 'E^' w or c^)'
A
|
312 |
312 SYNTAX. [1461
CATTSAL RELATIVE.
1461. A relative clause may express a cause. The verb is in the indicative, as in causal seuteiices (1505), and the negative is generally oi. E.g.
QavfiuCTuv iroccis, o? tj/au' ov&iv hC&ux;, you do a strange thing in giving us nothing (like on
Compare causal relative sentences in Latin.
1462. N. When the negative is p.-q, the sentence is conditional as well as causal; as ToAatVwpos it,
TEMPORAL PARTICLES SIGNIFYING UNTIL AND HEF0RE.
"E
1463. When i'w?, la-re, S-xpi., /xt'xp', and the epic ofypa mean while, so long as, they are not distinguished in their use from other relatives. But when they mean until, they have many peculiarities. Homer lias Jo? or uu><: for
1464. When ecu?, eare, axph h-^XP1-' anc^ o
Nt)XOu 7rdiv, £to? fwrjk&ov tis 7rora^.ov, f swam on again, until I came into a river, Od.7,280. TufJTa t-n-oiovv, /J-(XPl
This is the construction of the relative with a definite antecedent (1427).
1465. These particles follow the construction of conditional relatives in Loth forms of future conditions, in unfulfilled conditions, and in present and past general suppositions. E.g.
'ETruT^es, £o-t' u.v kcu To. oL7ra ttpoo"/xa^7)5, wait until you (shall) learn the rest besides (1434), A./Y. 007. Eiiroi/i* av ■ • .<<*)« irapa-TtiVai/xi tovtov, 1 should tell him, etc., until I put htm to torture (1430), X.(M,3". 'HStws ar tovtio In SuXcyonvv, toos avra> . • • SiKa, I should (in that case) gladly have continued to talk with
|
313 |
1471] THE MOODS. 313
him until I had given him back, etc. (1433), P. G. 506 . *A 8' av a
1466. N. The omission of av after those, particles, when the verb is in the subjunctive, is more common than it is after tl or ordinary relatives (1400), occurring sometimes in Attic prose; as fieP' ^°w ytyr/rat, until the ship sails, T. 1,137.
1467. Clauses introduced by Jfwj etc. frequently imply a purpose; see the examples under M05. When such clauses depend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of indirect discourse (1502, 3), like final clauses (13G9).
1468. N. Homer uses tis o k«, until, like jus kc ; and Herodotus uses e's o and cs ov like Iws.
IIpiv, before, until.
1469. Tlplv is followed by the infinitive, and also (like em?) by the finite moods.
1470. In Homer npiv generally has the infinitive without reference to its meaning or to the nature of the leading verb. But in other Greek it has the infinitive chiefly when it means simply before and when the leading clause is affirmative; it has the finite moods only when it means until (as well as before), and chiefly when the leading verb is negative or implies a negative. It has the subjunctive and optative only after negatives.
1471. 1. Examples of trplv with the infinitive: —
N
|
314 |
314 SYNTAX. [1472
2. Examples of npCv, until, with the indicative (generally after negatives), and with the subjunctive and optative (always after negatives), the constructions being the same as those with iW (1404-1467): —
Ovk rjv akifc-qp! ovdlv, rrpiv y iyui o-
1472. X. In Homer -np'cv y on (never the simple npiv) is used with the indicative, and irpiv y or av (sometimes irpiv, witliout av) with tlie subjunctive.
1473. N. ITpiV, like Iw; etc. (1466), sometimes has the subjunctive without av, even in Attic Greek; as /xrj private irplv fjuidr)<;, do not lament before you know, S. Ph. 917.
1474. Tlplv rj (a developed form for vpiv) is used by Herodotus (rarely by Homer), and irpoTipov rj, sooner than, before, by Herodotus and 'l'hucydides, in most of the constructions of wpiv- So 7rdpos, before, in Homer with the infinitive. Even vo-repov rj, later than, once takes the infinitive by analogy. lC.g.
Tlplv yap rj ottLq-u) o"<£e'as avo.TrA.«crai. rjXm 6 Kpoicos, for before they had sailed back, Croesus was taken, Hd. 1,78. OvSi ij&eaav vpoTfpov rj wep (w v0ovro Tprjj(inW. they did not even know of it unhl l/tey heard from the Trachinians, Hd.7,175. Mj) airavLo'TaoOai a7r6 rrjs 7rdA(0? irporipov rj e^e'Awcri, not to withdraw from the city until they capture it, 11(1.9,8(5. HpoTcpov r) alo-6(a6ai avrow, before they perceived them. T. fi, 5£. Sec T. 1, *>0 ; 2, 05. TtWa c$iiovro Trapot 7r€T(rjv6. yiviaQai, they took away the nestlings before they were ftedyed, Od. 16,218. So also iTtcnv vartpov (Karbv rj avrous olxrjo'aL, a hundred years after their own settlement, T. 6,4.
VIII. INDIRECT DISCOURSE OR ORATIO OBLIQUA. GENERAL PRINCIPLES.
1475. A direct quotation or question gives the exact
|
315 |
1481J THE MOODS. 315
words of the original speaker or writer (i.e. of the oratio recta). In an indirect quotation or question {oratio obliqua) the original words conform to the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted.
Thus the words ravra fiovXo/jiai may be quoted either directly, Xiyu n? "ravra fiovXofiai," or indirectly, Xiyu tis on Tuvra /JouAtrai or
1476. Indirect quotations may be introduced by oti or o>v, that, with a finite verb, or by the infinitive (as in the above example); sometimes also by the participle.
1477. N. "On, that, may introduce even a direct quotation; as liirov oti Ixavoi idfjuv, they said, "we are aide," X. A. :3,410.
1478. 1. "Oitujs is sometimes used like 0J5, that, especially in poetry ; as toCto fiij juoi 4>pa£, ottuk; ovk d kukos, S.O.7'.548.
2. Homer rarely lias 0 (neuter of os) for oti, (hat; as XtvcraiTi yap to ye irdvTt<;, 0 fj.01. yipas tp)((Tai aXkrj, for you all see this, t/iaC my prize goes another way, 11.1, Il'U ; so 5, M'i.
3. Ovviko. and oOovviko, that, sometimes introduce indirect quotations in poetry.
1479. Indirect questions follow the same principles as indirect quotations with on or to?, in regard to their moods and tenses.
For the words used to introduce indirect questions, see 1005 and 1000.
1480. The term indirect discourse applies to all clauses (even single clauses in sentences of different construction) which indirectly express the words or thought of any person, even those of the speaker himself (see 1502).
1481. Indirect quotations after b'n and w? and indirect questions follow these general rules : —
1. After primary tenses, each verb retains both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse.
2. After past tenses, each indicative or subjunctive of the direct discourse may be either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in its original mood and tense. But all secondary tenses of the indicative in unreal coudi-tions (1397; 1433) and all optatives remain unchanged.
|
316 |
316 SYNTAX. [1482
1482. N. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the optative, generally remain unchanged in all kinds of sentences (but. see 1488). The aorist indicative likewise remains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause of the direct discourse (1497, 2). (See 1499.)
1483. When the quotation depends on a verb which takes the infinitive or participle, its leading verb is changed to the corresponding lense of the infinitive or participle (Zi> being retained when there is one), and its dependent verbs follow the preceding rule (1481).
1484. 'Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form; but when a particle ov a relative word has av with the subjunctive in the direct form, as in idv, orav, os av, etc. (1299, 2), the av is dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the optative after a past tense in indirect discourse.
1485. N. "Ar is never added in indirect discourse when it was not used in the direct form.
1486. The negative particle of the direct discourse is regularly retained in the indirect i'onn. (But see 1496.)
SIMPLE SENTENCES IN INDIRKCT DISCOURSE.
Indicative and Optative aftkii oti and »s, and in Indikect Questions.
1487. After primary tenses an indicative (without an) retains both its mood and its tense in indirect discourse. After past tenses it is either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in the original mood and tense. E.g.
hiyu on ypd
ETirtv on ypd4>oi or on ypd
|
317 |
1490] THE MOODS. 317
(Ol'T.) 'ETrtipwfirjv airreu Sttievvvat, on oloiro fiiv ilvai ao
(Iniuc.) EAt-yoi' on (Airi^ouai
1488. N. Occasionally the present optative represents the- im-perfe.ct indicative in this construction; as a-ncKplvavTO oti oi'Scis paprvs TruptiTj, they replied that there had been no witness present (ouStis wapijv), L).30,2() (here the context makes it clear that vapu-q does not stand for iraptaTi).
1489. 1. In a few cases the Greek changes a present indicative to the imperfect, or a perfect to the pluperfect, in indirect discourse;, instead of retaining it or changing it to the optative; as cV avopia tjoui', iwoovfifvoi. ore. inl rals [3ao-i(
2. In Homer this is the ordinary construction : see 0c/.3,l(!O.
Subjunctive or Optative kei'ukskntinu the Istjskhouative
Sti'IWl'NOTlVB.
1490. An interrogative subjunctive (1358), after a primary tense, retains it.s mood and tense in an indirect question; after a past tense, it may be either changed
|
318 |
318 SYNTAX. [1491
to the same tense of the optative or retained in the subjunctive. E.g.
BovXtvopai ojtios at atroBpui, 1 am trying to tldnk how 1 shall escape you (n-uis at d-rroSpw;), X. C- 1,413. Ovk olS' d XpvadvTa. roxrno &to, I do itol know whether I shall tjiie (tlnia) to Chrysantas here, tbid.8,41C. Oi« l^u> ri tliroi, 1 do not know what ] shall say (ti eurw;), L>. 1),54. Cf. Xon liabeo quid dicam. 'Em'/povro tl mipaooitv rr/v iroXiv, they asked whether they should yive up the city (napa?>u}/xtv rr/v woiy; shall ice (jioc. up the city?), T.I, 25. 'liiropa o ri ^pTj(raiTo ru Trpdyfian, he was ol n lo*s how to deal with the matter (ti pr'iawfua;), X. //. 7,-lc9. 'E/JotiAtiloiTO art KaTaKau-
1491. N. In these questions tl (not idv) is used for whether, with both subjunctive and optative (see the second example in 1490).
1492. N. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the optative when the leading verb is optative, contrary to the general usage of indirect discourse (1270, 2); as ouk av «x0'? ° Tt XPV^"-10 o'avTia, you would not know what to do with yourself, I'. G.48()l).
Indicative on Optativk with av.
1493. An indicative or optative with dv retains its mood and tense (with dv) unchanged in indirect discourse after on or ok and in indirect questions. E.g.
Aeyti (or IXtytv) on toiVo bv iyivtTo, he says (or said) that this would have happened; ( ytv on ovro'; StKaoo? av dvoddvoL, he said that this man would justly die. 'HpwTcui' tl ooitv dv ra mard, they asked whether they would give the pledges (Soi'rjTt dv;), X./!.4,8
Inkinitive and Pahtk-ipi.e in iNmniiCT Uiscouhse.
1494. Each tense of the infinitive or participle in indirect discourse represents the tense of the finite verb which would be used in the direct form, the present and perfect including the imperfect and pluperfect. Each tense with av can represent the corresponding tenses of either indicative or optative with dv. E.g.
'App(i>crT(7v irpo'jio.a'i^tTai, he pretends that he is sick, i^w/xoatv appwaTtlv toutow.', he look on oath that, this man was sick, T>. li), 124. tovtovs, lie says that he detained them, ibid.'id.
|
319 |
1497] THE MOODS. 319
flOTf ©17/&UOUS cwiKtKi]pv)(ivo.i, he said that
the 'flubans had ojfercd u reward for him, ibid.'Jl. 'EjrayytAAcrai ra StKcua Troiijauv, he promises 10 do what is riy/u, ibid. 4o.
"HyytiAt tovtovs i pop.t,vov
See examples of av with inl'mitive and participle in 1308. For the present infinitive and participle as imperfect, see 1285 and 1280.
1495. The infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse, and its tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it depends on a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when also the thought, u.< originally conceit)'1.'/, would have been expressed by some tense of the indicative (with or without &v) or optative (with Ji<), so I hat. it can be transferred without change of tense to the infinitive. Thus in ftovkcTai i e7v, he wishes to go, IXOiiv represents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is not in indirect discourse. But in <^tjav iXdtlv, he says that he went. IX&tiv represents rjBov of the direct discourse. (See Greek Moods and Tenses, § 681.)
1496. The regular negative of the infinitive and participle in imttrect discourse is oil, but exceptions occur. Especially the infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, and swearing (see ]280) regularly has p.r) for its negative; as )xr)hiv eipijxtVai, he swvre that he had said nothing, D.2), 1J9.
INDIRECT QUOTATION OK COMPLEX SENTENCES.
1497. 1. When a complex sentence is indirectly quoted, its leading verb follows the rule for simple sentences (1487-1494).
2. After primary tenses the dependent verbs retain the same mood and tense. After past tenses, dependent primary tenses of the indicative and all dependent subjunctives may either be changed to the same tense of the optative or retain their original wood and tense. When a subjunctive becomes optative, av is dropped, tdv, '6-rav, etc. becoming ei, ore, etc. Rut dependent secondary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged. E.y.
|
320 |
320 SYNTAX. [1498
1. Av VflUS .(yt]TC, TTOUJCTttV (
£8o£iav avriu
2. AvtKpivuTo on fiavBai'OLcv a ovk ewicTTaivro, he replied, that they were learning what they did not understand (ho said fxavda.-voxxnv a ovk eVioraiTai, which might have been retained), P.Eu. 270'. Ei rifj. (jieiryoi'Ta kyjijioLTO, Trpoijyopevw otl u5y iroA.c/xiiu> XpijcroiTo, he announced thai, if he should catch any one runninq away, he should treat him as an enemy (lie said c'l tivu. Xyj^o/xai, ^pij-oo/xcu), X. C.'-i, I3 (1405). No/xi'£w, o
"HXini^ov tov% SiKeXoiis ravrrj, ous p.CTCTrtjJ.{po.vTO, anavrrj-acaOai, they hoped the Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them here, T. 7, 80.
1498. One verb may be changed to the optative while another is retained; as 8iju>o-as on iVoi/iOi' e«n /xd cOai, el ti? i$(pxoiTo, htming shown that they wore ready to fn/hl if atn/ one should come forth {eroifwi io-fitv, idv rn <^6p^r;rai), X. C.i, I1. This sometimes causes a variety of constructions in the same sentence.
1499. The aorisl indicative is not changed to the aorist optative in dependent clauses, because in thpso th< id="iv.i.p8434.1"> aorist optative generally represents the aorist subjunctive.
The present indicative is seldom changed to the present optative in dependent clauses, for a similar reason. For the imperfect and pluperfect, see 1482.
1500. N. A dependent optative of the direct form of course remains unchanged in all indirect discourse (1481, 2).
1501. N. Occasionally a dependent present or perfect indicative is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading clause (14Sii>
|
321 |
1602] THE MOODS. 321
1502. The principles of 1497 apply also to all dependent clauses after past tenses, which express indirectly the past thought of any person. This applies especially to the following constructions: —
1. Clauses depending on an infinitive after verbs of wishing, commanding, advising, and others which imply thought but do not take the infinitive in indirect discourse (1495).
2. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied in the context (1420), or with the apodosis expressed in a verb like fc^w (1423).
3. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention, purpose, or expectation, especially those introduced by eW or -npiv.
4. Even ordinary relative sentences, which would regularly taku the indicative.
(1) E/3ovoi'To tkBtlv, d tovto ycvoiro, they unshed to go if this should happen. (We might have eixv toZto yiv-qrai, expressing the foi'in, if this shall happen, in which the wi-h would be conceived). Here t6uv is not in indirect discourse (1490). 'Ekciv(T(.v o ti &vvo-i-vto Xafi6vTa<; /xfraSiuJKCtf, he commanded them to take vhat they could and pursue (we might have 6 rt ay hwiovrai, representing o ti av hvvrjudt), X. C.7,37. Tlpoilvov aurots firj vavpXL^civ
"v^Cogtvfliois, rjv fj.rj tVt Kf'pKupav TrXtwoi Kal fj.(Xbi
(2)
EOavfio-^ev cl ns dpyuptov irpdrroiTO, he wondered that any one demanded, money, X. Af. 1, 2'; but in the same book (1, I13) we find cdatyui£e 8' d fxy] ^nvipov avToi? icrriv, he wondered that it was not plain.
|
322 |
322 SYNTAX. [1503
(3) 2TovSas (TroirjO'avTO £
(4) Kat rJTic (rrjixa l&tcrOai, ottl pa ot yafi/Spoto Trdpo. Tlpoiroio
For the same principle in causal sentences, see lo'lO.
1503. X. On this principle, clauses introduced by "va, ottws, 10s, 64>pa, and fvfj admit the doulile construction of indirect discourse, and allow the subjunctive or future indicative to stand unchanged after past, tenses (see 13C9). The same principle extends to all conditional and all conditional relative and temporal sentences depending on clauses with Iva, etc., as these too belong to the indirect discourse.
Ov OTL, OV% O7TC0S, |AT] OTl, ^Lr OTT
1504. These expressions, by the ellipsis of a verb of saying, often mean / do not sj>cak of, or not to speak of. With ovx an indicative (e.g. A/yw) was originally understood, and with p.r/ an imperative or subjunctive (e.g. Xiyt or tun/s). E.g.
Oi^ ottojs ia crKtvrj iiriSocrdc, dAAa ka! Ovpai a
When these forms were thus used, the original ellipsis was probably never present to the mind.
IX. CAUSAL SENTENCES.
1505. Causal sentences express a cause, and are introduced by 6tl, axr, because, eVe/, eireiS-i], 8Ve, oirore, since,
|
323 |
1609] TIIE MOODS. 323
and by other particles of similar meaning. They have the indicative after both primary and secondary tenses. The negative particle is ov. E.g.
K?;8cro yafj Auvauii/, on pa OvqanovTas oparo, for she pitied the Hanui, because slie saw them dying, 11.1, 50. "Or t rov6' ovtuis
A potential optative or indicative may stand in a causal sentence: see ]). 18,49 and 70.
1506. N. On the principle of indirect discourse (1302), a causal sentence after a past tense may have the optative, to imply that the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person than the writer; as rov ITfpirtAc'a CKaKi[ov, on orpuT^yos a>v ovk ivc$ayoi, they abused Pericles, because (as they said) being general At did not lead then out, T.2,21. (This assigns the Athenians' reason for abusing Pericles, but does not show the historian's opinion.)
X. EXPRESSION OF A WISH.
1507. When a wish refers to the future, it is expressed by the optative, either with or without e'.'de or el yap (Homeric also aWe, at iydp~), 0 that, 0 if. The negative" is ju.)/, which can stand alone with the optative. E.g.
Y/uv Otoi Soitv CK7rcp<7v>ay the O'ods grant to you to destroy Priam's city, 7/. 1,18. At yapjp.ol TOcro-TjvSc 0toi Bvva-juv TripiButv, O that the Gods would clothe me with so much strength, Od.3,20j. To ftiv uiv Tuxira Trpyercroi1; Tiiirtp iv XlPaL *Xlll;>for the present may you continue to do these things which you have now in hand, fid.7,5. Ei#e
The force of the tenses here is the sump, as in protasis (see 1272).
1508. In portly « alone is .sometimes used with the optative in wishes ; as tl nui yivono #Jyyo<; cV /3pa^:'oirir, O that I might find a voice in my arms, K. Her. S:iO.
1509. N. The poels, espci-ially Homer, sometimes prefix (is (probably exclamatory) to the optative in wishes; ;is ws avoXoiro Kai aAXo; on? TOiaCrd yc f>'X0li lik'Hoisc let any other perish vJio may do the like. Od. 1,47.
|
324 |
324 SYNTAX. [1510
1510. In poetry, especially in Homer, the optative alone sometimes expresses a. concession or permission, sometimes a command or exhortation; as alrts 'Apyd-nv "EXcyrjf MtviXaos dyoiTO, Menclaus may lake, back A r give Helen, II.4,19. Te^Ku'ijs, w lipoir, rj k
(See Appendix I. in Greek Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-3S9.)
1511. When a wish refers to the present or the past, and it is implied that its object in not or was not attained, it is expressed in Attic Greek by a secondary tense of the indicative with eWe or el yap, which here cannot be omitted. The negative is y.i). The imperfect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis (1397). Kg.
EWt. toC'to iiroiti, 0 that he were doing this, or 0 that he had done this. HWc toOto tttoc'tjct£v, 0 that he had done this; d yap firj iyivcro rovro, 0 that thin had not happened. EW ttxcs ftiXriovs
1512. The aorist Z
Cl
1513. X. "n<^)tXoi/ with the infinitive is negatived by /rq (not oi), and it may even Ik- preceded by tide, d yap, or w% ; as ptij ■nor'
1514. In Homer tlio pv'-ont, opta(ht>. (^Wlfially with tldl OT (I yap) may express an unattained wish in present time; as d6' tos
|
325 |
1517] THE INFINITIVE. 325
ti/3oifLi f$lrj St fxai ifxniZos tit], 0 that I were again as young and my strength were firm, 11.11,670.
This corresponds to the Homeric use of the optative in unreal conditions and their apodoses (1398). In both constructions the present optative is commonly future in Homer, as in other Greek.
1515. Homer never uses the indicative (1511) in wishes. He always expresses a past wish by the construction with uxjxkov (1512), and a present wish sometimes by ufaXov and sometimes by the present optative (1514).
THE INFINITIVE.
1516. 1. The infinitive is originally a neuter verbal noun, with many attributes of a verb. Thus, like a verb, it has voices and tenses; it may have a subject or object; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives.
2. When the definite article came into use with other nouns (see 937, 4), it was used also with the infinitive, which thus became more distinctly a noun with four cases.
For the subject of the infinitive, see 895. For the case of predicate nouns and adjectives when the subject is omitted, see 927
INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. As StinjECT, Predicate, Onjr.cr, on Ai-positive.
1517. The infinitive may be the subject nominative of a finite verb (especially of an impersonal verb, 898, or of eo-Ti), or the subject accusative of another infinitive. It may be a predicate nominative (907), and it may stand in apposition to a noun (911). E.g.
Hvveflri aira 18c"lv, it happened to Mm to go; c£rjv //.fVctv, it was possible to remain; ijSv ttoAAois i^6poiK «xt'l'> '" '' P^eu:ia"1 t0 have many enemies? $>r)
|
326 |
326 SYNTAX. [1018
1518. The infinitive may be the object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object accusative, sometimes that of an accusative of kindred signification (1051), and sometimes that of an object genitive.
1519. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse (1495) follows verbs whose action naturally implies another action as its object, especially tbose expressing wish, command, advice, cause, uttempt, intention, prevention, ability, fitness, necessity, or their opposites. Such verbs are in general the same in Greek as in English, and others will be learned by practice.^ The negative is /xr/. E.g.
BovAerai cXdtlv, he wishes to go; fiovXiraL rots TroAiVas TroXt-[UKuvi clvai, he wishes the citizens to be warlike; vapai.voiifj.iv
1520. X. The tenses here used are chiefly the present and aorist, and these do not differ in their time (1272). In this construction the infinitive h;is no more reference to time than any other verbal noun would have, hut the meaning of the verb generally gives it a reference to the future; as in d-iiovrai Oavilv(above) davtiv expresses time only so far as davdrov «ould do so in its place.
1521. The infinitive may depend on a noun and a verb (generally icrri) which together are equivalent to a verb which takes an object infinitive (lfilO). E.g.
'AvdyKr] e'crri wavra% aircXdt'iv, there is a necessity that all should vn'thdrvii'; kiVSvvos tjv avr<2 tt
For the infinitive with rov depending on a noun, see 1547.
1522. 1. The infinitive in indirect discourse (1495) is
|
327 |
1626J THE INFINITIVE. 327
generally the object of a verb of saying or thinking or some equivalent expression. Here each tense of the infinitive corresponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See 1494, with the examples.
2. Many verbs of this class (especially the passive of Xiyw) allow both a personal and an impersonal construction. Thus we can say Xc'ycnu 6 KCpo? iKOuv, Cyrus is mid to have gone, or Xlytrai rbv Kvpov i6uv, it is said that Gyms ivent. Aoxt'u), seem, is generally used personally; as bond Hvax
1523. 1. Of the three common verbs meaning to stay, —
(a)
(b) cTt-ov regularly takes on or
(o) A.«-yactive voice it generally takes on or a*.
Other verbs which regularly take the infinitive in indirect discourse are olofini, r/yio^iu, i-o/xc'£uj, and S
2. Exceptional cases of ilxov with the infinitive are more common than those ol <£i;/u' with ort or ojs (which are very rare).
EiTroi'. cuvniiomlcd, takes the infinitive regularly (1519).
For th« two constructions allowed after verbs of hoping, expecting, etc., see 1280.
1524. N. A relative clause depending on an infinitive in indirect discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation; as itruSr] Se ytvicrOai cm rfj o'lkio, ((4>y) Oivcyii.ivr)v KCLTakanffavciv ti)v Ovfyjy, and when they came to the house, {he said) they found the door open, P. Sy. 174d. Herodotus allows this assimilation even after il, if, and Siurt, hecausc.
1525. Tn narration, the infinitive often seems to stand for the indicative, when it depends on some word like XeyeraL, it is said, expressed or even implied in what precedes. E.g.
'AiriKO)j.ivov<; oe €9 rb 'Apyos, SiarCQtaOai tov
|
328 |
328 SYNTAX. [1526
Infinitive with Adjectives.
1526. The infinitive may depend on adjectives corresponding in meaning to verbs which take an object infinitive (1519), especially those expressing ability, fitness, desert, willingness, and their opposites. E.g.
Awaro? iroitij' tovto, able to do this; Sfiiw Xtyctv, skilled in speaking; d£ios tovto Xajitlv, worthy to receive this: 7rpo#v/jios X.I-yiiv, eager to speak. MaXaxol KapTcpc7v, (too) effeminate to endure, P. lip. uuC1'; ivto-Trjfx.wv XiytivTe ko! aLyav, knowing how both to speak and to be silent, P. PMr. 270*.
So toiovtoi oIol wovrjpov twos tpyov I
1527. K. &iKau>s,just, and some other adjectives may thus be used personally with the infinitive; as SiWatds icrTt tovto Troic.lv, he has a rigid to do this (equivalent to &Uaiov ioTiv avrbv tovto xoitTv).
Limiting Infixitive with Ailiectivks, Adverbs, and Nouns.
1528. Any adjective or adverb may take an infinitive to limit its meaning to a particular action. E.g.
®ea/jia alcr^pov bpav, a sight disgraceful to behold; 6yoi v/uv Xpr](rif 'i>TuToi. axovaai, words most useful for you to hear; to. ^(aXi-TTi'oraTa ilptlv, the things hardest tojind. TIoXiTtia 17*10-™ ^aXiirrj
1529. N. This infinitive (1528) is generally active rather than passive; as Trpayiux ^aki-rrov ttoiiIv, u thing hard to do, rather than XaXarov Troieiadai., hard to be done.
1530. N. Nouns and oven verbs may take the infinitive as a limiting accusative (1058); as davpa IStcrOaL, a wonder to behold, Od.8,.'J(J0. 'Apto-Tcv'to-xe /xa^tcr^ui. lie was the jirsl in fghting (lil;e fxaxyv), 11.0,400. Aotftts Sta
1531. N. Here belongs the infinitive after a comparative with r), than; as voarjua /xet^ov yj
For
|
329 |
1536] THE INFINITIVE. 329
Infinitive of Purpose.
1532. 1. The infinitive may express a purpose. E.g. Oi apxovTi*;, oi)s t'keaSe dp^c(v fiov, the rulers, whom you chose
to rule me, P.Ap.26*. Trjv tt6X.iv
2. Here, as with adjectives (1529), the infinitive is active rather than passive; as ktolvciv c/W viv i&ocrav, they gave her to me to kill (to be killed), E. 7Vo.874.
1533. N. In Homer, where ware only rarely has the sense of so as (1455), the simple infinitive may express a result: as tis
dOai; who brought them into conflict so as to contend? 11. 1,8.
Absolute Infinitive.
1534. The infinitive may stand absolutely in parenthetical phrases, generally with ok or ouov. E.g.
The most common of these is ok twos cittiIv or cos iIttuv, so to speak. Others are ok
Herodotus has ok Adyoj elwelv and ov iroAAco Ao'yw ilmiv, not to make a long story, in short.
1535. X. In certain cases tlvai seems to be superfluous; especially in iKwv iZvo.i, willing or willingly, which generally stands in a negative sentence. So in to vvv rival, at present; to r-qp.ipov rival, to-day; ro in ixfivois elvat and similar phrases, as far as depends on them; rrjv Trpuirrjv rival, alfirst, Hd. 1,153; Kara tovto rival, so far as concerns this, P./-*r.317*; ok iraXaia tlvai, considering their age, T. 1,21; and some other phrases.
Ixfinitivf. in Commands, Wishes, Laws, etc.
1536. The infinitive with a subject nominative is sometimes used like the second person of the imperative, especially in Homer. E.g.
Mt/ 7TOTf koX (tv yvvaiKi irep i^irtos rival, lie thou never indulgent to thy wife, Od. 11,441. Ofs /xij weXafto', do not approach these (= /xr/ 7rc'Aa£c), A.Pr.712.
For the third person, with a subject accusative, see 1537.
|
330 |
330 SYNTAX. [1637
1537. The infinitive with a subject accusative sometimes expresses a wish, like the optative (1507); and sometimes a command, like the third person of the imperative. E.g.
ZtC mrrcp, i) Aiavra Xa lv r} TvSt'os v'wv, Father Zeus, may the lot fall eillter on Ajux or on the son of Tydeus ( = Ai'a? 6lol, etc.), II.7,179; dcol TroXirai,/xy pc SouAct'a; rv lv, 0 ye O'uds who hold our city, may slavery not be my lot, A.Se.2o4. Tpaius UnciO' 'EA/vTjy aTroSowai, let the Trojans then surrender Helen ( = a7roSouv), II. :!,285.
1538. X. This construction (1537) has been explained by supplying a vwb like 805, (/rant (see 86? Tiaacrdai, grant that I may take vengeance, 11.3,Ml), or yivono, may it be.
1539. N. For the infinitive in exclamations, which generally has tlie article,*see 1054.
1540. In laws, trraties, and proclamations, the infinitive often depends on tSo£e or S.'&wcrai, be it enacted, or k
£^iKat,iLV hi rrji> iy *Apa'a) 7rayw ifrovov, and (be it enacted) that the Senate on the Areopagus shall hurt? jurisdiction in cases of murder, D. 23,22. *Ettj 8i cZVat to? oirov$a<; irtvTiJKovTa., and thai the treaty shall continue fifty yaws, T. 0, 18. 'AxoutTt A.c
INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE.
1541. When the infinitive has the article, its character as a neuter noun becomes more distinct, while it loses none of its attributes as a verb. The addition of the article extends its use to many new constructions, especially to those with prepositions; and the article is sometimes allowed even in many of the oldertxmstructions in which the infinitive, regularly stands alone.
Ini-initive with to a« Scuject or Objkct.
1542. The subject infinitive (1.517) may take the article to make it more distinctly a noun. E.g.
To yi'oivcu <7r«TT»7/n)v A.a/3etv toriv, to learn is to acquire knowledge, P.77i.200c. Tovto 1
|
331 |
1547] THE INFINITIVE. 331
else than to seem to be wise without being so, P. Ap. 29*. The predicate infinitive^ here omit the article (1517). See 906.
1543. The object infinitive takes the article chiefly after verbs which do not regularly take the simple infinitive (see 1519), or when the relation of the infinitive to the verb is less close than it usually is. Eg.
To TekiVTr/aai Trdvruiv tj irnrpii>fjL(vr] KaTiKpiviv, Fair: adjudged dealt) lo all (liko ddvarov rravrav Kartxpivtv), 1.1,43; « to kojAwoi ttjv tu>v EAAryi/wi/ koivu)v[o.v liT(.7rpOLKHv £y
1544. N. Sometimes in poetry the distinction between the object infinitive with and without to is hardly perceptible ; as in rX-qo-Ofuit. to Kardavtiv, I shall endure to die, A. Ag. 1290; to Spav ovk i)6i ](rav, they were unwilling lo act, S. 0. C. 442.
Infinitive with to with Adjectives and Nouns.
1545. N. The infinitive with to is sometimes used with the adjectives and nouns which regularly take the simple infinitive (152G). E.g.
To y3i'a itokiTuiv Spav (
Infinitive with tov, tw, ok to in Various Constructions.
1546. The genitive, dative, or accusative of the infinitive with the article may depend on a preposition. E.g.
Tlpo tov tov<; opKovs airohovvaL, before taking the oaths, D. 18,20 ; irp6<; tw fnjSiv eV T77? Trp((rj3(ia<; Xafitlv, besides receiving nothing by
the cmOaxct/, D. 19,L'2O; Sin rij ^
1547- The genitive and dative of the infinitive, with the article, can stand in most of the constructions belonging to those cases ; as in that of the attributive genitive, the genitive after a comparative or after verbs
|
332 |
332 . SYNTAX. [1548
and adjectives, the dative of cause, manner, or means, and the dative after verbs and adjectives. E.g.
ToC ■nulv t7ri6v/j.M, a desire to drink, T.7,84; wols to o~iyav xpuTTov Z
1548. The infinitive with toC may express a purpose, generally a negative purpose, wliere with ordinary genitives cvtKo. is regularly used (see 1127). E.g.
'EfT(.i^[o6rj'ATaavTv, tov /it] Atjcttol? KaKOvpyiiv ttjv Evfioiav, Atalante was fortified, that pirates might not ravage Euboea, T.2,32. Mci/cus to XrjCTtKov KaOn'pu, tov ra? irpcxroSou? fiaXXov ccval avTw, Minos put down piracy, that his revenues might come in more abundantly, T. 1,4.
1549. Verbs and expressions denoting hindrance or freedom from anything allow either the infinitive with to? (1547) or the simple infinitive (1519). As the infinitive after such verbs can take the negative /xi; without affecting the sense (1615), we have a third and fourth form, still with the same meaning. (See 1551.) E.g.
El'py« ere tovto ttoiiIv, elpyct crc tov tovto -noniv, ilpyu ere /latj tovto 7tol,(.1v, tlpyu crc toC fir) tovto iroiilv, all meaning he prevents you from doing this. Tov QiXtvirov irapeX6clv ovk iSvvavTo KuiXvo-ai, they could not hinder Philip from passing through, D. 5,20. Tov hpaTTCTtvciv a.irtipyovo~i.; do they restrain them from running away? X. M. 2,116. "Oir fir; ttjv YleXoirowrjO-ov iropBi'iv, which prevented (him*) from ravaging Peloponnesus, T. 1,73. Avo avhpa.<; l£a toC fj.Tj xaTaSCvai, it will keep ttvo men from sinking, X. A. ?., 5».
1550. N. When the leading verb is negatived (or is interrogative implying a negative), the double negative fx.rj ou is generally used ■with the infinitive rather than the simple fir} (101C), so that we can say ovk etpyct crc ixrj ov tovto ttolciv, he does not prevent you front doing this. Tov/x^ov7roiclvis rarely (if ever) used.
1551. The infinitive with to m1? may ^e '"sed after expressions denoting hindrance, and also after all which even, imply
|
333 |
1555] THE INFINITIVE. 333
prevention, omission, or denial. This infinitive with to is less closely connected with the leading verb than are the forms before mentioned (1549), and it may often be considered an accusative of specification (1058), and sometimes (as after verbs of denial) an object accusative. Sometimes it expresses merely a result. E.g.
Tw 0/uA.ov tlpyov to /xr) tol e'yyvs rfji 7roXe
Thus we have a fifth form, tlpyu at to /xr) tovto iroitiv, added to those given in 1049, as equivalents of the English he prevents you from doing this.
1552. N. Here, as above (1550), /xr) ov is generally used when the leading verb is negatived; as ovSiv yap avrw Tavr' inapi
1553. N. The infinitive with tov /x^ and with to /xr; may also be used in tlin ordinary negative sense; as oiSe/xc'u 7rpo<^acrts tov /xr) Spav Tuvra, no ground for not doing this, P. Ti.20c.
1554. 1. The infinitive with to may be used in exclamations, to express surprise or indignation. E.g.
Trjs /xoptus' to Aia vo/xi^tLv, 6Vru rnXiKOvrovi, what folly! to believe in Zeus, now you are so big! Ar.N.819. So in Latin : Mene incepto dcsislere victani!
2. The article here is sometimes omitted; as toiovtovi rp((f>tiv KuVa, to keep a dog like that! Av. V. 835.
1555. The infinitive with its subject, object, or other adjuncts (sometimes including dependent clausos) may be preceded by to, the whole standing as a single noun in any ordinary construction. E.g.
To 8t /xr;T£ TraXai tovto irnrovBivai., vc
v
|
334 |
334 SYNTAX. C1556
1556. 1. For the infinitive as well as the finite moods with wore, ok, i
2. For the infinitive and finite moods with irplv, see 1409-1474.
3. Fov the infinitive with
THE PARTICIPLE.
1557. The participle is a verbal adjective, and has three uses. First, it may express an attribute, qualifying a noun like an ordinary adjective (1559-1502); secondly, it may define tlie circumstances under which an action takes place (1563-1577); thirdly, it may be joined to certain verbs to supplement their meaning, often having a force resembling that of the infinitive (1578-1593).
1558. N. These distinctions are not, always exact, and the same participle may belong' to more than one class. Thus, in 6 firj Saptis avdpiDTros, the wifiogged man, Sapik is both attributive and conditional (1063, 5).
ATTIUnUTlVE PARTICIPLE.
1559. Tlie participle may qualify a noun, like an attributive adjective. Here it may often be translated by a relative and a finite verb, especiallj' when it has the article. E.g.
"O Trap.wi' Katpos, the present occasion, D.3,3; 8toi nliv iovn^, immortal Gods, 11.21, 518; ttoA.cs *aAA« 8ia
1560. 1. Tlie participle with the article may be used substantively, like any adjective. It is then equivalent to he who or those ivho with a finite verb. E.g.
Ol KpttToCvrts, the conquerors; ol Trnrna/xtvoi, those who have been convinced; vapa tois apio~Toi<; SoKovatv tlvai. amonq those who seem to be best, X. M.4,28; 6 rrjy yi>u>fir]v Tavrrjv (.liriv, the one who gave this opinion, T.8,OS; rois 'Apxabuiv cr
|
335 |
1663] THE rARTICin.E. 335
'_'. The article is sometimes omitted; as TroXifiovvrwi' irdAis, a city of belligerents, X. C'.7.578.
1561. N. Sometimes a participle becomes so completely a noun that it takes an object genitive instead of an object accusative; as o (Ktivov tikwv, kit jathev (for 6 itctivov tckuJv), 10. El.lioo.
1562. N. The neuter participle with the article is sometimes used as an abstract noun, like the infinitive; as to &t8ios,fear, and to Oapcrow, courage, for to ScSkVui and to Oupcrilv, T. 1,30. Compare to xaXov for to koAXos, beauty. In both cases the adjective is used for the noun.
CIllCUMSTANTlAL PARTICIPLE.
1563. The participle may define the circumstances of an action. Il may express the following relations: —
1. Time; the tenses denoting various points of time, which is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (1288). E.g.
Tuvru tVpuTTt or par-qyCiv, he did this while lie was general; tuOtu 7rpa£ti CTpaTj^yojv, lie will do this while he is general. Tupuyvcijcru? hi irr) Tpia 'Ittttuz? lu>pu i% 2i'y
2. Cause. E.g.
Aiyu) Si tov8' ivCKa, /SouXo/xei'OS Sofui o-oi uncp c'juoi, and I speak for this reason, because I wish that to seem good tu you tchich sterns .«« to me, P. Ph. 102'1.
.3. Meunx, manner, and similar relations, including manner of employment. E.g.
lpo(.i(TO fj-HWov tois yo/jiois ffji/j.fvu)v avoOavtiv t) Trapavo-/xiuv £yjv, he preferred to die abiilini/ b'l the laws rather than to live tranigressinq them. yi.M.4.'*. ToCto iiroiqtn A a 0 m v, he did thin secretly. 'Ani.Sijfx.ci. rpirjpapxw, he was absent on duty as trie.rareh. Arj^ofxcvoi {fixjiv, they live by plunder, X. C.3,'255.
4. Purpose or intention; generally expressed by the future participle. E.g.
THA#£ kixro/xtvo'; &vyu.Tpa, he came In ransom his daughter, II. 1,13. T](fjL7rciv 7rp(a/?fi9 TCU'Ta ipovvTas kul Avrrui'Opov aiTryctovtcis, to send antbassai/ors to say this and In ask for Lysander, X. 11.2,1°.
5. Condition; the tenses of the participle representing the corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, in all classes of protasis.
See 1413, where examples will be found.
|
336 |
330 SYNTAX. [1004
6. Opposition, limitation, or concession; where the participle is generally to be translated by although and a verb. E.g.
'OkCya Swdfiivonrpoopav iroWa i-rnxupoxifnv irpaTTtiv, although we arc able to foresee few thing*, we try to do many things, X.C. 3,216.
7. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being merely descriptive. This is one of the most common relations of this participle. E.g.
'Epxtrai rov vlbv txov
The participle here can often be best translated by a verb, as in the last example.
8. That in which the action of the verb consists. E.g. Td8' ttirc
aa^ dca/ivT/o-as fj.c, you did well in reminding vie, P.Ph.dO". For the time of the aorist participle here, see 1290.
1564. N. Certain participles of time and manner have almost the force of adverbs by idiomatic usage. Such are apxofitvos, at first; TfXcvrSiv, at last, finally; huxXurwv ypovov, after a while,
"Avtp dpx"/x£vos &Tov, as I said at first, T.4,0-1. 'Eo-tVftroy
1565. N. "E^aii/,
Mi'u
1566. X. TC vaBuiv; having suffered what? or what has happened to him? and ti /miOwv; what has he taken into his head? are used in the general sense of why ? E.g.
Tt tovto p-aBuiv Tpo(jf.ypap(.v; with what idea did he add this clause? D.20,127. TV TraOovvai 8vt)tcus il£a.
|
337 |
1571] THE PARTICIPLE. 337
1567. N. The same participle may sometimes be placed under more than one of these heads (U>08).
Genitive and Accusative Adsolute.
1568. When a circumstantial participle belongs to a noun which is not grammatically connected with the main construction of the sentence, they stand together ' in the genitive absolute. E.g.
'Avljirj oiScyo? ko)Aix>vto5, he made the ascent with no one interfering, X.A.l,2~2. See 1J52, and the examples there given.
Sometimes a participle stands alone in tlie genitive absolute, when a subject can easily be supplied from tlie context, or when some general subject, like avdpunruv or Trpayfidrtiiv, is understood; as 01 TroAc/itoi, irpocriovnov, t«'cus piv rjcrv^a^ov, but the enemy, as they (men before mentioned) c«wie on, kept quiet for a time, X..4.5,4". Ovtoj 8' (6vriov, tic6 (ianv), k.t.X-, and thin being the rase (sc. -npay-/ihxtiov), it is likely, etc. X. A.'A,210. So with verbs like vu (897,5); as vovtos ttoWw, when it was ruining heavily (where originally Aids was understood), X.W.I, I10.
1569. The participles of impersonal verbs stand in the accusative absolute, in the neuter singular, when otheis would be in the genitive absolute. So passive participles and ov, when they are used impersonally. E.g.
Ti 8tj, lyius i£bv airoXccrai, ovk £tti tovto rjkdofxtv', why now, when we might hove destroyed you, did we not proceed to do it? X. A.2,5W.
Oi 8' oi (3or)0r'i
1570. N. The participles of persona! verbs sometimes stand with their notfns in the accusative absolute; but very seldom unless they are preceded by ok or w
^tiwirrj l&UTTVovv, damp tovto TtpoaTiTU.yp.lvov airoii, they were suppimf in silence, as if this had been the command given to them, X.Sy.1,11.
1571. N. *flv as a circumstantial participle is seldom omitted, except with the adjectives in&v, willing, and o.ku)v, unwilling, and
|
338 |
338 SYNTAX. [1572
after are, o'a,
Adveiuis with Circumstantial Pahticitle.
1572. N. The adverbs 5,/J.a, p.eT(i$v, evQv*;, alriKa, apn, and i£a.i
1573. N.
1574. Circumstantial participles, especially those denoting cause or purpose, arc often preceded by
Toy ITtpixAta iv amn tl.^ov u; Trilo-avTo. <7<£a9 noXf/iUV, they found faul( xoith Pericles, on the ground that he hud persuaded them to engage in war, T. 2,50. 'A yavaKTovaiv oj s p.<.yd(iiv tlvSiv d 7r £
1575. The causal participle is often emphasized by utc and oToi/ or ola, as, inasmuch as; but. these particles have no such force as
1576. "Cla-n-ep, as, os it were, with the participle expresses a comparison between the action of the verb and that of the participle. E.g.
Clpxovvro wavip aXAots f ■n-ihtiKvvp.d'Oi, they danced as if they were shoiving n/f to others (i.e. they danced, apparently showing off ), X. A. 5,434. Tl tovto A.«y£i
|
339 |
1681] THE PARTICIPLE. 339
you please? X.M.I,G36. Although we find as if a convenient translation, there is really no condition, as appears from the negative oi (not fj.rj). See 1012.
1577. N. "QuTrcp, like other words meaning as, may be followed by a protasis; as wo-ntp (I TrapeordTfis, as (it would be) if you had lived near, A..Ag. 1'JOl. For iZavtp av d, see 1313.
SUPPLEMENTAKY PARTICIPLE.
1578. The supplementary participle completes the idea expressed by the verb, by showing to what its action relates. It may belong to either the subject or the object of the verb, and agree with it in case. E.g.
Xiavofj.lv at XiyovTa, we stop you from speaking; Travo/jnOa Xt'yovTts, we cease speaking.
1579. This participle has many points of resemblance to the infinitive in similar constructions. In the use of the participle (as in that of the infinitive) we must distinguish between indirect discourse (where each tense preserves its force) and other constructions.
Pai!th:h>lu not in Indikect Discourse.
1580. In this sense the participle is used with verbs signifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease, to repent, to be vieary, to be pleased, displeased, or ashamed; and with the object of verbs signifying to permit or to cause to cease. E.g.
Hp^ov xaAtirttivo)1', ^ was Die Jivst to be angry, II.2,378; ovk av(£ofw.i £(L
1581. Some of these verbs also take the infinitive, but generally with some difference of meaning; thus, aicr^weTai toDto A«-yfij', he is ashamed to sni/ this (and does not say it), — see 1580; a7roKu.ij.vti. tovto ttoi«?v, lie ceases to do this, through tueariness (but d7roi
|
340 |
340 SYNTAX. t'582
vent you from fighting (but iravta o-c fi.a)(6ixtvov, I stop you while fighting).
1582. The participle may be used with verbs signifying to perceive (in any way), to find, or to represent, denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived, found, or represented. E.g.
'OpC> ere. KpviTTQVTa xc'Pa> I see you hiding your hand, E. Hec. 342; rjKovad (7O« iyovroi, I heard you speak; cvpc KpoviSrjv arep rjfxtvov oXXwv, he found the son of Cronos sitting apart from the others, //. 1,498; fiaaiXias wcTTOL-nKC rovs eV'AiSou rifnopovfj.evovi, he has represented kings in Hades as suffering punishment, P. G. 525d.
1583. N. This must not be confounded with indirect discourse, in which 6pu> See 1588.
1584. The participles (3ovX6/xtvo
Tu> irX-qBu ov /iouXo/xfVo) rjv, it wus not pleasing to the majority (it was not to them wishing it), T.2,.'5; Trpocrb't)(O/Acvtp /j-oi ra 1-775 opyqs iifj-uiv h ifxi yiyivrjTai, I have been expecting the manifestations of your wrath against me, T. 2, CO.
1585. With verbs signifying to overlook or see, in the sense of to alloiu or let happen (ircpiopw and i
Mr) 7r£pu8u)/At)/ vj3pio~9t7o-av rrjv AaxtSai/xova xa Kara
1586. The participle with Xar^avu, escape the notice of, rvyxavoi, happen, and
|
341 |
1588] THE PARTICIl'LE. 341
The aorist participle here coincides in time with the verb (unless this expresses duration) and does not denote past time in itself. (See 1290.) E.g.
Qovia- tov iraiSos (kd.v6a.vc fiocTKtov, he was unconsciously supporting the slayer of his son, Hd.1,44; itv^ov KO.6rjtJ.ivos evravOa, 1 happened to be silling there (= royr) ixo.8rip.-nv ivrav6a), V.Eu. 272'; avroi
The perfect participle here has its ordinary force.
1587. N. The participle with SiartXt'o, continue (15S0), o'xo-/xai, be gone (1200), 6a/xl£vi, be wont or be frequent, and soinu others, expresses the leading idea; but the aorist participle with these has no peculiar force; as o"x£t
So with the Homeric fir) and ifiav or f3dv from jialvbi; as jirj
I'ahticiple in Indikect Piscouusk.
1588. With many verbs the participle stands in indirect discourse, each tense representing the corresponding tense of a finite mood.
Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to hear or learn, to perceive, to know, to be ignorant of, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge, and ayyeXko), announce. JE.g.
'Opui St p.' ipyov Savoy iif.ipyaa-p.ivqv, but I see that I Jtave done a dreadful deed, S. Tr. 700; ij'xouo-e Kvpov iv KtAiiau ovra, he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (ci. 1583), X./1.1,4°; otuv kXut; rjtovr' 'OpccrTrjv, when she hears that Orestes vnll come, S.E1.203. OI8u oiSkv (Tn.(TTa.p.(vos, I know thai I understand nothing; ovk ijSsouv avTov TtOvrjKOTa, they did not know that he was dead, X.i4.1,1016; (Trtihav yvCxriv d.TriorTovp.cvoi, after they find out that they are distrusted, X. C. 7, 2n; p.ep.vrjp.ai ik8wv, I remember that 1 went; p.(p.vr)fjtai olvtov ikOovra, I remember that he went; %u£u> tqvtqv l6pbv ovra, 1 shall show that this man is an enemy (passive
|
342 |
342 SYNTAX. [1689
outos Set^fJiyo-f tcu ix$pos uv). Airrw Kvpov fvKTTpartvovto. irpwTos TJyyaXa, 1 Ji?-st announced to him that Cyrus was on his march against him, X. A. 2,319.
See 1491; and 1308 for examples of the participle with
1589. N. AfjX6<: ei/xt and
Br/Xov ijv otl oioiro).
1590. N. With avvoiSa or crvyyiyvo'ktkw and a dative of the reflexive, a participle may be in either the nominative or the dative; as uuVoiSa i/MVTw riSiKrj/jLivtp (or ijSiktj/xc'j'Os), / am conscious to myself that 1 have been wronged.
1591. Most of the verbs included in 1588 may also take a clause with on or
1592. 1. Some of these verbs have the infinitive of indirect discourse in nearly or quite the same sense as the participle. Others have the infinitive in a different sense : thus
2. Others, again, may be used in a peculiar sense, in which they have the infinitive not in indirect discourse. Thus o'Sa and
1593. 1. 'fts may be used with the participle of indirect discourse in the sense explained in 1574. E.g.
'fis lijjKtV oi'Ta kiivov iv
2. The genitive absolute with
|
343 |
VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 343
VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -tios AND -Wov.
1594. The verbal in -teo? has both a fwrsonal and an impersonal construction, of which the latter is more common.
1595. In the personal construction it is passive in sense, and expresses necessity, like the Latin participle in -dus, agreeing with the subject. E.g.
'Q(f>e ]Tin aoi ?/ ttoAis IotIv, the city mvsl be benefited by you, X. M. 3, G8. AAAas /ieTu7r«/xirWa« ilvai (i(f>rj), he said that other (ships) must be sent for, T. 6,25.
1596. N. The noun denoting the agent is here in the dative (1188). This construction is of course confined to transitive verbs.
1597. Iii the impersonal construction the verbal is in the neuter of the nominative singular (sometimes plural), with ari expressed or understood. The expression is equivalent to Bel, (one) mvst, with the infinitive. It is practically active in sense, and allows transitive verbals to have an object like their verbs.
The agent is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by the accusative. E.g.
TaOra r)/XLV (or ij/«k) iroi-qriov itrriv, we. must do this (equiva-lent to Tuvra r)ixa<; Set iroujcrat). OiUTe'oi' to8«, we must bear these things (sc. rjiuv), K. O.7G9. Ti' av air
1598. N. Though the verbal in -rioy allows both the dative and the accusative of the agent (1188). the equivalent Sel with the infinitive allows only the accusative (1102).
1599. N. The Latin has this construction (1597), but generally only with verbs which do not take an object accusative; as Kun-dum est tibi (hcov eon'trot),— Moriendum est omnibus. So Bello utendum est nobis (ru 7roe'/xa) xprj&Ttov IcttIv rji^v), we must go to war. The earlier Latin occasionally has the exact equivalent of the Greek impersonal cons!ruction; as Aeternas poenas thnendum est, Lucr. 1,112. (See Madvig's Latin (irainmar, § 421.)
|
344 |
344 SYNTAX. [1000
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
1600. All interrogative pronouns, pronominal adjectives, and adverbs can be used in both direct and indirect questions. The relative ocms (rarely os) and the relative pronominal adjectives (429) may be used in indirect questions.
i Xeyu; what does he sayf lloVe rj6(v; when did he come? eiSts; how many did you see? "Hpovro ri Xtyoi (or o tl Ac'yoi), they asked what he said. "HpovTO iron (or o7roVe) r/X&cv, they ashed when he came. 'Opa.% 17/ias, ocroi
1601. N. The Greek, unlike the English, freely uses two or more interrogatives with the same verb. E.g.
'H tiji t 1 aTrohtSovcra rtxyrj BiKaioavvr] av KaXolro; the art which renders what to what would be called Jvsticef P. Rp. 832"1. Seethe five interrogatives (used for comic effect) in D. 4,30: irpoot&cv tKaaTos Tts xopTjyos,. . . irore xai irapa tov ko.1 ri Xafiovra ri Set ttouIv, meaning everybody knows who the xop^yos is to be, what he is to get, when and from whom he is to yet it, and what he is to do with it.
1602. N. An interrogative sometimes stands as a predicate with a demonstrative; as n tovto tXt&ts; what is this that you said? (= tAffus tovto, tl ov; lit. you said this, being what?) ; TtVus rovcrS' do-opw; who are these that 1 see f E. Or. 1347.
Such expressions cannot be literally translated.
.1603. The principal direct interrogative particles are apa. and (chiefly poetic) 19. These imply nothing as to the answer expected ; but apa ov implies an affirmative and apa ixrj a negative answer. Ov and fx-q are used alone with the same force as with Jpa. So p.u>v (for //.t) ovv) implies a negative answer, and ovkovv, therefore (with no negative force), implies an affirmative answer. E.g.
TH (rxoXrj tcrrai; will there be leisure ? *Ap* tlai rive? a£ioi; are there any deserving ones ? *Ap* ov ftovXecrOe (X6elv; or oi flovXurOc iXOciv; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not) ? TApa /xij fiovXto-Ot iXOuv; or fjy (or fj.S>v) (3ovXio-6c iXdilv; do you wish to go (you don't wish to go, do you) ? Ovkovv
|
345 |
1609] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.— NEGATIVES. 345
1604. "AXXo tl tj; is it anything else than? or (more frequently) dAAo n; is it not? is sometimes used as a direct interrogative. E.g.
*AXXo ti i) b/JLokoyovfitv; do we not agree? (do we Jo anything else than agree?), P. G'.470b. "AXXo ti ovv 8w> tuvto. t"Xty«; did you not call these two? ibid. 495C.
1605. Indirect questions may be introduced by tl, whether; and in Homer by rj or d. E.g.
'HpwT-rjaa tl fiovXoiTO i6tiv, I asked whether he wished to go. Qi)(CTO TreuCTO/xfTO? 77 irov it' tirjs, he was yvitc to inquire whether you were still living, Od. 13,410. Ta tKnujMra ovx 018a d rovrw 8u> (1490), / do not know whether 1 shall give him the cups, X.(?.8,41C. (Here d is used even with the subjunctive: see 1401.)
1606. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect) may be introduced by troTipov (-rruTepa) . . . rj, whether . . . or. Indirect alternative, questions can also be introduced by tl ... -^ or cite . . . tiTe, whether . . . or. Homer has ^ (rjt) . . . % (r/() in direct, and jj (^t) . . . r) (tji) in indirect, alternatives, — never irortpov. E.g.
ndTtpov «'«s apx«-v r/ aXXoy Kuft'oTTj? ; do you allow him to rule, or do you appoint another? X. C. 3,11J. 'E/3ouX«i/'£to d Trip-irouv nva<; rj 7ravT«s loitv, he was deliberating whether they should send some or should all go, X.A. 1,105.
NEGATIVES.
1607. The Greek has two negative adverbs, ov and ^ Wliat is said of each of these generally applies to its compounds,— oiSct's, ov8(, ovtc, etc., and ^has, p-rjhi, fj-rpt, etc.
1608. Ou is used with the indicative and optative in all independeid sentences, except wishes; also in indirect discourse after on. and wt, and in causal sentences.
1609. N. In indirect qucstionx, introduced by it, whether, p.-q can be used as well as ov; as /3ovXo/«>'os ipivOai d paOwv Tt's rt /ie/xnj^i«Vo? p.r) oTSev, wishing to ash whether one who has learnt a thing and remembers it does not know it? V.Th.iffl*. Also, in the second part of an indirect alternative question (1006), both ov and jxr) are allowed ; as o-Kovuifniv d r}fuv 7rpcVe<. rj ov, let us look and see whether it suits us or not, P. Rp. 451rt ; d St dX»/#t9 */ /j y, T
iuxOuv, but I will try to learn whether it is true or not, ibid. 339".
|
346 |
346 SYNTAX. [JC10
1610. M»? is used with the subjunctive aud imperative in all constructions, except with the Homeric subjunctive (1355), which has the force of a future indicative. M^ is used in all fiual aud object clauses after Xva, o-n-os, etc., with the subjunctive, optative, and indicative; except after fiy, lest, which takes ov. It is used in all conditional and conditional relative clauses, and in the corresponding temporal sentences after <.« id="iv.i.p8735.1"><;, -nplv, etc., in relative sentences expressing a purpose (1442), and in all expressions of a wish with both indicative and optative (1/507; 1511).
For causal relative, clauses with ^ (also conditional), see 14(j'2. For ei ov occasionally used in protasis, see 11183,2.
1611. Mi} is used with the infinitive in all constructions, both with and without the article, except in indirect discourse. The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has ov, to retain the negative of the direct discourse; but some exceptions occur (1496).
For wore ov with the infinitive, see 1'Jiil. For /x.ij wiUi (lie infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, sweuriuy, etc., see 14!iti.
1612. When a participle expresses a condition (15G3, 5), it takes /j.i'/; so when it is equivalent to a conditional relative clause; as ol fir] ftovkoncvoi, any who du not wish. Otherwise it takes oi. In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes ^ irregularly (1496).
1613. Adjectives follow the same principle with participles, taking ny only when they do not refer to definite persons or things (i.e. when they can be expressed by a relative clause with an indefinite antecedent); as ol /x>) AyuOol ttoATtcu, (any) citizens who are not good, but oi oik dyaOol voi-tm means special citizens viho are not guod.
1614. Participles or rtdjectiveb connected with a protasis, a command, or au infinitive which would be negatived by /*>/', generally take ft,-,), even if they would otherwise have ov.
1615. When verbs which contain a negative idea (as those of hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and distrusting) take the infinitive, ^ can be added to the infinitive to strengthen the negation. Such a negative cannot be translated in English, and can always be omitted in Greek. For examples, sec 1549-1551.
|
347 |
1619] NEGATIVES. 347
1616. An infinitive! which would regularly be negatived by fit), either in the ordinary way (1011) or to strengthen a preceding negation (1015), generally takes the double negative ixT) ov if the verb on which it depends itself has a negative.
Thus 8iWoV tan fxr) tovtov a
1617. K. (ifxvo&wv pr) ov^l ijSpt^o-fiivovs airoOavav; what is there to prevent (us) from being insulted and perishiriij? X. A n. 3,113.
(h) It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to express an exception to a negative (or implied negative.) statement; as iro'Aus ^aXtjrat kafiuv, /xt) ov iroXiopKia, cities hard (i.e. not easy) to capture, except by siege, I). If), 123.
1618. When a negative is followed by a simple negative (oi or /xij) in the same clause, each retains its own force. II they belong to the same word or expression, they make an affirmative; but if they belong to different words, each is independent of the other. E.g.
Ovbi tov Qop/uwva. ov 6pu, nor does he not see Phormio (i.e. he sues Phormio well enough), U.30,40. Oi oV anupuxv yc oi
1619. But when a negative is followed by a compound negative (or by several compound negatives) in the same clause, the negation is strengthened. E.g.
OvSeis as oi&iv oiSevos up r/ixCiv ouSe'iroTt yivoiro a£i09, no one of us (in that case) would ever come to be of any value for anything, P. P/i.lf>b.
For the double negative oi' /nij, see 1300 and 1361. For oix on,
/xr) OTl, OV O7TCD?, )Xr) O7TCOS, SCO 1504.
|
348 |
PART V.
VERSIFICATION.
RHYTHM AND METRE.
1620. Every verso is composed of definite portions called feet. Thus we have four feet in each of these verses: —
1621. In each foot there is a certain part on which falls a special stress of voice called ictus (stroke), and another part on which there is no such stress. The part of the foot on which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of the foot is called the thesis.1 The regular alternation of arsis and thesis iu successive feet produces the rhythm (harmonious movement) of the verse.
1622.' In this English verse (as in all English poetry) the rhythm depends entirely on the ordinary accent of the words, with which the ictus coincides. In the Greek verse, however, the ictus is entirely independent of the word-accent; and the feet (with the ictus marked by dots) are
1 The term «p
|
349 |
1024] RHYTHM AND VKUSE. 349
length; and the place of the ictus here depends on the quantity (i.e. the length or shortness) of the syllables which compose the foot, the ictus naturally falling upon a long syllable (1629). The regular alternation of long and short syllables in successive feet makes the verse metrical, i.e. measured in its time. The rhythm of a Greek verse thus depends closely on its metre, i.e. on the measure or quantity of its syllables.
1623. The fundamental distinction between ancient and most modern poetry is simply tins, tliat in modern poetry the verse consists of a regular combination of accented and unaccented syllables, while in ancient poetry it consists of a regular combination of long and short syllables. Tli< id="iv.i.p8764.1"> rhythm is the one essential requisite in the external form of all poetry, ancii-nt and modern; but in ancient poetry, rhythm depends on inetie and not on accent; in modern poetry it depends on accent, and the quantity of the syllables (i.e. the metre) is generally no moro regarded than it is in prose. Both are equally rhythmical; but tin; ancient is also metrical, and its metre is the basis of its rhythm. What is called metre in English poetry is strictly only rhythm.
1624. The change from metrical to accentual rhythm can best be seen in modern Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient language are retained, the rhythm is generally accentual and the metre is no more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses in a modern translation of the Odyssey: —
^AXXe tov | dvSpa, 0«|a, tov Tro|XvTpoirov, | oo-tis to|o"Ovtov* Tdirovs 8iJfjX0c, iropjflijcras Tifi ) TpoCas rrjv j tvSoJov | wdAiv. The original verses are: —
"AvSpa [ioi | cvvcirc, | Movcra, iro[X.($Tpoirov, | os |iaXa | iroXXd IIXA"yx8ii lirt Tpo(|i)s l«|pov irroX(|cSpov <|ir
If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through force of acquired habit; for these verses have much more of the nature of modern poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm is precisely what we are accustomed to in English verse, where Still stands the | forest pri|ineval; but | under the | shade of its | branches is dactylic, and
And the oljive of peace | spreads its branches abroad is anapaestic.
|
350 |
350 VERSIFICATION. [1625
1625. It is very difficult for us to appreciate the ease with which the Greeks distinguished and reconciled the stress of voice which constituted the ictus and the raising of tone which constituted the word-accent (107, 1). Any combination of the two is now very difficult, and for most persons impossible, because we have only stress of voice to represent both accent and ictus. In reading Greek poetry we usually mark the ictus by our accent, and either neglect the word-accent or make it subordinate to the ictus. Care should always be taken in reading to distinguish the words, not the feet.
FEET.
1626. 1. The unit of measure in Greek verse is the short syllable (w), which lias the value of J*or an ^ note in music. This is called a time or mora. The long syllable (_) has generally twice the length of a short one, and has the value of a ^ note or J in music.
2. But a long syllable sometimes has the length of three shorts, and is called a triseme (i_), and sometimes that of four shorts, and is called a tetrascmc (l_i). The triseme has the value of J. in music, and tlie tetraseme that of J.
1627. Feet are distinguished according to the number of times which they contain. The most common feet are the following: —
1. Of Three Times (in J time).
|
Trochee |
_ w |
J / |
|
Iambus |
w _ f |
{ |
|
Tribrach |
www XiyiTi |
0 0 0 |
|
2. Of |
Four Times (in f or f time). |
|
|
Dactyl |
__ W w |
j n |
|
Anapaest |
w w __ (TtfjOfJUXl |
.n j |
|
Spondee |
_____ livwv |
j j |
|
3. |
Of Five Times (in § time). |
|
|
Cretic |
_ w _ ijxuvtTW |
j /j |
|
Paeon primus |
__ WWW (KTpeTTtTt |
j /^ |
|
Paeou quartus |
www__ KaraXeyu) |
|
|
Bacehlus |
w__ ithrri* |
/j j |
|
Antibacchlus |
_____w tj>aivr)Tt |
j j / |
|
351 |
1631] FEET, ETC. 351
4. 0/ Six THmes (in § or I time).
Ionic a maiore____w w lukuTrtTt I I J~1
Ionic a minore w w ___ irpo
Choriainbus _ w w _ (KrpcVo/wu J JH J
Molossus (rare)_____ fiovktvvni I I J
5. A foot of four shorts (wwww) is called a proceleusmatic, and one of two shorts (ww) a pyrrhic.
For the dochmius, w____w _, see 1091. For the epitrile, see
1684.
1628. The feet, in I time (1), in ■which the arsis is twice as long as the thesis, form the double class (ytVos tiLHTka.iri.ov), as opposed to those in J time (2), in which the arsis and thesis are of equal length, and which form the equal class (yfVos Lvov). The more complicated relations of arsis and thesis in the feet of five and six limes are not considered here.
1629. The ictus falls naturally on a long syllable. The first syllable of the trochee and the dactyl, and the last syllable of the iambus and the anapaest, therefore, form the arsis, the remainder of the foot being the thesis; as
j _£,
1630. When a long syllable in the arsis is resolved into two short syllables (1031), the ictus properly belongs on the two taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. Thus a tribrach used for a trochee (jL w) is www', one used for an iambus (w —) is u ^ w Likewise a spondee used for a dactyl is
/ _; one used for an anapaest is___C So a dactyl used for an
anapaest (_ w v^ for____for w w _) is _ ^ w. The only use
of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are (as above) to represent other feet which have their arsis naturally marked by a long syllable.
RESOLUTION AND CONTRACTION. — IRRATIONAL TIME. —ANACRUSIS. —SYLLABA ANCEPS.
1631. A long syllable, being naturally the metrical equivalent of two short ones (162G), is often resolved into these; as when a tribrach www stands for a trochee — w or an
iambus w__On the other hand, two short syllables are
often contracted iuto one long syllable; as when a spondee
|
352 |
362 VERSIFICATION. [1032
-----stands for a dactyl _ w ^ or an anapaest ^ w — The
mark for a long resolved into two shorts is ^; that for two shorts contracted into one long is cc.
1632. 1. When a long syllable has the measure of three or four short syllables (1626, 2), it may represent a whole foot: this is called syncope. Thus a triseme (i_ = J4) may represent a trochee (_ w), and a tetraseme (i_i = J) may represent a dactyl (_ w w).
2. An apparent trochee (i_ w), consisting of a triseme (i_) and a short syllable, may be the equivalent of a dactyl or a spondee, that is, a foot of four times. Tins is called a long trochee, or z,<-Doric trochee (see 1684).
1633. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain cases be shortened so as to take the place of a short syllable. Such a syllable is called irrational, and is marked >. The foot in which it occurs is also called irrational (irovs SXoyoi). Thus, in dXX' &.v ix.6pu>v ( — j— >), the apparent spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called an irrational trochee; in SoiW Sikyjv (>-^w—) that which takes the place of the first iambus is called an irrational iambus.
1634. A similar shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic dactyl (marked ~^v) and cyclic anapaest (marked <~ id="iv.i.p8843.1"> w—), which hav.e the time of only three short syllables instead of four. The cyclic dactyl takes the place of a trochee _ w, especially in logaoedic verses (1679). The cyclic anapaest takes the place of an iambus w _, and is found especially in the iambic trimeter of comedy (1658).
1635. An anacrusis (dvoKpovo-is, upward beat) consists of a single syllable (which may be long, short, or irrational) or of two short syllables, prefixed to a verse which begins with an arsis.
1636. The last syllable of every verse is common, and it may be made long or short to suit the metre, without regard to its usual quantity. It is called syllaba anceps. But the continuous systems described in 1654, 1666, and 1677 allow this only at the end of the system.
|
353 |
J642J RHYTHMICAL SERIES, ETC. 353
RHYTHMICAL SERIES. — VERSE. — CATALEXIS. — PAUSE.
1637. A rhythmical series is a continuous succession of feet of the same measure. A verse may consist of one such series, or of several such united.
Thus the verse
nokXa to. Suva, xov&iv av\6pa>Trov ZuvoTlpov viXil
consists of a First Glyconic (1682, 4), —w w I _ w I _ w I l_ (at the
end of a verso, ^/W|_ul__w|__^), followed by a Second
Glyconic, _^|-vwI_wI_a- Each part forms a series, the former ending with the first syllable of a.v6pirov (see above); and either series miglit have formed a distinct verse.
1638. The verse must close in such a way as to be distinctly marked off from what follows.
1. It must end with the end of a word.
2. It allows the last syllable (syllaba anceps) to be either long or short (1636).
3. It allows hiatus (34) before a vowel in the next verse.
1639. A verse which has an unfinished foot at the close is called calalectic (ko.toXtjktiko';, stopped short). A complete verse is called acatalectic.
1640. 1. If the omitted syllable or syllables in a catalectic verse are the thesis of the foot (as in trochaic and dactylic verses), their place is filled by a pause. A pause of one time, equivalent to a short syllable (w), is marked a (for A, the initial of Xti/ifta); a pause of two rimes (_) is marked a •
2. But in catalectic iambic and anapaestic verses, the thesis of the last foot is lost, and the place is filled by prolonging the preceding arsis: thus we have w d. — (not v^ — ^ a) ^ tne catalectic
form of v^__v^__; and ^ ^-^ -L (not v_, ^ _^. v_. >_/ 7) as that of
w^_ww_. (See 1664 and 1065.)
1641. A verse measured by dipodies (1046) is called brachy-catalectic if it wants a complete foot at the end, and hypercatalectic if it has a single syllable beyond its last complete dipody.
CAESURA AND DIAERESIS.
1642. 1. Caesura (i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs whenever
|
354 |
354 VERSIFICATION. [1043
a word er.ds before a foot is finished; as in three cases in the following verse: —
jroAAu? | 8' l(f>6(iwvs i/'i'lx"* *Ai'lSi irpoia{ptv.
2. This becomes important only when it coincides with the caesura of the verse (as after i4>0Cpov<;). This caesura is a pause within a foot introduced to make the verse more melodious or to aid in its recital. Iu some verses, as in the iambic trimeter aeataleetic (16.58) and the heroic hexameter (Ki69), it follows definite principles.
1643. When the end of a word coincides with the. end of a foot, the double division is called diaeresis (&cup«Wi division); as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis becomes important only when it coincides with a natural pause produced by the ending of a rhythmic series; as iu the trochaic tetrameter (1651) and the dactylic pentameter (1670).
1644. The following vevse of Aristophanes (Nub. 519), in trochaic (|) rhythm, shows the irrational long (1633) in the first, second, and sixth feet; the cyclic dactyl (1034) in the third; syncope (1032) in the fourth; and at the end catalexis and pause (1639; 1010), with syllaba anceps (1030).
to /)6t) vrj | rov Aio|yu|]iro>' tot | iK&peipa.vTa ] /*(■ ;_>l_>l-^wli_ll_Ol_>l_wl_A
A rhythmical series (1C37) ends with the penult of Aiovvcrov. This is a logaoedic verse, called Eupolidean (1082, 7).
VERSES.
1645. Verses are called Trochaic, Iambic, Dactylic, etc., from their fundamental foot.
1646. In most kinds of verse, a mouovieter consists of one foot, a dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, or hexameter of three, four, five, or six feet. But in trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by dipodies (i.e. pairs of feet), a monomcter consists of one dipody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of 6ix feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet.
|
355 |
1661] TROCHAIC RHYTHMS. 355
1647. When trochaic or iambic verses are measured by single feet, they are called Iripodics, tetvapodies, hexapodies, etc. (as having three, four, six, etc. feet). Here irrational syllables (1033) seldom occur. (See 1G56.)
1648. Rhythms are divided into rising and falling rhythms. In rising rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the iambus and anapaest; in falling rhythms the thesis follows the arsis, as in the trochee and the dactyl.
1649. In Greek poetry, the same kind of verse may be used by the line (kotci
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS.
1650. Trochaic verses are generally measured by dipodies (1646). The irrational trochee jL > (1633) in the form of a spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic dipody except the last, that is, in the even feet (second, fourth, etc.), so that the dipody has the form ^w-lo. An apparent anapaest (6 w> lor — >) is sometimes used as the equivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic dactyl A^w (1634) sometimes stands for the trochee in proper names in both parts of the dipody, except at the end of the verse.
The tribrach (6uu) may stand for the trochee (1631) in every foot except the last.
1651. The chief trochaic verse which is used by the line (1649) is the tethametkk catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a syllable, divided into two rhythmical series (1637) by a diaeresis (1643) after the second dipody. E.g.
|
356 |
356
VERSIFICATION.
[1652
(1)
t
(2) Kara. o-cXrjvrjy
Stvpo rbv vow
-^ — A
toC ftiov ras
— ^— A
(3) fvyyovdy t' c/x^ IIuAaS^v tc
tov rdSt £vv Sptovra.
Notice the tribrach in the first place of (2), and the cyclic dactyl in the third place of (3).
This verse is familiar in English poetry, as
Tell me not in mournful numbers, life is but an empty dream.
1652. TheWame tetrameter (aat,u>v), called Hipponactean from Hipponax (see 1663), is the preceding verse with the last syllable but one long. E.g.
d/£<^ id="iv.i.p8901.1">tOc£tof yap ilfAL kov% afiaprdviii kotttwv.
1653. The following are some of the more important lyric trochaic verses: —
1. Tripody acatalectic (the Ithyphallic) :
(JLT)7rOT (KTaKUT).* _ W — W _ ^ (1647)
2. Tripody catalectic:
OS ye (Tav .i7rwv. — ^ — ^ — A
3. Tetrapody or dimeter acatalectic:
tovto rov fiiv ^pos del — w — ul_u — w
ftao~Tavu kcu crvKO
4. Tetrapody or dimeter catalectic:
Suva Trpdyfiar' ttSo/xey. — ^ — v-1 I — w — A
aawiSas
5. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic:
dptrayal Si SiaSfjo/j.av 6/jLO.L/xove<;.
1 Ar. JV. 575.
2 ibid. 626.
« E. Or. 1535.
« Hippon. 83. « A. Pr. 535. • S. 2>h. 1215.
' Ar. Av. 1478, 1479. 10 A. Se. 351. 8 ibid. 1472. » ibid. 1481.
|
357 |
1658] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 357
1654. A stanza consisting of a series of dimeters acata-lectic (1653, 3), rarely with au occasional mononieter (__ w _ w), and ending in a dimeter catalectic (1653, 4), is called a trochaic system. E.g.
TO.VTO. fjiv TTpOS dfSpOS idTL __ ^ __ >-» I — W __ W
voxiv i)(OVTO<; kuX (frpcvas kcli — w — > I — w — > iroWa 7r __w wwwl — w — /
For iambic and anapaestic systems, formed on the .same principle, see 1606 and 1C77. See also 1636.
1655. The following contain examples of syncopated trochaic verses (1632, 1): —
vvv Karacrpo<^ id="iv.i.p8926.1">cu vaou __ w — w I — w — /^
OidfULiOV, et Kpar-quu SiKa. T£ Kal /?Aa/3u
__ Ul__ I __ W I__ I __ J __ ■-/ I --- w --- /
TOu8« /AJJTpOKTOl'OV.2 __ W I— I — W __ /
yap il6/xdv __^__w I — w__/
ra?, orav "Aprj<; riOaaoi uiv
1656. In lyric trocliaic and iambic verses, the irrational syllable is found chiefly in comedy, and is avoided in tragedy.
IAMBIC KHYTHMS.
1857. Iambic verses are generally measured by dipodies (1C46). The irrational iambus > + (1633) in the form of a spondee can stand in the. first place of each iambic dipody, that is, in the odd places (first, third, etc.), so that the dipody has the form o — ^ S.. An apparent dactyl (> 6 ^ for >—) is sometimes used as the equivalent ol the irrational iambus; and the cyclic anapaest j ^~ (1G34) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, except in the last foot, especially by the Attic comedians (1658). The tribrach (^ w w) may stand for the iambus in every foot except the last.
1658. The most common of all iambic verses is the teimetek acatalectic, in which most of the dialogue of
1 Ar. if. 634 ff. 2 A. Eu. 490 ff. « ibid. 354 £f.
|
358 |
358 VERSIFICATION. [1659
the Attic drama is composed. It never allows any substitution in the last foot. With this exception it may have the tribrach in any place. The irrational iambus >—in the form of a spondee can stand in the first place of every dipody. The tragedians allow the (apparent) dactyl > C ^ only in the first and third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place; but in proper names they allow the anapaest in every place except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl >wv in all the odd places, and the cyclic anapaest in every place except the last (1657). The most common caesura is that after the thesis of the third foot.
1659. The following scheme shows the tragic and the comic iambic trimeter compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being enclosed in [ ].
' — w .
1660. When the tragic trimeter ends in a word forming a cretic
(_ w__), this is regularly preceded by a short syllable or by a
monosyllable.1 In general the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables, even where they are allowed.
1661. The following are examples of both the tragic and the comic form of the iambic trimeter: —
(Tragic) x#ovos piv ih Trjovpbv tjko/xiv ni&ov,
^.KvdrjV e's oT,/xoi', aftuTOv
H
awipavrov ov'hznod' r)p.ipa | y«^o"«rai;
1 This is known as "Person's rule." " Neinpe hanc regulam ple-rumque in senariis observabant Tragici, ut, si voce quae Creticum ppdem efficeret terminarctnr versus, eamque vocom hypennonosyl-labon praeeederet, quintus pes iambus vel tribrachys 6sse deberct." Suppl. ad Prae.f. ad Htcubam.
|
359 |
IOCS] IAMBIC RHYTHMS. 359
1662. The Iambic Trimeter appears in English as the Alexandrine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza: —
And hope to me'r]it Heaven by mak|ing Earth a He'll.
1663. The lame trimeter (
a.Kowa.6' 'lirwuivaKTOs' oi yap oXA' ijko).1 outo) ti croi Soirjcrav tti
1664. The tktuametkk catalectic, consisting of seven feet and a syllable, is common in Attic comedy. There is a regular diaeresis (1643) after" the second dipody, where the first rhythmical series ends (1637).
(lirtp rov
I xa.1 p.rj yiXwr
6
■ l!_ (1640,2) In English poetry we have
A captain bold | of Halifax, || who lived in country quarters.
1665. The following are some of the more important lyric iambic verses: —
1. Dipody or monometer:
2. Tripody (acatalectic and catalectic):
Tl Toil's' (lVlV KOIKUIV; S <- id="iv.i.p8965.1"> — <-< — ^ ----
«V* aXo 7rj;8u.6 ^ — w I------
3. Dimeter (acatalcctic and catalectic):
laXros cK &6fxwv Zfidv.1 kj — j — I w — w — £r]u> at Trj<; | tu/3oi)Aias.8 > — w__l> — j — Kal rov Aoyoi' | tov rJTTta.9 > — w _ I u i--------(1640, 2)
» Hipp. 47. ' ibid. 1008. 7 A. Cli. 22.
a Herond. 3, 1. < id="iv.i.p8970.1"> A. Ay. 211. 8 Ar. Acli. 1008.
» Ar. JV. 1036. * Ar. Ar. 703. 9 Ar. N. 140ii.
|
360 |
360 VERSIFICATION. [1668
4. Hexapody or trimeter catalectic:
w __ w __ I > __ ^» __ I w 1__ __
1666. Iambic systems are formed on the same principle as trochaic systems (1654), of acatalectic dimeters with an occasional monometer, ending with a catalectic dimeter. E.g.
flTTrjILlB' ' (J ftlvOVfl.C.VOl, ^ __ *-/ — I *•* — V^ —
irpos tCiv 8i.uty 8i£
(os > v_< w w __
oXui jrpos ifiai. >__ ^ ^— I *-* i-------
These verses end a long iambic system in Ar. Nub. 1090-1104: see also Nub. 1446-1402, and £
1667. For the irrational syllable in lyric verse, see 1656.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS.
1668. The only regular substitute for the dactyl is the spondee, which arises by contraction of the two short syllables of the dactyl (S. _ from jL j ^).
1669. The most cominon of all Greek verses is the heroic hexameter, the Homeric verse. It always has a spondee in the last place, often in the first four places, seldom in the fifth (the verse being then called spondaic). There is commonly a caesura in the third foot, either after the arsis or (rather more frequently) dividing the thesis. There is sometimes a caesura after the arsis of the fourth foot, and rarely one in the thesis. The caesura after the arsis is called masculine, that in the thesis feminine or trochaic. A diaeresis after the fourth foot, common in bucolic poetry, is called bucolic. E.g.
avhpa ixoi Ivvitti, Movcra, iroXvTpovov, os fidXa iroWa —. j w 1 __ v s I __w» w I __w v I __v-fw I — V
■ndyx/t)r] iirti Tpoiijs lipov irToXittfpov?Trtp
i A. Ch. 24. 2 Od. 1, 1 and 2.
|
361 |
1672] DACTYLIC RHYTHMS. 361
Ti7TT* airr', atyto^oio Atos TtVos, flk^XovOai;'
-------I — ww I __ ww I __ uui I____I __5=!
eiirt /xoi, (o KopvSwv, twos ox /3oss/ ^pa
— WW I __ y j I __ w w I __ WW) t __ wwl __ ^
1670. The ki.egiac djstich consists of an heroic hexameter followed by the so-called Elegiac pentameter. This last verse consists really of two dactylic trimeters with syncope (1G32, 1) or catalexis in the last measure; as —
IlaXAos 'A6tjvtu j || x«i/kis virtp$iv *xel-3 — v_y w I_ __11_it! __ w^/ 1 __ j j I__7
At the end of the pentameter verse tlie pause (7) takes the place of syncope (i_i) in the middle. Tine verse probably arose from a repetition of the first pentliemim (7W#->7/zi-^ep
1671. The following is an Elegiac Distich: — t« St /Ji'jos t{ 8« | Tipnvbv avtv XP^I(7
Tl8v
— — I — w y !l__I I! __ -/v»/l __ y w I __ A
1672. Iii the Homeric verse a long vowel or a diphthong in the thesis (not in the arsis) is often shortened at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. This sometimes occurs in the middle of a word. E.ij.
But
|
|
v |
/xaAa | §7^ /xct< |
:!/Scn'A |
#cot | uAAw |
s-5 |
|
rt'w d|ra o-Kij |
rl-n-Tj |
PU), Kttl | Al'(T(TC7 |
"0 | Trairas A |
]Xmov<: (se |
« 47, I).6 |
|
|
ov |
8' ulXlov /3 |
(K^vyiv, |
0 |
7 |
|
|
m |
o'ko) lv"Apye.'i, |
TYlXodl. TTOTp |
|
|
|
> i7.1, 202. |
|
* Mimn. 1, |
1 and 2. |
'77.11 |
,380. |
|
» Theoc. 4,1. |
|
* Od. 5, 286. |
8/Z.I, |
30. |
|
|
« Solon, 4, 4. |
|
• II. 1, 15. |
|
|
|
|
362 |
3(52 VERSIFICATION. [1673
1673. When a short vowel stands in Homer where a long one is required by the verse, it may be explained in various ways.
1. By supposing A, fi, v, p, or
of certain words; as n-oAAa Awo-o/xtVu) (______vj v _), 1L22,91
(we have c'AAiWero in II. 6,45).
2. By the original presence of f making position (see 3; 90; 91);
as rotov fot irvp (________), 11.5,7. So before Sti'Su), fear, and
other derivatives of the stem 8f€i-, and before Brjv (for Bfrjv).
3. By a pause in the verse (1042,2) prolonging the time; as in
1674. The following are some of the chief lyric dactylic verses: -f-
1. Dimeter:
/n)OTo8o|/cos Solos' — w w I — wo fioipa did>Keii __ v> j I--------
2. Trimeter (acatalectic and catalectic):
Tra/jLTrptTTTOis iv chpaiaiv.*_____I — j j -------
■napOivoi | 6fji,ppo
With anacrusis (1635) :
lyt.Cva.To p.iv /xopov avrui iraTpOKTOvov Oi8t7ro8av.
3. Tetrameter (acataleetic and catalectic) : irifjLTru £vv Bopl KO.I
oipaviot.<; re 6i
_uul_wwl_yul — A
_j j_j j_A
ANAPAESTIC KHYTHMS.
1675. Anapaestic verses are generally measured by dipo-dies (1646). The spondee and the dactyl (—— and —6^) may stand for the anapaest.
The long syllable of an anapaest is rarely resolved into two short, making ^ w 6 w for kj w —.
1 0c2.10, 269. * A. Ag.M. 'A. Ag. 111.
2 Ar. JV! 303. « Ar. N. 299. 8 Ar. N. 305. « E. Her. 612. « A. 5c. 751,752. » Ar. R. 879.
|
363 |
1677] ANAPAESTIC HHYTHMS. 363
1676. The following are the most common anapaestic verses: —
1. The monotueter:
Tpowov alyvTnu>y,1 j j__ I vy ^ —
koX OtfjLis | alvilv.2 __w j I-------
2. The dimeter acatalectic:
piyav fK | Ov/xov | k
o't' (K iraribis | aXycai | irut'Sioj/.5____I wu — I — s j ------
And the ollive of peace | sends its bniuclijfts abroad.
3. The dimeter cataloot.ic, orparocmiuc:
i)pa.v | o"TpaTiu>|Tn> a.p
ovt(o | irXovrtjWiTt va.v t<;?____I____lwwi_jl —
The Ldnl | is advanc|iug. Prepare | ye!
4. The tetrameter catalkctic, consisting of seven feet and a syllable, or of the two preceding verses combined. There is a regular diaeresis after the second dipody. This verse is frequently used by the line (1G49) in long passages of Aristophanes.
- Trp6
1677. An anapaestic system consists of a series of anapaestic dimeters acatalectic, with occasionally a niono-metcr, ending always with the paroemiac (or dimeter catalectic). These arc very frequently employed in both tragedy and comedy. E.g.
8(KO.T0V piv tTOS To'S*
/t«yas dvTi'SiKo?, uu__ ^ w__
Mtcc'Xaos ava^ ^8' 'XyapefiviDV, yw__ j <-»__ I __viv-<______
AioOiy nai ZicncqiTTpov ww__ ww__ I __________
y p
oroAov ApyciW lXiovavrav ww_______
•r^o-8' W x^P^ __^ ^____
C ? ____J j__
JA.^.49. »Ar. Av. 221. * ibid. 50. 7 Ar. Av. 736. "A. Ag.4O-i7-* ibid. 98. * A. Ag. 48. 6 ibid. 47. 8 ibid. 689.
|
364 |
364 VERSIFICATION. [I673
1678. Anapaestic systems are especially common in march
movements in tragedy, where they were probably chanted by the leader of the chorus, as in the S
LOGAOEDIC BHYTHMS.
1679. Logaoedic rhythm is a rhythm in $ time, having the trochee as its foundation, but admitting great freedom of construction. Besides the trochee _ w, it admits the irrational trochee _ >, the tribrach www, the cyclic dactyl -w w, and the triseme (1632, 1) or syncopated trochee i_ These are all equivalent feet, of three times (= w w w).
1680. The first foot of a logaoedic verse allows special freedom.
It may be a trochee or an irrational trochee__>, and sometimes
a tribrach www An apparent iambus (probably with ictus O__) sometimes occurs (1GS2, 7). Great license is here permitted in using different forms in strophe and antistrophe, even in verses which otherwise correspond precisely: see 1682, 7.
When a logaoedic verse has move than one rhythmical series (1037), the first foot of eacli series lias this freedom of form (see 1682, 7).
1681. An anacrusis (1035) may introduce any logaoedic verse.
1682. The following are some of the most important logaoedic verses which have special names: —
1. Adonic: o-u/x/m^os eatro.1 —w w I _ w This is the final verse of the Sapphic stanza (0).
2. First Pherecralic : iirTairvkouri ©>;/6
Catal. as rpiixojxiv Xiyuv.2 —w w 1 __w I _ /
3. Second Phereeratic: muSos Bvcr
Catal. ck fj.iv &r] iroX«'/iu>v.5 __> I—ww I — A
4. Glyconic: (Three forms) :
(a) ht-nC dvu£ noemSov,
(b) &rj/ia. tuiv lrporipwv <^ id="iv.i.p9113.1">ttO?.' __ > I —ww I __ w I — A
(c)
iSapph. 1,28. *S.Aj. 643. 'S.^n.101.
1 Find. Py. 11,11. » S. An. 150. 8 ibid. 107.
»S. O.C. 129. eAr. Eq. 551.
|
365 |
1«83J
LOGAOEDIC HHYTHMS.
365
5. Three Alcaics, which form the Alcaic stanza (a, a, b, c):
(a) a(rvi>(Tr)(U tuv ayf/uov (JTaoiv •
w :__j 1__j I —w w I__w I__/
(a) to /«>> yap ivOcv Ku/ta jcvAiVScrai
~ : __ u I ^ )* I —w u I __ j I — A
(6) to 8 ci/dtp • ap.p.i': 8' ue to picraov
___ >-/ 1 __
(c) vat <^oprjix(.6a. av —^ v^* I —v./ ^/ I
I __
Compare in Horace (Od. 1/0 :
Vides ut alta stet nive candiduin Soracte, nee iain sustineant onus Silvae laborantes, geluque I'luinina constiterint aculo.
6. Sapphic: Trona\o6pov | dOavar' | :
Three Sapjihics and an Adonic (1) form the Sapphic stanza. 7. Eupoliilian : w 6(.uip.i'vot.,
_ yy |_ yj _
(See 1044.) The Eupolidean verse is used by the line in comedy; as in Ar.
1683. The first strophe of the first Olympic ode of Pindar is given as an example of the free use of logaoedics in lyric poetry.
apUTTOV fJLCV {f8a>p, 6 8c jl XpuCTCIS UldufJLiVOV TTVp
w!uI-vvI_vIlII_vI^uI_w an SuurpeVa || vvkti fx.tyavopo'i t^o^a ttAoutou *
tt 8' at^Aa yapvev -vl_ul_vl-A 1 Alcae. 18,1-4. *Sapph. 1,1. « Ar. TV! 518.
|
366 |
366 VERSIFICATION. [1684
ik&tat,
__ j i —w y I __ j
flrjKtT (UXtOV (JKOTTU
__u! — vy I __ ^ I __ /
oUo 6ixirvOTtpov iv a/xtWpa.
__w I .__wl^wwl__v-/ll__w 1__wl —v/w 11__II__^ I —w I__/
/xiJ8' 'OXu/i7r('a9 dyaii/a |[ tj>ipripov aiSdcro/xev"
_w I_ul_w I _w II —w w I I_I_ul _A
oOtv 6 irov
S '. Ji~f W I v^^^y I __ v/ I __ w I __ v_/ I __ A
^S=^l_w ll_l uuul_A Kpwou TraiS',
w:l_I_ul_wli_luuul_a
j: i_I wwv./ I__v_/ I__v^l__a
DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS.
1684. 1. About half of the odes of Pindar are composed in a measure called dactylo-epilritic, which consists of dactyls, with their equivalent spondees and syncopated forms (i_j), and epitritos. The epitrite (i_ w-----) is composed of a long (or Doric) trochee (i_ w, see 1632, 2) and a spondee. The dactylic parts of the verse generally have the form —vv—^^ — — or (catalectic) -uu- ww^A. The epitrite also may be catalectic, i— w_ A. The verse may have an anacrusis.
2. It will be noticed that in this verse the long trochee (i_ w) has the same length as the dactyl and the dactyl has its full time, while in logaoedic verse the trochee has its ordinary time and the dactyl is cyclic (equivalent in time to the trochee).
1685. The first strophe of Pindar's third Olympic ode is an example of this measure : —
Tw8a/)t'Scus Tt
__>^vyl _wwl___ll_j___II_wwl _ww I — A
kXuvolv hKpa.ya.vra. yipalpuw cv^ofiai, __:__wwl__uu I____ll__j__A"
|
367 |
1688J FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES. 367
ww —vvl____II l_ w____I__wv_/|__w^|__7
auirov. || Mo«ra ovrto pot Tra.ptara\Koi. vto
__il_w____III_>_/____11_j____II__jw I_uu|____11_w__7
1_ w------II1— w____| l_ j____
RHYTHMS WITH FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES.
1686. Some of the more important rhythms with feet of five or six times (1027, 3 and 4) are the following: —
1687. 1. Choriambic rhythms, with the choriambus _ w ^ _ as the fundamental foot: —
ircuSu fiiv av^Hs voaiv av a
Sava fiiv ovv, Suva, rapaaau ao
2. Choriambic verses of this class are rare. Most verses formerly called choriambic are here explained as logaoedic (1082).
1688. 1. Ionic rhythms, with the ionic a minore w w-----
as the fundamental foot, admitting also the equivalent yj ^ u_i (162(5, 2): —
o-rpuTos £is ivWiiropov yetJTOva cr^eSt'a vop fwy a
2. A double, trochee__w__w often takes the place of the two
long syllables and the two following shorts. This is called anaclasis (draxAacris, breaking up), as it breaks up the feet. E.g.
Tcs o Kpainvw | nooi TTVfO7jfxa7os cv7tc|tous avtji
1 A. Se. 929. » S. 0. T. 484. « A. Pe. 65-70. « tWd. 95.
|
368 |
368 VERSIFICATION. [1089
1689. Cretic rhythms, in which paeons occur by resolution of long syllables (_w<^w or ^ w w _ for _ w _): —
ovk ava!
_v_ I _j_| _uwu | _>_> w j
— <-< — I — j j j I _j j j |_j_
<- id="iv.i.p9185.1">vw — I __ w__ | __ w__ I __w __
1690. Bacchic rhythms, with the bacchius v___as the
fundamental foot: —
Tts ax«>, | Tis o8/xa [ irpoo-tVra | /i* d^ 3
w------I w____I j____I j____
; | tl pi£w ; [ ytVoj/xai j SvcroitrTa
DOCHMIACS.
1691. Dochmiac verses, which are used chiefly in tragedy to express great excitement, are based upon a foot called the dochmius, compounded of an iambus and a cretic (or a
bacchius and an iambus) w_ I _ w_ (or w___I w_). This
peculiar foot appears in nineteen different forms, by resolving the long syllables and admitting irrational longs in place'of the two shorts. Its most common forms are o_I_w_and w w j I_w__As examples may be given
SvaaXyu Tir^a.4 o____w__
irTtptxfiopov Se'/tas.* w w w__ w__
)j.l(ji)$<.Qv n*v olp.6 > w kj _ w _ (for ~>-------yj__)
.1 j w w w j j — (for J____w —)
tiv (Tkoto) daviiv 6 rAd/ion'.11 w____w __ | v_____> __
':, (TTpaToirtSov ru>v? w____w__ I j j j__w —
1 A r.Ach. 299-301. ♦ A. Ag. 1100. ' E. Sa.1108.
2 A. Pr. 115. » rtfd. 1147. • E. 7/i;>. 8:!7. » A. Eu. 788. « j6;c/. 1090. » A. Se. 79.
|
369 |
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
|
370 |
|
371 |
APPENDIX.
1692. CATALOGUE OF VERBS.
Note. — This catalogue professes to contain all verbs in ordinary use in classic Greek which have any such peculiarities as to present difficulties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some form before Aristotle; and no forms are given which are not found in writers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the present indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a form which is given for completeness and marked as later. Tenses which are not used by Attic writers, in either prose or poetry, or which occur only in lyrical parts of the drama, are enclosed in [ ], except occasionally the present indicative of a verb which is Attic in other tenses.
The verb stem, with any other important forms of the stem, is given in ( ) directly after the present indicative, unless the verb belongs to the first class (500). The class of each verb in a is given by an Arabic numeral in ( ) at the end, unless it is of the first class. Verbs in iu of the Seventh Class (019), enumerated in 794, are marked with (I.) ; those of the Fifth Class in vim (008), enumerated in 797, 1, with (II.) ; and the poetic verbs in cijM' or ra/xai (009), enumerated in 797, 2, which add m to the stem in the present, with (III). A few epic peculiarities are sometimes disregarded in the classification.
The modification of the stem made by adding i in certain tenses (053) is marked by prefixing (t-) to the first form in which this occurs, unless this is the present. Presents in -(Spar) indicates that it is found only in composition. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in later Greek ; and it is often omitted when the occurrence of cognate forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority within a fixed period.
The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the present or perfect is given. Second perfects which are given among the principal parts of a verb (402, 1) are not specially designated (see jSXdirrui).
371
|
372 |
372 APPENDIX. [1692
A. [(do-), injure, infatuate, stem, with aor. ooa-o (4a
iiaBijv ; pr. mid. darai, aor. dao-d^i^, erred. Vb. aaros, iy-aros.
Epic]
"Afa|iai, admire, [epic fut. d7dir
rjyytfiai, riyy(6riv, fut. ]). ayyi8-h(ro)uu ; a. m. 7iyyfiitiyi>. Second
aorists with X are doubtful. (4.) 'A^tpw (aytp-), collect, a. i?7f'pa; [ep. plpf. p. ayijy^paTo ; a. p. -tiytp8r)v,
a. m. {4iycipanr)v)
See i77
epic ?{a], 2 p. (07a [Ion. *ij7a], 2 a. p. liyriv [ep. ^d7i;v or 47>)>].
(II.)
"Aya, lead, 4{u, ?{a (rare), ?xo. ?7m«'i ^X^i^i dx^'OMat; 2 a- 'iT"-
70^, 177076^1" ; fut. m. tiap.0.1. (as pass.), [Horn. a. m. i^6.fj.rji>, 2 a.
act. imper. 4£rrt, inf. d^Mo-oi (777, 8).] [(d8i-), be salad, stem with aor. opt. iS^dcy, pf. part. aSrfKus.
Kpic]
[(d«-), »v«{, stem witli aor. 4f
deftru) and df{(70jua(, ^(((ra. ['A^u: Horn, for oC?u.] ["Ainu (d<-), fiiow, 4)jto)', dficri, inf. d^ id="iv.i.p9230.1">>oi, dijMf «'i part. dt(j; imp.
i-qv. Mid. 4jjroc and 4ijro, part, dij/io-os. Poetic, chiefly epic] (I.) AlSlopai, poet. orSoAUti, respgcf, aii(aoiJ.a.i, ydeofiai, xiS4
>j5e
/ioi], Xipi8r)v, aiptdr/jofiai ; fut. pf. jipiio-ojiai (rare) ; 2 a. fiXo^, lu,
etc.; tiXA/on', fXu)/iai, etc. (8.) Atpcn (op-), taA-e «p, ap(i, ^pa (674), ^px-a, ?p/»ai, T)p8i)v, ap«7)
i>pdM'!»' (074). Ion. and poet, iitpw («tp-)' V"P", ^^pSrjf, [v'PHai
(late), Horn. plpf. 4wpro for f/tpro ; a. m. aup6.ixT)v.~] Fut. dpoO^oi
and 2 a. ^mio (with 4p«Mai (a) etc.) belong to ipvvnai (dp-). (4.) Al
afo-eoMai (rare). (5.) 'Ato-o-w (diV-), rus/i, di'{w, iji{o, iflx^i', M&Mi'- Also
(also iaau or 4ttw), ££u>, jfo. Both rare in prose. (4.)
Ato-x«v«» {a-l'Xx"")i disgrace, afcx"'"! i"X^""x< [P- P rart- eP- W
|
373 |
1602] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 373
'At», hear, imp. i'iov, [aor. -^iiro.] Ionic and poetic. ['Atu, breathe out, only imp. &Cov. Epic. See dij/w.] ['AKaxCt" (<»x-i Ree 587), afflict, redupl. pros., with &x&» and ox<«»,
6« grieved (only in pr. part, ixfuy, ixevuv), and &xopiai, 6e grieved;
fut. dKa^^cw, aor. d*dxi?ffa; p. p. dtdx7!^' (dK7)x^5arat), &Kdxy
aKaxvutvot or aKiJx^MCos J 2 aor. r^'axo*1, aA'ax^i?". See fi^yi^iai
and ixoMoi. Epic] (4.)
«vos, sharpened, epic pevf. part, with no present in use]
!a(, aor. i7K«
pf. aKTixoa (for dx-i?
'AXaXd[u> (daXa7-), raise war-cry, dXoXd^o/«i(, ^XdXala. (4.)
i, wander, [pf. dXdXwai (as pres.), w. inf. dXdXijatfai, part.
s], a. dX^fl^v. Chiefly poetic. 'AX8atvu (d5o^), nourish, [op. 2 aor. iJXSaxoi'.] l'res. also aS-/i
' Pofttic. (4.)
*AX«(4*W (^Xe<0-), anoint, dXf/^w, ^Xei^a, dX^X(0a, dXijXtjxMa'i fict
io (dXf{-, dXf«-), ward of, fut. dX^fo/xai [ep. (s-) dXf?i)(Tw, lid. Ma'] ; aor. (e-) ^X^ijira (ijXeJa, rare), i;Xe{dM'/>'; [ep. 2 a. for dX-aX«/t-ov] 057. ['AXt'o(j.ai, avoid, epic ; aor. ijXtdM';''.] *AX«v«, avert, a v(Tu>, v}cvoa. Mid. dXtuoMai, avoid, aor. ijXtuaM7?*',
with Slllij. i£-a.(founau. I'octic.
'A.ia, grind, TJXtaa, dXtjXtcr^ai or dXTjXf^ai. 039 ; 040. ["AX6o|i
['AXiTalvojiai. (diT-, dXirai--), wiih epic pres. act. oXirpaivu, sin ; 2 aor. ^Xiro^, aXtTipriv, pi. part. dXiTiJ^evos, sinning, ep J. l'oetit, chjefiy epic. (4. 5.)
'AXXtter
"AXXo(i.ai (aX-), feap, dXoC^ai, TjXdn')>'; 2 a. rfkbuw (rare). [Epic 2 a.
a ro, a
o, &/j.ffos, by syncopes] 800, 2. (4.) ['AX«KT
|
374 |
374 APPENDIX. [1692
'AXvoncw (dXt/ic-), avoid, dXu£w [and dXt)$o/uu], r/Xv^a (rarely -a.fj.ift).
Poetic. 'AXwkw is for iXvu-anu (017). (6.) 'AX4>dvu (i
Tij07ji>; 2 aor. rifwpToti [tip. jJiifSpoTow]. (5.)
Ku (infix-), anf}6u ill compos., miscarry, [&nfl'kib
2 a. ^mt'-cx0" i [epic impf. fiMffX01"'] Mid. dMT^xoM*')
Afx-rriffxviofxtxi; imp. ij^irftx^M7?1' J ^- &fj-4>^otiat; 2 a. rj/xiri-a^Sfirji' and
^Tr-firxiiMi'', 544. See fx41 a"(' '(rX<*> 'A(iirXaKi(TK
d^irXa»cwc or dirXcu'wv. Poetic. (6.) ["A(ittv«i, atntvipd-qy, 6.fnrnT0, all ej)ic: see draTrWw.] A^iiivw (d/xu^-), warti o/T,' fut. dfjLWu), d/ivnov/xai ; aor. ^I'l'a, rjnvmtirjv
(4.) 'A(i.«(j-(r« (dM"X")i scratch, [djuu£oo, ^m"Jo (Theoc), i)/«;^<1m')'']. Poetic
ami Ionic. (4.)
&o, d'jubt, rnj.
part. djt#i7fO77#efs. 044.
fii (see fvw/ii), clothe, fut. [ep. dju^iAru] Att. d>i^>'w ; r/v.
regular.
'AvaivO(iai (drai'-), )'c/uS(% imp. 4>'airoV1?l'i *or- ^•"/•'d/tTjv, dv^var^ai. (4.) AvdXio-ka) (aX-, aXo-, 050), and dvoXow, expend, draXuffu, d^Xucra,
and df7jw(ra (KaT-ipuXwaa), dvaXui/ca and djrJXujKa, d^c(Xw/xa( and
duJXcj^ai (itar-iji/aXu^ai), amw$r)v and dx^XiiSijf, draXuS-iJffO/uai.
See aXi(TKo(j.ai.. (6.) 'Avairviu, lake bre.nth ; see kv(u (irw-). [Epic 2 aor. imperat. a/nrwe,
a. p. d/ATreuyfl^f, 2 a. in. a^irvvTO (for d^7rvl5fTo).] 'AvSavto (fab-, a'5-), please [imj">f. Honi. vjvbavov and ftfvSavov, Hdt.
ri^iavciv and l-riv&avov; fut. (<-) dd-nau, Hdt. ; 2 pf. fdoa, epic];
2 aor. aJov [Ion. ?aJo>-, epic cvaSov for ^^aJoc] Ionic and poetic.
See d<7-/wo5, pleased, as adj. (5.) 'Av€'x.w, 7io/(i up; see «X">i and 044. ['AvTivoflt, defect. 2 pf., springs, sprung; in /Z. 11, 206 as 2 plpf.
(777, 4). Epic] Av-oiyviijii and dvo{y<< id="iv.i.p9289.1"> (fioe otyvvfii), open, inijx ivttpyov (rjnoiyov,
rare) [epic dv
ivtyx*, ivtyyixai, avcyxOy (subj. dfoix^w, etc.) ; fut. pf.
(2 pi. dWy^a late, very rare in Attic). (II.)
|
375 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 375
'Av-opflo«, set upright, augment dvup- and ijj/wp-. 644. 'Avvw, Attic also dvvi-u, accomplish; fut. awu [Horn, dvuw], dro^o-/iai; aor. ^vucra, jjn/a-d/zijc; >i. rjvvKa, rjvvaiuu. GoO. Poetic also avu. "Avw-ya, 2 perf. a8 pres., command [w. 1 pi. iyuy^ev, sub. dvuvu, oj)t. dvu7oi>iij, imper. Uvuye (rare), also dywxtf' (with dvwxBu, ivuxh), [inf. dvuiy^Kv]; 2 plpf. i)i-w"yfa, lyKj^f* (or dvu>7«i), [also ^wyoy (or ivuyov), see 777, 4]. [Present forms iviiyn and d^^fToi-(as if from di-w^w) occur; also fut. drufu, a. ii^a.] Poetic and Ionic.
['Air-aupd», tote away, not found in present; imp. dirtjfyiax* (as aor.); kindred forms are epic fut. diroupva-w, aiid aor. part, dirou/jaj, dvou-pd^itcos.] Poetic.
['Airoi}>£crKo) (dir-a0-), deceive, ^ird0T)
ov ('xfl-)i ^': hated, (e-) dirfx^^OAioi, airi)x*')M<"; 2 a. tjK Late prcs. atrf^Oopiat. (5.) ['Aird«p
i and -vu, forms of diro^rf/^a). See ktiCvoj. ), it suffices, impersonal. See XPT' "Airrw (d
a. p. 7J(f,e-i)v (sec id
^t;>'. Kj). act. inf. dp^«>ai, topvai/.j
'Apapfo-Kw (dp-),fU, Tjfiffa, T)p6r)v; 2 p. ipapa, [Ion. iprjpa, plpf. dp7)pfi(y) and ijpijpei^);] 2 a. ypapov ; 2 a. m. part, dp^fcot (as adj.), filtiny. With fonn of Attic redupl. in pros. (015). Poetic. (6.) 'Apdo-crw or dpaTTW (dpa-y-), strike, dpa(u, ^pa{a, ijpdx^i*1' (*•) Ap^
C30. (6.)
['Apnp.
'Ap|j.
poetic. See atpu. (II.)
Ap6w, plough, 'tjpotja, [p. p. Ion. dp^poMai], T7p6#i)j>. 030. 'Apirdjw (apira-)--), seize, dpwdau and dpTrdjopai [ep. a'pjrdtco], ->;p7rii«ra [^piraja], Tjpiraica, ^p7ra
|
376 |
376 APPENDIX. [1692
w, begin, rule, d>?w, ypta, (wx< id="iv.i.p9310.1">) iipiiMi (mid.), VPXeV, dpxfl'i-
(Aristot.), apto/im, ^fd/xijv. *Aio-
['AtitoXXw (dnraX-), tend; aor. irlrrfra. Epic and lyric] (4.) Aiiaivw (ai)ay-) or aualvu ; fut. avavu; aor. ijuTjra, ijijd^iji' or ai)d)>0i)i>, ai/avdyootxai; fut. in. aiWoC/uii (as pass.). Augment ijv- or ou-(510). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (4.)
-), i>icreuse, («-) ailf^o-w, ail{i}
for d0du or d(^dw.] (4.) 'A<} id="iv.i.p9314.1">-tt)j«, ?<;« ^o, impf. a(pir]f or f/ipiijy (544) ; fut. d^ije-w, etc. See tlie
inflection of fij/«, 810. (I.) ['A<) id="iv.i.p9315.1">i(r
d0uu. ] (4.) ['A4>Cw, draw, v
i, be displcuae.d, («-) a.x9(aay.ai, rixStati-riv, axO«r9i](roiM.i.
{a-), be troubled, iinpf. d^w/iij^. Poetic. (H.) Also epic pres. dxonai] Sec ana^u.
["Au, .vitiate, aaui, ana ; 2 ;ioi'. subj. fault (or l&ixtv), pr. inf. i^evai, In satiate one's self. Mid. (aoM*") aarai as fut. ; f. dffofiac, a. affd-/«)>•. Kjjic]
B.
Bdjio (^07-), speak, vtter, &&&, [ep. pf. pass. £fir/irofiai, fitfirixa, ftffianai, ift&8T)v (rare) ; 2 a.
(firiv (7!i(l) ; 2 pf., see 804 ; fa. m. epic ^/Srjo-d^ijf (rare) and tprjai/ttiv,
777, 8.J In active sense, csinxfi to go, poet. /Stjitw, ?j3i;a-o. See fill).
'i'lie s/jrt/>/
active. (5. 4.) BdXXw (/3aX-, jBXo-), throw, f. [/3aWa>] ^aXi, rarely («-) ;3aXXVu>,
fi(fi )Ka, (l^ inai, Opt. 5io-/Sf/3Xj<7flf (734), [opift /S«/94X id="iv.i.p9326.1">/Ma']> ^4-
8i)», p )6r)tro/Mt ] 2 a. (fiaXov, ^aX6M1" ; fut. 111. PaXoC/xai ; f. p.
0c0ijiro/«i(. [K))ic, 2 a. dual ^vn-liXvrv', 2 a- m. ipxi/nyy, with
sulij. ^XijfTai, opt. /KXiio or fiXtLO, inf. flija0a.i, pt.. /SXTi^ifi-ot; fnt. £u;u-
/3X-4
fut. in. fidi/'onoi. (3.)
BdirKu Oa-). poetic form of pafoa, go. (6.) Bao-Tatu (See 587), ranv/, paardaui, Jgdaraoa. (Later forms from
stem /3orrTo7-.) Poetic. (4.)
Btjo-o-u (/Sijx-). Att. /J^ttu), co'i'jh, /?^{w, f/9ijfo. (4.) [Btpi)|ii (/3a-), po, pr. part. 0<0tfs. Epic] (I.)
|
377 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VEHBS. 377
BiPp
pf. pePpw
6ois.~] (6.) Biou, ftte, /3«£
(For ifiiuo&nrjv, see /SiiiffKOyuai.)
Biw
2 a. p.
i^o^ai Ion.]. (3.) BXacrrdvw (/3XairT-), s;>rou{, (t-) pXaaT-qaw, fitfiXaoTrjua and //SXd
(524) ; 2 a. (pa
BX/iru, sec, p yonat [Hdt. dvo-^X/^w], (jiXc^a. BXCttu or pXC
Poetic. (6.) Bodto, shout, PoT)aofxai, (pbriaa. [Ion. (stClU /^o-), (Hujaotiat, e(Jwtra,
if}
BoiTKU, /C(!(t, («-) f)0OKT)
Bov,o|iai., toi'M, iots/i, (augm. t@ov- or ??,flo(/X-) ; («-) flovXiioonat, (5c$ov-Xij/uai, ipov-/)th)v ; [2 p. Trpo-fi{fiouo., prefer.'] [Kpic also /SSXoMai.j 517.
[(f3pax-)i stem, with only 2 aor. (fipaxt ami Ppa.^<, resounded. Kpic..] BpCJu (sp.c 587), fee drowsy, aor. «/3piJj. Poetic. (4.) Bpt8w, ie heavy, Ppiau, ippiaa, pifrplOa. Rare in Attic pros«. [(Pp°X')i stem, swallow, aor. ipp,o(a (ojjt. -^ipo^ftf), 2 aor. p. dm-; "2 pf. dra-^^poxe", 7M7,54. Kpifi.]
ppux-, Oufi), HW, 2 p. p/fipvxa ; {jip'vxv^P-V ', ppvxyOcl'i. B«v or pii» (/3u-), s«o;> wp, ^uituj, ip'wa, fitfivop.ai. 0'07. Chiefly poetic. (5.)
r.
o) (70/1-), marry (said of a man)i f. 7a^w, a. ty-q^a, p. p. p. ■yeyapjina.i. (of a woman). Mid. Diarrjf (of a woman), f.
M
rdwfiai, rejoice, [('.pit; fut. Yawcnro/tai.] C'liicfly puiaii:. (II)
r^wva (701^-), 2 perf. as pi'cs., shout, .sub. 7<7u id="iv.i.p9356.1">*(w, iuipcir.
[ep. inf. yeyuvtiut, part. 7£7w>'u?; '2 l>lpf. ^<7u«(, wit.li
and 1 sing, iyeiuvcuv for -
w. fut. 7«7wv^(ru), a. ^7e7uv)ffo. Chiefly poetic. Present also ycyw
vlffKU. (6.)
riivo(iai (7(1/-), lir1 horn; a. ^-yeipd/i.Tji', begat. (4.) TcXdw, laugh, 7eXd
|
378 |
378 APPENDIX.
Tid(w (yn$-), rejoice, lyvWiru, iy/id-naa;] 2 p. yhyB* (as pres.). 654. TupacrKw and ^i]pdu> (yripa-), grow old, yripiam and yrjpdffofxai, iyqpicra.,
ytynpana (am old) ; 2 a. (799), inf. yrpdva.i., [Horn. pt. yrpai. (6.) n-yvo|iai and •ytvoiuu. (yo-), become (051), ytv^aopau, yiy(vt)iun,
[iy(rfjByu Dor. and Ion.], ytvyd-qooiuu (rare); 2 a. tyci>6nr)v [epic
ytvTo for iytvtTo~; 2 p. 7^yo>'o, am (for 7f7da(7i, 7e7iis, and other
/ji-fiinns, see 804). IYyvwo-icai (t^o-), no.sco, jfe«oio, yvutronai, [Hdt. ap-tyvwoa,~] tyvuxa,
tyvaapjit, (yvticdt]v; 2 a. iyvav, perceived (71*9). Ionic arid late
Attic ylviioKu. (6.) ri<})«, ci(«, grave, [if-iyXwpa, Hdt., lyv*l>dnr]v, Theoc.,] 7^7u^ai
and «7u/xMai (024). rvd^Trrw (7^0^^-), bend, yv&iupu>, [tym/jof/a, lyvatupdrfv.'] Poetic,
chiefly qifc. (3.) [Fodw (70-, C5G), bewail, 2 a, 7601-, only epic in active. Mid. yoao/Mi,
poetic, epic f. yonvoii.a.i.'] rpa
(iyp6.
a. in. (ypafap.rif. Tpiland 7pujo/i«i, »7pu{a. Chiefly poetic. (4.)
A.
[(8a-), stem, teach, learn, no pres., («-) {aijcropwti, SfSdijKa, 5
2 a. in. (?) inf. ScSdao-flac; 2 pf. pt. 5«5aws (804); 2 a. Maor or
S^oaoi-, tavyht; 2 a. p. ^5ot)^, (earned. Horn. Siju, s/taii Jind.]
l'octic, cliieily epic. [AaiBaWw (8ai5a-), deck out, ornament, epic and lyric. Pindar has
pf. ji." jiart. 5f6ai6aX/i^i/os, a. pt. SaidaXOth ; also f. inf. da.iSa.'kuotpa',
from .stem in o- (see OoO).] (4.) [Aal^ui (5ai7-), rend, Sai^ai, 15di£a, 6c5diy/xai, iSatx^V- Epic and
lyric] (4.) Aaivv|u (5ai-), entertain, Salcra, Wo«ra, (rtatcrtf))") Jaiirtfc^s. [Epic
ja(^i, impf. and pr. imperat.] Mid. dalvunai, feast, Satvopai, iSat-
(777, 3): sue 734.] (II.) Aaiojieu (5acr-, 6aji-, 5ai-, 002), divide, [epic f. Sda-o^ai,] a. Wiirin'i
pf. p. ^^Jair/ua" [epic &t5ai/j.a.i], (4.) Sec also SaT&>(«u. AaCw (Ja/r-, Sa/r.-, 5ai-, 002), kindle, [epic 2 p. Bib-ria, 2 plpf. 3 pers.
SeSTfiKf ; 2 a. (^dao^rjn) subj. Sdjjrai.] Poetic. (4.)
o^. (5. 2.)
|" C'09) and 8a(ivau (5o^-, 8Ma-, 5"Ma-)t a's0 PTes-(587), tame, subdric, [int. SapAvu, oapdu, SapiCi (with Horn.
|
379 |
1602] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 379
), a. iBifiatra, p. p. bibni a.i, a. p. ibtttiOriv] and (ban&aSi)v ;
[2 a. p. Haw (wit)i bdfia>) ; fut. pf. ScS)>.-/i0O)iLai ; fut. in. bafid
a. (baixaaitn-QV. Ill Attic prose only ia/udfw, ibandoB-qv, ^5a/tacrd/iijc.
OCo, 2. (5.4.)
vu (6ap0-), sice;), 2 a. (bapdov, poet. (bpaBov; (i-) p. »aTa-5c5ap-icwt. Only in comp. (usually Kara-ba.p8a.vtj, except 2 aor.). (5.) AaWopai, divide, w. irreg. 3aWa
[Epic fut. {{(aonai,] a. <3fi.ro; 2 pf. btbia [epic Je^ia,] for full
forms see 804. See 622 (fr). [From stem Sfi- Hompr forms impf.
tlov, Sk, feared, fled] [Epic present 8«c8«, fear-] See also
Sitfj-ai. (2.) A€(Kvip.i (Sax-), show: for synopsis and inflection, see 504, 5fl(i, and
GOO. [Ion. («««-), «^w,?5f?a, S/5f7Mai, fS/x^"- Mf$dM"-] Kpic
pf. m. bfiStynai (for Ji'iSfynoi), greet, probably comes from another
stem 5«-. (II.)
[Alfiu (8«M-, but-), build, (Sapa, bibniuiai, ib(tfnd/ir)>'.'] Chiefly Iniiic. A^pKojiai, see, ibipxOv; 2 a. (SpaKov, {(Sp6.Ki)v) Spawns (C<49, 2 ; 04(1);
2 p. SiSopKa ((Mo), l'oetic. A^pu, ^ay, 5t/)u;, ibdpa, biSapnai; 2 a. Ibaprfv. Ionic and poetic also
St(pu («fp-). (4.)
A«'xo|ioi, rcceirc, WJoMai, StSfypMi [Horn. 5^aTal f°r 5f8^xaTai]i '*'■ X*ijv, W<{dfH)»; [2 a. in., chiefly epic, Ibtywr, bturo, imper. &<(o (75«, 1), inf. S4%0
Aim, bind, 5-/)
A<<», want, need, («-) 6«i)
[At)pid
[AV|u, epic present with future meaning, xliaUfiwl] Sec (8a-).
Aiairdu, arbitrate, w. duulilo. augment in perf. and plpf. and in compounds (043 and 044); biatryau, SiyTyaa. (dir-fSitfrtja-a), bebiijTrjxa, SfSiijTij^ai, Sir]r^$Tjy (i^-€btriT^0r)p, late); biaiT^ao/ML, Ko.T-tbiriTr)
Aiokov^u, minister, ibiaKbvow ; Siaxomjffw (aor. inf. biitcovrjirai), Sebta-«6h)moi, ibia.Kovri()Tii'. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment S117- or a
Aw64
|
380 |
380 APPENDIX. [1692
] Seblbaxa, beblbaynai, /SiSdxCi"; 8i8d£o/iai,
See stem 6a-. (6.)
AC8t](jii, bind, chiefly poetic form for H4u. (I.) AiSpao-Kui (i5pa-), only in comp., run away, -bpdaonai, -StSpaxa • 2 a.
-<5pix QIon. -?8pi)i-], -Spw, -Spali)*, -8pai
diduiatd for 5wffw.] (I-) Affftai (*'<■). be. frightened, flee (704, 1), inf. Slt
{chase) ; 61u/xai and 5io(m>!'' (cf. iiv^nai 729, and nOoiti-qv 741),
cftai'«, part. 6i6Mtws, chasing. Impf. act. ^r-J/eirav, se£ ok (of dogs),
JU8,684. (I.) [Atonal, seek, with >; for t in present; Sitfironai, (Siftcin-nv. Ionic
and poetip.] (I.) [(8ik-), stem, with 2 aor. «5i«o>, threw, cast. In Pindar and the
tragedians.]
Ai>|>ou»>, thirst, Si^foa, Hl^naa.. See 41)0. Aok<(* (Jok-), scflin, think, 56fw, fio?o, HSoypai, iS6x9v (rare). Poetic
SoK-qau, i&6*ri(ra, 5f56K7)KO, 5e66Kr)tiat, <{oxiiSi)i id="iv.i.p9427.1">. Impersonal, SoKii,
f< seems, etc. 054. Aouirlu (5oi/7r-), sounJ heavily, ^oiiirijo-a [epic 8owr»j
/ir(-78oi)irij
ffxaL. (4.) Apcuo, do, Spd(ru, (Spaira, 6/JpaKa, WSpa/wu, (rarely SJSpaviuu), (tSpd-
affijy) SpairSfii. 040. Aivapiai, 6e ohJe, augm. rtuv- and ijSur- (ol7) ; 2 p. Ring. pros, (poet.)
5i/vp [Ion. 5i/pj/], impf. tbuvaao or ibuvu) (032) ; bvvTjaotxai, dcSuvijtiai,
i5vvf)6-ov (i&vf&aOr]!', chiefly Ionic), [epic it>uvr)
M&vxa, SfSvuai, iSMr)v, f. p. 8utfi)
f)04 and 7SI9: f. in. bvao^ai, a. in. iBw&nriy [ep. Ulab^v (777, 8)].
(5.)
E. ['Ea<) id="iv.i.p9437.1">0Ti (II. 13. 543; l-t,4K>), aor. pass, commonly refeiTed to ojttu) ;
also to ?iro/iai and to trijrrw.j 'Gam [epic t/dw], permit, (daw, ilaoa. [ep. ?a
f'aaoMai (as pass.). For augment, see 537.
'E-yYuouo, pledge, bitroth, augm. vyy- or inyv- (tyyeyv-), see 543 ; 644. 'E-y»(pw (iyep-), raise, rouse, iy
iypi)yopa, am awake [Horn, typyybpdaai (for -bpiui), imper. (yp^i-
yop6( (for -bpaTt), inf. iyprtyopBai or -4p0ai] ; 2 a. m. ■f/ypbutiy [ep.
|
381 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 381
"ESu, eat, (poetic, chiefly epic, present): see {
'EJoiiai, (78- for
'E6(u and 9iu, wish, imp. rjBeoi>; («■) iScXfyu or S«X7)cr
i)8iiiKa. 'E0Au is the more common form except in the tragic trimeter. Impf. always rjdeXov; aor. (probably) always but subj. etc. WtXijerw and fcX^u, M)eij
'EOt^w (see 587), accustom, iBloa, cWioa, ef0«a, iCStciuu, The root is
["E8»v, Horn pres. part.] : see eluBa.
EtSov (/S-, pS-), vid-i, 2 aor., saw, no present (see 539): tSw,
tie or fJlSu>v. Mid. (chiefly poet.) «t8o(*at, seem, [ep. f/ird-/»i)v and 4(ur-;] 2 a. elS6^riv (in prose rare and only in coinp.), saw, = cl&ov. OtSa (2 pf. as pres.), know, pip. fJij, *n«w, f. (Caofiat; see 820. (8.)
EtKaJw (see 587), make like, clxafov or pxofoi', (Uiau, «f
(EtK») not used in pies. (eiV, «-), resemble, appear, imp. e/ito>', f. <(?u (rare), 2 p.
[EtX.60 (A-, eA-), prsi-s, roW (054), aor. taa, pf. p. ftX/xai, 2 aor. p. idXriv or SXtji- w. inf. dXTj^voi. 1'res. pass. elXo/mi. Kpic. Hdt. has (in conip.) -(fi;o-o, -tfXij^ai, -eiXjOrjv. Find, has plpf. WXfi.] The Attic has eiXiofmi, and «rxXu or ei'XXw. 598. See Kk<* (4.)
Et(i(, i«, and Etjii, po. See 800-809.
Etirov (f'V-), sai(/, [epic i'ftiro]'], 2 aor., HO present; et-ru, ftiroi/U, diri, dvuv, diruv; I aor. (lira. [poet, etiiro,] (opt. ffiraiMi, imper
and tlp-yvvw, also elp7ui (elf>7-), sA«< in; etp(u, ffp£o, etpyiiat. Also Jp'yiK, ?p?w, ?p£a, [Horn, ((py^atj 3 pi. fpxarai w. plpf. rpxaTc.px^"]- (II.)
E!p-yu, .Wi^i uiit, cip£u, f'lp^a, rlpy^m, (tpxByv; ffpfo/iai. Also [Jp^w, ■Ipta, -fpyixai, Ionic] ; fp^o/Mi (Soph.). [Epic also lipyu.~
[E(po)iai (Ion.), ash, fut. (c-) elpr)
[Etp« (
Efp« (/p-)t seroi ^°"!! a- ■«'/>« [Ion. -«po-o], p. .«!p)to, »!/»^oi [epio ftp/mi]. Rare except iD compos. (4.)
|
382 |
382 APPENDIX. [1692
['Et
Et«>8a [Ionic iuda] (■/!$■ for fff7)0-, 037, 2, and 089), 2 perf., am acews-tomed, 2 plpf. rto$7). [Horn, has pres. acl. part. f0uii>.] (2.)
'EicicXiio-idJ*), caW a?i assembly ; augin. 17KKX7;- and ^«kXij- (543).
'EXavvu, for Aa-vu-u (GI2), poetic Adw (Aa-), dn'wc, march, fut. (Adatj) Ai (065, 2) [epic Adcnrw, A6u;] ijXacra, A>jXa>ca, Aij-Xa/mi [Ion. and late AtjXootxoi, Horn, plup. A7)Xrtaro], ijXdSijv, iJXafl'd/xJ/i'. (5.)
'w> confute, ( ylw, ijXe7$a, Ai)Xf7/xai (487, 2),
'EX£(r
eilx6rtv. [Kpic aor. mid. cXitd/x^i-.] (4.) *EXku (late (XkOw), pull, e'X£uj (Ion. and late Att. AkiVw), el'Xicwo,
'EXirlJu (Airio-), Aop«, aor. fiXirura ; aor. p. part. (-niaSh. (4.) ["EXttu, cimse to hope, 2 p.«oXira, /tope; 2 plpf. ^uXirfi* (3 pers. sing.).
043. Mid. fXiro/iai, ?iop«, like Attic
and ^/i/'ui;] 2 a. fvi-
(for ^-jirtTf), inf. Ivm-niiv [ep. -^f]- I'oetic. See fiTrov. 'EvItttw (^wir-), c/tide, [epic also ivlaau, 2 a. Mnrov and 7Jnira?ro>' •
(535). (3.) "Evv«(j.t (f- for f(ff-), ves-tio, clothe, pros. act. only in coinp.; [f. fujcj,
a. ?ff(ra, faad^irfv ov tetra-; pf. ftr^tat or ffyxai,] cifxJvos in trag. Id
comp. -?o-w, -fira, -ha/jL-qv. Chiefly epic: aix
form in prose. (II.)
.(a, harass, w. double augment (544) ; iji/iixXoup
"EoiKa, seem, 2 perfect: see
'Eopf££
'Eir-avpc« and {ir-aupCo-Ku (aup-), both rare, oiycy, [2 a. Dor. and ep.
liraipov ; f. in. /jranp^iro^ai,] a. ^7ri)Kpd/x>)j', 2 a. (nrjvpdix-qv. Chiefly
poetic. fw4. (6.) ['Eir-«v<)vo8e, defect. 2 pf., sit on, lie on ; also as 2 plpf. (777, 4). Epic]
See avrfpode. "EwtcrTojiot, understand, 2 p. sing, (poet.) tirfcj-Tp [Ion. tVlffreai,] imp.
iJno'TdM';'', 2 p. sing, -fiiriara
|
383 |
CATALOGUE OF VEKBS. 383
['Eirw (ffcTr-), be after or busy with, imp. etwof (poet. Uroy) ; f. -ffu), 2. a. -iairov (for i-jor-ov), a. p. iripi-iiiB-rjv (Ildt.): active chiefly Ionic or poetic, and in compus.] Mid. k'Trojiai [poet, ttnroiuii], follow, f- efonai; 2 a. iaTrbp.yjv, rarely poetic -ioTii>p.T)v, airQuat, etc., w. imp. [o-irtio (for crirfo),]
'Epdu, tone, TipaatiTin, (pa.
i., wort, d< id="iv.i.p9492.1">, au^ni. tip- (537) ; epy&eoiuu, ctpyaenai, fipya-c7#jp, f(/>7ac7dyuv?j', (pyaaUT]
"Ep7« and ep-yw : see «Vp-yt>u/Ai (eip-yw) anil (tp-fu.
"Ep8« and i'p8u, Mui'i, t/o, prubably for ipf-u — pJ{u (by inetatln.sis) : the sli'in is ftpy- (si^e ,WJ), wlu^itf. fpiy-, p(y-; i'ut. ep^w, a. f'p^a, [Ion. 2 pf. «o/)->-a, "J plpf. Jopy(a.~] Ionic and ]hh.'Uc. See /i^fw.
'EpciBu>, pTop, tptlauy (later), ^pctaa, [ijpftika, ^i7jpct(T/xat, with ipypt-6aTai and -aro, 777, 3,] i]p(.[(jOy]v ; (pdau/xai (Aristol..), T^atrdM'je.
Ep(tKa> (*/?6iA'-, (pix-), U'.QY, Inti'sl, 7}ptt£a, ipriptypiai, 2 a. ypikov. Ionic and poetic. (2.)
'Epturw (f'pf'"'-, iptir-), throw down, epctyw, [r/ptifa, 2 ])f. Ipripnnx, have, fallen, p. p. {p-ripinpai (plpf. (pipnrro, Ilnni.), 2 a. fipiirov, 7jpiTrr]v, a. in. dvt}paf'dfiiji' (Horn.)], a. p. ypfltpOyv. (2.)
'Ep«'
['EpiSaivw, contend, for f'p'f" ; i^ir. m. inf. ^pi5>j
'Epi^u (^pej-), contend, >jp«ra, [ripio-afx/ji- epic] (4.)
"Epo(iai (rare or ?), [Um. ttpojiai, ep. Ipita or cpe'op.ai], for Uie Attic ('pwTow, ast, ful-. (t-) (p-qtroiuon [Ion. f/'/j^tro^aiJ, 2 a. r/piji^v. See
"Epirw, crei:]), ii»p. eipirov ; fut. fpi^u. Poetic. 030. "Eppu, f/o ift destruction, («-) ipprjau, fippi)aa, «iV-ijppi)Ka. Epvy-ydvu (^pi<7-), eruct, 2 a. ^pu7o id="iv.i.p9502.1">'. (5.) [Ion. ipevyop.ai, ipeu
(2.)]
'EpvKw, hold bock, [ep. f. ^piJfw] f/pvia, [ftp. 2 a. ijplS/taKoi'.] ['Epuiu and ctptiu, draw, fut. tpvw, aor. dpvaa and tpvaa, pf. p. et
and ttpuv/icu. Mid. ipvojiai (v) and elpvojiai, (afe «nrto- one's
Ccction, tpvoopat ami ft'pi'ffOMat, ^puad/i'/*' and ftpuad/x^v; with Horn.
/ji-fornis of pres. and im]if.
ttpuvTo, fpucrtfai and etpvado.i. Kpic.] 0^9. Sto pvofiai. "Epxo(*ai (lpx~< Aenfl-, ftuS-, AS-), ;;o, come, f. Afwonat (Ion. and
pott.), '2 pf. AijXuOa [ep. eijaut>a and »X^Aoi'0a], 2 a. r)6ov (poet.
ijXiifiov): see SI. In AtUejirnst1, tiju is used for tktiicrop.ai (1257). (8) 'E
p. (&1)&oica, i5r)5«r/u.ai, [<- id="iv.i.p9512.1">. idy5op.ai~, TjbicB^v ; 2 a. t(payov ; [opic pres.
inf. r«M«ai; 2 perf. part. iSr,S^.~] (8.) 'E
|
384 |
384 APPENDIX.
EtiSco, sleep, impf. (vSov or ijvSoy (519), (c-) eu$r)
monly in ica6-*
ei-qpy- (545, 1). Evpio-Ku (eup-), find, (c-) «6/>ijcrw, 7i'iipr}Ka, ri'vp-rjuat, yvp($r)v, eupc(h)(rojuu •
2 a. rtvpov, T)i>p6/iT}v. 009 (b). Often found with augment tu- (018)
(6.) Ev
a. p. i)i}#prii'07)i', f. p.
e, imp. «!xok (530); i£u or crxV" (»x«-)> «ffX1«a, (chiefly Ion.); 2 a. tax°" (for ^-"X"0")! 'X1*,
trxoly and -ffxo?M'i cx'si <TXf'>'> 'X""i poet. i
[Jlom. pd part.
•tocn? shut, II. 12, 340.] Mid. «x< id="iv.i.p9525.1">nai, cling to, Uo/j-at and
"E4>w, toofc, (i-) f. ?^o^ai and e^j/^aoixai, e
Z.
Zaa, live, w. fyf, ff, etc. (490), impf. ifrv and «^p; fijo-u, frjao^ai,
(f fijcro, t<;i)K(L, later). Ion. fwu». Ziv-yvv(il (feu7-, fi<7-, cf. jug-uni), yoA'e, fft/^w, (frv^a, ifrvynai, ifti-
xOw ; 2 a. p. ^firyiji-. (2. II.)
Ziw, boil (poet. 5€iu), jVcru, fj-fo-tt, [-ff«rMa' lon.J. 639. Zuvvv^ii (fu)-), yivd, tfaaa, *£uxrnai and ffui/xat, ^wtrd/nTjr.
H.
'H|5d
fiji^aa, ri!i7]ica. (4.) 'H-y«pt'9o(j.ai, ie collected, poetic passive form of ijelpu (ayep-) : see
779. Found only in 3 pi. riycp^Ooyrat, with the subj., and iufin.,
and rjytpjdotn-o. "H8o(iai, iep?ertsc(2; aor. p. i/
9, :io:i.] The act. rfiu w. impf. 1760^, aor ijo-a, occurs very rarely. 'H
only in 3 pi. -htpiOovTon (impf. -qipiBoino is late). cH(iai, sit: see 814. "H|j.t, say, chiefly in imperf. r/v 5' ^ii, said I, and j? S' 6s, said he
(1023, '2). [Kpic v (alone), he said.] 'lint, r say, is colloquial. 'H(J.6», bow, sink, aor. ^Wo, [pf. 6ir-cM>'-'JMi"te (for //j-7j/xu«, OiiC)
Horn.] Poetic, chiefly epic.
|
385 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VEKBS. 385
0.
©dXXa> (0a-), bloom, [2 perf. W0ija (as present)]. (4.) [0do(iai, gaze at, admire, Doric for ftrdo/»ai, Ion. dytonai; Odtrofiai and
0ci
2 a. p. hi(pi)v ; 2 flit, ratpnaofmi; fut. pf. TtflttyoMdi. 95, 5. (3.) 0av|j.d£< id="iv.i.p9547.1">> (see 587), wonder, Bavfiouropat (Bauudau?), iBavfiana, TiBai-
0«(y» (9fv-)i smite, 0tva>, [(Buna Horn.], 2 a. tttvov. (4.)
&iu, wish, («-) fftA.i7(rai: see WX«.
6(po|iai, wann ojic's self, [fut. 0
0^o>, (0«i/-, #e/:-, #»-), ?•««, fut. Bclootiai. >r)74. (2.)
(8i]ir-, Sair-, or to^>-), astonish, .stem with [2 pcrf. riBrjira, am astonished, epic plpf. (Ttd-qirta ; 2 a. era^ov, also intransitive.]. :Sl ; t)0, 0.
©ryydvoi (Siy-), «omA, Siia/uu, 2 a. ffr^ov. Chiefly ])Oetic. (5.)
[0X.d», bruise, Wajo, T«'0Aair^ai (Theoc), i8wr6i)ii (Hippoc). Ionic and poetic. See (pKiu.']
QXtfiw (6MB-, SXTB-), squeeze, e i^w, (8;4>a, T(8;/j.pai, i8i
Bv ; fut. in. s poiuii, Horn. ®vf
die, eavovnai, TtOvi)Ka; fut. pf. t«9^i){w (700), later T<.6vi)koi"*'', 2 a.
fflaxor; 2 perf. see 804 and 773. In Attic prose, always airo-tfaeoiVcu
and dir-t'tfanji', but TfSi/ijKa. (310. (6.) 0pd
[2 pf. Tfrprtxa, be disturbed, Horn.] See lapiaaui. (4.) 0pauw, b7'tliS€, Opavtrui, tBpauaa, rtdpauonni lilld 7i0pavj*ai, ^dpavaOr^v
(041). Chiefly poetic. ©pvirmi (rpu^)- for Bpuip-"), crush [fOpuif/a Hippoo.], Te'flpiwiai, (8pi(p9^f
[ep. 2 a. p. frpii
poetic. (6.) 0«» (0u-)> SOCri^ce, imp. fSDov ; Stau, iBiaa, tiSvx*, Tt'Bv/xai, (riSriy;
Bi
I.
"IdX« (i'aA.-)) sand, fut. -JoAw, [ep. aor. rt,Ao.] l'oetic. (4.) ['Iax<* aud toxtu, shout, [2 pf. (faxa) oM^-(ax
|
386 |
386 APPENDIX. [1092
'ISpow, sweat, i&ptiiru, Upuaa: for irregular contraction lipitn etc., see
497. 'I8puu, place, ISptaa, llpvcra, tSpuKa, tSpufiai, ibpvSrjp [or lipivBnv (709),
chiefly epic]; iipioop.ai, Upucd/i-nv. "ltfi> (IS-), seat or sit, mid. Vjojioi, sit; used chiefly in Ka6-lfa, which
see. See also ifjiai. (4.) Also ijdvu. (5.) "It]|u ((■), send: for inflection sec 810. (I.)
'Itcvlopai (/k-)> poet, hw, come, I^o^ai, Ty/iai; 2 a. Ik6mt)v. In prose
usually op-iicn'o/iai. From I™, [ep. imp. hot-, aor. 5{ov, 777, 8.J Also
Udva, epic and tragic. (5.) 'IX.do-KO}iiKao/xai] (la-), propitiate, idao^ai, iia6i)v, iAa
(6.) ['IXijm (iAa-), be propitious, pros, only imper. Xh-qBi or fAatfi ; pf. subj.
and opt. ii)Kai, IKt]koi^i (Hoin.). Mid. 7Aa/iai, propitiate, epic.
Poetic, chiefly epic] (I.) "IX.Xo> and CXXo|uu, roll, for dAu. See d(u. ['Ipiicrcru) (see 582), lash, aor. iVaoa.] (4.) 'IjuCpu (t|
Ionic. (4.)
"IirTanai (wTa-),Jly, late present: see ir^Tojiai. (I.) [KI
["I
"la-nyu (
*I
(073) $jaxy''Wa Ion.], a. p. lax^o.^Orjv fut. m. WvavuVfjLat. (4.)
vI
K.
Ka8aCpu (icaflup-), purify, Ka$apw, Inadnpa and iitiSapa, K
tKaddpOy]* ; Katfapou^at, iKadrjpdf^Tjy. (4.)
KafMjojicu (<5-), Sit ilviou, imp. i«a8((6niii; f. KaBtSov^at. See JJojiai. KaOcuSu, sleop, imp. ^;(a0fi/5oi' and KaflijCSoi- [epic KafleCJoi-], sco 644 ;
fut. («-) Ka»
[Horn. KaOuaa, Hdt. KaT«rtro] (KaOurdixriv. See i'Jw. For inflection
of KdSrtfiai, see 815. Ka£vu(j.ai, perhaps for KaS-fi/pai ("oS-)) e.TCcZ, p. K('«aff/*oi [Dor. «««-aS-
M*Vos]. Poetic. (II) Ka£vd> (*av-), fri7/, f. Kacu, 2 a. tHa^ov, 2 p. (kikovo) Kara-xtt(ov6yti
(Xei).). Chiefly poetic. (4.)
|
387 |
1602] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 387
Ka.ia («av; Kaf-, Kafi-, Km-, 60]), in Attic prose generally «iu (not contracted), burn; ittn; inavna, poet. part.
Ka«'u (naA.f-, kA<-), call, fut. Kaai (rare and doubtful in Attic
KaKcffu) J ^KaAtaa, kikKtiku, kf'tfATj/xai (Opt. K<*Arj"o, mitKrjfuda),
fliji', KA7)8V"Ma'! fut. in. xaoG>iai, a. ^KaA«rdjiiT)>'; fut. pf. K(K ao^ai.
C39 (/>) ; 734. KaXiirrw (xaAK/3-), COTO!', KaAityw, ^naAuif-a, KtKaKv^^ai, i«av
Ka^v
(3.) Kdfivw («ajn-)i iai'OJ", xoMiC/iai, KtanriKa [ep. part. k«k>i7)ius] ; 2 a.
KaTTjyopta, accuse, regular except in augment, Ka-n)y6povv etc. (543). [(>ca
KtpBt'is; 2 a. p. in*pr)v ;] f. m. K
Kfpffa/»
[KeKaSov, 2 aor. deprived of, caused to have, K(Kai6piJiv, retired, xtxa-8V«, s/
[KtXaSfw, shout, roar, fut. «(Aa5?'i
((541). Mid. (cliiufly in compounds) «(wofiai, iKthtvaaiiv-Xo) (xtA-), land, Ktou>, f/teAa-a. 6G8; 074 (()). Poetic: the prose form is ok«XXw. (4.)
K(Xo|iai, order, [epic (t-) KfKfiaonat, iKt
)a
KtvTt'o) («ffT-, Kf^T*-), prick, KiVThau), tKivrrina, \_miUv7fi^ai Ion.,
ixonTiOyv later, o-u->'«'{>
from stem «i»r-. 054.] Cluelly Ionic :md poetic. K«pdvvv(il (««/ja-, tpa-), ?)!!.'/;, inipaaa [Ion. <«p id="iv.i.p9620.1">)o-a], K«'«pa/xai [Ion.
-T),uoi], inpie^y [Ion. -ijfl^^] and lKtp&a6r)i>; f. pass. Kpa8>jiro^ai; a. in.
ixtptnaip.^v. (II.) KtpSaCvw (ttepS-, Kiptav-), gain (595 ; G10), f. ft
[Ion. ^««'p5iji
tK(p$r)(Ta (Hdt.)] ; pf. Trpoo-KoitpSriKaoi (Dem.). (5. 4.) Km)8w (kcuO-, ki*), hidK, Ktunw, TfttuiTa ;] 2 p. irf'Kmfla (OS preS.);
[ep. 2 a. KiiSov, subj. KmiSw.] Epic and tragic. (2.)
|
388 |
388 APPENDIX. [1692
Bw (xijS; «o8-), vex, (€-) [KrtSrioa, -JKriS-ncra ; 2 p. *-«Vt;Jo]: active only epic. Mid. Ki)5o/iai, surrow, {KySeaantiv, [epic fut. pf. KtKaSijcrojiai.] (2-)
Ki)pv
Kfyx
Ji kix'IM'1'05-] Poetic. (5.)
(kiS-vcl-), spread, Ion. and poetic for cnaSavvvju.] See
ffK«l-»I/ll. (III.)
[Ktv«(iai, move, pres. and imp.; as mid. of kiWu. Epic] (II.) K(pvT]|u (III.) and Kipvdu: forms (in pres. and impf.) for K«pdvvi(ii. - (xp«-')i lend, [x/>V« Hdt,], ixpvo*, ««'xPiMai; txpnewnv- (I.)
ott-, kAot-), clany, Khiy£a>, (xKay^a; 2 p. K»KAo77a [epic KftfA^fa, part. KfKA.^^oi'Tey;] 2 a. (KKa.yov J fUt. pf. K
KXa(u (kXou-, KAa/:-, itAo/ri-, KAai-, 001), in Attic prose generally kXou (not contracted), wer.p, K^aiaonu (rarely Kav
Kairt
(impers.) »(Kau(T«Tai. (4.)
KAdco, break, fKAoao, K«KAo(ryuai) ixKaaSnv ; [2 a. pt. *a4j.] KX^wtu (kAht-), stcai, k«'iJ/u (rarely «A('if°Mai)i ^fAti^a, Kiio
092), KtKfnpiai, (tVAf'cpffiji') K(
KXtvfci («Aiy-), te?id, incline, kAjj-uj, ««Aiva, KfKkipai, ^kkISi)" [epic IkMvBtiv, 700], KKtB-hoofiai; 2 a. p. ^KAfcTjc, 2 f. Kki^ofiai; fut. in. KAivoCjtai, a. ^KAiKa^T)*-. 0'17. (4.)
KX,vu, Aeav, imp. fxAuoi- (as aor.) ; 2 a. imper. aWBi, *aCt« [ep. Kt'icAufli, k«'kAi/t«], [Part. kKu/xcos, renowned.'] Poetic.
KvaCu, scrape (in compos.), -xvaiVw, -tKvaina, -KtKvaiKa, -Ki'uvaianai,
•Ixyalff&riv, -Kvaia&T)ffonai. Also tcvdco, with a«, a?j contracted to 77,
and a«i, ay to 7) (490). Kofi(^w (ko^(J-), care for, carry, nopuu, i>i6fiiaa, kjk^iko, Ktx6iJ.iaiJ.ai,
iKonloOriv; Ko^mBrtao^ai; f. in. Koniov/xat (665, 3), a. ^Ko^iffo/iTji'. (4.) K61TTU (icon--), cu(, «(Ji(-u>, «oi^a, KtKt> a, (i!>:3 [k«ottws Horn.], K(KOfj.ix.ai;
2 aor. p. iKSir-nf, 2 fut. p. ifOTr^o^oi; fut. pf. Ke*ctyo/xae; aor. m.
iKotyapriv. (3-)
Koplvvvpi («op<-), satiate, [f. Kopiau (Hdt.), xopeo. (Horn.), a. i«6p«ra (poet.)], KtK6ptnnm [Ion. -Tijuai], inoptadrir [epic 2 p. part. Ktxopriat, a. m. ^Kop«aaf»7jy.] (II)
|
389 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 389
Kopi5o-
m«Voj.] Poetic, chiefly epic. (4.) [KoTt'w, be angry, aor. 6«(Ttaa, iKaimiii.iv, 2 pf. part. k*kotijws, angry,
epic] Kpd^u (ttpay-), cry out, fut. pf. K
(imper. K«*pax9i and KiupdytTc, Ar.j, t plpf. in(.Kpiytrt (Dein.) ;
2 a. titpayov. (4.) Kpa(vo> ((cpav-), accomplish, xpai-ci, txpava. [Ion. tKpijva], ^Kpoi/fli)>',
Kpav8roonat p. p. ^ sing. HtfcpavTixi (cf. 7T«
and pip. ntKpdavTat and «(«piarro ; (VpaoxfliiJ' (Theoc.).] (4.)
i, hang, (intrans.), ifpfjujj<7o/»oi. See Kpij|i id="iv.i.p9661.1">a]|ii and Kp<[idvvO(u.
ICp€|idvvv)ii (?cp
KpT|)j.vT]|u, suspend, (kp^-i/ci for lopt^a-va, perhaps through Kpri^v6$), suspend; very rare in act., pr. part. Kprui.va. uv (I'ind.). Mid. Kpr|-(iva(iai = Kpf/xaflai. Poetic: used only in pres. and impf. (III.)
Kptjw (itpiy-), creak, squeak, [2 a. ((kpkov) 3 sing, uplm ;] 2 p. (n(Kpiya) Ke«p'.y6T(s, sqneakiny (Ar.), (4.)
Kptv
iKplv8rv~, Kpiflijffo^ai ; fut. 111. Kpwav^ai, a.m. [epic ^Kpivci^rjv.] G47.
(♦•)
£povo>f beat, Kpovvu), $npovaa, KfHpovna, Ktxpovnai and KtKpovonai,
iKpojo6r)v ', •Kpavoap.ai, JKpouoafj.-rn'. KpviTTw (Kpu"f>-), conceal Kpvi^w, fxpu^a, n€Kpv^^at, lKpv
s«ss (subj. K<«Tai id="iv.i.p9673.1">iai, opt. KeKTj/jnji' or k^kt^i*') 7:J4), im-rid-ov (as
pass.); KtKTqoouai (rarely iHTfoopai), shall possess.
BlfcCvU (kT*!'-, «T«-), Jfct?f, f. KTfVU [lOU. «T(»f'ui, ep. alSO KTttVt'lu], a.
Iktuvo., 2 pf. air-«KTOvj, [cp. a. p. ixTaQriv ;] 2 a. fifTai-oi' (for pofttic
bcrdv and tKrin-itv, see 799) ; [e.p. fut. in. K-ia.viop.
prose. oiro-KTe/xu. is generally used. 640; 047. (4.) Erl(«l (sec 587), found, xriVai, (n-riaa, »KTi
iKTioiw (rare)]. (4.) KrCwipii and ktivvuw, in compos., only pres. and impf. See kt<(v«.
(II.) Ktvit/w (ktuJ!-), sound, cause 10 Sound, JKTvirrirra, [2 a. (KTU-noy.']
Chiefly poetic. 054. KvXfu or kvXCvSw and kvXivS'u, roll, 4itilaa, xcicvAitr^at, invia<)rv,
|
390 |
390 APPENDIX. [1692
Kwiu (■«/-), kiss, (Kvva. Poetic. Ttpocr-xvvlu, do homage, £. TrpotrKu-riiou, a. Trpooenuvriaa (poet. irpoaiKvau), is common ill prose and poetry. (5.)
KviiTtt (nuip-), stoop, Ktipv and xd^o^ai, aor. *ku^o,2 p.K(xv
A.
Att-yx<»v» (Aax-)i obtain by lot, f. m. A^|iyiai [Ion. Aa{o,uai], 2 pf. (tkrtxa, [Ion. and poet. A«Ao7xa,] p. in. («fAr)-y/«u) flKriynivos, a. p.
eArix*1)*; '^ a. cAttX"*- [ep. AtAoxw, 634]. (5.)
Aa|i(3av (AaS-), Ja7;e, A^iJ-o^ai, «rAt)<£a, (fATj^/iai, (poet. A«AT)^^ai), A^-$ id="iv.i.p9689.1">8t)i<. Kii
Aofiwo), «7il°n«, Aa/i^v, (Xafi^a, 2 pf. eanwa ; [fut. m. -Aci^iJ/o/iai Hdt.].
AavBavw (Aa0-), Zie /u'd, escape the notice o/(some one), Xtjo-oj, [^ATjaa], 2 p. A(A7)0a [Dor. Xf'Adfla,] 2 a. fAafloy [ep. A«'Aa*o>'.] Mid. forget,
Ai7
[ep. AfAaW^i"-] (5-) Poetic At)9cu. (2.) Aiirru (AoS- or Aa^-), lap, lick, Ka$u, eAmJ/a, 2 pf. (o.
Aoi^o/iai, Aa^a^Tjf. (3.) Ado-KU for Ao«-c7«a> (Aa«-), speak, («-) Aa«W
[ep. i Ka w. fern. part. AtAaKwo:] 2 a. (Kaxov [AtAoK^rj^]. Poetic. G17. (6.) [A4w, a«, ■w)is/(, Afis, A;?, etc.; infin. Aiji*. 496. Doric]
y £ J 7 (7M)
cro/iai, At'^o/xai, A(<£ofiai, all passive. Por pf. act. «rprj*a is used (see'ttirov).
fyo>, gather, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), A«'{i», ?At{a, dKoxa, (Jhcy^ai or Af'Af^^ai, i
(A«iit-, Aoiir-, Ait-), /e<2! id="iv.i.p9701.1">e, A*(iJ/a), XfAd/a^ai, ift
a/Auiitu ; 2 a. {Amov, Min^rji-. Sec synopsis in 47C, and inflection
of 2 aor., 2 perf., and 2 plpf. in 481. (2.) [AtXh)|jiai, part. A
O stem (cf- a»'x-°!)i wlience 2 a. m. (lfyni]v) ?a»kto, ta'd Aiw-Z/ to resi, with iwper. a«'{o (also Af'(fo), inf. K-aTo-At'xSai, pt- koto-^eyus (600, 2). Also ft({o, ?aW to rest, with mid. A
o (o rest, and 4i$aur)v, went to re.st, same forms with tenses of
«7w, say, and Aryw, yatlter. Only epic]
|
391 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 391
6w, poetic: see X.av8dv«.
gw (Atjj'S-), plunder, act. rare, only impf. ik-hi(oi'. Mid.
|t£o|iai (as act.), [fut.
fiaofiai, aor. /A7)i
TO/^f.] (4.)
[Aoto), epic for Aouw; Xotaaofjiat, i6*
Aoiu or Xow, joflsA, regular. In Attic writers and Hdt. the pres.
aud imperf. generally have contracted forms of x6a, as iXou, txoi-
pev, Xovraii oii(?9ai, ovfxfvos (497). Avu, loose, see synopsis and full inflection in 474 and 480. Horn, also
Auw (o) (471). [Epic 2 a. in. Ixini}* (^ pass.), Auto aud ADto, AtWo ;
pf. opt. a«aSto or fvvio (734).]
M.
Molva ((ia»-), madden., a. iwa, 2 pf. pin-ova, am mad, 2 a. p. l^ivrtv. Mid. |ia[vo|icu, be vxad [/laKaS/tm, ^.ui^aMij", n(M»l")f""-] (4.)
MciCo^ai (^aa-, Miffi-, >iat-, G02), desivc, seek, [^atro/*ai,
Mav8avu> (M< id="iv.i.p9721.1">fl-)i learn, (t-) ^aS^ffo^ai, fupidriKa.; 2 a. tfiaBoi: (5.)
Mopva|icu (pap-pa-), fight (SUbj. fiipyw^ai, imp. ^apcao); a. (fiapvuotij)!'. Pot-tic. (III.)
MopiTTW (napir-), SClZC, fxap^u, iixap^a [epic 2 pf. lif'papwa, 2 aor. Hfpap-irov (.r)34), With Opt. fifuditoill; jxairciV.] Poetic. (3.)
Mourcrw (^117-), knead, nalw, etc., regular; 2 a. p. iniinv. (4.)
Mct^on-ai [lou. naxfOfxai'], fight, i. naxf>'H"i [Hdt. jiaX'tfojiai, I'om. ^a-X^o/itxt 01' /taxwo^fl'], P> /"fM«X'?Aia'i ^-. *MaXc(T*M7)1' [^P* '^S
ffd^Tjv: ep. prcs. part, paxfifafvos or ^axc°t'M(*'0S]' [Mf6o(i.ai, r/a'ni o/, j)Zan, (<-) ^S-naopai (rare). Epic] M«6-tt](ii, send aw;;/; see iV' (S1^)- [Hdt. pf. pt. ^eMtTiMf" MiBio-Ku) 0
drvnk, a. p. ^if0uir97j>», Jccnmc rfrKn*. See (icflvu. (6.) M«8«u, ?;« drnnlc, only pres. and impf. [M<£po(tai (m«p-)i obtain, epic, 2 pf. 3 sing, tmiopt;] impers. eT/mpT
t'J is fated, ty.ap»irri (as subst.), FaJc. (4.) M
J!, Care /or, («-) pt
icrai [tp. M«Aii
^fA7)*«/s. Poetic. M
|
392 |
392 APPENDIX. [1692
iniTi
(m«"-)i desire, 2 perf. with no present. See |iato|i
Jw (see 587 and 590), ponder, [^tp^ijpffu, i/upifliptia], air-
(Ar.). Poetic. (4.) MT)8o|xai, devise, /iij
ji«/x7)«ws, /iinontia ; 2 pip. int'uriKov (777, 4).J Chiefly epic. (2.) [Mi)Ttaw (miti-, ((50), jilan. Mid. |M)TiaO|iai, (itiTiOfjiai (Pind.), jujrfiro-
jiai, tinifrlaiiix-nv. Epic and lyric] MtaCvu (^ita^-), stain, iiiavu, tfiiava [Ion. l^ifqpa], ^tfxlaa^at, i[xid.vBrv,
Hiavdriaonai. (4.)
MiYvv|JLi (^i>~), Ionic iiLvya, mix, lA^a, «^"?o, yL(ix.iyixcii, ifuxDw, M'X*1?" ffopat J 2 .1. p. lplyqi>, [uj). flit, /xiyriffu/xat J 2 a. 111. tfxiitro and /tiVTO; fut. pf. M'M'JOM"'.] (II.)
Mi)ivrj(rKw and (older) (ii|ivr{crKcj (^i/a-), remind) mid. )'eme»ii>er;
yangffw, JVyijo-a, nffivrifiai, remember, ifivrioSrii' (as Ulid.) ; iu-rioB4at>ixai, HvhaOftai, nipvfuronai; Invri
[From epic ^ao^ai come i^vuovro, fiw6futvos, (?) etc. (784, 2).] Mtjivu for /ui-m(vo) (052, 1), remain, poetic form of /»«Va>. M£o-yo) for fiiy-anu (017), mix, pres. and impf. See nt-yv«(ii. (6.) ), suck, [Ion. f<5f<'ai, aor. -ifiifyoa (Horn.)].
jw (m">-)' grumble, mutter, aor. ?^u(a. 1'oetic. (4.) MvKa.o|xai {ixvk-, ijlvk-, 650), bellow, [ep. 2 pf. /ic'puia; 2 a. nvnoy;']
invx-oe&w- Chiefly poetic. (2.) Muo-tu or |iutt» (^iuk-), wipe, aTro-juu{a/»«n)s (Ar.). Generally diro-
fXVfftTOt.
Miu, s/nrf (eyes'), aor. i/xuoa, pf. iiinvna.
N.
Nalti (ro/:-, ca/ri-, mi-, 602), swtm, be full, impf. >-aToi<, Od.9,222. NaCw (vaa-, i-o-, 602), dwell, [franca, caused to dwell, ivaaaip-ov, came
to dwell,] b>&a6nv, was settled, dwelt. Poetic. (4.) Nda"
(4.)
[N«ik<« and v«ik«Cw, chide, v
N
|
393 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 393
1. Jfia ^iif, »tf~i w), swim, tKvaa., vivwKa; i. m. (vtvo-ovfiai, 666) nvoov/xtvos. 574. (2.)
2. N«'w, heap up, tvi)aa, vivi)p.ai or vivroixai. [Epic and Ion. vr(u, vrJTjaa, ivrftjad^n.']
3. N
[-^i'
form of the present, is, aco. to Meyer (§ 500), for h-wi-o/ioi, from
a stem vta- with reduplication. (See pres. vUttai, Tind. 01.3,34.)
Poetic. (4.) No&o, think, perceive, vo-qjw, etc., regular in Attic. [Ion.
vtvaj/xai, ivt*>aay.rv.~ No(iti» (see 587), believe, fut. mum [vonfoo late], aor. inS^iaa, pf.
I'd/J/icca, vtvS^ttfffiai,
»o^iou>ioi (Hippoc.).] (4.)
H-«, scrape, [aor. «j(ua and {«V
v-), dry, {ijpaxi, i^ripdva [Ion. ■iji'a], ^/)o
jv. 700. (4.) Svw, polish, ffuira, [«{uff-^ai,] «{i)ff9ij>'; aor. in. {(uaa/ii)i>. 640.
O.
fO8oiroi6">, mate a way, regular; but pf. part. iiSovtwonintvos occurs.
So sometimes with iiomoptai, travel.
(oSu-), be anyry, stem with only [Mom. udvo&priy, nSiiSurr^ai]. "OJ« (o5-), smell, («-) o(riau>, Ulrica. [Ion. oS,Virw, &£«r
Horn. pip. obiiifl(v')]. 058, 3. (4.) OXyu, open, poetic ol{w and ${a [epic also 6i'{o], a. >. part. o?x0tis.
Ot-yviini, simple form late in active, [imp. p. uiyvipnv Iiom.], common in composition : see a.p~o{yviitj.i. (II.) Ot8«'gj, swell, yh-noa,
(y/fTtipa). (4.) Otvoxofa, pour wine, olvoxonaa, [olvoxorjaai (epic and lyric)]. [Impf.
ep. 3 pers. olvo^oet, CfSvoxdtt, iyvoxdtt.'} Otojiai, thi7ik (626), in prose generally oi>ai and
(€-) oMiao^at,
f
Ot |iai, 6e gone, («■) oixtjcom"') "fx'°'
or
|
394 |
394 APPENDIX. [1602
'OXnj-fldvw, rarely oXurSahia (6io6-), slip, [Ion. uKia6-q
"OXv|u (probably for oA-ei/-/«, 012), rarely oKiw (oA-), destroy, lone,
f. oAto [oAfVw, o('u], & aa, -oA«Ae*a; 2 p. oAuiAo, perish, 2 plpf.
-wAwXiy (033). Mid. uAAi^iai, perish, 6ovnai, 2 a. uja^hjj' [w. ep.
part. oiKOfifyos]. Ill prose dir-6XXii|u. (II.) OXo(j>(ipo}iaL (< id="iv.i.p9786.1">Ko
onw^cifffxaL (witll (J/xwjuuTai), af/iotfjjc ilild u>p6o8r]v a^offOrjaa/xat, <(. in.
u)/xoaa/t»jp. (II.)
Chiefly ppetic: only epic in pros, and iiupf. (II.)
'OviviJJlu (oki-, 70(i), benefit, ovfiaa, Unjaa, avritiriv • ovyoonat ', 2 a. 1)1.
uyQixvi' (late wpo^tji'), bvaifii]!', uvatrBai (798; 80^, 3), [lloni. inipo.r.
u^ijcro, pt. dvii/.i.
uv6aaofj.ai, a. ujvoaa^rjv ((ovaio, II. 17,20), a. p. Kar-ovoodys (lldt.). Ionic and poetic] (I.)
0£vvw (o^Ki'-)1 xllGVpeil, -o^ucw, ia^uva., -tti^v^/xai, u£vv0i1i>, ['O^vvdrjnonai,
lli]ip
f'wpa/irt, it/t^ai Or tuipa/xai, iiupdrji/, dtpdrjao^iai; 2 p. tmwTra (Ion. and
pom.). l"or 2 a. (tior etc., sec «I8ov. [lloni. pros. mid. 2 sing.
o,i>;a., 784, 3.J (8.)
'Op^aivw (upyat-), be aji'/ry, aor. 6p-)di/a, enraged. Only in Tragedy.
(4-) 'Op«Yii), reach, d/i('£a>, fipt^a, [Ion. ]if. n. Hpiy^ai, lloni. 3 plur. opwpl-
aTdi, Jjlp. 0/)cup«'xttT0,] iaptxdi]v ; dpt^Ofxai, wpe^a^r)!/. [KpiC upf'yfVfxt,
pr. part, opfyuts. (II-)] "Opvv(j.L (op-)' raise, rouse, Sprrtu, upaa, 2 p. Jpcupo (as mid.) ; [ep. 2 a.
fipopor.] Mill. t!se, ?"tts/i, [f. opoC/^ai, p. op^p
tJpTo, imper. Cpao, uptrfOj up(T
pvynai (raroly tipuynai), u>pvx&1i' ', I. p. KaT-opt/xOrjfTOfjai, 2 f. KaT
opux^"".""!; [wpu^a^T?!', caused to diy, lldt.] (4.) *O
(rare), 2 a. m. ai
oup- for Attic ,'oup-.] [OOrdJio (587), wound, ovTavv, o&Tacra, ot/raancu. Chiefly epic] (4.)
|
395 |
1652] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 395
[OutAw, wound, otfrTjaa, oiiTriBrjv; 2 a. 3 sing. oSto, inf. ovTafuvai and ouTaMfi'; 2 a. mid. ovrd/itw>s as pass. Epic]
'04>«CXii> (oif)*A-, 5'J8), [epic reg. ot'Aa>], OW)C, ((-) btf>u
)
'04>iXXw (o
'O4>Xio-k4v« (b
n.
IIa(£(i) (iraiS-, irai-y-), sport, irai|«t//ua< (000), (raitra, we-raixa, Ttrcua/un,
5'M. (4.) Ilaiw, strike, traiaw, poetic («-) rai^w, «jrai
iw, wrestle, [iraAa/ro,] firdai
Uu, transgress law, augm. rapty6^ow and irapij^^ouv, Trapa-jKa (543).
^u, insult (as a drunken man), imp, ^xap^Vow; iTraptfvnco, itnrapyvqKti, ttaprppriQ^v (544).
IId
Ildo-irw or iraTTw (582 ; 087), sprinkle, iratrw, tirairo, faaaOiiv. Chiefly
poetic. (4.) ndo"X,o (ira0-, irtvd-), for na6-ffKu) (017), suffer, wttffonai (for irffS-tro^at,
7'J), 2 pf. irfVoxSa [Horn. irfiroo-Se for irdrdy&aTt, and jrtiraPura] ; 2 a.
firafcii'. (8.) IIaT
055. Ionic and poetic. .See irdo-o)iai.
ITavw, Stop, Cause to Cease, iraucw, tnaj(ra, TTfitaVKa, irfVaUM [^irauafiTj*' H
n
[II«£k
n
|
396 |
396 APPENDIX. [1892
IIcCpw (irep-)i pierce, epic in pres.; ?ireipa, niirappai, [t-nipnv Hdt.] Ionic and poetic. (4.)
(»■«-, it(kt-, 655), [Dor. f. 7r«(i, a. ?ire{a (Theoc), ep. i*i^-]; a. p. t'lre'x^ic. See epic itcCkw. Poetic.
dJw (cf. ir«'Ao$, ?iear; see 587), [poet. i«X&w (irea-, *Xo-),] 6n«p near, approach, f. ikAcutw, Att. irfAw (006, 2), iniKaaa, [jrf'jrAtjjiai,] iircKa(r8r)>> and iwa8r)v; [fVfXao'tviiji'; 2. a. m. inxiifitif, approached.]
[Also poetic presents irfAaflw, irX
and irttopai, be, imp. fjrsAov, intkifitie [syncop. iire, f* o
(tirAey), «jtA*to, for tir( etc. ; SO ^irt-irA^CKOX and irepj-n(i/i?i'Oj].
Poetic.
u, send, nt'^a, firt^a, w/iro^^a (643 ; 693), ir«'ir
jra^-), maie SO/I, ^ir«wo>'o(673), lirvtCLvBriv, Trcirav$7i
See 043 and 640. n«'p6«, destroy, sack, iripaw ipoon*i (as pass.) Horn.], tvtpaa, [ep. 2
a. firpafloi' (040), m. inpa$6^rj> (as pass.) with inf. v*p8
Poetic.
IKpvTjiii (irfp-po-), se/(, mid. Tf'pi-a/iai: poetic for xnrpitiTKiii. 609. (III.) Il&raw or im'ttw, later itctttu (7™*-), COOfc, lrfyto, Tirf^o, ircVt^/iai (75;
400, 1), infyeriv. See 583. (4.) H(Tdvvv|i.i (ir(Ta-), CZpond, (irtTwraj) t«t«, intTaaa, irtirra/iai, [»•«»■«-
rarr/tai late], ^ir(Ta
HItojicu (tt«t-, in-*),Jly (<-), Ttryjaonai (poet. Tr
ni)v. To tirTanat (rare) belong [2 a. iirriv (poet.)] and ima^-iiv
(799). The forms Tuvir^ixi and iror-hSriy [Dor. ■apac, -afl7jy] belong
tO TTOTCLOpat.
n«J8ojiai (irufl-) : see irw9dvo|icu. (2.)
nr)7vv(ii (ir-ny-, -ray-), fasten, t4{»i ?»i{ai ^"'1?x^'!>' (rare and poet.); 2 a. p. titiyriv, 2 f. p. vayri(T0fiai; 2 p. 7r
ttaT-t'irriKTo ;] it^xdto (Plat.) pr. opt. for ir7i7ci/-i-T0 (734); [ir^Jo-
^ia;, /irv{a'/"/"0 (2. II.) IliaCvu (iria>--)< fatten, ir.ai-ci, iiriava, ireir(aff,uai, [^irni^iji']. Chiefly
poetic and Ionic. (4.) [IlCXvajiai (jriA-ra-). approach, only in pres. and hnpf. 609. Epic]
See irtXdJw. (III.)
)
iai', a. in. itrTaafji^v (trans.); 2 a. m. ^irXifMi*' (798) chiefly epic, with ivi*ki)To, opt. 4>i'v lnivt ln-wKfTo, imp. ^ pt. in-irTJntvos, in Aristoph. 795. (I.)
|
397 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 397
II()iirpT||U (irpa-), bum, nprftru, tirpntra, ir»Vp7|jiai and [WirpijffMai Hdt.], iirp^uBrv; [Ion. f. lrprjcronai, fut. pf. ircwpijjofiai.] 795. Cf. rprjBu,
blow. (I.) Hivoro-Koj (inm-), mayfce wise, [Horn. aor. ArfovwaJ. Poetic. See
itvia. (6.) TUvio (in-, *o), drink, fut. jn'o^iai (viovficu rare); ir*V«Ka, trfVo/iu,
in6Bif, TroBrjao^ai ; 2 a. ?jtiov. (5. 8.) [IIiirCo-Ku) (in-), yz'ue to drink, iriaa, e'V.Vo.] Ionic and poetic. See
•irfvo). (6.) IlnrpcurKW (irrpa-, irpa-), seft, [ep. ir
[Horn. ir«ir«p7)MfK>s], iirpi9i>v [Ion. -ti^oi, -7j8t)i'] ; fut. pf. Trtnpdaofnai.
The Attic uses iiroialiTo^oi and bwfSiw in fut. and aor. (6.)
Iltirrco (ir«T-, tr-o-, C59) for Tri-ircr-m, /aH, f. jre^oC^iai [Ion. ir<(rr'o/
[Dor. <rireTo>', reg.]. [IKtvikii (inr-Kj-), spread, pres. and impf. act. and mid. 609. Epic
and lyric. See irerawvp..] (III.) II£tv
wander, ndy(o^ai, will wander, inKiyx^V-} wandered."] Ionic and
poetic. (4.) UXda-a-a (sec 082 ; G87), form, [irAaVou Ion.], «irAao-a, !r
lirKio8r)v; iitKaaaiimv. (4.)
;>/fl!7, knit, [irA/{a>,] /irAffo, [it/tA
irt'irAti/Jca, ir«'irAfw^ai, ^rXewflijc (later). 674, 641. [Ion. and poet
irXt&w, irAwao/tat, /irAwda, t
/tai, ivK-rix67!" (rare) ; 2 p. WirAjj-ya; 2 a. p. iirX^iyv, ill COmp.
-^TAa77)i' (713) ; 2 f. pass. 5rA.ij7^(n>/uai and -irXaT^croM01 i fu^. pf.
7r«wA^{o>iai ; [ep. 2 a. ir
^ir»l{aViv.] (2. 4.) IIXvvw (irAt/i'-), wash, irvvw, tnkvva, TrtirKv/iai, inKvBrjv ; [fut. m. (as
pass.) ^*-TrAuyoGj
11X»», Ionic and poetic: see irXfw.
(t»'-, irvff:-, ttvv-°), breathe, blow, irvtvaopiat and wvtvffOVfiat, (Vvivira, irfVi-fi/Ka, [epic ircVvupai, 6e Wise, pt. Treirvv/itfos, wise, plpf. Tr^VviJiTo ; late (itvivaBrv, Ilom. an-irvivBriv.'] For epic S/t-irvu« etc., see dva-irv^w and &|i.-irv>c. See itivvo-ku). (2.)
(irW-y-, jtW7-), cftofce, Tn{u> [later irvtgOMai, Dor. T»I{oE>»aO) firWja, irfiri'i'y^ai, iwiyy]v, iryiyyjrrofjLCii. TLoiita, desire, iroO-hau, woBriaopm, liriinea; and 639 (6).
|
398 |
398 APPKNDIX. [1692
IIoWu), labor, irovfow etc., regular. [Ionic voi/taw and iwivta^
(Hippoc.).] 039 (6). {wop-, irpo-), give, allot, stem whence 2 a. i-nopov (poet.), p. p. uYirpu*.
^iai, chiefly impers., WirpwTai, it is fated (with TrtTrpu^tnj, Fate).
See ir«trap€iv. Compare (iiipo^ai. Poetic except in perf. part. Tlp&cro-ai or irpdTTw (irpay-), do, irpd£w, (irpa^a, irix-pax", Trlvpay/iai,
tirpdxdrjv, irpax^^cofxcii ; fut. pf. ir€irpcf£o^ai; 2 p. ir^irpa7a, have
fared {well or i7() ; mid. f. vpi^otiai, a. iirpi^ip.-nv. [Ionic irp^
) PX ;
vp/)io)uu, i-rp-q^dntji'.'] (4.)
(irpio-), buy, stem, with only 2 aor. lirpiiy^v, inflected throughout in
500 ; see synopsis in 504.
Ilptai, saw, irrpiua, irtirplanai, Ivpiadijy. 040. npoio-cro)jLai ,(irpoiic-), leg, once in Archil, (compare vpoiKa, gratis) ;
fut. Only in KaTa-7rpo/Jo^ai (Ar.) [lOU. Kara-TrpoiJOMai]. (4.) IlTdpvD(».ai (jrTap), sneeze; [f. irrapui ;] 2 aor. tirrapov, [irrapSurir],
{iirT&prjv) Trraptts. (II.) ITnfj(r
poet. 2 a. (?7rTa«oi') xaTa7rTa».uiv. [From stem vra-, ep. 2 a.
^araTT^TTjv, dual; 2 pf. pt. irdrr^iis.] Poetic also irTiiirertD. (4.2.) IlTCo-o-tt, pound, [firTicra], eirTiffMai, late {tttIuBt}!'. (4.) IItuo"O"W (7tti;7-), fold, wti/^w, fiTTv£a, tnrvynai, fTTTvxOi)v; 7rru^op^it,
^irTu^dp.7)v. (4.)
IlTta>, s;>!i, [itwu, ttwo/joi, iirrCffOrjv, Hippoc], a. tnrvva. I3vv8avo)iai (iruO-), hear, enquire, fut. Tfuu-oMt" [Dor. irtuiroO/iai], pf.
TrivvffiMii ; 2 a. iTTvOdfiriP [w. Horn. opt. irori/floiro]. (5.) Poetic
also irtv8o(iai (wcvO-, irvff-). (2.)
P.
'PaCvw (pa-, pan-), sprinkle, pavw, tppava, (^ppd»$r]v) fiavfols. [From Stem pa- (cf. palvw), ep. aor. (paaaa, pf. p. (fppatrfiai) (ppa.vra.1
Aeschyl., ep. tppadcnat, plpf. ^ppdSaro, 777, 3.] See 010. Ionic
and poetic. (5. 4.) ['Patoi, strike, pal
Poetic, chiefly epic. 'Pdirrw {'paip-), stitch, pdi/'ui, tppaf/a, tppanfi.a.1; 2 a. p. tppa(pr}v ; a. ill.
ippatf/dfi-rjK (3.) *Pdcr
&pdo-(ru. (4.) •Pfl> {fpty- for /rtp7-, G49),
See iipSw. (4.) 'Ptu (ptu-, i>cf-, fii-), flow, ptiaufiai, fpptvua (rare in Attic), (t-) Ippir/Ka;
2 a. p. ippirjv, /Suijirojxoi. 574. (2.)
|
399 |
1692] CATALOGUE Oi' VKKBS. 399
(p«-), Stem of ftpqKa, etpri/uu, ippi]drjv (Jppi$rjv~), l>r)dr)joiJMt, (lp-f)aop.ai.
See (tirov. 'Ptjyvviu (fPIT-i pay-), break; pitfw, tppvta, [ipprjyp.ai rare, (pfivx^"
rare;] 2 a. p. ippay-qv; payi/i
[pij{0Mai,] (pp-q^d^Tjf. (2. II.) 'Vi-yia (p'17-), s/turWer, [ep. f. p"i7>jcrw,] a. tppiy-qaa, [2 p. fppiTo (as
pres.)] Poetic, cliicrty epic. 055. 'Pi'y< id="iv.i.p9926.1">'i>i shiver, friytiaw, ippiyuoo.; pres. subj. plyi} for p^oT, opt. jilyt^rjv,
inf. ptyCif and piyouv: see 497. 'Pt-irrw (pi0-, pT0-), throw, pi
fppicpOriv, fil
inf. pOjOai for i>i>(c$ai; imjif. o ptrs. (ppvro and pi. p6aro.] Oliielly
poetic. See ipiu.
'Puirdu, be, foul, [epic, ptmou ; Ion. pf. pt. p'fpuTrw/^yos]. 'P
ippuxjOrji*. (II.)
S.
Saivw (ffa»-),/niou on, iior. 'i
part. cretTTjpuis [Dor. cecrdpws.J (4.)
((TaXiri77-), sowul a trumpet, aor. «VaXiri7{a. (4.) 6w, Nrt!.y, pics, rare and poet., aawtrui, (ratiao^at, ^adw(ra, ^craw^ijy ;
2 aor. 3 .sing.
For epic crdys, (rd<^, see
(ffa7-), pack, land, [Ion. crd<7<7w, aor. ecrafa,] p. p. crtao.yp.ai. (4.) Xp€vvv(i.i (afif-), eztinyuish, ff/3/
IlippOC.J; f. in. aft-nao/iai. (II.)
2t($«, re««?-c, aor. p.
^
(Soph.) or loiU-qv; 2 a. m. {aavp.r)v (with fouro, aura, (ru/uvot).]
The Attic poets have [ffcCrai], ffoOj/rai, troCutfe (ind. and imper.),
ffoC, o-owflw. 574. I'oetit. (2.) Xr||i.a£vai (ffTj^ar-), shoie, (7rjfxafC>, (aijtiriva (snniutiines lo-qnava), atoi)-
paffp-ai, Ivt]ii.6.v8r)v, a-qp-avd-fjaofxai ; mid. ui)p.avQvp.a.i, ioi}p.7]v6.p.i]v. (4.) Stjitw (
(An'.stot.), 2 a. p. iadirrjv, i.
|
400 |
400 APPKNDIX. [1692
|ii (a-K(Sa-), scatter, f. trxeSa [
a. (fffxXiji') diro-aicXiji/ai (799), Ar. (4.)
2tc^n-TO(icu (crufir-), w'ew, CKtyofiai, itTKe>j/anriv, taiti/xfiai, fut. pf. ^
(aKrj^d^iijy. (3.) 2k(8vii(ii (
for crK<8avvv(i.i. (III.)
2Koirt'o>, ■«!««), in better Attic writers only pres. and impf. act. and mid. For the othw tenses oKftyo/xai, ioxt^nx^irtv, and toKtunai of aKtinofjiai are. used. See
2kwtttw (o/cwir-), jeer, rt/twij
, ^?'rtW7, aniffco (a), ioitaoa, taircxHa, taiTaa/j.ai, toiroiadrii/, anaff9yffo-ptxi ', airaaofxixiy Jairacrdniiy. 03lJ ; 040.
2-n-tipw (airep-), SO?C, onfpu, (oirnpz, ieiapnai; 2 a. p. tairiprv. (4.) 2tt«v8w, pou)" libalion, oniaw (for o-irn/S-o-u, 79), taituaa, tartwpLai, (see 490, 3) ; o-jroVo^ai, eVir(iira^7ji'.
Ta^-), drop, \_GTaiji,'^ (oia^a, [(orayfxtn, daroixOyv.] (4.) P iTTdfi-, anS-), tread, <
2t«(x« ((ttcix-, "■'■■x-)i !70i [?
(), [],
2 a. p. laTdki}i>; uTaKTiaonat; a. m. ^(TT«iAaf47ji'. 640. (4.) may-)s groan, arivi^a, «
p
Poetic, chiefly epic] (I.) tCI» (
(drop-), («-) tnopH (oTTop«V»), ioTdptoa, \_((noptu9r)v^ iarope
|
401 |
1662] CATALOGUE OF VERBS. 401
Srptyo, turn, erptyu, iarpitya, ttrrpannai, ioTpt
2Tp
fo (
(o-ruffAi-)--), dasft, aor. l
2
2<} id="iv.i.p9982.1">aXXw (o
(see 587), ox*"01, taxa!"xi i
Su'Ju, later o-
T.
(to-), tote, stem with IIoui. iinperat. t§.
[(to^-), seize, stem with Horn. 2 a. pt. Ttraydv.] Cf. Lat. tango.
[Toviw, stretch, ravv
iravuftraiirif. 1'res. pass. (/Ji-form) T<{vuTai. Kpic form of TtCvu.] Tapda*(ra id="iv.i.p9991.1"> (Tapax*), disturb, rapa^w, irdpa^a, Ttrdpaynai, irapax^Tl^
i. in. Tapa£o/ia<; [ep. 2 p. (T
(4.)
i7-), avranye, rafw, tra^a, 7frax
To-oCjuai, {T(ivdjxTu. 040 ; 047. See tovv«> and Tiratvu). (4.) T< id="iv.i.p9995.1">cfj.a(po(jLai (T(«^ap-), judge, infer, f. Teic/iopoC^oi, a. ^Te«/j7jpa>*7ji/.
Act. T«K(iaCpu, rare and poetic, a. iriK^pa. (4.) TcXlw, finish, (rtKf'aa) TfAw, irtXta-a, rertXexa, TtriXm^m, iT((aSnv;
fut. m. (T«A«'o^ai) TtAou^oi, a. m. iTXtad^v. 030; 040. T
COmpOS. iv-TtraXnai, ivtrtiKd^^v. 045. (4.)
[(t«|».-), find, stem with Horn, redupl. 2 a. rirfioy or irtTfiov (534).]
|
402 |
402 APPENDIX. [1692
Tl|ivci> (xtM-1 Tjuf.) [Ion. and Dor. Tajivu, Horn, once rl/iu], cut, f.
tc/iu, Tc'r/it)Ka, Tf'r^ui/iai, 4Tpri8t)i>, t/jijO^ a o/iai; 2 a. (Tffxov, inp.ifi.rip
[poet, and Ion. fra/ioc, ^to/j<i>'] ; fut. in. niioviuu; fut. pf. t
TVpirw, amuse, -rip^w, fT*pi|/a, iT(p
[T«'po-o(j.ai, become dry. 2 a. p. hipa-nv. Chiefly epic. Fut. act. Ttpau iu Tlieoc]
Inayav, having seized: see stem (ray-)-
[TeTCi]p.ai, Horn. perf. am troubled, in dual miriaBov and part. t
rt/u'vos; also rernjiis, troubled.]
[T
fut. rnpaviu, aor. /Tf'rpiji'a], irtTpyvanrii' (073). From stein (rpo-),
aor. Irpnaa, pf. p. T«VpT)Mi". CIO. (5. 4.)
Tc«x"> (T'«X"» Tux-)i prepare, make, Ttifa, (t«u{o, [ep. TfTfux^s as
pass.,] rirvynai [ep. T«T«i/x"Tai, ^TtxeuxoTo], [irvxQriv Horn., Irtu-X$-nv Hippoc, f. pf. T«Tfu{0Mot Horn.]; f. m. Tci'la^ai, [ep. a. »t(w (afitiv, 2 a. (tuk-) TfruKf?^, t«ti«<$m id="iv.i.p10015.1">j>'0 Poetic. (2.) TiJKa) (tijk-), melt, [Dor. t4ku], ttj{o>, tT>){a, i-rrtx^7!" (rare); 2 a. p.
tTOKTjx; 2 p. TfVijxa, am melted. (2.)
Tce^jii (tfe-)i P«'/ sec synopsis and inflection in 504, 500, and 500. (I.)
TCktu (Tf«-), for Ti-TfK-w (052, 1 a), begot, bring forth, rt^o/im, poet.
also t*{w, [rarely TeKoCfiai],
TiXXw (tia'-)> pJuft, tiX<5, *V;Aa, -TtTiXnai, M&iv. Chiefly poetic. (4.) Tivu (rt-), Horn, tihu, pa.V, tTo-w, eWo-a, TtViita, TtVin-^ai, irl<;6i)v.
Mid. tiVo^oi [ep. Tii/i/^iai], riffo^Qi, frltia/jTjf. The fut. and aor. are
more correctly written T6f
appear in our editions. See ri.it). (5.)
[TVraCvw (TiTav), stretch, aor. (Wttjto) tit^i-os. Epic for t«iW] (4.) [Tirpaw, tore, late present.] See TiTpaCvw. Ti.TpwirK(O (rpo-), wound, jpt&aw, frpuira, Ttrpia/nai, irpu>6rjv, rpuOrjffo^iaL',
[fut. ra. rpuaonai Horn.] [Karely epic rpcuw.] (6.) TCw, honor, [Horn. fut. ■Aau, aor. fnVa, p. p. TtTi^ai.] After Homer
chiefly in pres. and impf. Attic rlau, trioa, etc., belong to -riva
(except irpo-rtotis, S. An. 22). See tCvu. (to-, sync, for toAo-), endure, iXriaonai, ■rtTXrjKa, 2 aor. frXijv (see
790). [Epic ^t-forms of 2 pf. Tf'rAajuo', TnKai-nv, TirAad, TtrKci-
p
|
403 |
1002] CATALOGUE OK VERBS. 403
n (tm17-, riiay-), cut, poet, for rlpva; rfi^a (rare), «T,ut;{a,
2 a. (Tua-yov, hixayr)v (rfiiyiv for irnaynaav).] (2.) Topc'u (rop-), pierce, [pres. only in op. ayTi-ToptwTa]; [op. fut. ropfiou'],
T«Topr|
TtTpannm, irp((pSriii [Inn. frpi
2 a. [tTpairov epic and lyric], trpdiriiy, iTpan6w. Tliis verb has all
the six aorists (714). 043; CM. Tpc'<| id="iv.i.p10037.1">u (rptcp- for 6piq>-, 05, G), nourish, 0/x'^co, fff^tij/a, TtVp-xpa, rtdpan-
juai w. inf. T(8paip$ai, (6pf'q>6r)w w. inf. dptpBrjyai (raru) ; 2 a. p. ^rpa-
^1" i ['"P- 2 a. tTpcupov as pass.]; f. m. 8ptyt>nai, a. ui. IBpityiw.
6«; 040.
pe'xu (rp«x- f°r flf«X-, ''5) 'r' I 8paj»-), '""") ^- 5paMo;;Mal (-Optional only
hi comedy), f8pf{a (rare), 5<8pa/jiia, («■) StSpdn-nn'"; [- p. 5*J/)om«
(poet.)], 2 a, Upanov. (8.)
(trcmbh-), aor.
tTpicpBriv ; 2 a. p. JTplB-nv, 2 fut. p. TpiByaonai; fut. pf. Tirpi^o^ai;
f. m. Tpii^o^uai, a. in. ^rpi^nx^v. Tpi^« (tp,"7-), HijUcak, 2 p. -rirplya as present [w. ep. part. TtTp^wTas].
Ionic and pootie. (4.) Tpvx«, exhaust, fut. [cj). rpufw] Tp0x^<"- id="iv.i.p10047.1"> (TP<'X°~' O.VJ), a. Irp&xw-,
p. part. T«Tpu^w^(Vos, [a. p.
7ov. (2.) TV/xavw (Ttux-, twxOi '"') happen, T*u{o^ai, («■) [ep. ^Ti'^Wf,] pf.
TfTiixito, 2 pf. TeVtuxa J 2 a. Jtuxok. (5. 2.) Tvirrw (tuit-), strike, (e-) Tv-nT-qam, (jirT^aa. (Aristot.), 2 a. p. trinity,
fut. p. TUKT-haofiai or Tvnricronai. [Ionic and lyric a. tru^a, p.]).
Tt'ru^ai, 2 a. itutiov ; ctTro-Tyil'aJi'rai (Hdt.).] 058, 3. (3.) Ti<( id="iv.i.p10052.1">w (tuiJ)- or riiip-, for 9utp-), raise smoke, smukc, rc'du/t/tai, 2 a. p. trv
Y.
'Yir«rxvio(iai, Ion. and poet. vr-irf
'YcJkUvw (uifai'-), MCU«e, iKpauw, Stpitvu, S
"Y
*.
4>acivu {
|
404 |
404 APPENDIX. [1692
$a(v«> {(pay-), show, f. (pavu [pavta], a. tpyva, ir(
♦curKu (ipa-), sat/, only pres. and iinpf. See 4>*r|H-c- (6)
$<(So|iai (pad-, (pt$-), spare, Qtloonau iftiaapriv, [Horn. 2 a. m. vnpi-h6p.fiv, f. Trftpi^T}(ro^tai.] (2.)
(4>tv-,
♦fpu (>J)e/j-, of-, («<•, ^i id="iv.i.p10077.1">e>K- for ^-(wi-), iear, f. ofcrw, a. ^«v<(o, 2 p. ivT)voxa, iniiftytiai, a. p. >j>'«'x^TI>' I ^ P- ^fx^vao^ai and oiaB-naaij.a.1 ; 2 a. Jji/cyicoi/; f. in. oTcro^ai (sometimes as pass.) ; a. m. rin(yndij.riv, 2 a. m. imper. dxyKov (So.). 071. [Ion. $w«a and -a^Tji', ^eixoi', /v^vfiVjuai, ^mix*'!" ; Hilt. aor. inf. av-o?oai (or oj-^ctki) ; Horn. aor. imper. olot for o/W (777, 8), pres. imper.
(*>'"■)-, ^>io-)i y«P, pfu{°,uoi and ^>eu{oDMai (000), 2 p. Ttiipivya (042), 2 a. (
<£8av» (tpOa-), anticipate,
4>8iv [epic also ^e(w], waste, decay,
4>iMid ($iA-), to»c, ^lArfo-oi, etc., regular. [Kp. a. m. i
4>Xttw, bruise, [fut.
<&pdfv«|u (i^pa^-), fence, mid.
ippaS-), /eZ/, tppdoca, t(fipa(Ta, WitppaKa, iti(pponifxai [ep. part. ir«
|
405 |
1692] CATALOGUE OF VERHS. 405
u (4.)
or fyf>irT(j>.(
£
4>vpdu, mix, is regular,
♦vio (?>u-)i wil'1 " in Homer and rarely in Attic, produce,
X.
Xajw (x«5')> /o''c" iacfc, j/i«W, (pres. only in ora-xofw), [f. xo
Xai'p« (x»p-)> rejoice, (<-) x^pv"" (058, 3), xtxapyxa, «^^ai and Kf'xapiiai, 2 a. p. ^xtt'pi"i [epic a. m. xvp^to, 2 a. m. Kixapifxrjy; 2 p.
pt. Kcxapqcis ; fut. pf. Kixzprjira, K«xaP'/'ff"M'"' (70ft).] (4.)
XaXdu, Zoosen, [xaA.d
610. [XttvSAvu (x"8-> x«"5-)i hold, 2 a. fxaoov ; fut. x<'VoMai C^)) 2 pf.
KtXavSa. (040).] Poetic (chiefly epic) and Ionic. (5.) Xd
(044), 2 a.
2 a. (x*"0" (ran-) ; a. m. only in x
Ktx*< id="iv.i.p10134.1">nfvus. (4.) X
[cp. <x«"«f"i'']. [2 a. m. /x.Vii- («00, 1).] 574. (2.)
), stein of 2 pf. part. *
as-> ai]d inf. K#x*^5*ic] Xdw, heap up, x^
^u (xpai^M-)! otsrl, /ie?p, late in present; [Horn. xf>ai< ^XP1^tiri
Xpdoficu, use, xPV^o^at, ^xPT)°"BM17J'i "'XP7?^01* ^XPTl
|
406 |
406 A1TENMX. [1692
Xpdw, give oracles, (Attic XPV*1 XP!h etc., 490); ^p^aoi, expi»«>
Hilt.], ixpfi"^i"- Mid. consult an oracle, [xpv<" id="iv.i.p10142.1">n<",
For xpys and xp.S = xpp'f"1 a"d xpv("> 8ec XPT]SU-(iinpci-s.), probably orig. a noun meaning need (ef. xf<ah wl1^1 iari understood, there is need, (one) ought, must, subj. x/>fi> opt. xpei>), inf. xci)"<t'i (poet- xpvv) > imptrf. xp'i>' (pi'ob. = xph h) or 'li J£ suffires, inf. airoxp^'', iniperf. ott«'x/"J, [Ion. pai', antxpa ;] oiroxP')i'<'t anfXPWf-
(587), Ion. xPiUwi «'««/, «st, xpp'°'w [Ion. xpi^^li 'XP!"10!
[Ion. lxpri«a. Xpns and xpp (as if from xp^i oceasioually have
the meaning of xpvC"^ XPvC"- (*•) Xp(w, nnoi'iiJ, sting, xp'ffu> «XP'*°'ai KfXP'P-a' or lt«XP"r>'<*'!
[xp1'"0^ Horn.], 4xP'o&w-Xp
dw,?-m6, with i) for a in contracted forms (490), ff;, i^r, ?^ij, etc.; generally in composition.
Sw, deceive, i^eutrw, ttptuca, tyevapai, t^fvoOrjv, i|/«u
2 a. p. tyOxw or (generally later) i^iy-riv (stem i^u-y-).
n.
w*-)> push, impf. gen. itLBovv (537, 1) ; SJao) [poet. a>9^aio], 4Wr.
[Ion. Jjcro], twcTyuai [Ion. Sa^iai], iuaOriv ; uiffffriirojuai; f. in. &
a. m. 4uto6.txt)v [Ion. uxrd/i^f]. 054.
ftvy, imp. ioivoviirii' (537, 1) or Sivoinitv, i>viieoij.cu, iibvonai, . Classic writers use iirptdfntv (504-000) for later wy
|
407 |
INDEXES.
|
408 |
N. B. — In these Indexes the references are made to the Sections of the Grammar, except occasionally to pages 3-0 of the Introduction. The verbs which are found in the Catalogue, and the Irregular Nouns of § 291, are generally not included in the Greek Index, except when some special form is mentioned in the text of the Grammar.
|
409 |
GREEK INDEX.
A 1; open vowel 5, 0; pronunciation of 281; in contraction D8; becomes jj in temp.augment.515; o changed to ij at end of vowel verb stems 030; added to verb stems (like c) 050; changed to ■n in 2d porf. 044 ; e changed to d in liquid steins 045, 040 ; Acnl. and Dor. o for ij 147 ; as suffix 832, 849".
o- or av- privative 8751; copulative 877.
ds compared 301.
7!>4' ; w. gcu. 1102.
d-yavaKTiu> w. dat. 1159, 1100; w. el 1423; w. panic. 1580.
d-yairdw w. dat. 1159, 1100; w. ei 1423; w. panic. 1580.
dyy
a-yt aud a-y«T« v. subj. and imperat. 1345.
5.^€v(ttos etc. w. gen. 1141 (1102).
a-ytipws, declension of 300.
d-yvws, adj. of one ending .343.
&YW, auym. of tfyayoy M5; &yu»-, with 1&05.
d'yu>vC£co*8ai d^wva 1051.
-d8i]v, adv. ending 800-.
dSiK^w, fut. mid. as pass. 1248.
dSvvard icrnv etc. 899-.
dSup
d
a*r6s, epiceue noun 158.
; -dj», verbs in 8015, 862; fut. of I 60S2.
] dijSwv, decl. of 248. ' , -ii
510.
d6p6os, decl. of 2982. "A6us, accus. of Htl>. at, diphthong 7; augmented 518;
sometimes elided iu poetry 51 ;
short in accentuation (but not in
opt.) 113.
at, Homeric for ei 1381. Al'as, voc. of 22!1. atSws, decl. of 2--JK, 20i). al!8« or at y^p, llmncric for etfft
etc. 1.107.
-aCvu, denom. vorbs in 801', 802. -aios (a-ios), adj. in 850, 829. atpw 594 ; aor. 071 ; pf. and plpf.
mid. 4!)l) -ois, -aura, -oi
(Acol.) 78:!.
-ais, -cu
15S2, 1588.
os compared 307, 302.
w. jKirlic. 1580; w.
infin. 15KJ. -aiTcpos, -aiTaTOS, coinp. and sup.
in 352.
alWu w. two accus. 1009. al-rios w. gen. 1140. aCw, diov 51C. aKovw, 2 perf. 020, 090 ; w. ace.
and gen. 1103 ; plpf. 533 ; e5 or
Ka/cws &kovu> 1241.
409
|
410 |
410
GREEK INDEX.
dicpodo|iai 638; w. gen. 1102.
aKpos w. article 978.
axuv (d^xwy) 333 ; without 6j/ 1071.
dXtC+u 572, 0422.
6Xii
dXr]8Tis declined 313 ; ai>0e{, indeed! 314.
•oXCo-Kopiai 659 ; 2 aor. 779.
dXirfjpios w. gen. 11442.
dXXd in apodosis 1422.
dXXdacrw, pf. and plpf. mid. inflected 487-, 4893.
dXXrgXov dccliued 404.
&XX6292i '
&XXo|i
aXXos, decl. of 41!); w. art. 900.
oXXo
aXXo ti f[; or aXXo tl; 1004.
aXo-yos declined 300.
dXvo-Kw, formation of 017.
oXs declined 225.
dXiitrriJ, epicene noun 158; voc.2101.
&|ia w. dat. 1170; w. paitic. 1572;
a(ia ia 958. apdp-roiv, opt. 730. apPpoTOS (pop) 00. dpi
398.
d^i^Ttup 310. d>6s and a.y.6% for ^/j^Ttpos for
djivvti) 590 ; w. ace. and dat.
(Horn.) 1108 ; dpii;TO«
two ace. 1060. d(i<|H
gen. and dat. 1128, 1175. dp4>OT{pu8cv w. gen. 1148. o.fi$u and d(i(}i6T€pos 379; w. art.
976.
ov (epic W), adv. 1299-1310: gee Contents. Two uses 1299 ; with secondary tenses of indie. 1304, 1330, 1330, 1387, 1397, 1433 ; w. optative 1300, 1327, 1408, 140!), 1430, never w. fut. out. LSO7 ; w. fut. indie. (Hom./l303; w. sul)j. used as fut. (Horn.) l;J00a, 1350; w. uifin. and panic. 1308, 1494. In conditions w. subj. 12992, 1305, 1382, 1387, v:,W, 1403 ; dropjicd when subj. becomes opt. 1497'2. In final clauses w. oil, oirws, and 6
av (5) for iiv {d iv) 1299-, 1382.
&v for ivd (Horn.) O-".
ov- privative: see a- privative.
aV (a tv), by crasis 44, 14282.
-av for -duv in gen. plur. 188^.
dvd w. dat. and ace. 1203.
ava, up! lKi-, 1224.
ava, ])OCt. voc. of ili-af 291.
dva7K^ v. infin. 1521; v. iorl om. 8911.
dvaXitrKu and avaXooi, augment of 510, 520 (end).
avaXxis, adj. of one ending 343.
dva(iCi).VT|
dvdjios w. gen. 1135.
dvdo-o-w w. gen. 1109; w. dat. (Horn.) 1164.
avSdvw, augment of (Hom.) 538.
iiZ 8602
avtu w. gen. 1220.
dWx«i augment of 544 ; w. partic. 1580.
|
411 |
GliEEK INDEX.
411
4v
dat. pi. 270. afrip 44. avflpw-n-os declined 192. ivolyw, augment of 538; 2 pf.
ivtyya and (Wy^o 693. avo(ioio>s w. dat. 1175. -avos, nouns in 840. ovtC w. gen. 1204 ; &v6' we, where-
fbre 1204.
avTiirou'o)iai w. gen. 1128. dvvcras, aor. part., hastily 1564. avu, dvuTcpos, dvciTaTOs 303. &£ios declined 299. i^ot and d|«5w
w. gen. 1135. airais, adj. of one ending 343 ; w.
gen. 1141.
dirdTwp, decl. of 316. aimpos w. gen. 1141. diri(TT€« w. dat. 1160. dti-Xoos, dirXoCs declined 310 ; irreg.
contr. 391. dird w. gen. 1205 ; for (v w. dat.
12251.
diroSt'xopiai w. gen. 1103. diro8C8op.i and a-rroSi&ojicu 1246. d-n-oXavw w. gen. 1007'A diroX«£iro|iOi w. gen. 1117. airoXis, dccl. of 310. dir<5XXv|u, augui. of plpf. 533. 'AiriXXwv, accus. of 217 ; voc. of
122'', 221*.
diroXoY&>neu, augment 543. dir-ocrT«p<« w. two accus. 1069 ; w.
ace. and gen. 1118. dirocr4>dXo|iai w. gen. 1099. diro^Kvyw w. gen. 1121. iirTw and dirTO(j.ai 1246. ap (Horn, for 4pa) 53. apa, apa oi, and dp a (rf|, interrog.
1003. dpapio-Ku, 613; Att. redupl. 531,
615, 052. dp-yvpeos, ApyupoOs, declined 310 ;
irreg. contr. 30'; accent 811. dp«twv, compar. of iyad&s 361.
, dpdpvia 774. dpi-, intensive prefix 876. -opiov, dimin. in 844. dpcri)v or ippi)v 327. dpxV, at first, adv. ace. 1060. opx», opxo(iai, w. partic. 1680;
w. infiu. 1581 ; ipxiiuvot, at
first 1564. dpuyds 31.
-ds, -ds, case-endings of ace. pi. 167. -aou and ijori, locat. and dat. 290.
dcriKs w. fiupfo 383'.
ao-a-a or otto 4162.
do-o-a or &TTa 425, 426.
do-TT|p, declension of 276.
d
ao-Tu, declined 250, 253; gen. pi. of 253.
-aTai, -uto (for -crai, -rro) in 3 pers. plur. 7773, 701, (Hdt.) 787*.
cm w. partic. 1575.
d«p w. gen. 1220.
iiT«pos 46.
fi.Ti(ios and dTiiidJu w. gen. 1135.
-cito (for -no) : see -aTai.
drpairds, fem. 194.
otto and Stto: see ao-act and do-o-a.
olv, diphthong 7.
avaCvw, augment of 519.
oiTdp in apodosis 1422.
aiTdpKi)s, oirapKcs, accent 122C, 314.
avTt'iov for avricv (Hdt.) 397.
o.
auToO, etc., for tauToO 401.
a.$a.iplu w. acc. and gen. 1118.
|
412 |
412
GREEK INDEX.
, augment of 544; opt. forms
8102.
a
1580 ; dx^o/i^v ripi thai 1584. axpi, as prepos. w. gen. 1220; as
conj. 1408. -du, deuora. verbs in 8011; desid-
eratives iu 808; contract forms
inflected 492 ; dialectic forms
784. -
B, middle mute 21, labial 16, 22, and sonant 24 ; euph. changes: see Labials ; Inserted between p. and or p 60 ; changed to
-|3d, imperat. (in comp.) 765s.
PaCvw, formation of, 004, 010; 2 aor. of m-iorm 799; 2 pf. of /u-form 804 ; /3a(mi> tASo 1052.
pdKXos (kX) 08'.
pdXXw 693; perf. opt. 734.
PacrtXeia 175', 841 ; QaaiUta 836.
Pao-tXtv?, declined 2C3, 264 ; compared 364 ; used without article, 957.
Pa
P
P&.T«pos, pAraros, and P«Xt(wv, P
P>.pdt;
s, fern. 194. P)4i 297,
Piou, 2d aor. of /il-form, 799. p-, how reduplicated 524*. pXaitrw, aor. pass. 714. PX(tt« (ijxXit.), by syncope 66. Perfj 176.
Poplas, Poppas declined 186. poiXojioi, augment of 517; /3oiiXct
in indie, (never (SouXjj) 626; /Sov-olni" *» and 4/3ov6pi)i> i.v 1327, 1339 : see
PoOs, declined 268; formation of 209; Horn, forms of 271; compounds of 872; stem in compos. 872.
Pp£ras, declension of 236.
pporis (nop-) by syncope 66'.
Pvvia (fcv-vt-) 607.
T, middle mute 21, palatal 16, 22, and sonant 24 ; nasal (w. sound of v) before «•, 7, x< or { 17; euph. changes: see l'alatals. w and -ya)iov)i.ai 1240.
i, declension of 2742. •yyn changed to 7m 77. ■yfyova as pres. 1263. y(ka.
grasped 8002: see also
ylpcis declined 228.
■ytvw w. acc. and gen. 1106; yev-
Ojuai w. gen. 1102.
), declension of 185; omitted
after article 953.
013; 2 aor. of ju-form
709. ■yC-yas declined 225.
•yvofiai 536, 652'; 2 perf. of iu-
form 804; copul. vb. 908; w.
gen. 11302; w. poss. dat. 1173.
•yvwo-Kw 614; redupl. in pres.
536, 6521;
of /ii-form 799; inflect, of iyvav
8033.
-, how reduplicated 624a.
vKvi declined 320.
-, how reduplicated 624*. •yvdSos, fern. 194.
|
413 |
GREEK INDEX.
413
^vwpCJo, augment of 5242.
■ypois, deciined 208; formation of
269; Horn, forms of 271. •ypdcfiw and -ypd
' accus. 1051, 1125.
ijvs, Horn, for ypaOi 271. w. gen. 1140.
A, middle mute 21, lingual 10, 22,
and sonant. 24; euph. changes:
see Linguals ; inserted in avSpbr
(dnip) 67 ; before -arai aud -aro
(in Horn.) 777^. 8a-, intens. prefix 876. 8aii)p, VOC. Saep 12'2d.
(5a
apodosis 1422.
-8«, local ending 293; enclit. 141*. 8e8w'vai 767, 804. SlSoixa 685.
Sfi, impers.: see 8i'«, want. SuSeypai, St(SoiKa, and 8
redui>l. of (Horn.) 522"; St&ia
804. SiCkvuhi, synopsis 504, 505, 509 ;
inflection of ^'-forms 500. Syut.
w. partic. 1588 ; partic. $ci«nis
declined 335. 8«iva, pron., declined 420; always
w. art. 047. 8«iv
1114.
8
1055-.
8co-n
8t
S^arat (Horn.) as perf. 550.
8
ace. and dat. (Horn.) 1169. I 6c'w, bind, contraction of 4952. i 8t'», waul, contraction of 4052 • in Hdt. 785'. Impers. 8ct 808; w. gen. and Uat. (rarely ace.) 1115, 1161; iroXXoC Stf, &[yoi, 5«i 1116; 6lyov for iSX^ou but, almost 11161; SU» (ace. abs.) 1500 ; Iv6s etc. w. itovTts 382$; «5ei in apod, without 4* 1400. See Sc'ofiai.
8-nXoi without subject 8973.
8rjX6s «lju w. partic. 1589.
8r]X6«, inflect, of contract forms 492; synopsis of 494 ; infin. 39s, 761 ; pres. partic. 8tiwp declined 340.
AnjMJT>)p, declined 2772, 278; accent of voc. 122d.
Aii(iocr8«'vT)s, ace. of 230 ; voc. of 122^.
■trv or -dSt|v, adverbs in 860.
-Si)s, patronym. iu 846.
Sid w. gen. aud ace. 1200.
Siairdu, augm. 543. w, augm. 543. |, pf. 522« ; w. dat. 1170. « w. partic. 1587.
8id<| id="iv.i.p10390.1">opos w. gen. 1117.
8i8d(TK», formation of 617 ; w two accus. 1069; causative in mid 1245.
8i8pdo-Ku> 613; 2 aor. of /u-form,
«po>-70y, 801. 8iSu|ii, synopsis 504, 509 ; infl. of
/u-forms 500; redupl. in pres.
651, 7942; imperf. 030; cona-
tive use of 1255; aor. in Ka
070, 8022; Sovvai 707; iniper.
SiSwSi, Sldoi 790. 8(Kaios, person, constr. w infin
1527.
|
414 |
414
GREEK INDEX.
v, adverbial accus. 1060. 8iopv
gen. 1154. 8(x
ypacp-qv 1051. 8(i»s, accent of gen. dual and plur.
128.
8ouo, 80101 (Horn.) 377. 8ok
898 (1522*) ; *«ofc or SMoktcu in
decrees etc. 1540; (us) 4pol Sokciv
1534.
8ok
-8dv (-Sd) or -7j5<5i/, adverbs in 860. 8ov(ilu and SovXou 807. Spacmw, desiderative verb 808. Spdoi. Spdorw 635, 041. 8pocros, fern. 194.
8«va|iai, 7941; augm. of 517 ; accent, of subj. and opt. 729, 742 ;
Sivf and (Siva 632. 8vo declined 375; indeclinable
376 ; w. pluj-. nouu 922. Sucr-, inseparable prefix 8752;
augm. of vbs. comp. with 545. Suo-apco-Ttw, augment of 5451. 8iw 570, 799 : see «8vv. 8«pov decliued 192.
E, open short vowel 5, 6 ; name of 4 ; pronunciation of 28' ; in contraction 38 ; as syll. augm. 611, 513; before a vowel 637; becomes y in temp. augm. 51o ; length, to i) at end of vowel verb stems 635 ; length, to ei, when cons, are dropped bof.
788^; changed to a in Hq. stems 045 ; cb. to o in 2 pf. 643, also in uouns 831 ;« added to stem, in pres. 654, in other tenses 057, 658; dropped by syncope 05,273; dropped in «o (Hdt.) and <«u and «o (Horn.) 786-; thematic vowel 501 in Horn. subj. 780'.
K, pron. 389 ; use in Attic 987, 988.
-tat, for erroi ill verbal endings, contr. to y or «i 393, 565«, 024, 7772: see -to.
lav for cl &y 1299-, 1382.
iauToO declined 401 ; synt. 993.
4-y-yvs, adv. w. gen. 1149; w. dat. 1170.
iydpa 597 ; pf. and plpf. mid. 490'; aor. m. 077. Att. redupl. 532.
«-yX«^us* dec). °f 201.
iy declined 389, Horn, and Hdt. 393 ; generally omitted 890.
«8ti etc. without a* in apod. 1400.
i'Siv (of Svu) 505, 799; synopsis 504 ; inflected 500 ; Horn. opt. 744.
-a in dual of nouns in is, us 252.
U for ?, Horn. pron. 393'.
*8cv for ot 393".
49C£w, pf. and plpf. mid. 4908.
«i, diphthong 7 ; genuine aud spurious ei 8 ; pronunc. of 282 (sec Preface); augment of 519; as augm. or redupl. (for a) 537.
-ei for -
tt, 2/1381, 1423; wActAer 1005,1606, 1491; in wishes, Oz/1508.
-eid, nouns in, denoting action 836. Nouns in nfi 841.
■
tlicaOu,
|
415 |
GREEK INDEX.
415
(Horn.) 508. 4kt
tlVaprai, augai. of 522. Uitv «tvai 1535.
«t(i( 029; inflection of 806 ; dialcc- U6v declined 333.
tic forms of 807 ; as copula 891; i IXwro-av 361s.
w. pred. noin. 907 ; w. poss. or!
part, gen. 1094; w. poss. dat.] 6052 (seeJXow); Att. redupl. 529;
1173 ; Htm? of, ioTiv ov, iVn» 5 sense 1232.
or oVws- 1029, w. opt. without ] iXa^-pVSXos 872.
if 1333; (Kaif fi»ai, to vuf thai, I iXa-^aa. (Horn.), Adx«rroj 361s.
Kara touto ehat, 1535 ; accent iXiy-^o, pf. and plpf. inflected 487*,
(enclitic) 1413, 1445; accent of 489J, 4902, 532.
tff, 6i/to5 129. iiXXaxov, etc. (Horn.) for eXaxov
«I(it, inflection of 808; dial, forms
of 809 ; pres. as fut. 1257. ]
tlo for ov 393'.
■tlov, nouus of place, in 8431. ttos, Horn, for fws 1403. tJ-n-a, fii'St aorist 671.
*Ittov w. ori or oJs 1523 ; ws (£71*05)
(twuv 1534. cl'pY", etc. w. gen. 1117 ; w. infin.
or infin. w. toC and ^i) (5 forms)
1549, 1551.
fl'pTjKa, augment of 522. -«is, -«crtra, -cv, adj. in 854; decl. [J, 331 ; compar. 355.
514.
'EXXrivKrTt 8G03. i6u>, Horn. fut. of Aam 784-. {XirCJu etc., w. fut. infin. or pres.
and aor. 1280. *XirCs declined 225, 2091; accus.
sing. 214». Ijiavroi declined 401 ; syntax of
093.
{(itwvTov (Hdt.) 403, 993. t(iCv (Dor. for ^oQ 398.
or <|i|i.cvcu, i'fiiv or Jfuvai, Horn, iniin. for (hat. 807'.
-«is in ace. pi. of 3d ded. (for tas) i^6s 400, 998.
208'1; late in nouus in (ui 266. «ts w. accus. 1207 ; for iv w. dat.
12251. els, (i(a, 'iv declined 375
pounds of 378. tl'o-w, adv. w. gen. 1148.
and t|Lir(irpt))u 795. iy-rrpoo-8
iKaTtpos, etc. w. article 970.
4™tvo$ 409, 411, 1004 ; iKciwl 412.
-«v for •naa.v (aor. p.) 777°. com- ] tv w. dat. 1208 ; as adv. 1222-; w.
dat. for ds w. ace. 12252; in
expr. of time 1193 ; euphon. ch.
before liquid 782, but not before
p or a 81.
tvav-rCos w. gen. ] 14C>; w. dat. 1174. «'v8«t|s w. gen. 1140. Kv«Ka w. gen. 1220. {vivi-nov and ■f|vfirairoi' 535.
i'vtcrri, impei"s. 898. I Ma, lve«v 430, 438. ivia&t 436.
ra, tv8*iT«v (Ion.) 4S92. ivQtv Kal ivttv 1226. tvi for rK(m 1224.
|
416 |
416
GREEK INDEX.
?v«h and «vid« 1029. »vo)^os w. geu. 1 HO.
cvt<5s w. gen. 1149.
«'{ or tK, form 63; k in (k unchanged in compos. 72; e in /k long before liquid 102 ; proclitic 137; accented 1382; w. geu. 1209 ; for iv w. dat. 12251.
^aC4>vT|5 w. panic. 1572.
i$urn, impers. 898 ; w. dat. 1161 ; t(ijv in apod, without iv 1400.
t£6v, ace. abs. 15(39.
t£w w. gen. 1148.
-«o for -fo-o 565°, 7772.
*o for .5 393".
Jot for or 393i.
foiKa (t be-) 5372, 573. pipf< 528 . Mi-forms 804 ; w. dat. 1175.
-«os, adj. of material iu 852.
Us for 8r (poss.) 407.
iirov and tircav (tircl iv) 14282.
«'ir«f and JimSij 1428, 1505; w. infin. in or. obi. 1524.
♦ irciSav aud iirfv 12992, 14282.
tn-if|PoXos w. geu. 1140.
iirl w. gen. dat. and accus. 1210 ; as adverb 12221.
Jiri ioTiir«TTL 1102, 1224.
«m6v(W« w- §en- 1102.
4iriKoipo-ios w. geu. 1140.
4iriAav8dvo|«u w. gen. 1102.
firiHiX^js w. gen. 1140.
iTti
lin.Ti(ia» w. ace. and dat. 1163.
ipto-cra, stem Iptr- 582.
p
if>l<* w. dat. 1175, 1177. {pis, accus. of 214s.
, 2 pf. of jtr/yvvpn 689. s, 'Epjiiis, declined 184. 170. jpvepicuo 8082.
ip
ifnoT&u w. two accus. 1069.
«
is w. accus. 1207 : see its-
Itriiu 021 ; future 607.
-«ri in dat. plur. (Horn.) 286s.
JirtriCovTO (Horn.) 514.
-wo-i in dat. plur. (Horn.) 2862.
i
io"cf«v 3()12.
ia-rf, until 1403.
■io-Tipos, -itrTaros 353, 354.
lo-rt w. ending ti 5561; accented (cm 1445; takes v movable 57.
Jotiv at (ol, 5, Ihrus) 905, 1029; lany Hcrru etc. with opt. without iv 1333.
4o~riis (for farads), i«rT»
?
e
irrt^v for MSiiv 953.
iirtpos 429 ; w. geu. 1154: see &t<-pos.
i,
v, diphthong 7.
I ev contr. to f (through if) 902-8. I €w, augm. of verbs compounded w. 6451 ; w. ttoUw, irdffxu, cUouw, etc., 1074, 1241 ; w. -rpitrau 1075; w. *x<" and geu. 1092.
iv, pron. for ov 3931.
t«8aC(i.
iSiXns 310; accus. 214s.
«i«p-y«T<«, augtn. 6451.
|
417 |
GREEK INDEX.
417
«v
Horn, forms of 264; original
forms of 205; contracted forms
of 207.
s, contr. of 315. S) dec!, of 316. -«vu, denom. vbs. in 8C14, 803. tyopdo w. partic. 1585. ty' w or <<£' u?Tt w. infin. and fut.
ind. 14G0. •Xpfjv or XP'I" m apod, without &v
1400. 'iu>, for fffx-ui 95*; w. partic. for
perf. 1262 ; «x°/«ii 1240, w. gen.
1099; w. adv. and part. gen.
1092; (x
867; inflection of contract forms
402.
■iw for -dw invbs. (Hdt.) 7844. -lw in fut. of liquid stems 003. -«u> and -
until 1-MJ3-MR7, expr. purpose
1407, in indir. disc. 15023.
Z, double cons. 18; origin of 18, 283; probable pronunciation of 283 ; makes position 991; < for redupl. before 523.
ta-, intens. prefix 876.
Jo«, contr. form of 496.
-J«, adv. in 203.
-j>, verbs in 584 ; fut. of vbs. in ofu and ifu 665.
H, open long vowel 5, 6; orig.
aspirate 13 ; in Ion. for Dor. a
147 ; d and c length, to -n 29, 515,
035; as thematic vowel in subj.
56P; fern, nouns and adj. in
832, 849.
tj, improper diphthong 7. ■tj for e
393, 505°, 624. See -«.
1005, 1606 ; than 1155, om. 1150. f[, interrogative 1603, 1000. I •q^f'op.ai w. gen. 1109; w. dat. I (Horn.) 1104. »J8o(ioi w. cogn. accus. 1001. T)So^v<{} trol ia~nv, etc. 15ol. r)Svs compared 357 ; ijStuv declined
358.
t(, t)«, iuterrog. (Horn.) 100G. ■q€£8t)s etc. (o(<5a) 8212. -rjiis, adj. in, contracted iu Horn.
332.
T)KurTa (superl.) 3012. ■qKio as perf. 1250. t)X(kos 429. Vjnoi 629; inflection of 814 ; dial.
forms of 817. t)|ios or ii|«is 390. -ilfKvos for -f^em in part. (Horn.)
702.
T||i*r»pos 406, 998 ; w. airHv 1003. ■fim-, insepar. particle 875', 86. TjfiCv, "fow 396. tjv for Hv (d 4v) 1382. t|v£k
211. rjimpos, fem. 1942.
i}pws declined 243, 244.
|
418 |
418
GREEK INDEX.
-i)s, adj. iu 8493, 881; inflection of
6p(£, Tpix< id="iv.i.p10590.1">s, aspirates in 955; de-
312. clensiou of 225.
(for yet), i" nom. pi. of nouns i Spvnrru (rpxxp-) 95s. in -dt (older Attic) 200. j 8vydrT]p declined 274 ; Horn, forms
188*.
r
0, rough mute 21 ; lingual 10, 22 ;
and surd 24 ; euph. changes, see
Linguals.
-8a, ending (see -
8vpd);t 293. 6vpdo-i 290.
I, close vowel 5, 6; rarely contr. w. foil, vowel 401; length. t
a?w w. gen. 1102, 1120; 0av-1 t5«iv, accent of 750. 762. fu el 1423 ; Bavfia^u Sn 1424. ! -£St]s and -idSr)s (fern, -ids), patro-or 8«'X<« w. interrog. subj. nym. in 8402. 8463.
-i8iov, diminutive in 844.
l'6tos w. pass. gen. 1143.
I'Spis declined (one ending) 344.
[Spool, contraction of 497.
ISpivOrjv (ISpvu), Iloin. aor. p. 709.
u- or «)- as mood suffix in opt. 502,
730.
Upo'f v. poss. gen. 1143. -(£«, denominat. vbs. in 801' 802,
864. tup.!., inflpction of 810 ; dial, forms
of 811 ; aor. in m 070; opt.
rpboiro etc. 741, 8I02; dwu 767.
■9
Otos, vocative. 195.
Ot'io (8v-) 2d class 574.
8
©TJPdSc 293.
e^Xvs 323.
8t|p declined 225.
8rjs declined 225.
-flij-Ti for -8r)-»t in 1st aor. pass.
imper. 95-, 707'. -8i, local ending 2921, 205, 800.
flvtforKW (San-) 013; metath. ($av-,
8ra-) 049; v for d 010; fut. pf!
act. redp^u 705; perf. as pres.
1203; 2 perf. of (ui-form 804 ;
part. Ttt*^i6s 773 ; Horn, rctfujuis
773.
0%-, poetic stems in 779. oi' (by crasis) 44.
Mi, com? '. w. subj. and imperat. 1345.
-iKos, adjectives in 851. iX«ojs. adj. declined 306, 197. 'IXioBi irpo 295. i -iv in ace. sine. 214s.
|
419 |
GREEK INDEX.
419
tv, Doric for oi' 398.
tva, final conj. 1302, 1365, 1308, 1371.
-ivos, adj. of material in 852; adj. of time in iris 853.
-i%, pres. stem in 579.
-u>v, diminutives in 844.
-ios, adj. in 850.
IViros, feui., cavalry, w. sing, numerals 383'.
tiriroTa, nom. (Horn.) 188'-.
-is, feminities in 8482.
'I
wi, dat. case ending 107.
-uj-k%-, pres. steins in 013.
-to-Kos, -tcrK7i, riiinin. in 844.
tsros w. dat. 1175.
to-Tt))ii, synopsis 604, 505, 50!) ; inflect, of /u-fonns 500 ; redupl. of pres. 051, 65i', 704-; fut. perf. act. 705; partic,. icr-rds declined 335.
tX^is declined 257-2(10; ace. pi. of 25'.).
Iu, accus. 'IoO)/ (Hdt.) 247.
-iuv, patronym. in 847.
-toiv, -wttos, coiup. aud super], in 357.
iw for hi 377.
K, smooth mute 21, palatal 16, 22, surd 24; euphon.ch.,soe l'alatals; cli. to x in 2 perf. stem 692.
k in o&k 20.
■Ka in aor. of three vbs. 670.
«aPPtt« (KOT^floXf) 53.
Kay for xa-rd 53.
o's w. gen. 1140.
i, augment 544 ; fut. 005'. tcaStvSu, augment 544. Ka67)(iai, inflection of 815, 816. KoSlJoi, augment 544. Ka8(o-rii|u as copul. vb. 908. Kal, in crasis 432, 44 ; connecting two subjects 901 ; w. part, (see
(tahrtp) 1573; Kai 6's, ical of, ot
icai 6s 10232;
raSra 1673; xol rbv w. inlin.
984 ; rd xai t&, rd Kal t6 984. KaCircp w. partic. 1573. Kaiw (Alt. icdu) 601. KaK (Horn.) for xari 53. KaKo's compared 301. KOKTavt («aT^*crave) 53. Kaxcis irowlv (X^7«iv) 1074.
iw, fut. in (-^w) w 665 ; perf.
opt. in ijfiijj/ 734 ; perf. as pres,
1203. 's compared 361.
and koXvittw 577. Kd(j.it-Tu), perf. mid. 77, 4901. Kdv (ical fV), kov (xal &v) 44. Kavtov, Kavouv 202. Kair (Horn.) for Kara. 53. KapTwrTos, superl. 301'. -icd
pi. perf. 082. kclt (Horn.) for Ka-ra 53. Kara, preposition with gen. and
accus. 1211; in compos. 1123;
ko.tcl yrjv 958.
Kara (3a for KaTa-firiBi. 755'. K^Cra (hat lira) 44. Karapocuu v. gen. 1123. KaTa*yfyv«(rKw w. gen. 1123. KaraYW|ii w. gen. 1008. KaTa«)»«ilSo(iai w. gen. 1123. KaTa(;Ti4)t5onai w. gen. 112o. KaTi)-yoptio, augment of 543; w.
gen. ami ace. 1123. KaTSavciv (KaTa#a«r^) 53. KaTo'iriv w. gen. 1140. KdVio, KaTunpos, KaTiiTaTOS 363. k4 or k/v ( =.- 4..) 59, 1299. Ktt8«v, K«t8i 4391. Kd)iai, inflection of 818, 819. Kiivos 411. Kfl
K«KaS-fj
|
420 |
420
GREEK DU)EX.
K«KTT|p.ai and
; , fut. 668; aor. 674».
I KVWV, KVVTipOS, K«VTttTOS 364.
i k«Xi», accent of certain forms
485 ; KuMet as impers. 897*. K
fut. pf. act. of 700.
K«'«s, aeons, of 199. icijpvf; 210'.
Ki}pv
Xalpu |
I A, liquid and semivowel 20; so-
naiu 24 ; XX after syllabic augm. (Horn.) 514.
with 1605. Xa-Yxoi"*1 slid Xa(xpaww, redupl. of
522; formation 605, 611. Xcvyiis, accusative of 199. I Xd8p
(Attic Kdu) 601 ; fut. 600; i ativ, secretly 1504. ">» 1564. I Xa(i.it-(is declined 226.
, desiderative verb 808. j XavOdiw (Xa#-) 005, 011; w. par-proper nouns in, decl. 231. i tic. 1586. kX
kXCvw, drops v 647; pf. mid. 488, I X*yu>, say, constr. of 1523; iyovai
490i; aor. p. 709. KXicrir)
KOpT) (KOpfTl) 176. KOpCTT), KOppi^ 17t>.
Kpar
and opt. 729, 742. KpCvu. drops v 647. Kpoviuv 847. KpupSnv 8(>02.
KpvirTw w. two aceus. 1069. Kpii
Kraofiai. augm. of perf. 525; perf. I
subj. and opt. 722. 734. I
KT€ivu 596, 04(f, 047, 799 ; 2 aor.
of /ii-form, 799, 801.
KTtts. ktiv-o's- nom. 210i. KuSpo's compared 307. kvkXu, all round 1198. •ruvlu (tu-) 607.
897-; X/7
X«(ir«, synopsis of 476; meaning of certain tonses 477; second aor., perf. and plpf. inflected 481 ; form of XAojra 31, 042'.
X<{o, imper. 756'.
Xf'uv declined 220.
XtBopoXos and XiBdpoXos 885.
XCo-cro(jiai w. us or Sirwi 1377.
Xoi6opi'u w. ace. and XoiSoplopai w. dat. 1103.
Xovu), contraction of 497.
X««, synopsis 469, 474; conjug. 180; Horn. perf. opt. 734; uv and XtXuKus declined 336; quantity of u 471.
Xtuu)V. XwO*TOS 301'.
M, liquid and semivowel 20; nasal 20, and sonant 24 ; m/^X and m8p for /A aud mp CO.
-(ia, neut. nouns in 837.
Ha, in oaths, w. ace. 10CC-1008.
|
421 |
GKEEK INDEX.
421
602. o's, decl. of 300; fiaxpi} w.
comp. 1184.
jiaXa comp. (/iaWov, Ma^"To) 371. -(idv, Dor. endiDg for -mv" "771. |iav8avu 005; w. gen. of source
1130'; w. iufin. 1592-; rl paSa*
1500.
MapaBwvi, dat. of place 1197. |iapTvpo(iai 506. |*d)(opai, fut. -erro>iai, -oO/ieu C651; I
w. dat. 1177. M€apa8« 293.
(U-yas declined 340; compared 3G14. H^wv for lulfav 061', 843.
in first person dual 556'2. 30 H.
i, redup). of pert 522. p.«lwv, (wio-tos 3G16. I
(UAas declined 320 ; fern, of 326; I
nom. 2102.
(m'«l w. dat. and gen. 1105, 1101. (m'XXw, augment of 517; w. infin.,
as periph. fut. 1254. »
(i<)ivti(j.cu, perf. subj. and opt. 722,
734; as pres. 1200; w. gen.
1102 ; w. panic. 1588. ju'|i
iie:i. I
-jus, -(i€o-8a for ->«v, -fu6a 550», |
777'.
H«v, in 6 )j.4v ... 6 5^ 981. -juvai, -n«v, in infin. (Horn.) 7821,
784-, 785*, 701. McvAfus and MtWXdos 33, 200;
accent 114. (mvtov (by crasis) 44. (i«trT|(ipp(a 06.
l<.t
l*iTa w. gen., dat., and accus. |
1212; as adv. 12221 ; ^ra
(Horn.) for pItcct, 1224. |itTa)i
1101.
w. gen. 1220; w. panic. 1672.
(MToiroUojioi w. gen. 1099. |mt«
. gen. 10972, 1098. x w. gen. 1140. |itv393'; enclitic 141'. (w'Xpi, as prep. w. gen. 1220 ; as conj. 1463-1467; with subj. without tv H66.
(tti, adv., not, 1607-1019; see. Contents, p. xxiv.; w. I'va, o'iru?, etc., in final clauses 1364 ; after vbs. of fearing, -w. subj. and opt. 1378, w. indie. 1380 ; in protasis ]383; in rel. coud. sent. 1428; in wishes 1007, 1511, 1G10; w. imperat. and subj. in prohibitions 1340,1347 ; w. subj. expressing fear 1348, 1349; w. subj. (also /ii) oi') in cautious assertions 1350, w. indie. 1351 ; w. dubitative subj. 1358; w. infin. 1611 ; w. infin. and wVtc 1451 ; w. infin. after negative verb 1615. See ov ji
i^Ti 1607; ^Si dt 378. 378,1607; n-q&tvis etc. 378. pos 435. 656.
62.
declined 274.
HL*)Tls (poet.) 435; accent 146.
I»t) ov 1016, 1617 ; one syllable in poetry 47J; ui; ... ov in final cl. 1364 ; w. subj. or indie, in cautious negations 1350, 1351.
HTJTf 1607.
(if|rpw9 244.
-jxv. in 1st pers. sing. 552, 5561, 731, 793-797; Aeol. vbs. in, for -au>, -fw, -ow 7872.
|
422 |
422
GREEK INDEX.
compared 361s. {U|ivj)Vkw, augment of perf. 525;
7j for a 01(5, 014. See (i£v and v(v 093, 395. Mivojs, accus. of 109. |u
s, )j.vpCa 383-.
jito's, declined 260. (iwv (m>j o5f), interrog. 1003. -|j.uv, adjectives in 8404.
jropos, 297.
s, etc.) 872 ;
(j.Os,
N, liquid and semivowel 20; nasal ■ 20 ; sonant 24 : can end word 25; i movable 50-01 ; euph. changes I before labial and palatal 781, | before liquid IS'2, before a 783; ] ct, vS, v$,tdropped before a 79; in | iv and
va- added to verb stem 009, 797-.
-vai, infin. in 554, 704, 70(i, 707. See -|icvai.
vatxi, accent 141*, 146.
vaU (ua/:) 002.
vdos, vijos, and v«is 200, 190.
vavs declined 268; Dor. & Ion. docl. of 270 ; formation of 209 : compounds of {favnaxla, vavel-
v8 dropped before a 79.
vi added to verb stem 007.
vuKtU (Horn.) 7853.
viu> (ku-)i 2d class s"4 ; f"t- 000.
v«iis declined 190.
vi], iu oaths, v. accus. 1000, 1007
vr-, insep. neg. prefix 875;.
vfjo-os declined 192.
vrv% (for vaCs) 270.
v8 dropped before a 79.
vCt« (k!j3-) 591.
viKaw w. cogn. accus. 1052 ; pass.
w. gen. 1120. viv and (iCv :J05. vi$a (accus.) 289. vofi^w w. infill. 1523 ; w. dar.. like
XpaOMdi 118o. voos, vo«s declined 201 -'. -vos, adject, in 855. voo-os, fem. 194'. vov)«ivi(} 1194. ■vs in accus. plur. 167, 109, 190,
208*. -v
6501, 783, 7771. vt- dropped before a 79. -vto in 3d pers. plur. 5'>2. ■ vrav in 3d pers. pi. impc-r. 553,
740.
vv- added to vowel steins f5U8, 7971. vvjktos 958 ; vvktI awl iv vuktI ) 193. -vi(u, verbs in 008, 502-, 797'. vuv or vv (epic) 59; finclit. 1414. vCt'i, vuiv 393'. vwlrtpos 407.
'p,, double consonant 18 ; surd 24 ; compos, of 18'; how written in early Attic 27,28a; can end word 20 ; redupl. before 523.
£«Evos, Ion. for ?^i-os 148.
(vv for dv, w. dative 1217.
|
423 |
GREEK INDEX.
423
O, open short vowel 5, (!; name of 4; in contraction 38 ; length, to w 29 ; to ov 30 ; interchanged w. a and < 32; for < in 2 pf. 043, also in nouns 831 ; as thematic vowel 501', in Horn. subj. 7801; as suffix 832, 849 ; at end of first part of compounds 87].
-o for -(to in 2d pers. sing. 505°.
0, t|, to, article, decl. of 380 ; syntax of 935-984 : in Horn. 935-i)38; in Hdt. 939; in lyr. and trag. poets 940, in Attic 941-984 ; 6 pi* ... o hi 981-983 ; proclitic forms 137 ; when accented 130. See Article.
6, rel. (neut. of 6s), for Sn (Horn.) 1478=.
o^SoaTOs 374.
o-ySwxovTo. (Ion.) 374.
o8«, tj8t, t6S(, demonstr. pronoun 430 (see oDros); decl. 400; syntax 1004, 1005, 1008 ; w. article 9451, 074 ; 65/412.
686s declined 192 ; 6S6» Uvai 1057.
o8ovs, 68wv, o8ovtos, nom. 2103.
oc and 00 contracted to ov 38'2; 8.
oti eontr. to ov 395; to 01 (in vbs. in ow) 3O4.
-otis, adj. in, contracted 332.
6'^w w. two gen. 1107.
01) contr. to u 38-1; to i; 301, 310. 311.
or) and on contr. to 01 (in vbs. in
ofl«v 430 ; by assimilation 1034. 061 430-'. 60ovv«Ka 1478s.
01, diphthong 7 ; pronunciation of 28-; interchanged w. a and r 31 ; augmented to v 018 ; rarely elided 01 ; short in accent 113 ; ot in voc. sing. 240.
ol, pron. 380 ; use in Attic 087, 988. ol, adv. 436.
ota w. partic. 1575.
ot8a, inflection of 820 ; dial, forms
of 821 ; w. partic. 1588 ; w. infin.
15922; olo0' 0 SpcL
vbs. 737 ; in 2 perf. opt. 735;
(rxo^v 735.
■ouv (ep.) for -oiv in dual 28G1. o?icaS<, oixoStv, oI'koi, olxdvbi 292-
200; oIIkoi. 1198. otxeios, form. 850; w. gen. 1144;
w. dat. 1170. oIkCq declined 171. oUrtpu and otiempco 507. -010 in gen. sing, of 2d decl. 2041. otjioi. elided 01 ; accent of 140. otvos and vinvm 91. otvoxo^w, augnient of 538. olop.cu or otfiai, only olet in 2 ])ers.
sins,'. (520 ; w. infin. 1523. otov or ota v. partic. 157G. -oiv, 2'ai'e for -oi/xi in opt. act. 730. oios 429 ; oi'y
re, able, in Att. 1024'. See ola
and olov. -010-a for -oKcra in panic. (Aeol.)
783.
-010-1 in dat. pi. of 2 decl. 2041. o£xo(ioi, perf. of 000; in pros, as
pf. 1250 ; w. partic. 1587. oXi'yos compared 301; iiyov (5(ii>)
1110, 1534. £XXv|u (6X-), form of pres. 012 ;
fut. 005 ; perl, and plpf. 529, 033. 6Xos w. article 979. 'OXviniria (to) 289 ; w. nKav 1052. 6(itX«« w. dat. 1175. 6')iw)ii (6/x-, dfio-) 009 ; plpf. •>'■"•} ;
6>»«& 790 (752); w. accus. 1049. 8^ioios and 6|ioi6w w. dat. 1175. 6(jloXoy«'«> w. dative 1176. 6|j.ov w. dative 1170. 6|i»vu(j.os w. gen. 11441; w. dat
1175.
|
424 |
424
GREEK INDEX.
ovd-, stems in 840. ovap 289.
ov
laiv 80S3.
ovojia, by name 1008; ovd/tari 1182.
ovonajw w. two acc. 1077 ; in pass. •w. pred. nom. 907, 1078.
bvoiao~Ti 8003.
ovT-, panic, stems in 564', 5<355, 770.
6£vvw, perf. and plpf. pass. 700.
oo contracted to ou 381, 8.
-oos, nouns in 201; adj. in 310; compared 35."; compounds in, accent of 2032.
bov for ou 424.
birr), 6m)vtKO, Airifltv, O7roi 436.
6itvo-9
oirofltv 43G ; rel. of purpose 1442.
biroi, of place where 1226.
oiroios, oitoo-os 429.
bnirt, relat. 430, 1425; causal 1500; oirerav w. subj. 1428-, 1209-.
6iroT«pos 429, 4322.
bwov 430.
oirviw (67TU-), dirbaio 602.
birws, rel.' adv. 436; as indir. in-terrog. w. subj. or opt. 1600, 1490; as final particle 1362, 1360, 1368 ; sometimes w. 8.v or k( 1307; w. past. t. of indie. 1373; rarely w. fut. ind. 130(5; in obj. cl. w. fut. ind. 1372; sometimes w. 4* 1370; in obj. cl. in Horn. 1377; b'-rrut /iij after vbs. of fearing 1379; 4Vws and (Situs fiij w. fut, in commands and proliib. 1352 ; dlirwt for is in indir. quot. 1478. Mt; AVut and oux 6Vws 1504. ipau 621; augm. and redupl. of 538; w. Sttus 1372; w. ^ 1378;
■w. suppl. panic. 1582; 'w. part in indir. disc. 1588 (1083). o'pcyo(i
2143, 210. See 2'JV*. o'pwjii. fut. 008; aor. 6746. -os, -ov, nouns in 832, 189; adj. in 849', 865, 298; neuters in -ot (stems iu ta-) 837, 227. bs, rel. pron. 421, 430; fern, dual rare 422; Horn, forms of 424; I as deuioiisir. 1023. bs, his, poss. pron. (poet.) 40(),
408.
, bo-os, oiroVos 429. I oo-t«'ov, oo-toOv, declined 201. | oo-Tis declined 425-427; Horn, form j 428; as indir. interrog. 1013, 1000; sing. w. plur. antec. 1021'. oo-4>palvojioi, formation 010; vr.
gen. 1102.
ot«, rel. 430; causal 1505 ; 5ro^ w. subj. 1428*.
OT«l) Or OTT«V, OT«U), OT«1»V, Ot4oiO"V
42S.
on. that, in indir. quot. 14713, 1487; in direct quot. 1477; causal (because,) 1005; not elided 50.
b ti (ueut. of So-™) 425, 426.
otis, bnvo, bnvos, brT«o, otti 428.
ov, diphthong 7; genuine and spurious ou 8; pronunc. of 27, 28-; length, from o 30; for o in Ion. 148; not augmented 519.
-ou in gen. sins- l"0, 191; for -too in 2 nerx. mid. 506°, 679.
ov, ovk, ovx 62; proclitic 137; accented 138'; uses of 1608-1013; ouk "tag Sitcjs etc. w. opt. (without i") 1333; oix 8iru)« and ovx 6V( 1504. See oi (*^ and u.rj ov.
ov, ot, J, etc. 389, 392; syntax of 987, 988.
ov, rel. adverb 436.
|
425 |
GttEEK INDEX.
425
ouSas 236.
oiSi 1007; oiS' (U and oiScls 378;
oi/S' us 1383; oi/{* iroXXoC Sei
1116°. ov6t($ 378, 1607; oi&tvcs, etc. 378;
ov&ch Sims oi5 1030. oiJS*T
OVkIti 02.
ovk (6 ck) 44.
ovkoOv (inteiTog.) 1603.
ov |Wj w. fut. ind. or subj. as strong
fut, 13G0; in prohib. 1301. -ovv in ace. sing. (Hdt.) 247. oiivtKa for Ivcko. 1220°. ovirC (6 ivl) 44. ovpavo'Siv, oipavo'Si 292. -ovs in ace. pi. 190, 107. -ovs (for -eos, -oos), adj. in 852, 820,
310; panic, in oit 5045. ous, ear, accent of gen. dual and
pi. 128.
-ovcri for -owi 5565, 783. q«t« 1007.
ovtis (poetic) 43o; accent UG. ovtos declined 409, 413; use of
430, 1004; (listing, from titaeos
and 65c lOOo ; raurd and raoraiv
(dual) rare 410; w. article 9451'3;
position w. art. 974 ; in exclani.
1000; ref. to preceding re.l.
1030; touto ptv ... toCto 8/ 1010;
TaCra and toOto as adv. accus.
1000; ouToal 412. oDrus and ovtw 03, 430. ov : see oi. o
in wishes 14O22, 1012. o
598; impf.
1512. 289.
8082. «4>Xio-xavw w. gen. 1122.
Sfoa, as final part. 1362, 1365, 1366, 1308; sometimes w. W or lv 1367, 1299-; until 1463.
Styl W. iarl or ^ySdl1.
jt|/op(opau), 6>Jki 625.
-oi», denom. verbs in 8613; infl. of contr. forms 492.
-oiD, etc., supposed Horn, form of vbs. in aw 7842; Horn. fut. in
II, smooth mute 21; labial 16;
surd 24; eupbon. changes, see
Labials; w. a forms j> 74 ; eh.
to in 2 perf. 692. iraifo), double stem 590. irats, nom. of 2091; voc. sing. 2211;
accent of gen., du., and pi. 128. irdXcu w. pres., incl. perf. 1258. irdXiv, before a in compos. 82. iraXXw, WiraXov 534. mtv before a in compos. 82. •irdvTo8«v 2922. irdp (Horn.) for napd 53. irapd w. gen., dat., and ace. 1213 ;
as adv. 1221-; in compos., w.
ace. 1227; w. dat. 1179. irdpa for ndp«TTi ] 10'-, 1224. irapavo|i«'w, augment of 543. irapao~Kcud£b>, impers. irapcaKtv-
aaTai, ira.pe
' Jt 7T73
TT&ptGK(UZLOOLrCil t I i ,
■rrapd-o-Td 7553.
irdpti|U w. dat. 1179.
irdpos w. intiii. 1474.
irds declined 329; w. article 979 ;
ace. of gen. and dat. pi. 12«,
331'. ird
iraTT|p dcclinea 274.
iraia) and ■n-ttio(i.ai w. partic. 1580.
mi9u 072; pf. and plpf. mid. in-
fleeted 48"i, 489'; Wirifo.. 534;
Hiroida 31, 6421.
|
426 |
426
GREEK INDEX.
irctSopcu, obey, w. dat. 1160. ir«i9
v. Situs and obj.cl. (Horn.) 1377. iri(pw, pf. and plpf. mid. 490°. TTt'Xas w. gen. 1149. ir«'|iiro>, pf. pass. 77, 4901; Tr^nreiu
iroMTij 1-1051. irc'v-qs compar. 301. irt'iravcro, pf. imper. 750. irt'irTw 583: sec trt'
as adv. 12221; in compos, w.
dat. 1179; w. numerals as subject 900 ; not elided in Attic 50 ;
ir(pi 1101.
. v. gen. 1120. lipiKXtjS: declined 231. iota w. panic. 1585. ir«pnr(iTTU w. dat. 1179. nia-trw (tt(tt-) 583; pf. pass, of
490'. ircVoiiai, 2 aor. mid. 077; 2 a. act.
of M'-form 799. irfj 430.
iq)', indef. 430; enclitic 1412. IIt|X«£Stis (Horn. -eibr)s) 8403. ; 429.
viKa. 430.
inserted /i 795; inflection of v 803'. (irpa-), redupl. 794!; w.
inserted f*. 795. irCvw 621 ; fut. 667; trWi 799, 7551;
w. gen. 1097'. irtirrw 652'; fut. 600; perf. mid.
4901.
w. dative 1100. ir(
332.
nXaravcuri 290. irXctv (for jtXi?ov) 1150. irXiUov or irXt'uv, n-XtCo-ros 301s. it-X^kw, pf. and plpf. mid. inflected
487', 489'. irXt'ov without ij 1156. irXt'w (tXu-), 2d class 574 ; contraction of 4951 ; fut. 060 ; vXiiy 6aa
w. dat. 1175. irXijo-lov w. gen. 1149. irXrjo-crw, ^irXci7i7i' (ill comp.) 713. irXvvoj 047.
irve'w (irvu-), 2d class 574 ; fut. 000. | ir68«v 430.
I iro8ev 430 ; enclitic 14P. ire9i. aud iro8i 4393, 1412. iroi 4;iG.
I iro(, indef. 430 ; enclitic 1412. I iroi«w w. two accus. 1073; w. panic. 1 1503s ; ii and Ka>.-wf iroiw 1074. , iroios, iroios 429.
! iroXtp.lo, iroXcp.i^w w. dat. 1177; I disting. from voXt/xdw 807. | iriXis declined 2<r)0 ; Ion. forms 255. I iroXXos, Ion. = ttoXOs 347. | iroXiis declined 340; Ion. forms 347; compared 301 ; ol 7roXXo( and t6 wo i 907; ttoXu and TroXXd as adv. 307 ; B-oXXip w. comp. 1184 ; TroXXoO Set and ou5^ 7roXXoO S(t 1116"; M 7tov 1210:'. irojj.irT]V ir^jiir€iv 1051. iroppu or irpd
voc. 122", 221*. iroo"os, iro(r6s 429. iroTanos after proper noun 970. iroTt 430.
|
427 |
GREEK INDEX.
427
, indef. 436; enclitic 1412. «pos, iroT«pos (or -p6t) 429.
or irbTtpa, interrog. 1600. iroS 430 ; w. part. gen. 1002. iroii, indef. 430 ; enclitic 1412. irovs, nom. sing. 2101 ; compounds
of :!40. irpa-yiiara, omitted after article
953. irpaos declined 340 ; two stems of
348 ; TTpais and Trpivs 348. irpdo-o-w (npay-), 2d perf. 092, 093;
seldom w. two accus. 1075; w.
6Vws and obj. cl. 1372; eS and i
kcikujs irpdctrw 1075. irpforti, impers. 898. irpeo-ptvTtjs, irpto-pvTi^s,
291. ■n-pto-p<«« id="iv.i.p10970.1">, denom. verb 8(51*; irpj-
aficjfiv dprjurfu 10551. •n-prjvs (epic) 348. irpfv w. infill, and indie. 1409; w.
infin. 1470, 1471' ; w. indie, !
subj., and opt. 14712; w. subj. i
without 6.v 1473 ; -n-piv ij 1474. irpU)(iirpi.al^r]v, accent of
729, 742. irpci w. gen. 1215; not elided 50; ;
compared 303; contracted w.
augment 541, or w. foil, e or o
8742; (ppoiios and (ppovpbs 93. irpo toO or irpoTov 084. irpotica, gratis, as adv. 1000. irpoK
as adv., besides 12221. irpo
dat. 1097-, 1101 ; irpoviiKop, ace.
abs. 1562,
irp6
1138.
irpocruSCa 1071.
irporcpos 303; irpdrcpov ij (like irplt
V) 1474. irpOToi 984.
irpoCp'yov and irpovx» 8742. irpioTi
at first 1000. nv6o; 290. irvvBdvojiai w. ace. and gen. 1103 ;
w. partio. 1588.
irup, gen. irDp-os iill; plur. 291. ir«, indef. 436 ; enclitic 1412. irws 430. iriis, indef. 430 ; enclitic 141=.
P, liquid and semivowel 20; sonant 24 ; b at beginning of word 15 ; can end a word 25; pp after syll. augm. and in comp. after vowel 09, 513 ; MjSp for pp 00.
pa, enclitic 141*.
pcj8ios compared 3619.
jtalvta 010.
332.
p
pi!7vu)it (pay-), 2 pf. fppuya 089.
p»)C6ios, pr]CTepos, etc. 3019.
pi-yda), infin. and opt. of 497, 738.
pCs, nose, declined 225.
-poos, adject, in, duc.1. of 2982.
-pos, adject, in 855.
2, two forms 2 ; spirant or sibilant 20, semivowel 20, and surd 24, can end word 25; after mutes found only in £ and ^ 74 ; v before a 78s, 80 ; linguals changed to a before a lingual 71 ; orig. s changed to aspirate 80; dropped before a vowel, in stems in c
|
428 |
428
GREEK INDEX.
some vowel stems 640, 8302; i -
doubled, after syll. augm. (Horn.) I 78s.
514, iii fut. aud aor. (Horn.) 777;; | -crid, fern, nouns in 834.
movable iu oi/rws and i(, 03; ! -
dropped in «xw *uid f»x» (for ; -
of Verbs). j
-s as ending of nom. sing. 107, 209. [ o-k&Xw, Airo-
84'. ! o-KOirfo w. Situs and fut. ind. 13622.,
-crai and -
drop a- in vbs. in u 5056, not in ] o-kotos, declension of 2871.
most M'-foruis 504°; -rat elided j
51.
c-AXiriYJ; declined 225. -crav, 3d pers. plur. 552, 5643, 565'2. Xawijxi declined 245.
800.
■a-iu,
in 2 pers. sing. subj. act. 780*;
in indie, of vbs. in mi 787*. -
652 ; -itOov for -irfiijv in 3 pers.
5503. •
3 pers. 552, 504'. -o-i in dat. pi. 167, 224, 2862; -«u
107, 189, 190. ■ o-i as locative ending 290.
, contraction of 490. -o-o in 2 pers. sing. 562, 5056, 564°;
see -
fut, pf. 661'. croos; see
in pf. and plpf. mid. 490:). (ri«v6« and
koto
w. gen. 1090. i
393'; gen. omitted 896.
dat.) 1690 ; w.gen. 1126.
1179; becomes crv
compos. 81.
|
429 |
GREEK INDEX.
429
(or ait avvckbvTi)
-o-vvi), nouns in 842. c-uvCt](ii w. ace. 1104; w. gen. 1102.
1590.
!', 394; enclit. 1411.
t(pt*i, «
not enclitic in Attic prose 144«.
$6s for
and croliv (of «x<" id="iv.i.p11052.1">) 7552, 799, 735. 2«Kpdrr]?, decl. of 228; ace. 230;
voc. 122C, 228.
209<; dat. pi. 224. or&s (Horn, aios) 309.
T, smooth mute 21; lingual 16, 22 ;
Burd 24 ; euphon. changes; see
Linguals; vt dropped before a
79. •rd (Horn.) for -tijs in nom. of I
first dec). 188-. i
Ta and t«Iv (dual of o), rare 388. i -Tat in 3 pers. sing. 552 ; elided 51. i rdXas, adj., decl. of 324 ; nom. of
T&XXa (to 4XXa) 432, 119.
-rdv, Doric ending for -rrjv 7771.
Tav (toi 4v) 44.
TavSpC 44.
Tapa 44.
Tapd
-TaTOs, superl. in 350.
rourd, rairi, rair6v, ravToS 400.
ravrn, adv. 436, 1198.
ra^- for 6a(p- (Sairru) 95'.
rda w. &v (t&x &*) 1316.
compared 357, 955; ttjv ■to» 1060.
r&uv (= twv) 388. ft (enclitic), Doric for
1024 ; w. ofos 1024. T€6d^6ai 956. tc6v
Tf9Wj{w, flit. pf. act. of 6rj
ta 872.
tcCvu, drops e647, 711. -T«ipa, fem. nouns in 8332. r«K(iv as noun 1561. tiXivtiSv, finally, 1564. rikia, future in C>, ov/xai 6651; pf.
and plpf. mid. inflected 4872,
4892.
t«'Xos, finally, adv. ace. 1060. t<(ivw 603; 2 aor. 646, 670. rio, t«v, riot, t«vs, t
398. Wo, tcC (= toC for rtvos or ti»6s),
W<( id="iv.i.p11082.1">, riav, riouri 418'2. -Tt'ov, verbal adj. in 776; impers.,
w. subj. in dat. or ace. 1697;
sometimes plural 1597; Latiu
equivalent of 1599. -riot, verbal adj. in 776; passive
1595; Lat. equiv. 1599. rids, Doric and Aeolic (=
407.
1 T«'pas declined 2372. ] Wpiiv, decl. of 325; fem. of 326. i -npos, comparative in 350. | T
etc., declined 375.
|
430 |
430
GREEK INDEX.
T
(dat.) 377. 572, 6423. Tim, accus. of 199. •H), rn6€430, 1198. ti]X(kos, ti]Xikovto5, etc. 429. -rnv in 3 pers. dual 552; for -tov
in 2 pers. 56G3. See -o-8ov and
-
•njvCKa, T^viKiSc, T^viKavTa 436. -•Hjp, inase. nouns in 8331; syncop.
273. -T^jpiov, nouns of place in 8431;
adj. in 855. ( -r>is, masc. nouns in 8331, 841;
fern, (denom.) in 842. Tji
t6 for ee C81.
-ti, adverbs in 860.
-ft, ending of 3 pers. sing. (Doric) 552, 5561, 7771; in iarl 5561.
tC9t]hi, synopsis 504, 509; inflection of M'-forras 506; redupl. in pres. 651, 794*; imperf. 630; aor. in and Ka^v 670, 8022; opt. mid. in -otn-nv and accent 741; Bttvat 767,802'; partic. riBd, declined 335.
-tikos, adj. hi 8512.
tCktw (t{k.)'052!.
Tijidu, denoin. verb 8611; stem and root of 153; inflect, of contr. forms 492; synopsis of 494; infin. 3CJ'*, 761; partic. TWi«f, TiixCiv declined 340; w. gen. of value 1133; tim£v nvl tivos and TiiJLO.aBa.1 tixos 1133.
rvpiTJ declined 171.
Ti|irfj«is, Ti(i(js, contraction of 332.
Tifiuplo and Ti(i.«p«'o(iai 1246; w. ace. and dat. 1163.
tCv, Doric (= aoi) 398.
t(s, iuterrog. 430; declined 415, 416; accent 129, 4181; Ion. forms 4182; subst. or adj. 1011;
in direct and ind. questions 1012, 1600.
•rls, indef. 430; declined 415, 416 ; accent 1412, 4181; Ion. forms 4182; 6ubst. or adj. 10151; like
iray TU 1017.
-Tis, fern, nouns in 834, 841, 848i. I t£o), stem and root of 153.
-t%-, verb suffix 576.
t66«v 436.
to(, enclitic 141*. I to£, raC, art. = of, oi 388. I Toi, Ion. and Dor. (-
■ toIos, tou>(t8«, toioCto$ 429. Toi
388. toioOtos, to
947; position 976. I t6X)io 174.
■ tov Kal t
i -tov, in 2 and 3 p. dual 552; for in 3 pers. (Horn.) 566s. See
i -tos, verb. adj. in 776. t<5
«rouT(ji w. compar. 1184. t6t« 436 ; w. art. 952. tov for rhos, tou for tikSs 410. TovvavTtov (by crasis) 44. Tovvo|ia 44.
| -Tpd, fern, nouns in 839. TovTt'av (Hdt.), fern. 413. tovto^C, tovtoSC 412. I Tpiis, Tpla, declined 375. Tpi'irw, f ch. to a 646; aor. pass.
708; six aorists of 714. Tpf'4>oiv, opt. 730. Tp«'
708. Tpid, fern, nouns in 8332.
perf. and plpf. mid. inflected 4871, 489'.
(Ion.) 374.
, declined 234, 235; accent 235, 122'.
|
431 |
GREEK INDEX.
431
TpiirXdtrios w. gen. 1154. -Tpis, fem. nouns in 8332. tpCtotos 374.
TptTOV «TOS TOUTt, CtC. 1004.
Tpix-os, gen. of 8pl£ 225, 95s.
-Tpov, neut. nouus in 838.
Tpdirov, adv. accus. 1060.
Tpia, Tpvx«
Tpw-yw (rpi7-) 573.
Tpiis, accent 128.
tt, later Attic for aa 68s.
tv, Dor. for si and at 398.
Tvyx
1099; w. panic. 1680; tvX6v
(ace. abs.) 1569. tvvi], Ion. (= a
Y, close vowel 5, 6; name of 4;
initial v always v in Att. 14 ;
rarely contr. w. foil. vow. 401;
length, to v 29, 30; intercb. w.
(v (sometimes ov) 31. i-yirjs, contraction of 315. •vSpiov, diminutives in 844. iiBttp, declension of 291. 8u, impors. 8976; vom-os (gen. abs.)
15(58 (end). vi, diphthong 7. •via in pf. part. fem. 3372. vios, decl. 291 ; om. after art. 053. v|ia$. v(uv, i(ias, v(i(v 396. but, i|i
•ii(t(i€s, 5(1(11, C(i(ie, etc. (Aeol.) 393. i(i.6s for iifiirtpo^ 407. -Iv«, denom. verbs in 8618, 802,
090. irnip w. gen. and ace. 1218; in
compos, w. gen. 1132. iirtp
w. gen. 1140. vir6 w. gen., dat., and ace. 1219;
in comp. w. dat. 1179. iir
1194. i4>aCv
*, rough mute 21, labial 10, 22, surd 24 ; not doubled G81 ; euphonic changes: see Labials.
4>atvw, synopsis of 478 ; meaning of certain tenses 479 ; fut. and 1 aor. act. and mid. and 2 aor. and 2 fut. pass, inflected 482 ; perf. mid. infl. 4872, 4802; formation of pres. 594 ; of fut. act. 063; of aor. act. 072; of pf. act. and mid. 648, 700, 83 ; of 2 perf. 644 ; copul. vb. 907, 908; w. partic. 1588.
4>av
4>
4>('pr«pos, 4>lpTaros, fyipurros 301'.
<} id="iv.i.p11169.1">
4>
4>iin£, inflected 812; dial, forms 813; w. infiu. of indir. disc. 1523 ; oC
|
432 |
432
GREEK INDEX.
ij>8£v» 603; 2 aor. ty9liuv 8001;
(pB^^v (opt.) 789. •4>i or -
4>iX
1378-1380. *oivi{ 210.
$ov6.u>, desiderative verb 868. 4>op
> 585; pf. and plpf. mid. 4903;
534.
ipi^v, accent of compounds of (in -
ipovT(5« w. 6Vws and obj. cl. 1372 ; w. yu)f and subj. or opt. 1378. •t^s w. obj. accus. 1050. 5o$ and
I
X, rough mute 21, palatal 16, 22, ' surd 24 ; not doubled 681 ; eu- ] phonic changes : sfee Palatals. ' X
vu w. dative 1159,1160. , declined 320, 331 ; compared 355 ; dat. pi. 74. ] apC£o(«u w. dative 1160. I apis, nom. sing. 2091; ace. sing. ! 2148 ; x»P'" (adv.) 1060. |
, gen. of time 1136. X«(p declined 291. X<(puv (xeptloiv), ipurrot 361s. XtXiBiiv, declension of 248. X<« (xw-)i Pres- 57-* ; fut- 667 j
aor. 671 ; 2 a. m. 8001. Xot (ical oi) 44.
vs, declension of 272.
w. dat. 1183 ; w. dat. and
cogu. ace. 1183 ; xp<"M«ws, with
1565.
, contraction of 490 ; length.
a to i) 638.
Xp<] 898; w. infin. as subject 898. Xp
A» 1400.
XpT|
Lrreg. contr. 391; accent 311. X
'4', double consonant 18, surd 24; can end word 26 ; redupl. before 523.
4»d|inos, feui. 1941. <(;du, contraction of 496.
w. gen. 1117. viKav 1052.
ft, open long vowel 5, 6 ; name of 4 ; length, from o 29; interch. w. i) and a 31 ; for o in stem of Att. 2 deel, 190; nouns in « of 3 decl. 242 ; voc. sing, of in ol 240.
-u or -«v in ace. sing. 199.
-«, verbs in 407.
, iui})roper diphthong 7, 10; by augm. for < id="iv.i.p11216.1">i 518; in dat. sing. 190, 107 ; in nom. sing. 246.
u, interjection w. voc. 1044.
|
433 |
GREEK INDEX.
433
<&i 436, 1005.
■»lr, thematic vowel of subj. 5612.
-wjii, verbs iu 5021.
■uv, iaa6C denoin. in 8432; primitives in 840; nouns of place in 843; adj. in, compared 354.
-cov in gen. plur. 167 ; -u>v for -iwv in 1 decl. 109, 124.
£v, partic. of dial 806 ; accent of 129.
wvt]t6s w. gen. of price 1133.
wpa (t
-ids, nouns in (Att. 2 decl.) 196; nouns of 3 decl. in 238-241, 243; in gen. sing. 249, 265, 269; in ace. pi. (Dor.) 204*; adj. in 305 ; pf. part, in 335 ; adverbs in 305.
»s, proclitic 137; accented (us) 138; rel. adv. 430; w. partic. 1574, 1593; in wishes w. opt.
1509; in indir. quot. 1470;
causal 1505; as final particle
1362, 1365, 1368, sometimes w.
iy or W 1367; rarely w. fut.
indie. 1366; w. past tenses of
indie. 1371; like ware y. infiu.
1456 ; w. absol. infin. J534. us, as prepos. {to) w. accus. 1220. ws, thus 436 ; accent 138s. -iixri for -avai 5612, 783. uerircp w. partic. in comparisons
1576; w. ace. absol. of personal
vbs. 1570; u'crrep &.V el 1313;
accent 146. ua-Tt w. infin. and indie. 1449,
1450 ; two constr. disting. 1450,
1451 ; negative 1451 ; w. other constructions 1454 ; accent 146.
aw, Ionic diphthong 7.
, «ut6$, twvt6, Ionic 397. 868*2.
|
434 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
N. B. — See note on p. 408.
Ability or fitness, verbal adj. j syntax of accus. 1047-1082: see
denoting 851. I Contents, p. xv.
Ablative, functions of in Greek | Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1121; 1042. ■ comp. of Kara. w. ace. and geu.
Absolute case: gen. 1152, 1508;! 1123.
accus. 1569. ( I Achaeans, p. 3.
Abstract nouns, in compos. 87'J, I Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w.
880; v. an. 944 ; neut. adj. or I partic. 1588.
panic, w. an. for
Abuse, vbs. expr., w. dat. 11C0. ' Active, voice 441, 1230; personal Acatalectic verses 1(339. I endings of 552-554; form of,
Accent, gen. principles of 106-' iucl. most intraus. vbs. 1231:
115; nature of 107; kinds of1 object of, as subj. of pass. 1234.
100; recessive 110*; of nouns I Acute accent 100'; of oxytone
and adj. 121-129; of gen. and i changed to grave 116.
dat. sing., of oxytones 123; of. Addressing, voc. iu 1044; nom.
Att. 2 deel. 125; of gen. and' in 1045.
dat. of monosyll. of 3 ded. 127; ! Adjectives, formation of 849-858;
of gen. pi. (in Q») of 1 decl. | inflection 298-349: see Contents,
124 ; of verbs 130-135; of par- j p. xi; comparison of 350-364 ;
tic. 134;, of opt. in at and oi , agreement w. nouns 918; at-
113; of contracted syll. (incl. j tributive and pred. 919; pied.
crasis and elision) 117-120; en-1 adj. w. copulative verb 907; re-clitics 142 ; proclitics 136, 143'. ' ferring to omitted subj. of infiu.
Accent and ictus in verse 1825. ■ 927, 928; used as noun 932, Accompaniment, dat. of 1189;' 933; verbal, v. gen. 1139-1140,
w. dat. of aM< 1191. | w. accus. 1050; verbal in toj
Accusative case 100-103; sing, of j 770, in iVos and riot 776, 1594-
3d (led.214-218; contracted aco. i 1599; ised for adverb 926.
and nom. pi. alike in 3d decl.' Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen.
2083; subj. of infin. 895; af ter j 1102; w. causal gen. 1126.
prepos. 1201 ff., in compos. 1227; i Adonic, verse 1682'.
ace. absol. 1569; rarely w. par-' Advantage or disadv., dat. of 1165.
tic. of personal verbs 1570; in i Adverbial accus. 1060.
appos. w. sentence 915 ; infin. I Adverbs, bow formed from adj.
as accus. 1518 ; accus. of object | 365-307, 859; from stems of
retained w. passive 1239. Other | nouns or verbs 860 ; from par-
434
|
435 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
435
tic. 306; comparison of 369-371; relative 436; local, from nouns or pron. 292-297; numeral 372; qualify verbs, etc. 1228; w. gen. 1147-1151; w. dat. 1174, 1170; assim. of rel. adv. to antec. 1034; w. article for adj. 902.
Advising, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Aeolic race, p. 3 ; dialect, p. 4, has a for Attic ij 147; Aeolic forms of aor. opt. in Attic 732, 781; forms of infin. and panic. 781, 782, 783 ; forms in /u 7872.
Aeolian Greeks, p. 3.
Age, pronom. adj. denoting 429.
Aeschylus, language of, p. 4.
Agent, nouns denoting 83:); expr. after pass, by gen. w. prep. 1234 ; in poetry without prepos. 1131; by dat. (esp. after pf. pass.) 1180; w. verbals in riot by dat. 1188, 1596; w. verbal in rtov by dat. or accus. 1188, 1597.
Agreement, of verb. w. subj. nom. 899; of pred. w. subj. 907; of adj. etc. w. noun 918 ; of adj. v. nouns of diff. gender or number 023, 924.
Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099.
Alcaics and Alcaic stanza 16825.
Alexandrian period, p. 5.
Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 1602.
Alpha (see a) privative 8751; copulative 877.
Alphabet 1; obsolete letters of G ; used as numerals 3, 372, 384.
Anaclasis in Ionic verse 1688-.
Anacrusis 1635.
Anapaest 1C272; cyclic 1034; in trochaic verse (apparent) 1650 ; in iambic verse 1657.
Anapaestic rhythms 1675, 1676; systems 1677.
Anastrophe 116.
Anceps, syllaba 1636, 16382.
Anger, vbs. expressing, w. causal gen. 1126; w. dat. 1100.
Antecedent, agreement of rel. w. 1019; omitted 1020 ; assiin. of rel. to 1031; of antec. to rel. 1035 ; attraction 1037, w. assiin. 1038; def. and indef. antec. 1426.
Antepenult 96.
Antibacchius 1627s.
Antistrophe 1649.
Aorist 447; secondary tense 448; pers. endings 552-554 ; augment of 013, 515; iter. endings -o-koc and -vKoixTiv (Ion.) 778. First aor. act. and mid., tense system of 400 ; formation of tense stem 009 ; of liquid vbs. 072 ; in -ko. (or -ko.)j.-i)v) in three vbs. 070; Horn, t and o (for y and u) in subj. 780'; accent of infin. 131*. Second aor. act. and mid., tense system of 450; formation of tense system 075, 078 ; redupl. (Honi.) 534; Att. redupl. 5C;'>; Homeric mixed aor. v. a 777*; Mi-forms 078, 079, 798, 799; Ion. subj. of 788 ; accent of ini-perat., infin., and part. 131. Aor. pass, (first and second) w. active endings 504" ; tense systems of 456 ; formation of tense stems 707, 712; accent of infin. and part. 131.
Syntax of aorist. Ind. 12005; distine. from iiupf. 1259; of vbs. denoting a state 1260 ; as vivid future ]264 ; gnomic 1202 ; iterative 129'6. In dependent words 1271; how disting. from pres. (not in indir. disc.) 1272; opt. and infin. in indir. disc. 1280; infin. w. vbs. of hoping, etc. 1280 ; in partic. 1288 ; not
|
436 |
436
ENGLISH IKDEX.
past in certain cases 1290. See Indicative, Subjunctive, etc., for special constructions.
Aphaeresis 50.
Apocope 53.
Apodosis 1381; negative of (ou) 13831; w. past tenses of indie, w. &v 1397; various forms in cond. sent. 1387; w. protasis omitted 1329, 1340; repres. by infin. or panic. 1418, 1419; implied in context 1420; suppressed for effect 1410; introd. by Bt 1422. <
Apostrophe (in elision) 48.
Appear, vbs. siguif. to, w. panic. 1088.
Appoint, vbs. siguif. to, w. two ace. 1077; w. ace. and part. gen. 1095, 10947.
Apposition 911 ; gen. in appos. w. possessive 1001, 913; nom. or ace. in app. w. sentence 915; iunn. in appos. 1517 ; partitive appos. 914.
Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat. 1175.
Argives, p. 3.
Aristophanes, language of, p. 4.
Aristotle, language of, p. 4.
Arsis and thesis 1621 ; in Latin (not Greek) sense 1021 (foot-note).
Article, definite, declined 380; ni and too- as fern. 388 ; rot and ral (epic and Doric) 388; proclitic in some forms 137 ; in crasis 432; o avris 399, 989". Article as pronoun in Horn. 935, ■w. adj. or part. 930; in Herod.
939 ; in lyric and tragic poets
940 ; Attic prose use 941 ; position w. attrib. adj. 959, w. pred. adj. 071, w. demonstr. 974; as pronoun in Attic 981-984. Arti-
cle w. proper names 943; w. demonstratives 0451, 647, omitted in trag. 9453; w. possess. 940 ; w. numerals 948; in possess, sense 949 ; w. adv. etc. used like adj. 952 ; W. yij, irpdyfiara, vl6t, etc. understood 953; w. infin. 9551, 15102; w. a clause 955-, 1555.
Ashamed, vbs. signif. to be, v. partic. 1580.
Asking, vbs. of, -w. two accus. 1009.
| Aspirate, w. vowels 11 ; w. mutes
21, 92-95 ; avoided in successive
syll. 95 ; transferred in rp4
eptyto, etc. 955.
Assimilation of rel. to case of antec. 1031 ; w. antec. omitted 1032; in rel. adv. 1034 ; antec. rarely assim. to rel. 1035. As-sim. of cond. rel. cl. to mood of antec. clause 1439, 1440.
Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Attain, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099.
Attic dialect, p. 4 ; why basis of Greek Grammar, p. 4. Old Attic alphabet 27.
Attic 2 decl. 196-200, reduplication 529, future 605.
Attraction in rel. sent. 1037, joined w. assim. 1038.
Attributive adjective (opp. to predicate) 919 ; position of article w. 959. Attributive or possessive compounds 888.
Augment 466, 510-519, 527, 537-049 : see Contents, p. xii.
Bacchiu6 16273; Bacchic rhythms
1690.
Barytones 110s. Be or become, vbs. signif. to, w.
panit. gen. 10947. Begin, vbs. eignif. to, w. gen. 1099 ;
w. Dartic. 1680.
|
437 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
437
Belonging to, adj. signif. 850. Benefit, vbs. signii. to, w. dat.
1100. Blame, vbs. expressing, w. dat.
1100.
Boeotia, Aeolians in, p. 3. Brachycatalectic verses 1641. Breathings 11-15; form of 13;
place of 12. Bucolic diaeresis in Heroic hexam.
1009.
Caesura 1042.
Call: see Name.
Cardinal numbers 372-374; decl. of 376-381.
Care for, vbs. signif. to, v. gen. 1102.
Cases 100 ; meaning of 162 ; oblique 103. Case endings of nouns 107. Syntax 1042-1198: see Nominative, Genitive, Dative, etc., and Contents, pp. xv-xvii.
Catalexis and catalectic verses 1039.
Causal sentences, vc. indie. 1605 ; w. opt. (ind. disc.) 1506; w. relat. 1401, 1402.
Cause, expr. by gen. 1126 ; by dat. 1181 ; by panic. 15632.
Caution or danger, vbs. of, w. m1) and subj. or opt. 1378.
Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif. to, w. panic. 1580.
Choosing, vbs. of, w. two ace. 1077, w. ace. and gen. 1096, 10047.
Cboriambus, 10274; choriambic rhythms 1087.
Circumflex accent 100 ; origin of 107* ; on contr. syll. 117.
Circumstantial participle 1503.
Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099. 10972.
; Classes of verbs, eight 568: 1.560, II. 672, 574, III. 576, IV. 579-602, V. 003-012, VI. 613, VII. C10, VIII. 621.
Close vowels 0; stems ending in 206.
Clothing, vbs. of, w. two accus. 1069.
Cognate mutes 23 ; cognate accus. 1051.
Collective noun, w. plur. verb 900, w. pi, panic. 920; foil, by pi. relat. 10214.
Collision of vowels, how avoided 34.
Commands or exhortations 1342-1345, 1352, 1265, 1510; verbs of commanding w. gen. 1109, w. dat. (Horn.) 1164.
Common Dialect of Greek, p. 5.
Comparative degree 350-371 ; w. gen. 1153; w. dat. (difference) 1184.
Comparison of adjectives 350-360; irreg. 301, 302 ; of adverbs 305-371 ; of some nouns and pronouns 304.
Comparison, verbs denot., w. gen. 1120.
Compensative lengthening 30, 783, 79.
Compound words 822, 869-889 ; first part of 871-877 ; second part of 878-882; meaning of (three classes) 883-888. Compound verbs 882, 889; augment and redupl. of 540-542 ; accent of 132, 133; w. gen., dat., or ace. 1132, 1170, 1227. Compound negatives 1607 ; repetition of 1619. Indirect compounds 8822; how augmented and redupl. 543-546.
Concealing, vbs. of, w. two accus. »1069; w. infill, and jm} 1615, 1549-1551.
Concessions, opt. in 1510.
|
438 |
438
ENGLISH INDEX
Conclusion: see Apodosis and Condition.
Condemning, vbs. of, w. gen. and acc.1121jw.acc.andtwogen.1124.
Condition and conclusion 1381; conditional sentences 1381-1424: see Contents, p. xx ; classification of cond. sent. 1385-1389; general and particular cond. dis-tiug. 1384 ; comparison of Latin I gen. coud. 1388; cond. expr. by I panic. 1413: see Protasis. Relative cond. sent. 1428-1441: see Relative. l
Conjugation 151, 464, 467 ; of verbs in u 409-409 ; of verbs in mi 500-509.
Consonants, divisions of 16-22; double 18 ; doubling of 08, 69 ; I euphonic changes in 70-95;' movable 56-63. Consonant verb ' stems 460. Consonant declen- i sion (Third) 206.
Coustructio pregnans 1225.
Continue, verbs signif. to, w. par-tic. 1580.
Contraction 35; rules of 30-41; quantity of contr. syll. 1041; accent of' contr. syll. 117, 118; contr. of nouns: 1st dec). 183, 2d decl. 201, 3d decl. 226-207; of adject. 310-323; of panic. 340-342 ; of verbs in aw, ew, and ow 492; in gen. pi. of 1st decl. 170; in augm. and redupl. (n to ei) 537, 538, 539 ; in formation of words 829, 874*. See Crasis and Synizesis.
Convicting, vbs. of, w. gen. ,ind ace. 1121.
Co-ordinate and cognate mutes 23.
Copula 891'.
Copulative verbs 908; case of pred. adj. or noun with infin. of 927, 928; copulative compounds 887.
Coronis 42, 45.
Correlative pronominal adjectives
429; adverbs 436. Crasis 42-40 ; examples 44 ; quan-. tity of syll. 1041; accent 119. Cretic 16275; cretic rhythms 1689. Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 1634.
Dactyl 10272; cyclic 1034; in anapaestic verse 1075; in iambic verse (apparent) 1657; in trochaic verse (cyclic) 1650; in logaoedic verse (cyclic) 1079; in dactylo-epitritic verse 108-1.
Dactylic rhythms 1669-1674.
Dactylo-epitritic rhythms 1684 ; in Pindar 1685.
Danaans, p. 3.
Danger, vbs. expr., w. m1) and subj. ' or opt. 1378.
Dative case 160, 1157; endings of 167, 169, 190; dat. plur. of 3 dec!. 224 ; syntax of 1158-1198: see Contents, pp. xvi, xvii. Prepositions w. dat. 1201-1219.
Declension 151; of nouns: first 108-188, second 189-204, third 205-286; of irreg. nouns 287-291; of adjectives: first and second 298-311, third 312-317, first and third 318-333 ; of par-tic. 334-342 ; of adj. w. one. ending 343-345 ; of irreg. adj. 840-349; of the article 380-388 ; of pronouns 389-428; of numerals 375. See Contents, pp. x, xi.
Defend, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160; ap-vveiv nvi 1168.
Degree of difference, dat. of 1184.
Demanding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 1069.
Denies, names of Attic, in dat. 1197.
Demonstrative pronouns 409; syntax of 1004-1010; w article
|
439 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
439
9451; position of 974; distinctions of ovrot, SSt, {/tuns 1005 :
Diphthongs 7; improper 7, 10, 12 ; spurious 8, 27, 282; in contrac-
article asdemoustr. (Horn.) 935, j tion 37, 38 ; in crasis 43 ; elision
(Att.) 981-984 ; rel. as demons. 1023.
Demosthenes, language of, p. 4.
Denominatives 824 ; denoin. nouns 841-848 ; adjectives 851; verbs 861-867.
Denying, vbs. of, w. infln. and m1) 1615, 1551.
Dependent moods 446; tenses of 1271-1287.
Deponent verbs 443; principal parts of 463; passive and middle deponents 444.
Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and gen. 1118 ; w. two ace. 1069.
Desiderative verbs 868.
Desire, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1102.
Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102.
Determinative compounds 886.
Diaeresis, mark of ( " ) 9 ; in verse 1643 ; Bucolic 1669.
Dialects, p. 4 ; dialectic changes in letters 147-149 ; dial, forms of nouns 188, 204, 280 ; of adj. 322, 332, 347; of numerals 374; of the article 388 ; of pronouns 393-398, 403, 407, 413, 416*, 418'. 424, 428; of verbs in w 777-783 ; of contract vbs. 784-786 ; of vbs. in M' 787-792.
Digamma or Vau 3 ; as numeral 372, 384 ; omission of, seen in inflections 00, 91, 256, 265, 269. 530, 574, 001, 602; retained in Aeol. and Doric 91; seen in metre 1073-.
Dimeter 1646 ; anapaestic 1676 ; dactylic 16741; iambic 1665s; trochaic 1653, 1654.
Diminutives, suffixes of 814; all neut. 159«.
of (poet.) 51; augment of 518, 519.
Dipody 1646 ; iambic 16C5".
Direct object 892; of act. verb 1047. Direct discourse, question, and quotations 1475.
Disadvantage, dat. of 1165, 1170.
Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Displease, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. panic. 1580.
Disputing, vbs. of, w. causal gen. 1128.
Distich 1049; elegiac 1670.
Distinction, gen. of 1117.
Distrusting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1100 ; w. infiu. and /«? 1015.
Dividing, verbs of, w. two ace. 1076.
Dochmius and dochmiacs 1691.
Doing, verbs of, w. two ace. 1073.
Dorian Greeks, p. 3.
Doric dialect, p. 4 ; has a for Attic 7j 147 ; Doric future (also in Attic) 666.
Double consonants 18; make position 99l.
Double negatives 1360, 1361, 1016, 1617. See ou l< and (it) oi.
Doubtful vowels 5.
Dual 155; masc. forms used for fern. 303^388, 41U, 422 ; of verbs, 1st. pers. very rare, 650*; -tov and -17*01' for -r-qe and -a9i)v 5563.
Effect, accus. of 1055.
Elegiac pentameter and distich
1070. Elision 48-54; of diphthongs 51;
in compound words 64; vipL
|
440 |
440
ENGLISH IKDEX.
rpi, Sn, and dat. in i, etc., not elided 50; accent of elided word 120.
Ellipsis of verb w. &v 3313; of protasis 1414 ; of apodosis 14142, 1416, 1420.
Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1120.
Enclitics 140, 141; w. accent if emphatic 144; at end of compounds 146 ; successive enclitics 145.
Endings: case-endings of nouns 167; local 292-297; verbal 551-556 ; personal 552, 653, remarks on 556.
Endure, vbs. siguif. to, v. panic. 1580.
Exhort, vbs. siguif. to, w.dat. 1160.
Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 10972.
Envy, vbs. expr., w. causal gen. 1120; w.dat. 1100.
Epic dialect, p. 4.
Epicene nouns 158.
Ethical dative 1171.
Euphony of vowels 34-03 ; of consonants 70-95.
Eupolidean verse 1682T, 1644.
Euripides, language of, p. 4.
Exchange of quantity 33, 200, 265.
Exclamations, nom. iu 1045; voc. iu 1044 ; gen. in 1129 ; relatives in 1039.
Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160. Exhortations : see Commands. '
Expecting etc., vbs. of, w. fut., I pres., or aor. iufin. 128C. I
Extent, accus. of 1062 ; gen. denoting 1094'.
Falling and rising rhythms 1048. '
Fearing, verbs of, w. ^ and subj. |
or opt. 1378 ; sometimes w. fut. |
ind. 1379 ; w, pres. or past tense I
of indie. 1380. i
Feet (iu verse) 1620, 1627; ictus,
arsis, and thesis of 1621. Feminine nouns 156-159 ; form in
participles 842, 337; in 2 pf.
panic. (Horn.) 773, 774 ; feminine caesura 1669. Festivals, names of, in dat. of
time 1192. Fill, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and
gen. 1113. Final clauses 13621; w. subj. and
opt. 1365; w. subj. after past
tenses 1369; rarely w. fut. ind.
1366 ; v. &y or « 1307; w. past
tenses of indie. 1371; neg. ^
1364; final disting. from object
clauses 1363. Find, vbs. signif. to, w. panic
1682.
Finite moods 440. First aorist tense system 456;
form, of tense stem 069, 672. First passive tense system 456; formation of tense stems 707, 710. First perfect tense system 456;
formation of tense stem 698. Fiiaess, etc., verbal adj. denot.,
formation of 851. Forbidding, vbs. of, w. mi? md
infin. 1615, 1549, 1551. Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 1102;
w. panic. 1588. Formation of words 822-889: see
Contents, p. xiii, xiv. Friendliness, vbs. expr., w. dat.
1100. Fulness and want, vbs. expr., w.
gen. 1112, adject, expr. 1140.
See Fill.
Fulness, format, of adj. expr. 854. Future 447, 448 ; tense system 456,
662-668; of liquid verbs 663;
Attic fut. in u and -ovtxai 605;
Doric fut. C66, also Attic 066;
passive 710, 715; fut. mid. as
|
441 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
441
pass. 1248. Fut. indie, expressing permission or command 1265; rarely in final clauses 1360; regularly in object clauses ■with 07rws 1372; rarely with ju?j after verbs of fearing 1379; iu protasis 1391, 1400 ; not in rel. cond. 1435 ; in rel. clauses expressing purpose 1442 ; with i
Future perfect 447, 448; in perf. mid. tense system 456; tense stem formed 703 ; active form in a few vbs. 705; gen. periphrastic 706 ; meaning of 704, 12507; as emph. fut. 1260 ; infin. 1283 ; panic. 1284.
Gender 156; natural and grammatical 157 ; grammat. design, by article 157 ; coinmou and epicene 1S8; general rules 159; gen. of 1st decl. 168, of 2d decl. 189, 194, of 3d decl. 280-285.
General, disting. from particular suppositions 1384 ; forms of 1380, 1387 ; w. subj. and opt. 1393, 1431 ; w. indie. 1395, 1432; in Latiu 1388.
Genitive case lfiO, Ift2-lfi7 ; nf 1st decl. 169, 170; of 2d decl. 190, 191 ; of 3d decl. 207. Syntax 1083, 1084-1156 : see Contents, p. xv, xvi ; gen. absol. 1152, 1508 ; gen. of infin. w. toO 1546-1549.
Gentile nouns, suffixes of 848.
Glycouic verses 1082*.
Gnomic tenses 1291-1295 ; present
1291 ; aorist 1292, 1293 ; as primary tense 1268, 1394 ; w. jro-Xdh'ts, ^6tj, ovttio, etc. 1293; perfect 1295.
Grave accent 107, 108, for acute in oxyiones 115.
Greece, naodern language of, p. 5.
Greek language, history of and relations to other languages, pp. 5,6.
Greeks, why so called, p. 3.
Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. geu. 1102 ;
w. ace. and gen. 1103 ; w. panic.
1588. Hellenes and their divisions, p. 3,
of Homer, p. 3.
Hellenistic Greek of New Testament and Septuagint, p. 6. Herodotus, dialect of, p. 4. Heroic hexameter 1669. Heterogeneous nouns 288. Hiatus, how avoided 34 ; allowed
at end of verse 1038s. Hindrance, vbs. of, w. /iij and
infin. etc. 1549-1552. Hippocrates, dialect of, p. 4. Historic present 1252, 1208. Historical (or secondary) tenses:
see Secondary.
Hit, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099. Homer, dialect of, p. 4 ; verse of
1009 ; books of, numbered by
letters 385^ Hellenes of, p. 3. Hoping, etc., vbs. of, w. fut.. pres.,
ov am-, infiu. 1286. | Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160. Hvpercatalectic verse 1641.
Iambus 1627'. Iambic rhythms 1657-1607 ; tragic and comic iambic trimeter 1658-1662 ; iambic systems 1066.
Imperative 44d; pers. endings of 553 ; common form of 746-751 ;
|
442 |
442
ENGLISH INDEX.
of 752-750; aor. pass. 757; perf. rare 748, 758, 1274. In commands etc. 1324, 1842 ; in prohib. w. nv (pres.) 1340; w. «7f,
Imperfect tense 447 ; secondary 448 ; in present tense system 406; augment of 513, 515; personal endings 552; inflection of: common form 020, /u-fonn 627; iterat. endings axoy and
Impersonal verbs 898, 12402 ; par-tic, of, in accus. abs. 1509 ; im-pers. verbal in -t4ov 1597.
Imploring, vbs. of, w. gen. U013.
Improper diphthongs 7. |
Inceptive class of verbs (VI.) C13.
Inclination, formation of adj. de-! noting 849*. I
Indeclinable nouns 290. I
Indefinite pronouns 415, 416, 425 ; pronominal adj. 429, 430; adverbs 430 ; syntax of 1016-1018.
Indicative 445 ; personal endings 552 ; thematic vowel 561 ; formation of 504, 565 (see under special Tenses); tenses of 448, 449, 1250-1260, primary and secondary (or historical) 1267-1269. General use of 1318 ; potential v. iv 1336-1340; inde.p. w. fi-i; or ht; oi 1351, fut. w.
Sirws and Sirut mi) 1352; w. ov fir) (fut.) 1360,1361; in final clauses: rarely fut. 1300, second, tenses 1371 ; in obj. cl. w. Srut (fut.) 1372; w. iiri after vbs. of fearing, rarely fut. 1379, pres. and past 1380; in protasis: pres. and past tenses 1390, in gen. sup-pos. for subj. 1395, future 1405, 1391, second, tenses in supp. contr. to fact 1397; in cond. r«l. and temp, clauses 1430, 1433, by assimilation 1440; second, tenses w. iv 1304, lojj, 1397 ; in wishes (second, tenses) 1511; in causal sent. 1505; in rel. sent, of purpose (fut.) 1442; fut. w. i
Indirect compounds (verbs) 882'2,
• 543. Indirect object of verb 892, 1157, 1158. Indirect Discourse 1475-1503: see Contents, pp. xxi., xxii. Indir. quotations and questions 1470-1479. Indir. reflexives 987, 988.
Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1120.
Infinitive 445 ; endings 554 ; formation of 759-709 ; dial, forms of 782, 784s, 785«, 79). Syntax 1516-1656: see Contents, pp. xxii., xxiii. Tenses of, not in iiiJIr. (Use. 1271, 1272. 1073, 1275 ; in indir. disc. 1280-1286, 1494 ; distinction of the two uses 1495; impf. and plpf. suppl. by pres. and pf. 1494, 12851; w. &p 1308, 1494 ; w. MAXw 1254 ; w. tZ
|
443 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
443
Inflection 151; of verbs, two forms 503; simple form 564, common form 565.
Instrument, dat. of 1181; suffixes denoting 838.
Intensive pronoun 391, 9891; w. dat. of accompaniment 1191.
Intention, panic, expr. 1563*.
Interchange of vowels 31, 32; of quantity 33, 200, 2(35.
Interrogative pronoun 415, 410, pron. aulj. 429, 430, pron. adv. 430; syntax of 1011-1014. In-terr. sentences 1000-1606; subjunctive in 1358, 1359, 1490. :
Intransitive verbs 893, 1231; cog- ; nate object of 1051 ; verbs both trans, and intrans. 1232.
Inverted assimilation of relatives 1035.
Ionic Greeks, p. 3.
Ionic race and dialect, pp. S, 4. Ionic alphabet 27. Ionic ij for Attic a 147 ; «i and ov for e and I o, -n'i for a 148 ; omits contraction and v movable 149. Ionic feet 1627*; rhythms 1688.
Iota class of verbs (IV.) &79.
Iota subscript 10.
Irregular nouns 287-291; adjectives 346-349; comparison 301-364 ; verbs 021, 034.
Italy, Dorians of. p. 3.
Iterative iinperf. and aorist w. 4» 1290. Iterative forms in o-jcoc, ttKinriv (Ion.) 1298, 778, w. &v 1298.
Ithyphallic verse 1653'.
Know, vbs. signif. to, w. partic.
1588. Koppa 3 ; as numeral 372, 384.
Labials 16; labial mutes 21, 22; euphonic changes of 71-75;
euph. ch. of v before 78; labial verb stems 460, in pcrf. mid. 490i. l
Lead, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1109; w. dat. (Horn.) 1164.
Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. ace. and gen. 1103 ; w. partic. 1588.
Lengthening of vowels 29; compensative 30.
Letters 1; names of 1,4 ; used for numbers 384, 385.
Likeness, dat. of 1175; abridged expr. w. adj. of 1178.
Linguals 10 ; lingual mutes 22; euphon. changes of 71-74; v w. ling, dropped bef. a 79; ling, verb stems 400, 490s.
Liquids 20 ; v before 78* ; w. i (J) in stems 844"6; vowel bef. mute and liquid 100-102. Liquid verb stems 400, 692; in perf. mid. 49O'-«; fut. of 603; aorist of 672 ; change of « to o in mono-syll. 645.
Local endings 292-297.
Locative case 296, 1042, 1157.
Logaoedic rhythms 1079-1683.
Long vowels 5, 98-103; how augmented 510.
Make, vbs. signif. to, w. two ace.
1077; w. ace. and gen. 1095, in , pass. w. gen. 1094', 1096. Manner, dative of 1181, w. com-
par. 1184 ; partic. of 1563s. Masculine nouns 159. See Gender. Material, adj. denoting 852; gen.
of 1085*. Means, dative of 1181 ; partic. of
15633; suffixes denoting 838,
839.
Measure, gen. of 10856. Metathesis 64, 60, 636, 649. Metre 1022; related to rhythm
1623.
|
444 |
444
ENGLISH INDEX.
Mi-forms 408, 500, 601; enumeration of 793-804.
Middle mutes 21; not doubled 682.
Middle voice 4421, 1242; endings j of 552-560 ; three uses of 1242 ; in causative sense 1245 ; pecul- j iar meaning of fut. in pass. ' sense 1248. I
Miss, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099. [
Mixed cliiss of verbs (VIII.) 621; mixed forms of conditional sentence 1421 ; mixed aor. 7778.
Modern Greek, p. 5.
Molossus 1027*.
Monoineter 1046.
Moods 445; finite 440 ; dependent i 446 ; general uses of 1317-1324 ; i constructions of (I.-X.) 1320, j 1327-1515. See Contents, pp. j xviii.-xxii. I
Movable consonants 60-63.
Mutes 19, 21, 22 ; smooth, middle, and rough 21; co-ordinate and j cognate 21-23 ; euphonic changes of 71-77; mutes before other mutes 71-73; bef. a- 74; bef. » 75-77; vowel bef. mute and i liquid 100-102; mute verb stems 460, 401, perf. mid. of 4901'3.
Name or call, vbs. signif. to, *v. two accus. 1077, w. elmi 1079 ; w. ace. and gen. 1095; in pass, w. gen. 10941, 1090. j
Nasals 17, 20.
Nature, vowel long or short by '■ 98, 100-102. ]
Negatives 1007-1610: see Ov and I M
Neglect, vbs. signif., w. gen. 1102. !
Neuter gender 150: see Gender. | Neuter plur. w. sing verb 899* ; '■ neut. preJ. adj. 925 ; nnut. sing. | of adj. w. art. 933, 934 ; neut. I adj. as cognate accus. 1064; i
neut. accus. of adj. as adverb 367; neut. panic, of iinpers. vbs. in accus. absol. 1569; verbal in riov 1597.
New Testament, Greek of, p. 5.
Nominative case 160, 162; singular of 3d decl. formed 200-213 ; subj. uom. 894, 899, 1043; pred. nom. 907, w. infiu. 927 ; nom. in exclam. like voc. 1045; in appos. w. sentence 915; infin. as nom. 1517. Plur. nom. w. sing, verb, gen. neut. 899^ rarely masc. or fern. 905. Sing. coll. noun w. plur. verb 900.
Nouns 104-291; name includes only substantives 106. See Contents, p. x.
Number 165, 452; of adject., peculiarities in agreement 920-925.
Numerals 372-385.
Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Object, defined 892; direct and indirect 892, 1040; direct obj. (accus.) 1047, as.subj. of pass. 1234; internal obj. (cognate) 1051; indirect obj. (dat.) 1167, 1158-1104; gen. as object of verb 1083, of noun 10853, of adject. 1139-1146; double obj. ace. 1009-1082. Object of motion, by accus. w. prepos. 1221, by accus. alone (poetic) 1005.
Object clauses w. Situs and fut. judio. 1372; vi. subj. and opt. 1374, 1372, in Horn. 1377.
Object genitive 1085s.
Objective compounds 884 ; trans, and intrans., accent of 885.
Oblique cases 163.
Omission of augment and redupl. 647-550 ; of subj. nom. 890, 897 ; of subj. of into. 99b*-'; of antecedent of rel. 1026; of im in
|
445 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
445
oaths 1008; of Hv w. opt. 1332 ; of protasis 1414 ; of apodosis 1416, 1420. See Ellipsis.
Open vowels 6 ; in contraction 35.
Optative 445; pers. endings 552, 730 ; mood suffix 502. 730 ; formation of 730-745; Aeolic forms in Attic aor. act. 732, 781'; in contract vbs. (pres. act.) 737; peculiar Mi-forms 739-742, 745 ; of verbs in vvfu 743 ; Ion. oto for yro 777s ; Horn, oicrfla for ois 781'2; periphrasis in perf. 733; reg. perf. in few verbs 733, 734 ; 2 pf. in oiTjy 735. Tenses : not in indir. disc, pres. and aor. 1271, 1272 ; perf. 1273; never fut. 1287; in indir. disc. 1280, pres. as impf. 1488 ; future, only in indir. disc. 1287, or in obj. cl. w. 8wm 1372, anil rarely in rel. cl. of purpose 1444 ; w. effect of primary or second, tense 1270-.
General uses 1322, 1323; potential opt. w. 4.. 1327-1334 ; in final cl. 1365, in obj. cl. w. 6'ttws, fut. 1372 ; pres. or aor. 1374, in Horn. 1377; w. Mi) after vbs. of fearing 1378; in protasis 1387, 13932, 1408, sometimes w. d kc (Horn.) 1411; in apod. w. S.v or ni 1408; in cond. rel. clauses 1431s, 1430, by assimil. 1430; in rel. cl. of purpose (chiefly Horn.) 1443 ; w. ?us, etc., until, 14(15; w. -rph 1470, 1471*; in indir. discourse, after past tenses, by change from subj. or indie. 1481*, 1487, 14972, 1502.
Oratio obliqua: see Indirect Discourse.
Ordinal numerals, 372.
Overlook, vbs. signif. to, w. panic. 1585.
Oxytones 1101.
Paeons 16273; in Cretic rhythms 1680.
Palatals 16; as mutes 22; euphonic changes of 71-77 ; v before 78 ; pal. verb stems 400, in perf. mid. 490-.
Paroemiac verse 1076s, 1677.
Paroxytone 110'.
Participle 445 ; formation of 770-775; declension of 301, 334-342; w. noun, in oks of vbs. in m' 504^, 335, in uv of vbs. in w 5606, 335 ; Aeol. forms in o«, cuo-a, oiira 783 ; of iu-ionn 342, 508, 773,774. 702; accent of 134, 338. Tenses 12S8; pres. for impf. 1280; aor. not past 1200, v. XaxSdwj, Ti7^df«i,
Three uses of participle lu'>7 : attributive 1550-1502, circumstantial 1563-1577, supplementary 1578-1593. See Contents, p. xxiii.
Particular and general suppositions distinguished 1384.
Partitive genitive 1O857, 1088, 10947. Partitive apposition 014.
Passive voice 442'-, 1233, personal endings of 652-554 ; aor. pass.
|
446 |
446
ENGLISH INDEX.
•w. inflection of act. 5047. Use of 1233-1241; subject of 1234, 12401; retains one object from active constr. 1239; impersonal pass, constr. 12402, 1241, 897« ; w. infin. as subj. 15222; pass, of both act. and mid. 1247.
Patronymics, suffixes of 840, 847.
Pause in verse 1040; caesura 16422; diaeresis 1643.
Pentameter, elegiac 1070, 1671.
Penthemim (2J feet) 1070.
Penult 90.
Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102 ; w. partic. 1582, 1588.
Perfect teuse 447, primary 448 ; personal endings 552; reduplication 520-526; Att. redupl. 529; compound forms in subj. and opt. 720, 721, 733, in 3d pers. pi. mid. 480'-.
First l'erfect tense-system 450, formation of 082 ; orig. from vowel steins only G80 ; modified vowel of stem 084.
Second Perf. tense-system 450, formation of 687, modii. vowel of stem 088; Horn. sec. perfects 691 ; aspirated sec. perf. 692, not iu Horn. 094 ; 2 perf. of Reform 508, 097, 804, partic. in aus or eus 804, 773.
Perf. mid. tense-system 456, formation of stem 098, modif. vowel of stem 699;
stem 040, 702- ; arai iu 3 pers. plur. (Ion.) 701, 7773.
Syntax: perf. indie. 1250s, as pres. 1203, as vivid future 1204 ; subj., opt., and infin. (not in ind. disc.) 1273 ; infiu. expr. decision or permanence 1275; im-perat. (gen. 3 sing, pass.) 1274 ; opt. and iafin.. in ind. disc. 1280; partic. 1288.
Periphrastic forms: of perf., indie. 48G2, subj. 720, 721, opt. 733, imper. 751; of fut. w. /iAXw 1254 ; of fut. perf. 706.
Perispomena HO2.
Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 1580.
Person of verb 453 ; agreement w. subj. in 899; subj. of first or second pers. omitted 896, tbird person 897 ; pers. of rel. prou. 1020. Personal endings of verb 552, 553.
Personal pronoun 389-398; stems of 390 ; omitted as subject 896, 897 ; of third pers. in Attic 987, in Horn, and Hdt. 988; substituted for rel. 1040.
Pherecratic verses 16822-8.
Pity, vbs. expr., w. causal gen. 1126.
Place, suffixes denoting 843; adverbs of 292-297, 436, w. gen. 1148; accus. of (whither) 1005; gen. of (within whieh) 1137; dat. of (where) 1198, 1197.
Plato, language of, p. 4.
Please, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Pleased, vbs. signif. to be, w. partic. 1580.
Pluperfect tense 447, 448 ; in perfect tense-systems 456, 457' ; personal endings 552; redupl. and augment 627, Att. redupl. 529, 533; compound form w. i5
|
447 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
447
in infin. by peri. 12851, by perf. w. tv 1308.
Plural 165, 452; neut. w. sing, verb 899-; verb w. sing, collect, noun 900; w. several subjects connected by and 901; adj. or relat. w. several sing, nouns 924, 1021 ; plur. antec. of «crns 102K
Position, vowels long by 99.
Possession, gen. of 10851, 10941, 1143; dat. of 1173.
Possessive pronouns 400-408, 998 ; w. article 9401, 900, 1002. Possessive compounds 888. Our own, your own, etc. 1003.
Potential opt. w. d» 1327-1334, ■without iv 1332, 1333; pot. indie, w. &v 1335-1341.
Predicate 890; pred. noun and adj. w. verbs 907, 918, referring to omitted subject of infin. 927-929 ; noun without article 956; pred. adject. 919, position of w. art. 071; pred. accus. w. obj. ace. 1077, 1078 ; infin. as pred. nom. 1517.
Prepositions, w. gen., dat., and accus. 1201 ; accent when elided 120 ; anastrophe 116 ; tmesis 12222; augment of comp. verbs 540-544; prepos. as adv. 1199, 12221 ; in comp. w. gen., dat., or ace. 1227, 1132, 1179; omitted w. rel. 1025 ; w. rel. by assimil. 1032 ; w. iiifin. and article 1540.
Present, t.trnse 447 ; primary 44ft ; personal endings 552 ; tense-system 456 ; stem 450, 567, formation of, eight classes of vbs. 569-C22: see Classes. Inflection of pr. indie, common form 623, M'-iorm 627 ; redupl. 652 ; contracted 492, in opt. 737 ; im-perat. 746, of M'-form 752-754; infin. 759, 765-769 ; partic. 770,
775, decl. of 334-341. Syntax of pres. indie. 1260'; historic 1252, 1^68 ; gnomic 1253', 1291 : as vivid fut. 1204 ; of attempt (conative) 1255; of tiku and or^oMoi as perf. 1256; of elm as fut. 1257 ; w. TrdXot etc. 1258; never w. iv or k{ 1232. In dep. moods: not in indir. disc. 1271, how disting. from aor. 1272, from perf. 1273, 1275; in indir. disc. (opt. and infin.) 1280, as impf. infin. and opt. 1285; infin. w. vbs. of hoping etc. 1286; par-tic. 1288, as impf. part. 1289. See Indicative, Subjunctive, etc.
Price, genitive of 1133.
Primary or principal tenses 448, 1267 ; how far distinguished in dependent moods 1270.
Primitive words 823, nouns 832-840, adjectives 849.
Principal pans of verbs 402, of deponents 403.
Proclitics 136, 137 ; with accent 138,139 ; before an enclitic 143«.
Prohibitions w. ^ 1346 ; w. oi n^ 1361. *
Promising, verbs of, w. fut., pres., or aor. infin. 1286.
Pronominal adj. and adv. 429^140.
Pronouns 389-428; synt. 985-1041: see Contents, pp. xi., xiv., xv. Some enclitic 141 '-2, w. accent retained 1448-4. See Personal, Relative, etc.
Pronunciation, probable ancient 28. See Preface.
Proparaxytones 1101.
Properispomena 1102.
Prosecute, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. and aecus. 1121.
Protasis 1381; forms of 1387; expr. in partic, adv., etc. 1413 ; omitted 1414, 1328, 1338.
|
448 |
448
ENGLISH INDEX.
Prove, vbs. siguif. to, w. partic.
1588.
Punctuation marks 150. Pure verbs 461. Purpose: expr. by final clause
13021. i,y rei. cj. w_ fut juciic
1442, in Horn, by subj. 1443, implied in cl. w. *ws, nplv, 14G7, 14712; by infill. 1532; by i
Quality, nouns denoting 842.
Quantity of syllables 98-104; shown by accent 1043; interchange of 33; relation of to rhythm 1022-1020.
Questions, direct and indirect disting. 1475 ; direct HSOO-1604, of appeal w. subj. 1308; indirect 1600, w. iudic. or opt. 1487, v. subj. or opt. 1490.
Recessive accent 110*.
Ktciprocal pronoun 404 ; reflexive used for 996.
Reduplication of perf. stem 520, 521,523, 520, 537, in compounds 040; rarely omitted 550 ; of 2 aor. (Horn.) 034; of pres. stem 530, 601, 652, of vbs. in ^ 794-1; in plpf. 527; Attic, in pf. 529, in 2 a..ir. 5.1,-).
Reflexive pronouns 401, 993, 994 ; used for reciprocal 99(3; 3d pers. for 1st or 2d 995 ; indirect reflexives 987, 988, 902.
Relation, adject, denoting 850, 851' ; dat. of 1172.
KeJative pronouns 421-427, Homeric, forms 428 ; pronom. adj. 429, 430, adverbs 436 ; relation to antecedent 2029; aiitee. cm.
1026 ; assimilation of rcl. to case of autec. 1031, of antec. to case of rel. 1035; assim. in rel. adv. 1034 ; attraction of antec. 1037, joined w. assim. 1038 ; rel. not repeated in new case 1040; rel. as demonstr. 1023 ; in exclam. 1039. Kelative and temporal sentences 1425-1474 : see Contents, p. xxi.
Release, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1117.
Remember, vbs. siguif. to, w. gen. 1102, w. partic. 1588.
Reminding, vbs. of, w. two ace. 1009, w. ace. and gen. 1100.
Remove, vbs. siguif. to, w. gen. 1117.
Repent, vbs. siguif. to, w. partic. 1580.
Represent, vbs. siguif. to, v. par-tic. 1582.
Reproach, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160.
Resemblance, words implying, w. dat. 1175.
Respect, dative of 1172.
Restrain, vbs. siguif. to, w. gen. 1117.
Result, nouns denot. 837 ; expr. by utrre w. infin. and indie. 1449-1451.
Revenge, verbs expr., w. causal gen. 1126.
Rhythm and metre, how related 1621-1023; rising and falling rhythms 1048. See Anapaestic, Dactylic, Iambic, etc.
Rhythmical series 1(537.
Risiug and falling rhythms 1648. .
Romaic language, p. 5.
Root and stem defined 152, 153.
Rough breathing 11-15.
Hough mutes 21, never doubled 68i.
Rule, vbs. siguif. to, w. gen. 1109; w. dat. (Horn.) 1104.
|
449 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
449
Sampi, obsolete letter 3; as numeral AVZ, 384.
Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Saying, verbs of, w. two accus. 107o, constr. iu indirect discourse 1523.
Second aorist, perfect, etc., 449.
Second aorist tense-system 4jG ; stem (375-681.
Second passive tense-system 460 ; stems 712-716.
Second perfect tense-system 45G ; stems 087-697.
Secondary (or historical) tenses 448,1267; how far distinguished in depend, moods 1270.
See, vbs, signif. to, w. panic, (ind. disc.) 1588, (not in ind. disc.) 1582, 1583.
Semivowels 20.
Sentence 800.
Separation, ge.n. of 1117, 1141.
Septuagint version of Old Testament, p. 5.
Serving, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160.
Sharing, vbs. of, w. geu. 1007-.
Short vowels 5, 100, 102, 103 ; syllables, time of 162G.
Show, vbs. signif. to, w. partic. 1588.
Sibilant (it) 20.
Sicily, Dorians in, p. 3.
Similes (Homeric), aor. in 1294.
Simple and Compound Words 822.
Singular ninnljur I.V), 4.r>2 ; sine, vb. w. neut. pi. subj. 899-, rarely w. masc. or fem. pi. subj. 905, 1020 ; several sing, nouns w. pi. i adj. 024.
Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102 ; «fw w. two gen. 1107.
Smooth breathing 11, 12. Smooth mutes 21.
Sonants and surds 24.
Sophocles, language of, p. 4. Source, gen. of 1130.
Space, extern of, w. ace. 1062. Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102. Specification, accus. of 1058. Spirants 20. Spondee 16272; for anapaest 1675 ;
for dactyl 1°G8 ; f°r iambus or
trochee 1650, 1057. Spondaic
hexameter verse 1669. Spurious diphthongs « and ov 8;
how written and sounded 27,
282.
Stein and root 152, 153. Strong and weak stems 31, 572-575, 642. Verb stem 458, 459. Vowel and conson- stems, mute and liquid stems, etc., 400, 401. Tense stems 456. Present stem: see Present.
Strong and wcak towels interchanged 31.
Subject 890; of finite verb 894, omitted 890. 807; of infm. 895», omitted 89&3; sentence as subject 898 ; agreem. of w. finite vb. 809 ; of passive 1233, 1234.
Subjective genitive 10852.
Subjunctive *i:>'> P«rs. endings 552, 718; l°n£ thematic vowel "/„- 5002, "18; formation of 719-729 ; peculiar ^i-forms 723-727 ; of vbs. in «'*" 728; Ionic forms 780 short them, vowel in Horn. 7801 vmcontracted forms 7802, 7881, Horn- forms in 2 aor. act. 788- • peviplnabis iu pcrf. 720, 721, re^. Perf- forms rare 720, 722 Tenses •. pros, and aor. 1271, 1272; perf. 127:1.
General uses 1320, 1021 ; in exhortations 1344; in prohibitions (aor.) 1340 ; w. rf, oxpr. fear or anxiety (Horn.) 134« ; w. ii-q or nil oi in cautious asser-
|
450 |
450
ENGLISH INDEX.
tions or negations 1350; rarely indep. w. 6vw nv 1354 ; in Horn, like fut. indie. 1355, w. a^ or 4v 135(5; in questions of appeal 1358, retained in indir. questions 1490; w. oi) /ii), as emph. fut. 1300, sometimes in prohib. 1361; in final clauses 13fi5, also after past tenses 1369, w. S.v or «.i 1307 ; in object cl. w. 6Vws 1374, w. tv 1370, in Horn. w. 6Vus or u; 1377; w. /xt) after vbs. of fearing 1378; in protasis w. 4&v etc. 1382, 1387, 1303', 1403, w. ei (in poetry) wit.liout &v or k( 1390, 1400; in cond. rcl. cl. 1431, 1434, by assim. 1439; in rel. cl. of purpose (Horn.) 1443 ; w. fus etc. until, 1405, without lie 1400 ; w. irplv 1470, 14712; in indir. discourse chanced to opt. .after past tenses 1481-, 14972, 1502.
Subscript, iota 10.
Substantive 100: see Noun.
Suffixes 820; tense 501; optative suffix 562, 730.
Superlative degree 350, 357.
Suppositions, general and particular distinguished 1384.
Surds and sonants 24.
Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1120.
Swearing, particles of, w. accus. 1000.
Syllaba anceps at end of verse 1(136, 10382.
Syllabic augment Oil1, 013; of plpf. 527 ; before vowel 637-5."9 ; omitted 547, 649.
Syllables 00 ; division of 97 ; quantity of 98-10.i; long and short in verse 1026.
Syncope 05, GO. 67 ; syncopated nouns 273-279, verb steins 050. Syncope in verse 1032.
Synecdoche (or specification), ace. of 1059.
Synizesis 47.
Systems, tense 455, 456. In verse (anapaestic, trochaic, and iambic) 1654, 1606, 1077.
Taking hold, vbs. eignif., w. gen. 1099, w. ace. and pen. 1100.
Taste, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102.
Tau-class of verbs (III.) 570.
Teaching, vbs. of w. two accus. 1069, 1070.
Temporal augment 5112, 515, 533 ; of dipli thongs 518, 519; omission of 547-549. Temporal sentences : see Relative.
tense stems 455-458 ; simple and complex 557, 560; simple 558; complex 559 ; formation of 500-622, 060-716; table of 717.
Tense suffixes 501.
Tense systems 450, 450, 409. See Present, Future, etc.
Tenses 447 ; relations of 1249; primary (or principal) and secondary (or historical) 448, 1267 ; of indie. 1260-1206 ; of depend, moods 1271-1287 ; of part.ic. 1288-1290; gnomic 1291-1295; iterative 1290-1298. See Present., Imperfect, etc.
Tetrameter 1040; trochaic 1051, lame (Hipponactean) 1052 ; iambic 1004 ; dactylic 1674^; anapaestic 1676*.
Thematic vowel (%-) 561'; long ("/,-) in subj. 5G12.
Thesis 1021 ; not Greek 8(cnt 1621 (foot note).
Threats, vbs. expressing, w. dat. 1160.
Thueydides, language of, p. 4.
Time, adj. denoting 853 ; accus. of (extent) 1002 ; gen. of (with-
|
451 |
ENGLISH INDEX.
451
in which) 1136; dat. of 1192-1195; expr. by panic. 1503'.
Tmesis 1222*, 1223.
Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 1658-1062.
Transitive verbs 893, 1232.
Trial of, vbs. siguif. to make, w. gen. 1099.
Tribrach 16271; for trochee or iambus 1030, 1031, 1050, 1057.
Trimeter 1640; iambic (acat.) 1058-1061, in English 1002, lame (Hipponactp.au) 1003; trochaic 1053-; dactylic 1C742.
Tripody 1047; trochaic 10531-2; iambic 16652.
Trochee 16271. Trochaic rhythms 1650-1056; systems 1054.
Trust, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160.
Unclothe, verbs signif. to, w. two
ace. 1009. Understand, vbs. signif. to, w. ace.
1104. Union e'c., words implying, w.
dat. 1175.
Value, genitive of 1133.
Vau 3 : see Digamma.
Verb stem 458; relation of to present stem 507, 5(!S.
Verbals (or Primitives) 825. Verbal nouns and adj. w. object, gen. 10853, 1139, 1140, w. object accus. 1050. Verbals in -tos and • TtoK 445, 770 ; in .t«oi and -rtnv 1694-1699.
Verbs, conjugation and formation of 441-821: see Contents, pp. xi.-xiii. Eight classes of 668: see Classes. Syntax of 1230-1599: see Contents, pp. xvii.-xxiv. Verbs in /u, two classes of 502.
i Verses 1020, 1638, 1045-1049; cat-
i alectic and acatalectic 1039.
I Vocative case 160, 161 ; sing, of 3
! decl. 219-223; in addresses 1044.
] Voices 441; uses of the 1230-1248.
I See Active, Middle, Passive.
: Vowels 5 ; open and close 6;
I changes of 29-33; euphony of
I 34 ; lengthening of 29, 30; interchange in quantity of 33. Vowel declension (1, 2) 165 (see 200).
I Vowel stems of verbs 400.
I
: Want, vbs. signif., w. gen. 1112-] 1110.
i Weak and strong vowels inter-i changed 31.
I Weary, vbs. signif. to be, with j panic 1580.
! Whole, gen. of (partitive) 1085;. Wishes, expr. by opt. 1507 ; by
second, tenses of indie. 1511 ;
by 6
Wondering, vbs. of, w. 1423 ; ■ sometimes w. on 1424. i
I Xenophon, language of, p. 4.
| Calvin College. Last modified on 08/11/06. Contact the CCEL. |  |